'(;;;'sk"!i;si'i,i;i'- ' 

Win '■• .■';; '■•> " 

^ i te '' . 



















(I^. 



r^^ 






,. '( » ' 



^u, 



v\\ 






li> • U, 



, .^' • ) , ' ^ 






'^)^ • , . 1 


















~» s5^!^-^ 



2 </^ \v- 






% ', 









rr 






C' 



^^^ ^^. 










,0'^ 



■0' 



s ^0 <r ■^ ;, \ . » 



/' 






NEW METHOD 



OF LEARNING WITH FACILITY THE 



GREEK TONGUE, 



Containing Rules for the 

Declensions, 1 Quantity. 

Conjugations, \ Accents, 

Resolution of verbs, \ Dialects, and 
Syntax, \ Poetic Licence. 

Digested in the clearest and concisest Order, 

With a variety of solid Remarks, necessary for the attaining 
a complete Knowledge of this Language, and for under- 
standing the Greek Writers. JlJ>^^\- 



'^ « -TRANSLATED FROM THE FRENCH OF THE 

^ ^MESSIEURS DE PORT-ROYAL, 

By T. NUGENT, LL.D. 



A NEW EDITION, 

CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED, 

LONDONt 
PRINTED FOR F. WINGRAVE, & J. COLLINGWOOD, ST.RANB. 

1817. 



^h 






Piinted by T. C. Hansard, Peterbro' Court, Fleet-street, London. 

' Il l > " i'i « " ■ ■ ■ 



THE 

TRANSLATOR'S 

P R E F A C E 



X O illustrate the grammatical art, was the favourite employ- 
ment of many of the greatest men of ancient and modern times ; 
but none deserves a higher commendation than the author of the 
following performance. This was the learned Claude Lancelot, 
member of the celebrated society of Port-Royal, in the neigh- 
bourhood of Paris. He was born in that capital in 1613, and edu- 
cated from the age of twelve in the seminary of St. Nicholas 
du Chard onnier, where he entered himself in the year 1627. 
After he had finished his studies, he retired to Port-Royal, and 
was employed in the education of youth. This province he exe- 
cuted with the utmost diligence, and made such improvements in 
the art of teaching, as to draw up those excellent methods of 
learning the Latin, Greek, Italian, anil Spanish tongues, gene- 
rally called The Port Royal Grammars, He is likewise said to 
have written the Jardin des racines GrecqiieSf and, last of all, The 
General and Rational Grammar, 

But of all our author's performances, the present work is ge- 
nerally reckoned to deserve the preference. The order and per- 
spicuity that shine through the whole, and the profound knowledge 
of the principles and analysis of the Greek language, are not to 
be equalled in any other writer. He had made an excellent use of 
the grammarians that went before him ; and by his method he far 
outstripped them all; This consists in drawing up his instruo 
tions in vulgar idiom, as more easy than Latin to young beginners ; 
in distinguishing necessary rules from others, by way of text and 
annotations ; in retrenching superfluities, by reducing the ten de- 
clensions of former grammarians to three, and the thirteen conju- 
gations to two ; in disposing the tenses in such a manner as to 
render it easier to ascend to the theme of the verb; in subjoining 
the dialects in their proper places ; in comprehending the resolu- 
tion of verbs within a few rules ; in rectifying and methodizing the 
rules of syntax, and observing similar constructions between the 

A 2 Latin 



iv TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. 

tatin and the Greek; and lastly, in treating the subject in a ra- 
tional and critical manner, so as not to proceed merely on the ground 
of authority, but to appeal likewise to the reason and judgment of 
the scholar. 

It is now about a dozen years since I undertook to translate 
this work, at the desire of several members of our two learned Uni- 
versities. The many editions of the original abroad, and the 
several extracts and abridgments of it in most parts of Europci 
were an encouragement to the undertaking. The success has an- 
sv/ered, and I may justly say, exceeded my expectation ; when I 
consider that the translation was printed at a time when I was in 
Germany, and incapable of superintending the press. It is 
true, a person known in the literary world, was employed for 
that purpose; but either through want of being acquainted 
with my hand-writing, or through disuse of Greek literature, or 
through some other cause which I cannot divine, he suffered 
the work to go abroad, too incorrect, I must own, for the use it 
was intended to serve. However, as the public have been so in- 
dulgent as to accept it with all its faults, I must return them my 
thanks; and I hope I have made some amends, by the extraordi- 
nary care bestowed upon this second edition ; the whole copy has 
been carefully revised and compared with the original ; the several 
errors have been corrected, and many passages altered and re- 
touched, especially the preface, which may be said to be a new 
translation. The quotations from the classics have been also com- 
pared and corrected in a multitude of places. A strict adherence 
to the original has been observed throughout; except the render- 
ing the rules into metre : for this not being an elementary intro- 
duction, but a complete system, if so I may express myself, of the 
Greek language, such puerile versification has been judged im- 
proper. 

With the revisal of this work I finish my translations of all the 
grammatical pieces of Messieurs de Port Royal ;* a task, I own, 
of more labour than reputation : yet if my labour has been of 
service to our British youth ; and if in this toilsome province, I 
may be also said to have deserved well of this most useful art, my 
ambition is satisfied. 

* These are all printed for Wingrave and CoJlingwood in the Strand. 



PREFACE, 



Concerning the Restoration of Greek Learn- 
ing in Europe, and those who contributed 
most thereto : 

With some General Directions relating to the Method 
of Teaching and Learning 'properly the 
GREEK TONGUE;— and a Critical Account of 
the most celebrated Authors, whether sacred or 
profanCj zoho have written in this Language, 



I. 0/ the Ancients that have treated of the Greek Tongue; and of 
the difference detiveen learning a Living and a Dead Language, 

A PRESENT thee at length, dear reader, with my New Method 
of learning Greek, which, though demanded hitherto with impor- 
tunity, still (as 1 u as desirous of rendering it at least as serviceable 
as that of the Latin tongue) I could hardly have been induced to 
publish so soon, if the repeated entreaties of my friends had not 
obliged me to it. The arduousness of the undertaking, and the 
consciousness of my incapacity, would have deterred me even from 
attempting it, had 1 not been engaged by superior authority. I 
should have been entirely silent, in order to make room for so 
manj' learned men, who have been, and are still employed on the 
same subject : but I was persuaded, that this work, though inferior 
in merit to several others, would be perhaps attended v/ith some 
utility, as it is digested in a method entirely new, and has been al- 
lowed by some gentlemen, who have used it vyithin these few years, 
to have been of very great service to them. 

The Greek language has been always in such high repute, that 
there never have been wanting men of abilities, vvho have employed 
their time and study in illustrating it. This advantage it has above 
all others, that there is not one, which haa been so variously and 
copiously treated on, having had masters who taught it regularly, 
^nd wrote grammars on it, a considerable time before the Hebrew, 

which 



VI PREFACE. 

which is, notwithstanding, the most ancient of all languages, and 
from whence the Greek itself derives its origin. Suidas has trans- 
mitted to us a very honourable character of several of those 
authors, the greatest part of whose writings has perished, through 
the injuries of time. Among those that have come down to us, we 
may reckon particularly Apollonius of Alexandria, surnamed the 
Difficult, who flourished under Marcus Aurelius, about fifteen hun- 
dred years ago, and Herodian his son,* supposed to be the very 
same whose history js extant. To these we may add Tryphon, 
who is thought to be the person, that lived in the reign of Augus- 
tus ; as also Theodosius, Dionysius, Cheroboscus, and some others. 
. But notwithstanding that those authors are valuable for their 
erudition, and considered as streams that flow by so much the 
purer, as they were nearer to the fountain-head ; having written at 
a time when the language subsisted in its full vigour : still, we may 
venture to affirm, that they are defective in several points, with re- 
gard to order and method. There is a very wide difference be- 
tween the manner of handling a living, and that of teaching a dead 
language: and never are grammars less perfect, than when the 
language is most so ; because, in this case, use supplies every de- 
ficiency of art. 

Thus we see, that the Romans had no better method of per- 
fecting themselves in this language, than that of sending their 
children to study at Athens, in order to learn it there, in its full 
purity : a practice which still obtained long after the ruin of their 
republic. But no sooner was the imperial seat transferred to Con- 
stantinople, than the Greek tongue began considerably to decline 
from its purity, because of the mixture of Romans who flocked 
to that capital, and not only preserved all their own parti- 
cular names of offices and dignities, but even introduced several 
other words. At length, when through the inundation of Barba- 
rians, ignorance had spread itself over all Europe, without sparing 
even Greece, which was always considered as the seat of learning ; 
this language came to be so disfigured, as hardly to retain the 
least features, by which it could, be known to foreigners, or even 
to the Greeks themselves, among whom, though it be not quite 
extinct, yet the ruins are very imperfect. 

II, Restoration of the Greek Tongue in Europej and particularly in 
France and Italy, 

The fatal destruction of the eastern empire was attended with 
this advantage to us, that it forced the few men of letters in that 
celebrated monarchy, to fly for refuge into the west, where they 
contributed to the restoration of learning. 

History remarks, among others, Emanuel Chrysoloras, who 
having been sent into Europe by John Palaeologus, emperor of 
Constantinople, to implore the assistance of christian princes, and 
having discharged his embassy with great fidelity and diligence, 

settled 

* Gesiier in Bibl. 



PREFACE. Vll 

settled afterwards in Italy, and taught at Venice, Florence, Rome, 
and Pavia. He left behind him several very eminent pupils, such 
as Philelphus, Gregory of Tifernum, Leonard of Arezzo, Poggius, 
and others : at length he went to Constance, and died there, at the 
time of holding the council, which ended in the year 1418. 

Argyropylus of Constantinople held a professorship also at Flo- 
rence, some time after Chrysoloras,and was preceptor to Peter of Me- 
dicis, and to his son Laurence. Chalcondylas succeeded him ; but 
having been obliged to withdraw himself from the persecution of his 
enemy PoHtianus, he retired to Milan, whither he had been invited 
by Lewis Sforza, and was appointed public professor in that city. 

Gaza of Thessalonica came into Italy, after his country had been 
wrested from the Venetians, which happened in the year l^^^. 
He flourished at the same time with George of Trebisond, to whom 
Pope Eugene the fourth committed the direction of one of the 
colleges at Rome. And Gaza had a benefice in Calabria, where 
he resided the greatest part of his time. 

France, ever productive of men of genius, had, much about 
this time, the pleasure of seeing this language revived, after having 
lost all knowledge of it such a vast number of years; and for this she 
was indebted to several great men, who resorted thither to show 
their literature. Gregory, native of Tifernum in Italy, one of the 
disciples of Chrysoloras, was the first who paved the way. He 
repaired to Paris so early as the commencement of the reign of 
Lewis XL There he met with a favourable reception from the 
rector and the university, and was admitted a public professor. 
This kind treatment was the means of drawing thither, a short 
time after, Jerom of Sparta, who succeeded him, and had Reuch- 
linus or Capnion, and Budaeus for his auditors : Tranquiilus of 
Andronica came afterwards, and was the last of those who visited 
France in that king's reign. 

John Lascaris, possessed of all the qualities of a man illustrious 
for birth and abilities, left Italy likewise to reside in this kingdom. 
But this did not happen till after the death of Laurence of Medicis, 
who had entertained him very honourably, and employed him in 
collecting the famous library of Florence : for which purpose he 
made a voyage to Africa, and to the Levant, and enriched it with 
the scarcest manuscripts he could find. He was beloved by two of 
our kings, Charles VIH. and Lewis XII. : the latter employed him 
as agent, to treat with the Venetians. 

Under him, Budaeus perfected himself in this language to such a 
degree, as to be looked upon as the wonder of the age he lived in ; 
having cleared up the obscurest passages of all Greek antiquity. 
He was in very great favour vi^ith Francis I. who honoured him 
with the office of Master of Requests, at a time when there were 
only four : at his desire the same prince collected the royal library, 
which has been always considered as one of tlie first in Europe ; 
and he also founded the professorships for languages and the ma- 
thematics, so early as the year 1530, to which the rest have been 
added since. 

Then it was that the Greek tongue began to be esteemed and 

cultivated 



Vlil 1» R E F A C E. 

cultivated all- over Europe. The university of Paris, ever fertile 
of great men, was one of those that contributed mostly to this 
progress of Greek literature. It is she that gave the first encou- 
ragement to Jerom Alexander. After he had taught the Greek 
language for some time in her schools, she judged him wortny of 
the direction of one of her colleges : this made him known to^ 
Leo X. by whom he was sent nuntio into Germany; afterwards he 
was made bishop of Brindisi by Clement VII. and at length, Paul 
III. created him cardinal. It is she that trained up the Capnions, 
the Erasmus's, the Gesners, who diffused the rays of learning 
through Germany and the Netherlands. It is she that formed 
Budaeus and Henry Stephen, the chief promoters of Greek litera- 
ture; the first by his Commentaries, and the second by his The- 
saurus : from whence all those who afterwards treated on the same 
subject, have borrowed the best part of their stock. It is she; in 
fine, that in guise of an universal nursery, produced in former 
times, and still continues to produce men not less valuable for the 
knowledge of this tongue, than for their skill in all other arts 
and sciences. 



III. Of those >who hax>e written, on the Greek Grammar in these latter 
ages, whether in Greek or Latin* 

But to trace things ti little higher, and to return to the natives 
of Greece, whom I had quitted. 

Chrysoloras was the first that attempted to publish any abridg- 
ment of the Greek grammar in Italy, from whence this language 
had been exiled upwards of sevt n hundred years, as is attested 
by Leonardus Aretinus, his disciple, one of the most learned 
men of his time, and who has written his life. 

After him, Gaza obtained the applause of all the learned, by his 
grammar, which he divided into four books. But Chalchondylas 
finding him obscure and difficult,' endeavoured to lay down easier 
rules for beginners. 

And, finally, Constantine Lascaris having had the advantage of 
coming after theniy strove to render himself more copious and in- 
telligible in several things, restoring part of the ancient glory of 
Athens at Messina, where he was professor in the year 1470. 

Since that time, Europe has never been without writers on, this 
subject. Several, in imitation of the native Greeks, who have left 
us precepts on their own language, began to publish instructions 
also in Latin ; among whom the most esteemed are Urbanus, pre- 
ceptor of Leo X. and Caninius, professor in the university of Paris. 

Clenardus likewise acquired great reputation, by his small abridg- 
ment of grammar, which he published in Flanders in the year 
1536: but he had not time to revise it; for very soon after he' 
went to Spain, where he was preceptor to the king of Portugal's 
brother. From thence he crossed over into Barbary, to learn • 
Arabic, into which tongue he was desirous of translating the Scrip- 
ture, with a real christian view of protnoting the conversion of the 

Maho- 



PREFACE. IS. 

Mahometans : at length he returned to Spain, where he died, to- 
wards the year 154-2, 

But soon afler hirn succeeded Ramus, a man in whom the uni- 
versity of Paris may really glory ; since he is considered in great 
measure as the restorer of all human science. He endeavoured^ 
therefore, to illustrate this as he had done all other arts ; and pur- 
suant to this design, he wrote his grammar, which was published 
at i'aris in the year 1557, and afterwards in Germany, where 
it was immediately embraced by almost every school ; whilst his 
enemies endeavoured to deer}' him at Paris, and at last murdered 
him in the year 1572. We find that several learned men have 
pursued his method since, as, among others, Henry Cranzius and 
Sylburgius ; to whom we may join Alstedius and Sanctius, though 
they have turned a little out of the path that had been beaten by 
their predecessors. 

Justly may we therefore say, that if Ramus did not make a full 
discovery of the right method of teaching this and other arts, he 
was at least one of the first that began the inquiry, and that excited 
others by his example : insomuch, that the glory is entirely due to 
the university of Paris, the parent of so celebrated a genius. 

It is to her I consecrate these poor endeavours, from whence if 
any utility may chance to arise, it will be all owing to Ahna matei\ 
For having made a declaration of advancing nothing of my own 
head, but only of collecting such observations, whether ancient or 
modern, as 1 thought most curious, I may acknowledge myself 
chiefly indebted to Caninius, who was bred at this university, and 
to Sylburgius and Sanctius, whom we must consider as the discir 
pies of Ramus. 

Not but that I have also made a proper use of others, and 
particularly of Vossius. But as the greatest part of what he has 
added to Clenardus, in order to form the grammar which goes 
by his name, is almost intirely borrowed from Sylburgius and Ca- 
ninius, I should rob those two learned men of their due praise, 
did I not bear witness to their ability, and acknowledge the assist- 
ance they have afforded me. Some help I have likewise received 
from Crucius, Tschonder, Gualtper, Surcin, Enoc, Gretser, Go- 
lius, Huldric, Alstedius, and several others: not to mention the 
great etymologist Eustathius, Hesychius, Phavorinus, Budaeus, 
H. Stephen, Gesner, Constantine, Scapula, and other old or new 
dictionaries, scholiasts, commentators, and authors, whom I have 
cither carefully perused, or occasionally consulted. 

iV, The Motive of undertaking this Neva Grammar^ and drafting it 

up in French, 

Now if any body should be surprised at seeing me propose a 
new metlfod of learning the Greek tongue, after I had acknow- 
ledged I bat so many gaammarians have already treated of this 
subject, it is easy to answer, that although the language conti- 
nues always the same, yet the art of teaching it may be new. De- 
riving the same materials from the same source, we may infinitely 

a diversify 



X PREFACE. 

the manner of handling them, wherein we give a further opportii- 
nity to admire the beauty of this language, and the fertility of this 
art, the key and entrance to all others. 

But I shall likewise add, that Clenardus, who has hitherto ob- 
tained pretty much in the schools, has never been judged sufficient. 
The Greek language, as Constantine Lascaris very justly remarks, 
is like unto a wide ocean ; and in vain would you pretend to cir- 
cumscribe the knowledge of it within the limits of a simple abridg- 
ment. I am not ignorant that several have attempted to illustrate 
or enlarge the above author. But my endeavours towards facili- 
tating a thorough acquirement of this language, ought to be so 
much the more acceptable, as it seems proper, after so many 
books upon this subject written in Greek and Latin, that tliere 
should be one also in our native idiom, for the honour of this great 
kingdom. No body, as I know of, has yet undertaken it, so as to in- 
clude all the rules necessary for the knowledge of this tongue ; 
though it is unquestionable, that this is the best way to comprehend 
them more readily, and to recollect them with greater ease. 

V. Order and Division of this 'whole Work. 

The economy I pursue is also quite new: for having found by 
experience, that Clenardus's method was not the most useful, and 
that of Ramus was somewhat intricate and incommodious, which 
Sylburgius had in part taken notice of, and Sanctius had a mind 
to remedy, by following another path : I have therefore made such 
use of all those authors, as to pick out what I judged most worth}- 
of notice, w^ithout entering into things that seemed too intricate 
and remote from the common method now received in France. 

This work I have divided into nine books : the first treats of the 
analogy of letters, of their pronunciation, and of the changes 
and relations they bear to each other, which is the fouadation of 
what follows: the second treats of declensions, nouns, and pro- 
nouns : the third of the conjugation of verbs in eo : the fourth of 
the conjugation of verbs in ^/ : the fifth of defective verbs, and the 
investigation of the theme : the sixth of indeclinable participles ; 
with a very useful treatise on the derivation and composition of 
nouns : the seventh of syntax : the eighth of curious remarks on 
all the parts of speech : and the ninth of quantity and accents ; with 
a review of the dialects, and of poetic licence. 

I reduce all the declensions to two ; one parisyllabic, and the 
other imparisyllabic : but I subdivide the parisyllabic again into 
two; one following the feminine article, and entirely analogous to 
the first of the Latins : the other following the masculine article, 
and analogous to their second declension ; as the imparisyllabic is to 
the third, and the contracts to the other two, which are properly no 
more than a branch of the third. 

I hkewise reduce all the conjugations to two; one of verbs m u, 

and the other of verbs in /xi : but I divide also those verbs in &> into 

two sorts, viz. one' of barytonous verbs, and the other of circum- 

^dcxed ; which I have caused to be printed in two different colours, 

that 



PREFACE. XI 

that the diiFerent manner of conjugating them may immediately 
strike^ the eye, without any danger of confusion. 

The disposition of the tenses, and their formation, are also nevi'. 
For having observed, that the preterit and the aorist depend in 
many things on the future, I thought it would be proper to place 
the latter tense before the other two : and having found by expe- 
rience, as well as Ramus, Sylburgius, Cranzius, Sanctius, and se- 
veral others, that this long genealogy of tenses, whereby they are 
made to descend successively the one from the other, is as incon- 
venient in practice, as it seems plausible to those that have not well 
examined it ; because it fatigues the mind in so tedious a circuit, 
and hinders it from finding the theme of the verb so readily as one 
could wish : I have therefore given a method of reducing them all 
immediately to the future active, which is as well known as the 
present. 

Thus, in whatsoever tense or mood I find myself, whether active, 
passive, or middle, I ascend commonly to the theme of t!ie verb 
in two steps, which is not sometimes compassed in six or seven in 
the ordinary method. 

In each place I have given all the dialects, together with obser- 
vations proper for every sort of nouns and pronouns, or particular 
to each tense of verbs ; knowing by experience how troublesome it 
is to be obliged to look out for what relates to the same subject in 
two or three different places. But I have distinguished these, in. 
such a manner, by the difference of the type, that there is no 
danger of their incommoding those who choose to overlook them. 

As to what regards the nouns and pronouns, having given at first 
the manner of declining them according to the common tongue, I 
have afterwards exhibited tables, which include the terminations, 
with all the different dialects ; insomuch that every thing that is 
necessary may be seen at one view. 

And concerning the verbs, I give at first a table for conjugating 
either the active or passive voice, choosing, with Sanctius, t/w, for 
an example of the barytonous verbs, as one of the most simple, and 
to which the rest may be easier reduced. Afterwards I treat of 
each tense in particular, leaving rvitlu:, for a paradigm, in favour 
of those who are used to it : and putting the common form in a 
large letter, I subjoin the dialects to each person in a smaller cha- 
racter ; and then I give a short account of those said dialects, to 
explain their analogy, and render them more easy to retain. For 
which reason 1 have not judged it necessary to mention them all in 
the rules, but have contented myself with including those^ that were 
most necessary, or might easiest escape the memory. 

But having considered how useful it is for beginners to have a 
knowledge of the investigation of the themet I have comprised the 
whole of it in very easy rules ; though, among those who have en- 
deavoured to digest the Greek grammar into Latin verse, I know 
not one that has ever attempted it. 

With regard to the syntax, 1 have reduced it to a very small, 
but sufficient number of principles ; supposing the learner to be 
somewhat acquainted with the Latin syntax. If there is any thing 

particiilar 



Xll P R E F A C i:. 

particular I have reserved it either for the annotations that are in a 
small letter at the end of each rule ; or for the eighth book, which 
consists intirely of curious and solid remarks ; and I have pointed 
out the reason of each government, in order to be better prepared 
for the reading of authors, which ought to be our chief aim in this 
study. 

* VI. Three things necessary for learning a Language, 

I AM of opinion, that it will not be improper to observe three 
things, Vv'hich will particularly contribute towards forwarding this 
design. The first is a competent knowledge of grammar ; the se- 
cond the knowledge of words ; and the third, to be acquainted 
with the phraseology ; without which qualifications it is impossible 
ever to attain to a thorough knowledge of any language. 

If the Greek is somewhat more difficult than the Latin with re- 
gard to the two first articles, it ha« at least this advantage, that 
it is much easier with respect to the last, which contains almost 
inconceivable difficulties in the Latin. The Latin idiom is much 
wider from ours than the Greek. Having fewer terms, it is obliged 
to give a greater extent to the same expression ; and to vary the 
phrase and manner of connecting words and sentences. On the 
contrar}', the Greek very often conveys by one particular word, or 
by a compound term of several repots, all that can be desired. 

In regard to the grammar, it will be perhaps a difficult matter 
to acquire an exact knowledge of it in less time than by this new 
method. I had discovered long ago, that this was what chiefly 
prevented the progress of the Greek language; because the abridg- 
nient«, as 1 have alread}'' observed, are insufficient, and the uni- 
versal grammars of Scotus and Antesignanus, though fraught with 
erudition, are ill digested, without order or principles, and stuffed 
with so many useless or embarrassing articles, that a person mtist 
have a great deal of resolution to read them through. Hence, I 
have endeavoured to draw up this work with the utmost regularity 
and order ; not only by the division of the books and chapters; by 
the running titles, which point out the subject matter in every 
page ; and by the rules, vvhich comprise in a few words, and easily 
imprint in the- memory just so much as is necessary for beginners: 
but moreover, by reducing every thing, as much as possible, to 
general principles, as well with regard to the analogy of nouns, 
verbs, and dialects, as to the syntax, accents, and every thing else. 

For we must always make a distinction between two sorts of per- 
sons, that apply themselves to the study of languages, viz. chil- 
dren, and those who are capable of reflexion and judgment. It is 
chiefly to serve the former, 1 have drawn up these rules in so few 
lines ; and for the second I have settled things by reasons founded 
on analogy ; not but that ths one and the other may make use of 
every thing indiscriminately, as inclination and occasion shall lead 
them- 

And not to merition any thing here, but what is known to many, 
and has been confirmed by long experience, we have seen boys of a 

middling 



^ PREFACE. XIll 

middling capacity, go through all their rules tolerably well in less 
than two or three months, with the help of this method. Some, 
even in less than six weeks, have got over all the general principles, 
and entered directly upon the practice of authors. 

But having afterwards remarked, that the knowledge of gram- 
mar would be of very little service, if not followed by some me-* 
thod ol stocking the memory witli words ; I have thought proper 
to pubhsh at the same time a lesser work,- not less useful than the 
present ; namely, The Greek Roots ; drawn up in French verse, 
with their principal derivatives underneath. It is the easiest me- 
thod I could find, after long inquiry, for learning the words of this 
language ; concerning which 1 refer the reader to what has been 
said in the preface to that book. 

With respect to 1\\q phraseology^ I fancy that most of the difficul- 
ties on this head are pretty well explained in the seventh and eighth 
books, which contain the syntax and the remarks ; and that no- 
thing can contribute more to solve all doubts of construction, than 
the general maxims, which I have there laid down, and endea- 
voured to establish by a variety of examples, rendered into our own 
language, for the greater ease and advantage of beginners. If 
there should be any thing further wanting, either for the under- 
standing of the phraseology, or for the explication of certain terms, 
I shall endeavour, with God's assistance, to remedy that inconve-^ 
niency in another work, which will be so much easier to retain, as 
it is to consist entirely of a chain of etymologies, written in our 
language. 

VII. Two things that obstruct the study of the Greek Tongue. The 
Jirstf its not beihg referred immediately to one* s Native Language* 

One of the chief obstructions to the learning of Greek, is, in my 
opinion, our not accustoming ourselves sufficiently to compare it 
immediately to our mother tongue, but making a long circuit to 
convey our sentiment in a Latin translation. Hence the same 
thing happens here, as was mentioned above with regard to the 
formation of tenses : the mind is embarrassed with such a multipli» 
city of things, which it must have all present at the same time, in 
so tedious a circuit. 

But, if after the publication of a Greek grammar in our own 
language, such as the present, together with a treatise on the roots 
and etymologies, which I promise hereafter, some skilful hand 
would favour us with an edition of Greek books, and a vulgar 
translation on the opposite page, I would venture to affirm, that 
this language would become not only more easy and agreeable, but, 
moreover, more common by half than it is at present, throughout 
the kingdom. 

VIII. The second, by not following the right Pronunciation, 

I MUST mention here another thing, which would be no less 
conducive to so good an end, and that is to be a little more at- 
tached 



XIV . PREFACE. 

tach^, than we generally are, to the true and ancient pronua- 
ciation of this language. I have therefore carefully ascertained 
it in the first book, though in few words, by reason that there 
are several who have written whole treatises on this subject; 
I do not pretend to prescribe laws to others, but only to repre- 
sent a pure matter of fact, which I submit to e\^ery free and im- 
partial judge. Hence I have taken particular care not to insert 
any thing in the rales, that might prevent this method from being 
no less serviceable to those who reject, than to those who embrace 
this pronunciation. 

For which reason, I cannot think that any man will refuse to ac- 
knowledge its utility, when he considers how inconvenient it is, not 
to understand a word of Greek, but by the assistance of the eye ; 
and to be under a continual necessity of asking whether, what one 
hears, be writ with such and such a letter, and the like: which 
embarrasses even the reader,, who must be very well versed in 
the language, before he will be able to distinguish a great number 
of words, that are pronounced exactly alike. Those on the con- 
trary, who use themselves to speak as they write, find it an easy 
matter to distinguish the words; because they are directed both by 
the eye and the ear, which is having two masters instead of one. 

And, indeed, it seems very extraordinary, that, whereas the 
Greek tongue is far more difficult, as vie have observed, than the 
Latin, with regard to the words, still there should be so little care 
taken to lessen this inconveniency in the manner the Greeks them- 
selves have done, by means of several marks, which help to distin- 
guish the terms, and to fix the pronunciation ; such as long and 
short vowels, rough and smooth consonants, breathings and accents, 
that have been wisely, and by a very rational analogy, introduced 
into this language : whereas, if they are neglected in speaking, they 
can be considered only as an useless incumbrance in writing. 

Had there been any arguments of weight to refute this ancient 
pronunciation, I should be the less surprised at the difficulty of its 
reception. But there is scarcely any body, that will not acknov.dedge 
its use. Without it, says a learned man of the past century, the 
dialects become a labyrinth, prose grows flat, and verse itself loses 
all its dignity and grace. It is therefore quite absurd to forego this 
advantage, under pretence of being afraid to offend, perhaps the 
ear of some prejudiced person ; because, in case you had a miad 
to avoid this inconveniency, it would be much more eligible to 
humour him upon this occasion, and at other times conform to the 
right pronunciation, than, for so trifling a reason, to deprive your- 
self of so considerable a benefit. 

IX. Thai the false Pronunciation is oicing to the Modern Greeks ; 
and that the Learned have coJistantlij recommended the Ancient. 

Certain it is, that this proposition cannot incur the censure of 
novelty ; since it only recalls the language to its origin, and to the 
time of its full perfection. For it is observable, that the Greeks, 
w|io fled for refuge to France and Italy about tvvo hundred years 



PREFACE. XV 

ago, were the first that introduced this corrupt mode of uttering : 
finding no traces of this tongue in the West, they gave us the pro- 
nunciation, which Barbarians had introduced into their country; 
and Gaza himself acknowledges, in &ome parts of his work, that it 
is not the right one. 

And indeed ever since that time there have not been wanting 
men of learning, who have shewn the advantages of this ancient 
pronunciation, maintained it in their writings, and endeavoured to 
spread it throughout Europe. 

Antony, surnamed Nebrissensis, from the place of his nativity in 
Andalusia, was one of the first, who, in promoting the restoration 
of letters in Spain, so early as the end of the fourteenth century, 
used all his interest to introduce this pronunciation. 

Above a hundred years ago Erasmus, being then at Lovain, com- 
posed a whole book to this purpose, where we find he has ascer- 
tained this very point, 

Ceratinus did the same thing in Holland, in a treatise dedicated 
to Erasmus, and this practice has since universally obtained 
throughout that country. 

Sir John Cheke, professor of Greek at Cambridge, and preceptor 
to young king Edward, did his country the very same service, not- 
withstanding the opposition he met with from the bishop of Win- 
chester, chancellor at that time of the said university : and now 
this pronunciation is generally received by the English. 

Vergara, one of the most able -grammarians of the last century, 
who was professor in Spain in the year 1555, exactly a hundred 
years ago, has condemned this new mode of utterance as spurious, 
and recommended the ancient as genuine. 

Aldus Manucius, a Roman, has made the same remark in the 
riaffffyov, at the end of his Latin Grammar. 

Lipsius professes the same doctrine in his treatise of pronun- 
ciation. 

Erycius Puteanus, v/ho succeeded him in his professorship at 
Lovain, and had taught publicly before at Milan, and several other 
cities of Italy, always conformed to this same way of speaking, and 
advised every body to embrace it, as one of the most effectual 
means towards making a progress in the Greek language: all 
which may be seen in his oration on this subject, delivered at Milan, 
the sixth among his works. 

Sanctius, Greek professor, and head of a college in the cele- 
brated university of Salamanca in Spain, has established it likewise 
in his Greek Grammar, and in divers other parts of |iis works. 

Meckerchus has endeavoured to promote the same design in 
Flanders ; as also Sylburgius in Germany ; and Andrew Hoi, the 
king's professor, in the Netherlands, at the request of the learned 
and pious Estius, who was eager for having this pronunciation pre- 
vail, being sensible of its utility ; and before him Peter Tiare, pro- 
fessor at Doway, who introduced it into that university, upon its 
first foundation. To these I might add Glareanus, Pierius, Came- 
rarius, Scapula, Constantine, Vossius, Alstedius, and others, who 
have all unanimously extolled this ancient manner of speaking, and 

'* mentioned 



XVI PREFACE. 

mentioned the great advantages arising from it : some of them hav^ 
even left us very learned and curious treatises on this subject. 

Neither has France been without learned men, who have con- 
stantly pTomoted the same design. 

Bud^us was one of the first, who laid the foundation of it in 
many parts of his works. 

Postellus approves of this same pronunciation, when in his book 
of Origins he shews, that the names of the Greek letters are bor- 
rowed from the Hebrew. 

It is full an hundred years ago, since Caninius, a native of Milan, 
and professor in the college of Canibray at Paris in the year 1555, 
wrote a treatise on Hellenisms, which may be justly called one 
of the most learned performances, that has ever appeared on the 
principles of the Greek tongue : and in his treatise he gives this 
pronunciation the preference. 

Robert Stephen has done the same In his Greek alphabet, printed 
at Paris in the year 1554. 

His son Henry Stephen, to whom this language is indebted for 
the famous Thesaurus, has likewise established this point. 

Ramus has followed his example, not only in his grammar, but 
also in the third book of his Schools. 

The young messieurs Huraut de I'Hospital maintained the same 
doctrine, in a particular treatise intituled Philapappus : this they 
wrote under the direction of their preceptor Peter Ghabot, a learned 
professor of the university of Paris, and presented it to their grand- 
father, the chancellor de I'Hospital, one of the wisest magistrates 
that ever was in France: and the chancellor approved of this pro- 
nunciation, as may be seen at the end of this book, in the Paris 
edition of the year 1580, and afterwards in the Basil edition of the 
year 1587. 

The learned Lambinus also, professor in the same university, re- 
commended it in his time, as we learn from Meckerchus at the end 
of his treatise on pronunciation. 

Simon, doctor of physic, embraced it likewise, in his Methodical 
history of the Greek Tongue, dedicated to cardinal du Perron, and 
applauded by the most learned men o? that time. And Robinet, 
also doctor of physic, who wrote the advertisement to the reader 
prefixed to this hook, justly complains of those, who, notwithstand- 
ing the practice of antiquity, and the advantages that arise from it, 
would fain have the French nation still ingloriously submit to a bar» 
barous pronunciation, which all other countries have exploded. 

Finally, we have observed in our days that the famous M. Valens, 
the king's professor, has constantly inculcated the same practice. 
Which shews, that the ancient pronunciation was never condemned 
in this, nor in any other, learned university. 

And so true it is, that the spreading of this corrupt pronunciation 
is to be attributed to the modern Greeks ; that Meckerchus^ assures 
us, he saw a Psalter of the Septuagint, written in the year mcv, iri 
n beautiful Latin character, where the right mode of utterance was 
perfectly expressed, as Ecclesia, Basileus, Aggelos, panta, uranu, 
auttif hyriosy &c. (where it is to be observed, that the Latin u is 

sounded 



PRKFACEo" XVI! 

Sdtinfded like the French on, and y like the French n.J And that 
at the end of the same Psalter there v/as a Greek alphabet, with the 
power of the letters thus marked, alpha^ beta, gamma, delta, e 
brevis, zeta, eta, theta, iota, cappa, lamcla, my, ny, xi, o, brevis, 
pi, rho, sigma, tan, y, phi, chi, psi, o tonga; which is exactly 
the sound the learned of the present age maintain they ought to 
have, and the greatest part of Europe has now adopted. 

We likewise see in the works of pope. Innocent the third, who 
lived towards the close of the twelfth century, and the commence-" 
ment of the thirteenth, that in his time they pronounced Kyrie 
eleeson, Christe eleeson; and that S. Gregory commanded the clergy 
to chant Kyrie eleeson, which was sung by tl)e whole <iongregation 
-in the Greek church. We find also in the life of S. Gertrude of 
the order of S. Benedict, written in part by herself, v^ho lived about 
three hundred years ago, that upon citing these very same words 
of the mass, she writes ehesm with an e, and not ehiwn. We 
see also, that the 'a/aw of the Septuagint, which is the Amen 
of the Hebrews, has been preserved down to our time, notwithstand- 
ing the corrupt pronunciation of the modern Greeks, who read 
Amin with an i instead of Amen, 

X. That it is necessary to proceed from the Grammar to the use oj' 
Authors : and whether it is proper to learn Greek before Latin, 

But I have dwelt too long on so clear a point, which I should 
have treated with greater brevity, had I not thought it nece?isary 
to produce such a number of authorities, in order to remove all fur- 
ther difficu]t3% I shall only add, that if a person will be at the 
pains of accustoming himself early to this pronunciation, and of 
following the formation of tenses, which 1 have marked out, toge- - 
ther with the rest of this method, I have no doubt that he will be 
quickly sensible of the great advantages of it : provided he does 
not neglect, at the same time, to exercise himself in the use of au-' 
thors. For theory and practice should go hand in hand, the latter 
being generally looked upon as the chief foundation of languages. 

Quintilian long since declared it to be his opinion, that'children 
should begin with learning Greek, because the Latin tongue being 
more common, it is attained with greater ease, and, as it were, of 
itself: which reason will, perhaps, hold good with us, as well as 
with the Romans ; for our language is an appendix, and sort of 
dialect of the Latin. 

Not that I think Quintilian's advice ought to be followed literally. 
For, as we are to proceed by a gradual ascent, it is very proper 
to learn a little Latin (the greatest part of our w^ords being derived 
from that language) before we enter upon the Greek, from whence 
the Latin is descended. Besides, it is certain, that the rudiments 
of the Latin tongue, the declensions, conjugations, and other 
principles, are much easier, and more adapted to the capacity of 
youth, than those of the Greek : not to mention, that there are 
several who only want to learn a little Latin, v>'ithout ever 
troubling their heads about the other language. 

But 
b 



XVm P R E F A C E% 

Bu^ I believe, Qxiintilian's advice ought to be more care- 
fully weighed ; and upoa iriquiry we shall often find, either that 
children are not seriously initialed, or not sufficiently advanced in 
the study of the Greek. For as the difficulty of this language con- 
sists particularly in^ the words, as it is easier than Latin with regard 
to the phraseology, and as the use and necessity of it is generally 
confined to the understanding of authors, there being scarcely ever 
any occasion to speak or write it ; nothing seems more natural, than 
that children should be taught it very early. As soon as they 
have been initiated in the Latin tongue, they should immediately 
proceed to the Greek, and make a considerable progress hi it, whilst 
they have more memory than judgment. In the mean time it will 
be sufficient just to keep up their Latin ; and we may defer to a 
riper age, the forming them to a more graceful manner of writing 
and speaking, or to the sublimer rules of eloquence. 

With regard to entering upon tliis practice ; my opinion is, tliat 
after they have at least gone through tlie abridgment of this 
Grammar, which abridgment contains all that is necessary for 
declining and conjugating, and will be publfshed very shortly ; they 
may begin to read some book or other, accompanied with Scholia, 
such as ^sop's Fables, or Lucian's Dialogues, in order to see their 
rules exemplified, whilst they endeavour at the same time to get 
thoroughly grounded in tlie remainder of this method. 

I must only observe, that, as for interlineary versions, it is much 
better to have but little to do with them. Nothing is more apt to^ 
render us supine and indolent, and to hinder the mind from ever 
reaching the genuine sense of the author. I should, therefore, be 
against recommending them, even to young people, unless it be at 
the very beginning, when they are to learn something by heart. Care 
must be taken afterwards to make them enter gradually of them- 
selves, by diligent reading, into the force of words, and the signi- 
^cation of the phrase. A collateral translation may be of more ser- 
vice to them, supposing it clear and faithful : but, they should 
endeavour to do even without this, as soon as possible. 

In order to arrive at such a pitch, nothing can be of greater use 
in the beginning, than to read the same thing, either entire, or 
by parts, over and over again, repeating it as often, as either the 
memory, or capacity of the scholar requires, in order to be a& 
faraihar and perfect in it, as if it were written in our own language. 
One page studied in this manner, is worth ten hurried over 
^ith precipitation, not only because more benefit is reaped 
from it at present, but, as laying a better foundation for 
future advantages. And if to this a proper care be added, m 
collecting a sufficient stock of new words, in reducing them to 
their roots, and in committing to memory such passages, as are 
most curious in their subject, or most elegant in their expression ; 
it is almost incredible how expeditious a progress may be made in 
this language. 

XI. Of 



S> K E F A C E. XIX 

%1. Of trie choice of Authors ; vnd of the Prineiples that are to 
be observed, inpursuing this design. 

To wliat has been said, we may further add, how useful it is, 
to observe some order in the choice of books, proper to be read 
by young people, in proportion to their progress in this study, 
lam very sensible it is a difficult task to give advice upon this 
point so as to please every body ; for there is no subject what- 
ever, concerning which there is a greater diversity of opinions, than 
that of the censure and judgment of authors. However, I think 
we may safely adhere to three principles, which ought to be invioi^ 
!ably observed in the instruction of youths these are, to begin with 
the most easy; to select some books of entertainment, int 
order to render this study more diverting ; and to join as much as 
possible the utility of the subject to that of the language : by 
which means they will form their judgment, while they stock their 
memory ; and even their memory will be helped by annexing words 
to things, as these make a greater impression on the mind, than 
bare words^ 

Lucian is an author in whom those three qualities shine in high 
perfection, and who has this advantage, which Quintilian observed 
in Cicero, that he may be of service to beginners, and not unuse- 
ful even to those who are far advanced. His language is pure, his 
phrase elegant, his wit agreeable, his style perspicuous, his nar- 
rative surprising, and his copiousness sufficient to supply the roost 
barren capacities. 

He handles mythology in a very entertaining manner, so as 
to imprint the fable in the memory, which contributes not a little to- 
wards the better understanding of the poets. In several places he 
draws an admirable picture of the misery of human life, of the vanity 
of mankind, of the arrogance of the learned, and of the pride of 
philosophers^. In fine, he ridicules the avarice of the rich, the in- 
solence of the great, and the whole system of Pagan religion : which 
contributes not a little towards raising the mind to the only and so- 
vereign good. 

Yet choice and discernment are requisite, even in reading this 
author. For besides that there are several passages very dan- 
gerous to youth, and entirely unworthy not only of Christian 
purity, but even of pagan modesty ; there are also several use- 
less treatises. "And perhaps, in general, his manner of writing may 
be hurtful to persons of a wrong turn of mind, who are of them- 
selves inclinable to profaneness and buffoonry. 

The collection formerly made, and which is still in the hands of 
children, might be of service, were it not full of errors in the late 
impressions; besides, I cannot conceive why the editor has re- 
trenched some things which are less hurtful, and at the same time 
left others that seem far more dangerous. 

But a great many useful pieces might be added to that col- 
lection, such as the dream, the trial of the vowels, the sale of the 
^if^ of philosophers i the fishermen, or the rtien raised to life ; the 
men of learnings that enter into the service of the greats Hermo* 

timuSf 



XX P R K F A C £. 

iimus, or the sects; Her(kdotus, or Ebion ; Zeuxis and Antiochus j 
the tyrant-slayer ; the disinherited ; the tragical Jupiter ; AlexaU' 
der, or the false prophet ; the master of the rhetoricians ; of those 
nuho have been long-lived ; a discourse against Herodotus ; and the 
death of the pilgrim (whether it be his or not) ; and some others, 

[ provided, as I observed, that care be taken to expunge every 
thing that can be offensive to modesty, which, indeed, should be 
done in all books whatsoever, that are designed for the instruction 
of youth. 

Next to Lucian there is nothing more pleasing, or more, use- 
ful than history. Poliaenus, who lived under M. Aurelius, towards 
the close of the second century, has left us a large collection of 
stratagems of the greatest men of antiquity, written with extraor- 
dinary ease, clearness, and purity. 

Thehistories of iElian, who flourished under Adrian, towards 
the commencement of t!)at same century, are very entertaining : his 
expression is copious, and his style extremely pure, particularly in 
his history of animals, where he has inserted a great number of 
precepts, most useful in the conduct of human life. His various 
histories are less polished ; and in several places, they seem to be 
rather a collection of detached papers, than a finished piece ; 
though they may be read with some utility. 

, Herodian is proper for beginners, because of the smallness of 
the volume, and the beaut}^ of the Latin version, together with the 
Greek elegance of his style, which Photius, patriarch of Constanti- 
nople, affirms to be clear, pure, and agreeable ; ever uniform, bufc 
neither mean nor affected : in short, he looks upon him as inferior 
to few historians. His history commences at the' death of the em*- 
peror M. Aurdius, near the close of the second century, and ter-» 
minates in Gordianus the younger, towards the middle of the third. 
It is esteemed for its truth, as the author wrote scarcely any thing, 
but what he had been an eye-witness of; excepting what regards 
Alexander and Maxim in us, where his veracity is suspected. He is 
somewhat more difficult with regard to the phraseology than the 
foregoing, and seems even to have been corrupted in several places. 
But perhaps we shalj give anew edition of him very soon, com- 
pared with ancient copies, and accompanied with short notes, which 
niay be of service to those who desire to make use of this author. 

After these, you may proceed to some of Plutarch's writings, 
though he is more obscure than any hitherto mentioned. How- 
ever, there is one particular advantage in him, that he alone is 
worth a multitude of authors, each life being a separate work; and 
there is so great a variety as to admit of choice : besides they 
contain the best and most remarkaj^le part of the Greek and Ro- 
man histories. His moral pieces are likewise incomparable, though 
some treatises might be left out, which are either obscure, or less 
useful, or even dangerous in regard to morals. But his discourses 
on the education of children (though there is some room to ques- 
tion whether this be his) ; on the reading of poems ; on hearing; 
on the difference beltveen a flatterer and a friend; on the benefit 
that may accrue from enemies; on 'vice and virtue; his consolaiiorp 

to 



PREFACE. XXI 

Jo Apolhnius; his treatises of superstition ; of passion ; of the 
tranquillity of the mind; of brotherly friendship ; of evil shame ; 
that vice is sufficient to make men unhappy / 'which passions are 
most dange?-ous, those of the mind, or those of the body; of gar- 
rulity ; of the love of riches ; concerning such as God is slow to 
punish; of usury ; against ignorant jprinces ; political precepts ; 
whether old men should concern themselves with state affairs; his 
apophthegms ; of the fortune of the Romans; of the success of 
Alexander; Roman questions; which are the most crafty, water 
animals^ or those that breed upon land; and perhaps some others 
are all master-pieces in their kind, and of immense value, both for 
the utility of the subject, and the beauty of the figures, the co- 
piousness of expression, beside the great variety of excellent re- 
flexions, and examples of human conduct, scattered through the 
whole. Which made Gaza say, that if he were to be confined only 
to one book, he should chuse the works of Plutarch. Hence he 
was in so great esteem among the ancients, as to be caressed by 
three, emperors successively; one of whom, viz. Trajan, who lived 
at the beginning of the second century, raised him to the consular 
dignity. 

• XII. Order to be observed by those who are willing to peruse Au' 
V thors according to the series qf Time, Judgment on the His- 
torians. 

Those who are masters of this author may safely venture after- 
wards upon all the rest, and go through them gradually, accord- 
ing to the order of time, as Josephus, Herodotus, Diodorus, Thu- 
cydides, Xenophon, Dionysius Halicarnassensis, Polybius, Appian, 
Pion, and others. 

Josephus, who lived towards the close of the first century, 
yvrote the history of the Old Testament, and that of the war of 
the Jews. He presented the latter, which he had divided into 
seven books, to Vespasian and his son Titus : it not only met with 
the general applause, but was so greatly esteemed at Rome, that 
they erected a statue to the author. He wrote his antiquities 
some time later, for they were not finished till the thirteenth year 
of the reign of Domitian. They are comprised in twenty books, 
beginning with the creation, and ending at the twelfth year of 
Nero. His diction is pure, says Photius, and proper to convey 
a distinct and clear image, of the noblest and most elevated sub- 
jects. He is eloquent and persuasive in his harangues, as senten- 
tious as most authors, artful and insinuating, a strong reasoner, and 
a thorough master in exciting the passions. Which made St. Jerom 
call him the Greek Livy. 

.. Herodotus flourished towards the eighty-third Olympiad, viz. 
upwards of fqur hundred and forty years before the birth of 
Christ, under the reign of Xerxes and Artaxerxes, kings of Per- 
sia. He is looked upon as the father qf history, a title given him 
by Cicero in his second book of laws ; and to him we are particu- 
^rly indebted for the history of the Persians. He wrote in the 
■ '. Ionic 



XXll PREFACE, 

Ionic dialect; yet he is very easy and pure. He is cloar, agree- 
able, and fluent, according to Quintilian: and Cioero says, he 
glides with all the majesty of a great river, smooth and uniform, 
Athenaeus calls him, o ^atvy>.x<Ti^'jraiir^ j^ ^\\yt)^vsy most admirable^ 
and svieet as honey. His books were in so great repute as to be 
called the Nine Muses, They begin with Croesus and the empire 
of Cyrus, by whom Croesus was defeated, and are continued down 
to Xerxes, the fourth Persian king after Cyrus, 

Diodorus is useful, by reason of his Universal History, wherein 
he treats of the Egyptians, Assyrians, Medes, Persians, Greeks, 
flomans, Carthaginians, and others. He has borrowed a great 
many things from Berosus, Theopompus, Ephorus, Philistes, Cal- 
listhenes, Timaeus, and other authors, who have perished through 
the injuries of time, which has also been the fate of some of Dio» 
dorus's books, For they were originally forty, and comprised the 
Universal History down to Julius Caesar, under whom this author 
flourished, having died very old, towards the middle of the reign of 
Augustus : but there are only fifteen remaining, which come down 
to the year of Rome four hundred and fifty-two. Photius says, his 
language is clear and unafiected, his style middling, and proper 
enough for history, 

Thucydides flourished at the same time as Herodotus, and was in» 
duced to write bis history, by having heard that author repeat his 
works with such high applause at Athens, during the feast of Mi- 
ilerva. He has only given us the first twenty years of the Pelopon* 
nesian war, though he takes his subject from a higher date. But 
he is esteemed for his veracity, and has conformed so scrupulously 
to the laws of history, that several look upon him as a pattern in 
that kind of writing. 

He is one of the most difficult authors, and so very obscure, par» 
ticularly in his harangues, that Tully, in his book of illustrious 
orators, says, he is sometimes unintelligible : nevertheless, in his 
second book De Oratore, he commends him extremely, and affirms 
that he surpasses all others in his art ; that almost every word is 
a sentence ; that he is so accurate and expressive, as to render it 
difficult to determine, whether his words set off the things, niore 
than the things his words. Demosthenes had so great an esteem 
for this history, that he transcribed it eight times himself, in order 
to be thoroughly acquainted with it : and in these latter ages, the 
emperor Charles the fifth is reported to have respected Thucy- 
dides as his master in the art of war, and to have made him the 
constant companion of all his enterprises. But it requires a good 
deal of application to understand him well ; and the German edi-s 
tion, with the Scholia and Commentaries of Portus, will contribute 
very much to this end.. 

Xenophon, to whom we are obliged for the works of Thucy- 
dides, because it was he that published them, flourished a little 
after him, viz. according to Eusebius, in the ninety-fifth Olympiad. 
His turn of writing is quite different from that of the last author. 
He is clear, pure, and familiar in his style, but elegant withal, and 
pretty much resembling Csesar, except that Geesar is sometimes 

more 



J&ore gfave, and Xenophon more fluent. His language is eo 
smooth, that Quintih'an says, it seems to have been formed by the 
Graces. Tully affirms he is sweeter than honey, and that the 
Muses spoke, as it were, through his mouth: hence, according 
to Laertius, he was called the Attic muse, or, according to others, 
the Attic bee. Dion Chrysostora recommends this author very 
much, assuring us, that he is sufficient, not only to form his readet 
to a pure and elegant style, but likewise to instruct him in sound 
policy. 

The learned are divided in regard to the Cyropsedia, viz. this 
author's book concerning the education, and great exploits of Cyrus- 
Tully says, he wrote non ad histories jidemy sed ad effigiem veri 
imperii^ an expression which several have wrested to a wrong sense : 
and Joseph Scaliger has ventured so far as to say, that he found 
nothing true in the Cyropsedia, except the siege of Babylon, 
For my part I am of opinion, that the story is really true, and 
that it is very difficult to fill up properly the ancient chronology^ 
without taking several things, as Usher has done, from this work* 
It is at the same time probable, that Xenophon has endeavoured 
to embellish it ; which was the reason of Cicero's giving the above 
judgment. Thus we see he is no more reserved in the taking of 
Babylon, than any where else ; for there he paints his hero as a 
prince of extraordinary clemency, whereas the Scripture gives us 
a most terrible idea of the destruction of this city. Be that as it 
may, the Cyropsedia is a very entertaining treatise. Hence it 
might perhaps be ranked among those writings which we mentioned 
as a proper introduction for beginners, before they enter upon a 
promiscuous use of Greek authors. 

Dionysius Halicarnassensis, who, as Strabo and Photius ob- 
serve, lived in the reign of Augustus, has traced the Roman history 
to its earliest period, and brought it down in the twenty books, still 
extant, to the year three hundred and twelve, of the foundation of 
Rome : those which are lost continued it to the year four hundred 
and ninety, where Polybius begins. Photius calls him xatvofr^s'nriT, 
as much as to say, endoived xmth a singular beauty of style ; and he 
says, that besides entering into a full detail in his narratives, and 
being judicious in his digressions, he has an elegance that softens 
any roughness that may happen to be in his language, or tedious- 
ness in his history. 

Out of forty books which Polybius wrote, there are only five 
extant complete, with some of the rest abridged, which com- 
prised the Roman history from the commencement of the second 
Punic war, down to the subversion of the Macedonian empire. 
This writer was an intimate acquaintance of Scipio Africanus the 
younger, whom he accompanied into Afric: and Brutus had «o 
great an esteem for his writings, that they afforded consolation to 
him in all his troubles ; though he writes like a soldier, and his style 
is somewhat unpolished. He died in the year of Rome, six hun- 
dred and thirty-one ; before Christ, one hundred and twenty. 

To these we may add Appian, especially the five books of the 
civil wars, where he is much esteemed for his voracity. He wag 

a nathFG 



XXIV PKEFACE.= 

a native of Alexandria, but went to live at Rome, where he fd- 
lovved for some time the profession of an advocate: he also wrote 
his history in that city, under Antoninus Pius,- toward the beginning 
of the second century. 

Dion Cassius flourished toward the close of that same century, 
under the reign of Commodus, when he was honoured with the 
dignity of senator, and lived to be promoted to the consulate by 
Alexander Severus. To this period he carried down his history, 
in fourscore books, beginning with the coming of jS^neas inta 
Italy* But the first thirty-four are lost, and the greatest part 
of the thirty-fifth. The following five and twenty, which are 
extant,^ begin with the wars of Lucullus, and come down to the 
death of the emperor Claudius ; the rest are all lost. Photius 
thinks his style majestic, and that he rises in proportion to the 
dignity of his subject. His phrase is a little antique, and very 
much resembles that of Thucydides, though he is more clear and 
intelligible. His history is faithful and entertaining, except that 
he is a little too prolix in his hara»gues, and speaks less respect- 
ully than becomes him of some great men, such as Cicero, Brutus, 
and a few others* 

Xni. Judgment of the Poets, Philosophers, Orators, and others. 

If we would attain to a perfect knowledge of this language, we 
ought not to neglect the poets, but particularly Homer, wYto has- 
been ever considered as the standard of Greek literature. For 
notwithstanding that several do not find in him all the beauties 
which the ancients remarked in his writings, and that many joia 
with Scaliger in preferring Virgil to Homer, still there is no doubt, 
but it is absolutely .necessary to be acquainted with this poet, not 
only because he alone contains all the words and dialects, but 
moreover the Greek authors abound with quotations from him, and 
allusions to his poems, so that it is difficult to understand theni 
thoroughly, -v/ithout being versed in his writings. 

Aristophanes might also be rendered very useful, if he were pro- 
perly purged of obscenities : for he abounds in witt}^ sayings, in 
sprightly sallies, and in Attic urbanity, that is, those ingenious 
turns, wherein Quintilian allows the Greeks to have far surpassed 
the Latins. - 

Euripides is full of beautiful sentences, which made Cicero say, 
that his verses are so many rules and maxims. 

Finally, persons of better capacities may afterwards proceed to 
the writings of philosophers, orators, physicians, or such as treat 
of that particular art or science in which they intend to excel. 

The sublimity of human reason is found in Tlato, together wath 
all the beauty of language. 

The eloquence of Demosthenes is admirable, though our being 
unacquainted with the forms of the bar at Athens, is the cause ,of ' 
his being somewhat obscure, and less agreeable. 

Isocrates excels in the harmony of his periods, and the perspi- 
cuity of his language : but his first discotyrses especially are worthy 

§ 6f 



PREFACE* XXV 

of being read, for the beaaty of the sentences, and the moral 
instructions. 

XIV. Of the inspired Writings .; and of the Fathers* 

i HAVE omitted mentioning the sacred writings, or the works of 
the fathers, because I can hardly agree with those who recommend 
the sacred text for learning a language, which is frequently consi- 
dered only as a branch of profane literature: yet some part of 
it may be read on particular days and hours, according to the 
progress of the learner in years and piety. 

And with regard to the fathers, though their writings are very 
beautiful and eloquent, I do not think them proper for young people, 
till after having gone through the profane authors. A few pieces, 
indeed, may be singled out, by way of religious exercise on 
certain days ; but as to perusing them for any continuance, this 
must be reserved for a riper age, when it is more likely to be 
attended with real advantage. 

However, if some religious persons, who have no great need of 
profane literature, should be desirous of attaining to a knowledge of 
this language by reading the fathers, we might conduct them with 
the sanje ease in this new road, as in introducing them to the pro- 
fane authors. 

The edition of St. Chrysostom, for example, is easy even for be- 
ginners; and he has written with such purity and eloquence, as 
have been admired by all ages. 

St. Basil is somewhat closer : but his style his pure, and, in the 
judgment of Budseus, inferior to none of the ancient Greeks. 

St. Gregory of Nazianzum is still more elaborate : his thoughts 
are refined, and abound with points: his diction is pure, his style 
elegant; his eloquence more striking than that of Demosthenes; 
his versification beautiful ; and his subject far more majestic and 
sublime, than that of Homer. 

In short, the Greek has this advantage of the Latin, that the 
great men of the church have preserved its purity with as much 
care as the profane writers, and have greatly ennobled it by the 
sublimity of the mysteries, and the dignity of the subjects, ex- 
plained in their eloquent writings. It is, therefore, proper to re- 
serve them for the very last, and to initiate boys into the profane 
authors, before we offer to supply them with such substantial 
nourishment. 

XV. Of the labour and time necessary for the perject attainment of a 
Language : objection against Translations. 

I CAN safely afiirm, without advancing any thing but what I have 
experienced myself, that it is not difficult to make young people 
acquainted with a good many of the authors above mentioned : 
especially considering, as I have observed, that this language 
ought to be their principal object for three or four years, when 
their minds are not yet susceptible of the manly beauties of 
eloquence, 

c Far 



XXVI PREFACE. 

For it is, in my humble opinion, a great mistake, which seversi 
are guilty of, to imagine, that a person may acquire a thorough 
knowledge of the Greek tongue, only by giving it an hour's study 
every day, or five or six months constant application. Languages 
are learned by long practice, and assiduity, if we would possess^ 
them in any degree of perfection. And, as it is no longer in our 
power to converse with Greeks, that speak this tongue in its 
purity, we must confine our acquaintance to books, and be long 
conversant with those illustrious deceased, in order to observe the 
purity of their style, their beautiful turn of expression, and dig- 
nity of sentiment. 

It is true, that some helps are expected from the principles of 
grammar, and that a great deal of time and trouble may be saved 
to young beginners; which I have endeavoured to do,' to the 
utmost of my abilities, in the New Method of Learning Latin, and 
in this of learning the Greek Tongue: but to attain a language in 
its full degree of purity and perfection (a thing not so easy as 
some people imagine) long practice and labour are requisite. 

But I am apt to think there are not many, who would refuse to 
be at some pains to learn Greek, when they come to reflect on the 
great benefit of possessing a language, that may strictly be called 
the source from whence all arts and sciences are extracted : espe- 
cially if we would trace things to their origin, and have a fun- 
damental knowledge of an infinite variet}^ of terms that lie scat- 
tered in so wide a field. Besides, the Greek may be said to 
have the; advantage of all other languages, in perspicuity, energy, 
and harmony; and it may be styled holi/, since it contains a 
great part of the inspired writings, and of the learning and doc- 
trine of the church. 

I must only observe, that it is a very weak pretence, to exempt 
one's self from the trifling labour, requisite for so useful and 
glorious a design, by saying, that most of the Greek writers are 
translated into Latin. For, besides that the art of interpreting 
in another language was very little known in former times, and 
that translators seldom took such pains with their copies, as to 
animate them with the beauty and elegance of those noble origi- 
nals; we may, also venture to affirm that very frequently they 
do not even understand their author, so that, instead of being a true 
guide to us, they only lead us into error. And the reason of this, 
as the learned Gesner well observes is, because the ancients were so 
curious in regard to this language, and so fond of contemplating 
its beauties at the fountain head, that they expressed an utter 
contempt for all translations, which afterwards became the employ- 
ment of low capacities, utterly disqualified for so arduous an 
undertaking. 

Not that I intend to disparage all Latin versions, or to defraud 
some worthy persons, who have carefully performed this task, of 
their merited applause : but 1 think it may safely be affirmed, 
that there are very few translations, which can be deemed perfect; 
and, as I observed before, it would be of singular service to thi^ . 
language, as well as to this kingdom, if those incomparable orj^- 

imls 



P R E F A C £. XXVll 

iials were accompanied with a translation into our own language^ 
which would be a more exact copy, and might give us a more adequate 
idea of their exquisite beauties. 

XVI. Conclusion of this Preface, 

But I perceive, though too late, that I have drawn out this pre- 
face to too great a length, by attempting to write concerning 
grammar, and Greek authors ; and at the same time to treat of the 
proper method of studying this language. Yet I hope, that this 
discourse contains some things, which will not prove altogether use- 
less, nor meet with a general dislike. What remains now, my 
dear reader, is to beg you will excuse such mistakes as you 
may happen to meet with in the course of this work, and that 
you will assist me with your prayers, since the only aim of my 
labour has been to shorten your's. And if it be true, that this 
is- chiefly effected by Consulting the ease of beginners, I am con- 
vinced, you will receive some help from this new book, and from 
the abridgment thereof, which you shall have very shortly; where I 
have inserted only what is necessary for beginners ; so that it will 
serve, in some measure, as a plan of this undertaking, and will 
plainly shew the advantages that may be reasonably expected from 
this Neto Method, 

August f 1655- 



CONTENTS. 



CONTENTS 



Translator's Preface 
Author's Preface - 



• p. in. 
- p. vii. 



BOOK I. 

Of Letters and Syllables* 

Chap. page 

I. General division of this work - 1 

II. Of letters in general . - 3 

III. Of the division and mutation of 



letters - - - - 


- 4 


The pronunciation of ^ra - 


- 5 


The pronunciation of « 


- - ib. 


The pronunciation of w - 


- 6 


IV. Of diphthongs - 


- ib. 


V. Of consonants 


- 10 


VI. Of letters considered aritbmeti- 


oaliy - - - 


- 14 


Table of the combination 


of num- 



bers , - - - 15 

VII. Of syllables in general - 16 

VIU. Of the properties of syllables 17 

Of accents - - ~ - ib. 

Of breathings - - - 19 

XX. Of the change, addition, and the 

cutting off of syllables - - 20 

X. Of the contraction uf syllables 21 

XI. Of the change of the last syllables 
on the meeting of two W(jrds - 23 

Of the apostrophe - - ib. 

Of V added to words ending in e 

ort - - - - 25 

A list of the letters, with their n>ost 

considerable changes - ib. 

XII. Of some other particularities 
with regard t reading and writ- 
ing - - - 35 

XIII. Of the connexion or abbrevia- 
tion of letters - - 37 

Table of connexions of letters or ab- 
breviations, for gres^ter ease and 
beauty in writing - - ib. 



BOOK II. 

Of Words; and^ first, of Nouns. 

Chap. 

I. Definition and division of words 39 

II. Of nouns in general - - 40 
Manner of declining the article ib. 

III. Of declensions ; and first, of the 
first declension of parisyllal)ics 41 

General rule for the declension of 
parisyllabics - - • ib. 

Of feminines in a. and «, which gram- 
marians call the second declension 
of simples - » - 4'2 

Of masculines in A2, or in H2, 
whereof grammarians make the 
Jirsi declension uf simjihs - 43 

Table of the first parisy liable declen- 
sj,nn, with Its dialects - - 46 

Contracts of the same - - 47 

IV. Of the second declension of pari- 
syllabics - - - ib. 

The Attic manner of declining, which 
grammarians call the fonrth de- 
clen?.ion of simples - 49 

Table of the second par'syllabic de- 
clension, with its dialects - 50 

Contracts of the same - - - 51 

V. Of the imparisyllabic declension, 
which grammarians call the ffih 
of simple s - - - - 52 

Of the vocative - - - 53 

VI. Of the other cases of the impari- 
syllabic declensmn - - - 55 

The formation of the genitive - ib. 
Of the dative plural - 61- 

VII. Of imparisyllabic contracts 63 
Nouns in «y;, whi<h grammarians 

call the third of contracts - 64 
Nouns in <f and i, by i;rammarians 

csiVeti the second of cnntracis ih. 
Nouns in »?, and neuters in ej amt og 

by grammarians called the f"--' sf 

contracts - - = 55 

Of 



CON 1: E N T S. 



XXIX 



Of fcminiaes in ecg and w, which 
grammarians call the fourth of con- 
tracts -■ . ■ - - - 67 

Of neuters in ac pur-, or iti g«5, which 
grammarians make th'' fifth of 
contracts - ib» 

Contracts tliat vary from the analogy 
j of the pre-ceding - - - 68 

VIII. Of 'rregular nouns, and first of 
those that change their gender ib. 

Irregulars in declension - - 69 

Of defectives - - - 71 

Of indeclinables angmented by ^/ or 

«j>ty . - - - - ~ lb. 

IX. Of the motion or variations 
nouns ; and first of nouns adjec- 
tive - - - - 72 

I/regular adjectives - - - 74 
Of the variation of substantives 75 

X. Of comparatives and superlatrves 

76 
Of their terminations - - ib. 
Manner of forming these compara- 
tives - - - ' ib. 

XI. Of numerals - - - 80 
Observation on the cardinal num- 
bers - - - - 81 

Of ordinals - - - - 8'2 
Of abstractive numbers - - ib. 
Of mnltiplication numbers - - ib. 

XII. Of pronouns; and first of primi- 
tives - - - - 83 

Table of the three primitive pro- 
nouns, with their dialects - - 86 
Of derivatives, whether possessives, 
or gentiles - _ . 87 

Ofdemunstratives and relatives 88 
A table of the demonstratives IxeTvoj 
and arof, and the relative avro(, 
with their dialects - - 89 
Of compound pronouns - - 91 

Annotations on those pronouns ib. 
A table of oo?, with its dialects 92 



BOOK III. 

Of Verbs ; and, first, of those 
in fi. 

Chap. 

I. Of the nature and properties of a 
verb - - - - 93 

Of the different kinds of verbs - 94 
Of C'>jy (ligations - - - ^95 
JI. Observations to learn easily to con- 
jugate - - ' ib. 
Of the characteristic - • ib. 
Of the termination - - 97 
Of the third pei-son plural - - 99 



A table of conjugation- of the verb 
active - - - 100 

III. Of the augment syllabic, and tem- 
poral - - - 102 

Of the syllabic augment - ib. 

Of the temporal augment - 105 
Of verbs that do not change £ into 
n, but make a diphthong of it 107 
Of verbs that retain Of - - 108 

IV. Of the augment of compound 
verbs - - - - ib. 

V. Of Attic and Ionic augments '111 
Of £ changed into », according to the 

Attic form - - - i6. 

prefixed to the temporal augment ; 
7j resolved into £« j £» put for hi or 
^e - - - - 112 

Of the Attic reduplication in the 
perfect - - - 113 

The third syllable of the Attic per- 
fect made short - - ib. 
Of the pluperfect of these verbs 114 
Of tb* Ionic augment - - ib. 
Poetic observations - - 115 

VI. Observation on the persons of the 
dual number - - - ib, 

A table of the dual number - 116 

VII. Of each tense in particular, with 
its dialects - - - 117 

Present - - - ib. 

Imperfect - - - 118 

VIII. Of the first future, and first 
aorist - - - ib. 

Formation of the first future - ib. 
Exception for verbs that have a 

liquid before a - - 119 

Of verbs in at pure, that cast ofi^ tr 

120 
Of polysyllables in i^«, which also 

reject (T - - - 121 

Futures in 6i5<r« or ttuiTw - - 122 
Of futures that receive an aspirate 

ih. 
Formation ofthe first aorist - ib. 
Exception for the penultima - i*. 
Exception for the characteristic of 

the first aorist - - - 124 

IX. Of the second future and second 
aorist - - - 125 

Formation of the second future ib. 
Of verbs that change the characte- 
ristic of the present - - 128 
Of verbs in ^<w or a-a-co - - ib. 
Formation of the second aorist 129 
Ofthe third person plural in a-av 130 

X. Of the perfect and plu-perfect 131 
Characteristic and termination of the 

perfect - - - ib. 

Of the penultima of the perfect 132 
Formation ofthe plu-perfect - 133 
Of the Ionic and Attic persons of this 

tense - - - 134 

XI. Of 



XXX 



CONTENTS. 



Xr. Of the formation of other moods ; 

and first of the subjunctive and 

optative - - - 134 

Of the optative - - ~ 135 

Of the first aorist jEoIic - - 136 

XII. Of the imperative and infinitive 

137 
Of the third person Attic - - ib. 
Of the infinitive - - - 138 

XIII. Of participles - - 140 

XIV. Of the verb passive, and its ter- 
minations - - - 1 4 1 

The passive terminations - - ib. 
Of the third person singular and 

plural - - - 142 

Of the formation of the other persons 

ib. 
Of the passive aorists - - 143 
A table of the conjugation of verbs 

passit'B - - - 144, 145 

XV. Of each passive tense in particu- 
lar i and first of the present and 
imperfect - - - 146 

Present - - - ib. 

Imperfect - - - 147 

XVI. Of the passive futures and 
aorists - - . 148 

Formation of the first future - ih. 
Formation of the second future 150 
Formation of the two passive aorists 

150 
Of the third person iEolic - - 151 

XVII. Of the perfect, pluperfect, and 
paulo-post-fnture - - 152 

Formation of the perfect passive ib. 

Of the third person plural Ionic, of 
the present, perfect and plu-per- 
fect indicative, and likewise of the 
/ third person plural of -the opta- 
tive - - - i56 

Formation of the pluperfect pas- 
sive - - - - 158 

Formation of the paulo-post-future 

159 

XVIII. Of the moods, and of par- 
ticiples - - - ib. 

The subjunctive - - - ib. 

The optative - - - 161 

The imperative - - - 163 
The infinitive - - 165 

Participles - - - ib. 

XIX. Of the middle verb in general 

165 

A table of the conjugation of the 

middle verb - - - 167 

XX. Of the particular tenses of the 
middle verb, with their dialects 

168 



Formation of the two futures indica- 
tive - - - 'J6. 
Of the formation of the two aorists 

169 
Formation of the perfect middle 170 
Of the plu-perfect - - 173 

XXI. Of the other moods, and of the 
participles . _ - ib. 

Subjunctive - - ~ ib. 

Optative - - - - 174 
Imperative - - - ib. 

Infinitive - - - - ib. 
Participles - - - 175 

0/ the second hind of Verbs in 
n, that isy of Circumflex 
Verbs. 

XXII. Of the nature of circumflex^ 
verbs, and the manner of conju-, 
gating them - - - ibv 

The manner of contracting these; 
verbs - - - 176 > 

A table of circumflex verbs active 
178. 175' 
XXII I. Some observations on the tenses i 
capable of contraction in circum- 
flex verbs - - - 1 80 i 

That several change their characte- ■ 
ristic, and therefore vary in their 
contraction - - - ib. 

That syllables in iai are not contract- 
ed throughout - - - ib. 

The contraction of a changed into 
fl - - - - 181 

On the optative - - - 182 

On the infinitive - - ib,. 

XXIV. Of the tenses of circumflex 
verbs, which have the same ana- 
logy with the barytons - 1 83 

Of the penultima of circumflex fu- 
tures - - - ih. 

Of the second future, second aorist; 
and perfect middle of circumflex 
verbs - - - - 184 

Of the other tenses and moods 185 

XXV. Of the passive and middle cir- 
cumflex - - - ib. 

Table of circumflex verbs passive 
186, 187 
Of the perfect passive of circumflex 
verbs - - - - 188 
Of the second person in ^av - ih. 
Of the circumflex verbs middle ib. 

XXVI. Observations on the dialects of 
circumflex verbs - - 189 



600K 



CONTENTS. 



XXXI 



BOOK IV. 



Of the Conjugation of Verbs in 

Chap. 

I. Of the nature and division of verbs 

i„^. - - - ' * ^l\ 
Formation of the verbs in fxi 192 
Table of conjugation of verbs in [Xi 
194, 195 
General observations on the dialects 
of verbs in /-^i ' " ". 1^^ 

II. Of the active tenses in particular, 

with their dialects - - if>. 
Of the indicative of the present tense 

ib. 
Formation of the imperfect - . 198 
That verbs in fxi borrow some tenses 

from circumflex verbs - 199 

Formation of the second aorist 200 

III. Of the other moods, and of the 
participles - - " ^0^ 

Of the subjunctive - - «^. 

Of the optative - - " ^'; 

Formation of the imperative 20-t 
Formation of the second aorist of the 
imperative - - - .- 205 
Of the penultima of the infinitive 206 
Of the termination of participles 207 

IV. Oftbe passive and middle of verbs 
iniott - - - - J^- 

The indicative present - 208 

The subjunctive - - 209 

The optative - - " ^!^ 

The imperative - - - 211 

The infinitive - - - \b' 

The participles - * y>, 

V. Of the tenses of verbs m f^i, that 

conform to the analogy of the bary- 
tonous conjugation - - ib- 
And first of the active - ^b. 

Of the first future - - 211 

Of the first aorist - - 212 

Of the preter-perfect - - ?«• 

Of the participle of the perfect formed 

by syncope - - ' '^,1^ 
Of the passive first future - iH 

- First aorist - " ^^• 

Of the penultima of the preter- 
pevfect - - - '^' 

Of the middle verb - - ^]^ 
Of irregulars in (^ -^ - ^"'* 

YI. Of derivatives from £«, with a 
smooth breathing i and first of 
£i|txi, iwm, I am - - 217 

A table of conjugation of the substan- 
tive verb ilfjtX - - 218 
' Indicative present, with its dialects 

219 



- 219 

- 221 

- ilu 

- ib. 
. ih, 

- ib. 

- 222 
_ ib. 

- a. 

. 226 



Of the imperfect 
The subjunctive 

. Optative 

Imperative 

. Infinitive 

Participle 

Middle 

VII. Of eTjat, IV»> eo, vado 
Of the formation oieT(/,i 
Of InMi eo, vado, I go _ 

VIII. Of verbs derived from primitives 
in la;, with a rough breathing 227 

And first of IV> *"'^^^ ' ' « ' 

IX. Of"lHMAl,'^HMAI, and'^EIMAI,tW/t^a«* 
concupisco - - ' ^^^ 

■^HMAl ierfeo, to sit - - ]^' 

X. Of irregulars in /wj, that are not de- 
rived from a verb in £« or eo; 233 

OUitfj,c^i,jaceo - - - »*• 
Of I'o-M/w,;, scio - - ' arX 

Of (l)^,^^, fZico ■- - - -^^ 



BOOK V. 

Of Defective Verbs, and of the 
Investigation of the Theme, or 
Resolution of Verbs. 

Chap. , . ^, 

I. Of defectives, that have only the 

present and the imperfect; and 

first of verbs in <m pure - 238 

Defectives in a impure - - 239 

II. Of defectives in /wt, that seldom 

have but the present and the im- 
pafect of some moods - 243 

1. Derivatives from a verb in aw. tb^ 

2. From a verb in ia - - 245 

3. From a verb in o« - ' *^* 

4. From a verb in uw - - »»• 

III. Of the other sort of defectives, 
which are unusual in the present 
and in the imperfect - - 248 

Verbs scarce or unusual - ib. 

IV. Of verbs in /wt, that are unusual 
in the present - - - 253 

V. Of defectives that have only the 

third person -■ - - 254 



The Besolution of Verbs y or In- 
"oestigation of the Theme, 

VI. Of the nature and manner of the 

investigation of the theme - . 255 

General rule of the investigation of 

the theme - - ^;^J^^ 



XXXll 



CO N T E N T S. 



VII. Of the derivative verbs, that 
borrow their tenses from their pri' 
mitives - - - 259 

VIII. Of verbs that borrow their tenses 
of other synonymous %'erbs, or 
verbs of the same signification; 
whereof some may be regarded 
as their primitives, or as their de- 
rivatives - - - •269 

IX. Of verbs, which notwithstanding 
that they form their tenses from 
themselves, admit of some extra- 
ordinary change proper to be 
observed - - - 279 



BOOK VL 



Of'lndeclinable Particles^ and of 
the Derivation, Composition, 
and Affection or proper Sig- 
nification of Words, 



Chap. 






I. Of Adverbs 


- 


- 285 


Of Interjections - 


. 


- 287 


II. Of prepositions - 


- 


- 290 


1. Their division 


- 


- ib. 



2. Of the force of prepositions in 
composition - - - 291 

Of inseparable prepofsitions - ih. 

Of the force of separable prepositions 
in composition - - 293 

A list of the prepositions, containing 
a more extensive view of their 
force in composition - - 29i 
. Of the change of prepositions in com- 
pounds - - - 297 

III. Of conjunctions or connexions, 
o'iv^tcry.ot - - - 298 

IV. Of derivative nouns, and first of 
those that are derived from other 
nouns _ - _ 299 

]. Patronymics - - - i6, 
i. Gentiles - - - 300 

3. Possessives -» - 301 

4. Diminutives - - ib. 

5. Augmentatives - " - 303 

6. Denominatives - - ib. 

V. Of derivatives from verbs - 304 

1. From the active - - 305 

2. From the passive - - ih. 

3. Divers terminations that bear a 
relation «o the three foregoing 307 

4. Three other terminations derived 
from the same person, viz. tos, 

TBovt and TVS ' - - 308 

5. From the perfect middle - 310 



VI. Of compound words, and particu- 
larly of nouns - - 311 

1. Compounded of two nouns - ib. 

2. Words compounded with 3, verb 
and a noun - - 313 



BOOK VII. 
Of the Greek Syntax. 

Chap. 

1. Introduction to syntax - 315 

2. Chatjges of syllables, by reason of 
the coiistruction - - 316 

3. Of pointing - 317 

I. How far the Gr«^k conronl differs 

fr .n the l,a m - - 319 

To d.stiogo! h attraction f om go- 
verumeni - ib. 

Of the rel.u:ve 321 

Oftheinfimive - 322 

The manner of supplying «' •' aerund 
in Greek - - 325 

Difficulties relatii)i2 to the govern- 
ment of the infinitive - 326 
Of participles - - 327 
Of a neuter plural joined t » a sin- 
gular - - - 329 

II. How fai the Greek tonnue differs 

from the Latin with respect to 
government ; and first of the pre- 
positions, and of heal interroga- 
tions - - - 330 

The government of prepositions ib. 

A list of Greek prepositions, with 
their particular elegance, and dif- 
ferent governments - - 331 

Of the questions of place - 343 

III. Of the government of the genitive 

344 
Nouns that govern, or are governed 
in the genitive - - , - ib. 

Annotation on the superlative 345 
Remarkable expressions with the 
comparative ' - ib. 

The government of adverbs - 347 
The reason of the government of ad- 
verbs - - - - 348 
Several nouns that are put in the 
genitive - - - - 349 
Nonns of time, that are put in the 
accusative, or in the ablative ib. 
The matter and the price in the ab- 
lative - - - - 350 
Several verbs that govern a genitive 
351 

IV. The government of the dative 355 
The government of the accusative 

357 
V. Of 



CONTENTS. 



XXXIU 



Y, Of the passive verb - - 300 

That in Greek there are three abso- 
lute cases - - - 361 

The manner of resolving the absolute 
construction _ - - 363 

Whether the nominative case be an 
absolute case - - 364 

Whether the absolute case ought al- 
ways to be referred to a different 



person 



165 



VI. Observations on different govern- 
ments - « ^ - 366 

3. Different governments joined toge- 
ther - . . . i^. 

2. Variety in the sense by reason of 
the difference of government 366 

3. Difference of government in verbs 
compounded with prepositions il>. 

4. The expressions changed by vir- 
tue of the government - 367 

VII. Observations on figurative con- 
struction - - - ilf. 

1. Ellipsis - - - 367 
First list, of several nouns understood 

in Greek authors - - 369 
Second, list, of verbs, or participles 

understood - - - 371 

Third list, of prepositions understood 

372 

Zeugma - - - - 373 

2. Pleonasm - - - 574 

3. Syllepsis - - - ib. 
Relative syllepsis ' - - 375 

4. Hyperbaton - - 376 



BOOK VIII. 

Containing particular Remarks 
on all the Parts of Speech, 

Chap. 

I. Remarks on the nouns ; and first of 

the irregularities of construction, 
vulgarly fancied by the gramma- 
rians - - ' - - 377 

II. Whether the Greeks have an abla- 

tive case - - - 379 

III. Construction of numerals - 383 
Combination of numbers - 384 
Divers particles made use of in the 

expressing of numbers - ib. 

IV. Remarks on the article - 386 

V. That the article is often taken for 

the demonstrative and the relative, 
or vice versd ; as also for tlq j and 
the reason of these changes - 388 

VI. Remarks on the pronouns; and 
first of reciprocals and relatives 

390 



Of possessives - - ^391 
VII. Of some nouns derived from pro- 
nouns ; and first of the relatives of 
quality, oioq and iiroicf - 392 

Of c'tro? and Toa-aroq - - 39ii 

Vm. Remarks on ihe verbs - ib, 
1. That we must consider the nature 
of the verbs - - . ib. 
1. Of rnks-yja and I'^i'ihta - 396 

IX. That we must consider the nature 
of the tenses - - 397 

1. Of the first aorist - - ib. 

2. Of the perfect and aorists 398 

3. Of the middle aorists - ib, 

X. That we are to consider the nature 

and disposition of the moods ib^ 

1 . Of the indicative, the subjunctive, 
and the optative - - ib, 

2. Of the imperative and iiifinitive 

400 

3. That the infinitive is not put for 
the subjunctive - - »^- 

4. The infinitives and participles of 
all tenses - - - 401 

5- Of verbals in sjv - - ih. 

Of two more remarkable expressions, 

and more difficult to resolve 402 

XI. Remarl<s on the indeclinable parti- 
cles ; and first of on - 403 

1. That oTi is always a relative ib. 

2. "On fji,^* nisi - - - 406 

3. "Ot<, qudm _ - - 407 

XII. Of the prepositions - ib. 
Variation of the same phrase caused 

by prepositions - - 408 

The signification of a word changed 
by a preposition - - 409 

Remarkable signification of aero 410 
Periphrasis of af/.<pi and we^j - ib. 
Difficulty concerning those peri- 
phrases - - - 411 
Whether to'remove the ambiguity the 
verb may be put in the singular 
ib. 

XIII. Of the particle ws, ut - 412 

XIV. Of the negative particles 414 
Of [A.vTTors - - - 415 

XV. Of the particle av - - 416 

2. "av, with the infinitive and the par- 
ticiples - - - 417 

3. "Av, in interrogations - - ib, 

4. "Av, expletive or redundant, and 
elliptic or understood - 418 

5. Remarkable force of the particle 
av in abridging - - ib. 

XVI. Of some other particles necessary 
for connexion or transition in dis- 
course - - - - ib. 

1. Ofthose that connect things ib. 

2. Of those that import distinction 

419 
3. Of 



XXXIV 



C O N T j: N T S. 



3. Of those that are made use of, in 
the continuance of the discourse 

420 

4. Of those that are made use of to 
express a doubt - - 421 

5. Of those that are used in infe- 
rences, or conclusions - 422 

6. Of adversative particles - ib. 



m 



BOOK IX. 

0/ Quantitr/f Accents, Dialectsy 
and Poetic Licences. 

Of the Quantity of Syllables. 

Chap. 

I, Some general rules of quantity 423 

1. Observations on mutes and liquids 

ih. 

2. Of long or short syllables in ge- 
neral . - « - 424 



II. Of the particular rules of quanti^ 

425 
And first of the three common vowels 

before thcpcnultima - ib. 

General rule of the three vowels, «, 

I, V ' - - - ib, 

III. Of the three common vowels of 
the penultima - - 428 

IV. Of the three common vowels at 
the end of words - - 433 

V. Two observations concerning the 

quantity of nouns and verbs 435 

VI. On the nature and division of ac- 
cents, of their general analogy, and 
that they are ncrftobe confounded 
with quantity - - 437 

VII. The rules of accents ; and first of 
nouns - - - 441 

VIII. Of the accents of verbs - 450 

IX. Of enclitics - - - 455 
Of breathings - - - 461 

X. Divers observations regarding the 

accents and distinction of words 
463 

XI. Of the four dialects in general 465 

XII. Of the poetic licences - 471 

XIII. Observations on the liberty of 
Greek versification r 475 



NEW AND EASY METHOD 



OF LEARNING THE 



:o "jd:.- 



GREEK TONGUEo 



TTTT 

B O O K I. 
OF LETTERS AKD SYLLABLES. 



CHAP. I. 

General Division of this Work, 

THIS new method containeth an easy manner of 
learning the principles of the Greek tongue and 
grammar. 

The Greek grammar is the art of speaking and 
writing this language correctly. 

This language is either to be considered generally, 
according to the practice of the several nations 
that spoke it; which is called the common tongue : 
or particularly, according to the manner of speaking 
in use among particular people, which manner we 

call DIALECTS, 

- • B These 



2 BOOK I. 

These dialects are principally four ; viz. the Attic, 
the Ionic, the Doric, and the ^olic; to which we 
may reduce some others less known, as the Boeotian, 
the Cyprian, and such like ; adding thereto the poe- 
tical licences, as we shall more particularly observe 
in the ninth book. 

Of these four the Attic is the most considerable, 
2^ the most elegant, and most diffused through the 
common tongue; which last makes no distinct dialect, 
but is compounded principally of the Attic, with a 
mixture of the rest. 

The parts of the Greek grammar, whether con- 
sidered in general with regard to the common tongue, 
or in particular according to its several dialects, are 
two, viz. etymology, and syntax. 

Etymology treats of separate words ; and syntax 
considers their connexion and structure in dis- 
course. 

Words are compounded of letters and syllables. 

Letters are the smallest parts of words. The 
Greeks call them r^tx^Ia, viz. elemental or y£ajt*/Aa7«> 
littercBy whence cometh the word grammar ; as from 
littera the Latins have sometimes also called it Utte- 
ratura, as may be seen in Quintilian, and in St. 
Augustin in his second book of order, chap. 12. 

In letters, we are to consider their number, figure, 
name, power, pronunciation, and division : which 
includes the interchanging of these letters, according 
to the relation they bear to each other. 



CHAP. 



O/" Letters and Syllables. 
CHAP. 11. 



3 



Of Letters in general 

The Greeks have £4 letters, whose figure, name, 
and power are as follow. 



Figure. 
1. A <K 

Bpe 
r-y r 

Ef 

zee 

I * 

A A 

M /w. 

Ni/ 

O 
n 7«r TT 

17. p e p 

18. 2.0-? 

19. Tt1 

20. T u 

21. ^ (p 

23. ^4/ 

24. ^ « 



Name, 



2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 
7. 
8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 



fAU 

vv 

f 

col 

0"ry|M, fit 

TfitU 



Alpha 

Beta 

Gamma 

Delta 

E parvum 

Zeta 

Eta 

Theta 

Iota 

Cappa 

Lambda 

Mu 

Nu 

Xi 

O parvum 

Pi 

Rho 

Sigma 

Tau 

T parvum 

Phi 

Chi 

Psi 

O magnum o long 



Po'wer, 
a, 
b. 

d. 

e short, 
z ds. 
e long. 
th. 

i vawtL 
k, c. 
1. 
m. 
n. 

X. 

o short, 

P- 
r, 

s. 

t. 

u. 

ph. 

ch. ^ 

ps. 



ANNOTATION. 

Of these letters Cadmus introduced 16, from Phoenicia into 
Greece, where he settled as early as the time of the first judges of 
Israel : and these letters are, 

A, B, r, A, E, I, K, A, M, N, O, n, P, 2, T, T; 
which alone are sufficient to express all the different sounds of the 
Greek language : the other eight were invented afterwards more for 
conveniency than necessity. 

Of the^e eight Palamedes invented four at the siege of Troy, 
viz. in the year of the world 2800, according to Petavius, and 

upwards 



1 



4 BOOK I. 

upwards of 250 years after the arrival of Cadmus, viz. S, and the 
three aspirates, ©, 4>, X; though some ascribe and X to Epi- ^ 
charmus. 1 

Simonides, whom Eusebius placeth in the 61st Olympiad, -which 
is near 650 years after the Trojan war, invented the remaining 
four, viz. H, n, and z, ¥ : but the addition of these letters shaB 
hereafter be better accounted for. 

CHAP. III. 

Of the Division and Change of Letters, 

JLjETTERS may be considered either alphabetically 
or arithmetically. 

Letters taken alphabetically are divided into vowels 
and consonants ; into (puvmvroc (sup. y^cciJi,(Aocrix) and 
cvfA(pcavo<. : which is done by certain classes, according 
to which these letters are easily changed, one for the 
other. 

' ' Vowels are those whicTi form a sound of themselves: 
and these may be considered either separately, or con- 
junctively. Vowels taken separately are divided into 
long, short, and doubtful. 

Rule I. 
Of vowels, long, short, and doubtful. 

The long mzvels are n, 00. 

The short are . f, 0. 

The doubtful a, i^ and u. 

Examples. 
The Greeks reckon seven vowels, viz. 

, 2 long, fxocK^oo n w (■ which correspond and are often 

2 short, P^oiX^oc £ 1 changed one for the other. 

3 common, xotvol (x i v. These last are so called, not 
only because they are sometimes long in particular words, and 
short in others ; but because they are sometimes doubtful, since 
they may be either long or short in the same word. 

ANNOTATION. 

The Greeks had formerly but five vowels as in Latin, viz. 
A, E, I, O, U : the ^ and u were afterwards added to mark the 
difference in quantity. 

This is easily proved from Plato in his Cratylus, where having 
eaid, that the ancients wrote l/Atf* ^^^ nt^^^o^'i lie adjoins, ov yxp 



Of Letters and Syllables. 5 

^ I^Xw/xeQ-^, aXXa t roiraXxtov. For heretofore ive did not make use of 
7,, but only of e. The same is further evinced from Plutarch in his 
book of ff. And on the Farnesian columns, brought to Rome from 
the Via Appia, we still find E for vj, AEMETPOs for AV'J'^f^j 
KOPES for Ko^*jf, and such like. As also o for w, AOION for Aw/ot, 
0EON for ^Euv, and the like. 

Terentianus has very clearly expressed the nature of these two 
vowels vt and u in the following verses, 

Litteram namque E videmus esse ad virx proxhnarrij 
Sicut 8^ u videntur esse vicina sibi : 
Temporiim momenta distant^ non soni nativitas. 
He says that they differ only in quantity, and not in the natural 
and essential sound, though the long ones are pronounced fullir 
than the short. 

- Pronunciation of riroi, 

''Hra being a long E ought to be pronounced full, as e in the 
French words bete, fete, &c. whereas l-^tXov should be short and 
close, as e' final in the French word riettete. . But ^ra ought to have 
a middle sound betwixt s and x, as there is a relation between 
it and these two vowels, which we shall often have occasion to 
observe. 

Thus Eustathius, who lived towards the close of the twelfth 
century, says that ^*}, /S??, is a sound made in imitation of the 
bleating of sheep, and quotes to this purpose the following verse 
of an ancient writer called Cratinus ; 

Is fatiius 'perinde ac avis be, be, dicens incedit. 
And the same is attested by Varro. 

St. Augustin, in his second book of the Christian doctrine, says 
that BETA, voith the same sound and pronunciation^ signifieth a letter 
amongst the Greeks, and an herb among the Latins, 

And it is thus also that Juvenal hath called this letter : 
Hoc discunt omnes ante alpha 8^ beta puellce. 
This is still further demonstrated by the term alphabet, which 
is used to this very day in almost all vulgar languages. And these 
authorities are sufficient to ascertain not only the pronunciation 
of '/J, but also that of /3. As they are both yet further proved from 
antiquity by the word Beel, which is the same as B5jXos-, Belus, 
father of Ninus king of the Assyrians, who had divine honours 
paid him by the Babylonians. 

Pronunciation of «. 

'H/Asyai ought also to be distinguished from o/a/x^ov in the pro- 
nunciation : this last being pronounced on the extremity of the 
lips ; and the other in the hollow of the mouth, as being of a fuller 
sound. Caninius and Sylburgius are both of this opinion : and 
Terentianus, who lived before St. Augustin, teacheth expressly 
the^ame in these verses : 

€1 Grajugenum longior, altera est fgura. 
Alter sonus, temporumque nota variata, 

Jgitur 

ir 



6 BOOK I. 

Igitur sonitum reddere, cum voles, mnori, 

Retrorsus adactam modice teneto linguam, 

Rictu neque magno, sat erit patere labra. 

At longior alto tragicum sub oris antro 

Mollita rotundis acuit sonum labellis. 
This difference of o long and short is also found in the French 
tongue, where il saute, (saltat) is pronounced differently from 
une sotte (stulta:) coste (costa) from une cotfe,&c. 

Pronunciation of v. 

'T-^fXov was heretofore pronounced like a French «, whereas the 
Latin U was sounded like the French ou, as has been shewn in the 
new method of learning the Latin tongue: for the Greek T, accord- 
ing to Capella, Terentianus, and Priscian, l^ad a middle sound be- 
twixt ov and t$jrsc. Whence Capella saith, that it was pTonounced 
by breathing softly, and at the same time closing the lips. And Ari- 
stophanes in his Plutus designing to express the sound a man makes 
at a particular smell, while at the same time he draws his breath 
very fast, puts l, l, l, I, l, &c. 

Hence it appears that the pronunciation of this letter was diffe- 
rent from that of /. And those who pronounce it in this manner, 
and consequently give the same sound to five or six other vowels or 
diphthongs, viz. t, v, rj, oi, tty vi, introduce a strange confusion 
into the Greek tongue ; as there are a great many words, which it 
would be tlien impossible to distinguish by the sound. 



C H A P, IV. 

Of Diphthongs. 

JJiPHTHONGS are formed of vowels joined to- 
gether: the word is entirely Greek, JtVOoyfo*, double 
sounding. They are generally reckoned twelve, 
which are divided into two classes; six propei;, and 
six improper. 

Rule II; 

Of diphthongs proper and improper. 

1. F roper diphthongs are aV, au, », £u, oV, q^j. 

2. Improper a, ^, w, >iu', m, uV. 

3. These diphthongs ore often changed^ resolved, or 

cut off: 

Exam- 



Of Letters and Syllables. 

Example s. 

The six proper are, The six improper, 

«( Mou(x, Maia, a e^aiTcx Thrassa, 

SI iToc Eia, *7 0^v?(r<r^ Tfirtssa. 

T^oXoc Troia w 'VL^uh^ Herod€S, 



01 



ociiPoc Aura. \ ,N 7.^^>..„ 

iuys , Euge. J 

ou w^9u urbiu, wu mro^y for auVo?, ipse. 



u> ''A^Trmoc Harpuia. 
All diphthongs end with a * or a u : hence these 
two vowels are called subjunctive, or following, and 
the others prepositive. 

1. The proper diphthongs are formed of a. or of the 
two short vowels e and o, joined each with * and after- 
wards with u. The Greeks call them fu^«i/oi, ben^ 
sonanteSy because they give the distinct sound of the 
two vowels. 

2. The improper are derived from the proper, as 
may be seen in the examples above : but there are two 
,sorts ; the one silent, oc(puvoiy viz, the three subscribed, 
a, «, w, which have a lur» written under them, only 
to shew, that, according to the received opinion of 
the learned, it was no longer pronounced ; for which 
reason some have neglected also to subscribe it. They 
used however frequently to place it on the side of 
capital letters, as At, Ht," n*, though afterwards the 
custom prevailed of subscribing it to these, as well 
as to the smaller letters. 

The others are called male sonantes, xaxo^wi/o», 
being more difficult to pronounce, especially viv 
and wu, by reason of the long' vowel before u. For 
as to the last diphthong vi, it seems to have been 
placed in this class, only to make an equality in the 
division ; since it may well pass for a proper diphthong, 
as Ramus, Crantzius, and several others have ranked 
it. But it is never used except before a vowel, as 
Herodian the grammarian has observed. 

3. These diphthongs are oftentimes changed, either 
the proper into improper, or vice versa, according 
to the relation they bear to each other: or in 

some 



8 BOOK I. 

some other particular way, of which we shall have 
occasion to speak hereafter. They are often also re- 
solved, whether the subjunctive, being marked with 
two points over it, makes a separate syllable, as WtV 
for zraXq, puer; Av\roi for Ariro7, Latonce; which is 
called diaeresis, or division : or whether the diphthong 
is changed into two simple vowels according to its 
value, as n into «, or into ««, and the like. 

They are also cut off; either in part losing their 
prepositive, as a^ttm, linquOf iXiTrov; ^ivyuy fugio, s^u- 
yov ; or their subjunctive, as xXa/w, >tXaw,^eo ; ;^fo/a. 
;^^oa, color: or altogether, as dysi^co, uy^u, Att. con- 
gregOs Which is sufficient to remark in general, in 
order to refer hereto what we shall hereafter more 
particularly observe. 

Pronunciation of proper diphthongs. 

The pronunciation of these diphthongs is almost sufficiently ex- 

Sressed in the examples added to the rule. They must have a 
ouble sound, so as to make the ear distinguish two vowels, other- 
wise they are no longer diphthongs : but this should be all with the 
same breath, and without dividing the voice ; otherwise they 
would be two separate vowels. 

All the vulgar languages have their diphthongs, where the 
double sound is I^eard in the same syllable, without offending the 
ear, as in French payejis, del, cieux, heau, &c. Hence the Greek 
tongue ought not to be deprived of those which are peculiar to it. 



Of 



at. 



The diphthong at therefore requires both these letters to be 
sounded, and not an open e, which would confound it with »». 

The Romans, according to Quintilian, formerly pronounced this 
diphthong by an a. and /, in the same manner as the Greeks. The 
same is likewise attested by Scaurus an ancient grammarian, who 
says, that the Latins having borrowed this diphthong of the 
Greeks, and having afterwards changed it for <^, they still pro- 
nounced it in such a manner, as to distinguish the two vowels. 
The authority of the poets, who divided ai into two syllables, 
as Virgil in these genitives auldi, pict'di, &c. is sufficient to prove, 
that the sound of those two letters was distinguished in the diph- 
thong, otherwise they could never have found an x and an < 
in the sound of a simple e. 

The interjection aJ, a;, being used as an expression of pain 
among the Greeks, as may be seen in Aristophanes, Sophocles, 
Lucian, and others, has also the same signification in Fcench, 
having retained the same sound. 

Therefore 



Of Letters ^;2rf Syllables. 9 

Therefore the right pronunciation of this diphthong is that 
which has still remained in Mflm, Graius, Naiades^ and which is 
nearly the same as in these French words, fayance, Mayence, 
payerif ayant, &c. with this exception that in French we hear 
something like a silent e after this diphthong, for which reason 
it never precedes a consonant, but has alwaj's after it another 
vowel ; whereas in Greek it is used indiscriminately, as well before 
vowels as diphthongs, because the i passes quicker, not in the 
least partaking of the sound of the French silent e : so that to 
pronounce it exactly, it is requisite to sustain the a, and finish 
short upon the /, to the end that both letters may have their distinct 
sound, as Quintilian observes, while they make but one syllable. 

Of u. 

Et was also pronounced by two vowels, and bad a fuller sound 
than iuiTx. 

Hermogenes, treating of the final cadence of periods, saith, 
that diphthongs and vowels are generally graceful at the end of 
words ; though to this rule h ivas an exception ; but if they ended 
xjoith a single /, as that vowel rather closes the mouth than f Us it, the 
sentence then has nothing sonorous or sublime. Whereby be mani- 
festly shows, that though the sound of h be less full than that of 
other diphthongs, it is still however diflPerent from that of a single 
/, since he makes so particular a distinction between them. 

Of au and fu. 

The other diphthongs are easy ; av was pronounced as in aurumi 
autem, only giving it a little more of the a, as is practised in several 
provinces in France. 

Aristophanes, to express the barking of a dog, makes him say 
av XV ; and this pronunciation should be observed in UxZxos, as 
well as in Paulus, since the Greek word is borrowed of the 
Latin. 

Ev is pronounced as in euge, eucharistia, where the e is always 
sounded a little. 

The opinion of those who pronounce Iv as ef, av as of, is almost 
universally exploded, not only because there never was a diphthong 
compounded of a vowel and a consonant, but also because there 
never was such a letter asy in the Greek alphabet. Besides, if the 
foregoing pronunciation were to stand, we should say of instead of 
ov ; which would be quite ridiculous. 

Of ot and o\j. 

0/ ought to be pronounced as in Oileus ; hoi for hei in Terence ; 
guoi for cui in old authors ; proinde, of two syllables Jn Virgil, and 
such like. Ramus, who has been followed by several, says, that 
it ought to be pronounced as the French words moi, toiy sot. But 
the other pronunciation seems softer, and more natural, and is more 
generally received. 

As for ov most people seem to pronounce it tolerably well: 
only the o should be sustained a little to produce the double sound ; 

C otherwise 



10 



BOOK I. 



Otherwise it would have only the force of the Latin u, which 
was pronounced like ov with a simple sound. This diphthong can- 
not be better represented to the ear than by the noise of things 
falling to the ground, pou. 



CHAP. V. 

Of Consonants. 

Consonants are letters that cannot form a 
sound, unless they be joined to vowels. They are 
divided into mutes (i'(pm»), liquids or immutables, 
(vy§», dfAsroiQoXoc) and double consonants (inrXci); to 
which we may add g- of which the double are 
compounded. 

Rule HI. 
Of the division of mutes. 

1. There are three smooth mutes - - -zsr, x, r. 
Three intermediate l3> 7, <^. 

And three rough - - - - - - <?^ X» ^' 

2. These according to their rank are easily e.vchanged 
for one another. 

Examples. 



1, The mutes 
are nine, 



3 smooth, i}/»A£*, - - 
3 intermediate, fxeVa, 
3 rough, 3oc(ri06, - - 



1 


2 


3 


TT 


y. 


T 


P 


y 


J 


<P 


X 


a 



2. These mutes should be considered in their 
rank perpendicularly ; according to which those of 
the first rank, for example, are easily changed one for 
the other : in like manner those of the second and 
third ; for instance, p^trwi', xtrwv, tunica ; dKoiv^iov, dp(^ocv' 
riovi spincd genuSy &c. 

This change is made very naturally : for the inter- 
mediate become insensibly smooth, when they are 
pronounced somewhat too softly; as on the contrary 
they become aspirates, when they are sounded with a 

little more force. 

Pranun- 



Of Letters and Syllables. il 

Pronunciation of Aspii^ates, 

This difference should not be neglected in the pronunciation, 
as even in French we distinguish the aspirated H, there being a 
wide difference in the pronunciation between hauteur and auteur, 
hache and ache, a sort of herb, 8^c. 

4> therefore ought not to be pronounced like a simple^ because^ 
has no aspiration. Quintilian remarks, that Cicero rallied a Greek, 
who used to pronounce Fundanius like ^undanius; viz. Pfhundanius 
according to Lipsius, or rather Fhundanius according to S^'lburgius. 

Pronunciation of ^, 

The pronunciation of /3, which was formerly controverted* 
several saying vi^a instead of beta, seems now to be universally 
agreed to ; and what has been already mentioned concerning -n, is 
sufficient to establish it. 

The old Syrians called it also heta, whereas the Hebrews gave it 
the name of beth. And the ancient Greeks used to write beta with 
an e, whence the Latins have taken only the first syllable be. Which 
made Ausonius say ; 

Dividuum betce^ monosyllabum Italicum B, 
Therefore if the Greeks had pronounced vita, or even bita with 
an i, the Romans in all appearance would have been to blame not 
to follow the same denomination of this letter. 

Nor will it avail to object, that they have sometimes used /3 
instead of v consonant, as SeC^^oj for Severus ; for this is no proof 
that /3 was pronounced like v consonant, but only sheweth that 
the Greeks had no character to express the Latin v consonant ; be- 
cause the i^olic digamma, which supplied its room, was never 
universally adopted by the Greeks, and was even but of a very 
short duration among the iEolics. Hence it is that we oftner find 
Isovvi^oq than ZeCij^oj ; the first being upwards of a dozen times in 
Goltzius's medals, whereas the other is not there above thrice. 
They used also to write Ivyi^os, oya^wv, ovs^ytXios, ovBtjirxriecvos^ &c« 

as may be seen in Suidas, and other authors. 

Gaza translating this passage of Tully on old age, Turpione Am- 
bivio tnagis delectabatur, has put, l9r< Tv^ftiuvi ^AfxQt^lu vthraci. 
Where having used /3 promiscuously for b and v, it is evident, 
that the latter was put there merely through necessity, since its 
natural pronunciation appears sufficiently in the former. Plutarch 
writes sometimes Is^l^ws, and other times Is^ovios, 

They have also made use of Y to express this same V con- 
sonant, as CETHPOC, Severus, YEcnASiANOS, Vespasiaims, 
{where another sort of sigma is used, of which we shall give an ac- 
count presently.) Hence it is that David in some editions of 
Scripture is written with a /3, AaC<S, and in others with a v, 

Pronunciation of y. 

^ r retains every where the same pronunciation as the French 
give to g before a, o, and w, as galantf fagot, aigu. It is therefore 

wrong 



12 BOOK I. 

wrong to say olytsXos, with a soft pronunciation in the middle, as 
in the French word a7?ge, or in faif fauraiy and the like words 
with an j consonant. 

Rule IV. 

Of liquids or immutables. 

Liquids .or immutables are A, P, M, and N. 

Examples. 

These four letters are called liquids, because they 

pass quickly in the pronunciation ; and immutables, 

because they are not easily changed. Hence it is, 

that when they are in the nominative of a noun, they 

continue in the other cases ; and when they are in the 

present tense of a verb, they remain in the future, 

and often in the preterit. 

Nevertheless they are sometimes changed in words, 

one for the other, especially as we have arranged 

them, viz. a for ^, and /a for v. or vice versa. 

Pronunciation of the other consonants. 

The pronunciation of all the other consonants is easy, each 
being sounded according to its power: for the opinion of 
those, who maintain that v is to be pronounced like a /x before 
/3, -zj, /x, for instance, torn bion, for rov jSiov, is sufficiently 
condemned by Qiiintilian, when he says that no Greek word ends 

' with a fA. ; because it is certain, that to?7i would then end with a ^. 
True it is, that as v is changed into y before x, y, %, this y 
assumes a new sound somewhat like that of a French 7i, a.y[zXos be- 
ing pronounced in the first syllable as angelus, angel : and so in 
ly%f/A>, ungere, inungere, 'ojsipscfKx, apparui, and ey^o?, hasta. But 
then it does not so much supply the place of a y, as of a new 
character, necessary to express this sound, which is neither that 
of a gamma, nor of a Greek v, as the reader may see in the trea- 
tise of letters in the New Method of learning the Latin Tongue, 

It is moreover to be observed, that v is changed into ^ in com- 
position before the first rank of mutes, -cr, /3, 9, as also before /x, 
as for instance av{ji(pKsyu}^ comburo, from a-iiv, voith, and (pxiyu^ to 
burn : but then it is no longer a v final, because the particle unites 
into one word : nor is it a v pronounced like a /a, but a real fA ; 
though produced by the change of v, which cannot remain in the 

, same word before these letters: concerning which see what is 
further observed in the sixth book, chap. 2. 

Rule V. 

Of double letters, and "the letter a-. 

The double letters are ij/, J, ^. 

Which are resolved by cr. 

Exam- 



O/" Letters aj^d Syllables. 13 

Examples. 
The double letters are three, all of which include 
the letter g- with one of the mutes to which they bear 
a relation, according as we have marked them in the 
rule, thus : 

^, I, c 

(pa- x^ 

ANNOTATION. 

The double letters are nothing more than abbreviations in writ- 
ing for the letters which we see they contain. The utility of 
this observation will appear as well in the formation of the geni- 
tive of the imparisyllabic declension, as in the formation of the 
future tense of verbs. 

? is equivalent to ^a-, whence the Dorics' by transposition have 
taken their o-^, saying ahix; for ^sy^, a^vyos for ^sZyoq. 

This letter seems even to have had formerly some sort of relation 
to y : in regard to which see the treatise of letters in the Metliod 
of learning the Latin tongue. 

Of G-Tyfjt.oc, 

Though a- be alone in the division of letters, we may join it 
nevertheless with the double letters, not only because it consti- 
tutes a part of them, but also because they have all a hissing 
sound. 

This letter should be taken notice of, as having a particular 
relation to the last rank of mutes, t, ^, ^, which is the reason, 
that nouns ending in a-, and increasing in the genitive, do form 
their cases by one of these three consonants ; and that verbs, which 
have for their characteristic one of these three letters, take a single 
a in their future, as we shall see hereafter in the second and third 
book. 

X had formerly the figure of a Latin c, as Terentianus has 
observed ; 

I similiter 'lurac credi, S^ C potest quod sigma sit. 
We find it also thus shaped in ancient inscriptions, AIOCKOPOC, 
Dioscoros ; CAPAniAOC ; Sarapidos ; 4)AATI0C, Flavios, &c. 

Thence it is, that the name of sigma did scAnetimes denote 
whatever was in the shape of a crescent or half moon, as in the 
description of Constantinople, Porticum semirottindum, guce ex simi- 
litudine JabriccB sigma Grcecornm vccabido mincupatur* And we 
have still a sort of C a good deal in this form. 

Pronunciation of <r. 

The pronunciation of a- ought to be finii and intire, as well be- 
tween two vowels, as in any other place. Wherefore it is to be 
pronounced in Xqvav^s in the same manner as in o-^j, tuce : though 
in French we pronounce chryses differently from ses, 

CHAP. 



H BOOK I. 

CHAP, VI. 

Of Letters comidered Arithmetically, 

J-iETTERS are taken arithmetically, when they are used to ex- 
press numbers : which may be considered in two different manners, 
one natural, the other artificial. 

The natural manner is, when the letters mark the numbers ac- 
cording to the alphabetical order ; so that A signifies 1 ; B 2 ; and 
fl 24 ; as we see in the order of books in the Iliad, and elsewhere. 

The artificial manner is twofold : one by all the letters divided 
according to their classes ; the other by some particular letters. 

The division of letters by classes is threefold. The first is of the 
digit number or of units : this is done by the eight first letters 
with this other character r, which is put in the sixth place to 
signify 6, and is called l-TricrTj/xov Fay, or l7r/<r»)/M-oy only. 

The second is of tens, which is done by the eight following 
letters with this character q or |, which is put in the ninth place to 
signify 90, and is called ytoir'nu. 

The third class is of hundreds, containing the eight last letters 
with this other figure 7^, which they put also in the ninth place to 
signify 900 ; and that they called sanpi, because it is made of 
a sigma inverted with a tt in the middle. 

These numerical figures may be represented thus according to 
their classes: 

I. Units. II. Tens, III. Hundreds, 



A «' 


1. 


I / 


10. 


P f' 


100 


Bf3' 


2. 


K K 


20. 


2 / 


200 


Ty' 


3. 


AX' 


30. 


T t' 


soo. 


Ai' 


4. 


M(«.' 


40. 


r u' 


400. 


E i 


5. 


N v' 


50. 


^ <p 


500. 


/ 

5" 


6. 


3 r 


60. 


xpc' 


600. 


zc 


7. 


O .' 


70. 


^ ij.' 


700. 


HV 


8. 


nw' 


80. 


n (J 


800. 


ey 


9. 


q i' 


90. 


^ 


900. 



These letters are all marked with a short stroke over them ; but 
to signify a thousand, and so on, the stroke is put underneath: 
so that a. signifies a thousand, /3^ two thousand; /^ in like manner 
signifieth ten thousand ; f, a hundred thousand, and so on. 

As for the combination of these numbers, there is no difficulty 
in it: for instance, if you put tx, this makes 11: x/3', 22: Ay', 
33 : fS', 104, &c. And if you put ae, with a stroke under the first 
letter, and another over the last, this makes 1005, &c. Thus ^x^^ 
makes the year 1655. But it will not be amiss to give here 
a particular table of the combination of numbers. 

Table 



Of Letters ^nd Syllables. 



15 



Table of the Combinatmi of Number's, 







P' 


y 


«r 




1 


C 


/ 


d' 


1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 


8 


9 


/ 


(X 


1^ 


.y' 


/S' 


.1 


IT 


'?' 


/i5 


<Q' 


10 


11 


12 


13 


14 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


x' 


KOS' 


K/3' 


V 


xS' 


xl 


xr' 


"^ 


yfh 


H^ 


20 


21 


22 


23 


24 


25 


26 


27 


28 


29 


>: 


Xa 


X/3' 


Xy' 


AS' 


Xc 


x/ 


^r 


X4 


xd' 


30 


31 


32 


33 


34 


35 


36 


37 


38 


39 


f! 


y.cx. 


f>^i3' 


/>cy 


^y 


f^l 


>r' 


^? 


• 


f.d' 


40 


41 


42 


43 


44 


45 


46 


47 


48 


49 


• 




v^' 


W 


v^ 


V£ 




v? 


vn 


vS' 


50 


51 


52 


53 


54 


55 


56 


57 


58 


59 


r 


l« 


13' 


ly 


1^ 


1^' 


Ir 


1? 


l>i 


|0' 


60 


61 


62 


63 


64 


65 


66 


67 


68 


69 


I 


0(X 


0/3' 


oy 


oy 


oi 


or' 


0? 


o-h 


0& 


70 


71 


72 


73 


74 


75 


76 


77 


78 


79 


9/ 


'no. 


TT^' 


ity 


itl' 


TTE 


^r' 


'^i' 


cir>) 


w9' 


80 


81 


82 


83 


84 


85 


86 


87 


88 


89 


4' 


^^ 


^/3' 


^y' 


^y 


4^ 


4r' 


^f 


4>J 


0' 


90 


91 


92 


93 


94 


95 


96 


97 


98 


99 



100. 200. 300. 400. 500. 600. 700. 800. 900. 1000. 



f' 



-/ 



%' 



^' 



? 



The manner of computing by particular letters, is done by 
these six capitals, i, n, A, H, X, M, each denoting the number of 
which it form^ the initial letter. 

Thus I signifies one, because it is taken from Ta, which was used 
for ^/a, una, 

n signifies five, because it comes from 'cjivrty quinque, * 

A stands for ten, as coming from Sf'xa, decern. 

H denotes a hundred, because as it stood formerly for an aspi- 
ration, it was the initial letter of the word HEKATON, centum, 

X denotes a thousand by reason of %/X/a, mille, 

M signifies ten thousand, because ofp^i^tx, decies mille. 

And all these letters may be four timesvdoubled (excepting «r, 
which is never doubled) or multiplied with the rest to form all 
numbers whatever; as li, 2. in, 3. nil, 4. AA, 20. AAA, 30. 
A AAA, 40. Thus AT, 11. AAI, 21. HI, 6. AH, 15. &c. 

But if these very letters are inclosed in a great n (excepting i, 
which is never inclosed, because an unit cannot be multiplied) 
this denotes that the number of the letter inclosed, is to be repeated 
five times. Thus I^I is five times ten, viz. 50. I H I five times a 

f hundred 



16 BOOK I. 

hundred, vfz. 500. 1 X I five times a thousand, viz. 5000, &c. And 
in the same manner to combine I A Ii, 51. I A In, 55.^ I A 1a, 60. i 



and so on. 



CHAR VII. 

Of Syllables in general 

XA-FTER having treated of letters, we proceed now to syl- 
lables. 

The word syllable comes from the Greek a-vXXotQsTv, to assemble 
or put together : consequently it is a junction of two or more let- 
ters. Nevertheless there are not oaly syllables, but even intire 
words of a single letter, as in Latin i, go, the imperative of eo ; 
and in Greek, o hie, the' masculine article, &c. 

Syllables therefore may be divided into simple and compound : 
the simple is that which consists of a single letter, viz. a vowel, 
as in the examples above cited : the compound is that which in- 
cludes two or more letters, such as diphthongs, or consonants joined 
to vowels or diphthongs, whether the consonant begin or 
end the syllable. Upon which we have a few observations to 
make. 

1. A syllable in Greek may begin with two consonants, as ri^Xo;, 
mitto: or even with three ( which cannot happen in the Hebrew) 
as, Tf ay|, gutta, . 

2. But the same consonant i-epeated cannot commence a syllable 
in Greek, as it can in the Hebrew. 

3. An aspirate never ends a syllable ; hence it is, that when p is 
doubled in the middle of a word, the former is pronounced with a 
smooth breathing, because it finishes the preceding syllable. 

4. The same aspirate is never doubled in the same word, be- 
cause in that case they must either both commence the subsequent 
syllable, contrary to the second observation ; or the former must end 
the preceding syllable, contrary to the third. 

5. In the putting of syllables together, the usual method is for 
those consonants which cannot be joined in the beginnmg of a word, 
to be joined also in the middle, as t-Qvos, nation, in the same man- 
ner as ^v^o-xw, to die. But concerning this I refer the reader to 
the treatise of letters in the Latin Method, chap. 14. n. 13. 

6. When two mutes commence a syllable, they must either be 
both smooth ; as rhvir-rxi, verberatus est, and not r£rv-<prai, though 
it comes from rirvcpx, verberavi : or both intermediate, as £-/3^ojiao?, 
Septimus, and not sir^oiioq, though it be derived from 'iirru, septem ; 
or else they must be both aspirates, as lrv'(p9'nvj notwithstanding 
that the grammarians deduce it from rirvvrxi, 

7. The mutes of the last rank r, ^, ^, are never placed before 
tlie rest. Thus for instance, we say rtxrw, pario, and not r/rxw, 
though it comes from rUu, and k remains the characteristic: 
on the contrary we say wiTrrw, cado, not ct/tttw, though it be de- 
rived 



Of Letters and Syllables. 17 

rived from zskrw : where we find that the letter added, which is tr, 
goes before t, according to its rank ; whereas, in the other example, 
the letter added, which is t, follows x, for the same reason. 

8. It is rare that two syllables begin successively with an aspira- 
tion, lest they should occasion too great a roughness in the language. - 
Hence it is, that the aspirates are often changed into smooth, as 
we have observed above: thus we say Tfs'x^, curroy instead of 
^feX«^» whence cometh the future Sf e'Iw : from ^£tvw, percutio, we 
say riQoiKXy and not ^iQxKx, and the hke. There are nevertheless 
some examples of the contrary, as I'^x'^Qa/, in Lucian, to comCy or 
to go ; a.y>.<^ix»ro, circumfusus erat, in Homer, for a/;A(p£)t£;^t;ro, from 
«/x^/;^Ew. And sometimes we meet with three successively, as xt^p' 
XvQzh in the same author ; though this happens but seldom. 



CHAR VIII. 

Of the Properties of Syllables, 

L HE properties of syllables are three : quantity, 
accent, and breathing. 

Quantity is the measure of time in pronouncing a 
syllable, according to which some are long, and others 
short. 

The rules of quantity may be divided into two 
branches : one general, and the other particular. 

The general quantity depends upon the analogy of 
letters, and consists only in knowing* the two short 
vowels £, ; the two long ones r, «; the three com- 
mon «, t, t'; and the diphthongs. 

So that when a syllable is to be lengthened, these 
short vowels are frequently changed into long ones, 
according to the relation they bear to one another : 
and when a syllable is to be shortened, the long ones 
are to be changed into short. 

As for the diphthongs, they are generally long, 
save only sometimes at the end of words. 

The particular quantity includes other rules, which 
require a more perfect knowledge of the language, and 
are therefore to be reserved for another place. 

Of Accents. 

Accents, by the Greeks called rmi, tones, are the 
elevation or depression of the voice in pronouncing ; 

D which 



18 BOOK I. 

which may be considered either separately in distinct 
syllables, or jointly in the same. 

Hence there are two sorts of accents: two simple ; 
vrz. the acute, ogu?, figured thus ('), which denotes 
the elevation of the voice ; and the grave, j3«^u?, shaped 
thus Q to signify the falling or depression of the voice: 
and another compound, viz. the circumflex, Tsrs^Kriru- 
fxsvogj which was formed at first of these two strokes 
joined together thus C^), and afterwards was rounded 
like an inverted upsilon thus (a), and at length was 
made like a couchant s in this manner ("). 
ANNOTATION. 

The rules of accents are either general or particular. The par- 
ticular suppose a knowledge of quantity, and ought to be referred 
to another place. 

The general rules regard the nature, difference, and place of 
accent : of which it is proper to treat here. 

Rule VI. 

Of Syllables capable of being accented. 

The acute accent may be on one or other of the three 

last syllables, whether short or long. 

The circumflex is 07ily upon a long syllable, which must 

be either the last, or last but one. 

The grave is never but on the last syllable, and when 

another word follows in a sentence, instead of an acute. 

Examples. 
The accents in Greek, as well as in Latin, cannot 
be removed further from the last syllable than to the 
antepenultima. 

1. The acute may be placed upon one or other of 
the three last syllables, whether that which receives 
it be long or short : and if the last of all be short, the 
accent is generally on the antepenultima ; on the 
contrary, if it be long, the antepenultima, generally 
speaking, cannot be accented. 

2. The circumflex is never upon any other syllable 
than the last, or last but one, which must always be 
long by nature. 

The grave is only on the last syllable, and when an- 
other word follows in a sentence, instead of an acute. 

ANNO- 



Of Letters and Syllables. 19 

ANNOTATION. 

• 
The grave accent is only a depression of the voice. Therefore 
as after having raised the voice upon a syllable, it must necessarily 
sink upon those that follow; these syllables are called grave or 
barytonSy though they be not marked with this accent: for the 
grave accent is never marked but when another word follows in a 
sentence, on oxytons or words acuted on the last, as ©£o$ ; which in 
that case do change their acute into grave, as ©so? vty^wv^ Deus 
noster, to show that we must not raise the last syllable ; otherwise 
it would bear upon the following word, and produce the same 
effect as that of enclitics, namely, to be joined to the preceding 
word. 

Of Breathings. 

The grammarians call breathing (7rusv[A.oi) the diffe- 
rent force of the voice in pronouncing. 

These breathings are twofold; one weak and 
smooth, ^iXou, which is figured like a small comma 
over a word, thus lyw, ego. 

The other strong and rough, ^^crv^ which is shaped 
like a small r, thus a^a, simuL 

Every vowelin the beginning of a word is marked 
with one of these breathings. The vowel J has always 
the rough breathing, ii'Jw^, aqua: the others commonly 
the smooth, as we shall more particularly observe in 
the last book. 

But the mark of the smooth breathing seems to be 
quite unnecessary, since where there is not a rough 
breathing, we must suppose a smooth. 

ANNOTATION. 

Formerly H was the mark of aspiration among the Greeks, as it 
is still in Latin. For they wrote HEKATON instead of UotroVf and 
IIH, KH, TH, for 9, ;^, 9. And those breathings which now ob- 
tain, are the remains of this H, which being split into two, the first 
part was used for the rough breathing, and the second for the 
smooth, as we see them marked in ancient copies. Add in pro- 
cess of time these two demi-figures came to be rounded a little, to 
form those we now make use of c, a. 

The ancients put the aspiration sometimes in the middle of 
words, -crfficof; jnitiSf just as we use an H, in the Latin 7nihi, 



CHAt>. 



20 B O O K I. 

CHAP. IX. 

Of the Change, Addition, and Cutting Off of Syllables. 

Syllables admit of different changes^ which 
grammarians comprise under certain figures, whose 
iiames it will almost suffice here to explain, because 
we shall see examples of them hereafter in different 
places ; though we intend to trqat of them more amply l! 
in the ninth book, in the chapter of poetical licences, " 
as they are most commonly used by poets. 

. Mutation qr metathesis, ja£Ta9f<ri?, is a transpo- 
sition of letters or syllables, as aVf^siVta for uTrti^ia-i^, 
infinita: S-^aVoj/or 3-a^(ro;, audacia. So in hdiXxn decus 
from ytZ^og : cito from rof^yu : mens from li^lq : rego 
from ol^)(U) : parvus from -crocv^og, whence also is derived 
the French word pauvre: aVoAaOoj, in French, laguais, 
guasi, Xunoii^ogyScc, 

Addition or Pleonasm, ■srXsoma-iJ.og, is in the be- 
ginning, the middle, or the end. 

That in the beginning is called prosthesis, tzt^oV- 
^iG-ig, a.s (^oiiov, itociov, paululum : uaoc-i, hUocri, mginti: 
and in Latin natus, gnatuSy &c. 

That in the middle, epenthesis, sTTEi/OfffK: olyu),riyov, 
^yoitov, egi : in Latin relligio for religio. 

That in the end, PaRAGOGE, 's:oc^ocy(ayY) -. Xoyoi;, 
XcyoiG-t, sermonibus : M/vw, M/i/«o, Minois : in Latin atna- 
rier for amai^i. 

The retrenchment or cutting off is also made in 
three places. 

In the beginning it is called aph.eresis, cc(pooi^£(Tig, 

as aVs^07n5, fB^OTrrijfuigur. 

In the middle it is called syncope, oruyxoTni, as ?A0ov 
for li\v%v, veni or ntnerant : hii-n^^iv for iKotTs^oohv, 
utrinque : in Latin amar'it for arnaverk : pulto for pul- 
sito, Ter. &c. 

In the end it is called apocope, aTro^toTr^f as ^dz^v for 
^ocK^vovy lachryma : rpo(pi for r^6py.ov, magnum, plenum : 
^« fpr J'clY^ca, domus : 'srxv for Txrocva-txri, Site, tace. 

CHAP. 



O/* Letters and Syllables. 21 

CHAP. X. 

Of the Contraction of Syllables. 

Contraction is the drawing of two syllables 
into one. This contraction is either simple, when 
two syllables are drawn into one, without any change 
in writing, as r^t^^J, -nix^i muro, which is called syvcE- 
resis: or mixt, when the two vowels being blended 
together, there results a new sound, as nj^iog^ ^u?, 
muri; Tfrp^sa, n, muri; which is called crasis, or naix- 
ture. 

This crasis is. as natural as the syn^resis, because 
it follows the nature of the letters, as we have ex- 
plained it: or else the vowel strongest in sound or 
quantity swallows up the weakest. 

The syllable contracted, either by synieresis or crasis, 
is always long, because it includes in some measure 
two within itself: and generally it is one of these three 
vowels a, 7), w : or else one of these five diphthongs 
Hy »i, oiy w, ov : which the following rule will render easy 
to retain, wherein I shall include only the most gene- 
ral contractions, reserving those that are uncommon 
for their proper place. 

Rule VII. 

General for all contractions. 

A cofnes from as, a>j, «a. 
H from i£, eY\, ioc, 

n f 7^07)1 aw, oocj ao. 

OT from ooy OS, so. 

H fro7n £17 : EI from h, hi. 

OI from £o», 001, : n from ioi. 

Examples. 

^oioc : yii^v.oc, as^oif comua. 

A I aB : K^iocEj x^sa, cames : Poas, j3oa, clama. 

\ m : Qodnrov, Qoktov, clametis ambo, 
comes < I ' ■> I 7 

r ^ J at : yvi^ocl, yyipo(>9 senectutu 
£oc : x°^°^> X°^j congium. 
ooi : }i7rXoctg, ^tTrhPcg^ dupUcitates. 

And 






22 



A. la*? 

comes K«a 
from 



f 




n 
comes <| 
from 



££0 

OX 



Mb) 
an 



BOOK I. 

And by the same analogy, 

: /3oa>?, |3oa, clamet. 

: ^ooiii, ^ox, clamat^ because the * is sub- 
scribed. 

: 'ATTfAAEHf, v\g, Apelles: -Ejomrov, woijjTov, 
ambo Jaciatis, or faciant. 

: dhnUi, ol\nK, *veri: liTTrieg, Jij, Att. E- 
quites. 

: ol^n^ix, ciXn^T), mra. 

And by the same analogy, 

'' voocvj vuv mentium : x^^o'oco, w, inauro, 
: AriToxy Anruy Latonam, But if it precedes 
a consonant, it is changed into a, |3o«?, 
|3a?, boves : sometimes the change is 
made into « ; $i%Xoixq, SittXx;. 
: y,^ixog, yc^icog, cavfiis : Poduv, Pouv, clamans. 
: yc^sdcovj x^£w^, earnium : |3oaw, (3ow, clamo, 
: Poaa, |3ow, clameris- For the u is dropped, 
and xo is then contracted into w. 

And by the same analogy. 



comes > 
from 3 



GI 
comes 
from 






or 
comes ^ 
from 



XOi 

£0( 
001 
OH 
OVI 
EH 
OH 
00 

eo 

OS 
OH 

ox 



clamares. 



earnium : (iodoig, jSowf, 



vooiy vo7j mentes : xf ^o-^o»f> o*V, inaurares, 
p^^uo-of*^, p^^uo-oK, inauras. 
Xf uo"oi7?, p^^ufl-oK, inaures. 

p^^uo-£a?5p^U(r»?, ^W?'€0.y; ts-oibho-Ij B(riyfaciunt. 

;^^uo"o8, p^^uo-s, inaureris, 
vooqy V8?, ?;2e/2.y ; ^^va-ooi^tv, sfxiv, inauramus. 
xXviUoq, sg, 'veri : •z3-ot£Ojw,£i/, 7;ToiH[ji,Bv,yacimus. 
v6e, 1/8, 772^725 : p(^^uo-oe, p(,f yVa, inaura : o 
Itt), supra, JttI, Aristoph. 
: xfAx^ostg, xfxx^Hg, arenosus: ^^vaosiv, ^^v- 
(781/, inaurare : because the i is cut off, 
before the contraction is made. 
: Ppxg, f38f, boves, 

EI 



OJ Letters and Syllables. 23 

EI 
n \io : only in this word ts-Asoj/, ziXuv^ plus ; for 

The above are the most general contractions ; to 
which the following may be added: 

rpenti: Ai^^Xog, A(<i>iXo;, Jovis 





comes , . ^ 

r> I IOC : (yivniriocy ff-ii/TiTr*, SUldpl* 

ir in § / / 7 c\e\« 

urbes : t£^o?, i^og, sacer, 

T 

comes \ cemL ^only for barytons. 

from 



< cemi. > 



CHAP. XI, 

Change of the last Syllables on the meeting of two Words. 

J- HIS change is often made to prevent the concourse of vowels: 
which the Greeks usually effectuate, either by apostrophe, or crasis 
and composition, or, finally, by inserting a letter between the two 
words, as we shall see in the three following rules. 

Rule VIII. 
Of the apostrophe. 

1 . An apostrophe denotes the i^ejecting of a short mwel 
or diphthong. 

£. fVhen an aspirate follozvs the apostrophe, an aspi- 
rate must also precede it. 

Examples. 

1. An apostrophe ( aTrorf e<po?, a^vey^sio) is like a small 
comma, which is put over a word to denote the re- 
jecting of a short vowel or diphthong in the con- 
course of vowels or diphthongs of two different words, 
which happens in a twofold manner : one ordinary, 
when the first word endeth with a, f, t, o, or with «i, 
or Of, (these two diphthongs being deemed short with 
regard to accents or apostrophe) the final of this word 
is rejected. Thus instead of -wdvrix, 'iMyov, we say 
Tffdyr sAfyov, omnia dLvi, 

The 



24 B O O K L 

The other extraordinary, and used only by the 
Attics and poets, who often reject these very vowels 
or diphthongs in the beginning of the second word. 
Thus they say w yaOe, for w ayaOe, 6 hone : i *y«9i, bona 
ilia, for rf oiyM : -urU V* and jtA>J V*, for -zsra Ir^, uhi est ; fjt.ri 
Is-i, non est : ru ^u, for tw I/aw, meo. Though Jpollo- 
niuSj in his second book of Syntaa^, calls this a crasis, be- 
cause the two words may be drawn into one, so as to make 
but one compound, as zve shall observe in the following 
rule. 

2. When the vowel beginning the following word 
is marked with an aspirate or rough breathing, the 
smooth consonant preceding is changed into an aspi- 
rate, because it assumes the same breathing as the 
vowel to which it is joined, it being impossible to pro- 
nounce it otherwise : thus instead of aVo S, we say 
d(p^, a guo, Sec. 

ANNOTATION. 

Sometimes the apostrophe does not take place, notwithstanding 
the concourse of vowels. 

1. In OTEf/ and -sr^o : 'cjs^i ayrov, ad ipsum : Tr^oayw, froduco, 

2. In other particular circumstances, as to avoid an unpleasant 
sound, an obscurity, or other like inconveniency, which must be 
learned by practice. The Ionics even afFect this meeting of vowels, 
without using the apostrophe : whereto we must refer these examples 
in scripture, Itt) Iv;, Luc. xv. 7. for 1^' h\ ; over one, Kara «<73rox«- 
Ay\|/<y, Rom. xvi. 25. and Gal. ii. 2. according to the revelation ; and 
such like. 

Sometimes an apostrophe takes place, without any concourse of 
vowels ; as -craf ' GtaJ for nroi^x. ©so?, apud Deuht, <&rc. 

Rule IX. 

That instead of using an apostrophe, the two words 
are drawn into one. 

The two mwels are sometimes united by crasis and 
composition. 

Examples. 
The two vowels which meet at the end of one word, 
and at the beginning of another, are sometimes united 
by crasis, and then there results but one compound 
of the two words; as lySfAon, lyS^oc, for lyu oTfAoci, 
ego puto, lyu ot^06, ego 7iovi : (ji^iI^u for (a^ tv^ta, non 

invenero ; 



Of Letters and Syllables. 25 

irvoenero ; nr^^yov^ zr^^xtyoM, instead of tjj^o i^yoM^ e<v re, 
vpercB pretium, w^o ohiyovpaulo, ante, kc. 

ANNOTATION. 

This union is frequently made between the conjunction >y and 
the following word : and if the word begins with an « or an "e, the 
crasis is made in x sometimes subscribed, and sometimes not, as 
xa^iKx or Kx^tKXy for yy ol^moCf, et iniqua ; Koiyu and x.^[aoi^ for yy 
lyw, et ego ; ^ I/ao/, et mihi : koi-kbTvos for >^ IksTvo^, et ille : kuusT for 
j^ IxsT, et illic : thus xa^c, xaV, xav, xa7r<, are used instead of >^ Ix, 
i^ Ir, tt^ h, and tC) sTTt : but xav stands for >g av, e/52. 

Before the diphthong £/, the contraction is always in ^ subscribed, 
as x.aroe, for ^ Ura, (leinde. 

But before o, the contraction is in w ; and if there be an o/, it is 
then in u subscribed ; as xwvoy for ^ ohov, Aristoph. et vinum. But 
x»vov comes from >^ ovov, e^ asinum. 

If the subsequent syllable begin with a rough vowel, x is 
changed into ;^, for the reason above mentioned ; as x^'^h yj^ifoi^i 
for "^ oTh et quod ; >^ ottw?, et ut. 

This crasis is also very common with the masculine and neuter 
articles, as wv^f , uvOpuvo^, for o av^^, vir ; o uvOputrosy homo : rwp- 
X^^o^t fo^' TO a^^^rov^ antiquum : ru^'nky^pvov for to cc^iri^owyi indu.» 
mentum. 

But with this neuter article, o and a, are sometimes contracted 
in ovf contrary to the common course of contraction ; as raAAo, 
Tap dpov, for TO a^Xo, alterumy to ol§9^ovf articulus : and sometimes 
a syncope is used instead of a crasis, as Tavaipo^ov, for to avoi(popeVf 
vectis, bajulus : roc^yv^ioy, for to k^yvqiovi argentimiy &c. 

We find also in the plural TaXwfi^, Ta^p^ar^, for t» «^»}6?, vera^ 
T(X a^^araf, antiqua, &c. 

'o £TEf oy, fl/^er, admits of a particular kind of crasis ; for though 
Herodotus hath ovrs^of in the masculine, and ^drspov in the neuter, 
nevertheless we generally say oirs^os in the masculine, and ^ccte^ov 
in the neuter. And so in the genitive ^mts^s, the dative ^atri^u, 
in the plural ^ars^o/, alteri : and ^ccTf^a, altera. The remainder 
both singular and plural is seldom contracted. 

"Whoever has a mind to see this subject more amply discussed, 
may read Sylburgiusy page 279, &c. 

Rule X. 
Of V added to words ending in « or i. 

When words end in i or *, they often require v to be 
added. 

Examples. 

The Greeks have still another method of avoiding 
the concourse of vowels, which is, by adding a 1/ to 
the end of words, especially if they terminate in s or » ; 
as for instance, jTxco-jv otvJ^i?, Demosth. 'ciginti mri : 



26 BOOK I. 

XeWh/j n SWoi; ricriv oiy^ioi;, Galen, .konibus, vel aliis 
quibuspiam agrestibus : zra.vrxTrxtriv »yt»iAui, Plato, j&ro?'- 
sus admiror : ^iSmiv oivr(}y ipsi dedit, &c. 
ANNOTATION. 

It IS for this same reason that the compoands of the partiele « 
take a y, when another vowel comes after it, as onyoi^ios for ocoi^ioq, 
unxioorthi/ ; avo^es for cco^tts, one that has no teeth. And that the ne- 
gative particle «, non, takes a «, when a vowel follows, hk <'Jo»^, k 
-orwdofujv, Horn, nan vidi, non audivi. But if the vowel that follows 
be aspirated, instead of a x you must take ^ x\ ^x »)v5«>f, non pla- 
cebat ; by the same analogy as that explained above when treating 
of the apostrophe. 

This V is moreover added by the Attics to the end of the three 
persons of verbs in e, and in *, even when a consonant follows ; 
TvfrlticriVf or e'ryvI/Ev tStov, thei/ Strike, or he has struck him. Whereas 
the lonians, instead of adding this y, cut off the e or / final, to avoid 
Ihis meeting of vowels ; rv7rlti<r avrovt they beat him ; which agrees 
with the rule of apostrophe above mentioned. 

This is nearly all that appears "worthy of consideration in treating of 
letters. Those who have a mind for moref may see the treatise of letters 
in the Latin Method. But as the changes of letters are the first foun" 
dation of dialects, I have inserted here an alphabetical list of them ; 
extracted chiefly jrom Caninius, and illustrated "with fiamiliar exam* 
pies, taken from the Latin and French tongues* 

L_ . ^ , , 

CHAP. XI. 

A List oft he Letters with their most considerable Changes. 

A. trunif though with a long a; from 

'' yl A * A comes from the Hebrew xaf^lct, cor. 

X\. oleph, as much as to say a\£<pa ; For i2 ; wpajTo^, Dor. crgaTo?, pri- 

oc rather from the old Syriac al[)ha, mus : S^ypSv, ^v^av, portarum : im^v, 

It is put for E, ^eytfloj, Ion. fxsya- l-rtcL^a,, fixisti : yi'Kaiv, yeXSv, ridens : 

6oq, magnitudo : 'rgEX*'» ^o^' '^P«X*'> TLoinX^oov, Boeot. Uocru^av, Neptunus. 

curro : syctiye, lyaovya, Pindar, egomet. It is contracted from EA ; ly<fi/itt, 

cma-Qsv, Mol. omcrQaf retro, where more- lw4>i;S, Attic, ingeniosum; but in this 

over the v is cut off. case it requires a vowel before it, for 

Thus in French sXsvcrig, alleure, in- we should not say Ivymct, svytva, genf- 

cessus. rosum. 

It is also put for H, especially among It is added to the beginning of words; 

the ^ol, and Dor. 4>«/ca*j, <pafAa, whence r«<t>'?, ar*<J>*^» """* passa : r^X^f, «r*" 

the Latin fama is derived : so 'orXriyh, p^uj, spica But this is chiefly practised 

'orXaya, plaga s /t-tfl^"^^* ^t>»%*va, ma- by the Attics. Thus from percipere the 

china : fjtnrripf (xartip, mater, For, as French write apereevoir. 

Quintilian observes, the Latins have It is cut off; a/xavfoM, fxctvpou, od- 

particularly affected to follow these two scuro, hebeto. Thus from afxihyu, 

dialects. come& mulgeo ; from apovfet, rus, ru~ 

Hereto we may refer the resolution ra ; from a/tcaiy, afxyjrog, messis and 

jfhich the poets make of n into e*, as meto. For the Latin verb is frequently 

nytiVf laynv, fractus sum, S<,c. derived from the Greek nouu verbal, 

A is likewise used for O among the as from ^npit, dico, <parkj dicendus. 

Dor. EMtoirt, Binaa-i, viginti. Thus th« oomes fateor, I confess ; from ysuw, 

Latins from apoTfov have taken ara- gusiabiKs, taken from yivofAdt, to taster 

comes 



Of Letters and Syllables, 



27 



comes ga%io : and so X^y«, dicerCf hiyo;^ 
dictiof aud thence ioguor. 

The French also cut off ct, as from 
apotheca, boutique. 

The poets sometimes insert it in the 
middle; iruXwpof, -aryXawpo?, janitor: 
nepctroi, HSfCMTo^, cornu : f*ayiaMn;, (ao,' 
Tiaaxjjf, mawca^ a sleeve : fxwa-wv, y,ov 
raaii, Ra\. whence comes mumrum: 
i^eiv, cfoav, videre. 

They also cut it off; ya^axToifjaycj, 
yXaxTo<}wi>'Oi, qui lade victitant : sXacaq, 
sKcrai;, prqfectus. So from 0aXavE~cv 
comes balneum : from mctXa/Arj, palma : 
from yaXac, glos : and in French from 
compaganus, compagnon, 

'Ava, xttTa, 'srapa, and «frt, fre- 
quently lose their a final ; ap, itaqucy 
igituff utique, nempc ; av, cmw, «rap, 
whence cometh the Latin per. Hence 
also is it, that their final vowel is 
subject to several changes in compo- 
sition, as we shall observe in the fourth 
book. 



BiiTtf comes from the Hebrew belhf 
or from the old Syriac betha. 

The ^ol. use it instead of A ; S'fiX- 
^iVfif, ^£X<|>rvef, dolphins: JeXEap, ^kkzctf, 
and by syncope and crasis, 0xHp, esca. 
Thus from ^Iq comes biSy twice : from 
duellutn, helium. 

M is changed into 6 ; Im^ofjitiv, em - 
CoCelV, calumniari. Thus from scam- 
num comes scabellum : from marmor, 
the French word marbre. So from 
julxt, we/, fxtTdrlcHf comes ^xirluy met 
ex favis aufero : from /txt5p/w>j^ comes 
BvffAU^, aKo;, Sv§y.aKa, whence fot' 
micof &c. 

B is inserted after /t* in words form- 
ed by syncope J ya/uoj, nuptia;: ya.- 
f*npaq, ya^fpof, gener, sponsus : fxie-m- 
f*£ficij fjtea-Kf^Cput, meridies : 'OjapctfjLefji.i- 
Xw£, or wafo.fxifjt.i'KnH.tf leapfA.ifxQ'Kaxef 
adesty mansit. Also where there is 
a change of « into a, and a syn- 
cope of a, in irapA : fxi^ofMLiy /txE/xIXo- 
/i»tttt, /M,l/tcSxo^tt{, cwro ; w/otaprs?, ^/ti- 
€poT£?, peccaili. Thus the Latins say 
eomburo for eonuro ; and in French 
chambre from camera ; nomhre from tjm- 
mervs, &c. 

The Pamphylians used to put ^ be- 
fore all, vowels, which practice pre- 
vailed also among the Cretans and La- 
cedaemonians : «j)«of, ^tt^of, lumen, lux : 
«eX«o<, ^etCiXje?, «o/ ; avflivo?, BivQivogy 
foridus, where the s is also changed 
into A, 



The .Slot, never used to put befor« 
e, but when the succeeding syllable had 
X, 8", ^, or t; puxtg, jSpaxo?, pannus 
vilis, vestis lacera : pvrh^, ^pwrnj, habenOf 
jiagellum. 



rkfjufxcty Ion* gemma, from the He- 
brew gime/, or from the old Syriac 
gamla. 

The Attics put it for B; ^X^X""* 
y'kh^oiv, pulegium : ^X^op a, yxl4>«pa, 
palpebrce. Thus the French of ruiu* 
have made rouge, of rabies, rage. 

The Boeotians on the contrary ; Ba- 
vnxE?, for yxjva~Ktq,mulieres i where also 
an »> is substituted for at. 

It is likewise used instead of A j x^h- 
yycv, for xnp^S'uov, uerwwi, bonum, placitum, 
idoneum. Thus in French from man- 
dere, manger : rodere, ronger : viridi- 
arium, verger: and the Ital, diurnumy 
giorno. Somewhat similar to this is the 
change the Frencli made of d intoj 
consonant, dies, jour ; by reason of the 
likeness between it and g in their mode 
of pronouncing. 

The Attics put it for A ; /t*ox<f, 
fAoyig, vix, tandem, tegre : thus from 
/MaXX«y comes magis ; from fi-iyata, 
sileo. 

r is also added: yXa/Aon, iippus, 
from Xb/u», Uppitudo : yv6<pog, nubes, 
from H<^oq, nubilum. Thus in Latin, 
nalus, gnatus ; navus, gnavus : and in 
French ranunculus, grenouille : rinxare, 
grincer : vadum, gue for ce, whence 
the Normans still say, le grand ve, le 
petit ve : vespa, guespe. 

It is also cut off ; yaTit, aia, terra : 
lyoj, Boet. la) for hw, whence the Ita- 
lians have taken their io. the Spaniards 
yo, ajid the Freoch jV« 



A. 



AeXTft from the Hebrew dahlh, or 
deleth, whence deleta, and by syncope 
delta ; or from the old Syriac delta. 

It is put for r; yvlx^oq, hi^oq, caligo : 
yn, S'rt, terra : » JSv, that is to say, » 
fxa. Twv yr,y, non per terram. Thus from 
yXyxuc comes dulcisy and in French 
from jungere, jcindre, from fulgur, 
foudre, &c. 

It is also put for Z ; Zei>c, Aeu;, Ju- 
pitert whence comes Aioc, Jovisj unless it 
be supposed more probably derived from 
^iq : t^ofnaq, hpKaq, caprea. The Spar- 
tans and Boeotians double it in the room 
. of the said ^ j A*«{«; /u«JJ«, ma5safQ.ri- 

nacea : 



28 



BOOK I, 



nacea : JcP^^**? XPI''^^**'» ^^'^^8^ • X'^l'"* 
p^aJSiiw, cedo. 

For 2; 0(r|M.^, oS/cAfl, orfor.- ?cr/x£v, iS*- 
ftEv, scimus : KEKas-fASvoi;, Horn, kska^- 
fAfhiog, Pind. irtstructus. 

ForN; Tstviw, Mo\. Ttwiw, and thence 
tendo. 

It is added ; vm, pluo, t^oof, pluvia : 
«ri«, bibo, 'BTi^a.^f Jons : avlpo?, av^^o^, 
viri. Thus from prorsum comes prodes ; 
and in French from tetter y tendre ; from 
cineres, cendres, &c. 

It is als6 omitted ; hm?, atvo?, gravis, 
vekemens : juoXjSS'oj, /uoXjCoj, plumbum : 
Ha^hg, cadus. For A is also changed 
into L; 'O^va-ffevg, Mo\. 'r^va-s-ivg, 
Ulysses : noXuJeyK»?, Pollux, quasi Pol- 
dux : ^afif, levir for devir ; iaKpvoif, la- 
chroma. 



*Ev|.<Xov, £ short. 

It is put for A ; rss'a-afct, ris-asfa, 
Ion. quatuor ' Kspaetj K£f£a, cornua ; 
ZiTa Birt, postea, adhuc, nonne ; uasXe?, 
Att. i;£Xo?, vjtrum ; Kparoq, iEol. nfiroq, 
robur,vis,poteniia. And in the piaral 
passive by adding vj >.By6fxiQiv, for 
^Ej/o/xEfla, dicimur, &c. 

Thus from raXavrov comes talentum ; 
from mundoycommendo ; from avra, an/e; 
from 'GTaWdf, or else from Bixxw, pello ; 
and in French from Sx?, sa/, du je/. 

For H i %a-<rw\i for V<7-ajv, or titIciiv, wi- 
fzor /, whence sa-a-ow for htreroaj, vinco : 
"nrsv^Vji?, ^oJ. 'mz)iBia-e-riq, lugebis : aaKn- 
Qr^q, affKeBr.(;, sanus, illcesus. Thus in 
Latin from xp>j7rj?, I'S'oj, comes crepida, 
and crepido ; from ixh^cc, medeor, and 
remedium. 

For O; oS'oWe?, ^ol. e^ovri?, denies: 
l^Cvri, IS'Jva, c?o/or« Thus from pjyoi», 
?7ge« ; yovu, g-e7iM .• 'arfovopivoo, propero. 
And in Latin vortices, vertices, &c. 

It is added i £>i? for ^j, misisti: rlvJa- 
jsv, EwS'avsv, placuit : ^aTTshv, Mol. 
s^aTTehv, solum. Thus in French from 
spiritus, esprit ; from spero, esperer^ &e. 

Also in the middle ; (auc-oiv. Ion. 
ixaa-iuiv, musarum, &c. from nevog, comes 
KsvEof , vacuus ; from yj^Mfxtwq, ;^e^|U£V9?, 
utens, &c. 

Which is more usual among poets j 
ymiff-Bai, esse : /we^vemto, recnrdntus est : 
^liMo-w, sulphure purgabo, Deo sacrifi' 
cabo, &c. 

It is sometimes cut off; 'nrpoivoimov, 
•ErpovwTTJov, ante faciem: Iq-mM^ ^mo), 
persto : BKeidBv, keTAev, illinc : hsTvog, 
JiEivo?, ille : sofnri, oprfi, fesium. So from 
«^t{«, riror ; from l/>£yy<», rwcto. 



Likewise in the middle, especially 

in verse : iymro, tyevro, full : IweXI, 
ETrXe, erat: rctyka, rayjty cito: Ipt'vHoj, 
spivog, caprificus. Thus from wXevjj, u/na .♦ 
V£ua>, nMo ; 'srevQu, puto, &c. 

And at the end : Ixoee, Xos, lavabat. 
Thus in Latin, fac for facey Sec. But 
the Latins change it also into u short , 
o-xoTtEXoc, scopulus : eXxoj, ulcus : BpEV- 
nrha-ioy, Brundusium : and sometimes into 
u long J eV, £voj, -unus: iQoa, ulor. 



z. 



Zw-r*, from the old Syriac zetha, or 
dseta ; for it is not to be pronounced 
like an s between two vowels, as when 
the French say misere ; nor like a dou- 
ble ss, like ds, which is what Quintilian 
calls a very soft sound. 

The Djr. change it into a-^, avfia-ia, 
for <rvpi^co, s'lbilo. 

The iEol. change A into Z, (^et- 
€aXX£(v, for ^jaSaXXEiv, calumniari ; 
whence ^aCyXc?, for Ji«'SoXo?, calumniam 
tor i or else they resolve it into Jcr, 
Zeu?, AcTEi)?, Jupiter. 

The Tarentines changed it into two 
22 ; -arXac-o-w, for -zsrXa^iW, plasma, com- 
ponoj formo. And the Boe<it. and La- 
cedaem. into S^S", (xu^^a, for ^u. '{a, masia 
hordeacea : "xtl^^ca, for XP^i*"* cedo. 

It is sometimes added to verbs in 
(W pure ; if-nrvo}, epTTv^oo, serpo : rpCo), tero, 
corrumpo : rpv^tu, sirido, gemo. 

The Latins change it into j conso- 
nant j ^ivycSfjugum, 



''Hra, eta, comes from the old Syriac 
hetha, which is the same as heth, the 
strongest Hebrew aspiration ; where- 
fore it signified formerly, as we have 
observed already, the aspiration in 
Greek, as H doth in Latin, Thus we 
see HO E2TIN, on the two Farnesian 
columns, for&lnv, quod est: and Si- 
monides is supposed to have put it for a 
long e, for no other reason, but because 
being obliged before to write two EE 
for that purpose, these two letters turn- 
ed one towards the other Ea form almost 
the same figure as H. 

The most common changes of u are 
in putting it for a and s, as a-o<pir) for 
coi^U, wisdom ; w for If, well. 

It is also used in derivatives instead 
of 0, as KOTO?, ira, nornsis, iratus. 

It is added sometimes to the begin- 
ning ; ^ttJov, h^aiov, paululum : iffaVj m- 
ff-aVf Hani : sometimes to the end ; 

tTTEJ^ 



Of Letters and Syllables. 



29 



iinm for lff£(, guandoquidem ; otw for 
orif quia ; 'sr^m for -SErptv, priusquam. 

Hence the Dor. say iyanrty tvva, for 
iyo) a-v, ego, tu, 8cc. 

It is cut off in the optative plural ; 
«j>aWjtc£v, <^eufj(.iVf dicebamus, &c. A- 
greeably to this the Latins say audibum, 
lenibam, &c. And the French of eg*)- 
t*irn^ make ermite. 



0. 



©^Ttt, ;Ae/a, and not thita, from 
the Hebrew theth, or from the old 
Syrjac theia. 

The Dor. and the ^ol. put it for 
L. ; ■]'iv^oq, -^^vQoq, falium : fjt,r\^a), fxhQoo, 
iuadeo : ^a.<roq, &«<ro?, densitas, locus 
sylvosus. 

It is put for 2 ; ^va-fjih, ^vQfji,ri, soUs 
occasus : /ji,riviirfA.oi;, fA,y^vid(A,ogy iracundia •* 
ofp^rxr^of, op^nQfJtoq, saltatio. 

It is added ; o^v, o^Qn, ripa : ^a/uLcuy 
liumi . ^QafxetXog, humilis : ap^o?, c'-X^°^> 
sarcina p^javilas : fxaXaicoq, /xaXQano;, 
mollis. Thus from T<pi, forliter, comes 
\<^Bi[Aoqy potens, fortis, and not from 
^vfxogj animi confidentia, as some ima- 
gine. 

So from h')(ri or V^xf^y comes ^'X^a, 
bifaiiam ; from Tf^x? ^"^ '^P'/C*> '''P^xP'^t 
trifariamt &c. 

So from lypnyopaa-iv comes Eyp»iyof- 
QaiTiVy II. X. viqilaverunt, experrecti 
sunt. 

Sometimes it iscast ofFj i(r9xo?, la-- 
Xo?, bonus strenuus. Thus from «t9- 
fttt, difficuUas respirandif the Ital. make 
af>wc, &c. 



I. 



'i^a, io/a, trissyllable, from the 
Hebrew iod, or from the old Syriac 
iota. It is always a vowel among the 
Greeks, but in Hebrew words it is a 
consonant. Whence Caninius censures 
Claxidian for making four syllables of 
Judceus : adding, that 'lr,<r5<; should be 
a dissyllable in Greek, as it is in 
Hebrew. 

The Ion. put it for E ; £o«, £o'», 
focus, larest domicilium : whence Img-ioq 
for i'^iiriog, domesticus, familiaris, sup- 
plex, hospiialis sedes. Thus in Latin 
from ts-XsKM, plico ; from Tsfyw, tingo : 
Bv^vo}, induo, &c. On the contrary they 
said anciently leber, Menerva, &c. See 
Meth. Lat. 

The iEol. use it forY; H^'^sy, t^o- 
6ev, desuper : Stta^ IWp, visum, visio 
vera : ^u^^o?, ^iSxo;^ papyrus, codex. 



liber ; whence comes the word bible. 
Thus from <pfvyw, frigo ; from e-v<^a}, 
st'tpo ; from ^uat,- Jio ; and anciently 
they used to say, optumus, maxumits, 
&c. 

The Syracusians casting off v add an 
I after e to form a diphthong; Iwaro?, 
s'varo?, nonus, &c. 

I is sometimes contracted from two 
« ; Ait<^iXo?, Af4)tXo?, Jovi amicus : and 
sometimes from le ; »£po?, Ipo?, sacer, 
magnus : Is^ct^, "pn^, accipiter. 

It is often added in verse, either to 
make a diphthong with e and o; as 
ipiov, etpiov, vellus : pia, facile, peut ." 
yaXoa;, rideo, •yi'KsiaivrEg, Od. u, for ye- 
XSovreg, ridentes : or to constitute a syl- 
lable apart, yJtcQoq, XoiVflwf, ultimus : 
aiQha, asQxia, certamina, prcemia : itt- 
<7r<o;^af,u«?, equis gaudens, from IVwe?, 
equus. 

Thus from s(fQw, la-6iu, comedo; 
from fxvA, mina; from aXXo?, alius; 
from vavg, navis ; from vavmq, nauta, 
navita. 

It is also added to prepositions either 
at the beginning or end, as Iv, hv, hit, 
hvl, in, per. Which happens even to 
compounds j hvoJw?, compitalis : Ivt- 
p^pavw, leviter vulnero. 

Thus from "orpo? comes "ZB-porj, Dor. 
for <srpo0-(, ac?, ab, apud, &c. And in 
Homer tJTOTi casting off p. 

This preposition is frequently in use 
among the Dor. but in composition it 
loseth I, when another vowel follows, 
as 'STOTAJTrov from -EroTiwTrov, for wgo- 
a-unov, persona, vultus, species : so, «ro- 
Tayai for iBT^oa-ayai, adduco, admoveOf 
admilto : 'woQo^oo for •argoo-ogS, aspicio, 
ohservo : <aroridii in Theoc. for mvr^ri- 
Qu, that is 'srpogriQtri or iirgarTiflei, from 
TjQIa;, «, appune, compone, imputa. 

With the article it loses t, and 
makes but one word of two ; vorlSi, 
for tsroT* tZ, instead of trfo? tS, per 
kunc : iffOTlov for ergo? tov, ad Am»c .* 
iB-orlav for -Ergo? tav, arf banc : izrorlajq, 
for -JETgo? rag, ad hos : tsrorlag, ad fias : 
'aroT^a., ad kcec. 

From aTTo comes anaX, Nicander, a, 
ah, ex, de, from vtto, vTfeu, Horn, a, 
ab, sub; o being changed into a, before 
the addition of i. As of -arfo the Latins 
have not only made pro, but alsd prae: 
vTfBl^sX^ ^^^ i(7retf£ip^£v, supereminebai : 
vTni^oxog, excellens. 

1 is also added to pronouns ; arog, 
iroa-i, hie: to datives plural; hoyoig, 
Xoyoia-iv, sermonibiJLs : to participles in 
the first aor. rv-lcti, rv^aig, qui verbe^ 
ravii: to iroparisyllabic nouns in long 



30 



BOOK I, 



«t? ; fjikKu^f fA.ih.eiii, niger : to the accu- 
satives of the plural feminine in «?; 
a-o^kq, <nxj>aTf, prudentet ; and then they 
agree in termination with the dative 
plural vvfx^aiq, sponsas, ct sponsis : to 
adverbs, vZv, wvl, nunc, &c. 

I is often left out in the diphthongs 
OAy Vy ill KaUif KciUf uro : (uni^oiVf f*i' 
^arij major: woiSi, •aroS, facio: nr^ei- 
fto;go?, TETgajWogoc, quadripartitus. Thus 
in Latin audaciter^ audacter ; calidum, 
caldum ; lamina, Umna ; &c. Also at 
the end of words, /t*EX<, mel; lr«, est^ 
&c. 



K. 



Y.a.Ttitctf liappa, from the Hebrew 
cap or caphf or rather from the old 
Syriac kappa. 

It is pronounced every where, as in 
French or in English c before a. 

The Ionics put K for n in relatives 
and interrogatives ; vrZiy m£c ; oVw;, 
oKug, quomodo : mrrif x»), qua : moa-off 
xo<ro?, quantus, &c. So, cxAi^Uf tri- 
pudioy for a-irai^Uf 

Thus in Latin from e-mvBftp comes 
scintilla for spinttUa ; from "ktiita}, hifA- 
90), XtfxiravaOf cometh linquo. So in 
French from rupes comes rocker, the c, 
which is all one as x, taking an aspi- 
ration. 

On the contrary we meet with n 
for K; mvafAog for Kvafjtog, faba. As 
in Latin lupus is derived from Xuxa?; 
lepus from XayaS?; and mapalia from 
mecgalia : for y being akin to x, is sub- 
ject to the same change. 

The Dotics put it for T in some ad- 
verbs; itroTg, woKAf quando : oXKort, 
aWoKtt^ interdum, alibi : tct£, Toxa, 
whence tunc : so from rk comes quis 
in Latin J and from iurma, ciunna in 
Italian. 

It is sometimes added, as in verbs 
derived from the future ; a^<riu a^ia-- 
noOf placeo : and elsewhere among the 
poets, oxpg, *;c*ftj, vehiculum : rota, 
funis : oxft, oxxa, Pind. quando. 

It is cut off J Kaxi'xvtijia, avynfA.a, 
gloria, jactantia. Thus in Latin, xa- 
wgoc, aper : TtikUoqf MoX. raXiKog, 
talis. 

It is also added to prevent a hiatus : 
fxmiri for fjLri, 'in, ne amplius : as in 
Latin sicubifor si ubi. 



Ai/M,€^a, from the Hebrew lamed , or 
the old Syriac lambda. 



The Attics put it for v; w'tjov, Xtrgav, 
nitrum ; 'sn>£vfji,i>v, mr'Kivfxarv, whence 
the Latins have taken pulmo. Thus 
a^fxoxiyj, ignorantia, comes from a, pri- 
vative, and i^f/iwv, ovo?, peritus : v£«y«- 
X05, nuper nalus, from vtoyvog. Thus 
from vvfjKpn comes the Latin lympha ; 
from nasiQ^fxoq, comes Palermo a city 
in Sicily ; from NauTraxTo?, Lepanto a 
town in Achaia; and from -sp-nv/xfl, the 
French peruque. 



M. 



Mu, according to the Ionics fxS>, from 
the HebrewTwcm, or from the old Syriac 
me, the vowel being changed in all pro- 
bability for no other end than to agree 
with the following letter vu. 

The JEolians use it for ITj 'erurS, 
(A,a,rw, pessundo, Icedo, ambulo : >ara95ff-a, 
fxaBaa-ct, supplicio affecla. Thus in 
Latin from yTrvo? comes somnus for 
sopnus. 

It is added ; op^o?, I'XjjMq, vehiculum : 
X£4;^oi>, Xip^jU«{iw, lingo. The poets 
double it; ifA,a6Ev, tfAfjutOsv, didicii ! 
hfxitg, Mol. afXfA.Ei, nos. See the pro- 
nouns in the following book, 'Af»!f, 
Mars. 

It is sometimes rejected; /b»'«, '«, 
una : jut/t^/uat, imit&r, for mimitor t 
a-KlfAiron, scipio, a staff. 



N. 



NiJ, from the Hebrew nun, whidi 
has not changed its name either among 
the ancient or modern Syrians. 

The Dor. use it for A, when there 
follows a T or a ; ^xQov, hdov, veni : 
0iXricos, Bsyrig-of, opiimus : <pihrdlos, 
<p'ivralos, amicissimus : <^i'Kris, ^ivnsy 
auriga : Pind. IxeXeto, xIvto, jubebat, 
Alcman. ei\eto, eXeto, Ivto, and adding 
y, yivro, cepil. 

The people of Crete used it for 2, 
whence cometh Iv for U, in, iv ;t*P^''» 
ad Chorum : and afterwards changing 
s into *, Iv for If, iv <puos, Hesych. 
whence the Latin in, in lucem. 

It is added to verbs in lu, vu, atid 
others; Tt<w, tIvho, solvo, pendo, luOf 
honoro', ^vto, Suxw, saoifico, ruo, eurro, 
&c. 

And the poets by inserting v, of a 
barytou make a circumflex verb; 
I'nu), IxvEw, IkvSo, venioy emitto ; ay«, 
ayvio), ayvu, ago, duco', and by taking 
also an «, ayivao, veko, comporto : wifofy 
Horn, (for tsre^Si from wi^etu) m£§vZi 
whence 
f 



Of Letters and Syllables. 



31 



whence vs^mjut and tai^nvavit Iliad, v. 
transeOf transjtgo, emetior. 

It is often added only to render the 
sound more distinct and clear; thus from 
fxmQctiy minuOf fxivuvQa, paululum, /t*i- 
wvBaihoty brevi durans : ax.cifAravro^ti^-' 
fxr.s, pugna indefaiigabiliSf from auULfAct' 
TO?, indefessus ; and thus in Latin from 
ioffvs, densus, >^iix'»t lingo. 

Instead of v, they add y before y, 
*» Xi ^> l>ecause it supplies then the 
place of v; as rFXci^o/xatj 'wXeiy^Ofxa.i, 
errOf errabo : Od. a. •m'Kayy^ri^ seductus 
est, Od. a. maXifjtvXayxQivras, iterum 
erranies; where it is to be observed 
that K is changed into x,^ by reason of 
the other aspirate: mXayfaiVf icuncula 
cerea, from iit\a.yw, percussi : XeXoy^^a, 
for xixoxa, comes from XsXup^a, sortitus 
turn ; or else from xiyo), XEXop^a, legi. 

In like manner /u is added instead of 
» before &, vr, <p, 4', /u. ; as B^otoS, mor' 
talis t ifj/^^oa-U, ambrosia : afxTrvvvQn for 
mvetrvvvByi, respiravit. Hence the Ionics 
say, Xa'^vf-o^tti for Xn-4-0|M.ai, accipiam : 
lx«/t<t<j>0»v for eX{i<pQtiv, accepius sum, and 
the like. 

The inhabitants of Crete and Argos 
used frequently to cast the » out of the 
diphthong Et, and then to insert a vj 
as from a-jrii^a (whence comes a-Tius-a- 
fxai) o-viv^a, libo: from kmxo), (whence 
comes also the first aor. ^vsixa) Ivsj/jta;, 
fero. In like manner from mii, they 
make dih, and dl, semper; whence uknao? 
and divaos, semper finejis : riQiis, ponens, 
in the neuter ri6iv, &c. elHvai, scire, Iv- 
Jevch, Hesych. ^aeiviss -^ol. <pazwos, 
lucidus, speciosus : S'etvof, Hwos, convici- 
um. Sec. 

The Latins have also in like manner 
of Jaci'ff made densus ; of Xeip^ia, lingo ,* 
of KnTcos, Dor. nifnos, campus^ &c. 
And the French of laterna, lanteme ; 
of ciicumis, concombre ; of pavitare, 
epouvanler. 

The Lacedaemonians and Cyprians 
rejected the subjunctive of av, and in- 
serted v in its stead; avm, av^a, ipsa; 
where moreover there is a X" for a t; 
dvxj^v, dfj(,<^rni, cervix ; where there is 
a <^ for a ;^ : tS «utS eryg, dvrsres, 
ejt/sdem annt. 

N is also inserted after an e, or an *, 
as we have elsewhere observed. Thence 
it follows as Caninius remarks, that 
we say in the vocative w Vav, 6 amicCf 
instead of 2 Irav, from £t>j?, era. 
Though others are of opinion, that it 
is a noun derivative, as from 'E^fjtve, 
'B^av, Mercurius. 

A double e being changed into n in 



the imperfect, a v is inserted at the 
end; e/rXes, lwX«v, navigabai; iffis, 
£pp»v, fluebat ; h, h, Eust, erat • 
which agrees with the analogy of the 
verbs in /*«. 

N is cast off sometimes ; cvlvycs for 
ffvv^vyos, conjuxy maritus. Thus from 
craXiv, mrumf retro, comes 'ura'Kiai^igf 
iterata persecutio ; ma>Ia-)iios, umbrosus : 
So from vT^oa-Qiv comes 'ca-^oa-Qs in verse, 
ulterius, anterius : as from incn^uBs)/, 
sKure^Qe, uirinque, by syncope. And 
thus the Latins of nx«T<w*« have made 
Plato ; of lifxwv, Simo, &c. 



S" is equivalent to ho- or ys-, as ap- 
pears by <}>om|, mcs, palma: tetIJ^, 
lycs, cicada. 

The iEol. transpose these two let- 
ters, resolving | into o-h, ; ^ivof, c-ksvos, 
hospes, nqvus, absurdus : |«})W5, <nf*- 
<fUg, piscis. Thus the Latins of ajt'w 
have made ascia, a saw. 

The Bceot. change n into ^ ; tltuta-tv, 
il^aa-iv, Aristoph. iverunt : fxev, J^ov, 
pervenerunt, Horn, though others choose 
to say, that from the future of Txa;, 
Ifa, another present is derived, whose 
aor. is ifov. 

The Latins vice versa put h for f ; 
|U.u?a, mucus. 

The old Attics used to change <r into 
f in the preposition vlv ; a-vfAfxAXjot, 
fy/u/uaj^of, commilito: but this seems to 
have been disused since the time of 
Thucydides. 

The Dor. use the same change in 
the futures and first aor. xXetw, dico, 
celehro, kXeiV&j, vXct^Si : Ka^icoo^ iui.Qi!^Z, 
exaflt^tt, from xtt9i{«, sedeo, insideo. 
Thus from xXflc comes xXa^, clavis^ 
from Spvjf, ogvtf, avis, ales, oraculttm, 
&c. 

The Ion. change two a-a- into |; 
^la-a-os, h^og, duplex. In like manner 
the Latins of maffffoho^ have made 
paxillus ; of 'ariff-a-a, pix, &C, 



O. 



'O/itutgov, little 0, so called to distin- 
guish it from the great w, omega. The 
old Syrians called it ot, and the ancient 
Greeks oZ. 

It has a great affinity with a ; /za- 
Xa;^»j, (AoKo^n, malva : adro^, rgw""?* 
iEol. exercitus ; avu, ovu, supra, &c. 
So in Latin from Ja^S, domo. 

It is used for s ; Xsyw, rf/c«, "kiXoytt, 
dixi : T^sfAUf r§oy,iUf tremo, iimeo : 



32 



BOOK I, 



^(ifjtVf currOf waXjvJgfljwIdtf, recurro, recido, 
reciproco. In like manner in Latin, 
pendo, pondus, pondero : <rrrlvJ«, libo, 
spondeo : tego, toga: and in French 
motte from meia ; crote from creta. 

The iEol. use it for w, changing the 
imparisyllabic nouns into parisyllabic ; 
s^'jts, ear Of, amor; e^osy ov, idem. And 
in other places, wga, o^Uy hora : and 
among the poets, kv^v^v^og, Iv^vxo^osy 
spaciosuSy capax, amplus : lofxev, eamut, 
for 10} fAiv, Hom. &c. 

It is sometimes added to the begin- 
ning J fxo^yvvo}, ofxo^yvvwy abstergo. Thus 
in Latin 'm'hdyios, obliquus. It is also 
inserted in the middle, ogS, o^o», videos 
aXocDy Od. s. for aXS, the imperat. of 
oKaofjieti, erro, palor : ayrop^wvo?, avro- 
ypeov6fy per sefusus : <pZf, <p6a!Sy lumen : 
a, otf, cujusy II. &. 

It is sometimes rejected by the 
Dor. 'Anaa-iXaoSy 'AKy<ri\as ; NfXoXrtOf, 
NjxoXaj ; MsvlXao?, MsvlXaj ; AaoJwjj, 
AttJi'xn. Thus the Latins of wvos have 
made pus ; of /M.ogo5, wors / of de novo, 
denuo ; of ovofxa, nomen ; of oiria^t, 
post ; of o^Qva>j ruo i of 'i^afMcs , ramus ; 
ofoKeWta, cello. 

And the ZEol. say, s^sSev, c-ISev, 
eflsv, for IfxioQiv, a-ioBiv, eoSev, of the 
genitives l^so, «r«o, I'o, formed by re- 
solution, instead of l/txS, o-S, §, meiy tui, 
sid. 

By the same analogy it is that we say, 
rinlSf cuTy instead of TtTroTS, 



nf, from the Hebrew phe, of which 
with a daguesh they make pe. 

The iEolians use it sometimes for 
/u ; ofA.fA,a}ay I'TT'jrarA^ oculi : fji.tr IfAa, 
lirer I|w5, mecum : fjtsre^^ofxstiy 'sreH^' 
^ojua{> prcetereo, appello, quceio : fxe- 
Tet^cios, >BTBtel^<rioe , sublimis, volans. And 
sometimes for t ; e-ToXfl, cjroKri, stoloy 
amictus : a-raXeis, ciroKiis, missus, pulsus : 
Ttr^Airraiy isrir^a'jrrai, convers^us est : 
raiyriy fsriy.iny quinque: s^ov iffefAVa)- 
€oX<t XH^^^f ^^' y- habebant prce mani- 
bus hastilia in quinque cuspides divisa. 

Tbe people of Crete in like manner 
used to say cirAhm for c^tihcv, stadium ; 
and rsrla-v^e, for ria-e-a^esy quatuor. Thus 
in Latin from rra-xySy comes spica ; 
from Taw;, pavo. And in French from 
tignuniy pignon d* une maison. 

Several adverbs assume a « to mark 
the interrogation ; o0t, ubi, indefi- 
nitely ; <ar^«, ubi, by interrogation : 
of, ubi, indefinitely j «p«>r, quo, or ubiy 
by interrogation : v, ubi, quo, and 



qu&y or ea rationey indefinitely ; wri, 
qud ratione by interrogation, signifying 
also quo : odtv, vnde, ex quo loco, quare, 
indefinitely j •aroQev, undfy quare, in in- 
terrogation. 

Likewise several that are interroga- 
tive, by casting oflF •ar, and assuming 
an aspirate, become relative: then 
reassuming their <m, with an e before 
it, they return to be interrogative, 
woTE, quando? ote, qui? ottote, quan- 
do ? 'btS, ubif 5, cujus ? oVa,' ubi ? 
tffo&iVy unde? oflev, quart f oiriQeVy qua 
hora? &c. 



P. 



'p«, from the Hebrew r«c^, or from 
the old Syria c roe. 

It is often changed into t, as- we have 
observed in the method of learning the 
Latin tongue. It is often reduplicated, 
but then the uEolians make a transposi- 
tion, changing » into e ; xo-wgia, xoTTEpp*, 
stercvs : aXXorptof, aWoreppos, alienus, 
and thence alter. 

P is sometimes lost ; al<rx§Ui ttle-- 
ylovy i^os, turpis, ior, issimus : fA-an^lf, 
^jjjttacv, 1^0$, a moreover being changed 
into »), longus, ior, issimus. Thus the 
Dor. say o-xaTrlpov for a-nmlfov, scepirum, 
and hence <r>tr,7fl3)(0i Baa-iXivs, rex scep~ 
irifer, in Hom. ^ijcko; for fxiK^os, par- 
vus : rsrorl for nr^os or isrfOTt, ad • 
/jkwn'eeiv from fAd^ifio}, capio, aor. 2, 
sfjta^TToVy infin. (Jta^TTBiVy fxatreiv, Ion. 
fA,a7rsBiv. 

In like manner the Latins of S^Opov 
make artus ; of X£;tTfov, leclus ; of 
/M.£Tpe<w, metior ; of KevrpwEf, cenionci\ 
&c. and perhaps of arap, a^ 



2. 



ityfxcty from the Hebrew samech. 
The Dor. call it <rav, according to He- 
rodotus. 

It is used sometimes by syncope for 
^'y «S^£t/tA£v, ?«tsv, sciveramus. 

The Lacedaemonians used to put it 
■ford; ©EOf, erioi. In like manner the 
Athenians, ayaBos, ayas-os, bonus: &«t- 
/o«va, a-afxivk, crebro : as also the Ion. 
0v9os, Bva-a-oi, profundum, gurges : and 
hence aQva'<roi, bottomless, 

Which moreover is a further proof 
of the relation we have so often re- 
marked between o- and tbe last iJlass of 
mutes. 

It is used for v ; h\<^Vy h\<p'is, del- 
pkinus : (/Mm, fxeis, mensis. The iEol. 
do the same in regard to the infinitive; 

voiXVf 



Of Letters and Syllables. 



53 



VftslV, »o6i?, intelligere : yeKa.v, y'sXais, 
ridere. And the Dorics in the first 
person plural ; tuttIojcas?, verberamus : 
si^TTo{A.iq, serpebamus. See the conjuga- 
tions, Book III. 

By the same analogy, the people of 
Crete used ^? for nv, erat : aik for aiev, 
semper: fxss^for f^h, quidem: naXas 
for itaXw, pulchram. And the Latins 
of -srxlov have made plus ; of -nrj^v, 
prius, &c. 

2 is often added for greater emphasis; 
as <^a,w, <pa,^M, (r<pci^co, jugulo, macto, 
immolo : /ui,Si, a-{xZ, guczro : ^sgS'w, sr^lg- 
^ft>, video. The same practice almost 
obtained among the old Latins; for 
they used s^/i/M for Hies: stlocum for 
locum, &c. And of el they made si ; 
of zlfju, sum, &c. as the French of 
umbra have made sombre. 

On the contrary, the Ion. and yEol. 
frequently rejected it; as a-/xixa,^, /wi- 
Xtt^, hedera, iaxus : a-f/,iK^os, f^m^k, 
parvus : a-ji£^a(oo, m^a^ao, dissipo, di- 
spergo : a-<fiv, <f>iv, sibi. A practice that 
has been sometimes followed by the 
Latins ; <r<|)axx», fallo : tf-<j>£vJov»i, fundn, 
&c. 

The Lacedaemonians, and those of 
Pamphylia, Euboea, and Argos, re- 
jected it, substituting a rough breath- 
ing in its place ; fxScrct, {A.'^k, musa : 
fBTaa-a, 'sraa, omnis : ^as-oa,, $yoctf bourn 
custos : Bv a-oi,evoi, bene tibi sii ; from 
whence comes euve, an exclamation of 
joy. Hence also Is for sus still remains 
in the common tongue. 

The Latins on the contrary have often 
changed the rough breathing into <r; 
vTto, sub : vTTtp, super: s^,sex, 8zc. And 
even sometimes they have put it for a 
smooth breathing, as It, si. 

The people of Crete and Megara 
used to add it to the end of words; 
oixah, oiKah(;, ad domiAn : aye, ^y^s, 
due, agp. And this perhaps may be the 
reason of our saying in the imperative, 
cX^y t*^^^ ' ^''"'^X^^) iniende : heq, pone .: 
<ps^e, <pfi$, (by syncope) /er, &c. which 
are the imperatives of s-^ny'i, TtQrjfj,t, 
&c. 

The poets on the contrary some- 
times cast off the s final, to serve the 
measure of their verse; ^nSaKi, scpfjius : 
p^ftjgt, seorsum, &c. as the old Latins 
used to say versibu'' iuu'', &c. 

The Dor, used also o for og, qui j and 
- orn for ocrris, quicunque. 



Tew, taiif ^nd not taf, (ronj the He- 



brew tau, which haS presei-red the old 
Syrian name. 

This has been a favourite letter of 

the Egyptians. 

The Athenians used it for a-; nria-- 
a-a^a, rerla^a,, quatuor : crhfAe^ov, T^/wepev, 
hodie, &c. 

As did also the Dor. but less fre- 
quently, cii, TV : coj, TEos, iuus: elclv, 
Ivrl, or, according to the JEoL evTi,sunt, 
Thus the Latins of &s, have made ut ; 
of TToff-a, tot, Si c. , 

The same Dorics put t for » ; keTvo?, 
TsTvoj, ille. 

The old Attics often added r both 
to nouns and verbs ; 'woKSf^es, 'srloXe' 
fjLOi, bellum ; from whence comes Pto- 
lemy : M'TTMy Kowloo, c<vdo .\ tvitca, tutt- 
Ta>, 'oerbero, &c. And hence it is that 
the nouns often take a t in the geni- 
tive ; vl|, vw1:5, noXf nociis : a,m^, 
amide?, rex ; whence avaxlo^tov, templum, 
palatium : yolKa^, (or yeeXa) yxXcucloq, 
lac- See the list of genitives in the se- 
cond book. 

The Latins in like manner of linumt 
have made linieum, Sec. 

T is added to several adverbs, when 
they bear a relation to others ; ors^ 
Tore, cuiTif turn : hviKa, rrivUa, quandOf 
turn, jam : a-j, Ti?, vt, sic : 3<f»fa, t6- 
<p^a, interim, aliquando : £»?, r'eoq, quam- 
diu, tamdiu : o3i, roQi, ubc, ibi: o9sv, 
rCQev, unde, inde : rt^os, rrifxcs, and 
Ttiy.uroi, quando, tunc. And in French 
amilOf tante. 

It is also sometimes cut off; id-o^tjc, 
'zsro^ij, vitula, juvenca : and hence 'srvpftg 
in Lycoph. Thus from Wll^va, comes 
perna in Latin, &c. 



T. 



'r-^ihov, little u, to distinguish It 
from the Latin U, which was fuller, 
and sounded like the French diphthong 

cu. 

It was sometimes put for a, but not 
very frequently ; rsa-a-a^es, r'ea-a-v^e?, 
quatuor : y'kci<^Wj yXvi^cc, fadio^ scalpo. 
Thus of aynvKoi, the Latins have made 
uncus. 

Sometimes for i ; a.fji<s^i£ioov, aix<^iyClvw^, 
qui circum-circa habitat : r^i'^ciXsMj rpv- 
<|;«'X£itt, galea ires hnbens cristas. 

And often for the o among the Mo}. 
hofjLa, ovvfxa, nomen : /uoyt?, fA^vyte, vix, 
iBgre, &c. In like manner the Latins 
of No/xa'^e? have made Numidee ; of jSoX- 
€of , bulbus ; ©«of, Deus, Sec. 

The people of Crete rejecting x, 
used frequently to substitute a u; 



34 



BOOK I. 



ttXKu»v, avuvSiAif halycone : «Xjtfl, avuaj 
subsidium. The same has been im'i- 
tatedijy the French ; altery autre : Al' 
vernia, Auvergne, &c. 

The poets casting off v use a u ; 
ayavoi;, ayavoq, pulcher, splendidus : 
aviayoq, dvta^oi;, resonans, tumultuosus. 
We read also in Ilesiod, na-m^aiq for 
xATa|i»{?, confregeris ; from iictlayvvf/,i, 
rejecting the t, and resuming a v. 

The Ionics often insert a v after an 
o; )t6pog, KoUfo?, filius, puer, juvenis, 
masy'germen, ramus: o^o?, oygo?, mons. 
Thus of 'BErsXuTry?, multipes, piscis, tu- 
herculum in nare, the Attics make ixtouXv 
iTfuq, and the Ion. and Dor. itu'Kviroq. 

—— veluti Balb'mum polypus Agnee. 
Hor. 

In Hke manner ^ov^oi;, impetuosus, 
libidinosus, from Ssgw, terreor, salio, 
curro : oXo/ulvw, oi)XO|W6v«, peslifera, ncxia : 
"OXujUTrcc, OvKv^ATTog, Olympus, a moun- 
tain of Thessaly. 

T is added to some verbs, in order to 
form derivatives; «rXii9(w, 'mKnSva}, ple- 
nus sum, farcio, intumesco : sttm, STrvof, 
or changing e into «, hTrvm, and accord- 
ing to the Dor. aTruoo, jubeo, clamo, 

Y is also sometimes cut off; dsKkt- 
ftov^f uiKKoTToq, velox : agriTrou?, a^riinqf 
valens^ pedibus. In the same manner, 
S'wov, bipes : v^i-jrcv, tripes, .&c. So 
from ttyXttf comes aXa|, sulcus f and 
aXajti^fltf, sulcOf aro ; as in Latin from 
-sraugov comes parum ; fr-ojn tzrtfygovars^, 
pariimpcr, &c. 



*'^> /A?, or pJii,\\z. a /> aspirated, or 
at least an half p, to soften the letter 
a little, because of the roughness of the 
aspiration, which must absolutely be 
exprassed. 

Besides the change of this mute into 
its corresponding letters, as we have 
shown above, Chap. v. and which may 
be observed here in the word o-<}>tv, 
from whence comes sibi, the Mo). 
moreover used <f) for & j bxi<S«}, <pU^a), 
comprimo, frango : from whence <t>Xt4g- 
rai, teret, Hom. So fn Latin from 
^vgA comes foris, and from &6J(w, suffio, 
&c. 

The iEol. used also <^ for;^; »upc**''*» 
«i)^£v*, cervicem, fauces, jugulum, col- 
him. 



3C 



xf, chi, v\z, a c aspirated, which 



ought not to be pronotmced like -the 
French eh, but as the Hebrew cheth ; 

vSp^o?, 'sra.a-'/a., 'A;^{To<f)£X, &c. 

It is sometimes dropped in the be- 
ginning of words ; x^tapo?, tepidus, 
T^ia^oq, calidus, temperatus : j^XalV*, Icena. 
And very likely, from xa^uat is derived 
kumi for chumi ; as from x^^^j concede, 
evito, comes a^«, colo, veneror ; accord- 
ing to Eustatk. 



fH, the ancient Greeks wrote «rc for 
4, which the ^ol. have retained ; 
«u;tX(w4', KuKXojTr?^; and after their exam- 
ple, the Latins, Cyclops. 

They likewise transposed these letters 
now and then; e-'we'Wiov for -nrcrixXioy, 
or -^eXXtov, armilla. 

"*■ being equivalent to 'arq, probably 
ft4', retro, rursus, posthac, is derived 
from Imfs-u, by cutting off t and c*, 
and by changing afterwards o into a. 
As from a-'^l, by metathesis, comes <^ersy 
and according to the Dorics -^s, and 
from thence ipse, a, urn. 

It is sometimes dropped ', 4'«^/'*«<^ 
ft^i^off, arena, litlus. 



SI. 



*Si[ji,iya,, magnum, to distinguish it 
from the little o, micron. 

It is sometimes formed of • and r; 
as iya, My 03, Theocrit. ego, qui: to lv>l>- 
/**, Att. rovv^vfA,et,, Dor. rctivhjfActj amig- 
tus. See above, Chap. xi. Rule ix. 

Thus of Marci pueri, Publii pueri, 
they used formerly to make Marci- 
pores, PubUpores, to signify the slaves 
or servants of Publius and Marcus, 
&c. 

The poets change sometimes a. into 
w in the circumflex verbs in au ; h^e^, 
hQdoei), pubesco. The Bceot. practised the 
same on other occasions ; d^x°f*^<^ 
w^)(jjieug, incipiens : a^i^eg, optimus-; 
w^iq-oq. Thus in Latin from a^S, and 
d^S/fjtai, comes oro. 

The Ionics change c« into «; Bwff^y 
Bia-tCf clamabo. In like manner from 
v» privative and hofA,a,, is derived viww« 
/xoc, obscurus, ignobilis. 

The poets change s into u, in the 
first of barytons, of which they makei 
circumflex verbs in aw ; t^intu, t^a- 
tedooj Z, verto : vs/txiw, vaifudcm, Si, divide, 
&c. 

In like manner from mXscn comes 
'w'K«Mf navigo, Ihougk a barytonj 

and, 



Of Letters and Syllables. 



2>5 



and in the opinion of som'e, from *^<»f 

p6af,fluo. 

In circumflex verbs in ow, they change 
into u ; tow, tua, ^«e^£v, do, damns : 
^octit xjuuj II. n, facioy irasci, pervium 
reddOf molesto. 

The Ion» and Dor. change e into u ; 
«v, «v, igitur certe : 0Sv, &afv, bovem : 
Baa-ty 0^0-1, bolus, &c. - 

H is often changed into w, to make 
a fuller sound ; vflrte-o-ta, tjlwa-a-Uf for- 
mido : '^hyuj 4'^X'"> ^o<^0t siringo, per- 
mulceo : .pnyvvfj(.t,jrangoi lffMif.ajfraciu& 
sum. 

The old Attics used to insert this 
letter; ci<psix.a, a<^imctf dimisi', tlQa, 
eitSet, and 'iuQa, consuevi. 

Sometimes it is cut off by syncope ; 
oiriff-uQeVf 07r«r9£v, retro pone : ixr^mv, 
iffgrtVy and Dor. -argav, paulo ante. 

The Latins have done the same; 
Jtegwvn, comix ; or else they add an a, as 
in fCflTgtt, matrix. 

From aXum^ comes vulpes ; for the 
^olians added a digamma to it, FaXw- 
va^ ; of which it is proper we take 
some notice. 

Of the MqUc digamma. 

The iEol. having no rough breath- 
ing, invented another character, which 
they called digamma, from its figure, 
resembling that of two gammas, one 
over the other, thus, F. From whence 
the Latins have taken their great F, 



which they even used instead of u con- 
sonant, when there followed a u vowel^ 
as serVus, DaFus, &c. 

Hence the Cohans used to write 
Toivof, vinum: Fsa-jrEga, vespera: Fe- 
Xsva, Helena, &c. 

Hesychius therefore is mistaken in 
writing several words with a y, which 
should be written with a digamma ; as 
yiWos, yio-'/ys, for FtXXof, F«rp^uj, taken 
from iXXos, strains, lusciosus ; and la-)(vs, 
vis, foriitudo, robur, &c. Into which 
error the resemblance of the capital 
characters might perhaps have led 
him. 

In the very same manner he has 
erred in writing TSTrla., nvoiKavri, for 
FettI*, FevotHsvTt, coming from ettI*, sep^ 
iem, hun,a<T.i. 

The people of Crete made use of a 
for a digamma; wUw, ovum: ga^e- 
X«s for ai\ios, sol, &c. And hence per- 
haps arose the error of pronouncing (J 
like a o consonant. To this digamma 
we must refer the etymology of some 
French words ; as, fianc, from FXayov, ' 
for Xttyov ifiatler, from lac tare. 

To this same digamma we must 
likewise refer a multitude of words, to 
which the Latins have added a v con- 
sonant; as fjLM, FejjLZ, vomo : ag-iet, 
Te^ia, Vesta, As also in the middle ; 
rt!«v, alEav, cEvum, But for a further 
explanation of this matter, I refer the 
reader to the treatise of letters in the 
New Method of learning the Latin 
Tongue. 



CHAP. XIII. 

Of so7ne other Particulars that relate to Reading and 

Writing, 

1 . Marks of separation, 

X O divide syllables, two points are put over the vowel which 
i^ separated from the other, as -cralV, pueVi a dissyllable, for war?, 
a monosyllable. The Greeks calla this Sia^yo-;?, dissolution disso^ 
lution. 

The Greeks use also another figure of separation, called by 
them lixroXvt which is a small comma placed between two sylla- 
bles, to make two distinct words, and prevent them from coa- 
lescing into one, as o,t/, ivhich^ to distinguish it from on, that; 
upon which we shall make some remarks in the eighth book, 
chap, 2. 

2. Ma7'k$ 



36 BOOK I. 

2. Marks of re-union. 

There are two sorts of marks of re-union in writing. The first 
is between syllables, as when we are obliged to divide a word at 
the end of a line, which is done with a small stroke, thus - : 

The isecond is in the composition of words, and is figured thus 
-V-, as oris-^r-ovvf for orts ovv ; sub^^deacon, for subdeacon. The 
Greeks call it v<ph, subunioy to untie under, because it used to be 
piit under the words. But instead of the latter, we often made use 
of the former small stroke. between two words, thus, sub-deacorii &c. 

The Greeks also make use of a couchant line, to mark a long 
syllable, as in Latin; likewise for a mark of abbreviation, as 0^, 
©EOS, Deus. 

And for a mark of things taken materially, as to a, this letter » i 
rS /3, of this letter /3: to nh^oqythis voord Uh^oq, 

3. Of proper names. 

The same mark was also employed in the 16th century for 
proper names, which they afterwards distinguished from one an- 
other by the addition of certain points. For whereas the ancients 
never made any difference betwixt these and other words; the Ve- 
nitian and Paris printers were the first who devised to put a single 
line over proper names of men, women, or animals, and their de- 

jivatives, as o'^vc-aslq, XJlysses, 

To put a line and a point over it, as a mark of the names of 

different people and nations, as IXKksy Greece, s\'}iyives, the GreeJcs. 

To put this same line and two points for mountains, as zyx^ma-- 
fToq, mount Parnassus, 

And finally, to put a line and three points for seas, rivers, lakes, 

morasses, &c. as Iw-ha-novros, the Hellespont. 

But all these marks are laid aside, since the practice has been 
introduced of marking proper names with capitals, as in Latin ; 
and of leaving the others without any distinction. Thqs we 
write Aim for Leo, a proper name ; and Xewv, a lion. And so for 
the rest. 

4. Of dialogues and pointing. 

It is proper also to remark, that with respect to dialogues, the 
personages are not only distinguished by putting their names, but 
likewise by the letters of the alphabet, especially where there are 
but two : A denoting the first, and B the second. ♦ 

But as for pointing, since it tends more particularly^ to prevent 
obscurity and confusion in speech, we shall treat pf it in the intro-^ 
duction to syntax, Book VII. 



CHAP. 






2^t 



ocdco 



CLJ 



-Oi 



•i/i 



it 



CLUT^ (xvrou 

OLVTVO CCVTW 

')<)\v par 

y J ji vcrcti 

5 /^ 



Si M Jet 

0U V, (/is. (/v)', Jl/S 

CY.W- 

'6\j , 



U ,tiv. IJ , ip' 

XV, XJ. KV, K^ 



Xtj XV L 

x^v , xcjy 

:^ •x'x 

,11^ jiieros 

u^ /icra 

udi ' eTn 



& cl 

^ OS 

ouu. Q r. o'vv.Qvrvs 



^4(^37- 



Le T TER S cp/uiech'(/ e?' (^Irlrre^iatiii^. 


'0i3\cc. -TTcc^cc 


c<rO\v CCCLV 


'^'^ 


. 1/7P 


^Zc^, ^ipl 


TUV . 


TVl^ 


'TTM^. iTi^U 


c<ru/ (Tcru; 


cb \ U^) .TW TW 


•TTTf.Tf. Tfo 


S", S^a^L^.6'7', iTTav 


'^ 


T^ 


'jiu'k. 'TPcre 


■ 


^l.^ 


. to;)' 


'TrmviS' TT^evs 


6 J? , srUJ . CTf^, ^TO/ 


, If . 


V , U I 


'Wf^Wt/- 'TJLTji.'ZlTp.x 


s~av <jvv 


-v^j'. uv 


. V7^ 


-iir^.^zirCT- '2^^ 


<^x.o,<4.(JX^,cr)(€.< 


"SJZO" 


V^ZaT 


vrij TTvi 


"^l^- ^X'V' 


'>J^^^. 


VTTop 


Z^'O- f'^'F^ 


X-^-nc^-^'XP- 


'xzc'-p 


iz-urv 


^ po 


Q^v (Tyjyp 


IS , i:n . i 


vs . i/(rt 


Qx., fnx. Qx.sn 


Q<^ C^ 


^v 


yj^v 


C1X. 1 , Cocp.sui .ca^y 


Z^ ^ 


yN'T^f'^F 


ff7x.r <yvLO 


^D^V)- -^^^ 


T^ti 


X^pi 




-T"' Trc IS 


yi 


X^/ 


sTT/ , cxJ^ , (t^l . Jiff 


T^V. ^CCV 


xtw 


xr' 


c3rt/. St^. ^cti 




?^ 


K^^ 


c3l:a. 6-fff^v 


p^^ 


K^r 


oc/7 . yyJW. 6^l.^d^. 


-r re 


^ 


X^P\ 


S>0. G' 6-^0. (To 


-r.Tlw.ryrrji^ 


e^ 


Xft's 


^rv. ^-7?i/ 


'^. ^ ' -r-f/s 


?^'7^' 


X"" 


:w CL cr-ZDTt 




y&^ 


Xf"' 


axTVLj a^icmi 


C> .<S . 'TO 


x^' 


^i;v 


cwj)i' 6''itrDcr 




-^-tf 


'^<XV 


av o crraro 


Td .)S, Tin^T'i 


M 


'^<e.\ 


au V (T'Zirv 


'^•\- ^3 


cS 


- 


cw w s-'Ztrcu 


rCt- ^pi 


P"- JS^f^-rct/ 



Of Letters and Syllables. ^7 

CHAR XIV. 

Of Abbreviations, 

k5INCE it is equally necessary for reading well to be acquainted 
with the abbreviations of letters, as with the letters themselves; 
it is proper for us to mention something of them here, before we 
proceed any further. 

Some abbreviations only ' '^tter and letter, such as those 

between consonants, as ^ ror y^ : but those that connect vowels 
are either syllables, or words, as «»,, a^^ ; «; g/, si. 

There are abbreviations to which the accent is fixed, as 
-^f rv)s ; itji x«* ; and others to which it is not fixed, but added, 
as y)\ ycK^q ; j^, xa/. 

Sometimes whole syllables are abbreviated, as A7 for o-daf. 
/^ for jufv: and sometimes entire words, as ><? for >t«m : Gr. for 

When an abbreviation includes an intire word, or the end of a 
word, there is no point put after it; but when it only contains the 
beginning, it requires a point after it, which supposes the rest, 
and signifies that the word is not finished, as >^. for yfccipe^ 
X«x^. for Xwx^ar*)?, &Ci 

Examples of the others may be seen in the words above marked, 
and in the following List. 



BOOK II. 

OF WORDS: 
AND, FIRST, OP NOUNS 

C H A P. I. 

Definition and Division of a Word* 

xjLFTER having treated of letters and syllables in 
the preceding book, we now come to speak of 
words. 

A word is a sound, that signifies something. 

The Greek grammarians make eight different sorts, 
which they call parts of speech, viz. article, ol^^^ov ; 
noun, ovo(Mx ; pronoun, ocvruvvfAix ; verb, p?5/x« ; parti- 
ciple, fji'irox^; adverb, iirippvifxcc; preposition, -zy^oQfo-i? ; 
and conjunction, (rvvh(Tp.og, But these eight may be 
reduced to three ; noun, verb, and indeclinable parti- 
cles : for the article and pronoun, as well as the par- 
ticiple, are real nouns. 

Of these words, some, viz. the noun and verb, 
admit a difference of number^ the others do not. 

Number is the difference of a word, to signify one 
or more : thus there are two numbers, the singular, 
Ihxo?, that speaks but of one only ; and the plural, 
•arAyjGui/ltxo?, that speaks of many. 

But the Greeks have invented a third kind of num- 
ber, which they call dual, SvUky when speaking of 
two only : this having been introduced but very late 
into the language, was never much used ; and fre- 
quently the plural is put in its stead. 

CHAP. 






40 Book II. QT Nou^^s/ 

CHAP. II. 

Of a Noun in general. 

A. NOUN is a word that serves to nominate or 
qualify a thing. 

A noun is declined by gender, number, and case. 

A case is a noun's special manner of signifying. 

Cases are six in Greek, as in Latin. 

But the ablative is always like the dative in the 
singular, as well as in the plural; as the vocative is 
generally like the nominative. 

In the dual, the accusative is also like these two 
cases, as the genitive is like the other two. 

Gender is the difference of a noun with respect to 
sexes. There ought therefore in rigour to be but two, 
the masculine and the feminine. But the Greeks, and 
after their example the. Latins, have added another, 
called neuter, ^kn^ov^ for nouns which they could 
ascribe toneither of those two genders; which has not 
been imitated by the eastern languages, nor by several 
of those that obtain now in the west. 

The mark of the masculine is o, of the feminine 
'/I, and of the neuter to. This the Greeks call article, 
from a word which properly signifies iht jo'mts of the 
fngers, by reason of the particular connection there 
is between the article and the noun. 

Rule I. 

Manner of declining the article. 

Singular. 

'O, T8, Tw, Toi/, are masculine* 
Ts, ra, Tw, to, are neuter. 
'H, T>5?, T»7, rviv, are feminine. 
The datives are all subscribed. 

Dual. 

Tw, ToUv, are masculi?ie and neuter, 
T^y", ToiXv^ a7X feniinine. 

Plural. 



Of Parisyllabics. 

Plural. 
Oi, Twv, TOK, T8?, are masculine. 
Ta, Twi/, TOK, ra, ^re neuter. 
At, Twj/, T^r?, ra?, are feminine. 
The ablative is to be taken from the dative. 

Examples. 
The article therefore is to be declined thus : 



41 



N, G. D.Ab. Ac 

M. S. T«, rw, Tov 
N. S, TO, tS, rw, TO, 
F. S. vi, T^f, r^ 



TMV. 



iV. Ac. n,Ab. 

D. T&f, rorv. 
D. rcjf roTv, 
D. ra? rxTv. 



N. G. D.Ab. Ac, 

P. o', ruvf roTsf rovs. 
P. ra, Twv, Tors-, Ta. 
P. a/, TftJy, T«r<r, Ta.r. 



The article is without a vocative. But the adverb 
w supplies the defect of this case in all numbers, the 
same as 6 in Latin. This adverb has a smooth breath- 
ing with a circumflex : whereas S, with a rough breath- 
ing, and; subscribed, is the dative singular of oV, % o; 
which may be seen among the pronouns, where I shall 
give also the dialects of this article. 



CHAP. HI. 

Of Declensions; and of the Fii^st Declension of 
Parisyllabics. 

CxRAMMARlANS reckon ten declensions, five 
simple, ocTrXoi;, and five of contracted nouns, (ruwf»i- 

But nouns are declined, either with an equal num- 
ber of syllables, Icroa-vXXotQoo?, or with an increase in 
their obliques, m^trlocruAXa^w? : and this makes two 
remarkable differences of declension ; the one pari- 
syllabic, which receives no increase ; the other impa- 
risyllabic, which admits of increase. 

Rule II. 

General for the declension of parisyllabics. 

1. Nouns not increasing are declined like the article: 

2. Thei/ likewise require the dative case to be sub- 

scribed : 

3. And they form the accusative in v^ with t?i4 vowel 

of the nominative. 

Exam- 
G 



42 Book II. Of Nouxs. 

Examples. 

1. The piirisyllabic declension is that which follows 
the article according to its terminations. But as the 
article includes two different manners of declining ; 
one of the masculine, to which the neuter refers ; and 
the other of the feminine; so the parisyllabic declen- 
sion is twofold ; one which follows the feminine 
article, containing the feminines in a and n, and the 
masculines in «j or *jr, which correspond to the first 
declension of the Latins ; the other, which follows the 
masculine article, including the masculine, feminine, 
and common nouns in o?, with the neuters in av ; which 
correspond to the second declension of the Latins. 

2. Both these parisyllabic declensions have the da- 
tive subscribed, or a point written under it, in the 
same manner as the article. 

3. Its accusative terminates in v, with the vowel of 
the nominative ; as i [ji^Bira,, t? /aso;*?, rriv fx^trotv, o *A»- 
^^^oc^y Tw, 'AvJ^sa, roy 'Ai/^^sav. o Koyog, tw Aoyw, tov ^o- 
yov. 

Which we intend to shew more particularly in the 
sequel, beginning with the feminines, as the most 
simple. 

ANNOTATION. 

The 'urx subscribed of tuhich ive have been spealdng, is frequently 
ofnitted, as being no longer pronounced. Wherefore Sextus Empiricus 
in his ninth chapter against the grammarians pretends ^ that the dative 
may do as tvell mthoict this point, as 'with it. 

Rule IIL 

Of the feminines in oc and >i, which grammarians call 
the second declension of simple nouns. 

1. A, H, are declined like the femijiine article, 

2. Their accusative is in «v, nv, 

3. But A pure, as well as A A, 0A, PA, 7rtain A 

throughout the singular number. 

Examples. 
1. Parisyllabic nouns in « and ^ are feminine, and 
follow the feminine article. 

^. They 



{Of Parisyllabics m a and n, 4^3 

2. They form the accusative in av, or tiv, retain- 
ing, as we have marked already, the vowel of their 
nominative. They are therefore declined thus : 

N. V, G. D. Ab. Ac, N. Ac. G.D. N. V. G. D. Ah. Ac, 

s. 



a 1 «y T D. T P. 

> vts rt J. OS a/v V 



OllS 



*H ^^(Toc, musa, rri? [A3(rrig, t^ fX3(rn, riv, f/,^(rocv, &C. 
'H Ttj^tr, hon07\ rr^g rifxrig, rj? rt^^, rriv riiJ.riv, &C. 
. 2/^yAA«, (TxtAAa, t^utt^, ?j?, if/uAAa, >5;, pule.V, noiyt* 

xcHQoc, perdLv, koxkoc, ^UsXXx, evXceax, n?, vomer, '^I^cc, 
Y\q, ^mXKoc, ♦)?, storm, tempest, roA^a, n^, boldness, 7'ash- 

neSS, oiiKKv., nf, yiocnx, 

3. Those in a pure (that is, where a makes a syl- 
lable by itself, without being joined to a consonant) 
or ending in ^ck, S-^, ^a, retain a in all cases of the 
singular number ; as, 

Yi (pi\U aviicitia, t?? (pixUq, r^ ^ixU, Sec, 
r AriSo^, Leda, rinr Ai§(x,q, ta Ati^oc^ &c. 
11 KKXV^x, spina, w dKoly^ag, tJ cchMoc, 
ri ff^i^ocy dies, T?? »!/xe^»?, T^ Y[i^i^ot>, 

ANNOTATION. 

'A0>3va, Pallas; Noiva-ixoi, Nausicae, and /xva, 7nina, retain also 
a in the genitive and dative, because they are formed by con- 
traction from nouns in a pure : ^AQ-nvxx Nocva-tyioix //tvcJif. 0/xAa 
Thecla, makes also QUXxs, and ©Uxoi, 

It is not improper to observe here, that this analogy seems the most 
natural for all nouns in a, because this vorvel does not love to quit its 
situation. We jind also in Josephus MsA;^* Ms\^as, 'Pax^jXa, ar. 
We might even give it as a general rule for nouns substantive, since the 
termination in a, pure is considerably the most numerous of nouns ending 
in K, But as there are a vast many participles, 'which, forming their 
fominine in a.,follo'{X! the other analogy, by making ns in the genitive y 
and fi in the dative, tve have preferred this last for the general rule. 

The ancient Latins used to follow this manner of declining in a? ; 
•whence terras for terrae; escas^br escae; Latonasj^r Latonae ; pa- 
terfamiliasyor paterfamilias ; the latter remains still in use. 

Rule IV. 

Of masculines in AS, or in HX, of which the gram- 
marians make the first declension of simple nouns. 
1. AS, H2, have o'j in the genitive: 

2. And 



44 Book II. Of Nouns. 

2. And cast off q in the mcative. 
In the other cases AX follows n^^i^x ; 
And nt follows ri[x-l 
Examples. 

1. These nouns being masculine, follow the mascu- 
line article in the genitive, by making ov : but in the 
other cases they are declined like the feminine arti- 
cle, with this exception, that those in oc; retain a in 
the singular, in the same manner as iijo^g^a, and the 
others above mentioned. 

2. These nouns also reject ? in the vocative, and 
are declined thus : 

S. 'Av^^iecg, Andreas, w 'Av^^U, tS 'AvS^U, tw ^AvS^ia^y 

roi/ ^Av^^iocu, 
13, Tco and w *Ai/<5'^£6t, ro7u AvS^iuiv, 
Jr. oi and w ^AvS^ion, ruv *AvS^EooVp roTg ^Av^Ptoii^y touj 

AvS^iocq. 
S, X^uVn?, Chryses, w X^uV^, ra X^u<r», Tw X^uctj, rqy 

X^VCYIV, &C. 

In the same manner you are to decline AlvUg, Poet/ 
AlvBtoig^ s, Ms-yi?, latro, &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

J^iv^ycc<i is poetical, as also 'Av^^e/ay, tvhich Nonnus has used, to serve 
the measure of his verse. But the right names are 'Av^^ia? and Amxs* 
The former is read not only in St, Matthevo, chap, iv., but likemse in 
Athen. lib. vii.; in Dioscorides, and others : the latter is to be found in 
the Acts of the Apostles^ chap, ix.; in Pindar, and others ;froni tvhence 
Homer has taken aUsxIxI, and the Latins -Sineadae, the second short. 

LascariSf Vergara, and others, place here common nouns in HZ; and 
Priscian, lib, >v, observes, that the Greeks used to say o >^ o? A»?r^?. 
But this noun is always masculine in construction. Wherefore Urban, 
Caninius, Vossius, and the most learned grammarians, admit onl^f 
of masculines in v^s. 

Rule V. * 

Nouns in n^ making a in the vocative. 

Nouns making a in the "vocative are^ 

1, Those in TH2, 

2. Gentiles, 

S. Poetics in ITHS, 

4. And three sorts of verbals. But 

5, STHS admits either of -a or (x.. 

Exam- 



Of Parisyliabics in n? and a. 45 

Examples. 
Four sorts of nouns make the vocative in « short. 

1. Those in m^ ; iTTTrYiXarn^, equitatoVy w IftTrnXoiroc; 
%s'^o(i>'nrfi^, propheta, S zr^otpriroi ; and others of the same 
sort, preserving the accent in the same place, except 
^iiTirornu dominus, which draws it back, Z ^s-ttotoc. 

2. The names of countries and nations ; ' 2>tu^?, w 
2)cu6oj, Scytha. ns^a-ng.) u IIe^o-o^, a Persian, &c. but 
when it signifies Ferses^ a proper name, the vocative 
then hUs^trn, 

3. The poetic nouns in -sm? ; as avvooTTYig, w xw/wVcjj, 
aspectu canino prcedituSy impiidens. To which> we may- 
join Aa^v*??, lascivus ; and Uv^odxf^m, Pyrcechmes. 

4. Verbal nouns derived from these three verbs, 
/A£T^£w, metior ; Truxiuy vendo ; r^i^oo, tero ; as ysw/xET^*]?, 
geometra ; j3i^Ai07rcoA>5?, bibliopola, a bookseller ; -uToahr^i- 
€>!?, puerorum exercitator, vocative, Z yscoixir^oc, &c. 

5. But nouns in s-ng admit of either termination; 
^^Yi^rig, prcsdo, w Xvi^yj and xvi^ol; in like manner ts-eX- 
roirig, pdtatus ; uKovrTs-vig, jaculator ; 'O^^rng, Orestes ; 
Bvis^ig, Thyestes. 

Obser'oations on the dialects of the singular. 

The lonians change oc, into ^, and the Dorics vice versa. Thus 
the former decline Ainiocs like Xfyo-jjy, and the latter X^va-yis like 

The Macedonians rejecting s in nouns in vts^ used to change v 
into X, as o ^Av^iWrn^ o /w-yfiAAa. Thence comes Ifrttora, isisru^t 
eqiies Nestor : vi<pz\Yty^ha. Zjy?, nubium coactor Jupiter, Horn. 
Wherefore Vossius, and with him the greatest part of the gram- 
marians are mistaken in imagining that this is a vocative for a 
nominative. See the remarks after the syntax. 

The genitive changes ov into « or u, Dor. into ao, ^ol. into 
iw, Ion. the accent remaining always as in the nominative. 
TlTiXEi^vis. UriXsihojf PelidcB ; -sto/tjtms-, -croinTsw, poetce. 

The accusat. Ion. is in zx, as AUeUx for Alnlxv, ^neam : ^ea-- 
'Tiorsoc. for ^EOTTToTJjv, dominum. 

Rule VI. 

Of nouns that retain a in the genitive of the com- 
mon tongue. 

Sometimes AS has iyi the genitive » :- 
Thus Q .(^(aiJt,olg makes rs Qu(acc. 

Exam- 



4^ Book II. Of Nouns. 

Examples. 

From the above-mentioned Doric genitive in at, some 
nouns in a? in the common tongue have derived their 
genitive also in a ; as o 0w//,af, tS 0«jiAa, Thorrm: o Boppar, 

BoreaSj rU Boppx : o 'urocTnrocg, pater, papa, t» zrcHTfroi, 

Some have also both terminations : 6 Uv^ccyo^x?, rs 

U\j^ocy6^H and IluOayo^os, Pythago7'as : o isfocrpo^Xolot?, par- 
ricida, rn wo^t^o^Xoih and zr»rpoiXo{», &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

TAer^ «re evew womw5 zw »$-, to^fc^ Me /^05e ew ccs drop s in the 
genitive^ as o A^vis, tS Apv, Dres : o noJ^j, t2 rio^^, Podes, according 
to Gaza, 

Hereto it seems, >we should also refer the diminutives in vs, ivhich 
lose ? in the genitive ; as o Koi[a,vs, t5 Ka//,D, rw K»/xy, to» Ka/^yy, 
Camylus : o A/ovDj, Bacchulus : o Ki^ayo-vy, Clausilus : as also o 'in' 
crUsj, tS I>3jr«, Tw *I»3aS, toi/ 'l5j<r5v, JESUS. 

Observations on the dialects of the plural. 

The genitive plural admits of almost the same changes ag the 
singular, the Doric being in av by changing u into a, (which hap- 
pens also sometimes to the masculines in £s in the imparisyllabic 
nouns) JEol. in awv, Ion. in kuv, both with the accent on the pe- 
nultima. 

The dative plural is in ^?, Ion. and often assumes an / final, m 
the same manner as the masculines in os, whereof presently : the 
same happens aUo to certain local nouns, which are taken for ad- 
verbs, as ©w^tjo-/, Thebis : ^aQv)vvi(ti, Athenis : and even to these, 
without changing at. ~ ' 

The Ion. form the accusative plural from their singular, by 
addmg S-; '^so-Votex, ha-Trorex^f dominoSi &c. 

The ^ol. and Dor. form their accusative in Mts; %«/? for V^^atf, 
sedes. Which may be seen all at one view in the following table. 

Table of the first parisyllabic declension, with its dialects. 



Singular 




ANNO- 



Of Pamsyllabics in n; and », 47 

ANNOTATION. 

Poets generally join the Ionic s in the same syllable xmth theJoUoiu- 
ing vowel ; as here in su genitive singular, iuv plural^ and elsewhere. 
Thus 'csoifiTiM is a trissyllable, xuXiuVi a monosyllable, %f yatwv, riv^ix, 
dissyllables i ana in Homer, UviKvtloihu of jive syllables : 

iAviViv KEi^s, Qsoc, n'/)X*jia^£W A^^/A^oi-, 

Iram cane, Dea, Pelidae Achillis. 

Which shows Plutarch* s mistake in censuring this verse as incorrect' 
and too long by a syllable. 

The same also sometimes happens to iraparisyllabics, whether 
simple or contracted ; likewise to pronouns, and even to participles, 
2LS zjoXixs for OToAXas-, multos ; rsixjiot, muri ; Ovjo-ius, of Theseus ; 
vfAncuv, singing ; all words of two syllables in Homer and others: 
and this synaeresis is also sometimes made of ;, as a-^uty, monosyh 
for cr^<\, vobis* 

Contracted Nouns. 

Contracted iiouns of the parisyllabic declension often admit of a 
contraction through all their cases (and are then called by gramma- 
'rians oKoitx^vt), but without changing their essential terminations. 

Those in Si come from a,x, i^voix, fxvSi, mina; or Jrom ex, when t is 
preceded by a vowel or a § ; as s^sa, l^oi, lana : 'ao§(pv§Eoc, 'ao^(pv^»^ 
purpurea. 

Those in v, com^Jrom ia. ; when not preceded by a vowel, nor by a 
§1 as yex, yv, terra ; Xsovrix, X^ovrv, leonina, sub. pellis : or from o»j ; 
as txTrXor), u'nXyi, simpla : ^mKov), ^tfrXr), dupla. 

The contraction is formed by rejecting the vowel that precedes the 
termination : so that to decline them, it is almost siifficient to make 
the contraction in the nominative, and afterwards to follow the com^ 
mon analogy of the other cases ; as, 

Mvoix, f^voi; (AVxs; /u.va; lAVxv, &C, 
AiTrXov), ^tfrXv ; ^cnXvis ; ^ivX^v, &C. 

The masculines in ixs andhs are contracted in vis, to whose analogy 
they conform in all their cases ; as, 

'e^Iabxs, 'E^i^risy Mercury : *E^/a5 ; 'E^^*) ; 'E^/^^y, &c. 



CHAP. IV, 

Of the Second Declension of Parisyllabics. 

JL HE second parisyllabic declension is of nouns, 
that follow the masculine or neuter article. And 
this by the grammarians is styled the third declension 
of simple nouns. 

R u L B 



48 Book II. OJ Nouns. 

Rule VII. 
Of nouns in OS. 

1. OX masculine and feminine foUi)Ws the masculine 

article, 

2. But the wcative is in E^^n Xoye, as 6 domine. 

Examples. 

1. Parisyllabic nouns in og are either masculine, or 
feminine, or common, that is both masculine and fe- 
minine: and all these nouns are declined like the 
masculine article. 

2. Their vocative is in s, in the same manner as 
the second of the Latins, with which, as we havct 
already observed, this declension hath a great affinity. 
It is therefore declined thus : 

N. F, G. D.Ah, Ac. \ N.A, G.D. \ N.V. G. D.Ah.Ae, 

Smg. Of, e, «, w, ov. I D. Uf oiv. I PI. e/, MVy oiSy as* 
o XoyoSf sertnOf u XoySf Ttf XoyoVf vu Xoyioy rov Aoyov, &C. 
^ oSos, via, u o^e, r^s o5S, r») o5w, t^v o^ov, Sic. 

ANNOTATION. 

2'he ancient Greehs, before the netv orthography derived from the 
SamianSf used to turite in the genitive ro >^6yo, in the dative roiXoyot^ 
JPor Longus and several other grammarians attest, that they ivrote o/br 
a, this being its name, as tve have mentioned in the Method of learning 
the Latin 2'ongue, and oifbr u, 'whence the Latins came to say quoi in 
the dative. And there is still to be seen at Rome, on the two Larnesian 
columns, EN TEI HOAOI TEI AnniAI, EN TOJ HEPOAO AFPOI, 
Jbr \v T*) o^w t J ^Avviac, h tw 'Hf w^oy ayf w, and the like. We find also 
Xoyw, mthout a I subscribed, according to the JEolics and Dorics /- 
ijohence the Latins have taken their dative in o long, domino, Sfc. 

Rule VIII. 
Of neuter nouns in ON. 

O^^ following the neuter article, has three cases per- 
fectly alike in every number 

Which in the plural terminate in a. 

Examples. 

Nouns in o* are neuter, and follow the neuter arti- 
cle, having always three cases perfectly alike, the no- 
minative, vocative, and accusative, which in the plural 

terminate 



Of pAtiiSYLLABics in «? afid wj/. 49 

terminate in » as in Latin. They are therefore de- 
clined thus : 

N.V.A. G. D.Ah. I ii.V.'A. D.Ah. | N.V.A. G. D.Ah. 

S. oy, ov, «. I D. to, oiv, I P. atf uvf oiS, 

ro |t'Aov, lignum, tS |vAtf, Tw I^Aw, &c. ♦- 

Rule IX. 

The Attic manner of declining, which grammarians 
call the fourth declension of simple nouns. 

1. The Attics use w?, (^y,for o?, ov, and in all cases they 

put an w, subscribing the i wherever they find it : 

2. They likewise make the vocative the same as the 

noininative. 

Examples. 

1. The Attics follow a particular manner of de- 
clining certain nouns, which is, to change all the 
vowels or diphthongs of the preceding terminations, 
and even the » of the neuter plural, intow, subscribing 
the I wherever they find it. 

2. They likewise make the vocative the same as the 
nominative, as well here, as every where else. 

These nouns are declined thus : 

N. V. D. Ab. r N, V. G. D. Ac. 






PI. 



Uf lOV, USf MS* 



N. V. G. D, Ah. Ac. 1 

Sing. us, u, u, uv 

m for the neuter nouns, 

"Kiuif populus, t5 Xew, tJ Aew Tov Af^Jvj &C. 

TO svysMVy fertile y tS tvytu^ ru zvysvy &C. 

■^ oiKuS) area, T~ns oiKuy rn xXwy t^v xXuv, &c. 

'Nouns in og that have a long in the penultima, 
change it here into s ; as koch, vioog, templum : Aaar, 
Xioo^i populus. But if a be short, it continues; as 

xaAoc, rudens, yidXiaq : T«o?, pavOy ro^oog : Xocyog, lepUS, 
?^ciyoog. 

ANNOTATION. 

There is one neuter noun in us) viz. to ^fsV, dehitunif rS 
;^f Iw ; though TO %^£wy, Ta %^£<y, is also used. VV^e likevrise meet 
with TO ay-nqu in Philo, senii expers : to iTrivKsu*, in Plutarch, 
plenum. 

The Attics often reject » in the accusative, as in these five 
nouns J "a9ws^ rh "A^vj mount Athos : ^ ws^ t^v w aurora : -h Kewr, 

H 



50 



Book II. Of Nouns. 



T^y KtUythe isle of Ceos: o Xayw?, Tov Xxyuf lepus : i5 Kw?, T^y KaJ, 
fAe isle of Cos : tov Qsov "Kzu, Deum propitiunif as in St. Gregory. 

Hence it is, that the neuters in oy lose their v in the common 
tongue; aXXo, aiiud: rnKiy.vro^ tantumy tarn grande. natu : roiaro, 
tale : roa-aro, tantum : as also the article o and some pronouns : of 
which hereafter. 

But many of these nouns are also written with a v ; as to/Stov, 
roa-Zroy, &c. tov adwy^ Herod. tov y^xyum, Plut. and Others in the same 
manner. 

The common tongue has some times affected to Atticize, by 
forming the vocative like the nominative ; w ^rosy heus tu : u 0£of ; 
whence comes the Latin 6 Deus, &c. 

The Latins have likewise imitated this Attic form of declining, 
by saying Lethum Androgeot Virg. ad moniem- AthOf Li v. Ego qui- 
dem sum Paidi, ego vero Apolloy 1 Cor. i. where Apollo is a genitive 
from the nominative 'attoXXa^s:, and the same may be said of the 
rest. See the Latin Method,^ 

Obsewations on the dialects. 

The Ionics make the genitive in oio ; >.oy», \oyoio. The Dorics 
change » into w, not only in the genitive singular, but also in the 
accusative plural; t5 Xoyo;, rss Kdyus, But sometimes they use 
only an omicron, Aoyoy; and this termination agrees with that of 
the nominative, o Koyos, and may be moreover an Attic vocative, 

fc- Xoyos, 

The genitive and dative dual assume an / before v ; Xoyoivy 
Koyouv. The Ionics add also a / to the dative plural, >.oyoi<Ti for 
Xoyois, as if it came from the singular, Koyoio T^oyou, The poets 
add sometimes an o to the Attic genitive, ts Mzn\iu}, MtvsXeuo; 
and sometimes they subscribe the u ; t5 Mivu, Mlvuo, ur ulvuo, as if 
it came from the singular, Mlmo, ' All which may be seen at one 
view in the following table. 

Table of the second parisyllabic declension^ 'with its dialects. 





S I N G U L 


A R. 




N. 


Vocat. G. D. 


Ac. 


i 


V 6 "N 00"^ 

}oqAt. f Ion. 


] 


1 




f oto 

^ [Dor. 


( 


► ""■ 


OV \ 


y \ . 





1 


> 

At. 


r y 






"I 


r ) . 


\ 


1 


\ 
1 


> > wo 


\ 
i 


>• wv 


J. 


K. ) '° } 


s 


1 



Dual. 



Plural. 



G. 



D. 



Ac. 



oi<; A usD. 

Ion. ^ osSy. 
otat 



COK 



O/* Parisyllabics in ug and uv, 51 

Contracted Nouns. 

These contracted nouns are as easy as the preceding, because 
like them they are contracted through all their cases, suffering 
scarcely any sort of change in their termination, as the following 
table will make appear. 

Eoj in if iOU 

\ \ \ \ 

Sing, Kovg 08 w ovv 

6ov . og-oy 



Bml 



/ 


/ 


y 


/ 


/• 


/ 


oog 


0» 


oco 



idi £OiV 



OiV 



OiiJ OQlit 



Plur. 



sot i(av £0K £»? 

\ V \ . 



001 OCOV OOK OS^i 



Examples* 

O vooy, vSj-, mens ; r« vo^j v5 ; rw vo«, voJ; towo'ov, vovv, S^c* 

In like manner its compounds , o I'yyooj, et/va?, benevolus ; o avoo?, 
amens, 4'c. So l poos, povs, fluxus ; o -TrXooj, 'crXovr, navigatio ; 
%vooy, xvovr, lanugo ; xf°°^? %?°^?? cutis, et corpus amictum 
cute. And their compounds^ as o Kxroippoos, xocra^ppovt;, defluxus : 
Kcx>^ippooq^ Kx'KlppovSi pulchrifluus, pulchra habens fluenta, b^c. 

In the same manner the adjectives^ o uirKooSj uir^^ovs^ simplex ; 
^nrKooSy ^^TrXoyy, duplex. 

Their feminine Jblloi»s the contraction offeminines, as we shall see 
hereafter. 

The neuter is contracted in the same manner as the masculi?ief 
excepting that, in the plural, of soc, and ox xue make Siy rx ofixy hxy 
ossa ; TO. x^viToxy x^va-oi, aurea, S^c, 

But the compounds do not contract the three plural cases in a \ for 
iae do not say evvx^ hut ewox, benevola ; in like manner, Kxxippox, 
pulchriflua ; svrrXoxy navigatu facilia, S^c. Even in the genitive we 
rather say, \vvouv Ivn'Kouv^ than Iwuv^ IvnKuv^ Sfc, For which we have 
the authority of Sylburgius, though this remark has escaped Gretser^ 
Mocquoif and most of the grammarians* 



52 Book II. O/' Nouns. 

2aof, salvus, is contracted thus : o crus, rU and to era^ay, a-uy, 
Salvura, T«y (Tiiovs and ra,s <raasf, o-a;r, salvOS et salvas : also TO, 
a-oitxy a-oif salva, which is hardly to be found any where but in Hesych. 
and Suid* The remaining cases are not contracted* 



CHAP. V. 

Of the Imparisyllabic Declension^ 'which Grammarians 
call the fifth of simple Nouns, 

Rule X. 

Terminations of this declension. 

1. Nouns of the imparisyllabic declension ha^ve nine 

different endings, 

2. Their singular increase is in og, i, a, : 
Their dual terminates in s, oiv. r 
The plural in tq, m, <rt, ag. 

3. But in cont7^acting, these terminations are often 

changed. 

Examples. 

1. Jl HIS declension corresponds with the third o£ 
the Latins. It comprises a great number of termi- 
nations; and these may be all reduced to nine; 
viz. four vowels, which are- the three common, a, », u, 
with w; and five consonants, viz, two liquids, v, ^ ; 
two double, g, ^J/ ; and ?. 

ANNOTATION. 

No Greelc noun ends in e, and those in u are always feminine pari- 
syllabics. None likewise ends in a mute, nor in Ky /x, or ?. And if 
iue should meet with any nouns in those endings, we are to consider 
them as foreign and barbarous* 

2. The terminations of the imparisyllabic cases are 
comprised in these few words, mentioned in the rule, 

2. I 3. 

D. f-9tv I PI, ff-wv-Ci-a?. 

o. and w Ttrai/, Tit an , ra Tir^vog, TOO Tirocvij rov Ttrocva, 
D. rco TtTolus, ro7v Tirdvoiv* 

But 



1 

'6" 



Sing*, og-i-06 



Of Imparisyllabics. 5^ 

' But in contracting, there is frequently a change in 
the termination of the cases of this declension, as we 
shall see more particularly hereafter. 
Rule XI. 
Of the vocative. 
1 . The "vocative is generally like the nominative, 
% But sometimes it differs ^ by assuming a short vozvel, 
by casting off ?, or by taking a v. 
Examples. 

1. The vocative is generally like the nominative; 
as Ttrai/, w Ttrav, Titan: and 5 t^af, vinculum: 
Ti*and w Aa//,7ra?, a lamp : o and w KAiijiAr)?, Clemens :. 6 
and w S'ei/8?'wv, Xenophon, &c. 

2. Nevertheless it frequently admits of some dif- 
ference, which may be reduced to three classes: 

I. By putting a short vowel instead of the long vowel of 
the nominative ; xvhich happens, 

1. To adjectives in nv) ri^nu, tener, w rs^sv. 

2. To barytonous nouns (that is, which have no 
accent marked on the last) in n^ ; ^ iJ^y\rY\^^ onater, 
u fJt.riT£^ : n ^vyaTfi^y flia, w S^uyarc^ : >i AvjfAnrY\^, w 

AriiAviTs^ : where, for this very reason, the accent is 
changed or drawn back. 

3- To these four oxytons, or that have an acute 
on the last ; -utoctt^^, pater, w Tzrun^ : $ocri^, levir, mariti 
frater, Z Soct^ : aVrf^, vir, Z 'oln^ : (rwT»(^, servato7\ Z 
<ruT£^ ; though we meet also with w o-wt*!^. 

4. To nouns in uv ; o j^ i lX£ri[Ji>uvy misericors, w Ix^yi- 
(xov : 'AttoAAwv, Apollo, w "AttoaAoi/ : Uoa-nSuv, Nepfu- 
nus, w Tlocrst^ov : ■'C, v\ xuwv, ^canis, w xuoi/. In like man- 
ner comparatives ; jS^At/wv, melior, Z ^ixrm, &c. Some 
of these nouns in m do not draw back the accent, as 
Aa>c£«J«//x&)i/, Lacedcemon, Z Aa,y.e^»7[xov, Sec. 

5. To barytons in ^tjp : o "Extw^, Hector ; w *'Exto^ : 

ara^Tox^arw^, omnipOtens, w zrocvroK^cHro^, 

6. To nouns in nq of the tirst contracted declen- 
sion ; A»jtA0fl"9gi/»]?, Demosthenes, Z AnjotoVO^vf?. 

And among the jEoI. according to the remark of 
Lascarisy w is always shortened in the vocative, even 

in 



54 Book II. Of Nouns. 

in oxytons; »i dMyJuscima, uoiMv: >) yiKiSwvy hirundo, 
w p^sAiJok, without removing the accent. 

II. By dropping the final g of the nominative : which [ 

happens, 

1. To nouns in £u?; jSao-tAii}?, rei\ 2 |3a<riAiu. 

2. To contracted nouns in »?; X*/x8?, for li(j.6eig, 
the name of a river, w Xifj^s: o wAajta?, placenta^ w 
Ts-AaxH. In the same manner, (38?, ^o^, w jSs, because 
it is contracted. But oS^g, dens, and waV, j&e^, make 
w oJ'sV, w TD-a?, because they are not contracted ; and 
therefore they are distinguished by the accent from 
xira, adv. ubi, and o^b, the genitive of oikf via : -anxTg, 
puer, or puella, makes also J 73-«r. 

3. To barytons in k and u? ; oV*?> serpens, w ©V; 
PoT^u?, racemus, w |3ot^u. And among the poets, 
even the oxytons in »?; 'A^a^uA^/?, w 'A[ji,»^vXXt, the 
name of a woman. 

4. To contracted nouns in v; ; o /auc, 7WW5, w>ii; 
^ ^fuf, quercuSy Z Sf; o »x^uj, j&wci^, w tp^Ou, Athen. 
lib. vi. 

5- To adjectives in u?, though oxytons : o^vg, « 
ogu. But substantives follow the general rule ; ;j^Aa- 
fj^^^y chlamys, S ^xoiiAvg ; except it be in verse, where 
sometimes the poets reject c. 

6. To proper names in ug ; Qoocg, u (s>6» ; KaAp^a?, 
u Kdc\^», Which the Latins have often imitated, 
6 Calcha^ Sen. 6 Palla^ Virg. 

III. By takiyig a v. 

This rule is relative to the two preceding. For 
sometimes the ? is only changed in to v, and sometimes 
the penultima is also shortened. Even several of these 
only reject ? according to the preceding rule : thus, 

1. Adjectives in «?, casting off* to shorten the diph- 
thong, assume a v ; p^«f«K, gratiosus, w p^of/fv , and 
sometimes « p^a^t's*. In like manner, o tiiAong, w Iii^obv. 

2. Proper names in ac; UoxMfAocg^ w TloXv^dfActv, 
or UoxMiAOi, in Horn. AUg, Z AlW or A'U, and Attic, 
A?<^?, Soph. 

3. The 



* 



0/'//ie Vocative of I MPARisYLLABics. 65 

3, The other barytons in u;; lAiXac, niger, u (xihu^f : 

TocAa?, miser, w roixccv. But the oxytons conform to 

the general rule ; o */*«?, lorum, vinculum, w //^a?, &c. 

And the participles do the same ; *>»?, starts, w /r«?, 

&c. 

ANNOTATION. 

All the rules given here by most grammarians for the Jbymation 
of the vocative i are either false, or deficient; 'probably from their 
ijoanting to form it by the analogy of the genitive, which hath no 
relation to this case, either in the Greek, or Latin tongue, as ive have 
made appear elseivhere. For if you pretend with Clenardus and Ca- 
ninius, that nouns declined in vo? or vro;, form the vocative from the 
genitive, by rejecting o$ or to? ; this proves that I^jms, oi^vvos, should 
make u IfAoi^v, whereas it makes u tfAxs, and the same may be said of 
the like sort : as also that KA^/x,»}?, svroq, shoidd make K.'kri^sv, whereas 
it makes KX^j/x*?^; and the like in the same manner. 

And to restrain this rule to barytons declined in avro?, or ovros, as 
Vossius has done, would be making Ssvo^wv to have for its vocative u 
Zivoipov, whereas it is like the nominative: and Uoaziluv, mos (with 
uj to have u Tloa-zi^uv, whereas it has IIoVe^Sov, short ; and 'AwoX- 
X&iy, which is also declined with' u, 'Awo'XAwvo?, to have u 'AttoXXw/, 
whereas it has "AttoXKov. 

Wherefore I have comprised all that was necessary for practice, in 
the few words of the ride, tvhich are easy to retain, and do sufficiently 
point out the true analogy of this case ; intending to show the applica- 
tion thereof in the examples. 



CHAP. vr. 

Of the other Cases of the Imparisyllabic Declension. 

The formation of the genitive. 

A HE genitive of this declension admits of a great 
variety of formations, which correspond to those 
of the third of the Latins, terminating always in or, 
as the Latins in is. We shall range them herein 
their proper order, according to the final letters 
above mentioned. 



M 



L Those ending with a vowel 

Genit. uros'\ ^ri^^x, ^ri(Axrog, gradus, tribunal. 



The names of letters are indeclinable ; uXipx, ^^ras, y^y,ii.x, 
ViKra, : even those of another termination, as ^v, ^'i, pu/. But e, v, o, 
u, are declined, because of the adjective that goes with them. 

Nouns 



56 . Book II. Of Nouns. 

Nouns formed by apocope or rejection, are also indeclinable ; 
as v^a for 'v<px7(jtioc, texturuy a-y.iir» for a-Ki'TTOKTiA.Xf tegmentum^ a,Xet<pc6 
for uX£i(px^f pingnedoy &c. 

The other vowels form the genitive in o^ pure ; as, 

'los'. TO alvnTTtf crivviTrtoSf or scos, sinapi. In like manner 

XO/X./X/, gum-niif x/vvaC«f /, cinnabnriSf 'zusirE^i, piper ; which 

are all words of foreign growth : wherefore Athen. saith, 

that there is no Greek word (viz. substantive) ending in 

I \ /, except /xe'A/. 

IiTos'. only one substantive, ro f<,EA<, {/.ixtros, mel ; and a few 
neuter adjectives, which conform however to the analogy 
of the following rules, because they always take the 
t. genitive from the masculine. 

gvo$'. TO yovy, yovvo^, genu j but <yovaroj is also used : in like 
I manner to Upv, hasta, ^o^vos and ^o^xros : of which in the 
J heteroclites ; a-nci'Trv, for, sinapi ; Sax^y, vos, lacryma. 
J £or : To a'fyj cis-iosi urbs : to 'jiwv, 'nusost grex ovium, ovile, 
I And here we have six nouns in y, though Aristotle in his 
^ Poetics acknowledges but five. 

C oos : ^ A'/iTMf A'/jToo?, Latona, But lu for Iw^oc is inde- 
^ \ clinable. 

II. Those in v or ^ generally retain these letters^ because 
they are unchangeable ; and sometimes they take 
a r or a S; as. 



AN 



Cocvosl 

^ Apoll 

J avTOJ, f( 

(^ masci 



zyociavi TsmtavoSf pcean, a hymn in honour of 
o : TO iA.iXoi.Vi avos, nigrum^ atramentum. 
for participles ; to tv-^xv, xvtos, which follow their 
masculine. 



{ 



EN -^ svos : TO T£f £V; rt^tvo^j tenerum* 

VIVOS', o "EAA'/7v, rvoj, GrcBCus : i5 crtt^'^v, vivo^, siren, a kind of 
insect in Pliny, and the name of a fabulous woman. 
y Evos I zjoif^Yiv, SVOS, pustor .* 0? ^f^v, tvos, mens : o Kj 'h oi^a-riv, 
svos, mas : >^ 09 Tf^rv, Evos, tener, tenera : cl^nv, agnus, by 
syncope makes a^vls for cl^zvos, according to Eustath. 
unless we choose to derive it from cl^s, Sc^yos. 
^ivos'. ^eX^iv, /vo?, delphin : V xxrtv, 7vos, radius: ^ ^ "^ ^'>*> 
IN < ^ivls, litus. The nominative of these nouns frequently 
t end in <?, as hx^is. 

Covoy: TO /xEr^ov, ovoj, mojus; and all other neuters of notins 
ON < in wv. 

{ ovros, for participles ; as to rv'rrlov, ovros, verberans, 
Kohs : TO ^iTTofv, Utto^os, dcrlviog it from yiTFovs, bipes, 
\ovvros, for participles ; as to rvTrav, Hvrosj verberaturum. 
vvos: ^oavv, iA,6a-vyos,,turris propugnaculum ligneum : those 
also whose ending is in w or vs; as o 4>o'^xvi- or ^o^kvv, 
VV9S, Phorcys, the son of Neptune, and father of Medusa, 
vno<it for participles J 79 ^svyyvv) vvroSfjungens, 

ON 



OYN 



TN 






flN 



Of the Genitive of Imparisyllabics. 57 

uvos : as xXwv, xXuvo^j ramus : o cc'tuv, aluvosf cevum : IlAa- 

ruv, Plato: -n {ji.wuv, papaver, 
ovos : 'sj^iuvf 'cj^lovss, serra : o» p^eX/Swv, 'ovo^t hirundo : o 7^ n 
o»iy.uv, ovogf dcumon, genius : i^ v K^sta-a-uvf ovosy melior, 
Kvoovj canis, makes xuvo?, by syncope, for Kvoyog. 
uvTos: ^syo(pMVf uvTos, XenophoTt. 

ovTosi ^^txKuv, OV70S, droco* Id thc same manner the par- 
ticiples, rvTrlmy oyros, verberans : rviruvi ovrof, qui. 
verberavit. Likewise all other second aorists active. 
ovvros : rvTeuv, ouvror, verberaturus. In the same manner 
all other second futures active : and even the present of 
circumflex verbs coming from su or oa>: as 'btoiuv, ovvto^^ 
Jaciens : ^-yiXuv, Swos, manifestans, 
\ot^os : ixdiix^f oc^o<;f beatus : to yi)CTxf, d^osy nectar .* -^/^f , «f o^> 

Isturnus^ a starling. 
oiros'. TO wa^, rfTTxroi;, jecury hepar. In like manner to oi- 
AP ^ Xsx^f acTos, esca qua anitnalia capiuntur, illecebrce : rtaf, 

Iadeps: (p^kx^y puteus. But the last three are sometimes 
contracted ; for we say Se'auto?, ryiro^, (p^-nTos, &c. 
\^ h ^afjLct^, retains g in verse, making ta.fji,afros, 

v)§os : S^f , yt^osi Ser, the name of a people ; also the silk- 
worm ; AsT^f , XnTv^QSf pelvis : to x^^ , ^f or, cor : n x^^, 
ycngoiyfaturriy sors. 
HP ^ £f »$• : a<0^f , c^oy, (gther : aij^, aeV .* o arwf j Stella : Ja^^j 
I /evir, a husband's brother. 

I Several are syncopated in the genitive : zjxr^^i pater, 

[^ 'Zjxri^s, 'UTXT^os : av^^j VzV, kve^oS) ocy^^oS) taking a ^, &C. 

FTP f^'f®^' 9^£'f> ei^Qs, pediculus : i5 ;^s)f , £/fw, inanus : ayTt;^E/f , 
^ pollex : tCf n zso\vy(ziqy multimanus, 
Jo^os-: rortroq, yiToqoq, cor y animus. In like manner its com- 
(_ pound, ;^ 17 (A.eycx^X'nrugf o^os, magnanimus* 
^os : 4/i9y^, t/foi-, susvrro : >9 17 (A,»§rv§f v^os, testis : to -bji/^j 

-nry^oj-, ignis, 
u^os : (^w^, ^uqosyjur : Ix^?) *%*'f or , sanies tenuiory a se- 

rosity of blood : to eXw^', captura, prceda, 
o^os: Nlrwf» ofo^* Nestor: y^ -^ xntxru^y ocnaro^osy carens patrCy 
But ulw^, ag-wa, makes v^arosf as coming from vW: 
and o-xft/f, merday makes axaroi;. 



YP 



fiP 



■;•' 



III. T//o<ye in g or ^form the- genitive, according to the 
power of their doubled letter : whereof ij^ takes 
thefrst class ofmuteSy -sr, (3, (p : and g the second^ 

fxoft $w^a|, ^w^axoj, pectus, thorax: v xiXt^, xvXuos, pocu- 
turn, calix : o Kj y> /^E*f a|, axo? , adolescens : ^ aAwTrul, »Aw- 
wexor, vulpes ; changing >j into c. 
Some take a t with x, making 
KToy : c?i'y«^, »y«xTo^, rex : v yy|, vvxtoj, 7WX, 

I 



58 Book II. Of Nouns. 

'yaj: o ot^jrai^t a.^irxyoqy rapax : o Tsrlif, tyas, cicada: Xt5y|, 
J Xyyor, singultus. But Xt5y|, /x/w^, makes Xuyxw. 
I ;^o? : >^ 17 ^«|, ^>3xw, f W55W ; i5 ^f <|, rf »;^oy, capHlus : where 
. T is put for d, by reason of the following aspirate. 
^tsos'. w\|/, W7T0S-, oculus, visus : n X«iA«4/, awor, procella : 
KvxXw^/, w^o^, Cyclops, 
^Qs : "A^^nJ^, "A^aCe?, -4r«55 ; o ^axj/, «Co?, palumhus: 

^05 : Kiyy4', Kjvu<|»(»j, Jluvius Africce : n Kxr%\i-^^ /(^o?, co/m- 
men scala, 

IV. Those ending in ? generally take the last class of mutes ^ 
r, (^, 3- ; or e/^e ^ i/, r£;^ic^ sometimes retains the 
r along with it, making vt. And sorjietimes the g 
of the nominative is rejected, and the genitive ends 
in o; pure; thus, 

oLVds : tl y>5f a? J arof J senectus : to ocXacs, uKxroq, sal. 

otvros: yiyxs, . gigaSf' ytyxrroq : o^v^^ixs, xv^fteivro^y statuct ' 
tsoisj -cravTof, omnis. In like manner its compounds, 
cHirxs and (rly^itxs^ omnis. 
_ . oivoq: ijAxoc^f (jisXavos, niger : l roixxs, avQs, miser, 

^ a^Qs : for the feminine, as ^ /xovo>t> jutovix^oy, monas, unitas : 
Xuyt.ito'.sy "KxiKirxlos, lampaSf lucerna : or for the common, as 
j^ i5 (pvyoiqj ^yyaSo?, exul, prqfugUS, 

aox: KoixSf lapis, Xxxos, and by contraction "kSies. But the con- 
tracted nominative A«?, makes its genitive in Kios acuted. 

airos : ^ ^xU, txiro(;, convivium : to r«'V, TXirosj farina aqua 
subacta. 

.«;5os : >^ i5 xsxts, puer,puella, 'axills, 

'oils', -n y^xvsi yf«oj, amis, vetula : v^vs, y«o?, navis, Att, 
ysus and y^sus; and in the plural vsuv and y§twu The 
Ionics say vv)tf, vvtoq (or by diaeresis yvjiis) and in the plural 
v^es for vxss. But the accusative is vxvq for va«?. 
Jeoj: for the neuter of nouns in vis; as to aAuGk, t» aX«0i«f} 
verum, 

svo^i xrth^ KTBvos, pecten : sTr, Ivor, m«m5. In like manner 
/lAU^E/V, »§£/V, nullus; and other compounds. 

evtoj : 'ZnA.oiis, XiiAoevros-, Simois, a river of Troy : i5 ''oirUny 
'Owo'evto?, Ojoil^, Opuntis, a city of Greece ; o yx^ntsy hros, 

ivenustus. Likewise the participles ; as Tv(p9eis, ivros, ver^ 
beratus, 
u^osi V K^^^s•, clavis, xXstlos, ytXti^t, xXst^x, and xy^eTv I 
I plur. xXu?, claves, Matth. xvi. 19. 
tos and ws, according to the Ionics, or tus, according to 

the Attics ; o ^x&iXzvs, tS ^xariXswq, vios, ios, rex, 
yirosi XeCuo ^twj ^^bes : i5 ea9v)s, r)Tos, vestis. In like manner 
the feminine substantives derived of an adjective ; as x«xoo . 
malus : ^ axuoryif, utoj, malitia : cirsTos, urbanus : n afKo- 
L TiiSf iiTos urbanilas, &c. 

HS 



AIS 



Ar2< 



E5 



EIS 



BYE 



Ul 



02 



Of the Genitive of Imparisyllabics. 59 

f^vToj: r//M,?jr, n^TivroSy honoratus: ^oc^vvst ^apyvvro^, laure- 

Iatus ; both contracted from niAvsts and ix^vneigt evros. 
svros', K>^vfAvs, evrogf Clemens: OyaAnj, tvros, Valens. And 
HS { the like nbuns borrowed from the Latin, which generally 
lose their n, 
BOS : AvjiAoa-OsvioSf so^, Demosthenes : n Tf /i5f *)?, soy, iriremis : 

iy n <xXv39ri(;, £os, verus et vera. 
los : o(piSf iQSf serpens : -^ ctoA/?, tosy urbs, Att. £u<;» 
iloq: Uai^ig, i^o^f Paris: V H^fiTtUy K^'^m^os, basis, Jundamen- 

tunZf crepida : o tC, n ^'rroXiq, ;^or, extorrisy exuL 
iros : 17 x«f' i"> %af 'Tor, gratia. In like manner cvx-^f ^^j gru" 
tuSy oiycc^isy ingratuSf &c. 
21 ^ iQosi ^ vi o^yisy. o^vSos, avis, ales : '^ iji,s^iji,is, (j(.e^[A,iQo(;fJuniculus, 
tros: 71 ^sfjLis, jicSy Jas, ^sfAtros (whence ^£/^<r£vf/v, in Horn. 
jura dare) and ^e/^/^o? : as %af /$ hath %af<Toj, and also 
Xa^i^os and x^i^^'^^t according to Lascaris. 
ivos '. y^ -^ r;V, rtyos, aliquis, quidam / and ris, rlvoq, quis, 
L interrogative. 
eos: TO rsT^os, ntyiosy murus. In the same manner all neuter 

nouns in os. 
or^q : for the neuter participles, to tstv^o?, Iros, quod ver- 

beramt, 
oos\ Kj VI /35f, /Sow, ^05 : xi^^i ^^ Xf°°^> CM^/5 ; • vS^, vooy, 

Hyroi : -CTXaxSf , wXaxSvroj, placenta : v '09rej, 'OwSvto?, Opus, 
Opuntis ; which are nouns formed by contraction. 
dYS <! ^""^"^ ' ° °^^^* "^^ olovTosy dens ; and several participles, as 
^ 5m, §dvro5, qui dedif. 
o^os: -craf, oto^os-, pes, with its compounds, «9r»5j carens 

pedibus, &c. 
w makes oros, auris ; taking it from us, which would be 

Doric, as they say m for h. 
'vos'. ixZs, i/,vos, mus : o <%0yy, Or <;^6y?, 'X^uof, ^wcfs ; o? %e- 

^f?j x-'^vosy chelys, cithara. ' 
£os : o^iis, o|=o?, acutus, velox : ri'^vs, suavis : unvg, velox, 
tus : Att. zsrixvsy CTii^Ew?? cubitus : • ZT^i<jQv<;, tus, senex : 
zjixsxvs, lus, securis : whose plurals are in tuv, 'cs-hx^^^t 
-crfiffCewv, -CTEXsp^Ewv, &C. 
T2 \ v^os : ^ ;)^Aa/xyy, ;^Xa//<v5of, cUamyi % I yCf vi n'nKv<i, n-fiKv^os, 
advena. 
vQos : ri xo^vs, xo^vOos, galea. 
vvrog: ^svyvvs, i^evyvivros, jungens, and the like participles 

of verbs in v^/. 
Moi^Tvs hath only the dative plural, y^i^rvai^, martyr, testis. 
But we say also fAu^rvp, wf o?, as above. 
fwTflf : ysAft;?, yiXcoros, riSUS : o ^wr, ^wToy, vf r ,* to (fw^, 



I ^uxos, lux, lumen. 



Cil\ wSor: vt (pus, (pulls, pustula, red spots, such as those that 
I mark the legs after being too near the fire. 
\^ws: yt xi^us, oiiloos, pudor : ^ 'nus, riwf. aurora. 



60 Book II. Of Nouns. 

'orosi ri\v(pusi ri\v(porQSy qui verberavit ; and such like jparti- 



S < ciples. 



T^uos, TroSf Trqjanus : o v^us, -n^uos, heros, 

V. Those that have a liquid along with the ?, retain it, 
because of its immutability ; and sometimes they add 
to it a T, or a^ ; as, 

AS \xos'. aXs, a.Kls, sal : 4t a.>^s, a^or, marey in verse. 

NS vSoj : 19 eXfAivs, s>^jjt,iv9ost lumbricus, 

„_. K^rosi o fAxyioi^s, ^ocKsc^rosy which is thj3 same as (jLoiaoc^i^ /xa- 
\ Kx^QSf beatuSf 

Rule XILi 

Nouns which form the accusative in v. 

Nouns ending in j^, vg, au?, ovg, if their genitive be 
in og pure, make the accusative in v. 

Examples. 

We have already observed, that the accusative is 
in a, as rov Ttrava. There are however several in 
v; as nouns in ig, vg, oivg, ovg, when they make the 
genitive in og pure ; as o e(pig, log or sog, oqyivy serpens : 
poT^vg, racemus, uo?, w : <? ogu?, l^iog, oguv, acutus : 

•n vocvg, vocog, navis, vocvv I jSou?, (3oof, ^ovv, bos. But 

some of these end also in a ; rov |3oT^ua, ogia, vecc, or 
vmy and particularly among the poets. From Aiog, 
comes also At»j Jovem, 

ANNOTATION. 

Barytons (that is, nouns accented on the last) in is and vs, 
which do not form the genitive in os pure, admit of both ter- 
minations ; i5 B^iSf t^osi 'J'^v h'^i^a. and s^iv, Usj contentio : o vi-nXvs, 
v^osy Tov vi'/jAf^a and yivtKvvy qui recens advenit. Though the true 
reason of their having the termination in v, is because the Ionics 
declined them in oj pure : and thus they follow the same rule as 
the rest. 

Among the nouns declined -with a syncope, these, viz. war^f, 
pater ; />t^ri9f, mater ; yarvi^, ventevy are never syncopated in the 
accusative singular, and frequently not even in the genitive or ac- 
cusative plural ; rov zsa-ri^xy t^v iatitb^x, t^v yxri^ocy to distinguish 
them from 07 zsa,rgocy patria ; v, (AYir^xy matrix : i5 yaff a or yarf>?> 
the belly of a bottle ^ or the canity of a ship or vessel. 

Rule 



1I 



Oy" Me Dative ©/"LviPARisyLLABics. 61 
Rule XIII. 
Of the dative plural. 

1 . The datwe plural is formed of the singular y by 

inserting <r before i. 
^. In adding a-, the following letterSy $, 0, v, t, must 

be cast off, 
3. The dative singular ivn makes the plural n(^^ ; but 

oyrri makes utri. 

Examples. 
1. The dative plural is made of the singular, by 
putting 0- before » ; as o pnVw^, rhetor, ru fw^h toT? 

Q, But if any of these letters, <J, 0, v, t, happen to 
be in the way, they must be rejected ; as, 



Nom. 


Tirxv, 


r) Xx^JLTtccSf 


r«i-5 


O^VIS. 


D. S. 


T« T/rav/, 


r^ Aa/A7ra§/, 


ru fcUvrif 


0§Vl9l 


D. P. 


roTq Tir6i(7i, 


fous Aa/ATracTi, 


roTs, Toi(Ti, 


opvia>i 



3. But if after the removal of these letters, there 
remains one of the short vowels i, o, in the penultima, 
each of them takes its subjunctive u or t, in order to 
form a diphthong: thus svt» makes sicr*; and ovn, ovai ; 
as for example, 



N. 


S. 


ri9efs, ponens. 


Aswv, leo. 


rinrluvt verberans. 


D. 


s. 


ru r;9evTi, 


heovTCf 


ri/Trlovri, 


D. 


p. 


ro7s n^tia-i, 

A N N ( 


)TATI0 


N. 



The reason of this is, because the penultima of the dative plttral 
ought never to be less in quantity than that of the singular. 

Insomuch, that if the tatter tvas long by position, the position being 
taken atvay, the loss of it must be supplied by a diphthong. 

But if it should be a common vowel, as this may passfor a long one. 
of its otvn nature, nothing is then inserted ; for instance, AJavr/, Attx,sn\ 
»r«vT/, i^oiari. And if it be short, it may continue so in the plural, 
as-^^svi, menti, ^^so-* ; or it is made long by position, as y^xqrv^i, testi, 
pi.a^rv^ui : aKt, sail, aKa), &C. 

Rule XIV. 

Dative of nouns ending in a diphthong before ?> or in 

?or vj/. 

3. Nouns ending in a diphthong before ?, or in g, or 
4^, form the dative plural, by adding n ' x 

2. Those 

t 



6'2 Book II. Of Nouns. 

2, Those which end in >i^, and are syncopated ifi tie- 
climngyform their dative plural in ol(n. 

Examples. 

1 . Nouns that have a diphthong before ?, form their 
dative plural from the nominative singular, by adding 

i; thus, jSao-iXsuV, (^oca-iXiVG-^j 7"e.V : jSa?, (380"), bos: ol^ircc^j 

ol^TTOi^i, rapa.v : ''A^avf/, '^A^aij/i, Arabs, &c. 

2. But nouns in t]^, that are syncopated in declining, 
forai their dative plural in «V*, as Tjrari^, pater : ts-x- 

rs^og) Ts-ocr^ogj tw zrocrfi, roTg wocr^oca-i, patl^ibus. In the 

same manner, jwtjT^aVt, matribus: ^vyoiT^»(ri, Jiliabus: 
aW^aVt, *viris ; and such like. 

ANNOTATION. 

Which is only a softening ; because ifef'cscx.rgi voe should make rsek- 
r§ac<T(, it "Mould be too rough : for the same reason, of a^ ^v, a^vw, 
K^vijbr tx^svi, agnus, fhei/ make k^vixai. 

Observations on the dialects of imparisyllabics. 

There remains very little to observe concerning the dialects of 
this declension, after what has been said in treating of the others. 

The poets use an apocope, or rejection, at the end of words, 
and almost in all cases. 

In the nominative in //,« ; lu for ^w/x,«, domus. 

In the genitive of nouns in as declined by avroy, they cut off 
ros ; aI*?, Atxvroq and Afav, Ajacis : 0o5c?, ©oocvros and ©oair. 
Though Lascaris is of opinion, that these cases should be Al*, 
©o«, &c. 

They cast off the last syllable of the dative, terminating it still 

in / after the apocope; ©m for ©st;§<, Thetidi: (^oi-t for ^x^iyt, 

Jlagello :' and sometimes ending it in u, under which they subscribe 

the i : l^^u for l^^urif sudori : MiXu for MiAo/v/, Miloni : so that 

these nouns conform to the analogy of the parisyllabic declension. 

In the accusative, where there is generally an u after the apocope; 
*A9ro^Xft; for ^Av6x>^uvix, ApoUinem : l^^u for f^qurot, sudorem. 

In the vocative in av, from whence they reject the y; u aT«, 0o«, 
for u ATav, ©oav, &c. 

Poets often form the dative plural of the nominative in is ; nrS,' 
vts, rots riroivsatf or doubling the or, riroinaa-i : and even in con- 
tracted nouns ; Tv<;^£a, rn^uo-if or scra-u 

On the contrary, they sometimes form this case in nouns ending 
in tvs or ovs, not of the nominative singular, according to the ge- 
neral rule, but of the dative, in the^ame manner as other nouns; 
^xaiXit, regif ^xcihiatf regibus : ^6i, bovif ^ojr;, and 0ua-if Dor. bo- 
vibus,&c, 

CHAP. 



Contractions of the Imparisyllabics. 63 

CHAP. VII. 

Of hnparisyllahic contracted Nouns, 

Imparts YLLABIC contracted nouns are of two 
sorts: the former receivetHe contraction in the nomina- 
tive, and retain it afterwards through all their cases, 
without changing their essential termination, no more 
than those of the parisyliabic declension ; as o ni^mq 
and TO ri(jt.^£Vy n^vro; ', o rt^yf? and ro rifji.'nv, >!vto?, honO' 
ratuSf wn : o jtxEXirofK, and rl joteXirofv, Uvroq ; o jus- 
Kn^q and TO (xiXir^Vj Hvrog, mellitus, and um. The _ 
feminine is also contracted, but it follows theparisylla 
bic declension ; »i Ti/^^wo-a, Ti/xro-o-a, «?, honor at a, &c. 

Likewise, o 'uyXa.y.ouq, osvrog ', o xs-XuK^g, si/to?, placenta : 
St/A^?, Simoh, a river : ti 'Otth?, Opus^ untis, a city : 
>? 'A/xa9«f, J mat li us, &c. 

In the same manner, to sa^, ?^, "yer, t8 la^of, ?^of : 
TO xea^, x>ff, cor, t8 kJi^oc, &c. Here some add, to 
r?f5 Ts rnfof, sebum, from rl^^; but the latter makes 

fiocrtg, 

'O TzraK, -craiV, t3 ■zjrot't'Jo?, ■sratJ'o?, ^W^r : o Aaaf, A a?, 
/^W, T« Xoloiog, Xoiog : tw Ao»at, &C. 

The latter do not receive their contraction in the 
nominative, but only in certain cases. These are 
much more numerous, and more remarkable than thft 
preceding, because the contraction being made in the 
last syllable, it generally changes the termination of 
the cases contracted : and we may compare these to 
the two last declensions of the Latins, which are only 
a sort of branches of the third. 

They all follow the general analogy of contraction 
laid down in the first book ; we shall however deliver 
some particular rules concerning them, so as to pre- 
A^ent their giving any trouble. 

Rule XV. 
General for the contraction of imparisyllabics. 

L £ penult ima makes « in the dative singula?^ and n^ 
in the three plural cases* 

2. t penuUima makes i only, 

3. «, or IV. finals makes n. 

Exam- 



64 Book II. Of Nouns. 

Examples. 
The contraction of nouns is always made of the 
penultimate vowel with the vowel following; concern- 
ing which we have three general remarks to make. 

1. As often as the dative singular, and the three 
like cases of the plural, viz. the nominative, accusative, 
and vocative, have an s in the penultima, there is a crasis 
of this £ with the vowel following, into » diphthong. 

2. But if there be an i in the penultima, the crasis 
is then into * only. 

3. The contraction of «, or £a final is into y\. This 
will appear better, when illustrated by examples : we 
shall begin with the nouns most simple. 

Nouns in su?, which grammarians call 'the third of 
contracted nouns. 

Sing. j3ao-iA£u?, reoCj w ^xa-iXiZ; ra ^0(.(riXiog, Att. fwr, 
more usual; tw (^oc(TiXi'i, (3«<riA£r; rov Pxa-iXix, 
poet. |3a(rtX5i. 

Dual. Tw and u (ixcriXis, ?, rarely used ; ro7v jSao-iXsoiv. 

PJ, ol and w (^cccnXiigy s7g ; rwv (3a(riA£Wj/ ; tok j3a(r*A£Ufl'* ; 

Nouns in »? and », which grammarians call the second of 
contracted nouns. 

Sing. o(piq, serpens, « c^;, ra o^»o?, tw o^tV, Q(pi ; roy 

»/^ 
Dual. Tw and w o^^f, roiv o<pmv» 

PL ot and & o^»£?, o^t?^ twi/ o^*wv, to?? o^icri, t8? o(pioc<;, 

In like manner ?! ^oAk, »o?, ^^^^fe •* to (rmvi, £w?, sinapiy 
mustard: and in the plural, rx and e5 c-mirkot^ (rm-m, 
ANNOTATION. 

This declension in los is properly Ionic, as appears from Herodotus, 
uoho lurotein this dialect^ and from the almost general agreement of the 
learned. But these nouns are also commonly declined in tos, like the ] 
preceding ; which gave occasion to the grammarians of calling this last 
manner Ionic, and the other common, though loithout anyjbundation 
or reason. 

We may also refer to our general rule the neuters in y, declined 
in Mj, which follow the same contraction, though they are not 
comprised by grammarians in their declensions; as to aVu, tS 
wreoj, Ty »rc7, »r« : pi. rot oin», V) &c. In the same manner. 



. Contraction of liviPARiSYLLABics 65 

to mtiVi T» irwtosi grex : to ij/x/o-y, dimidium ^ whence comes roc 59//,/o^, 
in Aristot. 6. Metaph. 

Thereto also may be referred the oxytons in vs, declined in jos-, 
which have likewise been omitted by grammarians in their de- 
clensions : as ^^iiSf suavis: ra ri^iog, rw yi^s'f\ ri^sT: ol and w vi^h^, 
vihts, Ttfj 0.a(;, vh7^. In the same manner, o o|^y, acutus : o ^jtf/.iu 
acerbtis : and such like. But the neuter plural of these is not 
susceptible of contraction. 

Rule XVI. 

For all nouns in r?, and neuters in f? and o?, by gram- 
marians called the first of contracted nouns. 

Nouns in n, and neuters in s?, or o?, are contracted 
in the three ge?utives, thus : 

The singular contracts to; into ng ; But 
The dual ioiv, and the plural iuv, lose their t. 

Examples. 

The nouns in vig, may be masculine, feminine, or 
commoa; those in £? or o? are always neuter. They 
follow the general rule, in the same manner as the pre- 
ceding; but besides this, they are contracted in the 
genitive singular, dual, and plural : thus, 
fSing. fo?, oil?. 
Genitive < Dual, loii/, oTu, 
(,Plur. m, wj/. 

Sing. ArifJt>o(T^iUYig, DemosthenCS, w AnixU^m; ; rU A»|ua<r- 

Oei/50?, vovg ; tw Avjixotr^sviiyvsi ; rov AnfJ^oa-Uvso^, vy\. 
Dual, TW AYifji.o(r^i]/£s, vn ; roTv Ar^fJi^oa-hi/iotVy i/oTv. 
Plur. 01 and w A)i/>to(rO£i/££?, vug', twi/ An[jt.o(rhvicov, v(^v ; ro7g 
A-TjfAoa-^iVea-i : ra? Ari(ji.o(T^£Viocg, vug. 
In like manner, to and w rfrj^o?, inurus, ra tiiy^ag^ ovg, 
&C. plur. roc TEi^socy ny &C, 

ANNOTATION. 

The neuters in os sometimes contract n into st : to o-xiAoi-, 
crus : dual. o-xsAse, o-xsAe/. But o<r<re for oo-o-£E, oculiy is said by 
apocope. 

Nouns that have two « in the penultima, commonly drop one 
of them before the contraction ; but the plural (if they be neuter) 
IS in ocy and not in >3 ; to x/^'^os^ debituw, ra xf "**» %?^* ' ^^ xAe'c^, 
gloria, r» nXisoc, axix. Though perhaps this might be more truly 
called a syncope than a contraction, were it not that » becomes 
long. 

K Proper 



66 Book IL Of Nouns. 

Proper names composed of kKIos are variously contracted*, for 
instance, 

Nora. *H^axXsn5, xX55f, Hercules, Voc. 'H^ajt^ss?, xXs^r, or by 

syncope, 'H^dKXss, Gen. 'H^axXssoy, ioyr, oDr. Dat. *H^XKKh\\ tT, 

&c. In the same manner ©s^/roxXE'/??, na^/nXfyj^, &c. But appella- 
tives, such as IvKXsns, gloriosusj ukT^sv)?, ingloriusy are declined like 

Nouns in ^- pure, make the contraction of the accusative also 

into a ; as £y(py»3j, rov lv(pvsoi, Jyi^yvj, or IvpvSi, ingeuiOSUS : vyr/iSf rov 

vyisoif vyiTj or iiyTx, sanus. And this contraction into «, being of the 
Attic form, is most commonly used. 

Obserjcations on the dialects of the preceding contracted 

nouns. 

The genitive in soj is contracted into ws, according to the ^ol. 
and Dor. o ^xa-iXths, rex, rS ^ocaixioq^ Dor. ^xa-tXsvq, and -^ol. /3ot- 
a-iXevq : ^oXii, tcrbs, TsdXzoSy -ssoXsvs : 'A§iTo<pdvvis, eos, bvs, &C. 

Poets decline these very nouns with n throughout all their cases ; 
as ^(x,(7iXtvs, Tibs, rii, rix, &C. i5 zjoKiq, nor^ ?<, viXf &C. to airsoSi spectlS, 
a-vvosf cnr'^i, &c. and this is done by a crasis of the two zi into 55, 
for (Tirkos, isSi &c. 

The old Attics made the contraction of the nominative and ac- 
cusative plural into 55s-, or ri^ subscribed, instead of £?$■ ; as /3»o-A^$ 
for ^xa-iXsTsy reges : tinF^s, for tiriiE^s,. equifes, &c. which is often to 
be met with in Thucydides. 

^ The Ion. form the dative plural in ^at, as ^oca-iX^at, from their 
singular in ^/, ^xa-iXvii : in like manner vUls, vUms, vUij vUa-i, jilius : 
^§ofxsvs, ^^o(jt,ia-tf cursor, &c. 

Nouns in ayy are often changed by the ^ol. and Dor. into >??, 
wherein they have been followed by the Latins, as 'Ax'XX£v<;, 'a^/a- 
X*jr, Achilles, And hence it is, that sometimes they make the geni- 
tive Achillisy deriving it then from Achilles ; and sometimes 
Achillei, by contraction Achilli, taking it then from Achilleus, In 
like manner Ulyssis and Ulysset^ Mosis and Most Hence also it 
comes, that in the accusative they say Persea and Persen, &c. 

But these same nouns in 75s are declined sometimes parisyllabically 
and sometimes imparisyllabically ; as "0^9^?, e, andsos, Orpheus: and 
hence it is, that the Latins have several nouns of the first and fifth 
declensions. See the New Method of learning the Latin Tongue. 

Lascaris, lib. iii. enumerates six or seven different genitives of 
nouns in svs; as 'A%<AA£yf, 'Ax'XxloSf in the common tongue; 
'A;^;AXe:,;?, Att. 'A;)^;XAi30i-, according to the old Ionics ; 'A^^XXeror, 
according to the new; 'A;)^tAA>jo^, with the accent on the antepe- 
nultima, according to the old JEc). or 'ax^xXsios, according to the 
new ; and 'Ax^xXioSf according to the Boeot. : for all which he 
produces different authorities. 

The Attics contract also the genitive and accusative singular of 
nouns in zvs pure ; as x^^^^f congius, an Attic measure ; t5 %o£wr, 
Xous ; ro ;^o6i", x'^^^' ^^t 'hen the accusative makes its contraction 
into a ; toi- ^oeat, ;^oa ; Uei§»nvSf Pirceus .* tS Xlu^miMSj Uei^xiu? ; 

Rule 



Contraction of Imparisyllaeics. &7 

Rule XVII. 

Of feminincs in w; and w, which grammarians call the 
fourth of contracted nouns. 

1 . Contracted fe7nwwes in w? a72d w^ make the obliques 

in a?, o", w, ol. 

£. The dual is declined like tw, and the plural like ol. 
Examples. 

1. The feminines in w? and « make oi in the vocative. 
In their other cases they have always an o in the pe- 
nultima, and are contracted as follows : 

Sing. Y\ ocl^cog, pudor, w ulhl; r-n; «IJ&o?, 2?; t^ ocl^oij nT; 

In the same manner v Anroo, Latona, w Atito) ; w 

AviToog, »;, &C. ' 

2. The dual is declined like tw, and the plural like 
ot, that is, like the masculine article, rcc al^w, al alSo), 
&c. Though we meet with KAwOot and Kxwh<;, in the 
plural of KAwGw^ Clot ho. 

ANNOTATION. 

TaJce notice, that the vocative singular a<^o), 25 liJce the nominative 
jdural ; ivhereas the dative singular is circmnjiexed, rv u'l^oT, 

Observations on the dialects. 

The genitive Mo\. is in us instead of «f ; rvis al^oosy al^Zf. 

The accusative Ion. is in 5y, and the ^ol. in uv ; t^v a<^5v; a/S^y. 

Rule XVIII. 

Of neuters in «? pure, or in ^^r, which grammarians 
make the fifth of contracted nouns. 

In contracting ocg pure^ or ^a?, t must be left out : 
Then the genitives take «, and the other cases a ; 
And if you meet with a », you are to subscribe it. 

Examples. 

In declining these nouns, you must first cast off t, 
according to the Ion. after which the contraction is 
formed into w in the three genitives; and into a in 
the other cases : and you subscribe * in those cases, 
that had it before the contraction. Thus ; 

Sing. 



68 Book II. Of Nouns. 

Sing. TO K^iaq, CCiro': t8 yc^i»rog, x^gao?, z^ew; : tw K^ixTt^ 

Dual. TW X^eWf, >i^i(X,£, yi^io(. : TOM/ X^SCUTOIV, H^iOiOlV, H^£«V. 

Plur. ToiK^zocToc, jc^saos, >c^£a : twv Ti^sixrcoVj yi^sdm, x^£wi/ 1 Tor? 

Observations 07t the conty^acted 7iouns. 

We meet likewise with xf73f by contraction for x^ia?, in Tlieo- 
critus. 

Tlie Ion. put here an e in the pen ultima in the place of the x% 
yiqzx for ys^xx, dona: yce^exf xs^xx, comiiax as may be seen in 
Herodotus. 

Moreover they use the Attic contraction ; as in the same author, 
n^lx for xf 6£<z ; whence the dative plural xf Escrcr/, in verse, for 
?tf5a£o-<r/. We say likewise it^sxrsa-i and K§£(^£(T3-i ; ys^cina-i and 
yi^oiscra-i ; and such like. 

Contracted noims that vary from the analogy of the 

preceding. 

Nouns in vsy vqs, are contracted in the nominative, vocative, and 
accusative plural, forming always their contraction into v ; o ^or^vst 
racemuSf t5 ^qt^vqs : ol and Z ^or^ves^ t«j ^or^vxs, ^or^vs. In like 
tnanner viavs, mortuus : ra;^y<r, spica : o /%Sy^, piscis ; rt a^xvs-, rete, 
&c. Nouns in ovs are also contracted in these three plural cases; 
jSoyf, tS /Soos-, hos : ot and w /Sos?, ^ovs, res ^oxs, ^ovs ; and among 
poets /3&;^; which, as ox makes w, would seem most natural, were 
it not that the contraction of the accusative ought always to be 
the same as that of the nominative in imparisyllabics. 

Comparatives in coy are contracted in the accusative singular of 
the common gender ; and in the three plural cases, nominative, 
vocative, and accusative, of all genders: first by rejecting the 
consonant, according to the Ionics ; and afterwards by making the 
contraction of o with the following vowel, according to the Attics : 
o ;^ 1^ (xzi^cov, majors tS >^ r^s fjisi^svoSf rov ^ T'^v [Asi^ovx, [^ei^ox, 

fASi^W : 0/, xt, K) M ^zi^OViS) ^lilp£Si (Asl^OVS '. TSS 7y rXS lA.liCp)IXSf 

lJAi}pxSi i^ii^ovs, and not //.Et^wf (for the reason above given, when 
mentioning ^^s) rx and u ^s'^^ovx^ i^i^ox> M^^o^t majora : and in the 
same manner the rest. 



CHAP. VIII. 

Of Irregular Nouns, and first of those that change 
their Gender, 

jL here are* some masculine nouns in o?, that make the plural 
in X neuter ; which proceeds from their having had formerly the 
singular in oy and ov. Thus we say> o ll^gosy higa : I l^sr/iAoy, remus: 
^ ^^y^h j'igum: KvyMSf circulus : o Kv^vosj hcerna: o i^ox^-o^t. 

vectis : 



In REGULAR. 69 

metis: o r^tQi^U) statio, statera : r^a%>3Ao?, collum : mro<;\ cibus 
^ Jrumento. And in the plural, rk §<(pf«, roc Ipzt^cc^ &c. but we 
meet also with t«? xvKXaq, masculine, as we meet with ^saiAoq and 
TO ha-fAov, vinculum : ol ha-^o], and tcc ha-^oir. In like manner, /3a- 
Tffo? and /3«Tu§oy, biityrum : yu^ot; and yd^ov, garum, a sort, of 
sauce: vuroq, and vwroy, dorsum: «^vti^oto? and avrt^orov, antidote^ and 
the like. Thus i5 KeXsvOog, via ; >g ^5 Ta^ra^o?, tartarus ; in the 
plural have ra yciXivQx, roc rd^rx^x, neuter, though we meet also 

with ra? KsXftjfifes. 

Stcc^/ov, stadium^ has 0* ra5<o/j and to. ra^/a. 

The following feminines, 17 ym, or y^va/|, mulier ; v 0^05, wa/ 
19 t^ro^/?, civitns ; v %e?^, maniis ; seem masculine in the nominative 
and accusative dual : for we say ru yv^xixz, roj o^w, ru, -zjoX/s, tw 
;^£i'^E. But the reason of this is, because then to;, according to 
the Attics, is taken for ra, as appears clearly from Apollon. 
lib. ii. cap. 7. just as we say, tw (pixris, ru ny^^oc, ru riy(\c(,y &c. 
See the remarks after the syntax. Book viii. Nevertheless some 
of these nouns admit also of ra, as roc, laroX/e, Isocr. urbes. 

Irregular in declension. 

Some nouns in Greek, as well as in Latin, are declined dif- 
ferently under the same termination of the nominative ; as Aa^>}?, 
DareS) tS Aa^'/jro? and Aa^a; tov ^d^nroc and Aoc^ev : 'Af^ro^'avtj?, 
tS £0?, Aristophanes ; tov 'A^iroipav^jv : thus also tov Ani^.oijQivBx and 
Aio{Aoa-9ivv)v ; ^eo-<7ro'T»}?, dominus, tov ^ta'Troreoi and ^£(797o't73v, Ta? ^eo*- 
rrorea? and ^scrTrora?, and such like. 

'O va?, tS va, and tS voo?, 772ew5 ; ^iVa?, tS S/tto^o; and ^tVa, ii)^^^ 
In the same manner the other compounds of -era?. 

'O x«Xw$, Ta xAxuoq and tS U) J'liniSf rudens : I'^w?, tS t^ro^^ 
and Ta E^w, awwr. 

Several change their termination also in the nominative : as to 
X?^°^> %?^'^°^» %f^'**^» debitum, cus alienum ; %§?&'?) tS y(j^^ajf the 
same : likewise to p(;f£oy, a, or to x^e-vv, w, and to %fEw?, Ta %fs<«/t 
idem : Xirh, », and A/?, X/to?, tenuis^ simplex : whence come 
A/Tca and A/t/ ; X/tov and Xrra ; with several others. 

Frequently from an imparisyllabic genitive is formed a nomi- 
native, which we decline parisyllabically : thus from fjud^rv^t fjioi^" 
rv^o^i comes jwct^Tv^o?, /ua^Tvf a, testis ; from ^j/Zfit;^, ij/idy^o?, -vJ/ZQii^o?, 
%|//0y^a, susurro. Thus from to Saxgy, tS ^ax^yo?, comes to S«- 
Kfyov, Ta ^ocK^vs lacryma. 

In others the nominative is variously changed ; as yj^KX^, p-oi* 
x*§o^,heatitS ; or ^axa§?, /lAdtxa^To? ; or ^.oticoi^toq, f^xKix^ia, 

'o M&>cr5j?, Ta Ma;o-a, and Mw(7£y?, tS Mwo-e'wj. We' say also, 
Mwi/0-^?, M'wyo'Et'?, Aloises, 

To yovv, g^e/2M, Ta yo'voo?, or, by metathesis, yavo?, and tS yoWTo<> 
whence comes the plural yovatroi) by epenthesis yevxrx, and after- 
wards by syncope yhx. ^ '• 

To ^o^v, yo5, and by transposition ^a§o$, whence comes the dative 
le^if and among the poets ^0^1; or to ^a^a; and 5o§a?, aro?, 
whence the plur, ^ag«T», and by syncope S%« ; also to dogo?, w?, 



70 Book 11. (y Nouns. 

O t'td?, t5 t'tS, or t'DV, t5 fw'o?, or i;;£y?, tS ute'w5 fillUSi &C. 

*0 KoixCf. Ixipis, TH Koixoqf and by crasis Xxoc ; e Aaa?, T« Xa« or 
Aaa ; and o Aa?, A^o? ; with several others of the like sort. 

The genitive of the same noun sometimes varies, though in the 
same declension, as o5 %E/f, mamis^ rviq %E/foc, poet. %£fo?; whence 
comes the dative plural, ru7c, xH^'} ^"^ ^^^^ genitive dual, rxiv 

xsfo;v. 

Some take their cases from different nominatives; as v yvAy 
mulier^ from 'o yvvxi^t obsolete.; r^<; ywoisKoq, t-o yvvxiatf r^v yv 
vxrKx, A! yvvxtf rejecting the | of the nominative. In the same 
jnanner as we say sometimes w avx from «W|, rex. 

Thus TO yoixxf lac, tS ydxxrosf and even t5 ycLxx, according to 
Eustath. assumes also tS yciXx)irog, from 7aA«|, obsolete ; whence 
nevertheless comes the dative plural ro7q yoixx^t, Eustath. 

'O Z^u?, Jupiter, u Zsv, -?•» Aioj, tw Ail, rov Aix, from A/?. For 
heretofore they used to say. A/?, A<o$,' Eustath. And Zsy? made ZeDv 
in the accusative, according to Polycrat. in the same Eustath. pag. 
1387. 24. The poets say also, o Z^v, re Z'/ivU, &c. or even o Z>}$ or 
Z%^ accusat. Zh or Zxv. And the Boeotians, Aeu?, A^v, and Axv. 

Some neuters in a^ have the genitive in «to?, as though they came 
from nouns in a? ; to ^ttx^, jecur, vivxroq: to ^/tta*, (with a smooth 
breathing) dies, taken from ^fxi^x, with an aspirate, according to 
Eustath. TO eI^x^, esca ; to (pfsa^, puteilS ; to ri*?* fltfl'e^p^ ; to ^sXsx^, 
escQj Ulecehra ; to omx^, utilitas, cibi, pecunia ; to a^af , wier, mammci 
mdestiis; to Kx^nx^i caput. To v/hich we must add also the fol- 
lowing in wf; TO ar>iu>^i merda, t5 o-kxtos; to tJ^a;^, a^'Mfl, t5 t^S« to?, 
cl^anging u into a;. The poets for il^^y^, use to tl^oc, t5 v^eo?. 

'H §a^«j, wxor, makes ^x^x§ro<;f taking it from the obsolete 

To «?, auris makes tS wto?, changing « into w, as we have 
already observed in the table of genitives. 

To these some more are added by the grammarians, which, 
they say, follow the parisyllabic and imparisyllabic terminations, 
without receiving an increase more in one than in the other ; as 
aAxJ and aXy.), in Hom. both, say they, from uXkvi, ^?, robur, 
pecunia : <a»x^v and Icokx, clamorem, viinast persecutionem, both from 
iu)crif 7)^: and such like. But all this is void of foundation. Where^ 
fore the etymologist is in the right to remark, that the first, a^x/, 
comes from a^l, xXao^ ; and the second, iuicx, from /&;|, mko?. 

The same we may say of all the rest ; which can never follow so 
different an analogy, without supposing a different nominative. 
As when we say, x^omv and x^oxa, tramam, subtegmen : "Arltv and 
"AT^>}v, Attin : vo-iaivv) and vcrfAhi, pugncu : <pvyviv and <^vyx, fugam ; 
from whence (plyx^z : ^lypi^^vw and §/;^o/>t»?v/, Arat. semiplena Lunce : 
fAsXiK^xru and (xsXU^xri, mulso, &c. 

Hereto we must refer also these other nouns, (a,viXx and [/.viKxra. ; 
fAioXojy and [AviXxruv, pecorum, in Lycophr. For the last comes from 
iM{Kxq, aTo?j according to Eustath. As also zj^oa-u-nx and zj^o<xu- 
'TTxrxf person csjacies; whence 'sj^oa-wnxrajv and 'cj^aa-uj'Trxo-tf in Ho- 
mer : likewise 'zj^oQxrit^ and 's^^Q<^oia-t, pecudibus : <K^mt<; and xf/- 
v£(r/, liliis : yt^ononi and ys^aatp senibus : Tra^jj^caro/? and 'sjx^viJi^xa-i, 

affectionibus ^ 



Irregul A R. 71 

qffectionihus ; and several others : in the same manner as the Latins 
say tJiematis and thematibus, &c* 

And we may always feign such nominatives, though they are 
not to be found, in order to form the derivation of these cases ; 
since Apollon. lib. ii. teaches, that ^syixos, 'sjoXys^ vooiSf and yu- 
vxi^, though not used in the nominative, nevertheless ought not 
to be considered as altogether obscrlete, because they are to be met 
with in the other cases. 

Of defective nouns. 

Some have only the plural ; not only the names of festivals, as 
Aiovv(Tixy Liberalia ; or of cities, as a* ©rjCa/, Thebce ; ra MsV^fa, 
Megara ; which is common with the Latin : but also some others ; 
as To(, oi\<pivx, taken for provisions; because, taken for barley ^ it 
has a singular: rk iTrtrl^Kx^ mulcta, pcena, &c. 

Some have only particular cases; as oJ (^Qo!^, from (pWU^ and 
T»$ ^Bo7s, from ipOoiuq, a sort of cake. 

The following is only to be found in these three cases ; geni- 
tive* ocXXviXai^; dative, a.KXrtXoiSy aK>Ji>^ixisy kKk-nkois \ accusative, 
o(.x\ytXiis, oi,x\-h\xs, aXXviKoe. '. which is rendered by the adverb invicem, 
mutuo ; or by the nouns alter, altera^ alterum, alii, alios. 

These have neither genitive nor dative ; to Sf/><^y, corpus : to 
axkccSfJ'ulgor : to Xsttus, rupeSy promoritorium : to ii^os, suavitas : to 
o<piXoqy utilitas : ro ^^(nxs, simulacrum : to os^a^, somnium. 

Others are indeclinable in all their cases ; as Hebrew and other 
foreign words ; which are also indeclinable in Latin : likewise 
words shortened by apocope ; to Im for Sii/xa : to xa^« or xi,^'/) for 
TO xoiqmovy caput : o-w xa^^jr, tuo capiti, Eurip. and words lengthened 
by paragoge, as ere§vi(pt for sr;§xy altera. But as these last receive 
^some alteration in their penultima, it behoves us to be more par- 
ticular concerning them. 

Of indeclinable nouns, augmented by (pi, or pv. 

These nouns are to be met with in the parisyllabic and impari- 
s;^llabic declensions, and are indeclinable both in the singular and 
plural. They are formed thus : 

Parisyllabics in x change sometimes their x into » Ion. the accent 
of the nominative remaining on the same syllable; only when it is 
upon the last it becomes a circumflex, by reason of^ 09 ; as Ov^avlit<^(, 
>sv^v)<pif uvxyaxlftf^i, for Ov^iZvix, Urania, vbv^oc, nervus, a^vxynxix, 
necessitas. In like manner the feminine participles in (j^h-n ; as 
(pxivoiA.vjYi<piy for (pxivof/^ir/), apparente, &c, 

Parisyllabics in os or ov, first reject s or v final, and the accent is 
on ^the penultima ; as from rf«Toi-, r^xropi, exercitus : from onos, 
o-£0(p;, OS, ossis : in the same manner the pronouns, xvros, avro^pi, 
ipse, which is also found for ipsas in Horn. 

Imparisyllabics in os (which are always contracted nouns) change 
into £, and retain their accent. Those in m, and declined in 
Qvros, drop the s of the genitive, and take <pi, at the same time 
retaining their accent; as o^os, currus, o^s<t^i'. KorvXyi^Mv, ovof, 
coxa^ HorvXyi^6vo(pif &c. 

We 



72 Book II. Of Nouns. 

We meet also with l(Tya,§o(piv from sa-xo^^a, focus^ by clianging 
a into 0. 

And v<xv(piv, for vsuv, or mvo-i, or vnvah from vaD?; or, according 

the Ion. and Dor. vsti^ navis. 'E§BC£va(ptv, from "e^eS'o?, ErebuSf 

♦ the genitive 'E^sCoy^. Likewise KV)^o<pt for z^^oj, from x^e» 



to 
for 

cor. &c. 



C H A P. IX. 

Of the Motion or Variation of Nouns : and first of 
Nouns Adjective, 

IM OUNS as well adjectives as substantives often 
change their termination to signify the difference 
of gender or sex. But adjectives, whether parisylla- 
bic or imparisyllabic, are of two sorts ; some having 
three different endings, and others only two. 

Rule XIX. 

Adjectives of three terminations. 



3. But aq takes ont/oc, uv: 

5. Ekj i(T(riiy IV .' 

6. nS, mciy 0? ; 

7. Hi/, iivoif «/• 



1. When adjectives admit 

of three terminations^ 

o; pure and ^o? make 

a, oy: 
£. All others in oj make 

v\i ov: 

Examples. 

1. Adjectives in o? pure, or in ^o?, form the feminine 
in a, and the neuter in ov ; as o olyiog, ri dytci, to olytov, 
sanctus, a^ urn : 6 duhfo?, n dvU^oly rl Mn^ov, ftoridus, 
a, urn. 

2. The others in o? make the feminine in ij; asxc^Apr, 
jtaAii, pcaAoi/, bonus, pulchcr, a, urn: which happens also 
to the following nouns, though in og pure ; o oyho^, 
oy^oYi (and not oySoa) octaxms, a, um : uirKooq, aVAo»i, 
simplex, with the other compounds of -stAoo?. 

But the Attics generally make the termination oq of 
the common gender, especially in compounds and de- 
rivatives ; as »9 ri Ts-ocfjt^cpiXo';, j^ ro 7s-otfA(pixov, omnilus 
amicus : q^ i y,q<t^iq<;, >§ rl aorfj'.iovy ekgans. 

§ ANNO- 



, Of the Variation of Adjectives. 73 

ANNOTATION. 

Those that follow the Attic declension, have w? for the masculine 
and feminine, and wv for the neuter; o >§ ^ Eyyjw?, -^ ro 'ivytuy, 
fertilis ; where u continues the same as in the substantives : of 
which we have- treated above. Rule ix» 

S. The masculine in a? takes atva in the feminine, 
and Mv in the neuter; as jCA^Aa?, fAiXonvoCf [AiXoiVj niger^ 
a, um : rdxug^ ocivoc, av, miser, a, um. Except (/.iyxg, 
fji.tyoiKy\, i^'^y», magnus : zrug, 'uroc(roc, -uroiv, onwis, with 
its compounds aVa?, (rv(ji.7roig, uTikersus, &c. ; and the 
participles in «?; as Tu;)/a?, ao-a, «v, qui verberavit, 

4. The masculine in u? takes ««, u: J/Ato-u?, ^[/.{(rtiic, 
i^/AKTUj climidius: yx-owq, iHocy v, dulcis. Except ts-oAu?, 
which may be seen among the irregular adjectives. 

5. The masculine in st? takes i(r(T», iv : o x^^^^^^f "^ 
yu^U<T(roCf ro xa^t'gi/, gratus. Except Jf, i^Uy h, unus, 
with its compounds : and the participles in ug, which 
make £T<rxj h : Tv(ph)gj rufpOsro-^, rvip^hf qui vapulavit. 

Contracted nouns in »?, make ^<r<rKy av; as [asXitb^, 
fA.iXiTH<r(rcc, [AsXiTHv, melleus, a, um ; coming from ^fAi- 
To«?, (xiXiroB<r(recy rUv, which follow the preceding. 
. But the masculine in ??, formed by contraction, 
takes Jcrc-^, v[v; as rt/x-X?, rifAi^tTa-a, rif/Xiv^ honoraius, pre- 
tiosus ; coming from ni^mq, nixriia-G-Xj ^ev, 

6. The masculine »v takes iivxy iv; as o ri^nv, n 
ri^iivci, ro ri^iv, teller; but these generally speaking 
have only two terminations, as we shall see in the fol- 
lowing rule. 

7. The participle wj takes mct^ og ; as nruipu;, t£tu- 
<pvTeej rsrv(pog, qui "verberavit. 

The participle in m takes ao-^, ov ; as tuVIcov, rvifl^^Xy 
rvTrlov, mrbei^ans. 

Rule XX. 

Adjectives of two terminations. 

1 . Adjectives of tzvo terminatmis take a short vowel 

in the neuter: 

2. U and vg cast off their (rTyfAcc : 

3. And ag is changed into av. 

E X A M- 

L 



74 Book 11. O/* Nouns. 

Examples. 

1. Adjectives of two terminations (except the 
Attic in u? abovementioned) generally take a short 
vowel in the neuter. Thus the common in uv makes 
the neuter in ev; as o »9 »! h^ati^my to h^uifAw, JelLv, In 
the same manner the comparative; o >yf /a»^«v, t© 
fji'i'i'^ov, major and majus. 

The common in nv makes zv; as o »$ 'j a^<r»]v, ^ to a^o-ij', 
masculus, a^ um: o ^ »i TE^ni/, >$ to t£^£v, ifewer, a, urn : 
rs^fiv feminine is scarcely to be found but among the 
grammarians; wherefore it is better to say, >! ri^nvx, as 
we read it in Euripid. according to the preceding rule. 

The common in n? makes «?, and always belongs to 
the first of contracted nouns ; as o ^ ^' dxn^rig, ro dKn- 
^k, *i)erus. But those in 7i? formed by contraction have 
three terminations. See above. 

2. The common in »? makes »; o k, i ^ux^^i?, to tu- 

j^a^t, gratUS : o »9 ») pXoTrur^igy ro (p\XQ^^ur^^y StudiosUS 

patrice. And these are generally compound nouns. 

The common in vg makes u ; o ^r^ ate^y?, to Sihu^v, 
non lacrymans; and generally these are only com- 
pounds. 

S, The common in ou? makes euy ; o >$ v\ zroXuTra;, to- 
isroXvTniv, multipes. 

But o\><; contracted has three terminations. See above. 
ANNOTATION. 

Some 'writerSf among ivhom Clenardus, place here other adjectives 
of one termination ordy ; as oi^ma.^, rapax, /xax^f, beatus. But it 
is far more prohaUCi that the Greeks have no such adjectives^ and that 
tlie abovementioned are of the common gender only : for instead of ro 
oi^'rrx^f it is better to say to a^ wa«c]/>tov .* and instead of to (AocKoc^f 
'ive choose to say ro iv^onfAovi We even find i^xxon^x in the femininey 
beata, Vossius, 

Irregular adjectives. 

There are also irregular adjectives ; as o -croXv?, multus, accus. 

ToF 'S7oXvvf the neuter to voXv. The other cases, in whatsoever 

gender or number, are generally taken from 'SroXXo^ (which is 

sometimes to be met with) as Ts'-cys^^oy, t^-ctoAXw; i5 wo?t>.^, r^s 

ttoXXtjj, T*? 'CToAX>3, ^C. 

But poets decline ^oAv5 quite through, like oj^y?, whence comes 
the genitive -cyoXfoy : the nominative plural -ctoAec?, ^oT^sTi : the geni- 
tive otoXewv : the accusative mhU<;^ 'cjqUTs* They say also in the 
nominative wovAvs. 

II. Of 



Of the Variation of Substantives. 75 

11. Of the "variation of substantives. 

The substantives have also their formation or variation, for the 
distinction of sexes. 

The feminines derived from the parisyllabic masculines in ^?, 
are formed, 

1. In ris', as from 

o -cT^o^vjT*)?, propheta, comes n 'C!§oip^rt<:, prophetissa, 

o tj^o-ar*}?, prcBfectiiSf ^ tir^oToirt^y prcefecta. 

OTixiaxo/Tij?, maritns, v zrx^oiKoirtq, uxor, 

o I,KvQn^, Sci/tha, n 2)cv9U, mulier e Sct/thia, &c. 

2. In r^ix ; as, 

o "il^oiKrmt psallere doctus, -» -i^oiXr^Kx, psaltria, 

-croiijr^?, poetttf ri rjoiytr^ia,^ poefria, 

3. In r§iq ; as from ayA>?T^?, tihicen, comes oivXvrpk, tibicina ; for 
which we say also oclx-hrqioc.. 

From h(T'nor'n<;i dominuSf comes ^eo-Tror/?, and ^hvotvxy domina. 
From /^duoTTwX*)?, piscium venditor, comes ]-)(Qvo'nu\ociyot. 
This termination in a/v* takes place also in the parisyllabicS in 
«?; as, 

o "kviOXif lupus, V XvKXivoif lupa. 

o (TKo^moq, scorpius, ^ a-yto^'jTxivx, scorpcena piscis. 

Others terminate in « or in « ; as, 
o 55Ao^, servus, 4, luX-n, serva, 

0£o?, Deus; ^ ©soi: the poets say also ©sar/ya, Dea ; they 
likewise use Geo?, in the feminine. 
Or in 15; as, 
o a/Avo?, agniis, •» a/Av??, agi2a, 

Kw^yo^f venatOTf ■» wv/iyUt venatrix. 

Those that are derived from the imparisyllabic declension, do 
also terminate generally in xiv» ; as likewise those whose mascu- 
line ends in m. 

o rUruViJaber, 07 rUrxivXfJabricatrix. 

o ^e^oiirwv vel ^e'f«4/, JcimU' vt '^^a.irscivx and ^^xirxnth, fo' 

lusy ynula, 

o AaxA/v, LacoU} Spartanus, ^ Aukxivx, Laccena, 
o Xecuv, leOi V >isixivx, lecena, 

J^axwy, dracot w«^> ^ Sfaxa/va, draco^fcemina, &c. 

Or in crcrxy as those whose masculine ends in |, -4/, or o-. 

aval, rex dominus ; vi uvxa-a-x, regina, regis uxor, soror, aut 

Jilia* 
o (poc-^f palumbuSi 19 (pxcrtrx, and Att. (parr^, palumba. 
« ^xcriXevqf rex, 4 ^xalxisa-x, regina ; for which we use also 

^xdi^U and ^x(rixzix, 
zslv^q, pauper, ^ 'cjivivirx, pauper aliqua. 
And several gentiles ; as 

o ®§£^, Thrax, Ion. ©§ Jf, o5 ©q'^aax^ Thressa, 
o K§^$, Cretensis, 4) K^ro-o-a, Cressa, 

o <E>o/v/|, Phoenix y v ^oUtaa-xj Phcenissa, 



KiX<|, Cilix, 4t KiXiaax, Cilissa. 

« A/Cy?, Li52/5, CO AiCy5-(7fl5, htbyssa. 



There 



76 Book II. Of Nouns. 

There are also some that end in eix, coming from st;?; or in 
fi^Xf coming from vi§ ; as, 

o h^Bvq, sacerdosy masc. 19 te^£/«, sacerdosy fcem. 

o crurvt^y servator, ^ aum^x, servatrix. 

And the poetics, 

-cTfEcrCy?, seneXf ^ tj^EorCsi^x, vetiila, 

o ^QTYi§, datovy i5 '^oTu^ocj ^ datrix ; unless we de- 

rive it from SoT^K. 
From t^i<;, mperUf masc. comes ep^/Sva, vipera, fcem. 

CHAP. X. 18^ 

Of the Comparative and Superlative Degrees. 

Rule XXI. 

Of their termination. 

1 . Regularly the comparative is in rs^og, and the su- 

perlative in rocTo^ : 

2. Irregularly they are in m, and fog. 

Examples. 

i^lOUNS are compared either regularly, or irre- 
gularly. 

1. Regularly the comparative is in rs^og, and the 

superlative in Tare?; as olyioq, olyimi^o^y ocyiwrxTQ^y 

9anctuSy sanctior, sanctissimus. 

2. Irregularly they are formed in m and ro? ; as 
xaxo?, malus ; aoiKicovypejor ; adyiirog, pessi772us : and this 
is almost as much as is requisi te to remark for beginners. 

Manner of forming the comparative. 

The manner of forming these comparatives and superlatives, as 
also the change that is sometimes made in the termination of the 
positive, may be easily learned by the following examples, which 
we shall range according to their terminations. 

acq: yLtKxq, /lAEXavTE^o?, /AsAavTaTo?, niger, nigriory nigerrimus : 
which may be formed from the neuter f/,shoiVy adding thereto rs^os and 
racroq, 

inq : Eyo-sCi^?, EyasCiVf^ft?, cyo-E^sVaTo?, pius, magis pius, pUssimus / 
from the neuter in e?, to EV(T£<^sq' 

Co zv^o^QZy gloriosuSy Iv^o|ote^o5, lv^o^ora,roq» ■ 
OS < 'd^a.oqy mitiSy ts^ccoTz^o^y zj^acorarog, 
^ {, <70(po?, sapiens, a-opurs^oq, ao(pwr(xToq, 

These are all formed from the positive, changing or into 
Ttpr and T«Toj. 
,> ' vql 



Comparatke and Superlative Degrees. 77 

vi : zv^v^i latuSf tv§vrs^o^, sv^vrtxvo^ : from the neuter in v, 
si;'. %a§/£/?, gratiosiis, x^V^^^?°'>* x^f'sfaTo? : from the mascu- 
line in g;?, rejecting / from the diphthong. 

ot/$: a^jrAs?, simplex, a^rAarefo?? xirxifoiroi; i from the positive in 

a»y: a-u(p^cjv, modestuSy crco<p^o)iirs^<;j ffucp^onTocroq i from the no- 
minative plural in 5?. 
To these we may add also those in «^ ; as /xaK<aj^, heattcsy (xoc 

Those in 0?, preceded by a syllable long by nature or position, 
make ote^o? and oroi,ro;i with an o/a/x^ov ; as Hv'^o^ot;, 'a^uo<it abovp 
mentioned. And those which have a short syllable before 0?, make 
wTs/50? and uTixroq, with an w//,£y^ ; as o-o^o?, above mentioned. 

But asvoq, vacuus, makes ksvots^oi;, y-tvorxro; ; and Tivoq^ art' 
gtistuSf r^vors^o;, fcvoraro?. Nevertheless we meet with asvdjrs^oq 
and rEvwrsfo? in the best MSS. to which I think it safest to con- 
form. 

Some that have 0?, preceded by a doubtful vowel, will admit 
either of or w ; as iVo?, cequalis, la-ore^oq or lo-ureoo<; : Txavo^, 
aptuSf txavoTE^o? and luxvurs^oq. 

From 'CTo^(py^£o?, purpureus, is formed by syncope tsro^^y^wrEfo?, for 
'swri^o; : the same is also practised in regard to some others. 

To these regular comparisons we may refer those in i-f^o? and 
W»ro<if though formed irregularly ; as, 

Kv^Xaqf loquax, XaXirCfo?, KocXWocro<;, 
And the Attics form a vast number of this sort ; as, 

Xayvo?, lihidinoSUS, Xayv/fs^oij, XocyviTotroq. 

oXiyoq, pauCilS, oA/y*VffO?5 o'kiyi?cx,ro<;, and even oX/y/ro?« 

Thus rs^wUi jucundus, makes rt^nvorxros and rlf-Trv/ro?* 
aXoc^uVy SuperhuSy oc'Kx^onTtqoqy oi,Xx^ovi~xro;» 

zsluyo^y mendiciiS, 7Tlcoy(iTxroq, 
8 j3^a|, stupidus, l3?«3iiilr»roq. 
oo-^o(p<x,yoq,obsoniorumamanSyQ-^o<pxyir(XToq* 
xx^xryiq, intemperans, ooK^xrWocro;. 
"vl/Eu^Tjj, mendaXf %]/£vSt5-«T05. 

irs^o; and iruroq. 
Some are also formed by the Attics, and even by the Ionics, in 

frsfo? and irxro; ; as, 

aira^xToq, studiosuSy cTra^a/srsfo?, o-frH^xis'r'XTo;. 

x<p9ovo<;, invidice expers, larguSy a^flovsVe^o?, x(pQoys^xro(;y whence 
Eupolis has taken a(pflov£Varov : as Find, has avovs-s^ov ; and Apol- 
lon. lib. iv. de Synt. zjiBxvsts^qv. 

XK^xroqy merus, non mixtuSy ax^aTsVs^o?, ax^asTeVaro?, &c. 

utrs^og and aiTCiro;. 
Some in aio; are likewise formed by the Attics m xht^o;, xWol- 
TO?, by syncope ; as, 

'csxKxioqy vetiiSy zjxXxire^oq, zjx7\alrxroq. In the same manner, 
' yt^xio<;j senexy o-vo^ajb?, tardus ; and some others. 

This 



78 Book IL Of Nouns. 

This termination is found in some, without being syncopated; 
as o 'iltoq, propriuSf i^iocirB^og, t^ixW(xro<;. As also o YKTV)(p(;, quietus ; 
''(Toq, cBqualis ; [A.iaoZi medius ; '^'k-ncrlozi propinquus ; o4"o?, seruSi &c. 

^tAo?, amcus, forms by syncope q)i\rs§oq and ^iAraros; and 
among poets <ptxiroi;- Att. (piXxht^oq and <p/Aa<TaToj. 

lUETruv, maturuSf makes tjETrairt^o?, -cTETratTaTo?. 

Irregular comparison. 

Among those compared irregularly, the following take iuv and 

K«Xo?, pulcker, KOiXXiiOv, KcixXiTo;. 

a*<T^^o<;,turpis, cc\7yj.u\ (losing q) oCia-YjToe,» 

1 o<^T^o?, miserabilis, oIktIuv) ottcnroq, 
e I^Q^o?, inimicuSf z^Qicuv, B^OiToq. 

Q pd^ios, JciciliSf fuiuv (casting off §) pxlroqi and by syneresis 

fiuM poi?oq. 

In like manner those in y;^ though they are also compared re- 
gularly. 

^x9vq, profundus f /Sadvre^o?, /Sadyraro?, and /3afi;-o?. 
But from luv, t is also cut off, and the preceding consonant 
changed into two ao-i 0ai9iuv, ^dao-uv. In the same manner are 
compared (o^x^vq, tardus ; yXvKvq, dulcis ; i5^y?, suavis ; zju^v^, 
crassus ; rx^v^y celer; ukv^, velox j jo^x^vq, brevis ; and the like. 

Compai^isons more irregular than the preceding. 

There are others still more irregular than the preceding; as 
ky x9oqy bonus i xy^Bivuv, melior ; from whence there is no superlative 
formed. 

*from ^iiKoiJi.xt, as optimus from opto i or 

from ^sXre^nc, melior, prcestantior, 
^ from x^xri/q, or K^xrxioq^fortis, 
' from "A^e^o?, Martins ; "A^?, Mars, 
* from Xu for ^f'^w, or ihxuy volo, quasi 
quern magis volumus. 

We sometimes meet with xyx9urxroq, as in Josephus and others, 
though it is rejected by Lueian, as well as xoiv^xiorxro^j whose 
positive ico^v(px7o(; has already the force of a superlative. 
KxKoq, mains ; Kxyiiuv, pejor ; xxxiToq, pessimus. 
Likewise 



And ^zKriuv, "^sXrifoq 
melior, optimus , 



kewise y^k(^v, 1 

or poetically ^a^^'^v, | X^'?^^''^' 



And sometimes jwcxwrsfo?, 

yi^yxq, magnus, fAsi^ojv, fj.syiToq. 
M;x^o?, parvuSf makes regularly /xix^ort^o?, ^xroq. 
And moreover in ^vta-a-ml ^ i .. • /• j 

^ the comparative j^s/o^v j ^^^"^^ ^^^ superlative is formed.^ 
EXx^iq or iKx^oqy in Eust. parvus, IXoicra-uv, or rluv, IXx^i^Toq' 
rioAic, multHSj t^Ae/wVj ziXeTcoq, for -crok/Vy, TJoXifoq* 

Comparatives 



rative; as from 



Comparative and Superlative DEaREEs. 79 

Comparatives and, superlatives not formed from a positive. 

There are comparatives and superlatives frequently formed, not 
from a positive, but from elsevrhere. 

1. Some are formed even from a comparative or superlative. 

Ku'iuv, melior : AwfrE^or. 
(Auuvf minor : fxs/oT£^o?. 
tsrgoTf^of, prior ': 'zj^orE^xin^os. 
From a comi^SL' . pacuv,Jacilior : focoT^ov in thje neuter: and Ion. 

KOiXXiuiv, pulckrior : KocWtun^ot, 

. %£/f o'v, vilior : ^si^ore^ov. 
C xEtg^ror, pessimus : x^'^'5"0TEf >», feminine In Hip- 
From a superla- ) pocr. 
tive ; as from j Kv^t-osf illustrissimus : KvYirxros. 
{^ lx»^t-0Sf minimus : ikoi^iTors^of., 

2. From a noun substantive : to x/gSof, lucrum : xc^Sio-v, hicrosior ; 
KE^S/ro?, lucrosissimus. 

o ^xa-iXiv^f rex ; ^xa-iX^vrt^os, magis regius ; ^xo-iXevrocros, regna ' 
dignissimus. 

TO piyasf rigor, horror; piyluv, horridior, terrihilior, deterioT $ 
yvytroii maxime horrendus. 

o QeoSf Deus, ^Eurt^osf divinior, Hom. 

o qiu^ and nKsTflvsyJur ; (pu^orxros and iiXsvTi<rxroSfJuracissimus» 

• ziX-nKTyii, percussor ; -zs-x^jxtWto^, promptissimus ad percutiendum* 

o -sToT^j, potor ; 'GsorWotros, bibacissiynus* 

4 xfotft^*), brassica ; Kou^.Qorotrosy Aristoph. quasi bracissimus for 
hrassiccB olentissimus. 

3. From a pronoun : ixvros, ipse; xvrovxroq^ as in Latin ipsissimus 
among the comic poets, 

4. From a verb ; (ps^u, fero ; (p'^r^os, prccstantiory as much as 
to say, he who can carry more; (p^rocroq, and also 9»gr/ro? and 
<p^i-os, prcestantissimus. 

5. From a participle : o Ippui^ivosy validus ; hppuy.tvk^oit 'ocilidior ; 
sppu(^Eve<r'xros, validissimus, 

6. From an adverb : aVw, supra ; avurs^os, superior ; xviratros, 
supremus: xxnay infra; axrurs^osy inferior; xxrurxro<;f injimus : 
xsoppuf longe ; tsoppure^oq^ remotior ; 'jroppd/rxroSf remotissimus. 

In the same manner IVw, intra ; eIw, extra ; tsj^lxTUy ante. 

But lyyvs, propCy makes lyyvre^o?, iyyvrxroqi or lyylwy, iyyiros, 
proprior, proximus. 

From oiftcrojy retro, comes oviTE^oq, posterior, and omTxros^postremus. 

Froni zy^ui, mane, mature; 'Cj^mxW^as, maturior ; tjqwiocirarosy 
maturrimus, omnium primus. 
_ From ^4,;, alte ; v-^.itos, altissimus. And in verse, from a<p«?, 
cito, comes capx^rt^as, citior. 

7. From a preposition ; as. 

From Iv^f super ; vfrs^rs^oq, superior ; Hi^rxros, supremus, and by 
syncope i/VaTo?, consul. 

From 



80 Book II. Of Nouns. 

From CT^o, ante ; -cx^orc^o?, prior ; zj^orxroq : then rejecting t, and 
making a crasis, zr^uro^f primus. 

Observations on the dialects of the comparative and su- 
perlative. 

The comparative ^^w'lmi melior, is almost quite poetic ; as also the 
superlative Kuiro^j optimus : instead of which in prose we use Xuuv 

and Xa;ro{. 

Instead of K^£i<r<rcin, meliory the Ionics and Dorics say x^ia-o-uv. 
But y,oippMv is also used, as if it came from xf ar^?, fortis, according 
to the Etymol. 

Instead of /SeXr/ro?, the Dor. say ^Evrtroq, optimus. 

Instead of xaxtwv, the poets say Kxysluv, pejor : ^sfstwy, ove,-, pejoVf 
makes xH^'^'^^^i xs^£'ov^> plur. ^^e^siovs? ; and the dative syncopated, 
yz^^i ; then by changing the diphthong, %Ef^'<", H. «. avo?' X^'f^'V 
viro deteriori. We also meet with XH"^^ ^^^ X^?"''»'«> X^fEwa, 
XH^'^^i deterioreniy and xkv^'^ ^^^ %£f£toy£?. In like manner we find 
;i^f/f*a;» and x^»^w», from whence are formed x^'§°^^?®^' vilior, and 
^E^foraro?, vilissimus, 

'Pa^io? and ^ns-o? change « into » Ion. putting the / after it ; 
pv)i^ioq,Jacilis ; pniTo(;y Jacilliinus, We likewise find frf'ir^o<i among 
the poets. 

M/yitXo?, magnus, hath sometimes in the vocative p.iyxXsi magne ; 
and in the comparative /Aeya^wre^o?, major, among poets. 

Mei^x'v makes Ion. i^A^m, major, and Dor. iJioia-3-uv, which is also 
taken for /u.axf ore^o?, longior ; in the same manner as ^poia-a-uf for 
^^xovre^oq or ^^xx^rt^oq, brevior. 

Mix^lq, parvus f makes Dor. /:x,»xxo?, whence the diminut.>/xxyXo«, 
parvulus. 

From ro-(Ta»»» comes Ion. sVawv, minora whence la-aouy the same 
with Wiouy vinco. 

Of zjoxU the poets and Ionics make 'crsx^?, multus. See the 
chapter of adjectives. 

In the comparative, for ^Xiiuf, the Attics say 'csxiuv, and in the 
neuter tsxio-j, plus, which is taken adverbially. We meet also with 
vXeTf, Att. and ctAe^v, Ion. and so in the other cases, ^Xeho(;, /, a, f?, 
wv, &c. 

We^likewise say -ctXee?, %jXixq, for oXgiove?, zyXsloyx?, plures, espe- 
cially in verse. 



N 



CHAP. XI. 
Of Numeral Nouns, 



UMBERS are either cardinal, that is, which serve as a 
foundation to the rest, as al?, unus ; Ivu, duo; r^Ts, tres : 
or ordinal, viz. which are expressive of order ; as ^^uro^, primus. 

The 



O/^ NuliERAX NotNS. 81 

The four first Numeral Nouns ate declined thuS: 
Singular. 

N, eT?, unuSf (JLioc, undf h, unum, 

O. svi, /^'«> ^>"« 

D U A Li 

Norn, Ac. Avof or, according to the Attics, ^y&;, c?m(7. 
G. D. AvoTv^ and in the feminine ^vsTvy and poet, in the 
dat. W<. 
Sometimes Syo £* w^^ declined at allf being of all cases and genders, 
and taken JbrdiiOf duae, duorum, duarum, S^c, 

Sometimes it receives the dual article, and sometimes the plural^ rut 

Zy Toi 6V0 ; Ot Kj Tec, ovo. 

Avert is a case formed according to the analogy of the -plural* Where- 
fore XKe find it used thus even by St. Luke, Acts xxi. 33, y^ hiXsvas 
5i^y*/ u\vas(T'i W/, et jussit eum (Paulum) vinciri catenis duabus. 
We likexjoise meet tvith ^vuv in the genitive, for IvoTy, 

Plural, 
Nom. j^ at r^eT<;, treSf k^ ra 7§i», tria. 
Gen. Tf/fc/y, trium. 

Dat. T^/o-/, tr^us. 

Ace, Ttfi- ^ rus T^eTsi t7^s, k} ra, r^ix, tria. 

In like manner, 
Nora, o i^ ccl rstTcr(x,^£S, >^ ro- ricrara^oiy quatuor» 
Gen. rtcrad^uv, 

Dat, TfWa^cr/j 

Acc. Ttif J^ ras recTcrx^xs, ty ra. riaa-^^x. 

The Attics say, rhrat^ss and rhrot^» ; in like mapner ,the other 
cases. 

Observations on the cardinal numbers. 

Numeral nouns from four to a hundred are indeclinable; 
«r£>Te, quinque; eI, sex; lirrui septem ; wru, octo ; hna, novem ; 
Sexix, decern. 

From ten to twenty the least number may be placed first oi* 
last; thus, 

''Ek^£h«, or %»it» |y, undecim ; ^uhnxy or Ihx ^vt>^, duodecm / 

Jsxflt T^usy or r^ixxat%HsCf tredecim, — In the same manner, 

^sKocrscra-a^es, quatuordecim ; hKOL'jiivrtf quirt de cim ; ^sKas^f sex- 

decim ; ^Kaevra, septemdecim ; hyixox.ru, octodecim ; htiasvyia, 

novemdecim ; eiKoa-t, viginti. 

From twenty to thirty the smallest number is always put last ; 

ittifA^t ehy vigintt et unus ; t'tKoat h^ viginti unum ; timai lvr>, viginti 

duo ; &c. rqixytovrx, triginta. 

From thirty upwards the conjunction is commonly inserted in 
the middle ; as r^idKovrx -^ h, or, in one word, r^ixxovraKxih, tri- 
ginta et unum. 

From thirty to a hundred the tens are all terminated ki xxdyra 
OX nKoyra, corresponding to the Latin, ginta ; thus, rfiaAoyra, iri- 

M gintu 3 



S2 BtAOK II. (y. Nouns. 

ginia ; TBc-irix(ixiicvrx, guadraginia ; xsivrmovrxy quinquaginia ; l^-h' 
xovToc, sexaghita ; eQofxmGvj'x, septuaginta / oy^owovra, octoginta ; 
hnr/jnovra., nonaghita ; I>c«tov, centunT, - 

, [Ekoctov 7Cf iv, centum et iinum ; IkxtIvkj §vo, centum et duo, &c. 

The other hundreds are declinable: o< ^luxonoiy ducenti ; al 
^ixKocrioii, ducenfa? ; ^tocKoiiXf ducenta. In like manner, ol t^ixko' 
erioty trecenti I ot rsa-a-u^oiKocrioi, q uadrin genii ; ol 'uyivrtx.ytoaioi, qiiin- 
genti; ol I^ockoctiqi^ sexcenti ; ot sirrxKo'jioi, septingenti ; ol oyer xko' 
ffioi, octingenti ; ol hvexKOfrtoi^ Jiongenli. 

Ot yiXiot, mdle ; o\ ^isy(^iXioiy bis mille ; ol r^is^i'xioiy ter mille ; 
o< rir^ay-isyikioi^ qu at er mille ; ol hrraiycis^iXioiy septies 7nille ; ol ox- 
rixx{s^iXio{, octies mille ; ol IvvsxKn^tKtoiy novies mille, 

Oi i^v^ioi, decies mille ; but (jlv^U/, with an acute on the penul- 
tima, ' signifies hifiniti, according to Eustath. ol ^is^jiv^ioty vimes 
mille; ol r^ts^v^toiy tricies mille ; and so on. 

Of ordinal "numbers. 

The ordinal numbers end always in os. Those of the first te*^ 
are in ros, except the second, the seventh, and the eighth. Thos^ 
of the second are compound nouns, ending also in ros : and thos® 
of the third, and the rest, terminate in ^os ; in the manner as fol- 
lows: 

'o 'cy^uroq^ primus ; o hirs^os, secundus ; <> r^iros, tertius ; o te- 
roc^rost quartus ; o zjiiJ.nroSf quintus / o \KTosy sextus ; o E^^ojtxof, Sep- 
timus ; oyl'oosy octavus ; o avvxros, noniis ; o ^sKxroSf decimus, 

'6 Iv^EJcaros", undecimus ; o ^voKa/^sxarorj dtiodecimus ; o r^sx.<kt- 
^iKoiros, decimus tertius, &-c. 

'O r^ioiKOTos, tricesimus ; o rsaa-oc^anoTos, quadragesimus ; o zsivrvi- 
y.o<ros, quinquagesimus ; o e^vikos-os, sexagesimus ; o sQ'^oi/.vhotos, septua- 
gesimus ; o 6y^o'/)x.oTosy octogesimus ; ohvEvnwToSfnonagesimusi o ma.' 
roroi, centesimus. 

^ixaoa-ioroq, duceutesimus ; o r^ixaia-ioroq, trecentesimus* 

%A/os-oj, millesimus ; o ^/j^A/or&j-; bis millesimuSf &c. 
. ^£>c«^i/^^oro?j decies millesimus, 

^i^/xv^ioros vicies millesimus, 

o r^isy.v^ioroif tricies millesimus , &c. 

Of numbers formed hy abstraction. 

Numbers formed by abstraction are feminine; as ^i /wovaj, unitas ; htm(;f 
dnilas or binarius ; h r^ikg, trinltas or trinarhis ; h nr^aq, guaternitas or quater- 
varius ; n. tstfjt.'nraQ, quinarius ; h SKrag, senarius ; h sTrras, septenarius ; « oyS'aaf, 
octonarius ; h hna^, novenarius ; h huxg, denarius ; h iHaTovrag, centenarrus; h X'^' 
Xjaf, millenarms j h fxv^iag, myrias or decks millenarius ,• where the word ?iumerus 
is always to be understood. 

Of multiplying numbers. 

Some are in S?, and denote the simplicity or multiplicity of a thing in itself; 

as «7rXyf, simplex ; o JiTrXSj, duplex ; o rgiTrXS?, Ir'/pleXy &c. 

Others are in aa-iog, and signify proportion ; as o hTrXaa-iog, duplus j o TgiirXa- 
ciog, triplus ; orsr^ct'jr'Ka.a-iog, quad'-ziblus, Sec. 

There are others in cuog, which chiefly mark the time; o tBra^raiog, quar' 
ianns ; h 'Bref/.TCraios , quintanvs ; o lureXoq, sextanus i o l^hixaioq, septimanus ; 
oyS'ottiof , qui octo dierum est ; 6 IvvaTctToj, qui novem ; o liKaratos, qui decern, die- 
rum est, &c. Thus, 'crygETc; r^iraios, fehris iertiana ; , or absolutely, 'T^^rcl^oSf 
Urtiana ; o TETftgraTo?; quartana , o wE^TrraTo?, ^^intanaj &C. 

A N. N 0- 



0/ Numeral Nouns. 83 

ANNOTATION. 

Fcr what concerns the leUers and fgures, by rvhich the Greeks used to mark their 
numbers, see Book i. Chap, vi. 

Obsewations on the dialects of numeral nouns. 

From aT?, unus^ comes Vs^?, Ion. ; and from y.\oi^ una^ "x, Mo\, 

Its compounds take for ^, ^ol. and Dor. oi>9ik, (y-yi^sk, nitlhisj 
ov9sv, (/.y)9hf nullum ; whence comes l|80£vfV and s^^aQevL^u, nihili 
facio. And this 9 sometimes occurs even in prose. 

The compound is also resolved, ^^ol. and Dor. in two words ; 
«^£ eT?, 8^£ £v, nullus, nullum; ^-^Ts sh,-(^yi^£ h; or, in one word, 
'l^v)hh, But Homer oftener makes use of or; ^, on, iiTtvoq, for is^ek, 
&c. And the Ionics say, is^xfA.oi. 

The poets use 5o/o/ and ^o;w, for ^vo duo; in the dative ^o<oKr;y, 
duobus. 

Instead of TsWa^E?, not only the Attics say rhrcc^^, quatuor ; but 
moreover the Ionics say rs<ra-e^tq; and even in compounds, -^la-a-so-n- 
Kovrx, quadraginta. The Dorics say teto^s? or tetto^e?, and the 
poets islav^i^ or TjiWyfE?, and the obliques^in the same manner. 
The Mq\. say vsiajv^tt;, whence Hesych. takes zihav^x. 

For tUoat, vigiutif the Dor. say z^Kxn ; the poets and Ion. iUotT^i 
whence comes UtKo^oq, vigesimus. 

Instead of r^ixyiovrx, triginta ; rB(T(Txo&.x.ovrx, quadraginta ; lix- 
noa-iotf ducenti ; r^ixy.67101, tricenti ; the Ion. say r^tYiaovrXf rtaau^-lf 
Kovrxf Si»)co(r/o/, r^<7}>tocr/o/, &C. 

For oy^o-naovrx, octoginta, the poets say oy^uKovrx, 

In ordinal numbers, the Dorics say -crfaro? for r7^coTo<;, and wfa- 
TITO? for 'vj^ur I -o(;, primus. 

And the poets say livrxros for '^Evrt^oq, secundus, 

CHAP. XII. 

Of Pronouns. 

And, first, of Primithes, 

Jl RONOUNS are properly irregular nouns, which 
ought to be referred to the parisyllabic declension. 
They may be considered either according to their 
species, or according to their signification. 

According to their species, pronouns are primitives, 
derivatives, or compounds. According to their signi- 
fication, they are demonstratives, relatives, posses- 
sives, or gentiles. 

There are three primitives, lyw, ego, for the first 
person: o-i), tu, for the second: a, suiy for the third; 
which is without a nominative, the same as sui m 
Latin. These pronouns are declined thus : 

Singular 



84 



Book II, Of Puonouns. 



Singular. 




XJ, tu; 


* 


era tUl ; 


8, sui. 


(Toiy tibi ; 


otj sibi. 


<r\, te; 


h *^* •-■-■ ^ 


Dual. 


m 


fl-<pw, vosdm; 


(Tip], ipsi duo. 


(T(pm,vestri ; 


<r(pli/, sibi. 


Plural. 


' 


J^sr?, *oos ; 


(r(pB7g,ipsi,^jUm, 


J/xwi/, vesti^um; 


a-(pcav, SUl, 


C^MUi vobis J 


(TtpUi, sibi^ 


vfji.ol^y ms ; 


(r^»?, se. 



Norn, 'Eyw, ego ; 
Gen^ l[AH, mei; 
Dat. li^o\ mihi ; 
Ace. i[Ai, tne ; 



Nom. i^w, nos duo; 
Gen. i/wi/, nostri; 



Nom. >;^£K, W05; 
Gen, Ji/xwi/, nostrum ; 
Dat. >i^rv, ;2o3/5 ; 
Ace. JijtAaf, wo^ / 



ANNOTATION. 

These three pronouns, and the greatest part of the rest, have no vo- 
cative ; and those that have, make them always like the nominative^ 
Hut whereas the Latins say 6 tu, the Greeks say v ^rot. 

2^5 and <T(psTi; cannot be expressed in Latin, because sui is without a 
nominative. But the Greeks use these cases fir those of a.hr^<i, qfinhich 
hereafter. Wherefore they may be rendered by ipsi, ipsse^ ipsa. 

Observations on the diakctsofthe three primitives. 

The Attics put yc after lyw and o-y, drawing back the accent ; 
lywys, o-yy£ ; which they observe through the whole singular num- 
ber. 

The Dor. add v or n ; lyuv (iEol. \yuv) or lywwj. They also put 
7« for yt ; lywvya. But the BcEot. Say 'luycx. and )uyyx, where y« 
does not enter into the composition of the word, no more than 
lywSrv, which is the reason why it does not draw back the accent. 

The poets cut oiFs ; yui for lyw. 

The Dor. change o- into t ; for <tv they say rv, whence the Latin 
tu. They also say riwi and rvyx. The genit. is t» or tev ; dat. ro] ; 
ace. Te or rv, which is here an enclitic, though it be not so in the 
nominative. 

The genitive singular l^aS, o-», », are by the Ion. resolved intp 
£0 ; E/Aso (or /x,£o) aio, £0 ; where the poets insert a /, 1^/^70^ &c. 

The Cyprians say F/o, wjth the digamma ; and hence Hesych. is 

raistaken in reading rio. We also meet with rso7o, tm, koia, sui, 

in Horn. But erios signifies sui, coming from ais, suus: and Ivk 

(with a smooth breathing) bo7iif coming frpm Uys or hvu bonus, 

Jbrmosus, mansuetus. 

^ The 



Of Primitive Pronouns. . 85 

The Attics join also ^tv to the genii, iido^svy and l/^e^av, or 
^iQzit &c. 

The datives l/xot, /Ao<, ro^^ change ot into /v Dor. I^?v, rh\ and 
this last admits also of an f, Te<v; and by resolution, Te<"». 

The poets prefix an e to the pronoun of the third person ; lot 
for oT; II for e; and the Dor. instead of this accusative use ^]v or 
*/'», from the antiquated nom. k, ace. tv. It serves for all num- 
bers and genders, and not only for se^ but also for ipsum, dm, um ; 
ipsoSf as, a ; or illos, as, a. 

In the dual number the poets say vZ'i, a(pm \ and the ^ol. a/A/Af, 
nos duo ; y/x/Af, vos duo ; which are also taken for the accusative 
plural, and used according to the analogy of the plural: of which 
presently. 

The poets resolve the diphthong of the genitive ; saying »wiV, 
ff^uiif, for vjJv, o-^w> : and someticaes they cast off the » ; vui, <r<pm, 
as in the nominative. 

They likewise add an e to the third person dual, cr^?e for o-ips ; 
and sometimes an w, c<po\' or a<f)(tis ; and even o-(p<w, which agrees 
with the dual of cv. 

Thus the nominative dual o-^w, and the genitive r^wlV or 
<r^^y, which are properly from cv, are taken for ipsi duo, ipsorum 
duorum, ipsis duobus, and then they are derived from », sui. Whose 
nominative dual cr^t is moreover used by poets for the accusative 
singular of the relative ayro?, and for (ripoicy accusative plural. 

The nominative plural is resolved into uq ; Ion. oj/Ji^ for ^(jistif 
&c. This c is also preserved in the genitive and accusative. But 
the poets add thereto an / ; ^i^iTs^, &c. except the accusative <T^Jxi, 
■where they do not say <T(pETxq. 

The Dor. change « into ot in the pronoun of the first person ; 
in which, as also in the second, they change eis into g^, observing 
the same analogy in the other cases : drawing back the accent in 
the nominative only, and leaving it on the last, but circumflexed 
in the other cases, except the dative, which may be acuted: 
moreover, taking the genitive Ion. in ojv, where they only change 
a into X, dijJvv for vi^suv, they retain the accent upon the penul- 
tima. 

The ^ol. preserve likewise this a, and reduplicate ^, changing 
the rough breathing into a smooth, and still keeping the accent on 
the penultima in all cases. 

The dative plural, Jon. and poet, is in U acuted; ^iv ( Att. r/x/y) 
sSptty, o-^iv, and even r^i and (pU 

The poets moreover say a-<phs for ipsi or ipsos, which is also 
found in Thucydides. 

The Dor. say a-tpls for <r^af, and likewise 4/e, which comes 
from g^s for (prL And ■4/e in Hesych. is also taken for the accu§a- 
tive singular. 

But those dialects may be viewed easily all together in the follow- 
ing table. 



TABLE 



86 Book II. Of Pronouns. 

TABLE of the Three Primitive Pronounsy tokh their Dialecls. 




II. TU. 

Singular. 



1 



Att cvyz. 

Dor. TV (y£ is 
used in all 
cases ) Ty7>} 
and rvyx. 



A. .Va 



\Af. SlJLEyS, 




Att, aoiys. 
Dor. roi. 
Poet, rivy TEi\, 
and T£<*v.' 

I Dor. rl. 

\ End. TV. 



111. SUI. 

Singular. 



Ion* £0, and s^o. 

At. (oOsVy sOsv. 1 

« 1^ D. EVf olOy & So7o, 

as if they came 
from £«. 

End. 



Poet. £01, 

Poet. ££, (aIv, of 
viv, for all the 
three genders. 



Dual. 

C Poet, vui. 



A.j"^ \Dor.&t^i.£. 
G. 7 ^ C Poet, vuiv, and 



Dual. 

^^ C Poet. <T(p. 
(_ JEol. v//.f 



Dual. 



c(b 






^^^ fcr^/f, crcpi, and 
o-9<\ and a^uh. 



PI/URAl. 
Clon, 19/xeW, 17- 

Gf Ion. vii^im, and 

\^^ol.ai/,lj.acov,uv 
C D. a.(xi)i or a/itrv. 

D. vjiuv < jEoI. u^yi^iy and 
■ rion.'^fAsxSfUm] 

A.v)iAa^< Dor. oipLois. 



VfJLElS • 



Plural. 

Ion, Vl/.££S. 

Poet. v{x£T£s. 

Dor. Vfjisq. 



C Ion. Vfyi^f/LtiuiVy 

t ^ J and vij.£{wv. 
J jEol. vixiA.iuv. 

f Dor. vfjJv. 
t and viA^fAiv, 



<T(pi 



Plural. 
CDor. (T^lq. 
l^Poet. a^/sr. 

Clon. (7<pim* 
l^Poet. c^eiuv. 



Wi < 



P. (T(piVy cr(ptf 

and <p/. 






& 



cci^lAS. 




C Ion. c<pia.s. 
a-<^as < Poet. a(p£. 
iDonil. 



11. 0/ 



Of DLerivatives. > 87 

II. Of -Derivatives, whether Possessives or G entiles. 

Ttere are eight pronouns possessive, which are de- 
rived from the three primitives, in the following 
manner. 

1. From the genitive of lyJo, which is l/^a, comes 
i^lq, ifj(,ri^ l^ov, meus^ mea, menrn. 

2. From (r«, the genitive of o-u, comes <to%^ o->5; a-lv^ 
tuns, tua, tiium. 

3. From the genitive », comes oV, ri, qv, siius, sua, 
suum, 

4. From the nominative dual of eyw, which is via ox 
yool, is formed vui'n^og, oc, ov, noster, a, urn, ours, for 
two. 

5. From o-ipw ov o-^wi, the nominative dual of o-u, 
comes (Tipooi're^og, oc, ov, vester, a, wn, yours, for two. 

6. From the nominative plural of lyw, which isr^^K, 
comes 5i/>t£T£^o?, cc, ov, noster, a, urn, ours, for more 
than two. 

7. From \i\^{ic;^ the nominative plural of o-i), comes 
^Ihi-ci^Qc;, oc, ov, vester, a, urn, yours, for more than 
two. 

8. From <r^£K, the nominative plural of S, comes 
<r(pirs^og, oc, ov, suus, sua, suum, theirs, for more than 
two. 

From these plurals are also derived the following- 
two gentiles, i^y^i^oiTrog, ri, ov, nostras, atis ; and J/>c£<^«- 
TTo?, vest r as, atis. 

The interrogative of which is iffo§»7ro<;, cujas? their 
second root heing ^ocmSov, solum ; whence also comes^ 
dxXo^xTTog, alio solo natusy 

Observations on the dialects of tht possessives. 

All these pronouns follow the parisyllabic declension according 
to their gender, and receive the dialects thereof. 

The Dor. and poets change a- into r in aosf in the same manner 
asino-y; saying to?, from whence the Latin tuilSf a, um. They 
sometimes insert an £ ; tew, teo., teov : and thus also they say kos, l«, 
tov, suuSf a, um. 

The same Dor. form other possessives from the nominative plural 
of their own dialect; saying «/xof, «^« (poet, afc*?) a/xoy; vTils, 



88 BoaK II. Of Pronouns. f 

a, and^, oy: o-^o?, a, and ^, ov ; likewise c(psosy a, ov: instead of 

The Mo\. join the article with the pronoun, and draw back the 
accent ; offo<;, riant rouovt instead of o cro$, r) o-^. to aoy. 

III. Of demonstratives and relatives. 

There are two demonstratives, sto?, hie ; Ixzivoc, || 
ilk; which are both declined like the article, and 
have the neuter in o, and not in ov. The first takes a 
T in the beginning, where the article has one. 

There are two relatives of all persons, viz. oV, S, 
0, qui, qucB, quod ; and ocvrlq^ ii, o, ipse, a, urn. They 
are both declined like the article. 

Observations on the dialects of the dtmonsti^atives 
Iviuiioq and Sto? j and of the relative aJro?. 

The Att. add a / to the demonstrative pronouns, «too-/, ctlr-nlf 
TiSTol or rau. In like manner Ixnyoaly ly^eiv/iL Ixeivoty &c. 

We often meet with xsTvos, especially among the poets, for hsTvo^; 
and the same is used in the other cases. 

The Dor. say rhos or rr,yos, changing a into r, and the proper 
diphthong d into the improper i?, or into v only. 

The I en. put £ before the long vowels, or the final diphthongs 
of the demonstrative ^roq, and of the relative ulroq, and their 
compounds ; avT=»j for avr-/], hccc ; rarsa for t«t8, kiijus, &c. xtirh 
for scvrr), ipsa J (nvria for ayr», ip&ius ; in the same manner Iftavria^ 

eOlVTEtif &C. 

The nominative plural is excepted, because the final diphthongs 
at and *< are reputed short ; aTo<, and not ttrtoi, hice ; xItoci, and not 
KvTsxi, hcece, taken from the demonstrative ^res. In the same man- 
ner in the relative avro) and avroi.)^ ipsi and ipsc^. Some say the 
same of the dual, but with less foundation. 

The relative in avrof, ipse, being joined to the article » avro?, 
^ AvTvi, TO avTo or T«yTo, Is taken for ideyn, eadem, idem : and here 
the Ion. change av into uv, both in the masculine and the neuter ; 
which they observe also in avrls, even when it is taken for ipse^ 
but only in the nominative singular and masculine ; as may be seen" 
in the following table. 



TABLE 



Of Demonstratives and Ri^latives. 89 

T^^L£ o/'^^e Demonstratives \%Cmi and arcs, and the Relative avrer^ 
toith their Dialects, 



Singular. 


SINGULAR. 




Singular. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Masc. 


Neuter. 


Fe«. 


Masc. 


Neuter. 


Fem< 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


huvc. 


iKtivn 


5t»?, Aic. 


rvr9 


atJrn 


ctvTotf ipse 


rtWTO 


aiyh 


p. )UlVOi 


Kstvn 






Ion. 




TrtUTO 


lou. 


Dor. rwi 


-nm 






ctvrsK 


Ion. wi/To; 


rofuTo 


ctirsn 


A. lusivoa-l 




A. iroff-t 






iwrac 






Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


SMtfU 

XftVtt 

Uuvtil 


hims 


A. rartfi 
I. rttreu 


the same 
as Masc. 


and 

Tfitt/TEfl? 


avra 
I. airltf 


the same 
as Masc. 


and 


Dat. 


Dat 


Dat. 


Dat. 


Dat 


Dat^ 

uvrS 


Dat. 


Dat 




EJtJJVJJ 


A. ruTcct 

I. TSTft) 


the same 
as Masc. 


and 

ravrtn 


ruijriu 
rttvrS 
Avrtv 


the same 
as Masc. 


and 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


sKfTm 
xiTvov 
ixEtvevt 


Ixu'vuv 


TtfTOV 

rarovt 


as the 
Nom. 


ravrnv 
ravrinv 


«WTOV 


as the 
Nom. 


avrnv 
alritfv 


Dual. 


Dual. 






Dual, 




Nom. Ac. 


Nom Ac. 


Nom. Ac. 


Nom. Ac. 


Nom. Ac. 


Nom. Ac. 


Nom. Ac. 


Nom. Ac. 


imvo) 


heim 


-ririv 


the same 

as Masc. 


T*UT» 


auTW 
avrito 


the same 
as Masc. 


avra 


Gen. Dat. 


Gen. Dat. 


Gen. Dat. 


Gen. Dat. 
the same 


Gen. Dat. 

HAvraiv 


Gen. Dat 


Gen. Dat. 
the same 


Gen. Dat. 

avraTv 


iiulvoi* 


hiivcuv 


TBTWV 


as Masc.. 


rxv-Titnv 


aiirieiv 


a& Masc. 


avrUiv 


Plukal. 


Plural. 






Plural. 




Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


Nom. 


ex£rv« 
xiTyoi 


Ueivai 


5t« 


ravrct 
A. iur) 


auTAi 


Avroi 


iivra, 
nravvk 


avrei, 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


Gen. 


i Gen. 


iKEiviwv the same 


TaTa;v 


the same 


the same 


atiTwv 


the san>e 


the same 


wtWv as Masc. 


I. TSTEWV 


as Masc. 


as Masc» 


avrivv 


as Masc. 


as Masc. 


Dat. Dat. 


D.t. 


Dat. 


Dat 


Dat. 


Dat. 


Dat. 


KslvOlS BKBivtKTl 


TBTOJJ 
P. -TtfTfltTt 

I. Tarsoicri 


the same 
as Masc. 




etvroXs 


the same 
as Masc. 


avraTs 
cLvrvKn 


Accu?. Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accus. 


Accns. 


Accua* 


Ixeivy? , , 


, 


as the 


ravraq 


avrvs 


as the 


aVTAZ 


neivas 


»(E(va$ 


TtfTys 


Nom. 


ravrsAg 


avriai 


Nom. 


avii»i- 



ANNOTATION. 

The neuter- of Ixsrvoy, for which there was no room in this table, 
can occasion no difficult}-. For the singular being in o, as we have 
already observed, may be formed from the masculine by dropping y; 
Ixervo, xe/vo, T^vo. The plural is in a; lnuvxy x,ii:vx. The genitive and 
dative, ^ aliso the dual; are the same as in the masculine. 

N Observations 



90 



Book II. Of Pronouns. 



Vbsermtions on the dialects of the article, and of the 

relative oV. 

The relative S?, ii, o, qui quce, quod, is declined like the article 
0, -n, TO, rejecting. T in those cases, where the article has it. 

They both conform to the dialects of the parisyllabic declension, 
by which they are declined according to their genders ; with this 
exception, that from o? we do not say oto for », ct0us ; nor av, 'iut^ 
or «wv for uvf quorum ; but roTo is used for t5 &c. In every thing" 
else they agree with the nouns, as may be seen in the following table. 

But it should not pass unobserved, that the article is frequently 
put in the common dialect, and the noun it belongs to, in another 
particular; as to?? Xoyota-iVf Aristoph. 

The poets say o» for », cujus ; which a is often used by writers 
for quo or uhi. 

In the genitive the Ion. say rtZ for tS, and in the dative tew 
for Tw. 

The particles 75 and ^s, added to the article, make it serve for a , 
demonstrative; oV? ^ysi Toys: oh, ^Se, rohy &c. But the Attics- 
cjiange e into t ; o5<, o5^/, roVt, &c. 

TABLE of the Article, and of the Relative 0?, "uoith their Dialects*- 

The Article. J 



Singular. 




Dual. 


Plural. 


Nona. 
Mas. 0, 


Gen. 

I. tiij, 
TOW, 

D. tSj, 
t5. 


Dat. 

:t5, 

T£«, 


Ac. 

toy 


N.A. 


G.D. 

TOJV. 


Nom. 

D. rot, 


Gen. 

rZv, 

tSv, 


Dative. 

P. roXa-i. 
roigh. 
roli^ic-i. 

ToXq, 


Ac. 


N. tS, 


TiiV. 


rk, 


:ri 



Fem. n, 



The Dialects are the same as in the Masculine. 



-r^,, 


-^h 


rhv, 


-T«, 


TtttV, 


Ti, 


TftJv, 

Tawv, 

tSv, 


rate, 

raXcri, 

rficri. 



















Trtj. 



The Relative 0?. 



Singular. 



Nom. 

M. Sj, 
Poet. 0, 

N. S, 



Gen. I Dat. 

Otl, 

a. 



Ac. 

ov. 



Dual. 



N.A. 



G.D. 

r 

OtV. 

oh. 



Plural. 



Nom. 
of 



Gen. 



Dative. 



Fem. \ 
Dor. £, 


1 


The 

tS 


Dialect 

Tav. 


3 the sam 


B as in th 

aiv. 


e Masculi 


ne. 


^^^ 
«/?», »j?« 



Ac. 



»?< 



IV. (y 



(y Compound Pronouns. 91 

IV. Of compound pronouns. 

There are three compound pronouns, which are 
formed from the accusative singular of the primitive, 
and from the genitive auVa: these are l/^tayra, mei 
ipsius ; (TBo^vT^t tui ipsius ; layra, sui ipsius. They hava 
no nominative, and are declined in the other cases, 
like Xoyog, Zj for the masculine and the neuter; and 
like r^i^rij Y\<;y fof the feminine. 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

Gen. l/xaUT8, ljUaUTTjf, IfAOtVTHt 

Dat. ly.ccvruy Ijwayr^, l^ocvru, 

ACC. SfA,OiVrOU, llA0C\JTW9 l(AX\}ro, 

In the same manner the other two. 

The two first have no plural ; but the last has, 
and is declined either jointly or separately : thus, 

iOiVTUVj (T^uv auTwi/ ; loc\jro7^, <^<p!<^^v auroTg; I«ut8C, (r<pocg 
ocvTH^, And the other genders in like manner. 

This plural agrees to all persons ; locvT^g, nos ipsos, 
ms ipsoSy seipsosy &c. : and sometimes in the singular, 
£«yT8, tui ipsius. 

The compounds of the two last persons are also 
sometimes contracted ; <rauT8 for a-ioivr'^ ; avVs for lau- 
T«, preserving always the same breathing. 

ANNOTATION. 

The reason of these reciprocals being without a nominative is obvious. 
For as the nature of reciprocation cons?.-ts in making the action recoil 
vpon the agents we cannot say l(j<,avro? (ptXu>, cxvroq <piXs7s, but 
llji.ocvrov (ptXu, I love myself: a-xvrov piXsTs, thou lovest thyself: 
where the accusative points out the person to whom the action returns^ 
as to the subject that produced it. 

It is observable that Homer never uses Ifjuxvr^y o-sayrg, or lavra ; 
but l/AE auTov, a-E avTov, e ayrov, or absolutely xvtov : 7ior the plural 
l/xayTfcy, csocvTiiS, or socvrtis ; but riyioii; ocvrhsy vy-ois acvrii(;. Whence 
it is, that they who consider this ptoet as the standard of the Greek 
tongue, reject entirely these plurals : because, though we may resolve 
Ixvrov into E, se, avrov, ipsum, nevertheless eoivTov is not equally re- 
solvable. So that this composition seems to have been introduced 
into th€ Greek latiguagCj without any foundation or reason. 

There 



Nora. 


0> ^f 


rK 


^£rv(X, 


Gen. 


t5, rris, 


T«, 


^e/varor, 


Dat. 


roJ, T*;, 


tJ, 


^eivotriy 


Ace. 


rov, rvv, 


r.\ 


^SiVX, 



■92 Book II. O/' Pronouns. 

There remains still an indefinite pronoun, which [ 
signifies nothing determinately, (^£"1/^, ^wiJ«;?2, nescio 
quis, which is used for the singular and plural, and is 
generally indeclinable, 

and among the poets, lus, 
^tivQs^ and ^uvot* 
hTvt, and ^sTyx. 

ANNOTATION. 

Hereto we niay also join r/V, nvos, which when marked with aii 
acute is interrogative, and with a grave is indefinite. 

From this r/?, and bV, *3, 0, is formed the compound o(;riSi ^uieunquey 
where the two nouns are jointty declined ; bV, according to the 
parisyllabic declension, and r*? according to the imparisylJabic. 

But instead of osns the poets use bV/? ; whose Attic cases are, 
gen. oTs, dat. orw : and in the plural, oruv and orots* The Ion. 
cay in the genitive orso (poet, orrso) retaining this e also in the- 
other cases. Instead of oins the poets say ©jre, and instead of or< 
they say tm ; as may be seen in the following table. 

TABLE of o^Tig, quicunque, with its Dialects. 



Singular. Plural. 

M. ocrrts* ^rtvos, ^nvty ovriw. 

and /. oTco, oTE^. 

oVrg, P, OTTCO, 

Z). oTiy. 
N. oT/, sriyof, c5r/y/, on, 

P. bVr/, 

guodcunque, 
F. ^riSf httvoSf frivif hmoi, 

qtiacunque. 

The dual, which we could not make room for in this table, 
has nothing in it particular. 

*'A(Ta-Xy or in the Attic form oirr», is used for aT<v<», guacunque, 
as the above table shows. But aa<r«, with a smooth breathmg, 
is taken for rtvot, qucedam. 



o'lUViSf 


A, 
L 


Zvrivuv, chrta-if vsums 

cruv, 

oriuv, irUiffit 


alrtvXf 




Zvrtwv, ota-Tiffi} xtiva* 


olrrtx. 






CX.ffO'lXf 

actrmsy 




mriyuvy ctlsnatf a^nyas* 



The End of ike Second Book. 



BOOK III. 

Of VERBS : and, first, of those in Si. 

CHAP. I. 

Of the Nature and Properties of a Verb. 

J\. VERB is a word including an affirmation, which 
generally denotes some action. 

Verbs are divided into personal and impersonal. 

The personal is determined by a difference of num- 
ber, person, and tense; which comprises the moods 
or manners, and composes the conjugation. 

The impersonal is indefinite, neither determining per- 
son, number, nor tense ; as rluv, houorare, to honour. 

Of numbers, ^A^t^fAo), 

A verb has three numbers, in tlie same manner as 

a noun. But the dual is seldom used. 

ANNOTATION. 

Diomedes observes y that theancient Greehsnever used the dual number: 
therefore the Colics have entirely rejected it ; in ivhich they have been 
Jbllowed by the Latins. I should think it therefor e,much more convenient 
for beginners to omit this number in conjugating^ and only to mind the 
singular and pluraL The analogy between this manner ofconjugatingt 
and that of the Latins, mil contribute to render the Greek conjugations 
much easier. Besides, the dual afterwards will in no degree retard 
them; as it is seldom met withy and always of the same termination^ as 
will appear hereafter in a little table apart. 

Of persons, n^Struira. 
There are three persons in Greek, as in Latin. 
But in the active conjugation, the dual is without the 
first person. 

Of tenses, X^ovoi, 
The Greeks have in all nine sorts of tenses ; of 
which some are definite, and others indefinite. 

The definite tenses are those, which always express 
particular time. There are seven of them, viz. the 

present. 



94: Book III. Of Verbs. 

present, which is also called the theme (-^fV*)? three 
futures, and three preterites. 

The preterites are the same as in Latin ; the im- 
perfect, the perfect, and the plu-perfect. But the 
imperfect is frequently used in Greek, to signify some 
delay, repetition, or continuance of an action. 

Of the three futures the last is only for the passive, 
and is commonly called \hepaulo-post-future; because 
it signifies the thing imminent: but this tense is very 
little used. 

ANNOTATION. 

The other two are often taken one for the other ; though Sanctius ealts 
the second, ^^e future- more-remote ; a7id it is x)ery probable , that tJtese 
tenses were not originally multiplied •withoutsome necessity or distinction. 
See the remarks^ Book viii. Chap. ix. This second future is still less 
used than the first ; and is scarcely to he met with but in the passive. 

The indefinite tenses, called do^is-oiy aorists, are 
two, which are used indifferently for all times; though 
the first has generally a greater relation to the past : 
hence it is, that authors most remarkable for purity 
of diction use it oftener than the preterite. See the 
remarks, Book viii. Chap. ix. 

Of moods, 'EyKXitTiig. 

The Greeks so far var}^ in their moods from the La- 
tins, as to make the tenses of the optative different frbm 
those of the subjunctive; and therefore they make 
distinct manner : unless we choose, without mentioning- 
any thing about moods, to divide each tense into two 
or three, as Sanctius has done ; since these tenses and 
moods are frequently taken for one another. 

ANNOTATION. 

Our tables shall be disposed in such 7nanner, as to exhibit both ways'i 
of conjugating : so that from the first, or the indicative tense, the cor^- 
responding ones are to be formed, changing only the termination of the 
former into that which is peculiar to the latter j where it is to be oh"- 
served, that the imperative passes for a future, and the infinitive for a 
verb imperso?iaL See the remarks, Book viii. 

Of the different k'mds of *vevbs, AtaOio-sj?. 

The Greeks have three different kinds of verbs • 

the first active, tV^ytjTJKi?, ending in w or in ^i ; the 

second passive, TD-aOwTix^, ending always in />tai ; and 

the third middle, ^tVw, which partakes of the othei 

two, 



Of the Properties of a Verb. 95 

two, either in the formation of its tenses, or in its sig- 
nification ; which we shall explain in a more particu- 
lar manner in its proper place. 

ANNOTATION. 

There are also verbs in u of a passive signification ; as 'cia.cryu^ 
patior : and others in fjLxij of an active signification ; as f^oi^oiAscff 
pugno : Some even seem to have an active and passive, or neuter signi" 
Jication ; as ^^viQvvut multiplico, cresco, and multiplicor, or rather 
multiplico me, as the French say, je me multiplie. See the remarks 
Book viii. 

Of co7iJ2tgations, Iv^vyUi, 

Grammarians commonly reckon thirteen conjuga- 
tions ; viz. six barytons, three circumflex, and four of 
verbs in jt*t. - 

But this great variety of conjugations may be reduced 
to two ; one of verbs in w, and the other of verbs in (At. 

The conjugation of verbs in w is the most extensive 
of the two, and may be divided into two sorts ; for 
its verbs are conjugated either simply, or with contrac- 
tion. Those conjugated simply are called grave or 
barytons, (3(i^uToi/oi ; because, as they are not accented 
on the last syllable, a grave accent is to be understood. 
The contracted, are verbs in aw, ew, ow, which by rea- 
son of their accent are called circumflex. 

The conjugation of the verbs in jwt has not many 
tenses; but we must refer thereto the passive aorists 
of the barytons, which follow the analogy of this 
active conjugation. 

CHAP. 11. 

Observations, to learn easily to conjugate. 

X O^conjugate rightly, four things must be attended 
to; of which two are to be observed in all tenses; 
viz. the characteristic and the termination ; and two 
more which happen only to particular tenses ; namely, 
the augment, and the change of the penultima. 
Of the characteristic. 
The characteristic is the letter which precedes the 
termination. - •• 

ANNOTATION.* 
Most grammarians have made use of the characteristic to distingmsh 
the conjugations themselves, pretending that thejirst consonant of the 

alphabet^ 

t 



9d Book III. O/' Verbs. 

alphahet, Hcihich is /3, mth the two corresponding mutes ; viss» v and 
(Py served to mark the first conjugation, imose verbs of course ended in 
(Su, itu, ^Uf or 'aruf the «r taking a r alon^ with it. 

That the second consonant, viz. y, with its correspondents x, x> 
marked the second conjugation, whose verbs ended in yu, xv, x^, or xlw, 
the K likewise taking a r with it. 

That the third consonant, viz. ^, with its correspondeents r^ ^^ 
marked the third conjugation qf verbs in ^u, ruf ^u. 

That the fourth consonant, viz. ^, served to mark the fourth conju* 
gation : and J being a double letter composed of 9, and being also resolv' 
able into two tra; which the Attics change into two rr ; the verbs of 
this conjugation came to end in ^a>, cvu, or rru. 

That the fifth consonant following, viz. A (^ and x having been 
taken already) with its follow liquids y^, y, §, marked the fifth conju- 
gation of verbs in A«, fA.u, vu, ^u. 

That the sixth conjugation was always to have for its characteristic 
some vowel or diphthong, as «, e, S^c. which they call terminating in 
u pure ; as iu, eu, Sfc. 

These different classes of characteristics deserve to be taken notice of, 
forasmuch as they may be of service in the formation of tenses. Bub 
there is not the least reason why they should produce dmerent conjuga* 
tions, since the manner of conjugating is not at all different. 

Wherefore the use of the characteristics consists only to distinguish 
the tense, and not the conjugation. 

The grammarians call it char act eristicam, ox forma- 
tivam. We shall divide it into three classes : the first 
of the present, the second of the future, and the third 
of the perfect. The formation of the other tenses de- 
pends entirely upon these three, as it depends in Latin 
upon the present, the perfect, and the supine. 

Rule I. 
Of the Tenses that have the Characteristic of the 

Present. 

The characteristic of the present serves for the pre- 
terimperfect ; 

For the second future, and second nor ist. 

For the perfect and plu-perfect middle. 
Examples. 

The characteristic of the present serves for the 
tenses mentioned in the rule. But observe, that in 
verbs in ^tw, xtw, ^mu, the first, and not the second, is 
reckoned the characteristic. Thus, from 

T/w, honoroy pu?2io, the imperfect is 'inov, the se- 
cond future Tiw, the second aorist 'irtov (which happens 
to be here the same with the preter-imperfect) and 

the 



Observations, to learn to conjugate. <)7 

the perfect middle m«, where; t, which is the cha- 
racteristic, remains always the same. 

But from tuVIw, verbero, having formed the imperfect 
fru7r7o>, you say in the second future rv-nrca, in the second 
aorist irvn-ov, in' the perfect middle rirvTroc, where t, the 
second consonant, is lost, and there remains only tt 
the characteristic. 

Rule II. 
Of the characteristic of the other tenses. 

1. The characteristic of the Jirst future serves for the 

jirst aorist 
As also for the first future^ and first aorist yniddle. 

2. The characteristic of the perfect serves for the 

plU'perfect, . 

Examples. 

1. The first future forms the first aorist, as likewise 
the first future, and first aorist middle, which have 
all the same characteristic ; as for instance, 

_, CFut. 1. Tto-o;, I Fut. 1, middle, TiVo/xa/, 

'*'' "lAor. 1. 'iria-xy I Aor. 1, middle, iT/o-ct^Tjv ; 

Where a- continues always the characteristic. 
_, n CFut. 1. rv-\^uy I Fut. 1, middle, rv^oixxt, 

vT^^f "J^Aor. 1. i'rv4^Xi I Aor. ], middle, lrv^oi(ji.7}v; 

Where -vj/ remains the characteristic. 

2. The characteristic of the perfect serves for the 
pluperfect; as rtoi,- — Tgrtna, InrUnv^ both withx: tutttw, 
' — TsTuipa, lT£Tu^fij/, both with (p. In the middle, rirvTroc, 
IrdvTTnvy both with TT. And in like manner the rest. 

Of the termination. 
The termination is to be considered with regard to 
the tenses and moods in the active and passive voice. 
Rule III. 
Termination of the active in all its moods. 



1. The indicative termi- 
nates in w, oi>, a, iiv: 
Q, The subjunctive in w : 
3. The optative in o*^*, «t/x{ : 



4. The imperative in s^ ov : 

5. The infinitive in m, m, 

6. The participle in w, a?,c^. 
Examples. ^ ' 

In reading the explication of this rule, you should 

O direct 



gs Book III. Cy Verbs. 

direct your eye to the following table, which will 
render the whole more intelligible* 

1. The indicative has but four terminations, con- 
tained in the rule, which are «, ev, «, £iv. 

w for the present, and the two futures, which are 
conjugated alike, except that where there is an « or an | 
in the present, they are changed into the diphthongs 
Si or 8 in the second future, by reason of the circumflex ' 
accent with which this second future is marked : the 
same happens also to the first future of verbs in Aw, 
/WW, uijoy ^w, which has the same accent, and this can 
be on no other than a long syllable. 

cv for the imperfect and second aorist. 

a for the perfect and first aorist. 

m for the plu-perfect, which retains its diphthong 
€* through all the persons. 

2. The subjunctive terminates in «, like the indica- 
tive, and is conjugated in the same manner, except 
only, that instead of the short vowels g, o, it assumes 
long ones fi, «, through all its tenses, which are con- 
jugated alike. 

3. The optative has only two terminations ; ©i/x» for 
all tenses, excepting that «i/xt is for the first aorist. 

4. The imperative likewise has but two termina- 
tions ; £ for all tenses except the first aorist, which 
takes ov, and like the rest is conjugated in tw. 

But it takes an « in the penultima, coming from the 
first aorist of the indicative, from whence it is formed, 
ANNOTATION. 

Therefore t alee notice, that there may be some difference in the second^ 
person of the imperative (for there is nojirst) but in all sorts qf'^ 
verbs the other "persons have the same termination, ru, ts, ruaxv, Sfc, 
except that the passive instead ofar requires a ^, as tve shall shoxu in 
its proper place. 

5. The infinitive has three terminations ; uv for 
the present, and the other tenses which preserve its 
characteristic: <»* for the first aorist: im* for the 
perfect. 

6. The participle has also three ; wi/ for the present, 
the second aorist, and the futures; tx^i for the first 
aorist : «? for the perfect. i 

ANN04 



Observations, to learn to conjugate. 99 

ANNOTATIO N. 

The masculine and neuter of all these participles yoUoto the im- 
2jarisyllabic declension^ as tve have already observed in the table of 
genitives : the feminine conforms to the parisyllabic declension and the 
feminine article. 

But rve must say something here of the third person plural of each 
tense) which beginners generally Jind the most difficult to retain. 

Rule IV. 
Of the third person pkiral. 

The third person plural in exiery tense is formed thus: 

The tenses in u, and the perfect, have trt ; 

Those in ov, end also in ov. 

The other tenses have their terminations in zv or kv^ 
which are always formed from the singular. 
Examples. 

The tenses in a, and the perfect, terminate this 
person in <ri : viz. the present and the futures in 
so-*; the subjunctive in oo-*, retaining its w; and the 
perfect in ^(ri, 

The tenses in ov, that is to say, the imperfect, and 
the second aorist, terminate this person in Qy, like the 
first of the singular. 

The other tenses terminate it in £i/, or in «v, and 
form it froui tlie singular, viz. the first aorist from 
the first person, by adding v ; the plu-perfect (to . 
which we may join the passive aorists) and the im- 
perative, from the third person singular, by adding 
cxy ; the optative also from the third person, 
but by adding sv, as may be *seen in the following 
table. 

ANNOTATION. 

Concerning the augment and the pe7iultitna. 

There are still two things to learns before you can conjug-ate luellf 
the augment and the penult ima : but the changes of the peiadtima xvill 
be shown more conveniently in each tense^ according to which it often 
"varies. And as for the augment ^ the particular rides concerning it will 
be easier to retain^ when you have learned a little to conjugate. We 
shall only remark here/that the augment is nothing else but an increase 
<f quantity i or of letters^ prefxed to a verb in some tenses, as t/w, 
honoro; IViov, honorabam; tet/k^, honoravi ; ItstIksiv, honora- 
veram; as may be seen in the folloxmig table; which if the 
learner will but give himself the trouble to compare with the preceding 
observations^ he will quicUy perceive their use in assisting his memory, 
and instructing him to conjugate xvit% great facility. 

TABLE 



lOO 



Book III, Of Verbs. 

TABLE of Conjugation 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive. 

v'jralxKitK^. 



Optative. 



'Evsru^, Instans, The present. 

tI- J Honoro, as, at. Ti- ■< Honorem, es, et. 

1. \ ofxiv, ET£, acri. I 2. (. <»^£v, >jte, ojs-i. 

Uoi^itloiliKOi. Quasi e:jctensivus in rem no?i exactam. The imperfect. 



- r ov, £?, e. 

'^£7i- -? Honorabam,as,at. 

1. toftSK, ETS, OV, 



Tt- -| Honorarem, es et. 

2. (, 0(^£V, oHe, OiEV. 



MsAAwv. Vulgojiiturumprimum, The first future. 



TjV- -? Honorabo, is, it. 

J. (, OjW£V, ET£, tfff-i. 



tIo-- J Honorem, es, etj. 

2. {^oiy,£v,'Oile, oiev. 



'EffoiAEvos, Qnlhusdamjuturum remotius* Tiie second future. 



C 00 y BIS , ?~. 

Tt- ■< Honorabo, is, it. 
1 . (_ SjUEv, eTte, yo-j. 



Tt- ■< Honorem, es, et, 

2. (^o~|M.£v, oTrs, oTev, 



na^£X>jXy0wj. Tempus exactum. Vulgo the first aprist. 

^ErtjT- .^ Honoravi, islf. Tia- •< Honoraverim, is. I .Tl<r- < Honoraverim,i5,lt. 

1. jt, ttywev, «T£, av. j 2. (, (WjaEV, »]T£, wo-j. J 3. (^ atyotEv, atj£, atev. 



'Ao^/roj. Indefinitum tempus. The second aorist. 

Honoraverim, is. Ti- -< Honoraverim,i6,it. 
>jT£, a>c-j, j 3. (. oijLiiv, oirSf ctiv. 



Cov,Zq,S. I |«, r^J 

Erf. < Honoi-avi, isti. 1 Tt- •< Hono 
1. '( oiABv, £T£, OV, I 2. (,a^£y, 



naf<%?c£tV-£v©^'. Adjacens prt^senti. The preter-perfect. 



Te- r a, aq, E. j tI- T w, «?, >J. 

Tt«. -< Honoravi, isti. tix- ■< Honoraverim, is. 

1 . (^ a[A,iv, ariy. airi, j 2. f, «,u£V, /iTE, wcrt. 



'TTrefCTfylf^oco?. Flusqiiam perfectiiM, The plu-perfect. 

ITS- r oijwt, etf, w. ^^tI 

Tf«- •< Honoravissem. * 
2, (."A^E*'; '^'?£> **«"• 



^Ens.' { EtV, Et?, Et. 
<ri>t« •< Honoraveram. 

1. V£</^£V, eHe, £t»-(*V, 



OjiSEiivAfiONS, to learn to conjugate. 
for the Y EVbB Active. ' 



101 



Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participles. 




'CT^oraT/Kov. 


Ci'ffX^ilA.^OCIX, 




V-^^X""' 














E 












o 


r~ 




r- 


■■ 


r- 




g 




< 


: E, ETO;, 








i 


" «v, «"»-«?, ■) 


p 




Tt-< 


Honora, ato. 




t;- £iv. 




t;- - 


»o-a, »)?, S 


•l 




( 


ET£, ETWC-aV. 




Honorare. 




1 


. o», ovTs;. J 














- V en 


•• 










' 




t> 






^ 




*«J 




-^ 


'w 






S 




SJ 






*r< 


en 






^ 

s 


TtV- EJV. 

Honoraturum 


a 

1 


T' J 


ftJV, OV?(!f, 


W 


o 






3 




o* 


Tkt- -> 


«<ra, »)f, 


pi 


Oi 






1 


esse 


». 


1 


, ov, cvloc. 














5 






)f- 


"^ 












Ol 


















*> 






s 




s 






ta 


cd 






3 




Cm 






a 


1 






s 

o 


Ti- eTv. 


s 

3 


T<- - 




3 


^ 










S 




. 5v, svlo?. 




l\ 




























5 






.^ 


















a 












1 




f 8V, aru, fac 


Si 




-2 

c2 




^ av, avlo;. 




s2 
1 

3K 


nV- 


< Honoraveris. 




Tier- aj. 
Honoravisse. 


s 

3 

'5 


-1 


Si 

■ c 


^ 












^ 


J 






i 




.3 






c 


s 


( 

Ti- ' 


' £, ET&>, fac 
c Honoraveris. 


s 


Tj- eTv. 


o 




c5v, o'vlof, 




( 


'ete, irwcrav. 


3 




«J 


Tt- - 


1. ov, ov7oj. 


o 


<^ 






w 




■£. 




<. 












"o 














«s 




•^ 






** 


























3 




rt 














a 




Ol 






^ 








a 










■^ 




, 


C E, ETiW, fac 


^ 


^ 








^> 




T£- 


-< Honoretis. 




TETW- Ef«t. 




TE- < 


' Wi, OTOf, 


J* 




TlJt^ 


(. £T£, irua-AV. 




Honoravisse. 




..-1 


L Of, OTO;. 
















^ 







C H A P. 



102 Book III; Of Verbs. 

CHAP. III. 
Of the Augment^ divided into Syllabic and Temporal 

JL HE augment, as we have already observed, is an 
increase prefixed to a verb in certain tenses. 

There are two sorts : one syllabic, which consists 
in an increase of syllables ; and the other temporal, 
which is made by an increase of measure or quantity. 
But all tenses are not capable of this increase. 

Out of nine Greek tenses, three are never aug- 
mented, viz. the present, and the two futures : two 
are augmented through all the moods, viz. the per- 
fect, and the paulo-post-future, which is only for the 
passive : and four have an augment only in the indi- 
cative, viz. the imperfect, and the two aorists; to 
which we may join the plu-perfect (for those that are 
willing to divide this tense according to our table into 
first and second), which, out of the indicative, drops 
the syllabic «, that had been superadded to the aug- 
ment of the perfect ; as rgVixa, InrUtiv, nrUoif^i, 
But yet it is not quite without an augment, as 
that of the perfect still continues. 

Rule V. 
Of the syllabic augment. 
1. The syllabic augment is t prejijced to the imperfect 

of a verb beginning with a consonant : 
S. And then the initial letter of the present tense is 

repeated in the perfect : 
S. But if the initial letter be an aspirate, you must 

change it into its corresponding tenuis : 
4. And there must be still prefaced another syllabic 
s, in the plu-perfect. 

Examples. 
1. The syllabic augment is nothing else but an f 
prefixed to the imperfect of verbs commencing with 
a consonant : as t/w, honoro ; hiov, honorabam : rv7r%, 
I btat ; ' iTVTrlov, I did beat. And this s is also re- 
tained in the aorists,^ as we shall see hereafter ; m(r«5, 
honoravi ; %yv^oo^ verberavi ; hmov^ the same, &c. 

% But 



Of the Syllabic Augment. • 103 

£, But then the perfect re-duplicates the initial 
letter of the verb; as, nw, honoro ; riri7i», honoram: 
tMcoj verbero ; rgruipa, verberavi 

3. Which, if it be an aspirate, must be changed 
into its corresponding iej2uis before it is repeated, 
thus : 

^sivco, stimulo ; rsQxAXt stimulavi. 

<pa,»ojf luceo ; -crl^ayjca, luxu . 

Xoil^u gaudeo ; nB^ac^KOi, gavisus sum* 

4. And the plu-perfect receives still a syllabic aug- 
ment over and above that of the perfect; but only in 
the first, viz. the perfect of the indicative ; as Tinyioi. 
IrtrUm, honoraveram. In like manner : 

rv'n\uf verbero ; rirv(poty. Irsrvipstv, avi, averam, 
'y^oi(^Uf scribo ; yiy^x^poi, lysy^oiipBtVf scripsiy eram. 
Khtvuf inclino ; x£xX/>c«, I)C€jcA/k£/v, aviy averam. 
x^ivw, judico ; xixf/xa, lyisK^UiiVf avi, averam. 
ANNOTATION. 
This reduplication^ tvhich the Greeks call uvu^tiF^Ma-txa-ixoVf duplica- 
tionem, is also in iise among the Lati?iSt as ive have made appear 
in the Latin Method : thus fallo, fefelli ; pello, pepuli ; pango-, pe- 
pigi, S^c. 

Rule VL 

Of the augment E, long by position. 

'P is re-duplicated in this augment ; at which time, 

as also whenever the augment £ is long by position^ the 

inci'ease of the perfect is the same with that of the 

imperfect, - 

Examples, , 
The letter ^ is always repeated after the syllabic 
augment. And then, as also whenever £ is long by 
position, viz. when it is followed by a double letter, 
or by two consonants, the augment of the perfect is 
the same as that of the imperfect, without any re- 
duplication : 

/*7r)ft/, projicio ; Vppi<jr\ovf sppt(pxi projiciehantf projcd* ^ 

eirtte^oji semino ; ea-trei^ov, IWafxa, seminabaju, seminnvi* 

^Ew, ferveo ; e^sov, cC^ta, fervebam^ ferbui, 

Iew, polio; s'lwv, I'lejca, poUebam, polivi, 

•^oiKXuyCanoJidibus ; l'%|/«A^o/, t^otKnx, canebamy cecini,&c. 

But a mute and liquid do not make a syllable long 
by position^ and therefore "verbs beginning with them, 

§ folloxv 



104 Book III. (y Verbs. 

follow the general rule, asaXiw, inclino; HkXivov,^ nk^^^ksi. 
and others. 

ANNOTATION. 

The poets do not alvoays repeat ike § in the augment, as p<z7fi»,\ 
to sew ; t^flc/Zov, I did sew. Therefore the perfect shall then have 
its reduplication ; as ptTrlu, to throw, s^t'^lov ; ps^i<^tx, for sppi^Xf I 
have thrown: p^^i^fxxi /or VpPitJ>.i/t.xi, I have been thrown. And in 
the plu'perject l^t^i^yim, vj/o, tsl^t S^c. In like manner pi^u, to do, 
imperf. %^ov, aor, 1. s^e^x, Jrom whence comes Ko&re^s^x, I have 
finished. 

Rule VII. 

Of verbs that neglect, and others that are indifferent 

about the reduplication of the perfect. 

1. Verbs commencing with yv neglect the reduplication 

of the perfect : 
S. And a fexv others either take it^ or neglect it ^ 

Examples. 
Although jtA and v^ preceded by a mute, do not make 
a syllable long by position in Greek; nevertheless, 

1. Verbs beginning with yv do not repeat the first 
letter, as yi^ow, nosco^ iym%oi.\ ym^t^u, notum reddo, 
lyvoo^ixx; and such like. To which we may add y^n- 
yo^eu, vigilOj ly^Yiyo^YiKOi, 

ANNOTATION. 
The reason of this is to avoid a cacophony, because the ear 'would de 
offended at the sound ofysyyu^KoCf ysyv u^ikx, Sfc» 

2, On the contrary^ verbs commencing with Jtl, Z7% 
and p, sometimes take this reduplication, because these 
letters make the syllable common in verse; as ytraofxocty 
acquirOj possideo, >c£>cT>5/>cat : [avmi^o^i, memini^ fAiy.vv\iAO(,i : 
and sometimes they neglect it; as 'Urnfj^on for x£)ctj)/a«», 
possedi ; txraxa from Klttvu, occido ; iytnc-iAon from jctj- 
^ofAoci, condor^ &c. 

Others do the same, though the f be short or 
common, sometimes taking the reduplication, and. 
sometimes neglecting it; as, 

^Xaravw, >vireo ; I'C^ar^xa? et ^iZ\»Tmoi, 

^aXivM, consulo ; iCBXet/Kic, et jSE^aXeyxa. 

x^vvlai, occulto ; tx^vpx, et y.U^v(p<x„ 

^>,Xii£votAXi, torpeo ; fCAaxey/xa/, Ct ^iQ?iXK£V^SCi» 

But xaSfltfi^w, purgOf has only hM^inx, 

Rule 



0/*//;e Temporal Augment. 105 

Rule VIIT. 
Of the temporal augment. 

1 . The temporal augment consists in changing a short 

i?ito a long trowel, as also » into n : 

2. In zvhich ' case the t of the diphthongs on, oi, is 

subscribed, and the diphthong «u is changed into 

3. And these augments are the same in all tenses. 

Examples. 

1. The temporal augment is properly no more 
than the change of a short into a long vowel, ac- 
cording to the correspondence of vowels and diph- 
thongs, mentioned in the first book ; on which ac- 
count some are called mutable, and others immuta- 
ble. Which is effected thus. 



Mutable, Msra^oXixa 

r a "1 r« avvuf 

;. < e J. into < T, l},£v9{> 

Diphthongs. -{ af ?- into < viv aulavw, augeo, f)w|< 

L 01 J (.w o'lici^eOf httbitOf uxK 



Vowels. -{ e ^ into ■{ v IxevOm, vernOf viXeuOov, 



xvov, 

2. Where it is to be observed, that the change of 
diphthongs follows that of the vowels, according to 
their prepositive, the subjunctive » being subscribed, 
and the u remaining where it was. 

3. These temporal augments continue in all tlie 
other tenses capable of augmenting, and are ever the 
same. 

ANNOTATION. 

Nevertheless, though ixi^ij subscribes f^ov, tollebantf yet it does 
not subscribe vi^x the first aor. nor vi^xx the perfect active, wherein 
several are mistaken, says Caninius, because these tenses come 
from the future oc^cu, tollam, which has no /. This is further 
shown by the participle of the first aor. oi^xsj oi^ocvrosi qui siistulitj 
and not aJ'^a?, as it should be, if it followed the analogy of the 
present. Thus from (pxlvu, appareo, fut. <pxvuy comes I'tp^jva and 
-cTs^vjva. But uirsco, peto, subscribes the first aor. vnaxy petivi, 
and resumes «< in the participle atrria-us, because its future is atirva-u* 
Which is a general rule for all others of the like nature. 

P Gretser 



106 Book III. Of Verbs. 

Gretser pretends y that the change of a long into -», and of the 'proper 
diphthong into improper^ is rather a simple change than an atigynent ; 
because^ says hcj as the syllable xvas already long, it had its tvoo 
measures, ivhich is all it can have after the change. But we must 
not imngiiie, that art could here comprise the tohole natural force and 
practice oj the language. For even among short and long syllables, 
there were some shorter and others longer than the rest, as we have 
made appear elsewhere : the common syllables having been deemed conv- 
man for no other reason, but because as they had a longer measure than 
a short syllable, and a shorter measure than a long one, it was no hard 
mutter to make them pass for either : and the diphthongs v), u, having 
had their subjunctive written formerly after the prepositive, in like < 
manner as rrj; which is proved Jrom very ancient manuscripts^ as we 
have made appear in thejirst book. 

Rule IX. 
Of immutable vowels or diphthongs. 
All other vowels or diphthongs are inimttt able. 
Examples. 
The other vowels, viz. the two long, -a, w, and 
the two common, t, u, together with the diphthongs 
ft, «'j, ou, continue immutable through all tenses and' 
moods in the common tongue. 

Immutable, 'AiAndiQoXix. 

7'esono, '>?%£ov, -^p^jjVo;. 

impellof wBovf ua-u. 

aucupor, i^svov, \^zvau. 

insulto, v^^t^ovf vQ^^a-M. 

assimilO) tiKOc^oVf six.cia-u;. 

Diphthongs. -{ tv bvOvvco, dirigo, b'vOvvov, svQvvm. 
vulnerOf ^roc^ovf tirxa-uj. 
The Attics sometimes change u into v)y as su into >?y ; but more of 
this in the next chapter. 

Exceptions to the rules of the temporal augments 

Rule X. 

Verbs that do not change a into »j. 

A is not changed in ol(>i, di'co, ftTiOfVo-w, dn^i^oiAon, 

Examples. 

These four verbs retain a through all their tenser : 
a«, spiro^fo, to distinguish it from w, taken from 
£w, su??i: di'coy audiOy ol'iovy to distinguish it from niov, 

taken 



Vowels. 




cy/^e Temporal AuGiMENT. 107 

taken from slu or ftjoo*, vado : dn^ia-a-ca^ insuetus sum, 
m^i<r<rovy to avoid putting two m successively : dYi^i^o^uxi, 
tcedio officior,fastidio, mSi^ofxnv, for the same reason. 

Rule XL 
Of verbs that do not change e into t), but make a 
diphthong of it. ' 

E, instead of being changed into ti, oftentimes takes a i 
after it ; as £p^w, it^pv : in the same manner, kcLu, 

Examples., 
Several verbs beginning with an £, take a t after 
it, and so make their temporal augment in ei diph- 
thong, as the following : 

£;^w, habeo ; £^%ov, haheham. 

In the same manner, 
" law, ^/no ; sX\<To-uj, volvo. 

iKu, obsolete, instead of which we say, 
oii^iu, capio ; sIkqv, cepi. 

^Xhw, and its derivatives, sXtc'su and bXkvm, traho, 

Uu, consuesco ; '^ttu and b^ttv^u, serpo, 

sTwco, sto y l^vojj traho. 

sTTu, dico ; £<jrofxaif sequor, 

ETioiu, convivium celehro ; B^ydc^oixxt, operor. 

'lu, induo and colloco ; b^oj and ojj.atf sedeo, 

A N N O T A T I O N. 
"Ettw, hlTTov, dixif retains its augment through all the other moods : 
E/TTE, die ; eltruvf qui dixit. See the resolution of verbs, Book V. 
Rule xix. 

''Etw.u, stOfperstOf permaneo ; f«r>}X£/v, steteram, in the plu-perfect 
middle. For the perfect 'irwcx. has no augment ; unless we choose 
to make it the perfect active of iV^ip, and to say that erxKx is used 
Dor. by taking an a, for an »}. See Book IV. Rule xiii. 

*'Eu, whether for induo, or for sedere juheo, colloco, makes in the 
preterite £T/i>ta/, indutus sum, collucatus sum, sedi. See Book IV. 
Rule xxiv. 

'E^e'w, dico, makes also Ej'^^xa, sr^'/j/xa;, whence comes £/%»j5^v, and 
rejecting /, l^viQvDi. See the resolution of verbs, Book V. Rule ix, 

RU.LE XII. 

Of verbs beginning with io. 

E hefore o continues ; hut o is changed into co. 

Examples. 

Verbs that have an s before o, in the beginning, do 

not change the S; but make the augment in the 

second 



108 Book HI. Of Ver^s. 

second syllable, changing o into w ; as lofoc^u, JerioVf 

Rule XIII. 
Of verbs that retain oi. - 
0^ is not augmented in verbs derived from oTj/®^, amli;^ 
and olot^ : as also in the following verbs ; «Ik8^6w, oIjtAaw, 

Oiffaw, oUofj(,ai3 and olfAU^co 

Examples. 
The Ionics do not change the diphthongs for the 
augment ; therefore they say, alrsou, petebam ; oUsov, 
habitabam, &c. Hence it is, that in the common 
tongue there are several verbs that preserve ot, without 
any change, viz. those derived from 

foUi^u, \>inum redoleo, 

oln^oyiMh vina comparo* 

ojvo W^o;, vinum poto, 

o/vow,* in mnum vertOf 



\ otvocof* in mnum vertOf "1 

vino modice rejpleo^ > 

^ e'lvy^oici),^ Vinum ijifundo. j 



* But these trt'o soflactimes 
change «< into u. 



f o'lUviCpfJLOClf ^ 
SO), > 



oJwvoj, xiolucrisj augurium, < oicovoo-Ko'frsa, > auguror, 

oix^i temo, guber- J°|^^'b*'»; / gubernot gubernaculum 
naculum riavis, ) °\'*^^^°i^^^> r navis reso. 

To these we must join 

o'loofjioii, solus ago, from otoiy solus, 

oha^iu, domum custodio, from oJH«fo?, custos domus. 

C//XCCW, impetu ruo, from olfioq, semita, 

jrfa&, I ^^^y.^ concitor, from olTfio^i csstrum, 

tu^u^u, ploro, from o/|xo<, hei mihi. 

But the last makes oJixw^oy, and u[x.u^ovy plorabam. 

Hereto may be added oMvoi, or ol^xivu, tumeo ; Sm^otmv 
Twi/ o')(K(,iv 4/u;i^ai, Herodi. popular mm animi intumuerunt. 
Though it comes from olSiu), from whence is derived 
w(J»iHw?, tumidus, infatus, in Suid. and Hesych. 

CHAP. IV. 

Of the Augment of Compound Verbs, 

l^OMPOUND verbs may be reduced to two classes ; 
those that are formed of a preposition and verb ; and 
those that are formed of other parts of speech. 

Those 



Of the Augment of Compounds. 10^) 

Those that are formed of other parts of speech, 
need not occasion any manner of difficulty; because 
they agree entirely with the general rules, and receive 
their syllabic or temporal augment, exactly as if they 
were simple verbs: ctuVo/Ao^sw, sponte venio ; ivTQfj.oXiov : 
(piXo(ro(p£(a, philosopher, l(piXo(r6(p£ov : ofAo^^o^iu, concors sum, 
idem sentioy <^fAo(p^oviov, 

As for those that are formed of prepositions, we 
must first of all recollect what has been said concern- 
ing the apostrophe, Book 1. page 23, and afterwards 
take notice of the following rule. 

Rule XIV. 

Of the augment of verbs compounded with prepo- 
sitions. 

1. The augment in compounds generally follows the, 
preposition : 

Q, And sometimes precedes it : 

3. Sometimes it both precedes and follows. 
Examples. 

1. Verbs compounded with a preposition vary 
greatly, with regard to their augment: generally 
speaking, however, it takes place after the preposi- 
tion, being the same in all tenses as that of the sim- 
ple verb ; "cr^oo-SaAAcj, adjiciOj sr^oa-i^etXXov, from |3aA- 
Aw, jacio : hoiXXda-CTM, immutOy lyv\XXoi.<r<r%v, from <^XX(X<rffUf 

muto. In the same manner, zr^o(priTiv(a, propheto, u^e- 
<pY\TtMov : <ruwf^y£w, in opera adjuvo, a-vv^^yiov : sTri^n^txcw, su??i 
domi, lTnh§Yi}AYiy.ocyJui domi: iTno^yciu, pejero, Iniio^xmo^i pe- 
Jeravi: lyns-KTscajprcesum, ImToirwoc : and others of the 
like a^rt, which may be seen m J5w6l^gW5 and elsewhere. 

This appears still further in the compounds of ly, 
a particle of good fortune, and of Jv?, a particle of 
misfortune, when they precede a mutable vowel or 
diphthong ; as «uo^xw sanctejuro, juramentum religiose 
servo^ i^'^TLnv : £jf^y£T«, henefcio officio, t^n^yirnv : £u«7- 
yixt^ofjt,oci, Iceta nuntio, honum nunimm affero, tJ>iyy£At- 
^o^viv. Though sometimes the Attics change w into 
Wj as we shall see in the next chapter. 

Au(r«^fr«, morosus sum, Svirfi^sfnv : h<r»mr(^) difficulter 
credo, diffido, ^vtrnmrav, and the like. 

2. Some- 



110 Book III. Of Veubs. 

% Sometimes however the augment is put before 
the preposition; which happens 

To the compounds of c^i)?, when it precedes a con- 
sonant, or an immutable vowel or diphthong ;^^uru 
X^(^i infellv sum^ Uvrv^av : Jyo-wTrew, pudore Jitcto, e.voro^ 

To the compounds of a privative ; (^(p^ovica, incipiens 

sum, %<p^ovm» 

To compounds that make no change in the signi- 
fication of the simple; ivSu, dormio; x^OfoX, ic/e?7tj 
iKdkvSov ; though we also meet witli xaOfu^Joi/ without 
an augment, and with a circumflex on the penul- 
tima; because all compounds of two syllables com- 
mencing with a vowel, that are without an augment, 
or that have it in the middle, are thus accented; as 
(rvvd'y(a, COgO, cui/riyov : -uroc^iUuj COncedOy -moc^iTyiov : ^et^^rtKco, 
devenio, yix^mov, &c. 

'AvTtoo//,at, and Ivoivnooixa^i, or H^oti, contrarius suniy 
yimvriciOf/,nv : 'iTrca and IvfiVw, dlco, yimrovj &C. 

To some particular compounds when the simple 
is obsolete ; cifji.(pKrQYiTBpo, duhito, i^^i<T^Y,riov : ocvn^oXoo, 
supplico, oro, wri^oXav : duriSiyiiw, corUra adversarium ago 

But there are some of these that receive the aug- 
ment in the middle; diroXuxxa, fruor, oi7rix»vov, and 
Att. octtyiXkvov (as we shall observe in the next chapter), 
iTTtp^si^w, aggredior, iTn^H^^v : iyyi(cijt.ioc^oo, celebro, kudo, 
Ivsyiufxicc^ou, (where v is repeated by reason of the fol- 
lowing vowel) and lviy}i(aiJt,io(,^ov, by adding a y. 

In like manner, iTrtxa^ew, au.vilior, i-my.^iov, Dion. 
Gass. iTnTYi^gvco, do operam, aor. 1. iTnryihvtrut Thucyd. 
The perfect participle l7rir£T7ihv[jt.ivoif Dion. Cass, qui 
se ej^ercueraiit : irv]/Sionroc6y.oci, convivo, a-xjvSiyjroco^w.idem, 

3. Others take the augment in the beginning be- 
fore the preposition, and in the middle after the pre- 
position, as in the simple verb ; lyt^ionrocu, lu.vuriose vivo, 
iKhSi^maoc : ho^Xioo, turbo, >3vw;^A>iHi» : liATrci^iviu^ petu- 

iTrnvu^^uaoc : Siocniu,judico ut arbiter (from whence the 
word Imperial diet is derived), hhirnnot, : Turoc^omcaj vino- 
lentia pecco, iTroi^caviov, 'zj-BWa^uvnuoc, iTTU^tavma, &C. 

dn)^o(/,onj tolero, m%o(Ar]v^ and m(yx^[^'^^' 

t ANNO- 



Of the Attic Augment. Hi 

ANNOTATION. 

But Ifyvoiuf spondeOf receives sometimes its augment in the be- 
ginning as in the first aor. u^t/^ja-e, in the imperfect hfyvxto : and 
sometimes in the middle, as in the perfect h^fyvms, in the first 
aor. lvsfyuv)a-Ef from whence comes IvsyCvYiTx^^nv, and without an 
augment, and syncopated, l[yva,(Av>V' 

In like manner h£-xv^oi.^o^(x,i, or lyx^voi.^ofj.xty oppignero, taken 
from l/^^v^ov, or tyyv^ovi pigniiSj sometimes takes its augment in 
the middle, at other times in the beginning, and sometimes goes 
without any augment at all ; which also happens to others. 

Some verbs have both the syllabic and temporal augment; 
l/ATToXo-o;, emo^ hicror ; li/.imioXmXf and ^^7roAi3>cflt ; aor. 1. ■hi/.'rro:- 
^^-ncroi, &c. 

Here it is proper to observe, that verbs compounded with |y, 
\k, (jvvy where the v and k admit of some change in the present, 
because of the following consonant, according to what we have 
remarked in the first book, assume here their natural v and x, as 
often as the augment is in the middle ; as <7v{ji.<p^sycj, comburo, <ru- 
vsipxeyov: ly/^iu^ Lniirii^o, Ivsf^^iQv. But as for the particular manner 
of chcinging these prepositions, we shall treat of it at large in 
Book Vi. Chap. ii. 

C H A P. V. 

0/ the Attic and Ionic Augments, 

Rule XV. 

Off changed into -a, according to the Attic form. 

The Attics generally change i into y\for their augment ; 

thus of ilhiVy Uvudixyiv, they make ^'^£iv, r^uvc/jwriv. 

Examples. 

Jl he Attics, generally speaking, change s into -/i 
for their augment, wliether it makes part of a diph- 
thong or not. 

Therefore ft is changed into vi subscribed, and sv 
into >ji» ; as, 

sWd^Uf assimilo ; Imp. uytx^ov, Att. TjKa§3v. 

si'^w, Scio, noSCO ; Plusp.Er^Eiv, Att» 7]hiv. 

tlypiA.cx.ii precor ; Imp. Eyp^^o/jtvjv, Att. yivyh^W' 

Ei^w, dormio'y Imp. sy^^ov, . Att. uv^ov. 

Hence . with them the syllabic augment is also 
changed into temporal ; as e/aeAAov^-Ji/asAAoi^^ debebam : 
Uvuocfji.Yiv, nhvKy.'Av, poteram : I^sAojoci^i/, ii6sAoj(/^>ii/, mlebam, 
&c. 

Rule 



in Book III. fy Vebbs. 

Rule XVI.' 
E prefixed to the temporal augment; ^ resolved into i 
£x ; £i put for Af or /ae. ! 

L T/ze Attics Ukezvise prefix to the temporal augment \ 
an Bj which takes the breathing of the present : 

2. Thet/ resolve n into la : 

3. And in the perfect they put a instead of Af or [xs. 

Examples. 

1. The Attics prefix aiif.to the temporal augment, 
particularly to verbs commencing with an f or an o, 
whether, in the imperfect, or in the other tenses 
capable of augment : and this s always retains the 
breathing of the present, whereas e in the temporal 
augment takes a smooth breathing. 

o^au, video ; ^^aov, and m^uovy videham ; to^«)c«, and 
Iw^axa, vidi* 

olyco, aperio ; Zycx, and swya, aperui^ from whence 
comes dvwk, the perfect middle. See the resolution 
of verbs, Book V. 

sVw, dico ; ilrrov, itira,, uittov, hiTroc ; whence zr^otrisi- 
TTOv, Ts-^oa-iEiTtXi allocutus sum, 

i(o, or i«|U», mitto, ^aoc, smcc, misi ; whence guvsujca, 
intelieai. 

sIku, assimilo, conveniens sum, perfect middle oTyta, 
and iOiKcc: in like manner, e'attw, oXttoo, and soXttu, 
speravi: ^yco, facio, o^ycc, and Ho^yx, feci: the plu- 
perfect of which receives an augment in the middle, 
as we shall more particularly observe in the 20th rule. 

S. They resolve »] into £« ; as ciyvvfAi, or olyco,frango, 
aor. l._ ?^«, Att. sagflf; whence no^U^xv, fxgerunt, 
John xix. 33. ol^u, placeo, perfect middle %,.and toc^x, 
participle IMg, &c. 

3. They change the augment of the perfect As and 
jUEintOf*; AtiCw, sumo, AeAixpa, and elxntpoij sumpsi: /*£*- 
^ojw«r sortior, ^ifAa^y^otx, e^y^si^i^oci ; from whence comes 
£ffjt,oc^lJt.iifr!j fattim. 

ANNOTATION, 
lihe Attics also join sometimes the syllabic e to verbs beginning 
with a or w, though they have no temporal augment. 

^^ia/f meiOf perfect «^*jxa, Att. la^viKx; from whence comes 
IwKfwxa, immifiM, in Aristophanes. 
£/^M, pellof aor. 1. ^ua-x, Att. eW», middle u^dfAViff eua-oiiAw, 

Rule 



Pres. Com. Perf. 

if-»^&;, contendOf Ti^DcXf 

ayu^Cfjf CongregOf yiys^KX, 

oK-?\.iif, perdo, Perf. Mid. uh<x, 



Of the Attic Augment, 113 

Rule XVII. 
Of the attic reduplication in the perfect. 
tV/icn a verb begins with a short, or zvith o, g, the 
Attics add the twojirsf letters of the present to the perfect* 
Examples. 
When a verb begins with a short, or with either of the 
two short vowels, o, £, the common perfect is Atticized 
by receiving the two first letters of the present ; as 

Att. Perf. Pas. Perf. 

l^"n§iKX, l^Yiqiatxxi, 

ay-'nys.^'KXy xy-'nyB^y..xi, 
oX-ojT'.x. 

ANNOTATION. 

'H[/,vu, cadof inclinOf is also re-duplicated, but changes ^ into e, 
because this reduplication ought always to be short, making 
y)lj.vKXf ^[A-niAVKx, according to the grammarians. 

Rule XVIII. 

The third syllable of the attic perfect made short. 

If the Attic perfect has more than three syllables, the 
third is made short, by changing a long HjOXvcI into a 
short one, and by dropping e in the diphthongs st, £u, or u 
in 01, ov. 

Examples. 

If the Attic perfect should chance to have more than 
three syllables, the third syllable is always shortened, 
by changing n and w into their corresponding short 
vowels £, 0,'and rejecting the prepositive of the diph- 
thongs ei, IV, or the subjunctive of e*, ou ; as for in- 
stance. 



Pres. 


Com. Perf. 

TjXlJKX, 


Att. Perf. 

aX-nXsKXf 


molo. 


aXt\<pcjf 
17k£v9m, 


Vl^UTIOKX, 
V)X£l(Px, 

'yjXsvy.x, 


E^v)porio}cx, 

xXriKi^x, 

tXv)XvxXf 


i?iterrogo, 

imgo.. 

venio. 




"KTOl'lAXKX, 
mUKX, 


lrriroixxy.x, 

aKV)KOXf 


- paro, 
audio* 



ANNOTATION. 

We must except lfEiJ&^, Jirmoy licereo, which makes r'^f/xa, a;nd 
lf*5^E<Ka, l^§E<«r/Aa/, I^v5^£<5«, without shortening the third syllable, to 
distinguish it from \^^^rA.x of the verfci l^tfa;, contendo. 

The Ionics use also sometimes this sort of reduplication, in verbs 
beginning with a< ; as xi^ka^ capiOf al^-nyix, h.^x'^^m-x ; whence ayx^xi^ 
^wuf, in Herod, qui laurea Juit donatus in certnminibus* Concern- 
ing iJ^Jexflt and a7»7yo;^a, see the resolution of verbs. Book v. 

Q Rule 



}H BoaK III. Of Ver^s. 

Rule XIX. 
Of the plu-perfect of those same verbs. 
The plu-perfect of those ^ei^bs, except lxi\)^(a3 admits 
moreover of a temporal augment. 
Examples. 
This reduplication remains in the plu-perfect Attic ; 
but then the first vowel is changed to make, more- 
over, a temporal augment ; as, 
ay^iyf^jca, congregaviy ") 

and > ^y%ys§yjiy, 

eyviys^xXf excitavif ) 

axriKoXf aiidivif m'nKofiv* 

We must except IaeuO&j, venio, EAi^Auxa, l\nX^xuv : and 
in the middle, iXriXw^Mj lAtjAuOf*!' ; ever preserving s in 
the first syllable. 

Rule XX. 
Of plu-perfects augmented in the second syllable. 

Some Attic plu-perfect shave the augment in the second 
sy liable f aSj *iok7ra, IooXttu]/ ; to^yoc, lu^ysivl hmXf Icaytui/, 
Examples. 
Some preterites of the middle verb having taken a 
syllabic augment, according to the Attic form, re- 
ceive also a temporal augment in the second syllable 
of the plu-perfect, by a similar analogy to that of the 
verbs of the 12th rule, p. 10/. 

"^EXtt©, spero, perfect middle oXttx ; Att. ioXTta, ; 
plu-perfect luKirs^v : s^yw, facio, lo^yoc, lu^ynv : « fKW, 
assi?nilo, or similis sum, iomu, IwKCiv : instead of saying 
roATTfik, rio^yHv, >)o/h£jv, with the temporal augment on 
the first syllable, like those of the preceding rule. 
Rule XXI. 
Of the Ionic augment. 

1 . The Ionics give also to the aorists the reduplication 

of the perfect : 

2. Which continues the same in the plu-perfect, with^ 

out any further augment. 

Examples. 
1. The Ionics use sometimes in the aorists the re- 
duplication of the perfect, and particularly in the se- 
. § cond; 



{)f the Ionic Augment. 115 

■cond ; and then this reduplication continues in all the 
iTioods ; as nociAvo^y laborOy ixoi[AOp, KkocfAou : %a^w, recedo, 
sXo^^ovjMixjscSov: Tujcw, liesy ch. apparOy 'irvKov, riTvaov, ill 
the infinit. tbtvubTv : Sxtu, disco, Uxovy Siiocou : ^k^tttw, 
prehendoy E/Aa^n-ov, ^iiaoi^tcov : t«^w,^ extendo, 'IrKyov, 
rkocyov. Which continues in the other moods, as we 
shall see hereafter. 

Likewise in the middle verb ; >.ocy.^oiv(a, capio, iKutov, 
Middle, Ixoe^tl^m, and KsxuQ6ji/,nu, accept : tI^ttw, delecto, 
rtrpt^TToy^rw : Tfu^w, Struo, Terv^op,nv I •sruvOotvo/xatj or 'sn^^o^ 

fji.ut, audiOf sciscitor, ztsttv^oimvh/. 

Which happens even to verbs in p ; zs aUTiw^ty audi, 
for jtXudi, imper. from >tXu/iA», audio. 

This reduplication is sometimes also in the future ; 
as zrs7nU(ruy Hom. for -nrtOW, from -sriOew, conjido, credOy 
oJ)sequor : jusjwt'gerai, Hesych. from /w/yw, or pyyujwt, 
misceo, commisceo. 

They also in some instances repeat the two first letters 
of the present in the aorists, in the same manner as the 
Attic perfect above mentioned, Rule xvii. as u^o^^ovy 
-f?, 's, Luci. formed from ol^ov, without an augment, 
instead of ?^oi/, from the verb al'^w, to carry or take 
mmy ; or from a^«, to jit or to accommodate, 

^, The Ionics are sometimes satisfied with this re- 
duplication in the plu-perfect, without requiring ano- 
ther syllabic augment ; as Ksud^yinv for lycsyidc^ycuvj from 

XH^w, tondeo : nh^iXiMro for he^sfJi^sXicoTO, from ^-SfxtXiooixou, 
jundor, arts : Kt^u^mscroiv for UB)(cc^r\K£(rocV} from xfa^m, 
.cvado, projiciscor : r£rv(p£(racv, Herod, for IreTvtpsKroiv, from 
TuV7w, *verberOy where moreover there is a shortening 
of the penultima, -t^xv for -moiVy which we shall men- 
tion hereafter, 

Poetic observations. 

The poets give sometimes to the plu-perfect, only the augment ofihe 
imperfect ; as ihy^rofor I^e^ekto, susceperat,yrow ^t'x^Ac*'? accipio. 

Sometimes they neglect giving it any augment at all; as'hvrofor 

^iXyre, solus eiat, from Kvw : jSAoJto, percussus erat, for ^i^Xyitoy 

from 0ixxu, which follom ^Kiuy -yiffu : aXrofor ^Aro, desiluerat, 

from uWoi^xi^ salio ; where there is a smooth breathing, after the 

Molicform, instead of a rough one. Hence comes the compound iVaAro, 

Jhe same with ^Ato ; iut %»?s7ofor -:?? 7r«^T0; is from vrfH^Mf vibro. 

iVhen 



116 Book III. 0/ Verbs. 

When the augment is rejected in tlie indicalivey it is also rejected in. 
the other moods, and particularly in the infinitive and participles ; as 
tve shall see hereafter. 

Obsewations on the Persons of the Dual Number. 

XSEFORE we proceed any further, we think it 
proper to speak here of the terminations of the dual, 
which we left out in the table of conjugations, pur- 
posely for the conveniency of beginners : but they 
may be learned here with ease ; besides, they will be 
found in the enumeration of each tense in particular, 
which we intend to give in the next chapter. 
Rule XXII. 
Of the terminations of the dual number. 
1 . The active dual has no first person ■: to its tenses in 
CO, as likewise to the perfect , it gives the termina- 
tion rov and rov : 
S. Its other tenses terminate in rov a72d rw : 
S, The passive has a first pe7^son, which ends in ^t^oy^ 

and adds to rov and mv of the active, 
4. // chajiges the smooth consonant of the third person 
siitgidar into an aspirate ; and prefixes a a- to 
0, coming from r pure in the singular » 
Examples, 
1. The dual wants the first person in the acti^ve 
voice, which comprises also the passive aorists, and 
terminates the other two in rov, in the tenses in «, viz. 
in the present, and the two futures, with the whole sub- 
junctive mood, and also in the perfect indicative. . 

£. The other tenses, viz. the imperfect, the plu- 
perfect, the two aorists (both active and passive) and 
the optative, make toV iii the second person of this 
number, and t',iv in the third. 

3. The passive dual has a first person, which ends 
in juaOov, and forms the other two in 0, making Ooy, hv^ 

~ where the active has tjv, rov ; and 0«V; hv^ for rov^ rnv, 
of the active. • 

4. But if the third person singular, which is always 
in rat or TO, and on which this passive dual depends, 

happens 



Of the Dual- Number. 117 

iiappens to have a smooth consonant befoi-e r, it must 
be changed into an aspirate before this in the dual, 
because a smooth consonant cannot precede an aspi- 
rate, as we have observed Book I. Chap. vii. But if 
the T be pure, then a r must be added to 0. All this 
will be made clearer by the following table. 

TABLE of the Dual Number. 



For the 
ACTIVE. 

yvifluf -6/?, -£/, 
Dual. rv'TrlsroVf rvTrlsrov. 

ry\I/«, -«/?, -£/. 
i3ual. TVi\/troVf Tv-^tTov, 



rviru/f 'Ek;^ •£<, 
Dual. rvjTUToy, rvTitirov. 



rsrvpac, -ocs, 'Sf 
I)ual. nrvipxToVf tov. 

rvvluf -^<, -y, 
Dual. Tvjrltirov, 'TOV. 



Tenses ending in ov, ov, 

PASSIVE. 

The Pbesent. 

rv7rl6[ji.iQoVf rvTfl.^vQovy rvirlfaOcv, 

1. Future. 

rv'pQ'na-oiJi.ocif ->j, -erai, 
Tyip0*3(To^£0ov, 'Qna-ecrQoVf 'ta^ov* 

2. Future. 

rvirncrofjLoctf -»), -sraw. 

The Perfect. 

rsrviAixocty —^aif 'irroii* 

The Subjunctive. 



For the Tenses ending in ov and »ii/. 

ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

The Imperfect. 

zTVTtloVf 'ts, -s, IrvjrloiJLWf -a, -«fo. 

Dual. WviiltroVf IrviilhyiVt Irvifloi/.sQoV) irvirlsa-Qov^ 'iaQfiv* 

The Plu-perfect. 

lr^rv<psiVf -EiSy -sty lrsrv(AfjLviv, -"^Of ttJo. 

Dual. irsTixpuroyy rnv» Irsry/A/xeSov, -Irhv^QoVf 'V<pQyiVt 

1. Aorist. 

2. Aorist. 



trv\^at 



'»<;, 



Dual. lri/'>\/oirovp -xj/arijy 



EryTTOV, -EJ, -5, 

Dual. iTvTTEToy, -Er«v. 



.Dual. rvirloiToVf •^irm. 






Optative. 

rvTrloif^Wt '010, 'Otro, 

chap. 



1 ]$ £ooi< III. Of Verbs. 

CHAP. VII. 
Of each Tense in particular, with its Dialects.. 
And Jirst, of the Present and Imperfecta 
Present. 

r rimluf, ^Iffltisy rvirlzit verhsro, 'as, "at. 
Sing. -< Dor. - - - Tywls?, tv't/is, 

DuaL ------ TuTrlsrov, rv'TtleroVf t)erberaiiSf -ant, duo, 

pj C rvTrliiJLsvt rvitlsrsf rvriaa-i, -amus, atiSf ant, 

' jDor.ruVJo/xafj - - - rvi/lovrt, like the dat. sing, of 

et rv'Trloiffi. [the participle. 

Observations on the Dialects. 

This Doric analogy of changing /xsv into iJLs,q in the plural is general, 
Jot all the other tenses of all verbs ; as in the aorist, IryvJ/a/t/te?, Iru' 
voiA^SfJrom 'whence seems to be derived the French aorist^ nous allames, 
nous batimes, nous fimes. 

The third person plural is alvoays like the dative plural of the par- 
ticiple of the same tense, rvifi8<7t, verberant or verberantibus : hut 
the Dor. make it like the dative singular, rvfrlovn, verberant or ver* 
beranti. Which is also general for all sorts of tenses and verbs. 

They likewise change w into oi ; ruA^tf verberant ; rcH^oiffi, 
stillant, &c. 

Imperfect. 

hrvvlov, trvnlts, ztvifIs, verberabam, ^as, -at* 
Sing. "^ Ion. tuVJov, rt/VIe?, rvffltv, 

.Poet, rv'fflea-x.oy, VvTrlscrntSf tuVJso-ke. 
Dual. - - - - - - Irvtrlsroyf Irvnlhviv, verberabatis, 'ant, duo, 

pi J Irv'TtlofAtv, Irv'jrlsrs, irvirloVf -amus, atis, ant* 

' (^ Dor. rvTrlia^o^i, Poet. rvTrlea^ov, ^(ppt. Irpirloacci, 

Observations on the Dialects. 

The Ionics and Poets follow in this tense, and in the aorists, a par' 
ticular analogy, forming it from the second person, by cutting off the 
augment, and adding kov to the end; s-rvTrlei, rvTrlsanov, -es -b, plur» 
'o^Atv and -ov, as ma'y be seen above, 

^ The second person plural is not in use ; but the others are all suffl" 
ciently authorized, though the frst person plural is more scarce. From, 
^"x°^t «^Z^?> 5;^£?''ov, (rejecting the / which makes the augment) habe- 
bam, Od, v. h'xeo-Kss, nabebas, II, g. z^ca-aiv, habebat, ibid, vtKei rx^ty 
for l»/xa///tEy, vincebamus, Od, x, 'csMotaMi, saltabant, Od, %J/. ^ 

But from zt<7roy, -is, is formed siVcojtov, dicebam, retaining the aug^ 
ment, which it commonly preserves in the other moods, uit^nKi, S^c, « 

This analogy is extended also to the passive ; ryTrlso-xo/Aijv, -», -sro, 
verberabar, -aris, -atur, 8^c, And it is also found in the circumfex 
verbs, as well as in those in y^i, but always shortening the pemdtima ; 
IWms, faciebas, x?o*Vw» ; ilihf, ^^bas, iih^m, Sfc, 

CHAP* 



{i 



Of the First Future. 1)9 

CHAP. VIIL 

Of the First Future, and First Aorist, 

Rule XXIII. 

Formation of the First Future. 

1. The first future is generally in - - c-co: 

2, But |3w, -srw, (pUj zflojy make - - - - 4^^ * 

5, yw, xw, xTWj 7nake -------gw: 

4. ^w, (To-w, tIw, sometimes follow the latter. 

Examples. 

• X HE first future ought to terminate in ^a; it 
is formed naturally from the present, by putting 
a 0" before w : r/w, honoro ; tjVw, honoraho. But verbs 
in <r«^ Tw, ^w, cast off their characteristic, to make room 

for (T ; i^(a, canOy oIc-m : duvrca, perficio, dvvo-co : zrXri^u^ 

impleo, zsrXr,<T(a : this is done in order to soften the 
sound, which would be too harsh were we to say, 

■srAJida-o?, (JtJ'crw, &C. 

2. Verbs in j3w, ttw, ©w, or ur7« (for t here goes for 
nothing) form the future in i}/w, which is almost the 
same as if they made them in pc-w, xro-w, <pcu; according 
to the relation which ij/i bears to these three mutes, |S, 
^, (p. But because the letter o- is seldom written after 
P or (p, these two were changed into their smooth cor- 
respondent w; and a new character, 4/, was invented 
purposely for zjo-, 

/3 ?i£iCw, r TAfi-vJ/w, /o anoint, 

Z '''^'^"* \ First Fut. >].. )tsV^4'*'. J«^^%^^- 

S. Verbs in yw, xw, p^«, ktw, form the first future in 
gw, which is equivalent to y<rw, ko-w, xF^y according to 
the relation which g bears to these three, y, >«, jc? ^ 
may be seen in the following examples. 





First Fut. f. 

{^rk^u, to be delivered. 

4. Verbs in ^w and o-c-w, or Att. tI«, sometimes form 
the future like the last mentioned ; as r*'^«, pungo^ 
r/^w: o^va-a-iOf fodio, o^v^u: or else they follow the 
general rule, making o-w; as 9f«^w, rf?C6>, <p^cc(r(a: "urXoic-trcag 
fi«fgo, 7ff\sl^(a, &c. 

Rule 



120 Book JIL O/" Verbs. 

Rule XXIV. 

Exception for verbs that have a liquid before «. 

1, Fei'bs ending in Aw, jww, v(a,, ^w, form the first future \ 
like the -present, except only that they make the 
penultima shorty and circumflex the last syllable, 
J2. hut the Molics, even in the above verbs ^ and espe- 
daily those in ^w, use the nHy^a. 

1 Verbs in Aw, juw, i/w, ^w, form their first future also 
in Aw, ^w, vw, ^w, the same as their present; only they 
require a circumflex on the last syllable, and always 
shorten the penultima, either by casting off the sub- 
junctive if there be a diphthong, or the second conso- 
nant, if there be two: thus (TTni^bo^semifjo, makes o-Trr^w, 
seminabo : and \|^aAAw, cano, makes if/aAw, canam, 

2. But the termination c-oo was heretofore general for 
these verbsj as well as for the ixst : wherefore the JEo- 
lies still use the o-, especially in verbs in ^ w, rejecting 
nevtiHheless the subjunctive voxvel, if there be a diph-- 
thong ; as o-Trf/'^w, fut, (rm^crco, seminabo : o^u, o^o-w, <^c. 

, This future is conjugated like the present; but it 
admits of some different dialects, as we shall show 
presently, 

F I R s T F u T u R E. 

rv-^u, rv^'sis, tJ4/£/, verhh'aho, •his, 'hit. 
Dor. ft;\}/ft/, 'tiSy 'z7. 

Dual -f " ' TyxJ/srov, To4^Tov, •hitis, -unt, duo* 

* \ Dor. " - TV-^eTroVf -tTrov, 

pi r Ty4/o/x£V,, Ti;-4/fT£, r-'-^acrif •imilS, -itiSf -tint, 

* \ Dor. -£/>t£y et 'i:viMs,~] -sm,]] 5vf/ et thrt.'] 

Observations on the Dialects. 

The Dorics alxuays circurnflex the first future^ in the same manner 
■as the verbs in Aw, /[aw, vo/, f^;, are circumflexed in the common tongue. 

They also terminate the third jjerson plural in ovrt, as in the present 
rC^oyrt verberabunt ; besides the two abovemeniioned, viz, Zvn and 

They likewise change cru into |w circumflex ; om^l^oj Ivti^i^Z, expror 
babo, for InihicxM : likewise xAalo;, from xXoia-Ai, claudam, for xXticup 
coming from KXsicOf claudo : tohere there is moreover an a for an sr, ' 

The poets often reduplicate cr in the future purposely to lengthen the 
s^llahley and not only hercy but also in the middle verb ; as (p^<x<r<Tt» and 
<^^»(7(rofAxty dicam, from <p^a^M, dico. And all those dialects ar^ 
equally re^^ived inthefrst aorist^ xvhich depends upon this tense. 

Rule 



Sing. [ 



Of the First Futurii:. ^2^ 

Rule XXV. 

Of A^erbs in w pure, that cast off o-. 

Some ^'erfo in (^ pure neglect to take a (r'in' their future. 

Examples. 

Some verbs in w pure are without a o- in their future? 

especially among the poets; 2i^yim,fundo'^ p^suVw, and 

p^fuw, fundam : Km, cuharefacio, tut. xejw, from whence 

comes •nocrciy.iUn, cubitum ibitis, Od. n.yisicavj cubiturus, 

ibid. Aratus has made use of xf/w in the present, which 

we never see in Homer: xAf/w, laudo ; ycXsiu, laudabo. 

Ego te laudabo per immeyisam terram. 

Likewise i^avvoo, perjiciam : l^uWt for s^uVao-t, distrahent : 
Siu, invenio, in Alcseus, fut. §m, inveniam, in Horn, 
from whence comes W^t?, invenies; Ho^xiv, inveniemus ; 
Hin, invenietis, in the same author. But <re«, opus habeo, 
always makes hn<TOi. 

Rule XXVI. 
Of polysyllables in /^w, which also reject o-. 

1. Polysyllables in i^w, 7'eject a- in their futufr, and 

circu77iflex the last syllable : 

2. The same happens sometimes to >verbs, whose future 

is in ecrw or da-u. 

Examples. 

1. Verbs of many syllables in /^w, cast off o- from 
their future, and circumflex the last syllable ; as voixf^ca, 
puto ; fut, i/o/xtVw and i/o/xiw, putabo : (p^ovri^coy curam gero, 
(p^ovTicru and (p^ovnu, Ihese futures are very common, 
and, by reason of the circumflex accent, are conju- 
gated like the second future; whereof presently. 

In like manner for the middle; ^ci^i^u, vado ; ^ocSt- 
coiActi and |3a^i8/>c^*, vadam: ayuvi^o[A.ui, certo, pug no ; 
dym((roiJt.oHf and dycavi^i^xi, pugnabo. Which is also to 
be observed in regard to the other moods ; as <r^fT«- 
fiero-O^i, Dion. Cass, for o-^fTf^/Vfo-^a;, suum facere, to 
appropriate the future infinitive of <r<pfTff /^o/xa*. 

^. The same happens sometimes to futures in fo-w: 
-Sfr^oo-a/xcpiiw, insuper induo, fut. '3r^o<ra,u(pifVw, and tj^^oo-- 
flt^^iw, -fK, -f?: '^i(a^ fundo, fut. ;^f&), fundo^ Joel ii. 
Ixp^Ew diTQ T^ Uv£V(Aecr6g f*«^ effundam de Spiritu meo, 

R As 



1^^ Book III. O/" Verbs. 

As also to those in aVw, coming from a polysyllable 
in cc^ca, or in aw : l^sxdta, or l^iXc^vuca, cwpciio, Flit. Jgg- 
Aacrw an^l i^sXuj, Aristoph. -cr^iocu). emo. zr^tditrco and 
Tsr^iw: hoi^iQu^ca, transmitto, ^nxQi^ocaru anfi pw Plato. 
And these are conjugated like the circumflex verbs 
according to the rule of contraction : thus, Iaw, Ixag 
Ixm, agitabo, -is^ -it, Sec. on l^ya? riv yriv, Gen. iv. quan-^ 
do operabtris terrain ; and otiiers of the same sort. 

ANNOTATION. 

Hereto we may also add the verbs in hu^ fut. oVfc>, or uaui for 
which we have the authority of Thucydides, as in the speech of the 
Plataeans, lib. iii. n^o? ^e, yCj 7^v> «v y\ yiKtv^t^M^fica-t ot "EXX^jves-, 5tf- 

TOis zxair^ttis rwv £o-acxjj(,£vav >y ytriaociiruv <x<Pact^'»Tecr9e,,&C.^ Besides f CCtTl 
you enslave that very Land "coheTe the Greeks Jirst exerted their liberty f 
tioiU you see laid waste those temples, where the vows they offered up to 
the gods, rendered them victorious over the Medes ? can you abolish 
the rites of your ancestors, and of those who laid the foundation of this, 
edifice'^ Here we see l^y///,Sr5 instead of I^vi^Jjets, as he said before 
^«Awo-Er£ ; and afterwards d^oii^na-icrOs, in the future. 

Rule XXVII. 

Future in cuVw, or auVw. 

1. The foUoxmig *verbSj -urXsco, pica^ p^£«, -srvew^ ^m, 

viw, make the future in suVw. 

2. JBut aXcciooj and xatw, take oiva-u. 

Examples* 

1. Dissyllables in sea take a u in the future, after the 
^olic form ; -zs-Aew, namgo ; piw, fluo ; x^^i fundo ; 
Tsyviu, spiro ; in the future -stAeuVw, peuVw, &c. Seethe. 
resolution of verbs, Rule xxxii. 

0£w, curro, makes S-iuVw, middle B-iva-ofj^ui^ and in 
Thucyd. 3-fu(r8/Aai; i/sw, for naio, to swim, makes vfuVw 
and WW, according to Eustath. and for l^ec|, ifo^2», it 
only makes ww. 

^. After the same Jiolic form, aXoctu, Jteo, makes 
xXoc^(7ca ; and nd^o, or )ta/w, uro, x^uuVw. 

Rule XXVIII. 
Of futures that receive an aspirate. 
Git'e an aspirate to these, four futures, H^v, Sfi^u>y 
^u4^«, and^^ii,(a. 

Exam- 



()f the First AoRisT. 12!3 

Examples. 
The four futures mentioned in the rule require a rough 
breathing, though their present tense be without it. 

"Ex^^, habeo, %^u. T^e^o;, nutrio, ^^s^^a. 

Tvpu, accendOf ^v^^u, T^iy^u^ ctirro, S^fsfo;. 

ANNOTATION. 

Some grammarians pretend f that 'i^oi takes an aspirateto distinguishit 
Jronie^u, extra, rcA/'c^ has a smooth breathing .''^v-^Uf accendamfto dis- 
tinguish it from tJ4/&/, verberabo ; aiid ^fevj/w, nutriam, to distinguish 
itjrom r^i-^b), vertam : these differences are proper to he taken notice 
of\ though they do not hold in %;|w, which has no other opposite fcord. 

The true reason therefore of this change is this : the present of these 
^erbs has a smooth breathing, or a lenis, only because of the other aspi' 
rate that follovos ; ijohich beingleft out in the future, they resume the 
rough breathing iJohich was natural to them. This is still plainer in 
the perfect, xiihere,for example^ the active has rh^£(p<Xf and the middle 
r£T§o<px, with a r in the penultima, by reason of the tp that follows : 
whereas the passive has rs^a/x/xa/, with a 9, because it is not followed 
by another aspirate. 

There are several barytons which borrow the future of circum- 
flex verbs ; ^sXc^, volo, hsXyia-co, as if it came from ^sXew ; ^^Ko^xi, 
volo, ^uKriiToiAxi, as if it came from ^nXsofAxi, and the hke ; of which 
we shall treat elsewhere. For it is common with the Attics to 
change the barytonous verbs into circumflex. 

Some have both futures ; as (BaXXco, jacio, (3xXa, and ^ocX-hcru : 

y(a,i^(iJi gaudeo, ^oc^m, and y^oc^ria-u. 

And frequently they form a new verb from a regular future ; as 
o't'ojffero ; aUaj^feram ; o'/a-a/jfero; whence oiaevi,ferte, II. A. and the 
like ; of which we shall give further examples, Book v. Chap. i. 

Rule XXIX. 
Formation of the first aorist. 
Thejirst aorist is formed from the frst future, by changing 
« into a, and taking the augment of the imperfect. 

Examples. 
Thefirstaoristisformed from the firstfuture, changing 
w into a, and taking the augment of the imperfect; as, 

t/w, honorOf snov, rlau, snc-x, 

rvTrlcj, verb er Of e'rvnlov, ru-vj/fy, iVy-vJ/a. 

zXttI^CO, SperO, ojA-TT/^oy, IX-TT/W, rthlftax. 

So that the characteristic, and the penultima of this 
tense, are generally the same as those of the future ; 
and it is conjugated thus ; 

First Aorist. 

c- f ervl/cc, BTv-^x?, hv^s, verberavi 'isti 'it, 

^* (^iEol. Tt'-J/aaxoVj -Kss-, -xc, ' 

Dual Irv-^ocrov, £rv%|/»To)Vj 'istiSf 'Crunt, duo. 

pi f erv-^aixtv, Irv-^urt, £ru4/«v, 'Zmus, -istis, -erunt* 

Rule 



1 



l^i Book III. Of Verbs. 

Rule XXX. 

Exception for the penultima. 
Verhs in Xu, /aw, m, ^w, require the penultima of this 
aorist akvays long : hejice the s of the future is 
changed into si ; and the Attics change a into >i. 
Examples. 
This tense, as the etymologist observes, always re- 
quires its penultima long, where there is never a o-.. 
Therefore in verbs ending in Xw, /^w, vu, ^coj where the 
penultimaof the futureis short, thisaorist makes itlong^ 
by adding a t to f, in order to form a diphthong : thus, 

a-trsl^Uf seminOj cm^uj lairzi^x. 

^EiAUf cedifico, hf^ai, shifxtx. 

The three common vowels, a^ t, u, remain, accord- 
ing to Sylburgius ; but being short in the future, they 
are long in this aorist. Thus we say, 

■>l^a,XXw, cano, -vJ/aAo;, evJ/aXas. 

^ f^iacivuf . JcedOf iji.i(xvu>, Ifjiiavx* 

^otivcof tuceo, (pCCVAl, SiptXViX. 

X^'lVUj - judicOf H^tVM, BK^lVa. 

fj.oXvvu}, COnspurCOf iA.oXvvu, li^oXvyac. 

But here the x^ttics change a into >?, saying ^nXocy 
cecini, for ^axa : l^j^tmuy for 'iij^tuvu^ fwdavi. Whereto 
we may refer iynfj^K, from yajo^w, for yxiAica, uxorem duco. 

Rule XXXL 

Exception in regard to the characteristic of the first 

aorist. 

1 . This anrist sometimes takes the characteristic of the 

present: 

2. Sometimes that of the perfect : 

S. And sometimes it has 7%ot they of the future. 
Examples. 

There are three exceptions in regard to the cha- 
racteristic of this tense. 

1. Some verbs take it from the present; \viyv.(^,ferOy 
TiUByxoCf (ion. Ii/fixw, rjvsijioc :) eVw, dicOj bTttoc, In like 
manner x^^> fundo, ^x^ot,, {MsA, x^^^> 9C^'J« ^^^^ 
among the poets, o-fuco, agiio, 'ia-iva, : dXivca, vito, viXivoc : 
y.i(a, or xs/w, Cubo, iKtia, : axew, OF dyaiuty mcdeory sano^ 

msK!^; whence comes olnsiiAm^j in Horn. 

2. Others 



Of /te Second Future. 1Q5 

S. Others take it from the perfect ; w, or 1V*> ^itto, 
?«a : S-fo), or ri^Yiixi, pono, s^mot': ^ou, or ^i^cajji,;, do, UcoTux: 
and these three are seldom met with but in the indi- 
cative, as we shall further observe when we come to 
the verbs in ^wi. 

3. Others cast off the <r of the future, according to 
the analogy abovementioned ; as xxica, or xa«, uro, 
accendo, imoc : Aaw, mdeo, 'ixna. : Jsw, invenio, thoc, in 
Hesych. 

Hereto tve may also add tiiqia^from whence comes the middle I'n^iu^viVf 
cmi, instead oJXit^ia.Qa.iKmt unless voe choose to say it is a syncope. 

Observations on the dialects. 

In the other verbSf when thepenidtima happens to he shorty the poets 
repeat the following consonant, to make it long ; as rsXiu, iaa, IreXsa-a-x^ 
perfeci : kxKsu, iKuXscrax, vocavi, or, without the augment, Koixeira-x, 

We sometimes meet with the third person plural of this tense in aa-i) 
Me thai of the perfect ; s'/^cca-i, Aristoph. in Nebul. y?jr cl'lav, cesse- 
vmnt, from lUa, cedo : and again, s'i%acrtv litir^i-^^xi a-if in Avib. for 
v)X9oVf venerunt. Though others are of opinion, that this is the third 
person plural of the perfect, by changing x into |. 

And on the contrary, the third person plural of the perfect in xa-i^ 
is sometimes formed in uv : '^^(pqix.ocvyfor ■CTE^f/Wo-/, Lycophr. liorrue- 
r\xni,from (p^ia-a-u, horreo. 

The other dialects have been already explained in the imperfect and 
future, and are sufficiently marked in the conjugation of this tense* 



CHAP. IX. 

Of the Second Future, and Second Aorist, 

Rule XXXII. 

Formation of the second future. 

1. The second future is formed from the present, and 

requires a circumfleoc. 

2. It makes its penult ima short, either hy dropping a 

consonant; or - 

3. By changing n, <a, as also on, ocv, into a, : 

4. Or by losing « in si, eu. 

5. Dissyllables change the ? of the frst future into oc 

in the second, whenever there is a liquid before 
or after the t : 

6. But the other verbs retain this s : 

7. To which you 7nUStjoin Aeyw, ^Xsyw, ^Kiir^a^ 

Exam- 



1^6 Book III. Q/^ Verbs. 

Examples. 

1. X HE second future is formed from the present, 
having the same penultima, characteiistic, and ternii- ■ 
nation : but it requires always a circumflex on its 
last syllable ; as rica, honor o ; ri<a', honor abo, 

2. The penultima pf this tense is coqimonly short; 
hence, if thene be two consonants, that which follows 
the ch'aracteristic is rejected ; as tuVIw, "verbero ; rvTru, 
'verherabo: ^dwa, digitis pulso ; ^ocXco, pulsabo : rifAm, 
seco ; T<y/>tco, secabo. For in verbs in ttIw, xtw, \f.m^ the 
first consonant is the characteristic. 

3. And if there be long vowels, or diphthongs^ 
they are changed in the following manner: 

5j "5 fAiiCiw, capio, XocQuy capiam. 

u f J. } r^'Jijuj comedo, r^otyu, comedam, 

ex.1 C j >c«/a/, uro, Kaco) uram. 

av J l^xsavu, sedo, zaoiWf sedabo, 

4. The diphthongs s* and fu drop their prepositive 
i : thus, 

sx; into y (pivycui ./^g"20, (pvyu ', l^tvyco, rucfOy l^vyu, 

5. Except that dissyllables change the f of the first 
future into a in this second future (whether it comes 
from the diphthong n in the present or not) as often 
as there is a liquid before or after the f : 

Before ; as 

-crXejcw, plico, fut. 1. 'sjXs^co, fut. 2. -ayXaxw : 
x.XiifiiOfJ'uror, fut. 1. xXenJ/w, fut, 2. nKcciru. 

After ; as in all verbs in Aw, /^w, va, ^w : 

G'Tttl^u, semino, iwt. \, o-irt^u, fut. 2, o-'ffx^&i, seminabo : 
teXXw, mitto, contraho, fut. 1. rAft/, fut. 2. toiKu : 

^f£/x<y, CUrrOf fut. 1, ^§s/:>tA;, fut. 2. ^^at/M,*;. 

And even in some others ; as ^I^Jtw, "jyzWec?, (^o^^^cw. See 
the rule following. 

6. But the other verbs retain their b, whether they 
be dissyllables, when they have never a liquid ; as 

rkaf pario, fut. 1. ri^u, fut. 2. riKu : 

Or whether they be trisyllables, even with a liquid ; as 

atysi^co, congregOj fut. 2. oi^y^u^ congregabo : 
3^EiAw, debeo, fut. 2. o^tXaJ, debebo. 

7. Hereto 



of the Second Future. 127 

7. Hereto we must add these three dissyllables^ 
which retairr the s, though preceded by a liquid, 

1. Fut. 2. Flit. 

X^yu/, dico ; Ae'Iw, Ksyw, dicam. 

(pKiy<at ardeo ; (pxi^oj^ <p?ieyv, ardebo* 

^KiitUi video ; ^xi\l^u, ^Uirsi/f mdeho. 

\ This future is conjugated thus : 
Second Future. 

Qj J rvirut rvrrsTs, rvfftT, verierabOf -iSf -itr 

°' [^lon. rvjTsojf rvTrisiq, rvjrssi. 

■Pk. 1 r - - - rvjfsTrov, rvireTrov- 

Dual. •< j^^ , ' , 

[_lon. - - - rvTTcsrov, rv7nzrov» 

f rywS/Afv, rwtire, rvnacri, 

Plur. < Ion. rvTreofxtVf rviritrEf rviriacrt, 

(^Dor. rv'TT^iA.tSi - - - TyTrSvr/, and rvnivai* 

ANNOTATION. 

The grammarians tell us, that Te/xvw, seco, makes te/aw and rx^u i 
but roc^Vi secahOi and the second aorist erocixovf come from ra/AW, 
Ion. and Dor. which Homer frequently makes use of. 

UK'^a-a-Uf percutio, meant of the body, makes rshi^yu, percutiamj 
whence comes the aorist iVx^jyov, and the passive sirX'^ynv: but meant 

of the mind, it makes -crXayftJ, sTrXxyov, I'ffXoiyioy. ^ 

The first and second future of verbs in Xu, i^co, vu, ^0, are ali]|||^, 

when there is no change in the penultima ; -^JixXV) -^ocXu, vl/aXaJ : 

\ but when the penultima happens to be changed, they are different ; 

i as a-TTsloUf fut, 1. (TTSS^U, fut. 2. fflKX^Uf &C. 

j Rule XXXIII. 

( Of the penultima of the second future long by position. 
\ Though the consonant that follows the characteristic 
\ be rejected, yet, when it precedes, it is continued^ 
I Examples. 

\ Thouorh the consonant which follows the charac- 
i teristic, is cast oifin this tense, to shorten the penultima; 
:j as xAeW, xAaTTw, according to the preceding rule ; yet 
I that which precedes the characteristic remains, and then 
i the penultima is long by position ; as i/.d^Trluiyprehendo; 
(^(^'rru, prehendam: hsy3ica,fero; myKu, feram. 

In like manner, ,m^6«, ^nisto; -sr^jf^Ow, "vastabo: Ss^xu, 
video; ^oc^Ku, videbo : where e is changed into « by- 
reason of the liquid ^, according to the analogy of the 
preceding rule : and when the poets want to make it 
short, they have recourse to transposition ; S^ochm for 

ioi^KW ; zj^oi^ia for TETOi^Ow, &c. 

Rule 

t 



v^ 


2. Fat. 


Pies. 




2. Fut. 


necto, 


a<Pu. 


(Sa.'jflu, 


tin go i 


^a^fcJ. 


sepelio, 


ra(Pu, 


oqv'mUi 


lacerOf 


^^v<Pu. 


SUOy 


pX^AT. 


pimuf 


jaciOf 


hV^' 


fodio. 


o-)ix<pu. 









128 Book IIL Of Veiibs- 

RuLE XXXIV. 
Of verbs that change the characteristic of the jDresent* 

These verhs^ oIttIcc. (^cottIco, S-aTrlw, (J^uttIw, pdcTrla, pMw, 

(DiocTrlu, require an aspirate instead of a lenis, or 

smooth consonant in the second future: 
But xaXuVlw, jSxaVlw, and x^uVI^), take an intermediate 

instead of a Itnis ; 
And (Ti^.xi'xja, tj/u^^, take an intermediate instead of an 

aspirate. 

Examples. 
Several verbs. change also their characteristic in this 
second future. 
The following take an aspirate instead of a lenis : 

Pres. ~ - •" . 

These take an intermediate instead of a lenis : 

Pies. 2. Fut. 

yta.Kxj'mUi OCCulo, xacXvQw. 

^Kanflu, IcsdOi ^XocQu. 

yiqvTilui occulo, K^v^ut, occulam. 

And the following assume an intermediate in- 
stead of an aspirate : 

Pres. 2. Fut. 

4.'Jx^, refrigeroy -^vy^, 

ANNOTATION. 
The reason of these changes is obvious ; the two last verbs mahing |w 
in the first future^ and | havitig the potuer of a y, they retain this y in 
the second future, because (>f the affinity it has mth the first. And 
this analogy mil be further illustrated by the next rule. 

Thefiist seven having been formerly m (pw, ^ix(pM, S^c. and the other 

three in /Sw, /SXaCw, 8^c. they have taken a ts in the present^ instead qf^ 

- and (Pf merely because as a r voas inserted, these tivo letters could not go 

before it, for the reason alleged. Book I. Chap. vii. n. 6. So that as 

this T is lost in the secondfuture, they resume their natural characteristic. 

Rule XXXV. 

Of verbs in ^w or (to-w. 
Several verbs in ^w make the secondfuture in Jw ; as <pf «^«, 
(p^K^u : and others in o-o-w, making gw in the first 
future^ have y« in the second ; as o^v^ttu, o'^uyw. 

Exam- 



Of the Second Future. 129 

E X A M r L E s. 
Some verbs in ^w, or (T(ru, change also their cha- 
racteristic in this tense to shorten the penultirna : for 
as 5 is equivalent to S(f, taking the o- for the first future, 
they sometimes keep the (T for the second ; as 

<P^oi^Uf loquor, L fut. (p^oitra), 2. fut. (p^x^w. 

And sometimes making g« in the first future, and the 
g being equivalent to yo-, they retain the y only in the 
second; as 

o^v^ffUf Jbdio ; I. fut, o^v^, 2. fut. 6§vyu, Jodiam. 

ANNOTATION. 

Very few of those verbs have a second future. For from 'a'koca'/jui 

fingo, /or example, toe do not say 'ujKoi^u. Which is still more rare in 

polysyllables; as ^xll^u, gradior; (p^ovrl^u, considero; l^eWiw, re- 

migo; ryi^l^uy stabilio; ^vXoicrffsjy custodio; which are not to be 

found in the second future. And then, as there is only the first 

future in use, so there is only the first aorist. 

There are mo> cover several other verbs that want this tense ; as those 
in iu, with the polysyllables in avu, eww, uw, and v'w, and many others. 
For K§sa>, pulso, does not make k^ou : axtJw, audio, does not make 
uKQu, nor even tikoov, unless perhaps in verse : ^xffi'Kivu, regno, hath 
not Kxa-iKvov : nor zjxilivuy instituo, Iftoti^vov '. no more than IqvMi 
irruo, u^oov : nor tavu, cubo, txov ; and so for the rest. 

Observations on the dialects of the second future. 
The Ionics resolve the circumfiex of this future, both active and mid* 
die, as likewise the first future in Km, /aoJ, voJ, ^aJ. Wherefore they say, 
2. fut. rvrreuj rvitieis for rviru, -er? ; as we have observed above* 
The middle is TvrrsofjLXh •£*?' ^^ -sxi, for rvir^i^oct, -J, Sfd: likewise, 
2. fut. lAsvEu, (Mviei^i manebo,^r /xevaJ. 

This resolution of the diphthong is extended to all the moods ana 
participles, as also to the second aorist of the infinitive active, which is 
the same as future ; rvrreoiiAt, rvirhtv, rvneuv, Sfc. 

Rule XXXVI. 
Formation of the second aorist. 
The second aorist takes the augment of the imperfect, but 
the characteristic and penultirna of the second future. 

Examples. 
The second aorist follows the augment of the im- 
perfect, and is conjugated like it: but it takes the 
characteristic and penultima of the second future; as 

txjitlb), verbero, trvrflov ; rvnai, ervjtov. 

(P§oi(u, dico, s(p^ai^ov; (p^a^uy s(p^x'^ov. 

s"fE^w, verto, fVg«(?'ov; r^ix<p^, E-§a(pov. 

Though several verbs have this aorist, that are with- 
out a secoi^d future ; but then we must imagine one, 
in order to form the aorist. 

S This 



Sin^, I 



130 Book III. Of Verbs. 

This tense is thus conjugated: 
Second aorist. 
IrvTFovt h'rvviSf trvrre, verheravi, 'isii, 'iU 

Ion. rvTtsa-KoVf -£?, -e. 

Dual. - - - . - - - - BTvirBToVf IrvjrlrjjK^ 
C HTyVo/x£y, ervTTtrSf srvirov, 

. * j Ion. - - - - - .. rvvta-Mv* 

(^Bceot. - - - - - - ETy-coo-^aHf. ■ 

ANNOTATION. 

Sanclius in his Greeh grammar 'printed by Plantin in the year I58t, 
insists that the penultima of this aorist is never long, nor retains an t. 
Denique (these are his tvordsj perit potius hie aoristus, quam penul- 
timam producat, aut s habeat in penultima. And for a proof thereof y 
he refers the reader to Vrbanus: hut Urbanus teaches directly the re- 
verse, expressly saying, that t Atyov, s<px£yoi, i^^.tvov, are second aorists, 
•vuhich retain thes; shotvitig at the same time, that dissyllables may have 
this penultima long, by reason of the augment. But exclusive of that, ■ 
the penultima may be also long, xvJien a verb qftxao syllables begins 
tiiith a long votvel; or xvhen the penultitnA of the second future is long 
by position, according to the xxxiii rule : 7ior do I see how this can be 
called into question, tvith any appearance of reason. Thus tvefnd, 

tv(ioc, inveniOf tZ^av, 

'dXa}f CQpiOf tiKav, 

f^oj, . habeo^ u^ov. 

ayoi>, agOf ?yov. 

But the penultima may become short in the second aorist of some of 
these verbs, either by resolution, as vi^u, delecto, ^5ov^ 'ioilov ; ayu, or 
ci'^vvi/.t, frango, ^yo, eayov : or by reduplication, as ayu, duco, ^yoj», 
ryayoy; ol^u, apto, ^^oy, ^^a^oy, whence comes cc^ot^uvy Odyss. t\ for 
then the penultima becomes ante-penuUima. 

Rule XXXVII. 

Of the third person plural in <r^:i/. 

TTie third person plural of the imperfect, of both aorists^ 
and of the optative, is formed in the Boeotian dialect^ 
% changing puv of the Jirst person plural into (rav. 

Examples. 
The third person plural is equal in syllables with the 

first singular, as well of the imperfect, as of the two 

aorists ; trvTrJou, trvirov '. £TUvf/a, tTUif/ai/. 

But the Boeotians make it equal to the first person 
plural, changing ^sk, the last syllable of the first person 
of this number, into <rav: iToVlo/xa', verberabamus; IrMo- 
(TMv, verberabant ; irvTrofxsv, verberavimus ; iT^Troa-av, "ver- 
beraverunt: Ixuvpa/iAfv, ir\>^cx.(Toi,v. In like manner they' 
^y, uSoiTOiv, 'viderunt, noverunt y l/5*ot8og-^v, didicerunt; 



^J«, 


cano. 


?Jcv. 


ehxu}, 


iraho, 


iTxxAv, 


Ittcd, 


dico. 


SITTOV. 


nKca, 


venio, 


mov. 



Of the Perfect and Plu-pert-ect. 131 

tK^o(ravy mnerunt ; for tlSov, ifAu^ov, ?a6ov. Thus in 
the psalm, i^oXis(r»y t»7? yXutrtroiig aCruu, Unguis suis 
dolose agebanL 

The optative does the same through all its tenses; 
as from tx^otixiv^vemssemuSy iX^oKrxv for t?,^mv, venissent : 
slfrxia-xv for ilirontv^ diverint. 

ANNOTATION. 
. There are a great many verbs in vslcoy which being either scarce or 
obsolete in the second aorist active, are nevertheless very common in 
this same tense in the passive ; as xvifiuy pronus sum, me inclino, 
zKVTrovy unusual, IkCttviv, very usuah In like manner^ UxoiTrnv, furatus 
sum, rather than cKXatTrov, from >cXeV1&>. As also oifmy^Xoiyviv, evasi, 
liberatus sum, defunctus sum : IQxoi^viv, detrimentum accepi ; Eo-«a- 
^»)», fbssus sum : h^v^pvv and h^Xm, oceuRatus sum: lTa^»jv, sepul- 
tus sum : lppi(pviv, praecipitatus sum : lafAvym, absumptus sum : l^^vf »jy, 
laceratus sura : l}poi<P'nv, consutus sum. 

CHAP. X, 

Of the Perfect and Plu-perfect. 
Rule XXXVIII. 
Characteristic and termination of the perfect. 
The termination of the perfect is in k« : but those that 
have vf/w in the future, make the perfect in (p» ; and if 
they have ^co, they make it in ya. 
Examples. 
J. HE perfect terminates always in a, and has gene- 
rally K for its characteristic; as r/iw, tItw*, honoravi : 
^dxKa, fJ/aXxa, cecifii : uvv^ca, nv^jycx, perfect. 

But verbs that form their future with a double letter, 
take an aspirate for the characteristic of the perfect, 
each of them the aspirate corresponding to its double 
consonant; viz. ^ for-urs-; ^u making <p«, as tuVIw, 
ryvf^w, rir\)^o(, : and ;^ for Jt(r, ^w making x^) ^s Ae^w, di- 
cam ; xiXiyjx,^ dixi ; o^v^<a,fodia7Ji ; o^w^v^ocjfodif Sec, 

Nevertheless (p^(<j-(r(a, horreo, (p^t^u, makes m^^»x», 
with a x, because of the preceding aspirate 9. 
This tense is conjugated thus ; 
Perfect, 
Sing. - - - rhvtpx, T£Tv(p«?, rirt/pe, verheravt, 'isti, -it. 
Dual - - - _ - - rtri<pxrov, rsrv(pxrov, 

r rsTv<Pxix£v, T£rv<p<x.Tt, rtTixpacn, 

Plur.-{Dor. tstv^xias^, - - -' rtrvOavru 



Bceot. - - . ... riTv(p»v, 



Rule 



132 Book IIL Of Verbs. 

Rule XXXIX. 
Of the penultima of the perfect. 

1. The penultima of the perfect is the same with thai 

of the future, 

2. But the £ of the future dissyllable of *verbs in Aw> 

v(d, p, is changed here into a, : 

3. And V into y : 

4. Or else the v is intirely dropped, as in dissyllables in 

uvUj iva, vvu I 

5. /x continues, but takes an n after it, without chang- 

ing £ into 06. 

Examples. 
1. The penultima of the perfect is taken from that 

of the future ; as rvirju, tJ^'W) rhvipac. 

zjoci^cop ludo ; 'csoci^Uf 'SJi'TTxi^x, lusi, 

'CsX-nBuf impleo ; 'nX-fia-u, 'a'aiX'^Koe, implevu 

ytKoiUi rideo ; yiKdcru, yiysXayiotf risu 

2« But verbs in aw, va, ^w, assume an a, in the per- 
feqt, instead of the s of the future dissyllable. 

rsXXco, mitto ; r«^ftJ> sraXJca, piisu 
rtivoj, tendo ; nvSf rirxytocy tetendi. 

crnrsi^uy semino ; (xits^a, ia-Trat^Koc, seminavi' 

3. Those in i/w change v into y, by reason of the 
following )t : 

4. Or else they drop it intirely, as in dissyllables in 
ilv(i), lv(a, and uvw : for instance, 

KTzUu, interimoy ktivu^ tKtocKiXf inter emi : 

(Though the poets say, EJtrayxa.) 
' , xflvuf accuso^judico; n^ivu, xsxfixa, accusavi* 

^vvuf impetujeror ; ^wu, riQvKXy latus sum. 

Hereto we may add, according to Cheroboscus, 

HE^'^xlvUf lucror ; ks^^uvS, x^^^ock'x, without a k. 

But trissjllables change it into y ; as, 

fcoXjvw, polluo s [jLoXvvw, /tAE/AoAyyxas. 

5. fA continues, but takes an n after it, without re- 
quiring an a to precede, though there should be an e 
in the future dissyllable ; as, 

vs^tw, pasco ; vE/Aw, v£vs/A»jxfl5, for vmiAKX* 

xa/^AVw, labor ; kufji-u, X£)ta/A*jxa5 : 

And by syncope nUiAnxoc, in the same manner as SifAu, 
struOy Si^lAYiiiOi : TSfAvw, seco, TiriJi,r\m* See Book v. Rule ix. 



Of the Perfect and Plu-perfect. 133 

ANNOTATION. 

Hereto we may join /xlva?, maneo, /xsvw, i*.t^ivfiyw ; for the true rea- 
son of this is, because from the future in u there is formed a new 
theme in £&>, ^ev&J, /otfveo;, whence comes {ji.£^ivnKx, supposing the fu- 
ture (xerlxrco ; and so for the rest. ' See the resolution of verbs, Rule i. 

Rule XL. 
Q for E in the penultima. 
The Attics put ofor b in preterites dissyllable ending 
in q>» or x^* 

Examples. 
The Attics change £ into o in the penultima of the 
perfect in <ptx, or p^a, coming from a verb of two sylla- 
bles; as, 

&iixi»t irrigo, ^§e|», ^«^X<»» Att. ^iQ^o^ac. 
ANNOTATION, 
The same preterite may come from different verbs : ^x« from 
ij^w, delecto ; and from e^w, colloco, pono : 5xa is also in the perfect 
, middle of vixuj venio ; and the first aorist of *V;, mitto* 

Rule XLI. 
Formation of the plu-perfect. 

The plu-perfect comes from the perfect^ takes mfor «, 
andpreji.ves its own augmeht. 
Examples. 
The plu-perfect comes from the perfect, changing 
«( into nv, and prefixing its proper augment : 

Tyw?(y, rirv^Px, Irsrv^eiVf terberaveram. 
avvvf TivvKccy TivvxeiVf perfeceraw. 

It is conjugated thus : 

Plu-perfect. 

Ireru^uv, IrtTv^e/?, etetv^e*, verheraveram. 



Sing. ^lon. Jf^'f'". I 

^Att. ET£rt'^*7, 



- - CTETUCp'/j. 

Dual - - - - - lr6Tv(pttTov, Irsrv^siT'KV' 

lr£TU(p£/fAEy, ETETUCpE/TC, lrtTV<PsKTXy, 

Plur. .-^Dor. lr£Tv(pBifAe^, 

,Att. - - - - - - IrETv^sa-xVf et rsrv'<pn7xy 



Rule XLII. 
Of the Ionic and Attic persons of this tense. 
The Ionics change here nu into sx, and zt into « ; the 
/It tics change both inton, and sia-av into ecrxv. 

ExAT^I- 



134 Book IIL Of Verbs, 

Examples. 

Th^ Ionics conjugate this tense with tot. instead of 
uv in the first person singular, and with £f instead of 
ti in the third. The Attics change the Ionic ix and « 
into >5, as we have shown above. 

Thus they say, lrBr\j(pn lyco, verberabam ego : lT£ru(pyi, 
lyisivog, mrberaverat ille. In like manner vlh, videram, 
for peivj from u^u), video. 

The third person plural is in sa-ocv; psa-oci^, viderant : 
i\js-mi<ro(,v, steteranty coming from \?y[-iiia^ sto : iTsrvtpio-xv, 
or only with the augment of the perfect, according to 
the twenty-first rule, rsrv(pe(TOiv, terbera?^ant. 

This analogy is extended also to the perfect middle, as 
we shall observe in its proper place, 

CHAP. XI. 

Of the Formation of the other Moods, 

And first, of the subjunctive and optative. 

I. Subjunctive. 

X HE subjunctive takes its terminations from the 
present of the indicative; but changes the short 
vowels into their long correspondents, subscribing », 
and rejecting u : hence the second and third persons 
singular are in w subscribed, as coming from n in the 
indicative; whereas the dual and plural have only a 
simple >j, because they come from a simple i in the in- 
dicative. This analogy extends to the other tenses of 
this mood, and is preserved in circumflex verbs, as 
also in verbs in /a*. The conjugation is as follows: 

Present and imperfect. 
Sins- J ttj'jfiu, TyVIt)?, rvitlvti verberem, or verherarem* 

°* \ Ion. « - - rvTrlyio-OoCf TtV?>30-/. 

Dual - - - - - rvfrlnroVf rviflnrov* 

PI r rv'TtluyLiVf rvv%T£i rv'Trlooai, 

\Dor, rvvluiAB^t - - - rvtiluvru 

First future and aorist. 
g. J vv-\>u, Ti/%]/»3J-, TON^/*?, verberavero, -is, 'it. 

°' J^Ion. rtrv-^l/M, - - - Tu^/ij^/. 
Dual - - - - - TiZ-vl/flToy, rv-^ioToy. 
pj J rv4"^l^'^t Tu%J/>3T«, rv-^uq-u 

(^ Dor. Ty-vl/wftJ?, - - - Tv-^wyrt* 

Second 



Sing, i 
Dual 
Plur. I 



Of the Subjunctive ai\d Optative, IS5 
Second future and aorist. 



Ion. 
Dor. 



Tj/Tr*;, 


ryTT*}?, 


T&TTij, verberai)ero. 


TBrvfrUf 


- - - 


rvtr^a-iy 


- " - 


rvvviToVf 


fvirv^roy. 


'rww[/,iVf 


rvirvirtf 


rii'jfua-t. 


Ty-jrw^j, 


- - - 


rvTimrt, 



Perfect and plu-perfect. 



°' "[ion. - Tiri^ipi?^/. [^'issem. 

Dual - - - - - rcTy^^jrey, rsTv^vtrov. 
pi C rtrv^u(Ji.sVf rsrv^Piore, rtTv(pucrif 

\ Dor. rerv(puiJi.sSf - - - rsrv^uvri* 

ANNOTATION. 
J« conjugating the subjunctive, it is customary to add loiv, si : ^7^^^^% 
Ixv rvtflut si verberera. /if 25 not true, as some pretend, that the sub- 
junctive has nojuture, because the aorists frequently signify the time to 
come in this mood, as several before us have observed, Voss. et alii. 
Wherefore Ramus, Sylburgius, and others, after their example, call 
these tenses futures perfect, that is, composed of the past and of 
the future. 

The Greeks use here a kind of future by circumlocution, taking 
the preterite of the participle, and the present subjunctive of the 
verb substantive : thus, 

Sing. lav mv^oDs, S>, wc, v, verberavero, 'is, -it. 

Dual Ikv rirv<p6rB, vrov, jjtov. 

Plur. lav TETi;<})OTe?, SfAtv, nrs, Sti. 

They also make use of the future of the verb substantive in this 
circumlocution ; yty^x<puq 'iaoiMii, scripsero. 

They form likewise the circumlocution of the preterite by the 
optative of the substantive verb tUv, irn?, ci**} : as «<V yty^cc'PuSi 
scripsissem ; so?? ysy^a^w?, scripsisses, &c. 

Observations on the dialects. 

The second person singular in ^», is not only for this mood, but ge- 
uer ally for all persons in >3?, viaQx, eras, and even for- those in tis, as 
tve shall see in the resolution of verbs. 

The third person singular in eri, is not only for the active, but also 
for the passive aorists, rv^9^<Tt ; for the verbs in />w, riQmt ; and for 
the circumflex verbs, •aoi^ai. Hence comes niyulai, in Horn. /or vsiKtivi, 
incre^Siret, from myisioj, poet, for voinsu. 

The poets frequently put an instead of u in the first person plural, 

II. Of the Optative. 
The penultima of the optative is a diphthong in all 
sorts of verbs. The barytons take 01 in all tenses, 
.except the first aorist, which assumes «*, both in 
the active and middle verb, because it comes from 
the « of the indicative, t^ociiai from hv^x. 

The 



136 Book III. Of Verbs. 

The passive aorists, and the JEolic aorist, take «. 
The second future has a circumflex; in other re- 
spects it is the same with the aorist. 
This mood is thus conjugated : 

Present and imperfect. 

Sing. - - - riKjrToiiAtf rv'Trroti;, rvtrrot, verberarem. 
Dual - - - - - - rv'TrroiToVf rwroiTviv* 

Plur S Tv7rrot[Meff rvirroirst rCirronv* 

First future. 
Sing, - - - ru4^//:A/, rJtJ'o/?, rir\foty xierberem, -es^ -c^ 

JJUal - - - - - - TUvJ/O/TOy, Tfvj/OIT^V. 

Plur. -f rv-\'QHA,t)ij Ty\J/o<Tf, rii^otiv. 

\ Dor. Ty^o//AE5. 

First aorist. 
Sing. - - - T^^'flMju;, Tu\I/a/y, Tu4/a/, verberaverim. 

Dual - - - - - - TyvJ/a/Tov, Tv-^oiirm* 

pi f Ty\I/a//>t£y, ry^/a/Tf, Ttz-vJ/os/Ev. 

(^ Dor. Ty-4/«//x£?. 

Second future. 

Sing. - - - rviroTfAi, tuwok, Tywor, verberem. 

Dual - - - - - - TyTroiTftv, rvTroiT'/jv. 

Plur J rvworftsv, ri/'jj'om, rwoTev* 

\ Dor. Ty^or/xej. 

Second aorist. 
Sine I TyWfti, ryVo/?, ryVo/, verberavenm. 

^' \ Ion. rtrunran/.u 
Dual - - - - - - Ty^ro/rov, TyTro^r^v, 

Plur y rvtrott^ty, tvVo/ts, rvvoisv. 

\ Dor. ri'jroifAts. 

Perfect andplu-perfect* 
Sing. - - - rsTv^otixi, rirv(pois, Tsrv^ot, verberavissem. ■ 

Dual - - - - - - Tery^o/roj;, T£rv<Poiri/iV. 

Pliir J rsrv0oifAtVf rtrv<Potrst rsTvtponv. 

(^ Dor. rtrv^oifjLs^. 

ANNOTATION. 
As the Latins frequently make use of utinam in the optative 
mood, for a mark of desire ; so the Greeks use aJ'Sc or el'de ; as u^ 
Tvwro//xi, utinam verberem. But as these adverbs do not determine 
the person, we also make use of the word w(p£^oy ; of which notice 
shall be taken in the remarks, Book viii. 

Rule XLIII. 
Of the first aorist JEolic. 
The Molic aorist of the optative comes from' the indi- 
cative aorist y by inserting « before »i 

Exam- 
t 



Of (he Imperative and iNfiNiTiVE. 137 

Examples. 

The iEolic aorist of the optative is formed from the 
aorist of the indicative, by dropping the augment, and 
putting £t before «. It is conjugated thus : 
JEolic aorist. 

Sing. xv-\fii»y rv-^£Kxqf tvi^sisi 
Dual - - - rvil^sixrov, rv^tia.r'ni* 

Plur. rv\'s\oc.^sv, rv^siatrs, Tv-^tKxv. 

The Attics frequently use this aorist ; but then it is 
only in the second and third person singular, and the 
third plural. 

CHAP. XIL 

Of the Imperative and Infinitive. 

I. The Imperative. 

Present and imperfect. 

Sing. - - - rv'TTTs, rvjrrsrcoi verbera, -eret. 

Dual - - - rvirrtrovy rvTrrirwvy verberate, -erentj duo. 

rvvrertf rvifrhaaeniy verberent. 



Plur 



lAtt. 



rvffrovruv 







First aorist. 


Sing. 
Dual 

Plur. 


- .• - rvil^ov, 

- - ■ - rv^xrovf 

" Att. - - - 


ryvj/ctro;, Jac vcrber averts 

rv\/a,rucrxy. 
TyvJ/o-vrwv. 

Second aorist. 


Sing. 
Dual 


- - - rv'JTEf 

- - - Tv'rrsrovj 


rwsroj. 
rvrrirav. 


•D^..^ 


r ' rvirsrs, 


rvTTSTUO-XV. 



(^Att. - - - TvTfovruv. 

Perfect and plu-perfect. 

Sing. - - - r£rv(psy rsrv^sroff verberaveris or hoc age 

Dual - - - rerv(perovf rsrv^sruvf ut post-modiim verberasse 

Plur. - - - rsrv^Psrt, rerv<piru<Tixv. dicm'is ;* 

* Where it is plain that this tense partakes pretty much of the future. 

Rule XLIV. 
Of the third person Attic. 

The third person plural Attic in the three tenses of 
the imperative, is in vrtav, and forfned from the ge- 
nitive of the participle. 

Examples. 
The Attics terminate the third person plural of the 

T present, 



138 Book III. Of Veubs. 

present, and of the aorists, in vtwv, forming it from the 
genitive plural of the participle of the same tenses. 
Examples may be seen above in the conjugation of the 
imperative. The like happens to circumflex verbs, ^ 
zrotsyrwi/, L.\ic\> Jacia?it, for zrtmTuo-xv: /xst^ss/twv, id, 
meiiantur, for ^/.^r^iirucoLv, 

ANNOTATION. 

The ini'perative has no particular JiUure, as it is a soft of a future 
itself, according to Ramus and Sanctius^parfalcingofthejuturein all 
its tenses. 

Observations on the dialects. 

The Boeotians and Syracusians sometimes terminate the second aorist 
in ov, like thejir^t ; as rvnrovi aruifor rvnt : AaCoy Jbr Aa^i, ceperis : 
tifilv, v.rut Jbr i'fjfli dixeris. Andtheij add the augment of the 'perfect^ 
rirv^s, as toe have observed Chap. v. Rule xxi. 

II. The Infinitive. 
The infinitive in each termination may express every 
difference of time : we shall however divide it as we 
have done the other moods, not only to comply with 
the general practice of grammarians, but also, 
because indeed it commonly expresses that kind of 
time, which is attributed to each termination. 

r Mo], TvWTjjv, or ruTr-ruv. 
Present &> Imperfect, rvTrrnv, verberare, - - - ^ Dor. rvvrsv, tvTrrefxsv, or 

V TwrBfxivai. 

, 'rv4'£fJi'iv, or 

First Aorist, - - - tw->|/«j, verbejavisse, • - Dor. Tv^'ifArtv & rv^epttvat, 

e Ion. Ty7r8£(v. 

Second Future 5C Aorist, TviriTvf - - - - } Poet. Ttrvrreiv. 

L Mo], TVTfh. 

Perfect ft" Plu- perfect, T«Tt;4>ev«n, verberavisse, - - Dor. 'nru<^ifji.iv & nitv^ifA.ivtt.i, 

Rule XLV. 
Of the piincipai dialects of the infinite. 

TuTrrsiv makes rvwri^v, rvvrev, rVTrr£[^£vui, and rvTrrifAiv. 

Examples. 
The Dorics drop * in the termination nv of the infi- 
nitive; TUTTTftv, TUTTT^v ; X(zQi7i^, AaCsi/, CapCVe ; ys^oil^nv, 
yi^Ki^iVy mnerari ; without any necessity for putting a 
circumflex^ though the last syllable becomes short. 

The same Dorics, as also the .S^lics, insert an n be- 
fore y, either simple, if they take it from the termination 
ty ; or subscribed, if they consider it as coming from 

tiv : 



First Future, - - - rv-lw, verberaiurim esse, < Dor. rv^iv, to^'SfJi'iVt 

t rv-liutmi 



(y/Ae Infinitive. 159 

m : which they practise in regard to all sorts of verbs ; 
xxhvSviv for ytoc^tuim, dormire : noTfA^v^ Theocr. for xoo-- 
fxsTvy oimare: <piA^i/, or (p^Mv, for (p\hiiVy amare ; and 
drawing back the accent, according to the *^ol. (^iMy, 
In all the infinitives ending in £tv, av, va*, the Ionics 
and poets insert i*.i before i/ (casting off the subjunctive, 
if there be a diphthong) and then the Attics and Do- 
rics add «i sometimes to the last syllable, whether it be 
in the common tongue or not. Examples have been 
given already in the conjugation of the infinitive; but 
as this happens to all sorts of verbs, we shall add 
h^re a more particular table. 

Att. & Dor. 

xierhemre, 
significare'. 
ponere. 
dare, 

verberaUim esse, 
ponere. 
stare, 
the same. 
dare, 
ostendere. 

The first aorist conforms likewise to this analog]/, cast- 
ing off the subjunctive «, and changing « into s ; r^on, 
rv^ifxsvj rv^i[A(voci. Eixept the verbs inxu, (au, yw, ^«, in 
which it receives no change. 

Sometimes (a is reduplicated j u^oiJi,iAf.von for d^SiAivsn, 
taken firom d^nv, arare. 

Sometimes the diphthong si remains ; (Ktt[ji.£von,Jbr dH^t' 
vxi,from auv, flare. 

Sometimes a syncope is made ; fJ^fv for ISiiAtVy from 
\h7vf videre : iyii.iv for lx^iJi.i^, from ^x^w, habere : where 
you see the aspirate x changed into its ijitermediate y. 

The Ionics, to get rid of the circumflex, put an i before 
iiv in the second Juture and aorist ; r\j7rinv for r\)Tn7v ; 
adding thereto the reduplication, as zve have observed 
above. Thus in Horn, we find rsrwiuv for rvyctTv, from 
TuxM, paro : 7ir£(p^aSiiiv for (p^xhTv, from ^f«^w, dico, 
second aorist, i(p^o(,hv. 

ANNOTATION. 

The Greeks have neither gerunds nor supineSi hut instead of them 
they make use of the infinitive^ in the same manner as the French : 
«yfo? TO vjnTv, pour boire. See the Syntax, Rule iii. 

CHAP. 



Common. 


Ionic. 


Att. & Dor. 


rb'^re-i-Vf 


tvTpri-[xi'V, 


rvrtrs^ivott. 


^♦3^0-y-y, 


^uXo-fis-y, 


^V>^l[A£VUif 


^£-T'VXI, 


S^^£-V, 


'^'■^tv-aty 


^O'V-V'iXlf 


So-/:x£-y, 


^6{ji,ty-sii , 


rvpOri-v-ai, 


rv'pQvi-^ji.i'y, 


rv^Q-h^zv-txi, 


'ri9e-v-x:y 


rM-^z-Vf 


TiBBjj.^va.tf 


troi'vcci, 


trCt'lAE'V, 


*ra.(AEV-oijy 


Trt-v-xtt 


T^'I^S'Vy 


T-n-fASvoiiy 


^i^O'^-ai, 


0/00-^e y, 


oioofjLBy-aty 


oeiy,vv-V'Uiy 


0£iKVV-(AS-Vf 


dsiKyvi/.tv-xi. 



140 Book III. Of Verbs. 

CHAP. XIII. 

Of Participles, 

JbiACH participle may likewise serve for almost 
every difference of time: we shall, notwithstanding, 
divide them according to the common method, dis- 
tinguishing them by that time which they denote 
more particularly. 

Present. 



' ' I verberans, -antu, 

r67rrH<ra,, -icn,^, Dor. t^ttto^*, -oicrof, V ^^.^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ < 



or 

verbero, -as, -at. 
verberahaniy -as, -at. 



First future. 

fv-^ooVj 'Oi/ms, - - _ •> 

' 'i„^ -n^ . % ( verbf:raturus, or 

J ' * r qui, qucp, quod, Virberaoo, '-iS, ^U, 

TO Tyv^ov, -ei'TO?, - - - -J 

First ao.rist. 

TU^-ttC, -aVTO?, Dor. TUx{/ttJC, 

h rv^aa-a, -w, Dor. ry^-awa, - - ^ jw?', jm<p, ^"''^j verberavit. 

TO TtJ^ay, -ttvroc, 



;i 



Second future. 

oTfTrSv, avre?, Ion. rvtriav, -iavregf "^ 

«Ti;7rtfcr«,.^^«. SJon-'^^^l'^*'-^^^*'*' f cerA€>-«/«ru5, or . 

' ^ l>or. rvTroiera, ciera^, ( qui, quce, quod, xierberabOf 'is, -it, 

forvTrovj-eyroq, Ion. rvviov, iovrog, J 

Second aorist, which differs from the future in accent only. 

rvTTxv, -ovTog, Ion. titvitoov, &C. "J 

h rvTrSTtt, -«?, Dor. runoHa-af -as, > quif qu<Bf quod, verberavi, -isti, -it, 

TO tvTthf 'ovros, - - _ - 3 

Perfect. 

vervpwi;, ~6ro<;. Mo], r£rv<potiVj -ovto?, -\ 

«THT«<fc.:^,.«,, . - - . L qui, quc^, quod, verberavi, -isti, it; 

^ ^ * * C and verberaverum, -as, -ai^ &c^ 

TO rerv<pos, 'oroc, -. • . - - 3 

ANNOTATION. 

The mascuh'ne and neuter participles follow the imparisyllabic 
declension ; and the feminine the parisyllabic. Besides the dialects 
above marked, they also admit of those which are proper to their 
declensions. 

Observations 



Of Participles; and the Verb Passive. 141 
Observations on the dialects. 

The feminine in, oia-xfor ea-x, is according to the ^olic as "well as 
. Doric form ; yiXoioiaxfor y^Xotuffx, ridens : and in Theocritus we f^d 
€'oen ytXoTa-Xy though perhaps it is for yi\wa-x. 

For when the termination 5a« is accneted, which happens to the 
secondfuture and second aorist, it is then formed in ua-x ; as 'Kimaax 
for XiiraiTx, quae reIiquit,yrom XftTrw, linquo. 

The lending the termination of the present to the perfect ^ as riv)(^uiv 
for rzrv<puq, is more usual m the middle verb ; as n^KX-nyuv, -ovroq,for 
x£>tA*jyw?, -6ro(;,from aXoi^ojf clango. 

The same is also practised in circiiwjiex verbs ; vsvo^auv, -ovrd;, from 
yoiat cogito. 

The Attics make the masculine and feminine of the dual both alike ; 
thus Soph, in Elect, hath o(,(p£ilria-xvT£f tj^ds-crovr^, speaking (f two 
sisters, instead of a^nlviaxax, 'sj^xaaaa-x ; just as they say rufor rx 
in the dual of the article. 

We likewise meet with ImfnXojq and iTriixXucy in the first aorist, for 
\'jTiitKua'x<;,from ttAww, iirKuax^ navigo : and with kyxyx<^ for xyxyuv^ 
from xyuj duco, after o. 

CHAP. XIV. 

Of the Ferb Passive ^ and its Terminations, 

passive is easy to conjugate, because, wrtli 
regard to its augment, characteristic, and penultima, 
it depends upon the active, from which it forms all 
its tenses. So that there remains only the termination, 
which may be easily retained by means of the fol- 
lowing rules. 

HuLE XLvr. 

Of the passive terminations. 
The present, and both futures, the perfect, and the sub- 
junctive, take jAooi for their final: but the imperfect, 
and the plu-perfect, with the optative, have [j^v,^. 
Exam ple's. 
Throughout all the passi ve (except the aorists, which 
follow the active form of conjugating) there are but 
two terminations of the first person, viz. /x^i for the 
present, the two futures, the perfect, and the sub- 
junctive ; lAnv for the imperfect, the plu-pert'ect, -and 
the optative. " ' 

Here it is to be observed, that those tenses which have 
an or an w before f^oci or fxnv, retain it in thefrst person 
of all numbers, as likewise in the third person plural: but 

in 



The 



i4^i Book III. O/^ Verbs. 

in the other persons they change it. Those that have 
another vowel preceding the termination^ do not alter it, 
as may he easily seen in the next table. 

Rule XLVII. 
Of the third person singular and plural. 
Trom nA«t comes tou, and from (a^v comes to, which in 
the plural make vron, vtq, 

ExAMPtES. 

The tenses in i^on form the third person singular in 
rai ; and those in (/.m form the same third person in 
to; then by adding a v to both, the plural is termi- 
nated in i/r«t or vTo : as rlofAxi, honoror ; rUrocij honor a- 
tur; rtovroojy honor antur, 

ANNOTATION. 

The second person, pursuant to the same analogyt should be in axt^ 
or in cro, as it is still in the perfect and plu-perfect, and even in the 
present of some particular my-bs : but the Ionics having rejected the 
consonant, the Attics made a contraction into ^j subscribed in the present, 
and into « in the imperfect : as rUixxi, rU<rxi, rleai, t*]?, honoror, hono- 
raris : lrioiA.ny, Irhao, ItUo, Iria, honorabar, honorabaris, <^c. 

Rule XLVIII. 

Formation of the other persons. 
The second person plural of every tense and mood, the 
present and perfect of the imperative, as also the 
tefises in S-a* in the injinitive, are all formed from 
r^i and TO, by changing the r into 9, and by adding 
a (T if the ^ be alone. 

Examples. 

The first person plural is quite easy. For it is always 
in 6«, coming from the first person singular, wherein 
Aere is scarcely any room for a mistake. The others 
are more difficult : they are formed thus ; 

From this third person singular in t«» or to, the se- 
cond person plural is formed in all moods and tenses. 

From the same person is also formed the present 
and perfect of the imperative in all persons ; except 
the second (for it has no first), which comes from the 
second person of the same tense in the indicative, in 
all sorts of verbs passive. 

From 



Formation of the Passive. 14S 

From thence likewise are formed the tenses in 0;^*, 
in the infinitive, viz. all but the aorists. 

Whereto we might also join the second and third 
person dual in all tenses ; but of these we have said 
enough already. 

All these formations are made, by changing t into 
0, and by adding a o- to it, if it be alone ; as rUron, 
honoratur: rUrh^ honor amini. 

But if this T should be accompanied by another con- 
sonant, then, at the same time that it is changed into 
0, the other lenis must be changed into an aspirate, 
because, according to what we have remarked, Book i. 
Chap. vii. an aspirate cannot be preceded by a lenis. 
In which case, the a- is'not to be added : thus from 
TSTuTrai, vei'beratusfuit, is formed rtTo(p^xi, verberatum 
fulsse ; from xiMytroii, dictusjuit, XiXi^^xty dictumfuisse : 
and such like. 

Rule XLIX, 
Of the passive aorists. 
The indicative aorists are, the first in 9>]v, the second in 
nv. The other moods have «, muy >i0i, riv«*, u?; 
the first aorist akvays assuming an aspirate. 

Examples. 

The passive aorists termi nate in nvj but the first al ways 
assumes an aspirate. They follow the second active form 
of conjugating, which is that of verbs in /At, and has an 
affinity with the pluperfect indicative of the verbs in 
w; hence they are without the first person plural. 

The aorists of the other moods, and of the partici- 
ples, are formed from those of the indicative, accord- 
ing to the particular termination of each, as marked 
in the rule. 

ANNOTATION, 

Whenever the aorist happens to have another consonant before 
the 9, the lenis is then changed ako into an aspirate; as Irv^pd'/iv, 
and not IrvTrQvjv, from rvirruf xierheroy for the reason mentioned 
Book i. Chap, vii, as we shall see more particularly in the sequel. 
But what we have already remarked, is sufficient to learn to con- 
jugate in general, with the help of the following table. 

TABLE 



144 



Book III. Of Verbs. || 

TABLE of Conjugation 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive. 



Optative. 



C oiJ.a.ij p, srai. 
Ti- "^ Honoror, aris. 

1. \ OfXsQoC, £ff-0£, Wl 



'EviTu<;. Iiistans. The present 

fi morer, er 



Ti- 

2. 



eris. 



ITafatTaToto?. Quasi extensivus in rem non exactam. The imperfect. 

'£Ti--J Hoiiorabar, aris. 

1. (.o/xgQa, £3-9£, eVTO. 



r oifxrw, 0(0, otro. 
Tj- -< Honorarer, eris. 

2. (^«/W,£9a, CJO-flg, OtVTO. 



MiXKuv. Yulgofuturum prirmim. The first future. 



Tir •< Honoraljor, eris. 
1. V. fl>)(ro'|U£9a, £9-0£, ovTat. 



n- •< Honoror, eris. 

2. (, 6>j5-!}j|M.69a,<roic-9£,oiVT-. 



Tt 



'Eo-o/AEvof. Quibusdamyw^^£rM7?^ remotius. The second future. 



f tiff-ofxciL, fiff-rij hctrai. 
Ti- < Honorabor, eris. 

1 . ^ »S'0/U.E9a,11^£ff^£,>5C-OVTa{. 



Honoror^ eris. 

ria-olfAi^ctyha-oiO-^lyriffwi 



riiX^sATjXwSwf. Tehipus exactum. Vulgo the first aorist. 



1. 



-•< Honoratus fui, isti. Tt- -| Honoratu's fuerirr 

(. 9n^V, 6>iT£, S»i5-aV. I 2. (,9«|U£V, 0JiT£, SaJff-i. 



r 6s/>jv, Bms, 9 tin. 
Ti- < Hunoratus fuerim. 

3. (. MfAiV, £t»JT£, slrjTaV. 



'Eru 
1. 



{ 



'Ao^/j-oy. Indefinitum tempus. The second aorist. 



Honoratus fui, isti. 

>J/U£V, »T£, IJff-aV. 



C 5, «, ^• 
Ti- J. Honoratus fuerim. 
2. (. a;/tt«v, ^T£, So-t, 



T<- -< Honoratus fuerim, 
3. ' erfl/otEv, t/nre, lUrxv. 



TlxqxKtlidi.tvos, Adjacens prcBsenti. The preter-perfect. 



Te- 

T(- 
1. 



C f^cti, trai, vai. 

< Honoratus fui, isti. 

(./c*£0a, fl-0£, vrai. 



'£- < * Unusual. 

2. f, cufjudaj^e-6s, aivrai. 



*T'7rffoxivT£^/xo?. Plusquam perfectum. The plu-perfect. 



1. 



^ fjim, a-o, TO. 
-< Honoratus fueraro. 
(. /t^£0a, crSe, vTo. 



* Unu: 



Unusual. 



Met' oA/yoy f^eXXuv, Paulo-post-Juturum 

Te- CifjLMy J), era*. 
T/ff-- -< Mox honorabor. 
(^ C|«E6a, ES-0E, oyrau 



< Mox honorer. 
""' (. otfMQet, OKrBsf oivra. 



These two tenses, which tre have marked as unusual^ are generally formed by cir- 
cumlocution I as we shall see hereafter. 



Formation of the Passive, 
for //itf V £ R B Passive. 



14^ 



Imperative. 



(~ 



S 



, \ Honorare, or 
\ fac bonoreris. 



anri, tinrw. 
Honoratus fueris. 

Qr,re, 9firwtra,v. 



a-o, a-Qa>, 
Honoratus fueris. 

<r9e, a-QoDO-av. 



Infinitive. 



Honorari. 



Participles. 



Ti - 6fia-B<r6au 
Honoratum iri. 



Honoratum iri. 



iS\T«. Gnmi, 
2 JHonoratum esse 



Tj. 



T6T*- crflat. 

tloDoratum esse, 
or fuisse. 



Tiricr- ey6ai. 
Mox honoratum 
iri. 



^ 0/XEV5V, o/>tevtf. J S" 



i 9t](r6fA,eY0Q, ivUf 
T*- -^ 6ria-ofXiV*>, inty 



? 



T<. 



-J r.a-ofAvn, «v»?, 
(. »)9-o/tA£vov, eva. 



5/ 



Tt- <, Ss{<ra, S£iV»y, 
f, Siv, Qivns, 



C B?, JVTOi 

Tt- -< er<ra, ew 

(. £V, SVTOf . 



iVTOf, 



s. 

-« 

XI 

a 
o 



Te- 



ff/,Bvog, a, 

< (U.£V>), «f, 

{^fAmv, a. 



(^ O/AEVOV, a. 



} 



U 



CHAP. 



U6 Book III. Of Vzan^. 

C H A F. XV. 

Of each Passive Tense in Particular ; Andjirsiy 

Of the Present artd Imperfect, 

Present. 



Sing. I 



Ion. 



- - - tiittrsw. 



Dual - - - ryzTTo/xt^y, TuTrrea-Qov^ tvitr&r^v* 
Plur -f TuTTTo/AfiOaf, r^vvsdQsf rviTTovrsiu 

\ Ion. TiwrTo/xccrDias. 

The present passive is formed from the active, by 
changing « into a/>t«i ; tutttw, TU7rrojt*«». 

Sometimes it is syncopated; p^at for oioi^»i, puto: 
\3f/,xi for XsofAOii, lamr ; from whence comes ;vSt<;w, 
lavatur ; x^^de, lavamini ; >^yrou, lavantur. 

Observations on the dialects. 

The first person plural Ion. assumes here av before Q», *whkh is also 
practised in all the other tenses. 

The second person singular in vt, is hy the Ionics resolved into zou, 

from whence it citme j tu-wt??, rvitrixt, and adding also a <, rimrziai :. 

in like manner in the Jiitiire ; rv-^sxi, rv-^sioci; rvinoct, tlittixu In 

the subjunctive they resolve it into 73x1; ru<7Trvixi : aX-yixiJor tXn, aufe- 

ras, eligas, Sfc. 

Rule L. 

Of verbs that make the second person in (r«». 

Some verbs from oiaul make tfron ; as ^oiyoiAOii, <poiytcoci. 

Examples. 
Ther^ are some verbs which insert a <r in the second 
person singular, wherein they agree with the natural 
analogy, mentioned in the preceding chapter ; ^'yff/*«j, 
^4yi(rxif edo. • 

In like manner the circamflex. verbs, Kxvx^dofMxch, 
-w/Aat, glorior ; xxv^oltrxi, )cau;^aW^ as we shall see 
more particularly hereafter. And this is the analogy 
which has been retained in the passive of verbs in /x^, 
as we shall see Book iv. 

Rule LI. 

Of the second person in n. 
Sometimes the Attics terminate this person in n ; as 

Exam- 



Ofihc Present and Imperfect 147 

Examples, 

The Attics heretofore terminated this second person 
in «; hence this termination is still retained in these 
four verbs ; PaAo/Aott, mlo ; PsAj*, vis : otofAxi, puto ; 
mn, putas : oif/o/AOi, videbo ; oi|/«, videbis : ioy.cn, sum, 
'iuy and by contraction it, es. 

Though we meet also with a few more ; riM^ofAoci, 
moriar ; tM^h, morieris : and such like. 

The imperfect, 

r lrvirro[jt.viv, Irvfrm, trvtrTsrOf verhcrabar. 

Sing. < Dor. Irvnroy.xvf 

Clon. - - - - Irlirrzoy rvirria-Ksro, 

Dual • - • IrvitroiAzQoVf Irutrrea-Qovf Irvnrto'Qm* 

f IrvfrroiAsOx, iTvirrsaOsf Irv'TfrovTo. 

Plur. < Dor. IrvTrroi^eaOx, 

{.Ion. ---- >>-- IrvTrrsotro. 

The passive imperfect is formed from the active, 
^changing ou into S^fiv ; stvtttovj lT\j7rr6(ji,nv» 

Observatio?is on the dialects. 

The Ionics resolve the second person s into zti^jrora xvhence it xvas 
formed / and the Dorics into bv, Irvirrtv. 

The Ionic manner of conjugating rvirrtffMimVf rvnricryaoy tutttsct- 
xETo, is scarce used in thefrst person. Of the other txvo there are in-' 
stances : wwXecdceo, Od, o-. ^coT^sa-Ksrof Od. X, obidas, obibat, for 
iTMhsea-Ksoj 'ETOi from ituKio^.oit'. in like manner, yivitrKtrof erat, Ix^'^' 
K£7o, habebatur : l^rnvvdntrof cingebatur : {Aiffyiaxeroy miscebatur. 
Liketioise in the plur al, rvTrria-Kovrof verberabantur. 

We also meet mth -cTE-jre/QeTo, persuasus est, for I'miQsro, Od. /3. 
Though the reduplication of this tense is uncommon ; and therefore 
some have taken it for the second aorist, which ought, hotuever, to have 
the penultima short, as when Homer says 'atfnOuv, -w-x,for -cr/fiwv. 

I'he third person plural in sxro is in Homer and Herodotus ; v's-e- 
hx.ioiro,for vTrs^kyovro : it is likewise to he met with in the present, as 
also in the perfect and pln^pafect ; where we shall treat of it mare at 
large. 



GHAP. 



148 



Book III. O/* Verbs. 



CHAP. XVL 

Of the Passive Futures and Aorists. 

Rule LII. 

Formation of the first future. 

1. XI of the first future active makes ^^trofAoa in the 

passive : 

2. But if/w makes ^0>iVojw«t, and gw, ;^0)?fl-o/A«t. 

3. XI pure sometimes takes a o-, and sometimes rejects it, 

4. The penultima of the perfect active is retained in 

this tense by verbs in Aw, y.u, vu^ fw. 

5. The same penultima in some other verbs is made short. 

Examples. 

!• J. HE first future passive may be easily formed 
from its active, by changing w into Uo-oiaui, 

puWf or 
poiiut 

. 2. But J^w makes ip^ri<ro(jt.oa, and ^w, p^GnVojuau 
Where c being cast off/ a <p or a ;^ is inserted in its 
room before 0, by reason that a lenis cannot precede 
an aspirate ; thus, 

rvvria, verhero ; rv-\^Uf . rvCfi^riaoixecu 

Ac'ya;, dico ; Xs^u, XB^^vKTOfjitxi, 

Tj^oco'a'af ago ; 'Sj^oi^Uf 'cyqx^Qy\cro^xu 

3, Some verbs in w pure, according to what we have 
remarked in the rule, retain the (t, as may be seen in 
the examples produced, number 1. 

And 



;! 



oblecfo ; 


Vi<7C0i 


•ncrQria-o^scu 


pello J 


uaco, 


uff^incrofji^xu 


Jingo ; 


'Tf'Ka.a-Ui 


^Xoc<7^ri<royi.xt 


porto ; 


.xo//,<aa;, 


yLO^ier^YKToyt.oti. 


ungo ; 


ZpVo;, 


Xiif^^'no'oyi.oci. 


obthuro ; 


^V(7Uf 


^vaBria-oy^ut, 


traho ; 


hKKvarct;, 


sXKVa-OrKTOfAXl. 


valeo ; 


puKTUf 


puja-6ri(T0[Jt,ixu 


percutio ; 


puia-Uf 


pxiaQyiao^Oii. 


claudo ; 


xXsia-eo, 


xXsiaQricroiJioi/* 


Jidibus cano ; 


\J/<afXia, 


•^otX^rtaoiAai. 


tollo ; 


a^u, 


a^^OioaofAOci, 


excito ; 


lys^Zj 


lys^^rtao{ji,sit» 


ostendo ; 


(P<xv.u>, 


(pxy^rta-OfAXt, 



Of the Passm Futures and Aorists. 149 
And on the contrary others reject the <r ; as, 

oihiuf laudo i otivsa-M, oi,\n^yi(Toyi.xi. 

i^oiu, video ; o^acw, o^^aGigj-ofxa/, 

Boa-KUj or 7 ^t r> A » 

ct^oor, aro ; ou^oauty 'ar^o^'naoyi.an 

(pu^iuy deprehendo ; ^u^oko-Ut (pu^xHa-oiAxi. 

With several others. 

4. Verbs in Aw, /*w, vw, ^w, retain in this future pas- 
sive, whatever changes, additions, or rejections, they 
make in the penultima of the perfect active ; as, 

rsXA'W) orno ; teXw, I'raAxa, ^aXQ-na-ofjixtf 

vsfjt-cOf tribt[o ; ve/xw, vfvs/M.tjxa, vsixnOva-oiJion. 

x^tvw, cerno ; n^tvu, nBx^iidXi K^t^vxTOfAon, 

KTSivUf excido J xTEvcD, Exraxa, x.rotB'fiaoix.xi, 

(T'ffsl^Uf sero ,• a-tre^Uf iairoc^KcCf a-fr<x^QricroiAXu 

5. There are some other verbs, that shorten this 
same syllable, viz. that which is the penultima of the 
future active, and precedes the termination Owo/xa* in 
the passive ; which is done either by dropping one of 
the vowels, if there be a diphthong, or by changing 
the long vowel into its proper short ; as, 

^e'w, Jundo ; ytvcw, ^vOrjo'oiJi.xi, 

(TEVUf concito ; a-sveru, crvQria-oiA,xi. 

£vpia-y.u or 7 • • c » t A ' 

t' , > tnvemo ; tv^-na-ijy tv^ebyicrofAxt 

at^iu/, CCipiO ; xi^viaUi ai^i^'naoyi.xi* 

With several others ; to which we may join the 
future of verbs in jtxi ; whereof we shall treat in the 
fourth book. 

This future is conjugated in the manner following : 
First future, 

q. C Tv^pOna-ofAxi, rv<pO'n(Tvif Tv^Owera;, verbcrobnr, 

°' I Ion. - - - . rv^^yiaexi. 

X)ual - - rv^^vo-ajj-eOov, rv^Br)crta9ov, rv(p9riaEa-Qoy. 

pi J rvpQvicrofxsQx, rv!p9r)a-Ecr0sf rv(p9r,a-ovrxu 

j_Dor. rv(p&^a-6ixE(j9x. 

ANNOTATION. 
Some verbs in vu retain the y in this future in verse, conforming 
thus to our general rule; as TrXyvw, lavo, 'siXwui, zsXwSv'rofxxi. In 
like manner '>t^<v6>}o-o/>ta<, inclinabor^ from y.Ki)iu : jc^ivO-naoixacii judicn- 
bor, from x^ivm : OTvuvQwo-o^a/, spirabo, from tjvvvco, obsolete, for 
isvvio or zsnvui spiro. In like manner also in the first aorist, ex^ *v6>9v, 
judicatus sum ; IjcA/VGuv, incUnatus sum ; l7rvvv9'/)v, spiravi. 

Hence 



150 Book III. Of Verbs. 

Hence it is manifest tJiat our method of forming the tenses is at 
least as analogical as that which is commonly followed ; si?ice, if they 
were to be taken from the third person perfect, we should not fnd 
there a v ; y.U^ir<xt^ and not KU^ivran, judicatus est. 

Sw9>)o-o^«;, servahor, comes from a-oa, and not from o-w^a;; and is 
therefore of a regular formation, because w pure can either take or 
neglect the cr. Thence also comes a-urvi^, servator ; a-urri^iov, salu- 
tare* rvwuS>j^o/xa/, likewise, comes from yvou, yvuau : ^v)i<x,a^ri(Toyi,xi 
from ^vvoc^u, valeof possum ; but ^w/jQ-na-oiAxt comes frqm Imdvi ^vnau^ 
possum, and is therefore formed regularly. 

MwiaQnaoixxt comes from /xvaw, vieru, (instead of which is used 
IMocofAoci, meminij and is consequently irregular, as also the aorist 
I/Av>5a9>jv. Which still contributes to confirm our rule, because it could 
not be taken from the third person perfect^ which is ^iyinroti, without a a* 

Rule LIII. 

Formation of the second future passive. 

The second future is formed by changing w into iiro^xi. 

Examples. 

The second future passive is also formed from that 

of the active, only by changing w into ^a-opLxi; as tuttw, 

TU7ri(o-o/xat, -fverberabor : dwda-a-u, muto, dXXotyta, uKKa.- 

yi(FOfji.QH : 'urnd'ara, pango, Tsrotyuy •mQ(.yri(r 01^01.1 : ^ac7rr(a, 

sepelio, roc^u, r»(pri(TofAon, It is conjugated like the 
precedent : thus, 

Second future. 

rvrrYiffoiAxt, rvrrvKTV), rvrtvtatrxi, verberabor. 



Sing. ^ 



Ion. 



rvirvxTsxi. 



Dual - - - rv'jT'nffoiJLsOov, rvniaeaQov, rvifnarta^ov. 
(_Dor. rv'7rvia6f/.scr9x. 

Rule LIV. 
Formation of the two passive aorists. 
The passive aorists eiid in ^nv and nv: 
They follow the futures f and assume the augment. 

Examples. 
The passive aorists follow the same analogy as their 
futures, only changing >!(ro/>i«i into nv, snid assuming 
their proper augment. The first retains the 6 of the 
first future, so that it ends in hv ; the second terminates 
in 71V only. 

These aorists may be even all at once reduced to the 
futures active (which is still the shorter method, and 

consequently 



^ Of the Passive Futures and Ao^ists, 151 

consequently the most eligible in practice) changing w 
into OtiJ/ or r?, and following the same analogy of the 
penultima, and the subsequent letter, as in the pre- 
cedent futures. They are both conjugated alike, in 
the manner following : 

First aorist. 

Sing. - - - Irii^^'rtv srv(p9v)qy Irv^pOvf verheratus fuu 

Dual - - - - _ - - £rJ(|>6)7Toy, srv^^'hrvif, 

pj S lrv^9v{x£)iy srv^QrjTB, irv<p0'»a-xvf 

- ' ^iEoI. -------- ETV^fieV. 

Second aorist. 



Sing. - - - IrvTiYtv, Irvnrvts, lrv<aij, verheratus Jui^ 

Dual - - - - - - - IrvTrnrovy IrvTr^ryiv. 

Irvimyi-iVi sTu<jr^ref irvTfna-xy,. 

JEol. - - - - - . - - CTfTTSy. 



Plur. 



Rule LV. 
Of the third person ^olic. 
Both aorists may change %v into ivfor the third person 
plural JEolic. 

Examples. 

The third person plural ^Eolic is farmed from the first, person 
singular, changing u into e, for which reason it draws back the 
accent ; lrvip9v)t, verberatus sum ; arv(p&ev, verberati sunt : in like 
manner, IryV^jv, 'irvrtsv, riytfO^v, congregatus sum ; eys^QEv, congregati 
sunt : \y.ocr^y\9r)Vf ornatus sum ; Ixoa-tf.'n^ty, ornati sunt. 

Obsevoations on the dialects. 

The 'Dorics, xuho change -n everytohere into ct^follox^ the same prac^ 
iice here iji the passive : as ri<r>9xvf -xq, -cc,for ^(p9y)Vf -rf, -y), first aorist 
of oi'TFTo^ocif tango. In the same manner, \'KT>\yi.xffor IXotjw.>3y, elegissem, 
second aorist optative middle of oti^iu, tohich it borrows of 'iXu. 
ANNOTATION. . 

What voe have been saying in regard to the formation of these aorist St 
viz, to reduce them at once to the future active, is a general maxim for 
all the other moods ; tvhich beginners should be early acquainted with : 
so that if we find in the imperative rv<p9^re, for example, or in the 
optative rv(p9Elv)y, or in the infinitive rvip9y)mt, and the like, they may 
immediately perceive that each of these words comes from rv-^Hij* And 
as they are supposed to be generally as well acquainted mth the future, 
as with the present, they will ascend thus immediately io the theme of 
the verb. Now this is not so easily compassed by that tedious circulation in 
the formation of tenses, by a successive dependance of one on the other, 
which is certainly of less use than is commonly imagined. Nor will it be 
of any significatibn to object, that our formation may seem very extraor- 
dinary, since sometiines it^angesa word almost entirely, retaining only 
one syllable of it ^ as Kvwf solvo,. ^5Jw? Avfi^ao^a/? Ikv9w, hv^yivxh 

Ac- 
t 



152 Book III. Of Verbs. 

4'C. For this is the very advantage qfit^ that it shoius you in an in* 
stant tvhat you wanted. Moreover, those xiohojbrm this objection do not 
rejiect that Q-nao^cti, 0?/xa<, S^c* though of more than one syllable, are 
nevertheless mere terminations; vohich is si^ciently proved by their 
being found in the same tenses in all sorts of verbs. Novo it is alvoays 
allotved in the forming of tenses, to change one termination into another. 
But if it should be asked, ivhy we have not rather formed thejutures 
Jrom the aorists, than the aoristsjrom thefoitures ? the reason is, be^ 
cause tve chose tofoMow the same disposition of tenses in the passive as 
in the active ; where if was requisite to mention the future before the 
aorist, and even before the perfoct, by reason that the penultima of these 
tenses depends upon that of the future. Besides, it is of very little 
signification, whether the aorist be placed here first, and then the future; 
or first the future, and then the aorist ; because either way is equals 
since by our rule we learn to derive them both directly from the future 
active : a method which, if I am not greatly mistaken, will with the 
least application, prove extremely useful. 

CHAP. XVII. 

Of the Perfect, Plu-perfect, and Paulo-post -future. 
Rule LVI. 
Formation of the perfect passive. 
1. From Kot of the perfect active is formed {axi, a-oti, rat, 

in the passive, 
£. qix doubles [ji>, and makes (jt^^Aon, vf/ai, xT«t : but p^a 
takes y, and makes y(xon, gat, ^cron, 

3, ^ca, ru, 0w, ^w, tttu, assume a a- before ^ui, 

4. w pure sometimes assumes a <r, afid sometimes iieg- 

teds it. 

Examples. 

X HE passive perfect is formed from -the active 
changing x« into jwai ; as, 

■xJ/aXAw, fidibus cano, I'vl/aX-xa, £%}/d6X-jw.a/. 
cirsi^u, semino, satrot^-Kx, eo-ttix^-iaxi, 

K^IVU, judicO, KSK^l-XX, xU^l-{ACXi, 

Q, The active in ?><s^ makes (ji.[aoh, doubling the^^: 
and the active in x^ makes y/txat, assuming ay; as, 

- rvvru, verbero, r£rv-(pa,, rerv'i/.(A<xu 

Tiiyu, dico, XiXB-y(^x, XeXe-y/xa/. 

o^v(Tau, fodio^ wfy-%a» u^v-y^ai, 

3. Verbs in <^«, tw, Ow, insert here a o- before f*** : 
and likewise those in ^«, tttw (or fFUfo) when they form 
the active iu x^; as. 



Of theVerfect Passive, 153 

i^ti^u, Jidcio ; 7)^ti-Ktx, ^^si-criAocu 

'ETEiOkff jjersuadeo ; zjiVBi-Ka,, 'sjB'nrst-a-i/.xu 

oc^vru, haurio ; vi^vkx, '^cy c/xa/. 

XQ/J^ajf ' porto ; xiKo^i'ytoif xeyioiA,i-af/.oct. 

'crxda-a-u, OF rrUf Jingo ; 'CsivXx'Kcci ^ahrXiz-crfMocu 

4. Verbs in w pure sometmies insert a o-, in the 
same manner as the preceding, and sometimes they 
neglect it ; 



VJatnJ, 


percuUoy 


'ZJB'rrcet-yiXy 


'Os'itoti'criA.^u 


eXkvU) 


traho. 


£l\KV-Xaj 


uhxv-ai/.cct. 


hvu, 


salvo, 


XeXvKa, 


y^iXv-^jLOii. 


rlu. 


honoro, punio, 


rhf'xa., 


riri-{AOc,t, 



In all these verbs, the second person is in era i, with 
a (T, or with a double letter, g, if/ ; and the third is in 
rat, as we have observed in the rule. 

The second and third person dual, as also the second 
person plural, are formed from the third person singu- 
lar, by changing the two smooth consonants into aspi- 
rates ; or, if the termination happens to be pure, by 
inserting a o-, according to what we have remarked 
above, in the twenty-second, and forty-eighth rules. 
And the third person plural is formed from the third 
person singular, by adding a j/, according to the 
forty -seventh rule. 

The perfect ofyt^tm, to judge, 07^ to condemn. 

Sing. - - - )iix§i^ai^- xix^iaat, xU^irccif judicutus sum, Qxjui. 

Dual - - - xax^<fc£9ov, XBX^taQoVf xsx^ktQov. 

PI J >i£X»4/W.£9a, XBX^KT^Sf xix^iVTUl. 



■{o 



or. xEx^tf<£^0ie. Ion. xsx^ixrxt 

Rule LVII. 

Exception for the third person plural formed by 
circumlocution. 

JVken roci is not pure in the perfect , the thi^^d person 
plural is then formed by circumlocution f^rom the parti- 
ciple. 

Examples. 
The third person plural is formed by circumlocution 
from the participle of the same tense, and from the 
verb fi/Ai, sum, so often as the third person singular 
happens to be in tou impure : thus. 

X ' The 



154 Book III. Of Verb^. 

The perfect of (TTTs^Uj to sow. 
Sin^. iairoi^yi.otiy t^Trat^ff^i, ta-froc^ron, seminatus sum, (fcjui^ 

, Dual to-jra^/stsSov, sa-vx^BoVf savrx^^ov. 
Plur, i<r'7roi§iJi.i9xf sa-Trx^^Ey lairot^yi.iwt eroii 

0/*TU7rTw, to beat. 

Smg. rhvfjtixxi, rhv4'Xi, rerwrxt, verbem^us. ^um, OTjilh 
Dual TsrvtAfjisBoVf rirv<l>Qot, rsrv<p9ov, 

Plur. rsTviA,(A.eQx, te'ti/'^Gj, r£Tvixfj(.hoi lurl, 

0fxiy(4, to say, or speak. 
Sing, ki\sy(j.attt X£^E|at/, KsXiicrxt, dictus sinn, erjui^ 

Dual XeXty/xedov, XeXc^Soj^, XsXs^Gov. 

Plur. XtXhyfJLS^otf XsXe^Ss, AcAsy/xlvo; s/Va. 

ANNOTATION. 

TAe 4u}o last agree in analogy. For as the^y come from the futures 
4'«y and |ft>, they retain their double letter in the second 'person 4"»*> 
|a<, and assume the lenis included in the double letter, in the third 
person^ rsrati and xrxu The first person ought to take an intermediate 
before fta^, as ?Jxsy(juti ; but as there cannot be a ^ immediately before 
ixxiy and it xuould be too harsh to say rirv^^if the ^ is therefom 
changed into ^, and thence is formed rirvybix.xu 

Of -GTBi^ooj to persuade. 

Sing. tSBTrtta-iAXif zsi'mKraty vji'Treierrxi, persuaSUS sum, otfuu 
Dual tffcireia-fMe&ov, zjEVeKrOoVf tstvsta-Oov* 

Of «K»w, to hear. 

Sing. yucHoryiiXi, r>xii<7Xif Tiicsarxi, auditus SUM, orftti* 

Dual vKia-fAsQaVf ^xaafioj;, ^)c«o-0oy. 

Plur. w»7fi«$a, weafit, vpiHo-yLim t<Vt, 

Rule LVIII. 
Particular for the verbs in m, 
Nw changes yaa, into ju/^ai, y<rat, vr»i. 

The Attics take a (t, and make T^'K^xtT^Mi,^ 

Examples. 
Verbs in yw, which have changed the v into y in the 
Attic perfect, because of x, change it here into ^ji^ in 
the first person, by reason of the subsequent jc*, whereas 
the Attics insert a o-. But as there is no impediment 
in the dther persons, they all retain the v. Thus from 
^ajVw, 'sri(pciyii», apparui, we say, 
Sing. I .,, ^(^^/-f^*^ 

^ I Att. tTt^xarfxxu 

Dual J -ETE^^^MoV, 

} Att. 'SXtpcicTfJiS^y, 

Plur. I 'afs(pxjxi/.Edxi 



'as^xvactif 


Vfi.<P»rtou* 


'Sji^scy^Vf 


fsil^xf^v. 


^i<pxyQei 


v:t^xff.l*.ifOi tlffU 


§ 


Where 



Of the Perfect Passive. 155 

Wli€re it appears that, by the same analogy, ju is 
Teduplicated in the third person plural, when formed 
by circumlocution, because it comes from the parti- 
ciple of the preterite. 

ANNOTATION. 

From this first person Attic comes ^a<rfi«, spectrum. In like 
manner from fjLxoxlvut tahefacio, />tsf>tafa/A/x«/, Att. fjLS[xoi^a,arixatf 
comes fKx^ao-|xo?, marcor, tabes : from 'zsu^o^vfUi exacuo, irrito, 'sjat' 
^Sj^viJifjuxi, Att. >ax^u^v)TiMtty comes vjct^o^vtjfMSy irritatioy &c. But 
Caninius makes it appear, that this is only for the first person, 
because we find in Demosthenes, znxfu^wrati, irritati sunt ; \tKvt*.' 
fAxvrai, devastati suntj and the like: and that from 'ai'petycoLt is 
derived a7ro(p<iv(r4'Si asseveratio ; from zsi^Pavrat, avKop^yr^Sf syeo- 
phantay calumniator ; and not a-vxo(peir*i';t as if we said zss(p<zToci ; and 
in like manner the rest. 

The verbs, which, agreeably to the Attic form, have taken an » 
before ^a or ;^a in the Attic perfect, resume here their natural $ : 
Xfyw, dico^ AsAe^^at, Att. XsXo^x, pas. AgAey/Aa; : 'ai^irMJ, mitto^ tuitrofX" 
(P«, ziiirtixfjuxi ; nXjirraf furor ^ -KiKXa^Px, xsaXs (ji.fji.au, as also KsxAa/x/Afi^, 
by an analogy agreeable to that of the following rule. 

Rule LIX. 
E changed into a in the penultima of the passive perfect. 

1. When ^i follows a consonant in the active perfect, 

it is changed into ^a in tlie passive; as tr^cpa, 

2. But (iiQ^i^oi, ^i^^iyfAxt, must be excepted. 

Examples. 

1. Verbs that have ^s after a consonant in the active 
perfect, assume ^a in the passive. 

r§£<Puf verso, I'rfs^^a, tr^xyi^xu 

r^iiruj verto, rirqi(px, rir^xfAfJua, 

r^z^Uy nutriOf rir^z(px, ri^^x^^/.x4. 

The latter assumes the 9 in the passive, because it 
is not followed by another aspirate. 

2. The following verb retains its f : (3f£;^«> irrigo, 

Rule LX. 
Of verbs that reject t from the diphthong ?u. 
Sometimes the diphthong iv loses t ; thus, from lirtix'^ 

comes TiTvyfji^t, 

• Exam- 



166 Book III. Q/" Veubs. 

Examples. 
Some verfe that have fu in the penultima of the ac- 
tive perfect, reject the prepositive & in the passive; as, 

rev^ioy Jahricory rirzvxoti rirv^iiui. 

In like manner, 

'zsBvdoiJi.xt, sciscifofy audiOf zTswcixai, 

a-ivctTf COncitOf ciavyt^txi, 

X^^> J^^undoy Kz-xtv^cci et 'Ayyai^ou, 

ANNOTATION. 

Tliis kind of syncope has been already taken notice of, when 

treating of the future and aorist; it is also met with in several 

nouns verbal ; as ai/y^ys-K* confusio^ from yiu, yixxrui Jundo : (pi^ts, 

fugay from (pivyu, fugio : ci<pvKroSi hwvitabitisy from the same verb } 

and others of the like sort. 

Rule LXi. 

Of the third person plural Ionic, in the present, im- 
perfect, perfect, and plu-perfect indicative, and 
likewise in the optative. 

1. The third person plural Ionic, iji the passive present , 
imperfect y perfect, plu-perfect^ and optative^ is 
formed from the third person singular, 
.2. By inserting a, before ron or ro pure, and shortening 
the syllable that precedes it. 

3. When roa or ro are not pure, the preceding lenis is to 

be made an aspirate ; and if there be a cr, it is to be 
changed into ^ or ^: 

4. But the optative retaitis its diphthong before pc. 

Examples. 

1. The third person plural Ionic of the present, imperfect, per- 
fect, and plu-perfect of the indicative passive, as also of the whole 
optative (except the aorists) terminates in urx or ci.ro, and is 
formed from the singular in rai, or in ro : thus, 

2. If xtxi or TO be pure, an x is inserted, whereas in the com- 
mon tongue they put a v. And then if there happens to be a long 
,vow el before rent or to, a short one must be put in its stead ; and 
if there be a diphthong, the subjunctive is rejected. 

3. But if this terminatior^Tai or to be impure, still the d is in- 
serted ; but at the same time the preceding lenis must be changed 
into an aspirate; and if there happens to be a o-, it is changed 
into 5 or 9, according to the characteristic of the second aorist. 

4. Likewise in the optative an a. is inserted before rat or to ; 
but still it retains its preceding diphthong, without any sort of 
change: all which may be easily seen in the following examples. 

3d Pers- 



Of the Perfect and Plu-perfect Passive, 15' 



SaPers.S.Perf, 


Plur. Ion 










S TCtl, 


IWat, ~" 




rhrat, ~) 


'^rifxa.i, sedeo. 


'W£<piX v-rai, 


■ iaritiy 




'STS<^i\Yivra.i, 




<pikka>, amo. 


^ MVaKs-i rai, 


-arcti. 




amKEJVTfiH, 




avantifxai, recambih 


TiSe-i-Tai, 


-ctrcLi, 




rsBiivrai, 




riBrifxi, pono. 


tItv w rat, 


- (par 0.1, 




rBTVfA.fA.SVOi eIo-1, 




rxiTTro), verb CIO. 


XeXs K-TOJ, 


-X^TCil, 




X£X£7,a.Evo( sltrJ, 




'h'tyci}, (I CO. 


lipy K rat, , 


'X^rai, 




ai^vyf^evoi, esVj, 




o^vrrMyfodio. 


■k^v'Si a-TcLiy 


•-S'^rat, 




hfDpeiff-fxivoi slff-l. 


■ 


kpii'^M, firmo. 


'STETrXn a--rai, 


-Qarai, '^ for / 'msrrXyiTfxivoitlffi, ') from ^ 'STXh^ot), impleo. 


^-T-rai, 


-^etrcLi, 


/ '^ 


•na-fA.tvoi EicTi, 


/ 


ci.m, qano. 


"ZETH^^a-fl- TdJ, 


■^CLTCCl, 




'7r£<|)§acr(W£V0{ sljri, - 




<^a.^a), dico. 


EPpct-a- rcti, 


'^ara-t, 




Vfpcta-fxivoi Essrj, 




pa{(w, perfundo. 


E^^A-Tai. 


-etTOLlj 




l%|/aX|U£vo< etff-4, 




■^oKKu), psallo. 


l(P7r«p Taj, 


-itvai, 




IfTTTO.^fA.ivOl ils-V, 




a-Tni^a, seminu. 


^iv=..Ta;, 


• ar a.1. 




yivovrxif 




yivofxat, Jio. 


^Ids-Tctl, 


-etrsLi, 




riBsvrai, 




ri9r]fA,i, pono. 


z",^v-Ta.i, 


-arai, _^ 




^s'ipvvrctij 




.^h^vM, traha, ' 



In the same manner the tenses in ju»5v, that have the termination 
in TO. , . ■'■' '■ 



>iro. 


sa.ro, 


tx,£ i-rOy 


-arc, 


'!!rs<piM -ro, 


-Uro 



^ C %vriv. 

>- for " < EXEiVTO 



And thus the other verbs above-mentioned. 



The optative is changed thus : 

}C rvvroivro, "^ 

for < rv^Bha-oiVTOy > 

^ MEYa^OSVTO, I 



rvnrci-ro, aro, 
rv^Bnco-iro, aro, 
HS)(a.^oi-rv, aro, 



from 



{ 



<j>iXnvTo. 



rvTtro'ifjMv, verheiarer, 
ru<^Qri<raifA,riV, verberer. 
iisxa^olfA,vv, gavhus essem. 
from X'^k^) gaudeo. 



ANNOTATION. 

The poets sometimes shorten the diphthong, though it does not precede 
rai or ropure; as Iqiqi^arxt, in Hom.yor l^vj^et^sera/, they have used 
all their endeavours, taken from the third singular^ i^Ti^E/ra/. On the 
contrary^ sometimes they omit shortening the penidtima^ even ivhen rxi 
or TO is pure : as xs^oAwitTo /or lus^uXuvro, irati erant, Jrom ^oXoo- 
ixxi, irascor^ moleste fero: la^aiarai Jar ^e^otivrxif, diwisi suntj Jrom 
Saw, divido, convivor, scio. 

JVe likewise meet with IfaAaSajTa/, u>cv)x^^^'^'^f IXnXe^urxifJbrf 
l-xX[/,hoi, or h'aXicrijAvoi t\a), missi sunt, o/- orriati, induti sunt, 
from TsXXu, mitto, or roXi^w, orno : anvxviract, doluerunt from 
kyiui, doleo; and \\y{ka.vrxiy expulsi sunt, yro?n eAaJvw or zKnUi 
expello, moveo, agito : inhere xi^efijid the addition of the syllable ^a, 
and, moreover, ^ and ex. changed into £ in the two last. 

Verbs in ^o;, or aa-u, "whose future . is in cru, take a S instead of cr 
in this perfect, according to the Dorics ; -crl^^aS/xa/ kUx^i/.xi, for 
z:i^^x(7yi.ui, dictus sum, yrow ^^a^w, loquor, dico: KUxa-i^aif in- 
structus sura, yrom xa^&;, orno : and sometimes they take a 6; xexo- 
fv9(A.xi,from whence comes ksxoivOia.svos, instructus, arraatus sum, 
from Ko^va-aru, ^w, or <toj, armo, turbo, concito. 

This same 9 is found also in several verbal nouns in the common tongue f 
either instead of the <t, or merely by addition ; K^«f ^p-o?, fletus,^om 



!l 



158 Book III. O/^ Vjerbs. 

kXccu, Of kWo;, iLkxixTUt fleo : k/vijO/jio?, motus, from Kinc^, move© ; 
^xOfAoSf gradus^om (3xiw, or fxa;, vado^ incedo. 

Rule LXII. 

Formation of the plu-perfect passive. 

The plu-perfect is formed from the perfect, Uiking 
fc>iv for f^ou, and its proper augvient. 

Examples. 

iTlie plu-perfect is formed from its preter-perfect, 
by changing ja«i into fji,nv, and assuming its proper 
augment; riTviJi.iJt,cHf rsrxiix^rw. 

Its second and third persons are* likewise formed 
from those of the perfect, by changing oa into ; 

The third person plural ends in vto, when the third 
person singular is in ro pure, according to the forty- 
seventh rule; kU^tro, accusatus fuit ; UU^ivrc, accusati 
fuerant ; oXhevwhe it is formed by circumlocution : 
wherefore it is conjugated thus ; 

The plu-perfect, 

«. K IrsTv/xftijy, |t£ti»4'o, Irhvirro, verbertaus eratfi. 

»* \ Poet. lrvfji(ji,v)v, and rv(jt.iJt.ny, without the augment. 
Dual - - - $r$rvfA(jLe$o9, iTtrt/^dov, irtTv(p9itt* 

\ Dor. fTtrviA(ji.tff9ix. Ion. Irtrv^xro, 

Obsewations on the diakcts. 

Consult "what has been already said in the preceding rules page 
156, 157. 

"Au^roy pendebat, in Horn, comes from ocil^u, erigo, eveho, 

fuU Kt^u, perfect h^xxf passive 'h^^tt changing t into ; m^yML, 

m§(T«t, v)o§roiii Ion. ato^Txi, (from ijohence comes oic§rv)§, lorum 

er\s\s)f pluperfect clwf/A*3v, oioj§<ro, uu^ro, changing o into (»f„ as lof^irx, 

liXTntv and others mentioned in the tuientieth rule. 

Rule LXIII. 

Of the formation of the paulo-post- future. 

The pauh-post future is formed from the second per- 
son of the perfect, by inserting of/. before oa : thus 
TjTuvJ/«i makes riTw4'o/A«f* 

Exam- 



Formation of the Faiilo-post -future, 1 59 

Examples. 
The paiilo-post-future is formed from the second 
person of the perfect, by inserting o/a before c&i ; as 
'rirvfjt.y.on, rirM^cc^, 'nrv\f/oiJt,»t, niox *cerh$rabor^ I shall be 
beaten presently : ?,eXsy[xoiij gat, AAsga/xat, I shall be pre- 
sently spoken of. And this tense preserves its augment 
through all the moods. Thus -nrKpricoixoci, interfciar, 
comes from (pdofMoci, -arstpn^Ajn^ a-xi : m^(a(roi^oci, saucia- 
hor, from TtT^wcrxca, taking its tenses from t^«w ; and 
suchiike. It is conjugated thus ; 

The paulo-post future. 

Sins' J" * '''^■^^'■4'''/^^^ rsry-vJ/Tj, ttri-^troLi^ 

• o* \\qvl. - . - - - - '- - inxt-^ioti, 

-^ual - • - T£rf4/o/x£0oi», rtTovI/EcrOov, T£ro4'£c706y* 

Pliir J " ' '■^'""^o/*'^'** TeTuvJ/EO-flf, Tsry-vJ/ovra;* 
(^ Dor. rirv\oyLi(x^ot. 

ANNOTATION. 

We might have followed here another method of forming this 
tense ; which is, to derive it from the first future active, changing 
cir int^ o/Aflc/, and prefixing the augment : but this would not do for 
the verbs in x«, fxu^ va;, gu : nevertheless it may serve for the other 
verbs, as being much the shortest way. 

CHAP. XVIII. 

Of the other Moods, and the Participles, 

The Subjunctive. 

Pixsent and Imperfect. 

Sing. . - - rv7rru(AMi, rvtrrvt, rvvrvrcct, verherer 

Dual - - - rxmru^sQtitf rv'TrrvxrQoVf tlVt^jctOov. or 

p, 5 ' ' '^vTrru^AeQx, rvvTviaQs, rvvrmroci* 'rarer, 

\ Dor. rvimHt^EaQix, 

The second person of .this mood is in ^ subscribed, 
in all tenses, and in ail sorts of verbs, wherein it re- 
sembles the third person active of the same mood ; 
TVTrrn, verberet, or verbereris ; Tsoi^faciat, ovjias; riO^, 
ponat, or ponaris^ &c. though it be from a different 
reason ; because this person is formed here by con- 
traction of «at into w, as we have already observed when 
treating of the indicative passive^ which has also its se- 
cond 



160 Book III. O/Vehl^. 

coTid person the same with this :- whereas the third per 
son active comes from the third person of the indicative 
in ft, changing £ short into v long, and subscribing *, 

First future and a or is t. 



I 



Sing. 

Dual 
Plur. 



C ' ' rv^QiJ, Ty0S>^?, rv'pQ^, 

J Ion. rv^pOsoTf rv^^eni, rv^Osviyi, 

i Poet. I 'V'*^' ti'riSf iiy), et £tv,a-tf 

{ion. 

^ Ion. 
iDor,. 





rv'^^YjTov, 


ry^Gr/Tov, 




TyipSevjTOy, 


rv(p9£r)rov, 


- rv(p9u/iJ.sv^ 


Tv(pQ^Ttt 


rv!p9M(Tl, ' 


rv(pQ(ufj.sv, 


Tt)(p0E}7TE, 


TvpUuaiy 


rvp9u.'iAiSf 


. . . - 


rv'^^mri. 



vcrberattts 
sin'i, or 

Jiierim ; 
erOf or 

Jiiero, is, 
it, &c. 



^^"S-{lon. 



Second future and aorist. 



rwuy TV7rr)5, Tv'Trvj, 1 

TyTrf'w, and the rest as above, f Like the preceding 

Dual - - ----- rvTTrjToVf rvnrrjrov. C tense. 

Plur. - - - rvTrufAZv, rvvvj-TEf rvfruxJu j 

ANNOTATION. 

The aorists serve for the future in this mood, as we have observed 
in regard to the active. But there is sometimes a future formed 
by circumlocution : rtrviA^ho(;, 'i(joixa.iy ta-v), vjo-etcci, verheratus Juero] 
-iSf 'it, &c. in the same mannfer as we form the perfect of all verbs 
that are not in u pure, as may be seen above» 

Observations on the dialects. 

The Jonics in. the resolution of the aorists^ add moreqver <ti to the 
third person, singular ; rv(pOu rv<p9iu ; rv(^9r,y rvipOEvnn v ' to ivhich the 
poets add likexvise an t y rv(^9£tcu, -eiviq, 8fC. and then ctiangingthe proper 
diphthong into improper ; rv<p^6j, ry^Qy'^j?, ^'c. 9av/>j or ^dvvif for 
i4f><xvrif appareat,y?"ow ^aivu ; second aorist, iipoivov. 

Perfect and plu-perfcet. 

Sing. r£rvixp.'ivo<; u. v)^, v) 1 verberatus sinii qx fae- 

Dual TETy/x/xEva; viroi, nror, > rim, -is, -et ; essem, OT 

Plur. rtTvi/.yi.tyoi fti/xEv, ., viTB, uai J fuissent, -es, et, &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

Most grammarians say,, that this circumlocution ought to be 
used here in all sorts of coptracted verbs, whether their termina- 
tion be pure, or impure; as froxn 7^u, solvo, ?\£Xv(a,svos u, rf, f, <&ci 
'SJsiOuf persuadeo, 'aensta-f^ivos u, ^, rt<;, &C. - 

Nevertheliess, it is the opinion of some, that if /xa* in the indf- 
cative be preceded by one of these four vowels, vi, a, i, v, there 
is no necessity then for a circumlocution, but this tense is to be 
formed in t^iAxt ; as nvsit.'tfAoti, divisus sum ; nniiu^uii divisu& sim.f 



Of Moods and the Participles. 1 61 

sKTetixMif occisus sum ; IxT^jota;, occisus sim ; xsx^iiAxt, judicatus sum ; 
xtK^Zixecitjudicntus sim ; rknyuxh honor atus sum ; rsrufAxif honoratus 
sim : XiKviAxtf solutus sum ; AEAa;/*«/, solutus sim : which is the reason 
of my having marked it thus in the table of the passiv^e conjugation. 
As for the circumlocution, there is no manner of difficulty in it, 
since it is to be resolved simply according to the order of syntax. 

The Optative. 
Present and imperfect, 

-Sing. - - - Tt"7rTo»/x»)y, rvirroiOf rvfrroiro, verberarer, -erist 

Dual - - - rwroi/xtOoVf rv<Trroia-Qovy rvTrroia-Qviv, 

pi T " ■ " ^^''^rot^E^a, rvfrroicrOsf rvirroivTo, 

\ Ion. ---- ---- rvTrroixro, 

Firstfuture, 

Sing. - - - rv^Qy}ffoi(jt.'ny, rv^pOrtcroio, rv(p^vi(7oiro, verberer^ 
Dual - - - rv<p9yi(7oi(AsBovf rv<P^'/i<7Qi&Qov, ry^fiajfjo/T^nv. 
pi f Tv!^0j?o-o//^£9«, rv^QYiaoiaOsf rv'^B-no'oiyro. 



Plur. I 



Ion. ---- _--- Ty(^G>jO"0i«Ttf. 

Second future. 

Sing. - .. - rvrrvia-oifjL'/iyf rvir'na-oio, rvjrria-oirof verberer* 

Dual - - - rv<rry)a-oiiJi.s9oy, rvirriO'oiaOov, rvifma-o'itj^'nii* 

pj C vnricrol^tQxy rvnriffotaBef rvfr'n<roivTo. 

[_Ion. ---- ---. rvnYKTQlxro, 

First aorist. 

Sing. .-.r.?9./.v, r.^0«V, rv^^^iy 1 verberatussim 

^*"'^- I Sync. Tv(p6£r^fy, rv(p^i7re, rv^Utu 3 "^^' '^^' '^^' 

Second aorist.. 

Sing .--r.,..;^., r.W, rv'rr.U, ) ^^rber atus sim 

Plur. i" " " ^^'^",>'/^«''> rvTrz^^rs, rvm.v<Txv, C . ^_. ^^* 

(^ oync. rvira^tYf ----- rvirsisv^ J ' 

Rule LXIV. 

H syncopated in the optative plural. 

The whole optative plural may cast away n in m^iv ; 
thus rv(phtYifAsi^ makes 'rv(phT[xsv. 

Examples. 

All the tenses of the optative in yii^iu may be syn- 
copated, ]?y casting off n in every verb whatever ; a& 

Y rv(phi'n(A£Vf 



162 Book III. O/^ Verbs. 

Tu<p9fi»}/A£i/, Tu^GgrjotEv, Tu<p9£nr£, TutpOfrfy. In like manner 

TiOfrjitEj/, TiOfm, TiOmi/; *V«*j^ev, iram, iVo^rsu : ^ootfAiv, 
SoTfAEv, p(^^u(rorj(x£i/. Likewise in the second aorist, rv7rt7[Atv, 

and rvTreT^v^ &c. 

But the second person of the second aorist is not 
susceptible of this syncope, rxjirmn, and not TU7r£m, 
to distinguish it from the second person plural of the 
second future active, indicative mood. 

As for the third person, we might perhaps with greater reason 
say, that it is a change of » in the first person into e, according to 
the Boeotic form, hke that mentioned in the aorists of the indica- 
tive, vide Rule Iv. Thus from ilnv, essem, comes eTev, essenty for 

Perfect and plu-perfect. 

Sing. rtrvyi.i/,ivo<;i unvt e/'vj?, tUi 1 verheratus sim, oxfu" 

Dual rsrvixfj^ivu, fl'^jrov, £<ijt^v, J- erim ; essemorjuis" 

Plur. reTVi/.i/,ivoif £/'»/x£v, sl'vrs, eivicriXVt J seiTlf -es, 'Ct, &C. 

ANNOTATION. 

The tense is formed here by circumlocution from the participle 
and the verb substantive, in the same manner as the subjunctive. 
Some, however, insist upon its being formed simply, when [j^xi in 
the perfect indicative is preceded by one of the four vowels above 
mentioned, a, »5, /, y. 

For v}f say they, becomes an improper diphthong }?; as vl/**;, 
pasco, distribuo ,• vtvifjt.'niAxt, veni^'^fxyiv, ro, riro, &C. 

a, is changed into «/: xTEJvry, interjlcio, BKra^AXi, lKrxiiJi.r}V) <x7o, uTro, 

&c. 

i remains, but becomes long here, though short in the perfect 
-indicative; x^/vo;, JudicOf iiU^i{jt.ai, ksk^i/aviv, To, 7to, &c. a.'jTo<p9i^yiv, 
perheiUf Od. x. from (^S/w, corrumpo, pereo. 

V, according to Gaza, followed by Vossius, is changed into the 
diphthong vi : Xva, solvo, XiXvfxai, KeXvtiJt,Yiv, ylo, vTro, &c. But ac- 
cording to CamniuSj Ramus, Sylburgius, and otliers, it continues 
by itself, and is made long : thus, 

Sing. XsXy^>5v, XsXto, >.EXvro» 

Dual XsXviJLsOoVf XsXvcr^oy, AsAvo-Q^jv. 
Plur. XeXv^sQx, XeXva^Sf XeXvvto. 

The infrequency of this tense has furnished a subject far this grant' 
tnatical contest : some regidating it merely hy the analogy of the optative, 
lohich is ever to have a diphthong in the pomltima : and others judg- 
ing of it by the nature of this diphthong vi, which is ever to have an- 
other vowel after it. For, besides that the etymologicon quotes XsXvvro 

from an ancient poet, we find Xvi^viv, without the augment, for XsXvf/.'yiVf 
in II. <p. and XsXvro in Od. o-. And in regard to what Eustaihius 
^ays, that XikZto is there for XzXvoiro, with the Ionic augment in the 

second aorist ; in that case, says Caninius, v would have been short, 

whereas 



Of Moods and the Tarticipks. 1 ^3 

>i\)hereas it is long : moreover, it 'would have had an active significa- 
' iion, tvhich^ nevertheless, is passive. 

A.£/\yTo ^s yvTx axoirti* 

: — soluta esserit membra imiuscujusque. 

PaulO'post-future, 

Sing. - - - r£Ty4/o//xijv, nrv-^oiOi TETy-J/oiro, mox verberer. 

I^ual - - - rsrv^oifAsOov, rsrvyl/oia^oVf rsrv^oia-^riv* 

PI J " " " '''*''^4'0*Vs^*> rsrv-^otaOsf rsrv-^oivro. 

\ Dor. rzrv\>Qiyi.taBx. loii. TeTw\|<o*aTo, 

The Imperative. 
Present and imperfect. 

Sing, rvitra, rvnrla^Uf verberarCf verberetur, &c. 

Dual TviTTea-Oov, rwrsa-Om, 
Plur. rvirrsffOsf rvirrhBuaxv* 

Observations on the dialects. 

The Dorics put sometimes oijom^ as li^oifor SiJa, da. Which 
happens not only to the termination , hut likeivise to the pemdtimn ; 
as axoia-ov, Jirst aor, hnper, from cck^coj audi : I'Troix.oia-oy, obtempera, 
for vir^KHiToVf SfCf 

First aorist. 

Sing. Ty(p9tjr/, rv(pQyiri»Ji verberator tu, &c. 
"Dual rv<p9yiroyf tv^Qiotuv* 
Plur. rv^Ovirsf rv^Q'nrw<rccv. 

The passive aorists of the imperative ought to end 
in 0«; nevertheless this is in n, by reason of the pre- 
ceding : so that we say Tu^Qurt, and not Tu^9»9t, 

Second aorist. 

Sing. rvtrviOt, rvrt-hra, verberator tu, &c. 

Dual rifttioroif rvTrvruv, 
Plur. rv9r*jTf, vvrt'hruefxv. 

The third person singular, and likewise the two of 
the other numbers, assume here a t, and not a 0, like 
the first person singular. Thus, in the first aorist, we 
say ru^0>iT«, r\j(p^YiT0Vf rvipHTuv : and in the second aorist, 
ruTriru, r^TrnroVf &C. 

ANNOTATION. 

The imperative aorists are fr^uently syncopated ; as from ^Se/fw, to 
corrupt, i(pBoi§ov, I(p6a§»y, (p0a§jj5<, and casting (^ 9j, (pU^Bt : from 
jcatf«y»j9; comes xU^ix^Oii taken fom Hf^^iyofAonf clamo: from wvw-, 

yvtBfj 



164 Book III. Of Verbs. 

yij0; comes oivux^'y taken Jrom avwyo/A«/, jubeo. See the resolution 
of verbSf Remark 43. 

Perfect and plu-perfect , 

Sing, rert/4/o, r£rv(p9af, verberatus esto, Sec, 

Dual rsrv^QoVi rsrv^Quv. 

Plur. rirv^Oef r^rv^Oucnxv, 

The second person of the plu-perfect imperative, is 
formed from the second of the plu-perfect indicative, 
by dropping the augment ; as Irirvil^o, rirv^o : IaeXs^o, 

The third person is. likewise formed from the third, 
changing to into 0w, and the preceding lenis (if there 
be one) into an aspirate ; as etItuitto, rsrvip^u : Ihixmro, 
T^Xi^ca : IwiTTiiTo, zTBrnitr^ds, But if it terminates in to 
pure, then a o- must be inserted ; as UiK^iro : xfx^iVdw, 
&c. by the same analogy as that of the forty-eighth 
rule. 

The Infinitive. 

Present and imperfect, rvfrrsaQai, verherari. 

First future, - - - - TDtpQ^lo-fo-Sa/, verberatum iri. 

Second future, - - - rvrryKre^Oocif verberandum esse* 

First aorist - - - -IZ^^?""',. ■verberatum esse. 

Thus from Xxv^tkyUf lateo, fut. t^yktoj, x^yS^va/, Dor. Xa^^juj^, 
obiiium esse, Theocr. 

c««« 1 „^ . . ^rvtrrivizi, K>erberatum esse, 

feecond aorist, - - - S zc i - t^ • 

Perfect & plu-perfect, - rirv^9oii, verberatum esseeifuisse, 

Paulo-post-future, - - rsr\j'^s<r9(xt, mox verberatum iru 

Observations on the dialects. 

The Ionics change » into o in thepenultima of this tense ^ in verbs in 
. Tio}) yt,u, vuf f «, and draiv back the accent ; as zjil^Uj lUEVo^Qxif trans? 
fecum esse : //gt^, fAsfxo^Oxi, divisum esse, Sfc, 

Participles. 
Present and imperfect. 

rvnroixtvos, t5 rvirrofjiBVH, qui verbcratur, 

i TyCTO/XEV*?, Tins TUTTTO/ACVJJf. 

TO TvffToiJi^m) t5 Twro^sva* 

First 



Of the Middle Verb. 
First future. 



165 



Ty^5i7(7o/xEyo5, 
TO rv^^r)(Toi/.tvoV) 


T« rvpOriffofjiive, 
rviq Ty(p9ncro^£v»jy. 
t5 rv(p9ifi(7oiAiyii, 

Second future. 


verberandus. 


c rvrrviaroixBvoSf 


T« rvKvia-opiivtif 


*oerherandus. 


v rvfrv)ao(AiviOt 


rnq rvTT'na-oyi.iv'nt, 




TO rvTrma-ofASvoVf 


t5 rvjificro^z^H. 

First aorist. 




i Tii^OeUt 


T« TV?l6fl'T0y, 


verberatus. 


TO TV^Qh, 


T^? rv^Qll(T1f>q. 

t5 Tv^fisvroy. 

Second aorist. 




e rvmii, 


TK Tt/TrevTo?, 


verberatus. 


'/) rvni'iaXf 


T?y TV7r£lO->jr. 




TO rvTjhy 


t5 rvtrivros. 




Perfect and plu-perfect^ 


rirviA^ivoSf « 


t5 rsTviAfJii'va, 


verberatus. 


4 T£TviA.i/.eyif}f 


Tns rerviM[ji.£vr,s, 




TO Ttry/it/xsvev, 


tS TETf/A^iy*?. 

&C. 






Paulo-post future 


. 


TeT«4/0/A£V0iJ, 


tS TfTyx^o/x/ytf, 


r/2oa; verberandus. 


« TCTt/^/O/AiyiJ, 

TO T«Tv4'OMS»'oy, 


T^J^ T£Tti4/0/X,£y*Ji-, 

t5 T£Ti;\J/o^eti«. 





Ohser'vations on the dialects, 

^ The pariicijdes agree in their dialects with the nouns, whose declen^ 
don they follow. 

In the perfect the JEolics, casting away the augment, draw hack the 
accent to the antepemdtima ; ^XriiAsvosf strucky Jbr /Sf^Aij^eyoj. See the 
end qfthejlfth chapter. 



CHAP. XIX. 

Of the Middle Verb in general, 

M. HE middle verb is that which preserves a sort 
of medium between the active and passive, par- 
taking of both, either in its signification, or termina- 
tion. 

The 



166 Book III. Of Veubs. 

The perfect and plu-perfect conform in all moods 
to the active conjugation; and the other tenses to the 
passive. 

Its signification is in some tenses active, in others 
passive: and in some tenses, either active or passive, 
like the verbs common in Latin ; as jSta^o^a* toy pKov, 
*violo amicum ; pi06^o[jt.»i uVo ra pxa, "violor ah amico ; in 
regard to which it is difficult to lay down any fixed 
rules, practice being the best master. 

Hoxvever, it may be obsevoed that the futures, the 
aorists, and the preterites, are oftener taken in an active 
than passix^e sense, especially if it happen to be a verb 
that has no active. For even those which Caninius takes 
for passive in these tenses (as a-so-nTroc, computrui ; /*«- 
fMYim, insanivi; rirmoCf contabui ; and the like J are not 
really such ; or, if they be, it is only because of their na- 
tural signification, zvhich seems to have something passive 
in all languages whatever ; and is equally such in the 
present active, (rniru, putresco; /t^at'yw, ins,anio ; t^'kw, 
tabesco, 8^c, as in the middle. 

If besides these, there are still other verbs which are 
sometimes construed in a passive sense ; as M(ph^x, ffvm 
Sioe.(phi^o), corrupi, and corruptus sum ; f/pwya, from 
pYira-u}, ruptus sum ; S-^siJ/o^at, nutriar, from r^i(poi, &c, 
this is an ellipsis ; forxve must certainly understand Iiaoc\J' 
rov, or something like. Concerning which, see the Latin 
Method in the remarks upon verbs. Chap. i. as likewise 
what we shall say hereajter, Book viii. Chap, viii. 

The present and imperfect middle are the same as 
the passive throughout dl moods. The other tenses 
may be easily conjugated by the following table ; 
wherein we have inserted the aorist only at full 
length, by reason of its following a particular analogy : 
whereas all the other tenses are conjugated like those 
of the active and passive, whose termination they 
borrow. 



TABLE 



Of the Middle Ferb. 



167 



















- 




. «• -.ii 




^ 










+s •- > 




.rt 


















1-4 


» *{ 


i 


ff i^ i1 


i 


^ 5 




H 


jr 3 


o^ 


:L= S.S is 


n 


° o 




Fd 


S rt 


g 


*a cr a cr^s a* 


^ 


t; - 




^ 


NO o 


1 

h 


h 


-1- 

H 






eq 


i 












> 


a» 








i 






S 

If 


:i 


^ 


1 








II 




1 




? o 










^ 














^ 








> 






« O c^ 














CD '^ -^ 














Sew 




i' 




A 






-T ^ ^ 


i 




H 






ti S a 


-fe 


« 




P^ 
S 






V-^^V-^-^ 


?a" 


f 2 


' 


^a^ 






b 












h 


■ H 


hffi 










. «J 














•l- 














=>. 










• 




H c I 








> 

< 


o 0) 






I- 


" 




(5 


If 




f ^ 4 


3 

s- 








b § 


V 


b 


o 




S o 




hS 


h 


H 


h 




hS 








.^' . 3 








w 






ss -p 


1 


*: 




> 






h u 2 - 




^ 




O 








ST 


.2 




:z; 






3= s^ 




jr..~ 










IJ li 


a 
1- 






C/2 






-^ 


3 












^ 














o '-5 ^ 




1 




, 






t- •- 




CO 




W 






« .- ^ 








> 




. 


> ^ 




^ 




H 


M 


.? 


3 2 n. 


g 


-•J 

CO 


, 


•< 


".ss 


3 


^ c *5 




• .*^. 


. 2 


O 


ST 


, * 


1 ^ :i. 


jT 


_-o 


s 2 






1. 


-a lU -a 

< 
b 


1 




S ri 

t i 




hffi 


^ 


w 


w 


HS 


w2 












♦J 






^ 


c5 


^ 


c^ 


o 


• ^ 












e^ 


c c2: 




^ 




Sm . 












2 


o 


o 


■U 


P- ? 




'X> 


i^ 


< 


<! 


,a< 





168 ^ Book III. Of Verbs. 

CHAP. XX. 

Of the particular Tenses of the Middle Verb, xvith 
their Dialects: 

And fr sty of those of the Indicative. 

Rule LXV. 

Formation of the two futures indicative. 

From txi^w comes rv^ofAMy and from rvTrcayTWHiAoct. 

Examples. 

1: HE two futures middle are formed from the fu- 
tures active : the first by changing &> into o/x«i, tui|/w, 
rvr^^ofAsn ; and the second by changing w circumflexed 
into 8/A«t, rvTTco, rv7rg(xoci, by reason of the accent. Where- 
fore they are conjugated thus : 

First future, 

°' (^Dor. -5/x,«/, Ion. -son. Dor. -Etr«/. 

Dual - - - Tv^o^iBov, ri/^J/EtrSov, rv'^iaQov. 

Dor, -B/AEcr^a, 'ZQ^sa-OiZf -aTa^Sf -Svra/. 

Second future. 



PJ 



{ 



Si^g- {lo'n.' 
{ion. 



Dual 
Plur. 



rvTrii/sOov, rvTTeicrQov, rvjrtTcrOov, 

-tOjM,£oov, 'zeaOoVf -sz(t9ov, 

r - - rvrF^iAtOa, rvTzsTaQs, rvjinvron, 

1^ Ion. '£Oi/.t^X, ££(701, -SOVrXi, 



In hke manner, the first future of verbs in Xcoj f^cc, 
5/w, ^w, being circumflexed, must be clianged here into 
3tA,oci; as (TTTsl^u, seminoy first future active (tttje^w, middle 
(TTn^ny^on ; second future active (nru^u, middle (nroc^H^otn, 

It sometimes falls out, that the first and second fu- 
ture of this sort of verbs are the same, as we have ob- 
served of the active; as ^dxKa, first and second future 
^xXu, middle J'^^Aa^at. 

ANNOTATION. 

"We find in Horn. U. x, aXerxt for siXsTraci, first future from xk- 
Xofjisti, saliot saltoi 

There are, moreover, three second futures which do riot take 
a circumflex, contrary to the general rule, viz. tloy^xi, 'aioixaiy 



Of particular Tenses and' their Dialects, 169 

pxyoixui ; second person (pxysffoci, zrUinxt, and not 9*7?> '^'V* ^^» 
infinit. shrQxif iffUa-Qcxt, (poiysaQxtf and not shta-Qxif &c. which come 
from E^ft;, edOf to eat ; xsiM, to drink ; (p-nyu,, or (payo;, to eat. See 
the resolution of verbs, Rule xxv. 

To those we may adjoin the Jbllomng poetics : /3(o/xa/, ^teixxtf or 
(^luffoiixii vivam : vsojxxijbr wZ^ai^ vadam. 

The tenses of the other moods are formed from those of the indicative, 
making a proper change of each termination) after the manner of the 
active and passive; as may be seen in the foregoing table. 

Rule LXVI. 
Formation of the two aorists. 

1 . The two aorists middle are formed each from the 

active : the first by joining f^nv to cc ; and the 
second by changing ov into l^w. 

2. But (a pure, instead of vifra^yw^ by dropping jio-, often 

makes »it.w. 

Examples. 

1. The middle aorists are formed from the active, 
by adding ^lw to « in the first aorist ; incoi.^ lTj(r«/>t»ip ; 
€Tu\j/<», lTuvI^a/x>iv : and changing av into o^r.y^ in the 
second aorist ; grioj/, Ino^w : iTvirovy -6(jt,Y\v. 

2. But aorists, coming from verbs in « pure, fre- 
quently happen to be syncopated, by casting away »?, 
in all the moods; as iJ^/o-jtw, invenio, sv^cciAnv, for «u- 
^Yiorocixnv ; from whence comes ev^dfxsvog : in like manner, 
dvoi(AYiv for (avY[(roi^Y\v, adjutus fui, and the like. These 
tenses are conjugated thus : 

First aorist. 

Dor. '6^X0. 
Dual Xrv'^'ii/i.i^ov, Irv^xa^oi), lryv|/a<70^v. 

pi C lrv-\/oi>^sBxy Irv-^cco-^e) Irv-^uvro* 

'\ Dor. -afteo-Qflf. 

Second aorist, 

Sin^ Jew^ro/xijv, IrvvHf Irv'ffsro* 

°' \ Ion. -HO. 
Dual lry7ro/AE0oj', srviria^ov, Irvma-^v, 

Plur S ^'''^'^°(^'^'^9 srv'TrsffQe, Itj/ttovto. 

* \ Dor. -eaQx. 

Obser*vations on the dialects. 

We find ^ouffffuro, in Horn. Od. o. visum est, putavit, from toia.- 
^v, deJibero, ^e/^o-ftf, Bo't^trc*, and reduplicating cr, then dropping /, 

Z and 



Sing.j 



170 Book III. O/" Verbs. - 

and aftenjoards cutting off the augment^ ^oxaa-Xy ^oot<r(rci(j(,viv, -&>, -ctro; 
or else it comes Jrom ^o^d^u, '<7u, opinor, seniioy 'which in the first 
aorist middle should make s^o^cca'oifji.viVf l^o^dcrcir, -l^o^do-xro ; Jrom 
vohence casting away the augment, then dropping |, and reduplicating 
o-f they came to form ^oxa-cretro. See the etymologist^ and Caninius, 

But as the augment is frequently rejected, so it is often reduplicaHft^ 
especially in the'sBcond aorist. See Rule xxi. 

Rule LXVII. 

Formation of the perfect middle. 

The perfect middle is formed from the perfect active ; 

but takes its characteristic from the second future. 
Examples. 

The perfect middle is formed from the perfect 
active, taking the characteristic of the second future, 
instead of that of the preterite ; tuVtw, t£tu^«, middle 
tItuttoj, because the second future is tuttw. In like 
manner, (p^oi^<*i, dico, 'uri<p^o(.Y.oc, middle -sriip^oi^ocy be- 
cause of the second future (p^x^u ; -zxtAtiVo-w, percutio, 
m7rX«^«, middle zTiTrXnyKy by reason of the second 
future 'uKnyw : (SAaVTw, noceo, fii^Xa(poc, middle (is^Xx' 
€c£, because of the second future pAaCw, &c. This 
tense is conjugated after the manner of the active; 
thus, 

Perfect. 

Sing, rirvjrcc, rirvfrat?, rirvns. 

Dual ----- TETuwarov, rsryWroy. 

PI ^ rsrv'ffociA.sVf rsruVaTf, rsrvirxa-u 

' \ Dor. riTVTrxvTi* 

ANNOTATION. 

Verbs in oj pure should follow the same analogy ; as rla, honoro, 
second future active nu, perfect middle rinoc; "Kvm solvo, future 
Xvu, perfect middle \ixvx : <p6eo, nascor, future ^y^J, perfect middle 
'CTE^vxi thus ajcew, audio, should make regularly in the second 
future axooJ, shortening the penultima, whence the perfect middle 
should he mox, unusual; and from thence the Attics- have formed 
by reduplication axwoa, which alone is received. 

But there are several of these verbs in u pure, that toant this 
t£nse, especially those which have for their characteristic one of 
these three dipfhthongs, xv, tv, «; «5 \I^ay&;, tango, contrecto : zsui^hu 
instituo : x^sw, pulso : xia, lavo, S^c, And polysyllables in vu ; as 
K^rvut struo, adorno : <V;^Jw valeo, Sfc, 

Polysyllables in ^u, or crau, are also tvithout this tense ; as <^v\x(r<ju, 
custodio : ^xl'i^co, co, vado, and several others. Nevertheless 
o^va-a-Uf fodioi makes w^vya and o^<u^vyx. 

Rule 



Of particular Tenses and their Dialects. 171 

Rule LXVIII. 

Of the penultima of the perfect middle. 

1 . The active and middle perfect have generally the 

same penultima : 
% Excepting that tit, is sometimes changed into n ; 

3. j^nd cii into the improper diphthong yi, 

4. And that the t of a future dissyllable becomes o ; 

5. Finally, that n is changed into w. 

Examples. 

1. The penultima of this perfect is comnionly the 
same as that of the perfect active ; as rinytoc. rinoc : 
TiTV(poi, TiTvrc^: nevertheless there is sometimes a 
change, but only in regard to verbs that have an a. or 
an e, either alone^ or in a diphthong, in the penul- 
tima of the present. 

The cc generally remains, especially when otherwise 
this preterite would be confounded with the first aorist 
active; as ij^axx^, i^oiX>ioc, i^xKoc, and not svJ/>iA«, 
which is the first aorist. 

2. Sometimes it is changed into n; as ^ccXXUiforeo, 
mreoy rihxoo: kXcc^Wj clan go, jtUxnyot: but we scarce 
meet with more than these two. 

3. At becomes vi subscribed ; as (poilvea, zjitpvivoc, ostendo: 

f^^cclv(ay (jt,iy.Yivoc, insanio .* xxiw, kUviXy lira : §oci(a, Si^m, 

divido, epulum pra^bcOy comburo : x^^^^f ^^^> hisco^Kix^vx. 
Whichsome,asSylburgius and others, write even with- 
out a diphthong, with a simple ?i, -critpYwocy ^i^^x, &c. 

4. In verbs of two syllables, of whatsoever termi- 
nation, the « penultima of the first future active is 
changed into o in the perfect middle; as t^ettw, r^i^co, 

rh^OTTX, VertO : Xeyuy Ae^co, XeXoyct, dico ; v£[ji.oo, vsfjt.(a, 
vivofAdy distribuo : rf/AVWj ny^u, rirofji^a, seCO : 'urd^u), ^f^w, 
TffiTTo^ocy transadigo : dvuTexxu, ctvarjAw, dvxreroXoc, e.v- 
orior, compounded of rexxu. But if they be hyper- 
dissyllables, they retain their £; as o(peiXu, opxw, ^(psXu, 
debeo : dyyexxu, dyyiXcaynyy^xoc, nuncio. 

5. By the same analogy, those that have « change 

it mtO o» ; as uXa'^u, ccXii^u, ^Xoi^x, ungO : wa'Ow, -urua-Uf 

mTTQi^Xjpersuadeo: um. il^u, him, similissum. 

ANNO- 



172 Book III. Of Verbs. 

ANNOTATION. 

It seems, that the « is/ sometimes changed intOo; SiS Xxy^oivvf 
sortior, "KkKoy^oc : -roavSityiy, patiorf isiitov^tx, : ^luQahXuf calumnior, 

These two, rir^Xx, Jinivh and [ASjxs^^iXf or lASfAviXoc, curavi, are 
formed by syncope from rsreXsKx, (ji.efji.s\£itM, taken from nXiu) rsfxZ, 
and fAsT^BM, lAiXai : or else they proceed from hence, that the Attics 
changing these circumflex verbs into barytons, riXco^jinio, perficio ; 
l/^iKut atro, we say in the second future ts^*;, (as^Sj : from whence 
are forraed^the second aorists, eteXov, h'^AsKov, and the perfects mid- 
dle, rerfXat and ^[[aeXx, 

^Evyuy fugioy makes zsi'pvyx and -Kjg'i^jyya, fugi : l^kyuy porrigOy 
u^oyoiy from whence we find 6^oyv7» for u^oyvToc in the participle; 
and thence comes o^yvix, a Jathom, or six foot measure. We 
likewise find quoted from Sophocles, the perfect xixova for sarovxy 
from xrsivcof occido : o^u, moveo, concito, makes w§a, Att. o^o^x, 
and Poet, ^^o^a, concitatus sum, motiis sum : a^u, aptOt congruOf 
makes vt^x, Att. a^n^xy Poet, vj^x^x and a,^x^x\ irom whence 
»§x^w<;, -oTo?, congruenSf compactus, conveniens. 

Rule LXIX. 
Of the perfect of some particular verbs. 
1. ^'eOw makes sTO^ai, 5i«9« ; 

4. -^Wfi? jt^/jtAvw /^A:e^ iA£iJt,ovoc,j7^om [Asm. 
Examples. 

1. The verb £0w, as we have observed when treating 
of the active voice, page 107, makes its augment in 
6t, sTOa : but inserting w, the perfect middle comes to 
he sluQx, I have been used, or accustomed, from whence 
are formed the other moods ; and this perfect is used 
very frequently. 

2. o^vQ-crco, to dig, makes u^vyoc, and Att. o^u^vyoi, 

3. pV<rw5 to break, makes 'ifpccyoc, from whence comes 
pwyji, a rent. But pe^w, /o ^o, or ^o sacrifice, hath fp/eya, 
and by metathesis 'io^yx, in Hom. II. y, from whence 
also comes lo^yss, in Herodotus, for '/o^ys : this same 
perfect, according to the etymologist, comes likewise 
from si^yu, -^co, to doy or to enclose, perfect middle 
ii^yoi, s^yoc, and 'io^yoc. 

4. M([AV(a, toremaifi, takes ixs(ji.ovc6 fromiAim; whence 
it is formed, by adding a //.. 

Where it is observable, that several of these deriva- 
tive verbs change s into*; as zaino, sriTrrco, cado : rUu, 

rUrVf^ario : peVw, ^(7^7^, projicio : i-^u^^Tru, dice. 

ANNO- 



Of Moods and the Participles. 173 

ANNOTATION. 

The formation of the perfect middle, and the change of the penuU 
tima, should be carefully attended to, hy reason of the great multitude 
of nouns derived from thence. 

There are three of them that retain the augment of their perfect ; 
iiTTofAxi, video, uTTXf and by reduplication oitwrra^, from xiohence comes 
ItruTnty conspectus, oculus : wei^w, persuadeo, lai'nQiQx, whence 
'BE'jTOiO'/iffis, persuasio, fiducia: a,yTnroia-x,u, adverser or rependo, 
^*T<W£7roy6«, and from thence oc^ynirtTrovSiniTK;, jus talionis. 

The plu-perfect. 

oj K IrBrv'rrsiVi IrsrvwsK;, Irzrv'jTii, verberaverdm. 

°* \ Ion. -£«. Att. -55. - - - - Ion. -sot, Att. -n. 

Dual - - - - - - irtrvTisirovy IrirvrtiiTnv. 

pi C Irsrvireiyi.evf srervTrstrsf irtrvirzKrav* 

* \ Dor. -£//>(,£?. - - . - . Att. InrviTscrtx'i & nrvinaroiv. 

It is formed from the perfect, by changing « into 
tiv, after the manner of the active, and prefixing an e, 
when the perfect begins with a consonant/as here, 
It^tuttsij/ ; otherwise it has the same beginning : thus 
olSoc, novi, olhiv : iVTro^a, seminavi, Utto^uv. 

The explication of the dialects marhed in this tense may be seen in 
the active voices as liketoise most qfthefollovoing dialects. 



CHAP. xxr. 

Of the other Moods, and the Participles, 

The Subjunctive. 

First aorist. 

SInP' J T-v-^uyMtf i"y4']'> Tv-^nrxit verbcraverim j 

^* \ Ion. "yjoct. or 

Dual Ty4'A'/^s6ov, rv-^viaQovf Tv^^via-^ov. vcrberavero, 

PI J rv-^ijf^sc-Qxf Ti;\J.-'/3o-6e, - rv-^coyrott, 

'I Dor. -u(x£a&c6. 

Second aorist. 

®* \ Ion. TsrvTTcofji.at. Ion. -vixu 
Dual rvTiuiA-sOoVf rvTryKT^ov, rviT'/ia^ov. 

(_ Dor. "Jj^itaQa. 

Perfect and plu-perfect, 

c* f rtTvTTiOf rtrvTF^f rsrv'jTv}, verberaverhnf 

\ Ipn. TBrvifVivi, or 

Dual ------ r£/J?r>3roi^, TsryVjjroy. -issem, 

Plur. TErJTrwjuE)', rtrv'ff'nrsj rsrvTrarff 

The 

t 



174 



Book III. Of Verbs. 

The Optative. 

First future. 



Sing. Tx;4/o//x>9v, 
Dual rv^oiyi.i^oVf 

Plur. J''y4^o'V^«» 



Sing, rwotiA-ntii 
Dual rvjTolyi.tQoVf 

Plur. 5 '^^'^'"'/*^^^> 



Sing. rv^xifAvVi 

Dual TU\]/a//x£9ov, 

Plur. ■[ '^^^°^^^^^^> 



Sing. rvttoiyt.vtVf 
Dual Tv'rroi[jL£9oVf 
Plur. J'^^'^°V^^«> 



Tt/\^o<o, ru\|/o/ro, verherem. 

Ion. 'oioiTo, 



Seco7id future. 



rvirotOf 
TVTroTa-QoVf 



rvntoiro, 
rvnohro. 

Ion. -Oi«TO. 



J».y^ amist. 

rv^^xipy rv^^xiro, verberaverim. 

Ion. -«i«TE. 

Second aorist. 



rVTTOtOf 



rviToiro, 

rvTroivro. 
Ion. 'olxro. 



Perfect and plu-perfect. 



rtrviroi^ij 



Sing. 
Dual 



Plur. ' '^^'^^'^oifxiv, 



■■{ 



Dor. 



reTyTroifoy, 
TsrvvotTSf 



rervTFOif 
T£TuVot£y. 



verberassem. 



■OlfJLSS. 



Sing. 
Dual 
Plur. 



rvil'txa-Qov 



The Imperative. 
Fii'st ao7^ist. 

rv^oia-Quf verberato. 

Second aorist. 



Sing, rvn'^f 
Dual TV'jTSirQoVf 
Plur. rvixsorOey 



rvnsa-^uv. 
rvTricr^wcrav. 



Perfect andplu-perfect. 



Sing. r'srWEf 
Dual rsrv'jrtroVf 
Plur. TsryVer*, 



TErvrreTiOf 
mvrtlrwv. 



verbera. 



The Infinitive. 



First future, ruvj/so-fia/, 

Second future, rvrnTsQatt, 

aorist has an acute. 



verberatum esse. 
with a circumflex, 



whereas the second 
First 



Of Circumflex Verbs, 175 

First aorist, rv-^xa-Oui, verberavisse, II. v. axi<ica9txt, coming from 

aXea/. The SOrist vi><tvoi(xv}V, Poet. a.Aeua/:x>}v. 

Second aorist, rvrrsa-dxi, with *an acute on the penultima. 

Ion* rsrvTria-Qxtf as >^iKxQiaQoii» 
Preter-perfect and plu-perfect,^ rsrwsmi. Ion. rsrvirsixiV) Dor. rs- 

rvrFBiAevxi : as from ^f^/^e, and Poet, ^sidtx, is formed ^e/^/^xw, 

Od. X. coming from M&;, ^/weo. 

Participles. 







Fh'st future. 




ry4/o/!A£vo?, 


rv\^o^ivii. verier atiiriis. 




rv\]^o/x,£v»3, 


TfvJ/O^evvjJ". 




TyvI/o/xEvov, 


Second future. 




rV7FHl/.tV0Sf 


rvrrsixivH. 




rvTru^ivv}, 


rviraiA.iynq, 




TfTTs/xevoy, 


First aorist. 




TyvJ/a/xjvojr, 


Tu4/«/x£va, qui verberavit. 




tV'^^a^Jii'Dvii 


rv\/xy^(vinq. 




Ty4/ajUEyoy, 


Ty\J/fiK/w,£y«. 






Second aorist. 




Tfiaro^tEyoj, 


rvTtoixivH. 


\ 


Tyffo/x/voj, 


rvito^iwiq. 




Tf^'O/IASVOV; 


rviroiAfva. 




Preifer 


-perfect andplu-perfect. 




. ^irvirus. 


rsrvjToToqy qui verberavif, 




rirvTrvTxf 


rsTV'jrvix<;, ^ or 




TETyTTO?, 


nrvTforos. verberaverat. 



Of the Second Kind of VERBS in li : 

WHICH IS 

Of CIRCUMFLEX VERBS. 



CHAP. XXII. 

Of the Nature of Circumfle.v Verbs, and of the Manner 
of Conjugating them. 

OlRCUMFLEX verbs are so called from their ac- 
cent; because two syllables being drawn into one, 
this accent, which is formed of the acute and. the 
grave, is marked on the last ; as KT^m^ )iKw,frango. 

There 



176 . Book III. 0/ Verbs. 

There are three sorts of circumflex verbs; for they 
may come from verbs in £«, aw, or o«: which has 
given occasion to grammarians to make three different 
conjugations. The contraction is always formed by 
uniting their characteristic, t, a, o, with the vowel or 
diphthong of the termination : which happens only in 
the present and imperfect of each mood^ and of the 
participle : because it is only in those two tenses that 
these characteristics are joined to the termination. 

The other tenses are formed according to the rules 
of barytonous verbs, as we shall show hereafter, when 
we have treated of these two, which are oftener used 
contracted than otherwise. 

The manner of contracting these *verbs. 

Verbs are contracted in as natural a manner as 
nouns; insomuch, that they who have comprehended 
the general analogy of contraction, marked in the ninth 
rule of the first book, have no occasion to apprehend 
here any difficulty. However, we may observe, that 
these contractions are reducible to two classes : the 
foTmer, when two short vowels are drawn into a diph- 
thong ; as fs, sT; bo, » : the latter, when a short vowel 
is lost in the long vowel, or diphthong following; or 
that which is least sonorous in that which is more so ; 
as £)i, yi : iiCy a; ioiy o7; £w, w. Where you see that 
the vowel which absorbs the other, becomes always 
long ; as «^ w; and that the t is subscribed, as aot, w. 
This will appear more plain in the following tables, 
after we have reduced to a few rules all the different 
modes of contraction. 

Rule LXX. 

Of the verbs in £«, whence grammarians have formed 
the first conjugation of contracts. 

Verbs in £« make si of es, and « (f so ; elsewhere they 
reject s. 

Verbs whose termination is in cw, contract « into «> 
and io into ^ ; elsewhere they cast away the charac- 
teristic f; and retain only the termination. 

Rule 






Of Circumflex Verbs. 177 

Rule LXXI. 

Of verbs in «w, whence grammarians have formed the 

second conjugation of contracts. 

Ao, «w, are contracted into w ; hut xvhere there hap- 
pens to he a M^ it is rejected^ and * is siibscrihed: other- 
wise, the cont7'action is in a. 

In regard to the verbs in aw ; if after the characte- 
ristic 00, there happens to be an w or an «, the contraction 
is made in w ; otherwise it is in cc. But in making 
those contractions, you are not to consider either the 
* or the v; for if there happen to be a v, it is drop- 
ped : hence ua makes w, as if there had been only oco ; 
and the iWT« is only signified by a point under; so 
that ocm makes w subscribed , and au makes a : and 
in like manner the rest. 

Rule LXXII. 

Of verbs in ou, whence the grammarians form the 

third conjugation of contracts. 

Verbs in 6ca contract o followed by a short vowel, or 
by a into ov : hut if it be follozved by a long xoxvel, 
kt contracts then into w. Otherzvise the contraction is in 
01 ; eixept osiv, which tnakes au in the infinitive. 

As to verbs in ow, if the characteristic be followed 
by one of the two short vowels f, o, or by the diph- 
thong 8, the contraction is then in a. But if one of 
the long vowels ^ or w follow, the contraction is 
in w: and if there follow a diphthong that has a * 
either in it, or subscribed, the contraction is then in 
o7: except the infinitive, where * is first dropt, and 
afterwards os is contracted into a ; thus 6siv makes sv, 
^Pva-oB^v, x^vtr^v, i?2aurare, &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

These rules are as inellfor the active as for the passive and middle. 
But to render them more easy aud serviceable^ it is svjfficient tojbrm a 
simple idea of the common manner of conjugating^ as rico, or rvijlij; and 
qfterivards to contract the characteristic tvith the subsequent vaivel or 
diphthong, luithout being at thetrouble of conjugating and pronouncing 
each persoji two different tvays at once, according to the common method, 
'which is attended mth great confusion. Wherefore I have distinguished 
thefolloixiing tables by two different colours, to the etid that taking in each 
tense the black all at once (which denotes the common conjugation) and 
next the red of the same tense (which marks the contracted conjugation) 
young beginners ma.y learn to conjugate these verbswithout any difficidty, 

A A Table 



TABLE of CIRCUMFLEX 



Indicative. 



I>/X-< Arao, as, at. 
1. i ' /I ' 



auEVj 6<ri, a^i, 



E(?)/x^ Amabam,as,at 



Subjunctive. 



2. 



Amem, es, et. 



Optative. 



<j)<x- < Amarem,es,et. 



y- ot'U, otEti;f 01,11, 

TtfA' < Honoro, as, at. 
1. i ' "1 ' 






OCOtf cess, OiSf 

ErtfA^ Honorabam,as,at. 
!• £ doiAsv, delsf xov, 



awj cx,ip(;f oi,Yi, 
CO, a.s^ a, 
T</>t-<f Honorem, es, et. 
•^» £ oiu(jLBV,o(,if]le,a,UiTti 



y'AOllAt, a.Oliy dot, 

T//A- <^ Honorarem,es,et. 

-^* . J a,04fA,tv, aotlSf etoiSy, 



^ oiJy ostSf oe/, 

%ft/, OK, or, 

X^va-^lnnuro, as, at. 



^OOVf 0£J, 0£, 

Vfev, ej, ou, 
Ep^gJcr '^ Inaurabam,as,at 



^OU, OTpS, 0*7, 

Xfyo"^ Inaurem,es,et, 

'^' m ooiJisVf oyfkf ouvi* 



S 



rnaurarem,es,et. ! 



2. i poifAtVf wilef lotsv* \ 

\jJi(A,iv, oirt.) on,/. 



VERBS ACTIVE. 



179 



Imperative. 



Infinitive. 



Participles. 



££, csrco, 
elf tiruy 
^Ix- \ Ama, ato. 



^iX- 



r i 



An 



^iX- 



Amare. 






.-^Honora- ai 



Tt^- J Honora, ato, 



7 



Sire, aTWcrav. 



Co(,£iyf 
T//t«,- < «Vs 



Honorare. 



T/^- 






-0 



Xfyo-/Inaura, ato. 

J ods, oirua-oiVf 



X^t 



CInai 



Inaurare. 



X^va- 




CHAP. 



180 Book III. (^ Verbs. 

CHAP. XXIII. 

Observations on the two tenses capable of contraction 
in circumflex verbs. 

That several change their Char act eristic^ and therefore 
vary in their Contraction, 

JL HERE are verbs that have sometimes «, and 
sometimes s for their characteristic, terminating in 
«w, or in iw, in the same signification ; as yyi^iu and 
yn^duy misereor : Xooipica and Xooipotco, cesso: ^v^iu and 
^u^a«, rado : a-vhiu and a-vXm, spolio : uIohoo and oclovacu, 
perfundo. 

Others have sometimes s, and sometimes o; as SyiXm 
and hKota, manifesto : s-oc^^ioj and ra6/>tow, pondero : -uro- 
hif^ouj belligero. 

Others have sometimes oo^ and sometimes o ; as 
0ioua and |3{o«, vivo. And sometimes even f, «, or o; 
as xj/u^£w, Kvv^duy and ^.w^omj gannio. 

There are some likewise which are both barytons 
and circumflex ; as, 



a\§0^0(,ly 


et alSsofjuxi, ocl^BiAOiij i^e^ereor 


(^oa-yicOf 


et (iocryiEOo/pasCO. 


yri^cOf 


et ynUoi, gaudeo. 


y^d(pco, 


et y^ix(p£(a, scribo. 


^Ma-aca, 


et iiSoioryiiu), doCCO, 


iUa, 


et sl^'M, scio. 


stAw, 


et £iA£w, t^o/w, verto. 


\KkCi), 


et lAx£w, /r^^o. 


£7rijW,£A0jM-at, 


et^ iTTif^sXsofxoci, euro* 


y.\}Xii/Sa)f 


et avXivSico, volvo. 


KUOOj 


et Kuiw, w/ero ^e^/o. 


gJ^o^uat, 


et iv^Hf/.ocij 7" ado. 


pMcOj 


et pi7r]e(a,jacio. 


r^u'xw. 


et r^\jxo(o, attero, absumo. 



That dissyllables in iu are not conttacted throughout. 

Dissyllables in ia are seldom contracted in the first person singu- 
lar of the present, or imperfect; no more than in the first and 
third plural. Wherefore we say, vsKivi navigo j -ctAeV"* naviga- 
mus J vsXEsa-if PMvigant ; and not taXA;, «7^«fcev, w^a^/; though we 
read in Hesych. ^^g-t for JeW;, ligant. 

Neither 



(y^AeTEifSEs o/* Circumflex Verbs. 181 

Neither are they often contracted in the subjunctive, optative, 
or participle ; though we find -crXwv in verse for ^tAiVv, navigans. 
l,vv raj ©Ew ts^uv, K^¥ Im ^mo^ 'aT^iois, 
Cum deo navigans^ etiam in crate naviges. 
And in Aristophanes ava^Jv for avx^iuv, religansy coronans. 

But they are contracted in the imperative and infinitive, though 
we sw)metimes find them uncontracted; hotppisiv, diffluere : ^istirT^iiiv^ 
pernavigarej transmittere. 

Rule LXXIII. 

The contraction a changed into «. 
A contracted from as is sometimes changed into n. 

Examples. 
The contraction of «£ into <», whether with i sub- 
scribed or not, is by the Dorics formed also in vi; it 
being customary with them, as the etymologist ob- 
serves, to change af into n. For as from roc li^ocy they 
say TYiy^oc, mea ; so from y^xccsig they form ysXrig, rides; 
from ii^ocstg, JtJ^r]?, sitis ; even without subscribing the 
*, because they reject it before the contraction. In this 
they are sometimes imitated by the Attics, who say 
7s-Em<;, esuris ; ^S?, mms ; ^vi, *Divit ; ^^tj, mvitis : and 
in the imperfect s^YiVy vg, v\, vivebam, as, at, from ^aw, 
vivo: and the same in the infinitive. But of this 
hereafter. 

Observations on the imperfect indicative. 

The imperfect of all circumflex verbs has an accent on the 
pen ultima; an acute, if the last be long; a circumflex, if it be 
short. 

Among those that come from dwy some are monosyllables ; as 
Jfjc&j, l^aiyfacio : xAaw, kXw, frango : but verbs of two syllables, 
wiiich according to the Attics have rejected the <, are not contracted. 
Hence we read in Lucian, r/xXae/?; quid plorasf for KXxUts : thus 
from x.aoj for xaw, urot comes xas/?, and not x^^, &c. 

On the contraction of the subjunctive.. 

We have remarked that in verbs in ou, the o contracts Into ot, 
when it is followed by an ^ subscribed ; whereas it contracts into u, 
when there follows a simple >?. Examples of the first are seen in 
the singular; and of the other in the dual and plural. 

Therefore the second and third person singular assumes here in 
all sorts of verbs a diphthong in the penultima, either proper or 
improper. But in the dual and plural there is always a long 
vowel, as may be seen above. 

On 



ISSr ^ Book III. Of Verbs/ 

On the Optative. 
Rule LXXIV. 

That the Attics change pn into v\v. 
In the optative of circumflex verbs the Attics change 
[JA into nv. 

The Attics change f** into w in tlie present optative 
of the three sorts of circumflex verbs, and conju- 
gate them like the passive aorists, according to the 
analogy of the conjugation of verbs in p, of which 
hereafter. 

It 

Thus (p^ovoiYiv, saperem : ytaXoUy, wcdrem : piyoinv, fri- 
gerem, horrerem : (p^H^oinvj tuerer : ocyxTrmv, diligerem : 
dToS^tcnv, aifugerem : r^v(punvy gauderem, 

ANNOTATION. 

As there are several barytonous verbs, which become circumflex, 
or borrow their tenses from thence, so they admit of this same 
formation ; as hvs(p£vyoiyiv from Sophoc. in Eustath. for lx9rj?)£yyo/- 
(Af, from (pEvyw, fugio : Xa^o/vjv, or, in the iEohc form, Kxy^onvt 
for >.a,yoty^i, from Ka.yya.tuy sortior. And in Hom. II. |. l'jriax'>''^^9 
tenere poteris, the second person of l-Trio-p^on^v, for Wio-yoiixi : t^e- 
^oi>jv, and by syncope, r^s(poiVf in Eurip. for r§£(po(iJA, from rfe^a;, 
nutrio. 

On the infinitive, 

I should think that not only in verbs in os;, but, also, in 
those in ioj and aw, the contraction of the infinitive is made by 
first casting away ;, and afterwards drawing the two vowels into 
one, as usual; z^oiktv, '^soisTv: ^ocistv, (Booiv (and not j3oav, according 
to Urban and Caninius) : ^^vaosiv, ^^yo-Sv. Though Gaza will have 
it, that verbs, in xm subscribe / ; jSoav, clamare : 'sjeivSiv, esurire : pre- 
tending that all infinitives should have a diphthong, except ^^v, 
vivere. 

The opinion of -Gaza has heen adopted by the greatest part of 
the modern grammarians, Ramus, SylburgiuSi Crusius, Sanctius, 
Merigo72, and others. But Lascaris in his third hook, treating of S. 
subscribed, says that even the Greek grammarians themselves ivere di- 
vided upon this article : and besides the authority of Urban and Cani- 
nius, tue are told by Theodosius, Herodian, and some other very ancient 
grammarians, that there is this difference between barytonous and cir- 
cumjiex verbs, that the former take their injinitivcfrom the third person of 
the present indicative, by adding v ; tvtHei, verberat ; rvirlm, verberare : 
t-^hereas the latter take it from the third person of the imperfect, by 

f adding 



Of the Tenses of Circumflex Verbs. 183 

adding-*, and dropping the augment ; as IWs/, faciebat ; zrottTv, facere : 
ISox, clamabat; /3oav, clamare: lxevo-5, inaurabat; %§u<75v, inau- 
rare. And their reason is^ that no tense ending tviih v, has before 
this V another letter tvhich is not pronounced i which toould be the case, 
if a. "were to be subscribed in the infinitive. And the justness of this 
analogy appears still further Jrom hence, that if voe were to form the 
infinitive of verbs in ow, from the third person present, we should be 
obliged from x^v<tq7, to make ;^ft;<Tory, inaurare; whereas, taking it 
from the imperfect lx^^<^^i ^^ naturally make ^^vaav. Wherefore 
this ancient formation seems to be the most analogical. We also 
meet with very ancient MSS. in the king's library, which siifficiently 
ascertain it, though we do not pretend absolutely to condemn the other 
manner. 



CHAP. XXIV. 

Of the Tenses of Circumflex Verbs ^ which conform to 
the Analogy of the Barytons. 

Rule LXXV. 
Of the penultima of circumflex futures. 
A shojH "oowel before a circumflex "verb is commonly 
made long in the future. 

Examples. 

V^IRCUMFLEX verbs commonly change their cha- 
teristic into its corresponding long vowel in the 
future, and consequently in the perfect : thus, 



:]■' 



\ ^oa,u, clamo, i3o73(7w, ^£.Qo%y.(X. 



o into u x^va-ou, tnaurOf XV'"^'^^^^ nex^varuKX. 

Nevertheless we must except severalwhich retain their 
short characteristic. 

1. Whether it be s ; as ot,\Uu}, ad reverentiamadduco, 
aiJsVw : and in like manner d^yiiu, sufficio ; ocxico, molo ; 
cc>iico, medeor ; niaiu, rixor ; oXico, perdo; tsa/w, per- 
ficio; T^fcw, trepido ; gew, polio. 

2. Or a; as ysxduj rideo, yAao-w : likewise (pu^clu, 
deprehendo ; ^aAaw, laxo ; lAaw, agito ; l^aw, amo ; 
o^awj video; -un^cHoi, transeo; -urn^otia^ tento; (pv^olco, 
misceo. Also dissyllables that do not form a verb in fAi ; 
as ^Aaw, contundo, collido, ^XcH^u; xAa«, frango, 

^?Lkoimi (pKdoo, contundo, voro ; (5'^aw: facio, 8^c, But 

those 



184 Book in. (y Verbs. 

those that form verbs in /*», change a. into n in the future \ 
as rXoiia, t^Ji/x;, tolero, tAwVw; xf«w, xf^i"'*^ commodo, 
do utendum ; (p^doj, ^OJJ/xt, prasvenio. 

3. Or in "verbs not derived from a noun ; as d^cu, 
aro, d^oa-u; ovouj, vitupero, ovUoi. But those derived 

from a noun, change o into w; as p^fu^-ow, p^^uo-wo-w, 
inauro, from j^^uo"o?, aurum : p^s^^ow, p^ft^&Jo-w, tna- 
nuum vi supero, in potestatem redigo, from ^i(^, 
manus, &c. 

4. And generally/ all those, from whence are formed 
*verbs in (txw, or in vm, and vvfji.i, retain their short 
characteristic; as, 

el^ica, or d^iaau, placeo, fut. oc^e<ru: oi^(pie(a^ or a/A- 
^imuw, circuminduo, jTm^. eVw. In like manner, 

y*i^aw, whence yri^oc<r)iw, seneo or senesco, yn^afa-iji: 
x^^ficw, whence :is^ocvvv(a, misceo : Ts-ildu, xvhencc -urduv- 
^vca, pando. 

0oca, whence j3o!rxw, pasco, j3o<rw; o^ow, whence l^v^u, 
juro. 

Several of these verbs have even a double future^ thai is, inith a long 
or a short votoel: and then the verbs in iu oftener maJce ia-o, than vtruf ; 
as lirixmw, laudo, approbo, Ivonvia-u, vka^ S^c. always retaining e short. 

Rule LXXVI. 
Of the second future, second aorist, and perfect mid- 
dle of circumflex verbs. 

1. Circumfle.v verbs are either zvithout the second fu- 

ture and aorist, and perfect jniddle : 

2. Or else they form them from the present, after the 

contraction is made, without making any change 
in thepenuUima. 

Examples. 
1. Circumflex verbs coming from ow, are generally 
without the second future and aorist, and perfect mid- 
dle, which is always formed from the two former tenses. 
Those that come from Iw, or «w, have these tenses 
but very seldom, and only when the verb, after being 
contracted, does not terminate in « pure; as ^iA^w, 
^iXw, amo, 

^. And then these tenses are formed naturally from 
the present, after the contraction is made, retaining 
its characteristic and penultima; and assuming always 

their 



Of the Texses of Circumflex Verbs. 185 

their proper augment and termination, without mind- 
ing the other rules of the penultima of the second 
aorist, or the second future of barytons. 

The present and second future are then alike; 
as <ptA£w, (ptAw, mno et amabo: and thence comes 
the second aorist, £(pi\<^v; perfect midd\e j sriipiXoiy 
amavi. In like manner, tsAsw, teAw, perficio et ytrfi- 
clam, and not r^Aw; second aorist, heXov, and not £tc»- 
Aoy , perfect middle, rir^xd, and not TfcroAa;, perfeci : 
Shttm, ^sttUj sono Gt so?7abo: Uawovj ajid not 'I^ottqu: Si- 
h-TTcc, and not ^ihTTOi, sonavi : ev^eoo, invenio^ bv^ov, Luci. 
and not v^ov^ inveni* Likewise jwu)taw, juuAw, miigio 
' et mugiam : if^vKov, iJ^i^A^iKcx,, mugiviy &c. 

But sometimes the poets change the short penultima 
into a long one, in these preterites : thus from Xuxico, xot- 
Aw, loquor, obstrepo, comes xixixXoc, in Eurip. and As- 
ArAa in the Etymologist, Erom jWfAsw, euro, comes ^al^tiAa: 
^ ro<T<f(x. y,i(XYiXB, Horn, cur^e sunt. 

Mo?iosi/llablesare always deprived of these same tenses, 

e.vcept the three follozving, a-x^coy a-^u, habeo et habebo, 

f?^om whence comes kocIcco-x^T;, inhibebis : 'ia-x^v, habui : 

a-^eu, extinguo, o-^w, eVcov : o-7raw, q-ttw, evello, traho, 

sorbeo, eVttoi/, &c. 

Of the other tenses and moods. 

The other tenses are easy. From the future (piX^ircu, for in- 
stance, comes the first aorist £<p/?i'/3o-», amavi: from the perfect 
zjy3<pi^m»t 1*3 formed the plu-perfect I'jrsipiXnKsiv. And so in the 
other moods. 

In the subjunctive first aorist (piXriactiiJ.if iEol. (^iK-na-uot, aq, 
perfect 'cst'-PiK-Uoi^i ; and in the same manner the rest : which 
agreeing entirely with the analogy of barytonous verbs, does not 
want any further explanation ; we proceed tlierefore to the passive 
and middle, and thence to the peculiar dialects of these verbs. 

CHAP. xxy. 

Of the Passive and Middle Circumflex, 

J. HE passive of circumflex verbs is formed from 
the active, following the same rules of contraction, 
and the same remarks as we have made above. 
Wherefore it will suffice to exhibit here a tatble of 
its conjugation. 

B B Table 



186 



TABLED CIRCUMFLEX 



I. 

Pres 



Imp. 



II. 

Pres 



Imp. 



III. 
Pres 



l!?ip. 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive. 



^o^xiy sviy s£rxi, 



^ -X Amor, aris, atur. 

# eofjtsQa, sea-Bs, iovlai, 



2. 



Amer, eris. 



1. 



Amabar, aris. 



Optative, 



^'X-<^Amer, eris. 

■^ • # £ ot^sQa, ioia^Sjioivlof 



r</x- <^ Honoror,aris,atn: 



RflfA, -^ Honorabar, aris, atur. 
1 . ^ aofji,s9a, aBC-dBfdsvlo, 



c 



t;^.-.9x-xj9i. 



/^ at*. 



'/:*--\ rionorer, eris. 
2. 






/*- < Honorarer, eris. 

" £ aolfjt£Qk,a,6ia^£,ioivlo 



oo(/.xif orif osTXh 

-y.x., rT; ^rx 
"X^va-^ Inauror,aris,atur' 

1 . £ oif/,eBa^6sa-QBf ooylat^ 

ilJ(^9X)>iS-9e,^ViX 



\ -^U.Xi-i -J.) M7XJ, 

^^V(T<f Inaurer,eris,etur. 
^il/lA.i(istfU>aQs,uvlx 



1. 



Inaurabar, aris, atuc. 




oolfn^i^Vj ioiOf ootid, 

Inaurer, eris> etur. 
ooifxsQayiotTQB, mvlof 

r^Uidx^'Ji's-deyJiylo 



VERBS PASSIVE. 



187 



Imperative. 



^iX- 



£8, ££<7-tJ6;, 

Amare, ator. 



Infinitive. 



LAmari. 



Participles. 



SOfAtVOVf SOfAZVUf 



\ '' 



i<r9u, 



/ — 'f 



TiiJi,- ^ Honorare, ator. 



^Honorari. 






X^vo- <^ Inaurare, ator 



Linaurari. 



X^vo"- 






Of 



188 Book III. (y Verbs. 

Of the perfect passive of circumflex "verbs. 
The perfect passive is formed from Jthe active, by 

clianging' >c« into jw,ai ; as zmrotviMay •nrsTroir/xa; : Ps^oriytoiy 

P£^or)[ji'On : x£^^v(ruyix, yi£)(^^\j(rcoy.oci. When the third per- 
son singLvlar happens to be in ra.i pure, as p^^oyilxi, 
zTSTToirilai, ytex^vTcSluL, a (t is inserted in the dual, and 
in the second phiral, after the manner of barytonous 
verbs. 

But if the penultima^of the active be short, a c is 
likewise insefted in the first person ; as in rsxico,f?2io,rs- 

Except among those iusw; J^ew, ligo, ^gJsxa, (JsJ^^aj, 
from whence comes l^i^Tiv. Though we say o ^scr/jtof, 
"vinculum, as if it came from ^iha-^/^ai. 

Except also among those in aw ; ^^oiu,facio, Si^^ocaoc, 
Si^^ocixoiiy from whence ^^a/^a, reprcesentatio, actus comi- 
cus, aiit tragicus : as likewise o^aw, mdeo, w^axa, u§ocfjt.om 
S-^ao^sit, specto : loioy.cn, mcdeor : zTsi^ocoy^on, tento. But 
the folloVi^ing have both : y.B^oioo, misceo, KSK£^cciJt,xt, 

and K£)iipa(ry.ai I Ixdu, OV IXocvvca, agitO, riXocuoci, and 
//fXcifrycii. 

Except likewrse among those in ow ; oc^oco, aro : ri^oKoc, 
i^oyoci, (Ttxi, rocij from whence cc^orn^, arator. 

Of the second parson in a-xi. 

When the second person singular of the present is 
in o-at, according to what we have said Rule L. the 
contraction then is made differently ; as y^av^doyoci, 

(ayocij glorior, yiotv^ocio-ai, acai ; and not y.oL^jyoL'A^ y.ot.\)yy.. 

But this is still agreeable to the analogy of the rules 
of contraction, since as ought to make a, according 
toRuleLXXL 

Of circumflex middle "verbs. 

The present and imperfect are the same with the 
passive^ after the manner of barytons. 

The second aorist, second future, as also the perfect 
and plu-pe'rfect, ought to conform to the rule 
above given, page 183. 

So that there remain only two tenses, viz. the first 
future and first aorist, which are regularly formed in 

the 



Of the Dialects- of Circumflex Verbs. 189 

the same manner as barytons : thus from <ptA£w, nVw, 
is formed, 

First future. First aorist. 

Indicat. (piXria-ofJ^xi, Indicat. l<piXyi(rcicfxnv» 

Subjunct. (piXva-uiMxi, 
Optat. (piXr,a-oifxnv. Optat. (piXritTociiAn]/, 

Imperat. (plxYjo-xt. 
Infinit. (piXna-sG-^xi, Infinit. (piXria-ocG-Qxi. 

Parti cip. <ptX»]<ro/A£V(^. Particip. (piXr^a-oiiAtv^. 

In like manner the other verbs in aw and ow; ififAOM, 

'HG-cOj riy.yi(roiJLMf iri^YiO-oi^rw, &C. p^^'JCow, (Jew, ^^V(j-(iO(rofA,oHf 
l^VG-uG-otfMnv, &C. 



CHAP. XXVI. 

Observations ofi the Dialects of Circumflex Verbs, 

^ ONCERNING circumflex verbs, over and above tiohat they 
have in common with harytons, rve may remarh here, 

1. That in verbs in iuy the poets and Ionics insert an t before «, fo 
form a diphthong ; as 'anlaax, for -zsviua-ix, spirans : a,\imit,ty, raed^ 

JXiViV, Jor ciKioixsy, &c. 

2. That the Ion. and Dor. often change « into ry, in verbs in 
Ew, and sometimes in verbs in «&>, lohen they do contract, which is not 
always. Thus they say ^oisvvrxt, for 'csoi^ra.i) faciunt : av^^Ev^tEwy, 

for ccv^^ov^^vos,from ocv^^oc^, viriliter ago. 

3. That the Ionics, whofrequently contract those in da, {which they 
omit to do in other verbs) sometimes insert also an e before u ; as xfsal^ 
/tiEvo? for ^^uysvo^, utens, from ^^doiAxi. But when they do not con- 
tract these verbs, they generally change the characteristic a into n, 
loto^iiosf for oDxo[/.tvos, visus, from o^cio^xi, videor : ^f Esra/, for 
^^oUrcci, \ititur,fro77i ^^uo^xi, utor. 

4. The contraction u is changed into a, by the Dor. and JEot, 
yaXoicriy for yjxKufji, laxant, from ya.Ka.u, which is common in the 
participle : ysXa.y,for ysXuv, ridens, Sfc. 

5. The same Dorics and Ionics put sometimes zv for the w, which 
arises from tJic contraction ; as viyo^itzviyfor rtyik'rruv, amabant; h^uf 
rtvv,for v):uruv, interrogabant : ovUvfJisyovifor oTrJ^i/^csvov, assatura. 

They are also accustomed to contract the verbs in sea and au in other 
tenses besides the present and imperfect ; which is very frequently done 
in /Soao/, voe'o;, and ^sxofJLXi, as may be seen in Theocritus, Herodotus, 
and others. For example, 'vyx^aQucras, for 'csoc^a.Qovtffat;, damans : 
Kua-otlo, for Ko-liTdflof clamavit : linQucroiJuxi, for l<7nQori(Toixc6:f in- 
daraabo. In tike manner vu<tx%, for ho^a-oclo, intellexit : vwadcti&o^, 
for vo^^woiy intelligens ; Ivm^ats, for Imwai) intClligens : mvotlo, 
t - for 



ISO Book III. Of Verbs, 

for £moi)lof intellexit. Likeivise ^oia-aci, for ^caia-atf considera : 
^xaclfjisvosy Jbr ^txcrdiJLtyoqy considerans, 8^c, 

6. In verbs in du, the contraction being made in ot) the 'poets hy 
an Ionic resoiiition insert nnnther ^; as ^iKoia.y, fnr ysXoiv, ridere: 
(j.nXotvxxa-Qxi, for (jivt^avSia-Qxh machinari : h^idua-Kov, Jor IvSWo-- 
TLQif from IvWo;, meridiiir. 

If the contraction be in a;, and the 'penultima lonUi they add another 
w; as Tsvi^duf t<7>9^«, 'cs'n^ioiJt sal/o. But if the penult/ma be short, 
they insert ano; as avWa;, kvIiu, ocvliout occurro; /Soaw, /3ow, ^oow, 
clamo ; which ihey conjugate thus : 

(3oou, ^oaxsy ^oa.oc ; ^ooufjisv, (Soccals, i3oou<Ti ; 

alimys dramng back the' accent. From hence comes P^a/Awelowvl/, in 
Horn, for Kxyi.'jitlu'vliy splendenti,yrryw 'kxi/.Trildw, lucesco, splendeo : 
yaouuoty weeping, ^r youxra^fem. part.fr m yoa-u, u, lugeo. 

7. The Dorics also, as lias been already obse/ved, change the cow- 
trdction ot into >j. Wherefore in Horn, rvi wv ^tos »V«>?*» ^l- I* cape 
nunc cingulum ; t^ is therefor roi or rxtyfom the unusual verb 
rduifrom whence comes rsivu, per/. rirAxx and rirxiAair And roc 9y 
ctlroi;, Iv o<^Qa.'KiA.QT(nv o§ri<xif is the second person Doric of ofxo^ottf 
Ipoisa-oct, opaco-xi, opxxt, o^rixi : or ehe it coniesfrom the ^ol. opriixxi, 

8. We likewise fnd in Horn. fjLSfx/suro, consideraret, with the aug- 
ment and an additional SjfrfAyuTo, third person optative, formed by 
contraction from fAvoioiro. Thence also comes iA.E(4.)iuTo, in Xenoph, 
l^tiA,vu}ji.s9xf in Sophocl. (ASfAVoTro in the comic Cratinus, and |xe/xv«/«?o, 
in Pindar, according to the Dorics, unless we choose to take them as 
preterites, for f^eiAv^ro, from yi,vxo^xi, memini. 

ANNOTATION. 

Hitherto we have treated of verbs in u, whether barytons or 
circumflex, now we proceed to verbs in ^/. 



The End of the Third Book. 



BOOK IV. 

Of the CONJUGATION of VERBS 

in jwj. 



CHAP. I. 

Of the Nature and Division of Verbs in i^i. 

jL he verbs in p do not form a distinct conjuga- 
tion, if we believe Herodian the grammarian, son 
of Apollonius, who flourished near fifteen hundred 
years ago. This opinion has been embraced in these 
latter times, by Ramus, Sylburgius, Cranzius, and 
others; for this reason that they are only derivatives 
of verbs in w, and have but very few tenses. Never- 
theless, their analogy is so different from the rest, as 
to make it not at all improper to allow them a parti- 
cular conjugation. 

These verbs are always derived from t^hose in w 
.pure. 

For notwithstanding that we read in the writings of 
poetSy iXn^h to have; ?>£^^jwt, to carry; ^^ihi^i, to 
be heavy, ^x. still the n, which is in the penultima, 
makes it et'ident, that they are not so properly derived 
from ix^i (ps^u, jS^t'Gw, as from ip^^sw, ^ffc'w, p^tfisw, &c. 
it being very usual for barytons to he changed into cir- 
cumflex ; though we meet with some whose primitives are 
obsolete. 

But one thing here must he observed, which fexo seem 
to have attended to, viz, that the analogy of this 
conjugation partakes propei^ly of the Ionic dialect : now 
the Ionics generally resolve the verbs in » into su ; tvttVco 
for tvttIw, verbero : rv({>U(a for Tu<pO^, verberatus sum. 

From 



192 Book IV. Of Verus. 

From hence likewise it comes, that the third person 
siyigular of these verbs is in o-;, rih<ri, he placeth : which 
is a kind of extension of syllables, just as they frequently 
add this G-t to the dative plural of pai^isyllabic 7iouns, 
XoyoiG-i for Xoyoiq, c^c. For whereas we should natu- 
rally say, rt^ny.1, ng, n, just as we say , £TU(p^»v, ?]?, n; 
Tu^fiw, ^g, n' instead of that we say^ rlhi^i'h >5?, n^i; and 
in the same manner in the subjunctive, tu^Oco, t^?, ijo-t. 

These verbs may be divided into two sorts ; re- 
gular, and irregular. 

The regular, which make but a very small num- 
ber, are those which are formed and conjugated ^fter 
the manner we now intend to describe. They are de- 
rived from verbs in e«, aw, ow, Jw; from whence 
arise four sorts of characteristics, f, a, o, u, which 
gave occasion to grammarians to make four different 
•conjugations ; andw^hich ought to be attended to, as 
being of use in learning to conjugate. 

Rule I. 
Formation of the verbs in ^wt. 
1. These verbs change w into jtx; ; 
2. ' They make their reduplication with an ii 
-3. They change in the singular their short characte- 
ristics, i, oc, 0, into the corresponding long ones ; 
but the short characteristics are restored in the 
dual and plural: 

4. In every thing else they conform to the barytonous 

passive aorists: 

5, Eixepting that the third person of ^^ in the prestJit 

makes <ri, as rt^Yifjifi, n?, riC-t* 

Examples. 
Three things are to be considered in the formation 
of verbs in /At. 

1. The termination, which is to change w into p. 

2. The reduplication, which is properly to repeat 
the first consonant of the verb with an », as J'ow, 3f- 
(5w/xt; always taking a smooth consonant, instead of 
an aspirate, as S-ew, rlh[jt>i, &c. after the manner of the 
augment, Rule V, of the preceding book. 

But 



Formation of Verbs in fAi, igs 

But we call it an improper reduplication when the 
verb assumes only an », generally marked with a rough 
breathing, without repeating the first consonant : 
which happens to verbs commencing with r, ^r, or a 
vowel ; raw, Ifdu : -sTTaw, tojiy^ Itttocu : em, Tsw, I»)/a*, to send. 

3. The change of the characteristics s, «, o, into 
their proper long vowels; ^iu), T/0»j-ft», to put: raw, 
Irrj'jtAt, to stand: ?ow, Sl§(a-iJt.iy to give. And this long 

, penultima generally remains in the singular : but in the 
dual and plural the short characteristics are restored. 
Which if the young beginner does but mind, he will 
soon learn to conjugate. 

4. For in every thing else these verbs conform 
almost in each mood to the passive aorist. Hence the 
second person of the present indicative is iix <r, like 
that of the passive aorist; rih^^ ponis : Irxx^^n^i "oerbe- 
ratus fuisti. 

But the third person singular of the same tense is 
formed 'from the first, changing p into<n; T/d)j-/At, 
r/Oji-trt ; concerning which see what has been said in the 
beginning of this chapter. 

We must likewise except the third person plural ; but 
this is by another analogy, which we have already taken 
notice of in the preceding book, and which we shall men- 
tion again in the next chapter. 

The verbs in u/xt have neither a reduplication, nor 
a change of the penultima; but u being common, 
passes for long in the singular, and for short in the 
plural. They want both the subjunctive and the 
optative. 

Even the other verbs have but three tenses, the 
present, the imperfect, and the second aorist; taking 
the rest from the verbs in w, whence they are derived : 
wherefore we shall first treat of these tenses, reserving 
to speak afterwards of the others, which have hardly 
any thing particular. And we shall begin with repre- 
senting these three tenses in a general table, intending 
to treat afterwards of each separately, with their dia- 
lects and special rules. 

Cc TABLE 



194 


Book IV. Of Verbs 
TABLE of 


Conjugation? 




Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 


I. 

Efl. 
Pres. 


Tid- ) poiio, is, it. 

1. y £/A£V, ETS, £T(7: 

' Ion. gaa-t. 


Ti9- 
2. 


"< ponam, as, at. 




Imp. 


^ |) inebim,as,at. 


' 


2 " -^ponerem.es, et. ' ^ 


A. 2. 


"EQ- Jw, >3?,»1, &C. 

1. / posui, isti, it. 


2. 


J posuerim,is,it. 


TlS- ^ EWV, £i«?, £<fl, &C, 

3. I posuerim, is, it. 


II. 

All. 

Pres. 


Y -< ^to, as, at. 

(. afj(,£v, ATE 2<rt. 


2. 


r 5, a?, a, 
4 stem, es, et. 




Imp. 


Y -; stabam,as,at. 




2^' -J starem, es, et. 


A. 2. 


*Er- 5 *"'' *'^> "' ^^* 
1. Jsteti, isti, it. 


2. 


c «, »;?, «, &c. 

J steterim, is, it. 


•Jr- 5 a/nv, at«f, «/», &C. 
3. "^ steterim, is, it. 


III. 
on. 

Pass. 


A/^- J do, as, at. 

t Ion. ^oer.. 


AtJ- 
2. 


-J dem, es, et. 




Imp. 


^^'^ ^ dabam, as, at. 




2 -J darem, es, et. 


A. 2. 


*£>- 5 OV, »?, «, &C. 

1. 2 dedi, isti, it. 


2. 


J dederim, is, it 




- IV. 

Prbs. 


r u^t, y?, viri, 
Ztvyv- } jungo, is, it. 
1. \ vfAiVfVrB, va-i, 
C Ion. uflwi. 






Imp. 


* ^vfAiVfVTijVrar. 






1' 



Formation of Verbs in {ai 



195 



for Verbs in /*» 



Imperative. 


iNFINI'flVE. 


Participles. 


C iTiy iru, 
T<9- < pone, ito. 
(.£T£, srwarav. 


Ti9- evat, 

ponere. 


fits, tvTOf, ^ 5* 

Tt9- -< Bicra, £i<rnf, > g 
(. iv, ivros, 3 S 


' 






Tl9- h, iTM, &c. 

l>one, ito. 


tj9- e~/a{, 
ponere. 


Tifl- E(j, syrof. 


r c£i, aria, 
"ir- K sta, stato. 
1 UTS, aTMo-av, 


'if- avat. 
Stare. 


'If- . Sfl-a. atnt';, > g 








C- ^0<, »1T(W, &C. 

Sta, stato. 


stare. 


r- a?, avTOC 


Ai^- < da, date. 

I. OTB, OrCOTdV. 


AiS*- ova<, 
dare. 


(h, ovroq, ) ? 








J- 0?, oreu, &c. 
da, dato, &c. 


3"- Svttt, 
dare. 


S"- a/, ovTO?. 


TySj, vrca, 
Z«yyv--< junge, ito. 


TLsvyV' vvat, 

jungere. 








.<«< 



General 



196 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

General observations on the dialects of ^verhs in fn. 

The jEoUcs and poets give this termination yuto a great number of 
circumflex verbs. Whence voe meet with some of these verbs ivithout a 
reduplication, not only among those in viai, but likewise among the 
other sort ; as (pi'kicof (plxviyi^i, to love : ounuy amixit to praise : oviuy 
ovriiAif to assist : voiu, vo»}/x/, to comprehend, or understand. From 
•whence comes l(piX>j, he did loye : Ivou, he did understand : voeU, or 
jEolic, drawing back the accent f voe/?, he understands ; and the 
like. 

In the same manner ysXau, to laugh, yixviyn : vwdu, to vanquish, 
viKif)[Ai : o^ao-', to see, o^>j/y,;: urdjUffor ktsUu, to kill, xt^/x*. 

The poets also either add, or takeaway the reduplication of the other 
ordinary verbs in yi.i, as the measure of their verse requires ; in the 
same manner as they do with the augment of verbs in u. 

Sometimes they repeat the twojirst letters for a reduplication; a-Xoiu/f 
-^Xvifji.i, nXoixyiixtf to Stray: a;^E&;, to be angry, a^Kx^ftixi ; passive^ 
aXoixviiJiOity oiK^x'^i^^'' The same is observed in all the other moods. 

Sometimes they add a f^to the reduplication ; zjXoiu, /csiirXoi.u, -cti/m,- 
mXvjiAii to fill : 'sj^ocu, isiir^Ku^ zsi^ji.'rr^iny^ii to burn. 

Some take their reduplication in the middle ; oviw, mviv, ovtv»j/>t/, to 
assist : and others of the like sort. 

The poets change also the short characteristic for a long one in the 
dual and plural ; pr vice versa in the singular, according to the exi- 
gency of the verse. 

The lonians and Boeotians make their reduplication ine ; 'irfi(Ai for 
iTviiJ^i ; observing the same in all other moods. Thus from ^voio;, or 
^v?w, comes Ts6vvi{jt.i, to die: yrow rxdu, tetXvj/x;, to suffer: from 
vosu, vsvovjiJii, to think, or consider : fro77t reXsco, nriX'n^A.iy to finish, 
or accomplish : xvhich we likewise meet with even in verbs in ^.i : 
xXy/x», to hear, KUXvyi.t,from whence )CixXv9i, to hearken. 



CHAP. II. 

Of the Active Tenses in particular, with their Dialects 
And, frst, of the It^ Die ATiYE. 
The present tetise. 



Sin 



1. 


Q, 


3. 


4. 


g. ri^-n[A.i, 


Itr-rilAt, 


^iS'COlAt, 


^svyv'VfAi, 


JE6\, -E/x/x/, 

BcBOt. -c;/x„ 








ri^-ng, 


*ir rig, 


SiS-ugy 


^ivyv uf, 


t/Quo"!, 


*f->J?t, 


ii^'ua-iy 


^iuyv-v(rt. 


Dor, 'Virt, 


Dor. -«T£, 


Dor. -urt. 




'tt. 


-oca-i. 


-oT, 





Dual 



Of tJie Active Tenses, and their Dialects. 
1. 2. 3. 4. 



197 



Dual Ti'9-fTok, 


ir-«Toi', 


$i%orov, 


^ivyv-VTOu, 


iEol. -TJTOV, 








Tt'O-fTOV, 


tr-arov, 


^i^'Orov, 


^evyvvrov. 


Plur. t/^£/x£i/, 


Ir ocfXevy 


(Jt'(J-0|tA£J/, 


^Evyu-v(ji.iv, 


iEol. -a)|U£)». 








T.'e-£T., 


r/ 

*r-aT£, 


Sl^'OTSf 


^tvyvvTB, 


TiG-^ro-t, 




Jk^-So-*, 


^fuyv-Ufl-*. 


Ion. -ixdif 


Dor. -avTi. 


Ion. .oa<r/, 


Ion. -vxa-i. 


Don. -fvTi. 




Dor. -ovTu 


Dor. -vvT/. 



The third person plural, as we have observed in the 
foregoing book, is like the dative plural of the parti- 
ciple in the present and future tense of all verbs. Thus 
TiOfi)?, ivTog, ponens, makes to?? TiOgHrt, po7ientibus: and 
T/9rjw», pono, makes the third person plural nhX^i, po- 
mint. And in like manner the rest. 

Hence we say ^loywa and ^suyi/uWi, the latter com- 
ing from the baryton tfuyvuw, and being more used 
than the other. 

The Ionics and Attics form this third person plural, 
by dropping the subjunctive, and inserting an a as 
above; TtOsao-i, &c. Yet they do not say iVaao-*, but 
iV«cr», because the circumflex a is almost the same thing 
as two « (X, one after another, and has a softer sound. 

Observations on the dialects of the present. 

The kalians frequently change •» info s in the present, at the same 
time redvplicating the lA.; riOefj^lAi: in like rtianner <pi\:-iJi.iJt.t,Jbr <piXv)(ji.u 
The Boeotians change it into ei, and make the reduplication in e; teXjo;, 
TtTi'KiiyLi, to finish : voiu, vtvoei(A.i, to think, to consider. 

The Doricsjorm m n the third person singular in <ri ; t/0»t/, 't'rvtrt, 
S«Sa;t;, ^svyvvTi ; Jor rlOvia-i, ponit ; tr/jo-i, Stat ; ^'i^uaiy dat ; ^eyyvi/cr/, 
jungit. 

In the dual the kalians retain r), (piXnrov, as also in the first and 
second person plural, ^iA«//£v, (plT^-nrs: but they change it in the third ; 
ri9svTf, they put ; 5'svt*, they send ; oiKivrty they inhabit,^/ro7» oIxcV-, 
o'lK-rifxiy to dwell, or inhabit; drawing bade the accent: whereas the 
Dorics say, ohivn, Uvn, &c. 

The Molians change dco into ai^n ; '^zka.u, to laugh, yl\xtyi.i, 
yiXxtq^ yeXai, &C. 

We read in Theocritus zso^o^vtyn, from z:or],Dor.for 'cs^ls \ and 
o^yif^i, fr>m opdu, to see: likewise viKY.^i^ from wtau, to overcome, 
both in an optative signification. But, as we shall demonstrate in the 
eighth book, these three moods are often used one for another ; so that 
there is no manner of' necessity for saying x^ith Caninius,that we ought 

to 



lys Book IV. Of Verbs, 

to lorite vUviiJ^t and cto0o^>?/x/, tvith an t subscribedyjor vtKotiriv, zjo^o^x^iiVf 
of the optative. 

Rule II. 

Formation of the imperfect. 
The imperfect coming from the present, fakes an aug- 
ment when it can : it changes fxi into v for the 
frst pe7^son, i?ito a- for the second, and drops it in- 
tirely in the third. 

Examples. 
The imperfect assumes an augment, when the com- 
mon rules will admit of it; but TrJi/^t* has none, be- 
cause it begins with an *, which is an immutable 
vowel. See page 106. 

It is formed from the present, changing /aj into v 
for the first person, into o- for the second, and casting 
it away for the third ; thus, rih-y^i, Irih-v, IxiVf, 

£T{'9->], &C. 

It takes a short vowel in the dual and plural, ac- 
cording to Rule I. and conforms to the analogy of the 
passive aorist. It is therefore conjugated thus : 
The imperfect. 



1. 

Sing. l-ri^-Yiv, 

Ion. fo-xov, 
and £«, 

Ion. zsf 

Bceot, £y. 



Dual 
Plur. 



2. 

Ion. ccaMVf 
</ 






lf-CCT7]Vj 

Bceot. av. 



Ion. oaKov, 
Boeot. oy. 



4. 

Ion, f^jcoy, 
£^£uyV-Uf, 

£^£yyv-i)Toy, 

l^Bvyv-vTi, 
l^svyvvcrocv, 
Boeot. vv. 



. Those that have no reduplication in the present, are 
without it also in the imperfect; (piXn[/.i, Ipxyiv, rig, n, 
amabat : v6yiiJi.i, Iv^yw, »?, », intelllgebat. 

ANNOTATION. 

Vossiiis, and Ramus tjoho tvrote before him, are of opinion, that iii^iu 
.should be placed before tIQ^ijh, and kriv before ct/^ijv, according to the 

natural 



Of the Active Tenses, and their Dialects, \9§ 

natural order of the vowels oi, e, o,, in the primitive verhSyfrom 
lohence these are derived : tvhick order, they say^ should he also oh' 
served in circunijlex verbs. But the reason, I apprehend, luhy this 
order has not been complied with here, is obvious; for as these verbs 
in ixt might be rendered much easier, by beins; referred to the passive 
aorist, and rl9v)[A.t, being most conformable thereto, since lri9v)y, -/j?, ->?> 
ponebam, is conjugated like IrlB'^v, ns, »?, honoratus fui ; or lrv(pQ-/ir^ 
%<;, v), verberatus fui: it has been therefore judged 2)roper to begin with 
riBni^i, after which you may easily learn to conjugate the other three^ 
only by changing the 'qowelqfthepenultima. 

Now if there was some reason for observing this order in verbs in 
/w,/, the same will hold good in regard to circumflex verbs ; because the 
latter m several of their tenses are relative to the former : besides^ 
the verbs in su merit theflrst place among the circumflex, because they 
do not vary so 7nuch in their contraction from the barytonous verbs, as 
the other two. 

Were it not for this, it would, indeed, seem far more proper to treat 
first of the verbs in ua ; as we shall do in the next book of defective 
verbs, and in other places. 

Rule III. 

That Verbs in jiAi borrow the tenses of circumflex verbs. 
The verb in i^i frequently rejects its own tenses, and 
borrows others of the circumfle,v, as the imperfect 
sufficiently shows. 

Examples. 
The imperfect tense of verbs in jwt is very little used, 
though there are some instances in it ; as in Theoclo- 
retus's history, -^^o^sTi^n, he added. But in its stead 
we generally make use of the imperfect of the circum- 
flex verb ; as from 

TtQsu, TiOw, Imp. eriQn¥, £is, ei, ponebam, 
WcHu, ITU, Imp. 'i-ojv, otq, a., stabam. 
^i^ocj, ^i^u. Imp. s^i^av, as, n} dabam. 

In like manner in the third person plural, iTi^Hv, 

There are a great many other occasions on which these 
vei'hs assume the tenses of eircumfte.v verbs, as we shall 
see hereafter in the imperative; and as xve evoi meet 
with instances in the present, •urot^arthT, or zru^n^sT, op- 
ponit, from srco^ocnUco : Mu from JiJ«w, for JtXo-i, he 
giveth ; and such like. 

The dialects of this itnperfect have been ahxady e.v 
plained elsewhere. 

Rule 
/ t 



200 Book IV. O/" Verbs. 

Rule IV. 

Formation of the second aorist. 

1. The second aorist is formed from the imperfect^ 

omitting the reduplication, 

2. // retains its long vowelin the dual and plural, ea:- 
cept 'i^nv, Uuvy and h^from l'n[M, 

Examples. 

1. The second aorist here, as well as in the other 
nioods; whether active, or middle, is always formed 
from the imperfect, by rejecting the reduplication, 
and assuming its proper augment ; as Iri^nvy s9»v : i'nv, 
'iftiv, &c. 

2. It is conjugated in the same manner as the im- 
perfect in £9»iv, from T^Onjat ; Ucav from ^iX-/x» ; and h 
from r>ip, of which we shall speak hereafter : assuming 
the short vowel in the dual and plural. 

t But except these three and their compounds, it re- 
tains always its long vowel, as may be seen in eV^iv, 
here following ; as likewise in i^nv, from j3a/v«, mdo, 
and in all those that are derived from a verb in uu: 
as also in 'iyvm, I have known; Idxm, I have been taken ; 
and others derived from a verb in o«. 
ANNOTATION. 
Here it is obvious, that the second aorist following a different 
analogy in its formation^ from that of barytonous verbs, has no 
dependance on the second future. Hence it is also that though 
these verbs have a second aorist, yet they never have a second fu- 
ture, as ApoUonius attests, lib. iv. cap. 6. 

Second aorist. 
Sing. 



Dual 













U'OTOU, 


fc0-f/A£I/, 




U-oy.£V, 

'iS'OTE, 


Boeot. Ev. 


Boeot. ay. 


Boeot. ov. 



Plur. 



Observations on the dialects. 
The third person plural is often syncopated ; I' 0ey, they have put,yor I 
I'deo-av; sJov, they have given, i^ovm* But particularly in verbs, 

coming 



Of Moods, and the Participles. 201 

coming from ocu: hxy, they have stood, yor cV»}o-av : I'^^atv, they 
have run away, Jrom d^vfAi: EWay, they have killed, ^rom xrvfxti 
s^xvianclivithout the augment ^iJiv, they have ascended, yor 'i^-naxv, 
Jrom ^i^fxi. Which is sometimes practised even in the imperfect, k'nO^v, 
for IriOta-xv, and agrees entirely with the analogy of the aorist, Boole 
III. Rule Iv. £rv<pQiVffor irvipOria-xv, S^C, 

This syncope is also to be met xvith in the plu-perfect^ as ive shall see 
hereafter, 

ANNOTATION. 

The aorist hvtv assumes an augment, though the imperfect be 
without it, by reason that it does not begin with an immutable 
vowel like the imperfect, this < being severed from it. Where- 
fore the £ assumes the smooth breathing of the syllabic augment, 
though the i of the present and of the imperfect has a rough 
breathing. But if after the reduplication i is dropt, there remains 
a long vowel, the augment then is neglected, because the rule does 
not admit of it. Thus from Uv corned h, misi. 

The verbs in y/x* want the second aorist, except the dissyllables : 
and then this tense is the same with the imperfect ; as s^w, from 
^viJt.{y to sink, or go under, to dress, or put on ; exAfv, from hXv/w,/, to 
hear, to hearken : whence also comes the third person plural, E?yy, 
for E Wav, they have clothed, with a short y, following the syncope 
of the preceding. 

The same sometimes happens also to other verbs in ^/, that 
have no reduplication, whose imperfect and second aorists are 
always the same ; as <piXv)^i, to love; ^'iX'nr. oCKri^i, to become dry, 
icTKXm : yva/(Ai, to knotv, 'iyvuv, &c» 



CHAP. III. 

Of the other Moods, and the Participles. 

Rule V. 

Of the subjunctive, 

1 . The subjunctive has w instead of jj, in primitives 

from cca ; and a in those from au. 

2. The aorists are formed from the present or the im- 

perfect ; but Yi is restored to the aorists that come 
from primitives in a«. 

Examples. 

1. J. HE subjunctive conforms also to the passive 
aorists of barytonous verbs, except only that deri- 
vatives, which come from a primitive in oo;, retain w, 
where these aorists have ^. And those that come 
from a primitive. in ^w, preserve a in the same persons, 
though some write them likewise with an •/), 

Dd The 



202 Book IV. Qf Verbs. 

The second and third person singular have always an 
* subscribed, after the manner of barytons, which 
sometimes constitutes the only difference between the 
indicative and the subjunctive. 

2. The aorist is formed from the present or the im- 
perfect, only by rejecting the redupHcation. But that 
of a primitive in «w, resumes its >] throughout, as may- 
be seen in the following examples. 

The Subjunctive. 

Present and imperfect. 



Sing, 


ti^-u, 




*r w. 


JX,=^ 




Ion. iu. 




Ion. Ew, 


- 




Poet, e/w, 




Poet. Ew. 






n^'"^^ 




*V-a?, 


c^icJ-wc, 




Poet. E**}?, 




or >;?. 






Ion. iYi<;, 




Ion.' £'57?. 






ri^^i^j 




iVa, 


(JicT^y. 




Poet, n, 




or^. 






ion. £Vi<Tif 




Ion. Eijo-/, 


Ion. wc-/. 


Dual 


rk^-riTtyv, 




if-oiroVj 
or riTOV. 


Sl^'WTOVj 




TiQ-Jrov; 




or r\rov* 


h$ urov. 


Plur. 


r*9-wja€i/, 






JiJ-W/XgJ/, 




T*0-riT£, 




or >iT£. 


^*(J UTB, 




TtO-Wi, 






Si$-oo(ri, 


* Verbs 


in v(At want 


the 


subjunctive, which they borrow of 


bflrytons. 














Second aorist. 


' 


Sing. 


3-w, 




rw, 


ice. 




Ion. S-e'ft/, 




Ion. TEA', 


Poet. ^uiu. 




Poet, ^sioj, 




Poet, re/w, ct 






'^?f, 




rw?, 


<?W,', 




Ion. ^f>}5-, 




Ion. W*?f» 


Ion. Swijj. 






' 


f£**)$, *lf ^> 


, 




a?. 






j^, 




Ion. SeV< 




Ion. tYt et Ew^i. 


Ion. 5«(r/. 




Poet. £»', Etna-/. 


Poet. Eitf, St>5<7/. 


Poet. 5^'>j, et 








!»-Pi f J»«^'- 


i!>ifo-i. 



Dual 



Of Moods, ami the P^irtiaples. 203 



Dual %rov, 


rritOVy 


^OOTOV, 


^'^roVf 


f^TOV, 


S(arov» ' 


Plur/^%£i/,^ 


rooy-^Vy 


^O0f/.SV, 


Jon. /o//fv, 


Ion. CO/A£V. 




Poet. sioiAiVf 


Poet. £iV"j et 




5^T£, 


r^Tf, 


Soots J 


3'co<riy 


fcc(rij 


StaiTi, 


iua-tf 


alua-ii et" 


Ui)ITl» 



This subjunctive agrees with that of the circwnrfle.v 
"verbs, except that those in ufji.i 7xtain the w throughout : 
the two persons singular, which contract oyi into oi, in 
circumflex verbs, are formed here in w subscribed ; which 
form is quite natural, JiSi^g, it^Tw, instead of $^h7g^ Si^oT, 

Observations on the dialects. 

Here lilceivise the Ionics resolve the coTitraction ; r;Qico, for n^Z : 
^£U, Jhr ^') I ^eajiASVf for ^u/j.sv : xr/wjuev, for y.ruixtVf let US iciU. 
The poets join an t to e, to make a diphthong ; nOsiu and ^siu : ^sicdi^Lsv 
and ^£jo//,£v : ^stofAsv^for 0uifjt.evf let us go ; taken from (Bl^-nfAi, to go : 
changing nfterVHirds the proper diphthong into an improper, tJu, ^v}^, 
8^c, ijohich happens also to harytonous verbs, as we have already 
observed. 

21ie third person singular in <n is also used in this aorist. There' 
fore of r>i we make t^io-i; of Th, rtyio-i ; of ?-f'V> ^ej^j^' ; cind of rr.r), 

Rule VI. 

Of the penultima of the optative. 

The optativeforms its penuUima by snaking a diphthong 
of its characteristic vowel. 

Examples. 

The optative also follows the passive aorist. But 
in regard to the penultim^, which must always be a 
diphthong, it assumes in each sort of verbs its charac- 
teristic vowel, to which it joins an *, to make a diph- 
thong. Hence it resembles the Attic optative circum- 
flex, Rule Ixxiv. It likewise suffers a syncope of tj in 
the plural, in the same manner as the passive aorist, 
According to Rule Ixiv. And therefore it is conju- 
gated thus : 

The 



204 



Book IV. 0/ Veres. 

Ike Optative. 
Present and mpeifect. 



Sing. 




Is-'OClYiVy 

Poet. »)*)v, 


Poet. w'))i'. 




Ti9-fi'»?, 










rrj, 


&>». 


Dual 


ri^-BiYtrou, 


t / 

if-OiiriTOVj 


^J(J-o/>JTOV,'|" 




ri^-£iy\rYiv, 


W OLiYirnVj 


J'jJ'-OlllTJll/. 


Plur. 


ri^-FAVlfAiVf 

Sync. fr/^E)*, 


Sync. aTy.zVf 

Ir-oclviTEy 


Sync. ©r^/iEy, 




sm, 


arre, 


oTrSf 




r^^-£lYi(Ta]f, 


iV- ata-ocVj 


$i^-oin(roiv. 




et sTsv, 
Poet. rev. 


Poet. ?9£v. 


OitVm 

Poet. w£v. 



* Verbs in y/x» have no optative ; but they borrow it of the bary- 
tons, as they do the subjunctive. - 

t Nevertheless, Her odian admits here of an optative in the active, 
lpyvv\nii nsf 09, hid not in the passive, because the diphthong vi is not 
permitted to precede a co7isonnnt. It is true, ive read in Hom» ix^v/xjy, 
//. 7r. and IxUvroy IL u, but they are formed by syncope Jrom the 6a- 
rytons, Ik^voijxi, and ^oiivv6t{ji.viv, Jrom ix^yw, exuo, excutio, exeo, 
ayid loiivvcxjf convivium praebeo. 

, Second aorist. 

- ^d-7\y^ rccl-YiVy hi Wi &c. like the present. 

Observations on the dialects. 

The Attics change sometimes the proper diphthong into an improper s 
cum,, ow'/is, odjv}f 8^c> ow7f crouo Kvstos, crvvs<riy Iv nroia-if 2 TiiH, li, d€t tlbl 
Dominus intellectum in omnibus : aTrooJjj ixvTf K^^/o?, 2 Tim. iv, 
rependat ei Dominus. Likewise ,s-^'>!v, ry'»?, r^yit for rat>5K: (pr,v)v 
for (^alm, from (pviyj, dico : I^Cvf'/jf,' from i^j^'riijn, to walk, to ad- 
vance, to ascend, 8^c. 

Rule VII. 
Formation of the imperative. 

1 . The present of the imperative takes h, preceded by 

a short vowels 

2. But 9i is often rejected^ and the long vowel restored. 

Examples. 
1. The present of the imperative is in 6*/like the pas- 
sive aorist, assuming before 0* the short characteristic 

vowel, 



Of Moods and the Participles, 20^ 

vowel, proper to each sort of verbs. But r/Om is 
written with a r, by reason of the which goes be- 
fore : thus : 







The Imperative. 




Sing. 


Sync. >j, 

TiO-£TW, 


JEoh viri, Mo\. uQif 
Sync, a or ♦?. Sync. w. 


Sync. V. 


Dual 








Plur. 


rt^-srs. 


'ir-ccrs, J/J-oTf, 


^fuyv-UTf, 




Ti9-£Tw<rav, 


~ *r arw^av, ^i3 oTW(rav, 


^£vyv-^Toc(r»v* 



The 2EoL and poets retain here the long vowel ; 'Ixnhy 
rA>5Tw, have pity : (pixn^i, love thou: vo^iOt, think or 
consider: zri^TrXrih^ fill : J/M*, give. And hence it 
comes, that, 

1. The syllable Gi is frequently rejected, and the 
long characteristic retained in the common tongue ; 
as t/O?) for r/Onr; or r/Offi : Ir^i for 'Irn^i : and Ira for 
iVaOt. In like manner tItA^, suffer, or endure^ for ts- 
TAaOi : zri{X7rhn,Jill, for -srt/xTrAaQi : li^ri^vYi, hang up, for 

y,^Yi^VQi,^iy &C. 

In the same manner those in u//t : ^€u<yvu, join, Eu- 
rip. for ^suyv'jOi : ^iUvx), S. Gregory, for ^axvoOt, ^^ort' 
or demonstrate: xvhich agrees with the thii^d person of 
theimpeiif'ect, rejecting the augment ; to which person 
the imperati've has an en thx relation in all sorts of verbs 
active : just as in verbs passive it hears an analogy to 
the second person of the same tense, TVherefore, 

As the imperfect circumflex is most in use, so the 
imperative is borrowed from thence : rihi, put; ir«, 
appoint ; ^ih^ give ; taken from nOw, iVw, ^<^w. See 
above, page 199, Rule iii. 

Rule VIIL 
Formation of the second aorist imperative, 
1. The second -aorist of verbs in ^\fTom tco, is in ^ I 

and that of ^/«Jw/xi in og : 
21. The rest form it from the present, by changing 
their short vowel into a long one. 

Exam- 



e06 Book IV. O/" Verbs. 

Examples. 

1. The second aorist of verbs in ]u», derived from 
those in fw, termmates in ?: 3-ew, T/d>ijWi, 5^?; retaining 
its short vowels through all persons. In like manner 
ii%fji.i, So;, Sgroo. Henee comes cr;^k, habe : o-Trt?, dkj 
or sequera (p^k, fer: h, mitte, from o-x^i^h (pf^i^s 
I?5/>tt, And so their compounds, mtnnqj die : 'sr^ofx^?, 
incumbe: IwUx^gj obsta, cohibcy &c. 

2. The rest form their aorist from the present, by 
castingaway the reduplication, as has been mentioned, 
and putting their long vowel for a short one j rSO*, sta : 
yvwO», no^cie: ^luh, vive^ &c. 

Second aorist. 



Sing. 


^-1;, 


sr-vtOi, 


0-0?, 




^•iru, 


r-^rof, 


5-oTiy. 


Dual 


^'irov, 


r-rirov, 


S-OTOV, 




^-erwv 


r-'nrm, 


§• oTwy. 


3Plur. 


^.-/rc, 


r-Jjre, 


J-oTe, 




^-iri^arxv, 


^-nrw^ay, 


S-or4!;cr«y. 



Rule IX. 

Of the penultima of the infinitive. 
1 . The infinitive requires its short characteristic. 
% Verbs derived from £w, as also eJX/At, make a diph^ 

thong of this short vowel in the second aorist : 
3. The second aorists of all other verbs assume their 

long voxveL 

Examples. 

1. The infinitive follows likewise the passive 
aorist, terminating in vxi ; but it takes its short cha- 
racteristic before the termination of the present in 
each conjugation. 

2. The second aorist of verbs derived from primi- 
tives in E«, make a diphthong of this vowel ; and 
^X/xt does the same. 

■6. In every other kind of verb, this aorist assumes 
its long vowel, as in the imperative. And the rea- 
son is, because of the circumflea: accent, which is natural 
to it, and cannot be on any other than a syllable long by^ 
nature. 

The 



0/ the Passive and Middle Voice, ^07 

The Infinitive. . 
Present. 

ri^'ivocij if-a,vKt, ^^i^voii. 

Second aorist. 

S'-fn/at, r-rvaj, S-afo^i^ 

Obse?'vations on the dialects. 

The injlmtive conforms likeiuise to the analogy of harytonSj as 
specified Book Hi. Rule Ixv. From rrtvxt isjbrmed ttiiaiv and T-fn^svat i- 
KTcivxt} xToifAsv, and xTacfKsvxif interficere, S^c. 

Rule X. 
Terminations of the participles. 
The participles of these verbs end in £k, «?, a?, y?. 
Examples. 
The participles, as well of the present as of tli€ 
aiorist, following the passive aorist, are terminated im 
?: but they retain their characteristic before the ter- 
mination, in verbs derived from primitives in «« or 
uu ; changing it into a diphthong, in verbs derived 
from primitives in ia, or in ow. 

Present and imperfect. 

riO-ekf svToq : tV-«f, oivros : ^/^-«;, o>t9? : ^ewyn-^?, ivtoq, 
V Ti9'eTa-oc, ila-n<; : tr-aax} oia-riq l ^/S-Sa-iX, wj?? : ^svyv-vcaf vans, 
ro r/Q-fy, cvto? : tr-«v> oivros l ^t^'OVj ovrosl ^evyn-vy, vvre^. 

The second aorist is formed from the present, by 
dropping the reduplication; 3'«k, ^svtq? : ^ag, f(x>rog 



CHAP. IV.- 

Of the Passive and Middle Voice of Verbs in ^i. 
Rule XI. 
Formation of the passive. 
The sJiort characteristic must precede /w«i i?i verbs pas- 
sive ; changing it into a diphthong in the optative: 
The second person is in (TQci or c©; but the others eon- 
form to barytonous verbs : 
The subjunctive is regulated by the active: 
And the imperative ends in o-^. 

Ex/i:\i» 



^08 feooK IV. Of Verbs. 

Examples. 

A HE passive of these verbs is formed by cbauging 
|5At of the active into i^^on. It conforms to the pas« 
sive of barytons, except only that the second person 
singular is terminated in cruty or in (to ; and that it 
assumes a short characteristic, whicli it forms into 
a diphthong in the optative; as r/Of/A^t, Ti9f//>ct)v : *ra/x«jt, 
ir^tju-iiv, &c. 

The subjunctive is regulated by the active, retain- 
ing a or w, in the same persons, as in the active. 

The imperative is in (ro, like the second person of 
the imperfect, upon which it depends in all sorts 
of verbs. 

The middle verb has nothing particular, except the 
second aorist, which, as it is conjugated after the man- 
ner of the imperfect passive, by cutting off the 
reduplication, we shall here join them together. 

These verbs «re veri/ easy to conjugate, conforming 
almost in every thing to barytons ; wherefore we shall 
not give a general table of them, it being sufficient to 
exhibit each tense in particular. 

The IjsTDiCATiy-E. 

Present, 

Sing. Ti^'EfACiif l^-'ocfjt.ccif SfS-ofjt.acif ^f Jyv Ujuat, 
rl^'i<rcii, 'tr- octroi I J ^i^otroci, ^ivyv-vG-ai, 

Ion. exi, Ion. ax(, 

Att. V}, Att. 71. 
rt^'iroii, 'i^-ocroct^ ^iS-orai, ^£jyi/-ur<2i. 
Dual ri^-ifxi^ov, Ir-elfJLE^oVi ^iS-oiM^ov, ^fuyv-UjOtf&ov, 

ri^'£(r^oVj Ir-of'O-^oVy $l$-o<ThQ]f, ^I'Jyv uo-Oov. 

Pkir. Ti0-£/Af6«, If-oifXE^Oij il^-OfJt^sQoCj ^£VyV-VfX£^CCy 

T/9-£(r6f, 'i^-oc(T&Sj $i$-o(T^iy ^£uyv-uV9f, 
Ion. ixvoci. 

Observations on the dialects. 

Instead of saying in the second 'person^ rldsa-xi, I'-xa-aifihe Ionics rejed 

the consonant^ and say riSexi, I'txxi, which the Attics contract after- 

ivards into ri^y, IV^j, like rvirr-^i. Hence it is, that in the common 

§ tongue- 



Of the Passive and Middle Voice. 209 

tongue toe often meet ivith xaOy, sedes : ItfWp) scis ; Syvi), potes ; 
and the like. 

The JEoL change here a short vott)el into a long one, saying, for 
example, " 

^i^rjlAonf ^i^vioctf St^»Tai, inquiro. 
ovvifjioti, oy*ja/, ovnrxtf JUVO. 

The same is observed also in the other tenses. 



The imperfect. 




Sing. iri^'i(jt,viv, Ir-ociAtiv, l^tj^-o^ni/, 


l^evyy-vfAnv, 


^ol. riixviv. 




Iri^'Btro, 7f"ec(roj i§i$-o<roy 


l^Bvyvv(rOf 


Ion. toj Ion. ao, Att. », 




Alt. «, Att. u, 




Dor. cy, 




Irl^'iTOj Yr-»ro, i^iS'OTo, 


l^ivyy-vro, 


Dual lTiO-f/xf9ov, 7r'dfji,£^ov, lhS-6iA.i^ov. 


> i^fuyv-u/AfGov, 


Iri^'ttT^ov, 'l9"0(,(r^ov^ iSi^-otr^oVf 


l^fuyi/'UcrOoy,- 


iri^-ia-^YiVj tr-da^nv, l^i^-ofAi^oCf 


£^fU'yi/-uV0?i»', 


Plur. lTiO-f>£d«, lf-d[AB^Ce, IcTiJ-O/XfGflf, 


l^ivyv-vfAt^Xy 


Ir/d-f(r0£, Ir-ao-Of, lSi%o(risf 


l^ivyv-va-Qs^ 


iTi^-svTQ, Yf-ocvro, ' i^tS-ovrOj 


■ £^f uy^""^^^ 


Ion. £«TOi 




Second aorist middle. 


l^-tlAYiV, If CCfAflV, 


* « / 


'i^-i(70j Hj if-lXJO, it), 


'iS-'OO-O, H, 


i^-iTo, ir-aro. 


U'QTQ.kC^ 


Seldom used. 


' 



Ohsewations on the dialects. 

The second person singular admits of a contraction here in these 
iwo tense Sy after fmving rejected the consonant ; IrlQsGro, IrWso, IrWtii 
iVotco^ do, w, Sfc. ili^oa-Of oo, «. But the Dorics change « into tu ; 
\rlBiVi Whvi 8fc. The same is also practised in the imperative, 
Xiohichf as ive have already observed, follows the analogy of the second 
person of the imperfect passive. 

The Subjunctive. 
Present a?id imperfect. 

Sing. Ti0-w^«t, Iq-ia^oiiy J*<J-Wj(A«i, 





T*6-)7, 


c <^ 


dl^-Uy 




Ti6-?T«». 


t^'UTOil, 


3t$-oorxi, 


Dual 


n^'Ufx^^oVf 


li^-UfAsf^OU, 


3l^'UlJI.£^0]fy 




Tifl-nrxOoj/j 


l^-cca^ov, 


<5'*^-wj"0oy, 




TiMjrdov. 


k'OijQoV, 


SiS-wa^ov, 


Plur. 


T*d-W^QfiJ, 


lc^'(ofjt,£^a, 


Si^-uy^i^cc, 




TiQ-^fl-fif, 


iV-acr6f, 


$iS-U7^i, 




TiQ CCVT^t, 


l(^-aVTOCi. 


hS-mTOii, 




E 


E 





This 



210 Book IV. O/* Verbs, ^ - 

This subjunctive has an * subscribed to the second 
person of all sorts of verbs. See Book III. Chap. xi. 
It is formed from the active, whose accent, contrac- 
tion, and penultima it retains. But SvvufA^ijpossim; has 
an acute on the ante penultima, because we do not say 
oVvjip in the active. Seethe optative here following. 
Second aorist middle. 

^'UrcHy Sec. s^ron Sioroa. 

* This aorist is ahvai/s conjugated tvith an -n, though the passive 
impeofict often assumes an aj agreeably taijohat we have observed of 
the active. 

The Optative. 
Present and imperfect. 

Sing.. TtO-fljM-Ul', lq-Oc(^YiVy Sl$'Ol[AYlVf 

Tt^-sTOy iC^'OcTo, SlS-o7oy 

ti^-bTto, Iq-ouro. Si$-oiTo, 

Dual TtG-fjjCAfQov, l^-oci(j^e^Q'j, SiS-oi[jt.iQeVy 

ri^-BTa^ov, iq-uXd^QVy ^t3-o7(r^ov, 

T«Q-£/(r0»)j/, lq'0(,ta^Y\Vy Si^-oitT^fiv,. 

ri^-eToQi, l^'Ci7<7^B, $iS-oi<T^£, 

Tt6-f»Wo, Iq-aXuTOy SiSo7vro, 

Ion. si'xTo, Ion. oi^ixTo* Ion. oiacroi 

ANNOTATION. 

This tense, as also the following, includes its characteristical 
vowel in its diphthong, after the manner of the active. The 
second and third person are marked with a circumflex on the penul- 
tima in all numbers (except the third person dual, which has an 
acute, by reason of the last syllable being long) when the optative 
of the active is in use : otherwise, they have an acute on the ante- 
penultima, as ^yyatVr^v, ^yva;o, Ivixirof possem^ -eSf -et, &c. because 
we do not say ^{ivnfjn in the active, according to what has been 
observed in the subjunctive : consequently its optative Syy«i»j» must 
be unusual too. 

Second aorist middle, 

^it^YWy gCilfMYlV, SoilAYlV, 

3'eTof qcuoy SoCoy 

3'sTto% c^curo, SoXro. 

Observation on the dialects. 

The poets sometimes say ^©//x^jv, hoUoi ^oiro, instead of hifAiiv &c. 
as if it came from IGo'/avjv in the indicative, like Irvm^Yii* 

The 



Of the Tenses of Verbs in fxi. 211 

The Imperative. 
Present and imperfect. 

Ti^ifTOy lq-oc(TOj SiSocOy ^suyvvao. 

Ion. Eo, Att. a, Att. u, Att. «, 

T*6£V6«. iVacfiw. (JjJoVOw. ^euyi/uVOw. 

It is conjugated after the manner of barytons. It 
is also syncopated as in the imperfect indicative, nWo, 
t/Oio, rftij, and Dor. sv : '/c^ccJOj ao, co: ^ih^o^ oo^ 8. 
Second aorist middle. 

d-ia9(a. c;M<a, $o7^ca. 

The Infinitive. 
Present and imperfect. 

Ti9f5-9at, !V«fl-0a», ^(h(7&ui, l^evyvvs-^oci. 

It follows the termination and formation of ba- 
rytons. 

Second aorist middle. 

The Participles. 
They also follow the endings and formation of ba- 
rytons. 

Present and imperfect. 

Ti6ffA£V^, l(;OClA£V^y SJofXSV^j ^fU«yvU/X£l/^. 

Second aorist middle. 

^ilAiV^, .C;ci[A$V^. ^6[Jt.£V(^. 

CHAP, V. 

Of the Tenses of Verbs in /At, that conform to the ana- 
logy of the Barytonous Conjugation. 

For the Active, 

X HESE tenses are borrowed from the primitives 
in w, from whence are formed the verbs in /oti, as 
the foregoing, from ^Iw, 'e;oi(a, Sm, ^Euy^, whence 
comes 

The first future. 
^-ncUf (;ii(7io, $(a(TU3y ^fy^w. 
ponam. stabo. dabo, jungam. 

There 



212 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

There are only some' particulars to observe, which 
we shall comprise in a few words. 

ANNOTATION. 

The future of these verbs retains sometimes the reduphcation, as 

^iSwaw, / 'viill give, taken from ^i^ufAi : ^i^^da-Uf I mil run avoay : 
taken ft-om ll^-nixiy to run a'way. 

Rule XIL . 

Of the first aorist. 
Thefolloxvwg aorists put Kocfor o-a ; £0>i>ca, ?;«», £ J«X(». 

Examples. 
The first aorist ought to be formed from the first 
future ; as from r>!(rw, £r>io-a. But we meet with three 
here in y.^, which change their characteristic o- into jc, 
viz. ih-Aoe,, I have put, for £0?]o-a : ?x<sj, I have sent, from 
IV*> mitto, conjugated like ri^rifAi: Uukx, J have giverty 
from (J/Jw|ai. 

But these aorists seem to be confined to the indi- 
cative. 

Rule XIII. 

Of the preterperfect. 

Vei'hs from iu, Y\(ru, make eihk; but 'irnfAt, dJo-w, has 

Examples. 

The preterperfect should by right take the penulti- 
maof the future, accordini^ to the general rule; never- 
theless, those that come from verbs in £w, assume a in 
the penultima, after the manner of the Boeotians, who 
constantly change »i into ft : T£0£t)c«, I have put, for 
ri^moe.^ from the future S-nVw. Likewise ^Tna, from 
Itj/a*^ to s^^d. But the Dorics always retain y\ ; JxAf, 
ri^'Ay.oCy &C. 

Those derived from verbs in ««> often assume 
an a after the Doric form, instead of the >j of the fu- 
ture ; as r^Vw, '/raxa, steti,. for £r»i>c« ; which however 
we sometimes meet with. But ts-»yioiis more frequently 
used, to distinguish it from is-m», the perfect middle of 
ss-moo, stOjpersto. See Book iii. Rule xi.. And this 
perfect retains the rough breathing of the present, 
though the aorists assume the smooth. 

From 



Of the Tenses of Verbs in (j.i, 213 

From the plural lr«««T£, is formed by syncope IVaTf; 
from whence ol(i)i(;oire, you have quitted, you have de- 
parted. 

The plu-perfeet is regularly formed from the per- 
fect, and is conjugated after the manner of barytons : 
from TcQema, In^iUuv^ posueram, &c. 

This tense happens sometimes to be syncopated, 
IcoIkiktocv, iroitrav, perstiteranty after the manner above- 
mentioned in the aorists, Chap. II. page 200, 201. 

The tenses of the other moods are formed regularly 
from the active, like the barytons. 

Thus from sVaxa conies lraxEva<, in the infinitive, and by crasis 
and syncope, Irava/. 'But l~ ami, without crasis or syncope, is the 
present infinitive of <ftj/x<, reduplicated with c. See p^e 196. 

Rule XIV. 
The participle of the perfect formed by syncope. 
"Ecraa syncopated from 'iq-ocua, forms the participles 

Examples. 

, The participles are also derived from the tenses of 
the indicative, rUemx, participle, TffinKWf, &c. But by 
syncope and contraction we say also l?-aw?, I<rw?, «to?, 
stans, pef^stans, and from thence the compound <^*£^«f, 
wfl-a, Of, divided, or separated ; because the Ionics reject 
X from the perfect, iVa^ca, iVao*, and shortening gene- 
rally the penultima, when it happens to be long, as 
[xiixmci, [xiiJt.0Lx, they form from thence the participle, 
as ixfixocug, of which the Attics by contraction make 
(MEfAug, promptus, from /*««, to seek or desire. In like 
manner |3fCw?, gone, or departed, from j3«w, to go, or 
walk : y£y(a;y born, from yaw, to be born. Where the 
masculine and neuter are alike; and the feminine 
makes wo-a, and not met, 

ANNOTATION. 

These preterites and participles sometimes retain the long vowel, 
as x£;^af>}x«, jcEp^a^ra, from whence comes o K^^oi^yius, gavisus ; and 
in like manner £s-*)&;j, for hmoj^, &c. 

Sometimes they receive in the middle, even after the contraction, 
one of these two vowels, a, t : thus instead of yey&>?, we say ye^ 
yxi/i, MTos, born ; aijd instead of Irw?, we say Ws(i}<;y wro?, Ion. oro^^ 
stans, Persians, from whence comes Irsoroc, or stxotx, Od. a. ac- 



cording 



214 Book IV. Of Vekbs. 

cording to Eustatliius, as we read in Herodotus, Iriafs and i<rixa-ij 
in the indicative. 

Therefore we ought to take notice here of four different parti- 
ciples; the common, as yfyww?, vtoc, os 'y the Ionic ysyawj, v7xy ls\ 
the contract, ysyw?, wcra, o;^ ; and that which after the contraction 
assumes a vowel, yiyxvs, ysyawcra, ysyaw?, retaining every where 
an (ri. 

For the Passive. 

First future, 

r£^r}<ro[ji,tHf gu^vtrofAUiy io^ri(ro[AOH» 

It is formed regularly from the active. But the 
syllable preceding the termination hwofj^ui, must be 
short, either because it is peculiar to the passive of these 
verbs, to have the penultima short in every tense, as 
we have observed, Rule xi. page 207 ; or because it 
comes from the short penultima of the future active, 
it being the analogy of verbs in w pure, to have it 
sometimes long, and sometimes short; as fw, lo-w, or 
nVw : ow, o(rw, or w(rw, &c. Thus from 3-ew^ S-io-w, comes 
TfSuVo/Aat, (with a r in the first syllable, by reason of 
the following 6) : from ^ixVw, qM(roiAoci : from S6ca, 36(rb3, 
^o^Ti(ro[Aon ; and the like. 

First aorist. 

Irihvy Iqoi^m, ISo^nv. 

It is formed regularly from the future, putting hv 
for W(ro/A«t, and prefixing the augment. 
Rule XV. 
Of the penultima of the preterperfcct. 
Ai^uaoc makes Sih[Aui. with the penultima short ; but 
rt^HHOc takes TihiiAoci, 

Examples. 
The perfect is regularly formed from the active, 
changing x« into jw«t, and assuming a short vowel in 
the penultima, for the reasons above mentioned in the 
future ; as SiSum, Si§oi/.M, But ri^imot, having assumed 
« in the penultima of the active, continues to keep it 
in the passive, because of a particular dialect; and 
therefore these preterites are to be formed thus: 

Perfect, 

rihii*.oi\y IrxfAOii, $i3o(AOH* 

Flu- 



I 



Of the Tenses of Verbs in |w*. 215 

Flu-perfect, 

PaulO'post future. 

rdiKTOfj^Kif i^<x<roiACHy 3s^o<ro{jt,xi» 

Subjunctive. 

First future and aorist. 

TfOw, ira6w, ^o0w, 

like Tifiw, page 9,02. 

Ferfect and plu-perfect. 

n^Z^Ki, lqu^O(,iy §i^(a^Q(.i, 

Tffiy, lc;oL, JfJw. 

iike the present, page 209. 
Optative. 
First future. 

Ti^Y^(TOllf.n]/y (^Oi^Yi(rOl[Jt>YlVf 3o^<TOllJI.YlV, 

First aorist, 
rshlnVj c^ochinu, ^ohmv. 

Perfect and plu-perfect. 

n^iifATiv, iq»i^y\v, h3oi(jt,nv, 

TshToj l(;oi7oy h^oTo, 

Faulo-post-future: 

ri^KToifAYiv, \c;(x,^oi^r\v^ Si^o<roi(Ay\v, 

Imperative. 
First future and aorist. 

riGtjT*, gocQ-nTi, ^o^Yiri, 

Perfect and plu-perfect. 

Ti^iKTOj Iq'citTO, ^ihtro, 

£Kr0w, a(76w, o(r0«. 

Infinitive. 

First future. 

TffirjVffl-Q^i, C«S>lVi(r^at, ^o^tmr^on. 

First aorist. 

rs^nvxi, qoc^wof^i, h^YiVOCi. 

Perfect and plu-perfect . 

TffiircrOat, E^atrQcci, $i36<r^xi, 

Paulo-post future. 

T<9fKr£(rO«*, l^diTid^ocii StS6o't(r^cct, 

Participles. 
. First future. 

Ti^yi<rc[44v(^, goi^ng-cfAiv^f So^Yi<r6iJi.iv^* 

First 



S16 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

First aorist, 

Tfdfi?-, ^aOfl?, (Jo6fK. 

Perfect and plu-perfect , 

T£0fl^EV(^, Iqu^iv^y ^i^OfXiV^. 

Paulo-post future. 

rB^ti^o^iV<^y .lg»(7o[ji.Bvi^f JejJoce/xtj/©^. 

For the Middle Verb. 
We have already observed, that its second aorist 
conforms to the imperfect passive through all the 
moods, as we have put it. 

The present and imperfect are the same with the 
passive, as in all other sorts of verbs. So that there 
remain only two tenses. 

The first future and first aorist, which are formed 
regularly from their active in all moods : thus from 
the future active> ^-^Vw, <rvVw, JwVw, is formed the 
First future middle, 
. Indie. Optat. Iniin. Particip. 

S'jiVojtAa*, B-Yiffoii^nVy S'jjVfO'Oat, S'DO'o^fv©^. 

S"n^oixoitf r>ic"«//AJ5v, ^jiVf(r6««, cus'^ftfi'®^. 

idoo'oixAt, SutroifAnv, iiO(rB(r^oit, i(a<r6[Asv(^. 

The aorist is formed in the same manner. From 
£0»]xa, E(^Yi^cc, UdiKoci comes the 

First aorist middle, 
ldW/>t>jv, seldom used. ' 

Indicat. Subj. Optat. Imp. Infin. Part. 

lojo-a/xijy, rwo/^t^'j Tiocrixi^YtVf ^ncrMi, r'^ffoca^Mif rwai^svo^* 
£^uxixij,v)v, seldom used. 

Of the IRREGULAR VERBS in ^;. 

W E may consider two sorts of irregular verbs in 
/5At: the first which follow nearly the analogy of the 
preceding, but are used only in v<ery few tenses, the 
greatest part of which we shall find in the book of De- 
fectives: and the others, which differ wider from 
the said analogy, though they have more tenses than 
the former. These deserve to be particularly taken no- 
tice of, because, as they are in frequent use, they may 
puzzle those who are not well acquainted with them. 
T la 



(y Irregular Verbs i?i ^/.i 217 

In order to facilitate the conjugation of these irre- 
gulars, we shall refer them to the regulars, according 
to their characteristics ; where we must always re- 
member their general analogy, which is, to have a 
long vowel in the singular, and a short one in the dual 
and plural. For attending to this analogy, and observ- 
ing some particulars, which we shall comprise in a few 
rules, these verbs will be easily imprinted in the memo- 
ry, which otherwise are apt to create trouble even to 
those who have made somp progress in the language. 

We may divide these irregulars into three classes ; 
the first derived from the verb ew, marked with a 
smooth breathing; the second from I'w, with a rough 
breathing ; and the third from a different verb from %oo. 

The dialects of these verbs are almost the same as 
those of the foregoing. 

"clSTrT'vr ~^ 

Of Derivatives from £w, with a smooth breathing and 

first, Of 'EIMl', sum, I am. 

Rule XVI. 

Formation of this verb. 

From £«, tvith a smooth breathing , comes llf^t acuted; it 

makes the singula)' in ilg, jT, Iqi^and the plural in hy.i'i, my 



> / 



E X A M r L E s. 



JL HE substantive verb Itju/ is formed from £w, I afiij 
from whence regularly it should make ^ut : ' but 
it neglects the reduplication, and does not so much as 
change £ into »i, for fear of confounding it with n'jwr, 
I say. It only adds an i to c, to lengthen its penul- 
tima, which it retains vi the first and second person 
singular, dropping it in the third, as also in the dual 
and plural, except the last. It takes an acute on the 
la§t syllable, to distinguish it from £?/>ct, to go, marked 
with a circumflex on the first, of which we shall speak 
hereafter. For dissyllables in f^i have naturally this 
accent; as yi/wpi*, to know: ^v[ai, to enter: xAup, to 
hear, &c. This verb is conjugated according to the 
following table, after which we shall give each tense 
in particular, with its dialects. 

ff table 



218 



Book IV. Q/" Verbs. 



< 






a> 



.•N CO 






> 

H 






^ CO b 



4J V3 



1-3 M i-S 



JA QJ ,iS 



:i i 

bin 



^ 



'2 4* H 



« CO ^ 



vif 



^ - b 



V? 



CO "» 

.s M 





* • ^ » s 

2 1 f S 1 S 

„S fi< ,S fii «S fe 




* 
o >- 






' 








e si 

o g b 

b rT VST 

CO E 


^4 

1 2-1 

'.S W .s 

CO cu 



5 



a 



3 
1^ 



Of the Verb i\i^i, sum, 219 

Indicative. , 
Present, 
Sing. fI/A»'j itqy vel J, k^. 

Dor. g/^^;, Poet, ££/, Att. I'^?, cvrr, and 'A/, 

^ol. 0?/:*/, and IW/. 

Dual Iroi', Itov, 

Plur. Ir/AEv, i|l> £io-/. 

Poet. £//A£v, Poet, gre, Dor. hrl. 

and Iftlv, iEol, evr/, Ion. e«^;. 

Dor. Et/xE?, Poet. %<x,a<Tu 

The compounds are conjugated in the same man- 
ner, but draw back the accent : w^sifAi^ adsum, zrcc^^^ 

Observations on the dialects. 

Elf the second person, tvhick passesjbr an enclitic, is regular, coming 
from thejirst, hy changing /x< into ?, according to the general analogy : 
as Ti9y)iAi, riQ-nq : ^/^wju/, 5<§wy, S^c, Vossius says, it is repeated Jour 
times in Homer, hut he might have said abo^oe fifteen times, Neverthe" 
less it is 7nore usual in prose, Out it mil hardly he found in the above- 
mentioned poet, except in the thirteenth verse of his Battle of the Frogs: 
UsTve, rU si ; Hospes, quies es ? And this second person seems to he 
rather derived from the middle ; for so^ai should naturally mahe £»?> 
and according to the Attics hi, and qftertvards hy contraction sJ. 

"Evifor evsrt is very rare, hut it is used for hsri) licet, and for 
hiTh insunt,yrom the verb eve//*/. 

The other dialects a?e marked sufp,ciently in the conjugation of the 

present, their analogy having been already explained. The French, V0Us3 

estes, or vous etes, seems to be derived from the second person hh o^ e^«» 

Rule XVII. 

Of the imperfect. 

1. The imperfect makes riv, h, or ri^cra, lorh^ retain^ 

ing n in all numbers, 

2. But %v signijies also ivi and dixi : tVOt implies aho 

scito and es : %, i. 

Examples. 



Sing. ?!/, Tiq and l^U^ 


? and h^ 


Att. ^, Poet. I'>ja0«, 


Dor. re, m. 


Ion. Eflj, 'Us, cTf, 


im, mv' 


Poet. viX) hv, and igijv, IWs and eW* 


and hv. 


eVxov and 'iov. 


Poet. iVxe. 


Dual r.rov, 


^TYIV, 


Poet. 7>Tov, 


Vif/iV, 


ETov and sfoy. 




Plur. ?i[A,^u, hey 


7i<T0(,V, 


Dor. Vs?> 


Sync, h* 


Poet. E^SV, ETE, 


'icroiv, ha-oiVy and tcKov. 




1. This 



220 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

1. This iiijperfect is regular in its formation: for 
as £w should naturally make Jjj/xj, or without redupli- 
cation S/>tt, its imperfect must of course be h, because, 
as the verb begins with an immutable vowel, it is in- 
capable of augment. 

But in its conjugation it is irregular, forasmuch as 
it always retains n in the dual and plural of the com- 
mon tongue. 

The second person in 6^ is from the iEolics, whose 
practice it is to put this termination after f, ??, 5jfl-6» : 
but it is common enough in authors. 

The third person ? is very little used, instead of 
which we rather say riu, 

£. The explication of the second part of the rule, 
with regard to ?v, may be seen in the following title of 
Dialects ; and in regard to iVOt and TO*, you will find 
it in the imperative presently. 

Obsermtions on the dialects. 

The Attics rejecting the v of this imperfect^ say 5 in the first person, 
erara, as may he proved from Aristophanes. The Ionics resolving it^ 
say 'ioci and the poets taking the long votvel, ^vrite r«, eram ; Jrom 
tvhence comes the third person h, or ^ev, erat, for v,, which is seldom 
used. LiJcexuise I'Trmv, Ham. he was upon. But Eustathius says, that 
?iix is a first aorist^ and others say it is a perfect middle. 

The poets prefixing a syllabic augment, say likewise hv^ my h, 
cimnging afterwards the syllabic ' into a temporal^ W, yi-^h nvj, Sfc. 
They likewise form them in crxov, £?, tylike the barytons. 

The second person JEol. via^x, assumes likewise an augment, haQx. 
The Dorics say h in the third person, erat, changing v into s ; for v is 
added to >?, hfor ui. 

The Dual adds a cr, especially among the poets, vjrov, ris-viv, assuming 
the short vowel 'irov or Efov^from whence seems to be derived the 
French nous estions ; as nous fumes seems to proceed from the plural 
%iKis. But the poets use also the short vowel in this number, siasv, ete, 
4*c. wherein they conform to the regular analogy. 

Several syncopate the third person plural, as h for w-acv, rhiv, 
p£ia-(zv, they had known : but it is not so very frequent. 

But y)v is likewise the first person (fthe second aorist middle ofhi^i, 
to go, vide page 2'2n ; and, also, the first person of the imperfect 
o/(pyiiMl, to say, page 236 ; to which we 7nay likewise add, that h, "with 
a rough breathing, is the second aorist of h(A.i, to send, page 228. 

The second aorist among the poets is mv, derived regularly from the 
haryton lu, of which the Ionics, according to Eustath. make I'ov, with- 
out the augment ; fwn whence comes sW, by crasiSf us, and by extension 

Ef/c, iti Herodotus. _ 

«r From 



Of the Verb iliJ.(, sum, Q2 1 

From thence comes the subjunctive bu, and £'10, the optative 'ioi^iy 
and the participle scov, as we shall see hereafter. 

But Eoy is sometimes also an imjjerfecty us ^ar savf II. |. sic quon- 
dam erara. 

Subjunctive. 



Sing, u. 


f,^j & 


Mocy 


rt Ion. ^(Tt. 


Ion. sMj 


^V* 




«>j, and £'/?cr/. 


Poet, zl'uj, 


s'/ips. 




c/17, and 6<»jcr/ 


Dual 


rirovj 




riTQV, 


Plur. wufi/. 


riri. 







Dor. <5/Asy« 

Poet. Eiai[^syf E^Ojxsy, &C. 

From thence comes lAintoo, according to Eustath. inter- 
sim, acquiram. 



c 


JPT 


ATIVE. 




Sing. £»ii/, 




m^y 


iU. 


Poet. £9;/x;, 




'iois, 


'iot. 


Dual 




E'inrov, 


slnrYiv, 


Plur. ftV^"; 




mri, 


£\r\<rGiv» 


Sync. eT/!a£v, 




sltSy 


,Uu ^^^^ 


Impeuative. 




Sing. iV9t or 


eVw, 






Poet. %(T<j-Uy 




Dor. 


y)rui 


Dual 'iqov. 






iC^m. 


Plur. %qB, 






s^UG'OiV 



Att. e-ojv. 
ANNOTATION. 

We meet with sT for UOi, from whence 'S7x^si,.come hither; as 
also with 'J>rco for eVo;, from the baryton e'w, Is'tw, by crasis >jt«, 
psal. ciii. " ' ^ 

"la-Oi comes also from tcryifM, to knotv, of which presently. But 
i'Oiy be goncj is the imperative of J/x;, to go : hov, and Irs, in the 
indicative, have an acute on the last syllable ; but Brov, and Ere> 
in the imperative, have the accent on the first, as Apollonius 
teaches, Book iii. Chap, xxvii. 

Infinitive. 
E'lvoci, Att. 'ii^ivui, iEol. ifxiAivcii, Ion. fjasf, Dor. ?/a)ii', 



-and ^ 



»/xf?. 



See Book III. Rule xlv. 
Participles. 



lOJVy 



Ion. 

iEol 
From 

whence {--p^fs/?, 
comes 
like 



UvTOq, 



Dor. zvasc. 






V 

ovTo;. 









and > in Plato. 



Middle 



£22 Book IV. O/^ Verbs. 

Middle. 
The substantive verb has likewise its middle, from 
whence it takes the imperfect and the future. For 
from flp, the present middle, should be £]?*»», from .^ 
whence comes the imperfect ^'/a?5v, and the future zifofAcn 

Indicative. 

Imperfect. 

eram^ as, at. 



Sing. 
Dual 


VlfAE^OVf 






Plur. 


*)/AS0(X, 


lor 


. £«ro, P 






First future. 


Sing. 
Poet. 
Dor. 

Dual 


. £<T(TO[J!.CX,t, 

eaarsviAXt) 


io-crzxi, 


£(7fTa». 


Plur., 




i(7£ff^E, 


\(70vroir. 


, 




Optative. 


Sing. 
Poet. 




OiO, 


OiTO, Sc 



From whence comes 'SJx^sffoiiAViv, affbrenif a9rfa-o</xi?y, abforem, 
Infin. 'ia-sa^xi. 
Part. hofAEuo;, 

Poet. laaoiAivos. 

ANNOTATION. 

Clenardus, and the common grammarians, take -^/x^v for the 
plu-perfect of 1;//,/; but it is better to take it for the imperfect of 
zyLOit. Thus Euripides says iyu ^l -crfo^or^; «x y'/x»v TEKvuVf that is, ego 
liherorum proditor non eram, I did not betray them. We read like- 
wise -cragv^/x^v, aderam, I was there, in Demosthenes, and others. 

CHAP. VII. 

OfElUl and'^mui, eo, mdo. 

KULE XVIII. 

Of the formation of J/;**. 

From £w is formed u(a, and thence fT/x*, vado, xvhick 
casts away ifrom the dual and plur ai. 

Exam- 



Of the Verbs u^\ and f^jwi, eo^ Dado, J225 

Ex A M P L E s. 

1 HIS verb sT^i is likewise derived from w, marked 
with a smootb breathing. For the poets first changed 
it into £i«, from whence fTjott has been taken, which is 
sometimes rendered by the present^ eo, I go ; and 
oftener by the future, ibo, I will go. Just as the 
French rnean sometimes the future, when they say in 
the present je rrHen "vas. Hence the future of this 
verb is obsolete, though Homer has made use of the 
middle, fiWat, Od. o. 

It preserves the diphthong » in the singular of the 
present and imperfect, just as the regular verbs have 
their long vowel ; and in the dual and plural it has « 
only (as they have their short vowel only) whereas 111^,1^ 
mm, has £ only in the present of these two numbers, 
excepting the third person, which, in both resumes 
the diphthong. This verb is conjugated thus ; 
Indicative Active, 
Present. 

Sing. jf/Aj, fTf or jT, il<n, eo, I go. 

Dual iirov, Irov, 

Plur. tiAiv, , irf, fTcTi or iVi, according to some. 

Ion. \'(xai. 
In like manner sr^e^UtTif adeunt : iUUtri, ingrediun- 
tur r w^ojao"*, prodeunt. But the following have a dou- 
ble accent; awWii/ and ai/iao-iv, they ascend: Kxricariv 
and xocriKo-iv, they descend : Siiixe-iv and Siioiciv, they tra- 
'oerse : i^btUjiv and jtxfTiacru/, they pursue, 

ANNOTATION. 

The second person J is scarcer here than sTs, quite the reverse of 
the foregoing verb : however, it is found among the poets, whence 
we read awe;, abis, or abibis, in Theocritus, and likewise in Lucian 
in Revivisc. /^Ire/ r^v ri^Dnvi artem aggrederis. 

Rule XIX. 

Whence this verb takes its preterites and aorists. 

The preterites and aorists are taken from «&» 

Examples. 

This verb borrows almost all its preterites and aorists 

from the poetic verb m. Thus, though it forms 

r^ularly 

The 



224 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

The imperfect y 



V 



Sing, stv, fiV> f*. 

V V 

iroVy irnv. 



Dual 



1 lUl. i^aSV, iT£, K70iV, 

From whence comes ^vvKTotv, they assembled together; 
and in the dual, ^wirvw, in Hom.-and Hesiod : 

Nevertheless it takes likewise itov, whence comes 
the third person, Jsi/, he did go, Hesych. And thence 
is derived the Att. hv, Horn, and by resolution r\m, 
from whence we have llmv, in ApoUodorus. 

From the same verb is also derived the unusual pre- 
terite, flm, whence is formed the 
Flu-perfect 

Elxfii^, Att. mi\''^y plur. msiiJLiv, sync. ^'sjitEV and ?/a£v, 
iveramus. In the same manner, iTn^^^iv, eniperamus :. 
73-^o<rr,[jt,£u, accesseramus. Likewise hin, hi, iteratis : 
Ig^Tf, e.vweratis. 

First aorist 
Should be fTcja, whence comes the third person plural, 
it<T(Kv, and thence ^o-ai/, mcav, and ma-ocv; as also the 
third person dual, fiVaVjiv, Att. liiiTdirr,v. 

The compound, f^sTBTa-oc, intermisi ; participle mid- 
dle, jwiTfio-ajWfj/o?, II. f. intermissiis, intei'veniens. 

Second aorist. 
Sing, i'ov, fff, i'f, from the same ffw. 

sTov, 

WOVj 

Dual - - - ifTov, *sr»)v. 

Subjunctive. 

The present and imperfect are obsolete. 

Second- aorist. 

Sing. *w, Tj]?, &c. whence comes aVw^tAsv, aheamus. 

Optative. 
The present and imperfect are hardly ever used. 

Second aorist. 
Sing. fojjiA*, ?oi?, Tf*, &c. Thus in Josephus, f* 
l-rrmoiy if he returned. 

Impe- • 



Of the Verbs sIJai and 7n(Ai, eo, mdo, ^^5 

Imperative. 
Present and Imperfect, 
Sing. Ik '[no. Dual 'irov, nut, Plur. m, *lrmoiv» 
But we likewise say it for tS*, from the verb f«, 
! whence it should come, and by crasis ff. Thus £^f», 
, Hesych. exi : «7r£i, «^z : Stu^ go on ; and such like. 
• * We do not find this verb compounded with <ruvj or 

Second aorist, 

:■■'■> Sing. I'f, »Vtw, &c. In like manner 'i^n, e.vi: it is 

formed regularly from the second aorist indicative 'iqu. 

Infinitive. 

"ETvoh : whence comes dmTvijiij to depart , ox to be gone: 

< 's^oc^iiva.if to approach. 

We also find IW*, whether it comes from itvony by 
droppings, or from Umi, by syncope; of which we 
I shall speak in the next rule. 

Obser'vations on the dialects, 
I - The usual dialects are to be found also in this verb; Att. T^iVi*/, 
i and Ui^vxi^ Dor. "^tv and /s^cv, &c. 

Participles. 
Second ao?^ist. 
i 'luv, lovrog, l^frocylov. From the indicative aorist iW. 
ANNOTATION. 

Others will have it, that luv is the present tense, observing at the 
same time that there are three present participles acuted : Hvf tens, 
going (which seems rather in that case to come from nj^/, of which 
hereafter:), k<wv, vadens^ walking : and Iwy, qui est, for wv, from 
e)lM, sum, to be. 

The Middle Verb. 
Preterperfect. 
ET»y also from the poetic verb ffw, Att. 5«, by re- 
solution vise, moc^y r\U ; and this person is the same 
with the third person of the imperfect active. Plun 
T^A^iVj sync. ?jwfi/, xve haxie gone : from whence comes 
{tcTT^fMiv abiimus, 

PlU'perfect. 
''Hiiu, abieram : whence comes dvm and lirMmy Lu- 
cidiXk, redierat : ^h^ tr answer at ^ Herod. J^^ig^'cj, Lucian, 
narraverat : ^»fg^'f(r<xi/, narra^oerant^ Id, 

G G n^o»j«, 



' £26 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

U^oiiiy egressus fuerat^ VXmI, i^^irin, persecukis fue- 
raty Dion. Cass. Itt*??;, venerat, succurrerat, Luciaii. 
Third person plural mio-ocv, Alt wocv: whence 
dvm(rMv, revenerant : V^h<row, egressi fuerant : ocvtsm^ii' 
i<roiv, Lucian, invadentibus hostiliter occurrerant' ;. 
drrmfTdVy abler ant. We likewise meet with l7r«i/*i£t/*£i/^ 
redkramus. 

Future, 

The poetic verb im forms also u<roiMxi, ibo: l^tf/o-o- 
fAociy ril go and meet him, Horn. Thence comes the 
first aorist «{V«To, ^e zV ^^o?2e ; and its compound par- 
ticiple in Homer fAsriKrotixivog, having followed, 

"IHMI, eo, *vado, I go. 
Rule XX. 
Of its formation. 
*'E(a mth a smooth breathing forms also 1^*? ''^hich is 
used but in "veryfow persons. 

Examples. 

From this same Iw with a smooth breathing, comes 
likewise i??/**, eo, vado, formed by an improper redu- 
plication. 

This verb is intirely irregular; but is used only in a 
few persons, most of which we find in Hesych. and 
elsewhere ; as 

In the present, ni<rt, he goes, plur. ui^iv, we go : 
"whence comes dvU^^^Vj we ascend : MarU^Avj, xve descend, 
in Alex. Aphrod. 

In the imperfect, 'U(tuv, they did go. 

In the optative, Im, I wish he went. 

In the infinitive, livon to go ; from whence we have 
dmivtki, to depart : y^znivKi, to run after, to pursue, ox 
follow: zr^oqiivoii, to go towards. 

In the participle, Uig, Uvrog, going, and luv, lovrog : 
lAtnovnq, tzcirop, Gaza, soliciting every body: .^s7}ovr£g, 
rr,u u^£rriv,B3Ls\], embracing virtue. 

In the Middle Verb. 

The present is ^ 'IsfAoci ; from whence comes 'Itrpci, he 
' goes away: 'Uvrai, they go away. 

The 



Formation ofU^f^i, mitto, 227 

The participle U[A£yog, Apollonius, goi?7g away. 
The second aorist ?v. I went ; from whence comes 
-GTci^v^ I arrvoed^Iwasjust come. 
The imperative iWo, »£<r0w, he gone. 



CHAP. VIII. 

Of verbs derived from £w, with a rough breathing. 
And first of "JHMIj initto, to send. 

Rule XXI. 
Of the formation of this verb. 
"Ir.iAi xoith a rough breathing, coming from 'iw, con- 
forms entirely to rtUi^\. 

Examples. 

M. HIS verb is not irregular, since it conforms en- 
tirely to Ti'Oji/** : but we place it here among the 
rest derived from Iw, whence it is formed by an im- 
proper reduplication. It is conjugated thus : 

Indicative Active. 
Present, 

IfriCTiy initio, iSy it. 



Sing. 




t/ 

trig, 


I>i(r*, 


Dual 


. . . 




c/ 


Plur. 


\'lfAtV, 




h7cr^. 



Ion. liucrti from thence laai. 
-. The compounds vary with regard to their accent ; 
iUlourij intromittunt ; zr^o^ioca-i, adjnittunt: but luioctrt 
takes a circumflex ; and (rvv{u(ri, or a-uviola-i, committimt, 
has both. 

The Imperfect, 
^'Uvj mittebam, like Iri^w. But instead of this we 
generally make use of the imperfect of Uu, which is 
'iHv, I'Eig, ifj, (^c. according to the third rule. Likewise 
in composition, oc(piisv, olpsigy d(pUi : and according to the 
Attics ^pHVt dimittebam, relinquebarn, permittebam : x«t 
HK 7\(pi£ xotXeTv, JMark i, 34, and he did not suffer them to 
^peak. It borrows also of the poetic flw, the imperfect 
t^QVy fTir, fTf, from whence comes mhU^i II. 9. 

Future 



228 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

Future, 

*^E(ru, mn^, yicrth mitiam, &c. like S-nVw. From thence ■ 
come m(ru, immittajji, Horn, jtAcOiJorw, transmit tarn, He- 
siod. 

First aorist. 

'^Hksc. (for ifo-a) like Wmoc, a?, £. Thus d(priyioi, remisi ; 
-zsr^^wa, omisi ; cuvJiHa, Lucian, intellccvi. 

In the plural w^/^tfi' : its compound ocvmoiy^sv, synco- 
pated dvvfAsv, dimisimus. 

The Attics prefix here a syllabic augment, saying 

Second aorist. 
Sing, riv, ??, J7. 

Dual ETOJ/^ £T7]K. 

JrlUr. 5/XfI/, £T£, ffl-ajV. 

From whence comes mr^oBo-ocvj prcemiserunt. It is formed 
from the imperfect, by casting away the reduplica- 
tion. 

Perfect. 
^Tytoc with Si, Boeot. for ?xa, like ri^£t>Lx, From 
thence comes the plu-perfect i^yts^v; the participle 
smug, its compound cc(p£i)ioog, qui dimisit ; infinitive 
d(p^.mivxiy dimisisse. But from the perfect a^soca is also 
formed dtpiuaa,, diynisi ; passive oi(pBi(j^ociy and Gc(piuiAOiii 
dimissus sum : dtpioouroct o-a a* di^cx^rioci, Luc. vii, 48. /% 
sins are forgiven. 

Subjunctive. 
Present. 

JM tM f^. Q 

iw, HI?, ivij cxC. 

RuIe XXII. 

For the Second aorist. 

The subjuJictvoe aorist S, ^g^ forms iikezmse £«, «;w, eYi^g. 

Examples. 

The second aorist regular is S, ??, v, Sec. formed 

from the present, by rejecting the reduplication. But 

the Attics prefix a syllabic augment to it, tu^ IW, f»?, 

of which the poets make a diphthong, flw, A?, s7vi : 

d^EiVj dimisero. In like manner iiu, «>??, tIyi : dym, 

Horn, remisetit yhy adding the vowel jj. 

% OPTA- 






Formation of iV^, mitto. £^9^ 

Optative. 

Present, 

Um and ioijAi. Second aorist, s*V, 

Imperative. 

Present, 

\i^l, liTUj &C. 

Second aorist. 
?f, £T«, like ^k. From thence come the compoiUide 
•arf Off, prcemittp : oi(pi^, dimitte : xaO«?, demitte. 
Infinitive. 
Present, 
limiy demitteix : oi(piiv»iy dimittei^e. 
Second aorist. 
Etj/at, its compound dtpsTvon, dimittere. We meet also 
with i(A7rci^7iu»i, Simpl. in Epict. laa^are, remilterei 
Ifra^nvixiy Achil. Tatius, immittere, submittere. 
Participles. 
Present, lii?. Second aorist, tig, eWo? : from whence 
iccih)g, qui suhmisit : rxg }i6[jt.oig KCi^s7<rony Dion. Cassius, 
comas submissce : d^slg, qui dimisit, &c. 

Passive. 
Present, tsfxuij I am sent, like r/Of/AK*. 

Imperfect, UfAnv, I was sent. 
First Aorist, thv, like Iri^nv. 
But we likewise say u^nv ; from whence come d^dUv, 
and a(p£0*ii/, dimissi sunt : lijoc^ii^n, Hom. dimissus est. 

Perfect, «T/A«t, the third person plural, sTvrat, missi 
sunt : from whence a^srvrat, dimissi sunt : ccmvroit, re- 
missi sunt, Att. dtpimro^i and dvmvrcti ; in the same ^ 
manner as d<pi(axci, for cl(psTKoc, dropping the subjunctive 
and inserting an w. 

But because the regular preterite should be £/*«<, 
and its compound ol(p£[xoHf from thence comes oi(pi(ng, 
remissio : as from the natural preterite ri^ti^^ (in^stead 
of which we say rihifAsn) comes ^£>a, -^cVk, theme, 
position, &c. 

Thus from a^*, eo, perfect tTfAcn, from the poetic 
tlu, come ilriov, and Irm, rgecting «; and by pleonasm 
Irnrm, eundum. 

The 



1230 Book IV. OfVmBs. 

The rest is formed regularly. For H^nu makes in the 
subjunctive lOw, third person plural lOwo-*, mittantur. 

Infinitive, lOJii/at or il^hoci; from whence come 
hiKvM, and miKvoci, immissum esse: woc^i^miX'i, Euseb. 
languidum esse. 

Participle, I0f)?, fWof, missus ; from whence avsOf]?, 
ahsolutus : d^ih)?, dimissus, &c. 

Middle. 

Indicative first aorist, mocy.nv, ri'xw, moiro ; whence 
come dvYiTiociATiVj remisi, or dicavi : Ts-^o^mocfAnVf admisiy 
&c. 

Second aorist, I'/^iii/, iVo, and I'o, S, Ito, like l^BfAnv, 
&c. 

Subjunctive, S/Aat. 

Optative, sl/xnv, fTo, sTto. 

Imperative, eVo, and so, 2, iVOw : eVOoi/, Vo-Gwv : whence 
we have x^'Oa, submittito ; -st^og-h, admittito ; zr^oa^ prce- 
mittito, emittito : retaining the same contraction as in 
the imperfect and second aorist. 

Infinitive, £0-0^* ; participle, Vjtxji/o?; whence •sr^osHASj/or, 
prcemittensj emittens. 

Observations on the verb o-uv/Vi/aj, to understand. 

2vvi7iiAt, committo, is composed of Iij/x/, 'mitto ; it is taken for to 
send together, ot to confront f to compare^ and to put together ; and 
metaphorically for to hear, to understand, comprehend, knovo, see, 
and perceive, signifying the application of the senses or of the mind 
to the object. It forms its tenses sometimes from itself, and some- 
times from o-yy/iD, circumflexed. Thus we say in the third person 
singular, a-wivia-i and arwtsT, intelligit ; and in the plural, cvnaai, 
and a-vvi^a-i, intelligunt. In the imperative, a-vnt^t and awlu. In 
the participle, o-yy/5<\, kyroq, and a-wtSjv, Svto?, intelligens. But cvvtuv, 
ovTo?, conveniens, comes from avw^t. 

The first aorist is avyyiy-x (like ^>ca above mentioned.) commisi, 
conscius sum, intellexi : » ya^ <Tvvv>Kacy, Mark vk 52. Jbr they did not 
vnderstand. But the Attics change o- into |, ^wsws, jAx^taSaci, 
Hom. in pugnam commisit, where we find a syllabic £ after the 
preposition, which makes a double augment. And sometimes this 
I i§ put before; l^vn.K'x^ ocs, f; &c. 



CHAP. 



Formation o/^V^i, ,?eJd(?. 231 

CHAR IX. 

Of "lEUk-^, ""HMAI, and ""EmAL 

Rule XXIII. 
Formation of Tf^at, concupisco, 

"h(xoci coynmg from Xw, with a rough breathings ex- 
presses desire. 

Examples. 

X HIS verb is used in the present passive, 'iiiAta, 
ncrocij like r/QsjUiXt : its compound l(pU(Accif I desire. 

Imperfect, U{ji.nv, IpsiAnv, But it is scarcely used ex- 
cept in these two tenses. 

ANNOTATION. 

This verb sometimes signifies to gOt but with a sort of an eager- 
ness or desire. Homer says, oiW^s, tsfj^svuv, of those who were 
returning to their country. Therefore this verb is properly the 
passive of I^'j ^itto, which implies that a person has a strong de- 
sire of something. 

'*'HMAI, sedeo, to sit. 

Rule XXIV. 

Of the formation of ?/*«». 

1. ^(/.oii, with a rough breathings comes Ukexvise from 

iu : 

2. Retaining its n, it is often taken for the preterite, 

3. But fTo-jwa; and lU^hw are from 'i^ofAUi; ria-i^oci from 

i^oo ; and iti^a^i fi^om riu. 

Examples. 
1. This verb follows the middle voice, and is 
formed from m, to sit, in the manner as follows : 
by repeating s they make lew, and from thence is 
formed eV*, in the middle E^/xat, and by crasis ?j(*«t. 
It retains the >? in all its numbers, and therefore is 
conjugated thus. 

Indicative. 



Sing. 


^/Aat, 


%.(Toci, r\ro6.i. 


Dual 


71/A£0OI^, 


^<t9ov, tjg-^ov. 


Plur. 


. ry^s^ocp 


yiG-hy wren. 

Ion, Urocif Poet. lUron. 



£32 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

The compounds draw back the accent : xaOyjju«i, 

xd^fifrat, and xaOw, x«0>]r«». 

2. -This tense is often taken for the preterite. 

3. Hence we may remark four preterites, which 
resemble each other, and without a good deal of care 
may be easily confounded. 

The first is this J^at. 

The second, sTtrfAcn^ sedi, taken from h^w, ^ofi^aiy to 
sit, Plu-perfect sl'a-fAnv, sederam. 

This E^w likewise comes from £w, by inserting ^: 
its second aorist is \§iiv, whence the Latin sedere 
seems to be derived. Its compound is yiM^a : but 
changing b into *, we say likewise T^w, x^i/^w, Ix^'dt^oi/, 

xaO/fl-w, InaOiora, xixaSixa : the imperative, xdh^e, noc^io-ov, 

The third, ?(rjuat, comes from ^X, to rejoice or take 
pleasure. 

And the fourth, itfAon, comes from ?w, to dress, or 
from IV*j ^^ ^^^^d. See the latter in the preceding 
chapter, and the former in the next page. 

Imperfect, 



Smg. ?/X>]V> %(rO, YiTO, 



Poet. STO. 
Dual rifAi^OVj yiG-^OVj Yi(T^YiV, 

Pjur. Tifxs^Xy ?(r9f, Ji/TO. 

Poet, sl'ixro & vixr9. 

In like manner^ lx«0ii^?iv, hoc^na-o, roj or, without the 
syllabic augment, xaGu/A*]!/, xafino-o, to. 

Imperative. 
'^Hro, ?!§«. In the same manner ytolhcro, >iffO«. 

Ion. KtiOvjo, and assuming the short vowel xaSao, 
by crasis xa08. 

Infinitive. 

'**H(r0a», xaOyio-Scui, scdere. 
Participle. 
'^H^tvo; { in like manner xft:0>?/A£vo?, zrci^Y\[Aivog. 

'^EIMAI, indutus sum. 
This is~ a preterite coming from V«, as we have 
already observed : it is conjugated thus. 

Sing., 



Formation ofetfAxi, indutus mm, 233 

Sing. fT/tAat, fTo-flti, (poet. %(T(t»^) sfTui, and tken; 
third plur. i7ocrcn, 

Plu-perfect. sifAriv and fo-o-a/xiiv ; eTo-o and tVo-o ; iWo 
and fTro, or IVo; third plural «Wo, Horn, and i(r<roiTo, 
indutus flier at. 

Participle, cf/Afvof. 

Future, IVw, or eWw. 

First aorist active, t^x and IVo-a, aj, f, / A^v^ 
dressed, I hwoe placed. 

Infinitive, fTra* and cVo-^t; whence comes l<pi(r(Ton^ 
Horn, but ipsG-G-xi) with the accent on the first, is the 
imperative middle, like r^»i. 

First aorist middle, ihdi^nv and l(r<roo[ji.nvj Uktociayiv, 

Participle, la-a-cHiAEvo?, 

ANNOTATION. 
We likewise say hwiAi, induo, formed Irom the same iu. See in 
the next book a list of the verbs in y^u/. 

But it is to be observed, that several of these persons, which are 
formed with a double s-a-, may likewise come from sla-fj-cci, I am 
seated) which we have already mentioned ; as 'haxi, thou art dressed 
or seated ; ta-cra. or lo-o-a/xijv, / have placed or have dressed ; Icro-a/^xsvo/, 
those tvho have dressed, built, qx founded, 

^ ^^^^ ^ 

Of Irregular Verbs in [xi, zvhose Primitwes are not su 

or tea. 
Rule XXV. 
Of KsTfAoci, jaceo. 
KiTfAoci for 7>i£(Aui, comes Jro?n xico ; it retains ■. n in 
t'oery number. 

Examples. 

jRLErMAI is derived from >csw, o/xa*. Whence regu- 
larly should be formed Inf/^^t, but the » is inserted 
after the £, in the same manner as in i\\hi, I am, and 
J/xt, I go. It retains its diphthong througlK)ut all its 
numbers, as ^jtta*, I sit, retains », 

Present, 

Smg. %iiif.oi,i, usTg-oh, KsTroii. 

Dual Kii(x£^oVy yieTtrhv, iuTa-^ov. 

Plur. H«W£0OJ', XsTtr^i^ XiTvTOH, 

Ion. xetzrxi, Poet. xitotrau 

n H Imperfect 



234 Book IV, qf Verbs. 

Imperfect, Uel^Anv, <ro, ro ; third plural, iaupro* 

Ion, Tiixrof Poet, utiacro^ 

Future middle, ytu<roiJ(,on, as from xftw, o/x«i, »?, era*. 
Dor. xgio-Sjwa/, and Micnv^xi 

Imperative, jtsrtro. Infinitive, xfro-Ofift*. Participle, 

The following compounds draw back their accent : 
ai/aK£i^«j, / repose : iTTixsi/xat, / lean upon : $KZ)in[ASii, I 
am in such a disposition: but in the infinitive they 
retain it, zs-s^iheZt^cci, circumjacere. 

ANNOTATION. 

We likewise read in Horn. Od. *-. xioyrxi, from the barytonous 
verb xBOfAoii ; and in the imperfect, xfovro, without an augment. In 
the subjunctive, aw^oci, from whence ao^ruxiuvrxif Lucian, subja- 
ccant } a-vynr/^rati, Plato, coTiflatay cowyosita sit. 

Rule XXVI. 

Of ''l(r)i/xti scio, cognosce. 

"la-niAi confo7^ms to Irni^iy and is frequently syncopated. 

Examples. 
^I(rYi[/.i is formed from traw, scio, to know^ without 
the reduplication. It is syncopated in several places, 
and conjugated after the manner of rr>i/>tt, thus: 

Indicative. 
Sing. 

Dor. 

Dual 

Sync. 
Plur. 
Sync. 

comes the compound xar/fe, ye know J 'la-xcru 

With the accent on the antepenultima, as also in the 
participle tV«?, ai/ro?, tok, iVao-t, scientibus, contrary to 
the common custom of verbs in /A*, according to which 
it should be iVa?, like iVaj; iVao-t, like /rao-t, &c. 

The imperfect, hn)/, n?, », like Unv» 

Third plural, i'3-a(rai;, sync. iVai/, sciebant. But Tcray , 
imports also ibant, from a/At above mentioned. 

Imperative, iVa9t, iVaVw, sync, h^k, '1^03, Sec, 

But i'j-Gi signifies likewise esto, from £*/*», sum, as 
above, pageSSl. 

. Third 



Ufifjii, 




«o-?i?, 




\(n]<ri. 










KTXrt, 




Dor. 


i'rov, ov. 

iVsv. toe 


^?20tC 


, iV^, (from whence 



For??iation of (p^iJt,(, dico. £35 

Third plural, hdru^avj sync. Itfuxrocv and t^uv. 

In like manner its compounds, am^^i for cwi^roc^i, 
conscius sis. 

Rule XXVIL 
Of the middle formation. 

The middle lV«joi«t, with a smooth breathings assumes 
a T, and forms 'irafAon. 

Examples. 

The middle verb of IVj^^j is IW/x^t, which assuming 
a T, forms iVa^a*,, with a smooth breatliing, in which 
alone it differs from 'ifUfAfu, sto. Thence comes l7r»V^- 
fAoci, S7riroc(ronf Att. iTris-yi, £7nV«Tfi6t, to know ; whereas 
iprociAonj to sw^prise, to fall upon, or oppress, comes 
from Trrx^at. 

Impefect, eVira/xjiv, lirts-x^ro, Ion. «o, contract w, o<.ro ; 
and, with the temporal augment, ^iVtrajtAtiv, aero, &c. 

Rqle XXVIII. 

Of (P^/a/, dico. 

9»/xr, dico, conforms to IrvfAt, From e^^;/, comes (pm 
and thence riv. 

Examples. 
^tifxiis formed from <pKu, without the reduplication, 
and is irregular with regard to the accent. 

The Active. 
Present. 

Sing. (pn[j<>i, (pr,<; (with i subscribed) <pn(ri. 
Dor. <p«p. ' Dor. (pxrU 

Dual (pocroVy (parou. 

Plur. (pa/A£i/, (park '?«Q'*'» 

Dor. (pxvrU 

The accent upon the last syllable, though in the 
participle we say, <pocg, ocvto?, tok, (pota-i, with a circurn- 
flex. And the reason is, because it passes for an enclitic 
throughout the plural, in the same manner as f*V, sum. 

But its compounds draw back the accent ; y.am^M- 
/*;, I assure J >cara^a<ri : ol7ro(pyi(Ji,i, I deny, oi7ro(p(i<Ti ; <rvfA(pY)iMk, 

I agree, crJ/xfpao-^ 

In 



236 Book IV. Of Verbs. 

In every thing else it agrees with «r»p : thus, 

Imperfect, i<pnv, like ityiv, and, without the aug- 
ment, (pnVi (pvcj and ^rJo-Oa, (pri. 

And casting away (p, nv, ??, ?. See Rule XVII. 

Likewise in the present, ^'^^ ^^^ w, for ^np, &c. 

Second aorist, i(p7iVf like gruf: which happens here 
to be the same with the imperfect : and this is the case 
of all verbs in fxi, that are without a reduplication; as 

TAvfjxt, I Suffe7\ itXyiv : yriUfLi, I knoW, iyvuv : 9»Jix/, I 

say, '((pnv, i(pYi, and, according to the Dorics, i(pii : 
avTo;, i(poCj ipse dhit. 

In the dual, 'i(pYirov, l(pv\rnv. 

Plural, i(pYi\J.YiVi £^T£, g^HO-aV. 

It retains the long 7\, whereas the imperfect assumes 
the short a; wherein it conforms to "kriv. In the other 
moods the present is the same wnth the second aorist. 

Subjunctive, (p«, (p??, <pi?, like q-w. 

Optative, (pocinv, like rO'm. 

Imperative, (paOt, <T\)^(poi^i, confess. 

Infinitiv^e, ^ai/at, penacuted; for <poivMi with a cir- 
cumflex on the penultima, or, according to the At- 
tics, <p?vw, is the second aorist of ^atW, proceeding 
from the indicative aorist 'i(pcx.vo(, or iq)Yim, 

Participle, (pa?, saying ; but taking its future from 
faw, which is ^rVw, from thence it forms (^wiv and 
(pia-m; and the first aorist E^Jio-a ; from whence comes 
the optative (pYi(roiiiJi.i, Moh (prKTBioc, the infinitive (pJJcrfi^t, 
and the participle (prVa?. 

Middle Indicative. 

Second aorist, l<pcc^nv, i<poi<ro, &c. 
Imperative, <paw for <paVo, Horn. 
Infinitive, ^ao-Oa*. 
Participle, (pocfAivo^. 



The End of the Fourth Book. 



BOOK V. 
OF DEFECTIVE VERBS 



AND 



Of the Investigation of the Theme, or 
Resolution of Verbs. 



xluFTER having represented in the two preceding 
books the general analogy of both conjugations, that 
is, of verbs in w, and of verbs in jx», with their princi- 
pal irregularities; it is fit now we treat of those, 
which are irregular by defect, as wanting several 
tenses. This will be serviceable, not only towards 
laying a foundation forthe investigation of the theme 
or resolution of verbs, of which we shall treat in the 
sixth and the ensuing chapters of this book; but 
also, towards acquiring a more complete knowledge 
of this language by the analogy of the derivation of 
these verbs, wherein a great part of its fertility con- 
sists. 

For most of these verbs are irregular for no other 
reason, but because they either form, or are formed 
from other verbs : whence it comes to pass^ that 
the primitives are grown unusual in the present and 
imperfect, having left these tenses to their derivatives; 
or, on the contrary, the derivatives being used only 
in the present and imperfect, ' their defect in the 
other tenses is supplied by their primitives : thus Aa/x- 
€mw being derived from the ancient verb A^f^ Kccy.Q(x.vui 

serves 



Q3S Book V. Of Defectives. 

serves for the present and imperfect ; and Xritu) supplies 
its place in the other tenses. 

We may therefore divide the defective verbs hi general 
into two classes : one of verbs, that have only the pre- 
sent and imperfect ; and the other of verbs^ that have 
neither of those tenses, but some others : and each of 
these two classes includes verbs in w, and verbs in [At, 



C H A P. I. 

Of Defectives, that have only the Present and 

Imperfect. 

And first of Verbs in w. 

T ERBS in w, that have only the present and imperfect, may 
be divided generally into two branches, one of verbs in u pure, and 
the other of verbs in u impure. 

I. Defectives in u pure. 

Defectives in w pure, are 

1. Verbs of imitation or resemblance in a&> : xsXaitvtoiu, to he 
llacMsht or bordering upon black ; ^kx,^^ to be as rchite as snotu: 
ya^»3v<aw, to be at rest, to have a great serenity of countenance' 

2. Likewise verbs of desire in aw: ^a.a-iXzia,u, regnaturio, to have 
an ambition (yf reigning : {xacOvtrioidj, to be desirous of learning : aifvirioifi;, 
to desire to buy : T^xrvjyioic^, to be "Milling to be a captain, or leader : 
<Povauy to breathe death and destruction: nxax*^? ^^^ ^^ eager for 
battle. 

3. Poetics derived from another verb, especially if the verb itself 
be a derivative ; as /(T^^^avaw,^ to detain, or restrain, derived from 
\7^a.i\b, which comes from icr;)(;w, and the latter from z;^,"* habeo, 
to have: htx.xvcx.oiJ.xi, to stretch out one's hand to receive any thing, 
from hiKcivu, taken from hUio, and this from ^iy.o^xi, Ion. for Uy(piJi,otiy 
accipio, to take, or receive, 

Tiiere are some formed from a noun, which has been derived 
itself from another verb : l^^/^ocrau, to shut up, or imprison, formed 
from t^y^a,ro<i, or E^xfitTor, incLosure, both in Hesych. coming from 
e'^yw or u^yca, to inclose or shut up. 

But if they are only derived from a nounj and have no relation 
to a verb, then they have their tenses; as ^i5;^5«yao//,a;, machinor, 
to invent, or contrive, from />c»?;^ay>5, machina, a machine, or con* 
irivance. 

4. Verbs in va&», or nso?, formed by inserting v : 'cse^w.u, to sell, or 
expose to sale, derived from -nTE^aw : vnnu, to unite and join together, 
to build, taken from yr.iu} : oV^^iu, proficiscor, to depart, or go, from 
"^'x^* ^^r oi';^o/y.cc; : iKviouxt, to come, froHl 'Uu, as also its compound 
vwiaxvioij.xt, to promise, from wiV;^w. 

Some 



Verbs in n of the Present and Imperfect, 239 

Some of these change e into i ; as from 'asru comes 'zsirnu^ to 

Jail : from o^iyo/Xa/, l^iyv(x,oiJ.xiy to desire J &c. 

But if these verbs happen to be derived from those in aw, then 
other verbs in ^^i are formed from thence ; as from ns^aw, H/^vaa>, 
and Ki^vioi^h to mingle : from <mtra,af 'csirmu, 'CTtrv'»/^<, pando, to 
open : from. -BjcAao/, in-nXoccp^ 'srl'rrXyiiJf^i, to approach : fi'om o-xs^aw, 
o-Kihoibft and a-KQyv}{/.i, to disperse, to dissipate ; or, rejecting the first 
letter, Ktha^u, and xt^vij/x* • from xes/Aaa;, to hang up, comes x^j^/o- 
yoicj, and x.^sfji.yr,iJi.(, retaining e ; afterwards x^>5/xya4>, and KfniJ.vviy,{f 
changing s into vi ; whence K^yj/.tvo^-, .a high or perpendicular rock, a 

precipice. 

5. Poetics in aio;: as^oiu, y.sooiiu, likewise in its stead as^cti^u, 
to mix : cnu^otUi ax-z^ocicj, to scatter : XiKaa, XtXcuioy^xi, to desire. 

6. Verbs in elu derived from a future ; ya^ia, to marry ; yoc^-h-' 
cru, yx[A,vi(T£tco, to long to be married : tjoXsixiu, to tvage "doar ; -ctoA*- 
ixricru, 'ujoKtyi.ricrztu, to be eager for 'war : jS^ucj, or ^^uaau, to eat ; 
^^u<Tu, ^^u}(Tt\u, to be hungry : ottIu or -oy,xi, to see j o->l'U, 6\l/siM, to 
desire to see. 

But we are not to confound with these, other verbs which the 

poets form from a present in ico, inserting i, and which have the same 

signification with their primitives ; as Jsico from psco, to Jloio: vUKztu 

from vttK&oi), to xjorangle, or dispute. Likewise rAsiu, to perfect, or 

Jinish, from tsXew : k^xteioj, to overcome, from x^xricu, &c. 

7. Polysyllables in vu> : hiKyvu, to shovo : pvyyvu, to break : a<^ef 
vvu, to extinguish ; and others of the like sort : from whence come 
the verbs in y/x,/, of which we shall treat hereafter. 

8. All vetbs in viui : ccKvIm, to be sorely troubled and vexed in mind : 
kyviu, to accompany , or to toait upon ; onrviUi to be married ; though 
we read the future oTtvatt in Aristoph. casting away the subjunctive 
i from the penultima. 

II. Defectives in w impure. 

We shall range them here according to the order of the conso- 
nant preceding &> ; and we have one general remark to make, 
that several of those verbs, which have two consonants before u^ 
are defectives ; as 

Verbs in BO preceded by another consonant: pV^w, to ivhirlf 
or turn about : (^i^Qu, to feed, or to pasture. Even (pE^w, or (piQoiMa, 
to run oijoay, to be afraid, has but very few tenses of its own ; no 
more than aiQu, to honour : nevertheless la-sOw, in Sophocles, for 
Io-c<p0w, comes from aiQoixxi, according to Dionysius, because its 
termination is pure : and XtiQu, libo, fundo, to spill ; oci/.tiQu, per- 
muto, to change ; and t^iCw, tero, to use, or voear out, are also re- 
gular verbs for the same reason. 

Verbs in ACl preceded by a consonant ; as xlu, v^w, e^w : ea5o- 
/Aflt;, to desire : a-vsv^u, libo, to pour out : xvMu, to roll : w/f^A;, 
pedo, &c. 

Verbs in I'zn, (^ having tlie force of two consonants) derived 
from a circumflex of the same signification ; as 

a'lru, atri^u, to ask, Or to beg. 

arf^fcJ, ar^E/^t/^cj;, to be intrepid. 



£40 Book V. Of Defectives.' 

^^Efjiiu, vt^tii'i^Uf to he at rest* 

(/.vi^vKoiuf i^vi^vKi^Uf to ruminate* 

niAEcrauy ysiAscr'i^ctff to be angry, 

TsoXsiJiBu, 'EjoXzyu^oji to Wage war, 

'sj^oy.xXsUf 'sj^oy.otkl^tjf to provohe, 

ToyotyiUf Tovoc%i>^uy to sigh, or weep. 

But those derived from a noun, are generally regular; as from 
oixo?, a house, o/xt^o/, to build, &c. We must however except, 
according to Eustathius, o^^^/^w, to water, or sprinJcle, from oiJt.Q§oSf 
or o(ji.^§U, imber, rain : and raO/Ai^c;, to weigh, or balance, from 
ri^Qixog, or rxQfAiov, statera, scales or balance. 

Even those derived from a verb of a different signification have 
likewise their tenses ; as from ztKhteu, to be rick, 'GsXsrt^w, to inrich, 
&c. 

9. Poetic derivatives in a'GH, e'gh, T'on, 20n, and X0CI; 
as from 

afxvvuf oifAvvdQuf to defend. 

huKco, huKoiQu, to pursue* 

vi^u, vsimOu, to pasture* 

(pXeyu, (p^iyiQu, to burn. 

(p9ivu, (pQivvQu/f to corrupt. 

l*.ivvat lAtvvOuf to diminish, 

e^u, b<t9oj, to eat. 

l^sUca, h^X^^9 ^^ shake. 

Likewise a,^9o(Aui, to be heavy, and i^i^oiAoit, to be hated, the futures 
of which seem as if they came from a verb in u pure a.^^i<royi.xt, 
and l^-ntToiAxi. 

Verbs in Kn ; as the poetic o\Uu, to ruin, or destroy, formed 
from Ixiu, ia-u, from whence should be derived oXio-xu. 

Likewise I^vAku, and l^vKot^iu, inhibeo, to hinder or refrain, 
froms^vxitf, and this from l^iu. 

Verbs in 2Kn, let whatsoever vowel precede ; as 
- « ; ^Quu, y>Q(kar>iu, to be of age of puberty : yvi^oiu, yvt^xcau, to be 
old, to grow old : l7^o(,u, Ixoia-xu, to appease, to render Javourable ; 
though we meet with »Aaa-9«; in Horn, ^nu, by reduplication 
'^t^^a.crKu, to run away. 

£ : a^ku, oc^saKu, placeo, to please, to be agreeable. 

% ; ockYsu, ocX'S'ncrKu, to grow, to increase, from the future Mricrt* ; 
whence we must also derive all those that have an » or w in the 
penultilna, fAv^oiAxi, future yi.n<royiMt, by reduplication fji.i[Avn<r)cw, 
to remind, or put in mind. 

I : Kviu, Kvia-Ku, to conceive : it^iu, sv^ia-xu, to find or invent : 
TEf 6w, Ts^ia-au, to deprive : aAow, aXto-Ku, io seize or taJce : ts^a, by 
reduplication ^itt^cku, to give to drink. 

: &0U, 06<ncu, to pasture, or give forage. 

u : /3/0&;, future ^tua-u, ^lutmu ; from whence comes am^tu(T)cs(rQui, 
to rise to life, in Plato : kyJ^Xou, whence is formed l|a/M,CAay, in 
Plato, Aristophanes, and Suidas, future ciijt.QKu(T», and thence 
oi,i/.Q\{lfa-Ku, to miscarry, or to procure a miscarriage ; we likewise find 
ociaQUctku 1 &^u, &^uau, ^^ua-icu, and by reduplication ^tQ^ia-xu, to 
feed, to eat : in like manner rgtjv, riT^uaKv, to wound. 



yvrbs in fl of the Present a77d Imperfect, 241 

v: (AsQvu;, /iAfOycTxw, to maJce drunk ; ^vu, h'^va-Ko;, to dress. 

From (pdu coiires (pd^xu;, 'tii(pxa-Kct/, also isji<pxv(fK»;, and isjr- 

Verbs in BAH, KAn, ^AO. ; as 

f/,i[jL<^Xo{j(.xif to take care of, from /j-sKoijCizj* 
xUxoij(,x(f to command, from KixofAxt, 
tpxu, to otve, from o^uKu, 
Polysyllables in i' A AH ; as 

SavStXXw, to stare about ; likewise 
^^vKXb), to loath, from (^Vtu, pedo, fceteo, &c'. 
Verbs that have only A pure before n ; as 

S^eXw, te be viitting : ^sXa, to take care of: xeA*/, to cornmand : 
trif^Wf to be ; Vikewhe 0sXoiJi.cici, volo, to be mllitig. 
Verbs in TMH ; as rir[AM, to find. 

Several verbs in Nn, which may be divided into different clt^ses, 
and of which we shair treat more at large hereafter, Chap. VII. 

The 1st is of verbs in A'Nn, which are often derived from a 
verb in iia or i.6} ; as ii^ia, from y^oi, delecto, to rejoice ; second 
future a^ft/, and thence o^ka ; from whence comes f»>5avw, placeo, 
to please : (pQdu, (pOdvu, to prevent, &c. 

The 2d of verbs in Al'Nft, likewise derived from ew, or du ; as 
oXicrQ-zOf, oTiia-QxivM, labor, to slipf or Jail : ^iv, ^xim, gradior, io 
tvalk. 

The 3d of polysyllable^ in Ei'Nfi; as (potUu, luceo, to shine, 
from <poclvu, or ipdu : aXceivw, effugio, to shu?i, from x^.evw, &c. 

But dissyllables are generally regular, as we shall see in the re- 
solution of verbs. 

The 4th of divers verbs in I'NO, and YNfl ; as rim, luo, io 
j)ag or atone for : J^yvw, dirigo, to conduct, to direct^ to correct. 

The 5th of derivatives in N0, preceded by a consonant; as 
<zuB<pvu, to kill, derived from (psva. 

And of these some change the vowel ; as from ^wu, '^dxm, mor- 
deOj to bite, 

/lAEvw, iXifxvui maneo, to remain, 
ysvw, yiyvofAxt, fio, /o become^ 
istru, vylrvcfj, and t^irvtot, cado, to fall. 
The verb cte'vo;, laboro, satago, to tak^ pains, to he busy, is also 
defective : its perfect middle is '^iirovoc, from whence comes 'cs6vo<;, 
labour ; but the present is very scarce, though Eustathius mentions 
it. risyo/Aai is often repeated in Homer. 
Verbs in snn, or znOMAI. 

'iiroif.oii, scrvoiAxi, sequor, tofollotv, 

hiiru, Iv'kjttu, dico, to say^ which forms of itself the future 
hl-\'b)\ and makes likewise Iv/o-Tr^o-fc;, after the manner of 
circumflex verbs. 
Verbs in rpn formed by syncope. 

ay§o/>t,a/, from aye<fo/xa», to assemble, 

IVfo^a/, from ly£i^o(x.xi, to be stirred up, or awakened ; from 
whence we find in Hesych. l^iy^n<;, for s^eys^Om- 
Some poetics in 2in ; as 

zraipda-o-Mf to stare, or look about: ao^^^Vaw, to bs accustomed: 

I I *yy5v(7crfc'> 



24i2 Book V. Of Defectives. 

oi,yi'I)a(Tay to he ignorant of: «^/jycro-*?, to he empty ^ or foolish : l»W«; 
Horn, for hs'jru, to say. 

Derivatives in nxn, or KTH, which change the 5 of their pri- 
mitives into / ; as 'csiru, 'criTrlw, to foil : rixw, r/^lw, to bring forth a 
child: hiiru, IviTrlw, to say. But '^i'n]u), to throvO) or to cast, though 
derived from piiru, is nevertheless regular. 

"I<r;^w, habeo, ^o-^aw, derived from 'i^Ut changing s into /, and 
inserting <r ; as h'^a-iru, from hiiiM, 

From /'<r%6; comes (XfA7ricrx<^i lo clothe or dress, formed from »/*!?>* 
and £;^&;, where we find (?> changed into -tt, by reason of the aspirate 
that follows : likewise from 'i^a comes kiA^'ni^u, future cc^^i^u. 

Verbs derived from unusual contracts, as some terminated in 
2n or *n: thus from oiv^iu comes ay|a;, augeo, to augment ;^ 
from e\]/eft;, ^^\^w^ coquo, to boil i from «^£|ew, oi^Ks^u, to repulse, to 
assist. 

Likewise others derived from a future ; as «,'!&;, ago, duco, to 
lead, or conducts whence comes the imperative a|f, ot,^iru'. olcrv, 
fero, to carry ; whence comes the imperfect ola-ov, the imperative 
ota-s, oiVerw : o^a-u, concito, to excite, or stir up, Hesych, passive 
o^<ro[Axi, imperfect u^a-oi^m, u^cra. Ion. o^crio, imperative o^ffn, ex- 
pergiscere, axvake, rise up. And these verbs come from the fu- 
tures of ayu, otu, o^u, whose iEoHc future is o^au for o^u. 

In like manner SyVw, /Sncrw, xi^u, for Si/w, subeo, to go under ; 
^oiu, or ^oiivca, to go; \iya, to say: likewise ri^cru for rs'i^u, to 
break, to spoil; ^oda-u, or ^otda-a, from ^od^oj, or ^otda-t^, to doubt^ 
or deliberate. But Ivau makes in the active imperfect e^yaov, and 
in the middle IWoz/cwv. 

Verbs derived from preterites ; as 

y.iic\y\yoj, clango, to make a noise, from xXa^w, perf. mid. xexX^x^. 

'STtiP^iKu, to dread, to be afraid, from (p^irra. 

Ipptycj, to be astonished, to be frightened, from ptyia. 

ly^nyo^uf, to be 'watchful, from y^ryo^scy, perf. mid. ly^-hyo^x. 

But sometimes these verbs derived from the perfect middle form 
their tenses regularly : as nz^dyu from >cfa^&», to cry out, forms the 
first aorist Ikbk^cic^xi and even the perfect seems to have been used> 
since from thence are derived the nouns x£>£f«y/A«, a noise, or cla- 
mour ; ~K£xfwxr>j?, one that makes a noise. 

In like manner zsz'nQiQiu, to have confidence, formed from -cj*- 
moSoc, the perfect middle of -srstdw, to persuade, has nevertheless its 
preterperfect, as appeals from the nouns verbal 'CJt'no\Qvi<^iZi fiducia, 
confidence, assurance. 

And IrnKu, sto, formed from sVajta, has the plu-perfect middle 
ttrrxE/v. See Book III. Chap. iii. Rule li. 

Verbs of a gradual derivation, several of which are in a'ZH; as , 

aXvu, a.Xv~r«;, dXiia-ycu, o(,>^v<7)coi^a, tO draiv back, 

S^aw, "B^uTu, ^^xTKu, B^xa-Ku^oj, to run atvay, 
iKtku, Ixda-u, vXoia-KUf, yiXxa-Kx^u; , vagor, to wander up and down, 
%\tn, tXau, bKkvco, sXkvtm, kXw^d^u), to draw, or drag, 
I'f TTw, f^frv^co, l^TivToi^u, to creep. 

Others in A'zn ; as r^ifr^, r^oiru, r^oirxXi^Uf to turn, to change, to 
return ; likewiise IvT^oTrciKi^cc, ' 

Or 



Verbs m Ul of the PreseJit and Imperfect. MS 

Or in 20n ; as ^dco, ^iQciu, ^iQdcruf ^iQcia^uy to go, to ivalk, to 
advance ; for which we find ^i^clcra-aj in Hesych. 

To all these defectives we may likewise join those, whose redupli- 
cation terminates in a liquid ; as 

^xivu, ^x[A-^xUu) to lisp, to stammer, to have a difficult^/ of speech. 

pi^xl^u, jjix^-ij^xicij, niteo, to be bright. 

(pxUu, 'TTx^A.-ipxtvu, luceo, to shine, to give light. 

Likewise xx^axI^u and yx^yxi^u, vibro, to dart, to throix ; ^y^- 
fAv^u, to murmur s Ix^lxiflut to devour, though we find in Hesych. 
Zi^si°^x(^.e, he has devoured. 



CHAP. IL 

Of Defeclkes in fx.i, that are scarcely used, e.vcept in the 
Present and the Imperfect of some Moods. 

X HERE are likewise defectives in /:x<, which being used in 
the present, are not only unusual in several other tenses, but also 
differ somewhat from the analogy of the other verbs of this 
termination, parti<jularly those that come from a verb in dotf or in 
U). We shall give them here according to their order. 

I. Defectives fi'om a verb in Ail. 

"A.yxjxxi, to admire ; imperf. r.ydiJt.'^v ; opt. kyxiy.fi-i. But the fut- 
^y-las^Axi, 1. aor. r^yaa-dixviv, part. o'.yxa-QsUt come from a^ydsy.xi, or 

ccyx^o^xt, 

B/C»/x/, to ijoalh, unusual, instead of which is used /3«*v« ; part. 
Mx<;, in Hom. 2. aor. K-nv ; subjunct. /3^, ^r.q, ^n ; opt. ^xkv. But 
it borrows of /Saw the future ^-hdu, 1. aor. zQ'n<Tx, perf. &iQyix.x. 

Tyv}fji.i, to be old, to tvaa: old ; infin. ys^dvxi, from whence the old 
Attics formed Kxrxyn^xvxi ; part, yvi^x^y ocvt9?. It comes from y/i^xt*/, 
whence also y/i^xa-xu is derived. 

Ai^^vtlJLi, to run away ; 2. aor. 'it^xv, which is not only a third 
pers. plur, for s^^^axv, but also a 1st sing, for l^^^jv. Thorn. 
Magist. in Eclog. In like manner in its compounds, xire^^xv, 5<£- 
6§xv ; the optat. aTro^^a/uv, ^tx^^xt'/iv ; the infin. xtto^^cIvxi, ^ix^^xvxi ; 
part, xiro^^x^y ^ix^^xq. It comes from ^g«<y, whence also is formed 
^i^^xffxu, of which hereafter. 

AvvxfAxi, to be able, to have poiver and aidhority ; imperf. llvvd- 
tmv, and Att. r?5yyacV}9v; subjunct. Ivvu^xi-, optat. ^jv^t/x^y; infin. 
'^v)>xaQxi\ part, ^viocf^eyos. It borrows its other tenses from 5i/vap- 
f/^xi; whence comes the future ^wnj-oi^xt ; 1. aor. iW^nv; perf.. 

OSOVVV)[J(,XI, 

"E^xfAxif to love ; imperf. h^diAr^v^ it takes its other tenses from 

1§XW. 

"ErvifAf, to stand; the present indicat. is not used; but it has the 
optat. hxUv, from whence comes a.^6r«/«v, absistersm / the infiijit. 
iTxixi, stare. Its primitive is rdiu, 

"i'jrlxi^xi,toJly;^imi^trf.iTfidiA.y)v; % aor. mid. iTrla/xvjv; infinit. 
^Ua-Qxi; part, 'olx^im. But the second aor. act, is sVIvjv; from 

& whence 



244 Book V. Of Defectives. 

ivhence comes the infin. ^1«va< ; part, -cjla?, as formed from \'irlyji/.i. 
It is derived from vjldcu, whence is borrowed tlie 1st fut. Ma-ofjiott; 
perf. zje-kIxixai, with an «. And -zsrlaw is formed by sync, frona 
-cr/Iafc;, by which figure we likewise say liflot/.'nvt islicrQa.ij and tsrlo- 
fiEvo?, from n^ro^xif whicli is of the same signification. 
^ "laviiAi, to know. We have already taken notice of its conjuga- 
tion in the preceding boolc. 

K»f v«fc/, to mix, makes the imperf. l^/^v/iv ; infin. m^vivxi ; part. 
x{^v^?. But it borrows its o.ther ,tenses from xt^aw, of which we 
shall treat hereafter in xE^awy/x/. 

K.ix^vi^h instead of which we ^Iso say x/ j^^aw, to lend ; 3. perSc 
jjiur. x/;^^a(r/ ; part. x/%faf ; pass, ycl-x^qx^dn, from wherice comes 
the part. x/;^^a^avo?. It has of xi'^^ ^^® future %f>5(7a>; 1. aor. 
h'x^via-x ; the perf. xi^^mx ; but xe;^^ >7//,lvo?, having borroived, and 

Kfjjo-fisK, ^OT-r^^tp^rf, Cqme from ;;^^c6i,;, or ;j^^i?^&;. 

Kg'f/u.vij^;, or ic^v)ixvr.iM(, susjjendo ; imper, x^w^vij, Att. instead of 
x^'iiyi.yxQiy or y.^-»iJt.vviQ; ; pass, x^n^tv^^a;, pendeo ; part. x§>?//.va/x£v05^^ 
pendens. It is formed from y.^siioicof whence comes the future x^e- 
fA.cc<Ta/l 1. aor. Ix^ljw,acra; 1. fut. pass. x^»9/x,aSi5<7o/>t(z; ; 1. aor. Ex§5f(,ao-0«v. 

We likewise find in the present, k^i^cxiaoci, pendeo, whence comes 
the imperfect Ix^e'^w for eK§E{Aoc(To, pendebas ; infin. x^E^cca-Ooct ; part» 
u^ElJt.a{AEvos : and we not only meet with KqE^a,^a,iy but also with x^^- 
lAoiAcci. Aristoph. £< x^E'/y,o/o-0£, utinam suspensi siiis. As from «j£ raw 
we not only say 'csiralxxi, but likewise 'sjsrofjLizi, 

Ov/»>jjU/, to assist ; infin. oviv<x>vaci ; pass, ovtvccfxtxi ; infin. ovUx&Qcf,}\ 
part. ov/va/xEvo?. We find also without reduplication ova/xa/, oy«*- 
|x»y, ovao-Sift'*. It comes from omwy whence is formed the fufure 

Tls^vviiAi, to sell; infin. tss^vMvtzi; part, -cref v»? ; pass. zjs^vaiAcnj; 
infin. 'C7£fvaa-Sa/ ; part. zys^vufAsvos. It borrows its future and its 
other tenses of -crf^aiy, or else of zyiTr^oia-Ku, to sell. ' 

nlfrX'^ljii, or -CTt/xTrAi?^/, impleo, ^o j^//, (instead of which wo 
likewise say zrnr'ha^u, and 'ojiiA.'nKa^u) ; the imperf. liriTrX-nv ; the infin. 
^lyifrxdvoii ; the pass. zyiixTrXxiAoct ; imperf. i7r//x7rXc6/!Ai!v ; infin. isTt/x- 
^rXao-^;*!/ ; part. z7iix'rrX(y.iJiEvoc ; imper. l^A.'ni'jrK-ifif Att. instead of l/x- 
vt'nXa.Qi, or IfA'jrivXv^/, Hom. it comes from ^Aaw, whence also is 
formed the future wA^crw; 1. aor. ETrX^ara ; perf. ;cT£'7rX»3^«/, 1. aor. 
l«:A770>jv ; though they may be also derived from zjXriQu. 

niTT^vilj^i, or t7//x7rf*3/^<, incendo, to burn ; imperf. JTrZ/xTTf^jy; infin. 
^HxTf^xvxt'y whence comes the compound l/*7r//x<7rfc^va// Aristoph. 
part. tjTj^Tr^a? ; pass. zrli^'n^oi^qi.i ; imperf. l7r//z9r^a/>(,'/)v ; infin. <c7//a- 
firfao-0as/; part. -crz/w-w^ct^Evo?. It borrows its other tenses from is^io}, 
OTts^-n^u; as tue first future -sj-^oictoj ; 1. aor. tip^'ncrcx, \ 1. ,fut. pass. 
<C}§n&^ricniji,a,t \ 1. aor. E'7r^>7cr0)5» ; "^Q^^. 'isi'rr^'na-yLXi* 

n^ixf^xi, to bui/y (the etymol. mentions the act. 'a^Ufjt.t; but it. is 
obsolete) the imperf. Iv^td^fii, subjunct. "cjpiw/xa/, optat. «7^/«//m.»jv, 
infin. 'CT^txaOixL, part, 'cy^ioijjt.svoq. It comes from -crg^ao;, whence 
also is formed the imperf. ln^lx^o, and Att. I-tt^/^^. And the 1st 
aor. midd. Iv^iafAViv, which is the same with the imperf. above 
mentioned, whether it comes from the act. aor. in <« pure, IV^/«, 
according to the 31st Rule of Book III. Chap. viii. or whether it is 

formed 



Veros in MI of the Present and Imperfect. 245 

foirned by sync, for l'7r^isi<7oifji.Yiv, whence comes the second person 
l-Tt^idaa, Ion. eTr^/aw, by crasis I'jrpioj^ emhti. 

xA-nfAh spargo, to scatter, the pass. a-Ki'hixiJLixif iraperf. laKihxfxviyf 
infin. a-ycl^ma-Oxi, part, am'^vdjj.svo^. It comes froni crKi^uw, whence 
also is formed the fut. aKicxcru, the 1st aor. Icrm^oia-Xf the perf,:icrKf- 

■dx&(AXtf the 1st aor. la-iu^cccrOvjv, 1, fut. ayiB^cca^viao^oii, 

From thence likewise ^Kc^avvvfj^i takes its tenses, which are the 
s^ame with the ab.ove mentioned. -^y 

■Ti9vv)(ji.t, to diCi makes in the third person plur. nOva^i, like tsSia-i ; 
imperat. riOvocStf like irxOif or reOvxcro, like IVa^o ; opt. reOvaclw, infin. 
rsQvdmi. We shall speak of the other tenses in the resolution of 
verbs, Chap. VIII. Rule xxvii. 

Te'tX'/j/x,;, to silffer, to endure, also makes in the third person plur. 
vs9Xoia-if opt. rsrXxlnvy iraper. rsrXxOt, and Att. TsrAa^'infin. rerXdvctt, 
% aor. eVAvjv, rKrt^iy rKxiviVi rXrimt, rXaq. But it borrOWS of rXdu 
the future TXncroiA.ciij and the perf rhxvi>c». 

TiT^>j/xi, to pierce^ or i7iake a hold, borrows of r^du, the future 
r^yiauy 1. aor. sr^via-x, perf. pass. rEr^WjU.a«, 1. aor. Ir^viQw 

^viy^i, to say, of which we have already spoke in the foregoing 
book, Chap. X. of the irregular verbs in /a<. 

II. Defectwes frwni d verb in E'n. 

. We have spoken of those that come from 'iio, sa, and xYly, when 
.treating of the irregular verbs in /x< in the preceding book. We 
must mention here some others. 

"Ay){At, spiro, flo, to bloiVf retains also its long characteristic, as in 
l;he imperat, a^rw, spirato ; infin. a-^v^e/, spirare ; imperf. pass, cdnro;, 
spirahat ; part. o(>Y)jji.evoi, spirantes ; the third pers. plur. is «£/o-/, 
which draws back the accent. The part. ot,els conforms to the ana- 
logy of the rest. - 

This verb comes from aiw, which is not used ; even a^/>w is only 
for poets. 

AidviiJii, to tie, imperf, iS/^ijv, infin. ^i^svxt, part, hhk' Its primitive 
is""o5w, from whence comes the future ^rtaa, the 1st aor. ^ha-Xf 
the fut. pass. hOyia-of/^xt, 1, aor. g^e^Tjv, perf. Ss^E/xa/. 

EiS'>?^;, to know ; opt. e^e/tjv, infin. tiVzvxu The subjunct. u^u may 
be derived not only from ci'^u/:^/, but also from t\liwy whence 
comes the fut. zi^-ha-u. 

"lo-X^l^h to have. See 'la-y^^u in 'iy^u^ kabeo, in the resolution of 
verbs. 

III. Defectims from a verb in O'D., 

There are scarce any more than these three, xXu^t, to taTce ; /3/- 
ft>^/, to live ; and yv^/i^/ ; which are used only in the 2d aor. la'Xwv, 
captus sum ; ICto^v, viki ; syvuv, cognovi. See xKiaKu hereafter in 
the resolution of verbs, Rule VI. 

ly. Defectives from a verb in T'n. 

''Ayyy|U<, or ayvy«, to hreahf derives its tenses from ayu, whence 
comes the Ist fut. «|w ; the first aor. Att. is £«|», instead of 4|« ; 

likewise 



M6 Book V. (y Defectives. 

likewise the 2d aorist Idyrjv instead of vynv, perf. mid, v)yx and la.' 
yx : in the same manner its compound xxroiywiAi makes the parti- 
ciple K«T£ay/A£vo? and KizTtxywi;, confractuSj for Kxr-nyyiivosy and xa- 
rr^us. And retaining the augment contrary to rule, we likewise 
say in the 2d. aor. subjunct. xanxyujati instead of KXTxyu^ri ; and 
in the infin. Kxrsxyrivsii, instead of Kxrxy^vxi, to be broken. 

AtiKW[At, or hiKvvUi to shotv ; fut. ^ti^a, 1 tLOr. ihi^x, perf. ^sht- 
^x, pass. ^£^siy(/.xi, 1. fut. ^Ei^QvtTo^Axi 1. aor. fhi'x^'^Vf coming 
from Mkco. In like manner aTro^s/xvy/x/, to skoWf to prove; viro" 
^siKwutf to point out, to shew, to suggest, to demonstrate. ' 

^'/^ywij.i, or si^yvvu, to inclose, to shut up; the 1st fut. elf fa;, L 
aor. etf|a, the perf. e1§x'^> pass. £j^yfA<^/,~ and the first aor. pass, elg- 
^0>?v, come from tl'^yoj. 

"Eywixi, or hvvo}, to dress ; the 1st fut. %<j(a, the 1st aor. iTo-a, the 
1st aor. mid. sla-xfAviv, perf. pass. sl{j(,xi (whence comes the part. 
ieI'iasvos) and the fut. pass. hO-no-oixxi, are taken from 'iu. But its 
compound x^((>dvyvyi.t, xfA(piEvvv{ji,x{, and x^iplnAxiy is more fre- 
quently used ; fut. oi/A(p/£trw, and Att. a/^A^w ; from whence comes 
«Tfo?ajw,^;&;, Aristoph. insuper induam me; V. aor. vfxipisax; perf, 

pass. v)ijt,^iscr[xxt, 

ZmvfjLif or ^svvvco, toheat, to be hot, borrows of IJbu the fut. (^htai 
the 1st aor. \^i<Tx ; the perf. *i^sy.x. 

Zdjnvyi.1, or i^mwu, to girt one's self, to put on one's stvord, takes 
from ^ou the fut. ^ua-u, aor. s^uax, pert^ s^ukx, pass. E^ua-iJi,xi, 1. 
- aor. l^ax^Qvv. 

Ki^xvwiKi, or )u^x.nvu, to mix, borrows of at^xw, the fut. aE^xeu, 
the aor. Ui^xa-x, perf. xeai^XKx, perf. pass. ntKs^xa-fAXi, fut. x£§a«T- 
0>5(ro/x,«;, aor. Exffao-0>3v. But instead of Mn^xyix, it is more usual 
to say kU^xkx, whence comes the pass. KU§ciijt,xi without o-, the 
fut. it^xHcrofjLxi, and the aor. lyc^dQ-nv) as if they came from the 
unusual verb h^xu, 

Ko^EvvvfAii or no^Evvvoj, to clog or satiate, takes its tenses from Uo^iu, 

XO^EaCO, EKO^ECXy HEXO^EKX, KEKO^SaiAXIj y.0^Ea9-»<70(Jt,Xl, EKO^EaQ'KV. 

K§Ejj.xvvv[j.if or K^eiAxvvvu, siispendof borrows of x^Ejaaw, the fut. 
K§E(Axa-u, the 1. aor. EK^ii^xa-x, pass. lx^£/i/,ao-0'/3v. 

KTtvyyp, or icrivvvMf occido, to kill, has from ycrslva the fut. ktsvu, 
1. aor. EKTEivXf perf. Exr«x«; in the pass. 'Urx^ixiy 1. fut. xT«9^<r6/A«/, 
1. aor. Ixra9>3y. 

Miyiiyp, or juiyvya', misceo, to mingle i takes from ^lyu the fut. 
-pi|w, the 1st. aor. £/A<|a, the 1st fut, pass. iKiy^^aoy^xi, 1. aor. I^*x" 
^>3y, 2. E/x/y>3v, infin. /w-jy^va/, part. /A/ysr?. 

Mof7vuiM,/, or /Ao^yvuo;, to ijoipe ; the fut. /xo^|o^«/, 1. aor. £/^o§|a- 
fc«v, come from the unusual /Ao^yw. 

Oi'yi'y/^') or o/yvycj, ifo 0/95W ; the fut. ol^u, the first aor. twfa, Att. 
instead of u^x-, the perf. gwy/^a/, instead of Jy/xa/, 1. aor. pass. 
liyx^^i for w<pSijv, the perf. raid. Euyx instead of fyx, all come 
from oi'yw, whence also is formed tlie compound avoiyv; the fut* 
mid. is Q^iyrtcro^xf, as it came from o'lyiu. 

"oxxviAi, or iKKvu, to destroy, borrows its tenses of ohiv* See the 
resolution of verbs. 



Verbs in Ml of the Present and Imperfect. £47 

''Ofx.vvfu.t, or o/M,vuw, to sxveart takes its tenses from o/xo*?, whence 
comes the fut. oixoa-Uf perf. u^okx, Att. o^ityt.oy.oij 2. fut. mid. 0/^^- 

'O/Aofyvy/A/, or G^o^«yvy<y^ ^0 tczp^, takes its tenses from ^oqyw^i. 
See above. 

ITsTavvy/x,/, Or -z^sravvta;, fo 0/7^/2, ^0 expand, borrows of «T«Ta« the 

fut. TjHTacra;, the 1st aor. Wzrot^Toiy the perf. pass, 'cj^ijirxy.xt, by 
sync. 'ffs'Tfixjj.xi, 1. fut. CTsiafaG^iao/Aa/, aor. iTrsTao-Q-^v. 

-n»jyvy/*/, or zynyvvoj, compingOy takes from the unusual -ct^V*^, or 
%sria<TUf the fut. tjtjIw, 1. aor. act. tTTTjIa, the pass. l7r>j;)^0'/?v, the 2d 
aor. I'Braytjv, -CTJcyJjva/, 'csxysls, perf. mid. 'SjsWiyXf the pass. 'SJSTTViyfji.xt, 

nxriyvufxi, plango, ferio, to strike, takes from the unusual t^Xiiyw, 
or TsX-ria-a-u, the fut. ctXwI^;, the 1st aor. e7rX'/j|a, pass. £'B-X>7;^9r)V; 2. 
aor. lirKa.ynv, 'SsXxyrtvxtf 'oKxyslq, perf. pass. zsi'rrX'nyyi.xi* 

*P-nyvv[jiif. or pr,yvvu, to break, takes from the unusual pyiyu, or 
p-na-a-u, the fut. ^^|a;, 1. aor. sppv^x, 2. aor. pass. Ippxynv, the infin, 
faty^va; part, pxysts, perf. mid, Vppooyx, In like manner its com- 
pound S/s^^wy^, / a?u all shattered ; from whence comes ^ispptoyof^ 
broken, shattered, as w^wyo^is used insteado^ a^^riyoq, protector, dejender» 

'Frnw^i, or pcovvvco, roboro, fo strengthen, takes from ^ow, the fut.- 
fU(Ta>, perf. 'ippcozx, pass, sppcoixxt, plu-perf. Ippioi^viy, imper. Vppua^ 
sppcua-Ou, vale, valcat, infin. VppaicrQxt, 

I>^sv)iv(jii, or aCsyvyw, ^0 extinguish, borrows of the unusual a'^iuf, 

the fut. crQhu, 1. aor. taQsa-x, perf. EO-^EXfiu, pass. sa<^tay.xt, fut, 

aQt7^-n<ToiJLXi, aor. lo-^sVO^y.. But it makes the fut. mid. o-Cvjo-o^a*, 
from whence comes its compound ocTtoffi^vaoiiai, extinguam. The 
perf. mid. makes 'iaQm^ with *?, whence comes a.'niaQms, to be eX" 
tinguished, 2. aor. eVC^jv, whence awEo-^^v: which, if considered as 
an active, comes from aQ^^i ; but, as a passive, is derived from the 
active t(T<^ov, 

ZxE^avvf/A/, or (TKs^xyvvij, to disperse, to scatter, takes from a-yct^xcuy 
the first fut. a-as^xa-u, 1. aor. la-Ki^xa-x, 1. fut. pass. a-K£^xa9-n<T0iJt.xt^ 
1. aor. l(7X£^acr6>jy, perf. laxS^xo-^xi. 

"Lro^Uwyi.1, or rofjvvyw, sterno, to stretv, to lie dotvn, to sleep, takes 
from r»fEft/, the fut. ro^'icru, 1. aor. l^o^tcrx ; but instead of To^inv- 
_fjt.i, we likewise say by sync, ro^wyn, which has the same future 
and aorist, and takes also the same tenses, as r^wwy/A*. 

'Zr^unv^JLi, or r^uvvvu, sterno, takes the fut. rfwyw, 1. aor. sr^ua-x, 
pass. Ir^uQriVy from the unusual r^ucu* 

Tivy^v^tj, or rivvvu, luo, to be punished, borrows of its primitive r/47 
(from whence also comes rlvu) the fut. tW, 1. aor. ttiax, perf. 
rhiKx. 

^^xyvvfAi (instead of which we likewise meet with px^yw^i by 
transposition) or (p^ayvvw, sepio, to hedge, or to inclose, takes from 
q>gxff(Tu, the fut. <p^x^u, 1. aor. i<p^x^x, the perf. 'zst(p^xy(x, pass. 
<sB(p^xy[ji.xt, the aor. Kp^x-^^w 

X^uvvvfAi, or ^^unliu, to colour, borrows of ^^oo; the future x^^'^'^p 
the 1st aor. s^if^o-x, the perf. pass. K£;^fa;af>(,a/, with a o-. 

Xuvivpi^i, or x^vvvcj, aggero, takes from ;^oa>, the fut. xua-u), I. aor, 
£;jwy«, perf. pass. k£x*'«'"^*'> the aor. w;^o3-9)?v, fut. p^wcrflrla-o/Aa/. 

C xi A " • 



MS Book V. Of Defectives. 

CHAP. III. 

Cff the other sort of Defectives, which are unusual 
in the Present and the Imperfect, 

JL HE other kind of defectives are those which, bemg rare or 
unusual in the present and the intiperfect, have nevertheless the 
use of some other tenses. 

They may, like the foregoing, be divided into two classes: one 
of verbs in &;, the other of verbs in fit. 

The defectives in ju;, generally speaking, have only the second 
aorist, and its depending tenses ; and of these I shall speak in 
the following chapter. 

The defectives in &» of this second sort are those which are 
iised in the future and the perfect, with their depending tenses, 
which defectives are pretty numerous. 

I shall give them here according to their alphabetical order, in^ 
termixing with them some verbs in [xi, which will be of no little 
advantage : opposite to them I shall place the verbs that are used 
in the present, and from whence the others borrow what they 
want, following herein Sylburgius's method, which must contri^ 
bute greatly to the investigation of the theme : I shall moreover ad* 
join the signification of the verbs, which will render them stilt more 
useful. 

Verbs scarce or Verbs received or 

unusual* usual. 

AydoiAxi, and ocyd- olyocixca : to admire^ to be surpris-^ 

(ofxoci, ed. 

"Ayca, frango, c^yvw, and ayi/u/At : to break. 

'ASicc, ' ^'cTw, and aVtow : to please, to oblige, 

AljMofAin, ocl(T^oivo(ji.!xi : to perceive, tofeeL 

'Axdico, aX^?]Vjcw : to increase, to augment, 

'A\l(a, 'dxivSsoo: to roll: 

'AAow, and och(c(jt.i, ocXianio: to take, to catch, 
'AA^aw, cc?^(picivu, and olxcpxvta : to invent, to 

' find, 
'AfAu^Tiu, dfLoc^roim : to err, to sin, 

A/A^Aow, ^p'/x^AiVxw, ccfj^QMaKocvsoi and «/x€aw- 

o-xw : likewise a/x^Auo-xw, and «)x- 
^Aufl-xavw : to blunt, to make dull, 
to miscai^ry, 

A^A^pnu, cc[j(.(piii/uvyA, diJ.(pi£i'Vvu}, and cciJt.(p{jK(a : 

to dress, to clothe, to go into, 
'Avo(.Xo(a, cc'jciXt(j}iu : to waste, to consume. 

'^ff«^ ,v d^i<7Ku: to please, to oblige. 

Verbs 



Defectvoes in n used in other Tenses, Q49 
Verbs scarce or Verbs received ox 



uvl 



usual. 

Jw, and auf «vM : to increase. 
clx^oiAoci : to be oppressed with grief. 
Poiivu, and, among the poets, ^*- 

C«'w and |3/^?5/At : to go-^ to walk, 

to advance. 
j3tow, and ptwo-xw: to live. 
pxaciivui : to bud, to shoot up. 
pxXXMi to throzvj to dart. 
0X(jo7y.(o : to go, to spring up, to come, 
^i?.Qlj.txi : to be willing, to desire. 
0oa}i(a : to feed, to pastui^e. 
j3^wV>iw, and ^i^mvM : to eat. 
yoi^jAoo : to marry, 
TivoiAxi^ and yBV£9fj,o(,ij yiyvoy,ut, or y(voy.oii .* to be, to beconic, 
yncuu), and Q/w^acDiw .* to wax' old. 

yiyyi^(TK(;^, Of yu'wfl-icw *. tO knOW. 

eJaiw, disco : to learnyto Mow. 
^ai(a, divido : to divide, 
Soc^^ccvm: to goto bed, to sleep. 
^ioyoci : to want, to intreat, to ask. 
^£i)ci/uw, and Sbikvv[m : to show. 
Sccxm : to bite, to tear. 
ii§(x,(Ty.(d : to teach, to explain. 
Seyco: to build. 

^oKcu: to seem, to appear, to be of 
opinion. 



unusual. 

Bcccc, 



Biuyiy 

BXoc^iu, 

Bxica, 

BXou, and |3aw/>l;, 

BaXsoyoci, 
Bow, 

B^ou, and p^ooyi, 

Tayca, 



Asioycci, 

Af/xw, 

Amu, 

Ai^o^X^Mj 

Ayioo, 



A oca, 
' A^ayeoo, and ^ff/xw, 

A^^ujugio, 

Avvocoyoa, 

Ai/w, and ^'^(j.i, 
^ "EhXeuy 

'ElSito, and i'lhyiy 

Etw, eo, 
Elw, mitto, 
'£a<xw. 



Si^coyi 



to give. 



to go into. 



r^sX^' : to run^ 

^iS^oixcti, and SiS^viyi : to take flight. 

^^jmyoci : to be able, to be capable of 

Svvia, and (JiJuVxw 

sUxu: to be zvilling. 

oT^cc, or lirUayon : to know. 

ayo^z^M : to say, to pronounce, to 

harangue. 
fTjtAt : to go. 

i^i : io throxv, to send. 
Ia«u»w : to drive, to i?icite, 

' - Verbs 

K e: 



250 Book 

Verbs scarce or 
unusual. 

Eaw, and eAAw, 

Ei/ftjcwj 

'EviCTTTEWj 
'EofJt^OCl, 

^EirWy 
'E^lo^at, 

'Ef £W, 

Epp£«, 

EJ^£W, 

'Ep^OfOjw-aj, 
'Eil/iw, 
''Ew, eo, 
''Ew, iJw;??, 
*'Ew, iwc^wc*, 

*'E«, colloco, 

Zou, c'wgO, 

eiu, pono, 



V, 0/ Defectives. 

Verbs received or 

usual. 

f'^p^o/A^i: ^0 come, to go, to approach. 

al^iu : to take, to keep] to condemn. 



(p£^w, fero : to cany, to bring. 

kniTTta, poet, to soy, to relate, 
Yi!J.iXi : to sit dozvn, to he seated. 
ayo^fuw, aud iWc^_, poet, to say, to 

speak. 
i^o\hM : to ask, to inquire, 
dyo^ivca : to say, to speak in public. 
jppw: to be lost, to perish. 
IWi^oci, : to stand, to he steady. 
iv^i(T3i(a : to Jin d, to ixcover, to search. 
i^^oixoii, and IXr^aVojocxi: to be odious. 
V J^w : to boil, to inake boil. 
Jjwt : to go, to 'Walk. 
{i\f.i\ to be. 

'iuwixi, and hvm: to dress, to put on. 
7yiixi, : to send, io throw. 
l'n(jt.i, i(u), and T^w: to place, to seat. 
^svyvvco, and i^£vyvv(M : to couple, to 

join. 
^oovvvca, and ^wi/fj/u-i : to girt: 
S-gAw: to be willing, to undertake. 
rihi^r. io place, to put. 
2tvr\<TY.u) : to die. 

S-^wVxw : to leap, to run, to fall. 
IS^vvu : to found, to establish, tofa^, 
l^ccvu : to sit, to place. 
iSJi/w : to level, to direct, to regulate. 
iKviofxxi : to come, to arrive. 
«AaVjt(?/Aat ; to appease, to reconcile. 
*^X^j ^^^ '^X^ • to have, to possess. 
xn/xat : to lie upon the ground. 
x^a^w : to cry out, to make a noise. 
KiXcfAoci : to command. 
xf^fJat'i/w; to gain, to profit by. 

Verbs 



Defectives i?} n used in other Tenses, 25 1 

Verbs scarce or Verbs received or 

unusual. usual. 

Kt;(^£«, Kixo^vU) poet, tojind, to meet, 

K\iUf KocXeu), poet. ynxXY.a-Kco : to call. 

KAu/At, xXuw : to hear, to listen. 

KfAico, x(xiJt.vu : to work J to be tiredy or 

oppressed, 
ao^ii/wiji^i, and xo^svv^ca: to cloy^ to 

satiate. 
KiK^dooj KEx^avvwj and xg^a'i/v'jjiAt ! to 



"Si^i^oiAocii scarce, 
AaSgw, and KiQ(f)j 
A*Qt-w, and a^jOw, 

MciXgO[J(,06lf . 

''OAAw, and oA£«, 
'Oo-ip^ao/x^i, scarce, 



mingle, 

KosiAcci^oiij and K^iy.vo(,y.OfA : /6> //^W^ 
Up. 

Xocy^Qocvu: to tahe, to receive, to 

obtain. 
Kccv9duu : /o fe unknown^ to be hid, 
xocy^xi/ca : /(9 obtain^ to have by lot. 
fxxMvoo: to study to learn, 
^ol^oixoii : tojight. 
^ixo^oii : to have care of, 
/M.£Aw: to provide. 
(ASiv^tim : to leant, to teach. 
^iyv\iUj [/.tyvvfAif and fji^icryui ! to mid\ 
fji.i[Avr[(ryiu : to recollects 
/wof yi/uw, and lAo^ytfVfAi : to zvipe, 
VSIJI.U) : to divide, to dist)ibute. 
o|w : to smell, to have a smell. 
oioiAoci, and oT[Aixi : to think, 
oix^l^oci : to go, to depart. 
^ffw, fero : to carry, to endure, 
oXiu^oiivu : to fall, to slip. 
oXXvoo, and oAAu^oii : to destroy, 
ofAo^yvvuy and o[Ao^yuv[Ai : to zvipe, 
o/Avuw, and ofAvviM : to swear, 
oymi^i : to aid, to assist, 
6Mm: to see, to descry, 
o^fvca, poet, to trouble, to disturb, 
o<T(p^Q(.ivoiJt.Qn : to smell, 
o(pilK(a: to owe, to be indebted to. 
o(phsiwf and 9<p\\^^giv<fi, the same. 

Verbs 



25Q ^BooK V 

Verbs scarce or 
unusual. 

ITaOtw, 

Hiraw, scarce^ 

IT A aw, 

UxoUj and zTXcofAi, 

n6( 



0(0. 



H^o^a, 'vendo, 

tird^'^o^oii^ scarce, 
'P£co, from l^iu, 

Pv£co, and puYifJi.i, 
'S.^icoj and (T^-nfJi-i, 
2icXaw, and (TxAri^i, 

Xvvicc, scarce, 
^X^^> and (Tx^^f^h 

TcJ^Wi poet- 



Of Defectives. 

Verbs received of 
usual. 
'5TaV;j<;w : to suffer, 
zrz^Soo : pedo. 

mcre-W) or -utettIw: to boil, to digest. . 
zTiTocvu^uy and 'isrsTaj'vv/At : to stretcki 
zrt7i% : to fall. 

'urvu^ocvoixoci : to ask, to inquire, 
•sraV^^w : to suffer. 
zTivu, and zs-iTTiG-aoo : to dritih. 

ZTTiTrXoccjj 'sriTrAij/xt, and "crAiiSw : toffll, 

TTivu : to driJik. 

zTiTT^dca-KU} : to sell, to CyVpose to sale. 

Ts-iTr^Gcfo, and zTiTT^TifAi '. to Bum* 

YTrjoifXKi '. tojly. 

-arrc^^vvfjt.oii : to siiecze. 
•sr/i/w : to drink, 
dyo^iCcij : to harangue. 

p«(rfl"w, ^viyvdca, OV pviyvvyA 

fuUVUU, or }(JiVV\)^l 

f fw : to flow. 

o-^mvfAt : to cvtinguish^ 

craalxxu, and a-KiXXio : to dry. 

o-w^w :, to save, to preserve. 

(TtrivSus : to sacrifice. 

Ifdoo, and 'iTYi^i, hdw i to fix^ to 

establish. 
s-t^iG-nu) : to deprive. 

fo^iyvvci} and ro^rnvfAi 

the ground. 
rfwvvuw, and s'^cavwiJt.i : 

cover, 
cvv(vi*i, and (Tvviic : to understand, 
i'o-p^w, and £x« : to have. 
rira!m : to aim at, to bend, 
^vYKTuu : to die. 
rUra : to he brought to bed. 
vTTofiivu : to wait, to have patience, 
Tx^yydm : to bCf to obtain. 

Verbs 



to break, 
to strengthen. 



to stretch on 
to strew, to 



Defectives 

Verbs scarce or 
unusual. 

^fxocu, and ^Tfji^riyu, 
scarce, 

T^cu, and t^w/a;, 

Tu;)(^rw, 

'^Tiyw, and (pdcywy 

^Oaw, and ?j9^,aj, 

^^iooj and ^fri/A{, 

^odyUf and 'pw^Wj 
scarce, 

Xoci^iooj and X'^fsw, 



m n w^eJ iw other Tenses. 



263 



Verbs received or 
usual. 
Tivw, rivvvwy and rivvviji.1 : /o punish, 
vTToi^ivw : /o suffer, to hear, 
Tiy.vco : to cut, to lop off. 

rir^a.iuu, nr^ocuu, riT^otioOj and rir^n^i, 

to pierce thi^ough, to make a hole, 
rir^oo7KU3 : to make a hole, to wound, 
rvyx^^^) a^id rsv^ca: to obtain. 
C7n^X^^{ji.Qii : to promise, to protest, 
(poi(TKoo, and <pYi[xi: to say, to think, 
Icr^fco, and r^c^yco I to cat^ to devour^ 
(^^clm : to prevent. 
ep^lm : to cori^upt^ to spoil. 
(pe^u) : to suffer, to endure, 
(pvco : to bring forth, to rise, to bud. 
(puiyvvcoj and (pcoyvviAi : to burn, to 

roast. 
p^«/^w : to 7'ejoice. 
^covi^uco, and ^ww^Ai : to throw up 

the ground, 
^^X^^^i ^ri^ '**%f''5/** • to lend, 
X^oovvvci), and p^f wVvu/xi : to colour, 
wGcw : to push, to impel. 



CHAP. IV. 

Of Verbs in (^^ that are unusual in the Present, 

T 

X HERE are moreover some verbs in /w.;, which though unusual 
in the present and the imperfect, have notwithstanding the use of 
the second aorist, with its depending tenses. 

Among those that are derived from a verb in A'n, there are 
two. 

1. IxXvifAi, unusual in the present, makes the 2d aor. IVxXijf, / 
(tm parched up, optat. ffaXacm, infin. cth.'Kwocu Its compound 
c6'7r£0-xX>5v, a,7rQ<TK>ixm, kitoa-MK'rtvcx.i. The perf. eVxX'/jxa:, infin. lcrr<Xy)Khott, 

part. la-H.'kwuq, from the unusual verb ciCK<ku, whose primitives are 
<TKa,XKM, and o■xl^^w, to parch ox dry up. 

Some 



£54 Book V. Of Defectives. 

Some choose to derive these tenses Jroin o-KeXXu andaK(x.X\u, hy reason 

that aK'Kriij.i is unusual. But there is this difference, that axixxu signi- 

Jies actively exsicco, or arefacio ; ivhereas Eo-xXrjv and its compounds 

are taken absolutely for exarui. Wherefore it seems more p-oper to 

derive them from <rx^>5/x/, tjohich comes from a-xxdu. 

2. *S^^/, unusual, has the 2d aor. £(?)S»jv, / have prevented, with 
its dependencies. See ^9a<y hereafter in the investigation of the 
theme, Chap. VII. 

Among those that come from a verb in I/n, we may remark 

The 2d aor. IV^^v, / am extinguished, with the infin. aQrtmti as if 
they came from cQviyLu Though we may take them for the 2d aor. 
pass, of ffQiu, u, whence also comes the 2d fut. pass. M(roi/.oii, 

^^?/A/ is unusual, though we find (^^Is, fer, in the imperat. Scq 
Chap. VIII. Rule xxxvii. 

Among those that come from a verb in O'n, we may place, 

1. "AXXuiKi, ^iu[Ai, yvu^i, which have only the 2d aor. through- 
out all the moods, as we shall see hereafter, Chap. VII. Rule vi. 

2. Hereto we may likewise refer I'Cxo;, he is gone ; 'iQ^u, he has 
sivallowed, in Hesych. Also the compound verbs, l^ir^u, elisit ; 
IvbttXcuv Hesiod, / have set sail j Itt/ttAw^, etymol. thou hast set sail ; 
and in the 1st plur. l^iTFXuiABv, ijoe have weighed anchor, Apollon. 
in Argonaut. As if they came from the verbs /3Xwjot;, iSfA^^;, r^w- 
(Ai, tirXftJ^/, unless we should choose to deduce them from ^}^u6;, 
0§(1/M, r^uu), after the Ionic form, as Iwu, l^^dliio, for /3Xo&;, /3fo<v, 
T^ow, from whence comes ^Kuo-ku, 0^ioa-x.w, rtr^ucrKcj, S^c, Inso- 
xnuch, that from the 1st aor, I'C^wra?, for example, they form I'C^wa?, 
«C^w$, and so for the rest. This seems to be countenanced by the 
etymol. when he says that iiii'nXuc is a sync* of IvsTrXutrx^, and that 
the participle I'mii'Kux;, is instead of I'jri'nXua-ocs. Moreover Eustath. 
teaches, that xx»i is better derived by a sync, from TiKuarxs, than 
formed from xX^/a^. 

Among those that come from verbs in T'n, we find 

1. Av/x,/, to go into, to dress, 2. aor. i^w, v%, v, &c. infin. Sy- 
vui\ part, ^y?, vo-a, vv, and the present imperat. IvQi, dvrco. In 
like manner its compound I'jte^vv, vifo^vvon, viio^l^ ; the imperat. 
vTFo^Qii - The remainder is taken from the primitive Ivof, fut. 

2. ^v[A,(, to spring, to rise, 2. aor. £(pvv, infin. <pvvoct, part. <?>v?, (pvcrx, 
(^vv. The rest comes from (pvco^qivau, 

3. KXviAi, to hearken, mentioned also by the etymol. has only the 
imperat. xXy^/, audi, plur. nXvn, audite. 



D 



CHAP. V. 

Of Defectives that have only the Third Person, 



EFECTIVES of the third person are those which grammarians 
call impersonals, by reason of their having only the use of the 
third person : but this denomination is absurd, as we have proved 

in 



Of Defectkes that have only the Third Person. ^55 

i|i the Method of learning the Latin Tongue, and is applicable to 
the infinitive only, which is strictly impersonal, as having neither 
number nor person. 

We shall take notice here of some of these verbs. 

'a»>})££/ and -TT^o^iiKE/, . convenit, it is meet ; av^xc and ct^os>5>c«, i$ 
'was meet, or j) roper. 

'a^so-ksi, it is Judged j^roper; vpta-Ks, it ivas judged jyroper ; a^iaiif 
it tvill seem proper ; v^s<Tt, it has been thought proper. 

At?, oportet, it is necessary ; 'ihi, it was necessary ; h-hc^n, it ivill 
he necessary, 8^c, 

AoxeT, videtur, it seemeth ; llUtif it . seemed ; lo^uy it 'will seem^ 
Sfc. 

M/Ae/, it is minded i e/aeXs, it tvas yninded ; i^zX-hati (as if it came 
from iJLzXiu, or /x£Ah<)> it mil be attended to, or minded, 

n^ifrsi, decet, it is seeming, or becoming ; liT^m^,it voas becomings 

^'' . . . 

^vyiQa'mi, contiglt, it happens ; avn^ocmf it happened^ Sfc, 

'2v[M(Piqii, confert, it is of service, 8^c. 

*PiXUf it is the practice, it is customary ; l<pixei, it ivas customary, 

X^v, oportet, it behoveth. It comes from x^^f^'f Xi^'^* Xf^'» 
by dropping the last syllable: which makes it very strange that 
Apollon. should puzzle himself so prodigiously in his third book. 
Chap. XV. to know whether x^vi and ^e7 are adverbs or not. The 
imperf. is Ix^^h or x^^^> it behoved ; the fut. x?*'^«'> ^^ '^^^^^ behove j 
&c. 

Its compound ocrrox^'n, it is siifficient ; ocrrex^vi, it was suffcient ; 
the infin. ocrrox^yiv, to be sufficient, by apocope, for a'7ro;^^^v<z/. 

We likewise find- in the passive Xeysrixf, it is reported; xVnrtrizif 
there remains ; and such others. In the fut. «if>5cr£T«/, it laill be 
quickly said. In the perf. 'iyiwron, it has been known ; ti^nzi, it has 
been said; ma-xi, it has been heard ; tlyioc^rxt, it was so destined, &c. 

To these we may add the mid. Iv^sx^rxiy it happens ; l-ni^x^rour 
.it occurs, it offers ; and the like. 



The RESOLUTION of VERBS; 

OR 

INVESTIGATION of the THEME. 

CHAP. VI. 

Of the Nature and Manner of the Investigation of 
the Theme. - . 

X HE present of verbs is by the Greeks called theme, and this 
verb comes from t/9>j/a/, pono ; because it is the firjst tense, and is 
laid as a foundation for the re£t. 

The 



0,56 Book V. 0/ Defectives. 

The manner therefore of finding the theme is, to reduce all the 
tenses to their present: which supposes a complete knowledge of 
the conjugation of verbs in u, barytons as well as circumflex; and 
of the regular and irregular verbs in (ac, and implies also a per- 
fect knowledge of the manner of forming these tenses: the simplest 
and easiest being without doubt that which we have followed in 
the conjugations, reducing the greatest part of the tenses at once 
to the active future : without making so great a circuit as is com- 
monly practised, which only fatigues the understanding, and 
renders it less capable to judge readily of the right theme of the 
verb. 

Wherefore, if- 1 chance to meet with the 1st aor. pass, wp&m, I 
perceive immediately, that it comes from the 1st future pass. o^Q-n- 
cro[AX(i or from the active o-^u ; and consequently that *its theme 
must be in /3&;, <»ra;, cpcj, or 'sjIc^, or else passively in (Boiaxi, -cro/Aa;, 
(p»{A.ai, or ^lotAac upon which consulting the Lexicon I find it is 
ovloi/s.ai, to see. In like manner we must proceed in the other tenses 
and moods, according to what we have mentioned, Book III. Chap, 
xvi. page 151. 

But here we are to observe, that with regard to compound verbs, 
the prepositions must be always previously rejected, in order to 
discover more easily the formation of the tenses of the simple verb: 
thus t;7x^s[XBivx, permansi, I have remdhiedf ought to be considered 
SiSs(/.wx alone, which Is the 1st aor. of.^svw; /n^oo^iB^viv, I passed Jirst) 
being composed of -tjpo and o/a, ought to be considered as sCjjv only, 
which coxnes from, ^uivco^ or priiJt.h ioivcdk. 

But because, as we have made appear in the preceding chapters, 
there are a vast number of defective verbs, some of which have only 
one sort of tenses, and others another ; it often falls out in Greek, 
that a verb shall derive its tenses from several themes, tliough some- 
times obsolete or unusual, and which even are not to be always met 
with in the Lexicon. 

Hence in that case recourse may be had to. the preceding table 
of Chap. m. which points- out the usual themes corresponding to 
those that are unusual. 

Nevertheless, as it is very proper that these matters should be 
a little better digested for beginners, and as these unusual thenjes, 
never falling in our way, cannot be supposed to offer themselves 
easil}'^ to the mind ; and moreover as there are several particulars 
to be observed in some tenses and verbs, which it is impossible to 
reduce always to this general analogy, I have therefore comprised 
all these difficulties in the following rules, which will be so much 
the more useful, as they are easy'to retain, and include at the same 
time all that can be desired upon this subject. 

Rule I. 
General for the invest! sfation of the theme. 

1 . The derivatwe generally borrows its tmscsfrom its 
primitive ; 

I . 2. But 



Investigation of the Theme. ^^1 

2. But the primitwes form their tenses either by 

changing a circunflex verb into a baryton, 

3. Or a baryton into a circunrfier, 

4. Which is often taken from the second future ; 

5. Otherwise the primitives deduce their tenses from 

different themes put together. 

Examples. 

In order to find out the theme, we must X)bserve here hi 
general, 

1. That if the verbs are derivatives, they generally form the 
tenses that are wanting from their primitives ; as tVJva;, to come, 
derived from rxw, from thence borrows the future i'lo/xa/, and the 
2d aor. ?xo/w,^v ; in the like manner several others, which we shall 
see hereafter. 

2. But if the verb be a primitive, it frequently forms its tenses 
from itself. 

Either by changing the circumflex verb into a baryton, 
which is a very common practice with the Attics ; thus 
^ ra/xEa>, to marry i making regularly yxyt.yi(7u, 1. aor. lya^-ncrx, 
borrows also of yajuo^, sy^j/Aa, from whence comes the participle 

AoKECj, videor, / seem, forming from itself the fut. ^oy.ijo-w, 1. 
aor. l^oKna-x, perf. . hoUyiKx ; forms also from ^Uu, the fut. ^o^m, 
perf. ^iToy^oc, p^ss. ^s^oyfAxt, 1. aor. £%!«, part. So|a?; from 
whence comes the neuter ^o^avt having Joiind proper, 
• "ClUuy to push, to run against, forming the fut. u^Y^^rut i" Hesych. 
borrows also of wfls; the fut. fc-o-A* ; pass. uaQriaoiA.oii\ 1. aor soj7x; 
pass. EWO-0O9V, with the Attic augment, according to the 16th rule 
of the third book : perf, pass. IW/xa; ; part. ua^zUf from whence 
comes l^ucr9a'i^f expulsus, driven out. 

3. Or vice versa, by changing the barytonous verb into a cir- 
cumflex; thus 

'axeIa;, to repulse, 1. fut. aXt^ina-eo from ot>Ke^iu, whence comes 
cc^^s'^sTv, to succour, in Xenoph. But we likewise meet with the 
1st aor. infin. aXs'ia;, mid. axi^acr^oci, which is formed either by 
sync, for a.\£^4,<Taa9oc.i, or regularly from axi^u, 

Av^oj, fut. xv^v(j-u, aor. v)v^r)<Ta, from xv^su, augeo, to increase. 

"AxOoi/.xi, gravor. to bei^ppressed ; fut. mid. ap^SeVo/xa/ ; 1. aor. 
pass. r,y(QiThv, from a.;^0eo/xa;. We read also a;)^9i5o"o/x«/ with an 
13:: and a^^Q^VjKs-, onerans, is to be found in Hesych. 

l&aXo(AMi, to be willing; 1. fut. ^nK'ncro^xi \ perf. /SeCaXD/^ta/ ; 1. 
aor. IC«Xi?6>}y, Att. riC«x>?0v)y, as if they came from ^aXso^AXj. 

Aio(ji.xi, to ask, to ijoant, 1. fut. lsn-7oyi.xi, 1. aor. pass. I5sii9nv, as 
coming from ^Uoiaui. 

'E9eXa, to be ivilling, 1. fut. ISsX^Vw, aor. •^fi/x^jca, as coming from 

l^sXiu. 

"E^oyant, to interrogate, 1. fut. c§»iVo/x«/, as from l^io[j.ai : its second 
aor. mid. is ri^o^m : but si^oum comes from t'icoiJ>.xt, which signifies 
the same thing. 



25S Book V. Of DEFEcrivEs. 

"Ep/w, to he ruined y or undone } 1. fut. Ipjnau; 1. Hot, vp^-ncx^. in 
Aristoph. as coming from l^/ew. 

@i\uy to be mllingf 1. fut. ^aXvxrcUf aor. IdeX^jo-a, as from ^«A^«. 

KvXU^Uy to rollf 1. fut. Tiaruy from xy^/y5sw. But it makes likewise 
xvXio-c*. I^ee hereafter, rule XXI. 

Mat^rv^oiJLocif to bear witness, forms from itself the fut. jwaiTry^e- 
l^xty and the 1st aor. syLuqrv^dfA.yiv, But it forms also from ii<f^rv' 
^ioiAxi (for which there is authority) the 1st fut. ^ix^rv^'nirui and 

Md^oiAxi, io Jlghty forms regularly the 2d fut, /iAa;^5/*«/; but it 
makes the 1st fut. fta^^/sro/Aaz, and the aor. lnAa;^faa/xi3v, as froflfi 
(Ax^io^au We find likewise fA{>ix'^^oi^«''f \^xx»^9ait.viyi with an ?j; 
and the perf. it.zy>.(iyvnKxi, 

Ms^o/x«;» to have care^ 1. fut. t^K'n^aiMn^ I. aor. plass. l/xtXijQy^v, 
part fxBxMf, in Sophoc. as from f/.txio^ai. The perf. mid. is 

fAtixviKat, 

MevA/, maneo, ^o remain, perf, /^e/iAmxA ; its other tenses are re- 
gular. 

'o5a|<y, ^0 bite, 1. fut. o5«|7}(T&;, from ^'^a^eu, whence comes* 
o^x^na-Qwa-tf mordicatajuerint in Eroti. retaining the c. 

"O^w, ^i9 sme^/, forms from itself the perf. mid, wlx, Att. o5a;S«> 
aad borrows of o^iu the fut. o^vj^o;, or o^eVw, from whence comes the 
1st aor. w^tcTx. ■' 

OiOfjLxt, to think, (by sync. cJijlui, whence the imperf. ui^viv) 
makes the fut. ol-naofjixi, 1. aor. pass. uv)9viv, as from oMoyLxi, 

o'l-^Qixxi, to go, to depart, makes o<;^*3(7o/:A«i, as if it came from 

6l^eoiA.Xi, 

Xxl^u, to rejoice ; 1. and 2. fut. %af(y; 2. aor. pass. Ix^V^v; ^^' 
fin. x<^i^^^* '^ part. -^x^zU-, in which it is regular: and alsa 
yjx^%7w, y.£%aj»))f«, from xxoiu, taken from the second fut, x*f'^' 
8o that yjy.^r,r7oij.xi may be the 2d fut. pass, according to the 53d 
rule of the 3 J bool< ; and also the 1st mid, according, to the 65t]i 
rule of the same book. 

In short, there is nothing more common than this rule, of whiglv, 
we shall see more examples hereafter, when we come to the verbs 
in o-xw, vw, and others. 

4. But we must take partitM^lar notice here, that the verbs them-^ 
selves sometimes form this circumflex from their second future, 
shortening their penultima; and afterwards from thence are formed 
all their tenses ; as 

><5Ca/, Xx^oy, XxZiw, X(Xx<^y)xx, capio, to taIc<S, 

TEv^a, tvyj>}, rv^icj, ^jVa;, i^kx, - to be, to obtain, io ntecl'* 

x-kOco, XaO^, XxOsio, XiXxQviKx, lateo, to be hid. 

fji-n^u, fi^xQuy lAxOsct), ^i^x^yiKx, disco, iro learn, 

^^'Qft/, zioi^a, t^xOacj, ' 'ujtTToi^x.x, patior, to suffer, 

tsio^Uy isx^^u, tyx^oiuy fut. rjxp^ino'o^xi, pedo. 

Its compound a9ro7ra§-^*jVo/xa/, in Aristoph, 

Xxlqu, yx^uy %x^y\'7<a, as above, yx^4,>7Q[xxiy Kt^d^yiKx, and others of 
the same sort. To these we may likewise refer the verbs in /^iw, rfiat 
assume an >j in the perf, as if it came from a fut. in nW.^ 



Investigation of the Theme. 259 

For the 1st fut. of these verbs being in u circumflex, can of itself 
form by extension a verb in iu. See Book III. Rule xxxix. 

5. Excepting the above-mentioned cases, the primitive verbs de- 
rive their tenses from two or more different themes put together, 
^s we shall see in the sequel, intending to comprise all these verbs 
in three chapters: the 6rst shall be of those that borrow their tenses 
of their primitives ; the second of those that derive them from 
diverg synonimous verbs, either drawn from themselves, or col- 
lected from elsewhere ; and the third of those, v/hich conforming 
ia some measure to the general analogy, have nevertheless some- 
ihiDg particular, either with regard to tiie augment, or to the ad- 
dition or omission of &ome syllable, or some other extraordinary 
manner. 



CHAP. VIL 

Of Derivative Verbs that bori^oxv their Tenses of their 
Primitives. 



A: 



S this chapter is particularly designed for derivatives, which 
must be reduced to their primitives by certain general rules, it will 
fee therefore more convenient and useful, to range these verbs Ac- 
cording to the order of their termination, as ^uy <rKu, tu, vyw, and the 
like, and not according to the alphabetical order, which we shall 
however conform to in the two ensuing chapters. 

Rule II. Of T.TriyU 
XttevSu, libo, foUoxving (TTrt/'J'w, takes CTrstTa, and 

Examples. 

Z-TTEvSo;, libo, to offer up, to sacrifice, makes its 1st fut. (rTrslaUf 
from the unusual verb atrsi^M, whence it is formed according to the 
.^olic manner, which is, to change the subjunctive vowel into a 
consonant, as crttti^tn, a-7reppv, to sow, &c. 

From cmlau comes the 1st fut. pass. mrtiMtTOfji.ott, the 1st aor« 
lemBio-Qriv, The perfect is lamixx, from whence is formed the pass. 
Iff'nrBicrfAOii. 

Rule III. Verbs in )fw, which make ygw. 
A/^ftj, xXa^w, ztXoc^co, require a y before gw in the future. 

Examples. 

These three verbs make the future in -ylw, assuming a y before 
the termination, to render the voice more sonorous, as if they came 
from a primitive in ylw. 

, Ai^co, to Jail, to make a sweet sound, to play, to sing, to rebound^ 
to make a noise in the air, stridere ; fut. x/y^w, 1st aor. tXiy^a, from 
whence coRies T^iy^s ^U^, II. J. without the augment, siridif 
-areus. 



260 Book V. Of Defectives. - 

Ai^&> is to be met with in Hesych. The Etymol, takes notice 
also of Atyw, and the dictionaries of Xtyyw, of which we find no 
example at all in the present. 

KXa^w, to make one's voice heard, to make a noise in the air like an 
arrotVy fut. xXay^o;, perf. MkyO^ccy/jty as if it came from y.\a.Yfu<t 
But the 2d aor. is regularly eKXayox ; and the perf. mid. xsxAuya, 
part. xtK><viyus, Horn. 

nxd^M, to stray, to disperse, to lead astray, to deceive, to seduce ; 
fut. njXoiy^u, 1. aor. s^rXayla ; perf. isji'TrXayX''' y !• fl'Or. pasS. 
I^Aay;^6»3V, as if it came from zs'Kdyyu. 

Rule IV. General for the verbs in 2KX2. 

SKfl and 2KOMAI come from w purCy whence they 
take their perfect and future. 

Examples. 

The verbs in ctko; and cuoiAcct are formed from verbs in u ^ure ; 
therefore they always borrow their tenses from those primitives, let 
the vowel of their termination be what it will : for example, 
Those with an a; as 

%<^xa-Kco, to come of ripe age, from i5^aw, i5^^V&;. 

(pda-Ku, to say, to speak, from (^oiu, (p-^a-u. 

txdciDiUf to appease, to reconcile, from Ixdu, Ixdaoj, 
Those with an e; as 

a^£{Tx&>, to please ; k^i^u, vi^skoc, from the verb »§ia, taken from the 
2d fut. of a^u, to Jit, to accommodate. 

Even those that change the penultima of the primitive into / in 
the present, conform nevertheless to this primitive in those tenses, 
which they borrow from thence ; as 

Evf to-xft', tojind, to invent, from the second person of il^iu, its ; fut. 
tv^yta-u, perf. woe, in the pass. ty|*3/iAa/ ; but the 1st aorist takes an 
£, zvpOnv ; see Book III. Chap. xvi. Rule 52 and 54. The 2d aor. 
act. jy^ov is regular ; see Book III. Rule Ixxvi. 

MoKia-Ku, to go axmy, to depart, from [AoXsUf ^crw, ^kx, 

'Pvia-Ku, tojlovo, from pviu, •aotu, vikx, 

^rs^icTKu, to deprive^ from rsfw, "naru, vacx. 

Ts\i<Tx.cit, tojinish, to complete, from rsXiu, y\<Tu-, vatx. 

Those with an >? ; as 
AX^-na-Ku, to increase, from a,}>.^ea), vicru, »3xa. 

MifAvvKTKu, to recollect, from (^vdoi^xi, fji^vnarofAxif ftl/xv»)/Aa/) tfJia^^nffO" 

Those with an < ; as 
ThtrUy-u, to give to drink, from talu, hibo, fut, wtcro;, 1. aor. 'hicx, 
the infin. vslaxi, the part. -oTio-a?. 

2>re§i(TKiif, to deprive, to cut off, to take atvay^; fut. re^na-u, aor. 
Ire^iocrxi, the pass. rs^-nOria-oixai, erf^ii0>iv, perf. Wsfi^y-x, pass. Irsf*?/**', 
as if it came from re§iu. 
Those with an o; as 
Boaracj, pasco, to feed, from /Soa/, qW; okx^ with a short <?, accord- 
ing to Gaza, 

But 



Investigation of the. Theme. C61 

But we likewise say ^ocK-na-off 'okx, as if it came from ^o<7)tiu : 
whence we have ^aam, forage, pasturage, place Jar pasturage ; /3oo-- 
x^/x«, a stud, njioch ; jSoa-Kviats, pastia, pasturage, or pasturing* 
Those with w ; as 

'A/A^AwcTHft;, abortior, to procure a miscarriage f from w/aCaoVj 

BiiUxTKu, to live, from jS/o«, ^twa-u, 

B^ua-xu, edo, to eat, from /3^ow, ^^mtu. 
Those with a y ; as 

Mi^vffKu, to maJce drunk, from (jlsOvu, [ji,s9v(tu,. 

Some of these verbs are formed by reduplication; as raifria-Koj, 
to give to drink, from 'sy'ico, hibo ; QiQ^ojo-ku, to eat, from ^^ou ; t/1- 
^uaatu, vulnero, to pierce, to wound, from r^lio. But their future 
is simple, because, as we have ah^eady observed Chap. I. these 
verbs are not conjugated beyond the imperfect. 

Those with an »j or u, are easier formed from the future, than 
from the present, as may be seen in the preceding examples. 

But it must be observed here, that there are some which are 
formed by sync, as axXsu, to call, fut. xxXriaa, and xA»5cr&; ; from 
•whence comes y.iKkrtcrKbj, to call: from zje^du, fut. zje^vxtu, and 
'B^dcu ; whence we have 'vjiTr^^a-Kco, to sell. 

Others add some letters ; as from (pdu, (paa-au, or T;;i<pci(T)cu, are 
formed also xji(puvcx.u, and 'zjK^^avaxw, dico, to say. 

Rule V. Of verbs in IKH that have the second 
aorist in olv. 

Tn^ccffnu mid SiS^(x,(rKu take their tenses Jrom aw ; hut 
their aorist, ending in ocv, comes from yv\^Y^^i and ^^5?/**. 

Examples. 

ro9fa<7>£a.', senesco, to ivax old, fut. y^oiau, comes from 7»j§aa', 
to be old. 

But the 2d aor. is 'iyYi^av ; whence comes* the infin. y/j^ava/, to he 
old, (its compound Kotlocyn^avxi) and the part, yii^ar, avr(^, 
brolcen xvith a<re, taken from yv)^vi[ji.i, like /r^^<. 

A/J^ao-xo;, fugio, to take Jl/ght J 1. fut. ^i^^oia-u, 1. aor. t^^txacc, 
perf ^il^otKct, from l^aa ; in like manner aTro^/l^ao-xo/, to run avoay^ 
from ^/a^i^^acrxw, to escape, to get away. 

We likewise meet with %^ii<Tu, Ion. ^^»5<7w, from whence the 
opt. should be a-Tro^^ao/, instead of which Aristotle has used the 
Attic kirot^ta-fi, aiifugeret. 

The 2d aor. is e'^^ar, ot.s, at ; in like manner anri^qoiv, ^li^^atv, 
for E^^vjvj 04'7r£^^>5v, ^/%^v; and in the 3d pers. plur. also i'^^xv, ot^iri- 
S^av, S/E^^av, by sync, for 'i^KO-otv, ccTrs^^xa-div, from §^^^;. 

In the other moods this aor. conforms to IV«/x/; in the optat. 
tiaiy}v, the infin. ^^ami, part. 5^«?, and its compounds in the like 
manner. 



Rule 



t6^ Book V. Of Defectives. 

Rule VI. Of verbs in SKXi that form the second 
aorist in uv. 

'AajVxw, (S^wVjcw, |3iwVxw, and yivrnKu, take their tenses 
from verbs in ©« , but their second aorist is in «y, coming 
from «/At; and the u is continued through all the 
moods. 

Examples. 

Those three verbs likewise borrow their tenses from verbs in v 
pure ; but they take their 2d aor. from a verb in u^ii, which retains 
M through all the moods. 

*AKl<Tx.co, to taJce^ or ocT^la-Koiioci^ to be takerit borrows of aXou the 
future uXwa-u, and uXua-oyLoci \ perf. vi\uyt.(x., and, by resolution, «a- 
>.toxx\ pass, loixuimii (see Book IlL Rule xvi.) from whence comes 
eiXua-i<:, captivity ; cc\u\i$^ captive 

It borrows of aX&;/Ai (like §/§a;p) the 2d aor. ^jAwv, Uxuiy which 
retains the u through all the moods, and is conjugated thus : 
Sing. fuXuv, edXc'S, soi\u» 

Dual . . , laXwloVf Ba,Xurv)V. 

Piur. . . . tdXcJIsf saXwcuv' 

The subjunctive is uXu, uXu^, xXu ; opt. aXoj»3», and aXum; infin. 
eiXuvxt ; part. aXs?, ovror. 

But take notice here, that all these tenses^ 'ixihich J'olUm the active 
conjugation i are nevertheless talen in a passive signification. Which 
is atso frequently practised in the compounds of hr>yi.i, as xaSerwrat, 
consti^uta. 

We shall give its compound ot^xKi^y.u in the ninth chapter, 
RuleXLL 

t^uaxuf to eat, borrows of jS^ow the fut. ^^w<rw, perf. ^iQ^uytst* 
We likewise use, by reduplication, (Bi^^ua-Kco, to eat ; and this re- 
duplication is preserved even in the fut. /S/CfwVw. 

It borrows of ^^tijfxi the 2d aor. 'i^^ov: we find also (though not 
frequently) Jn the perfect middle ^iC^uQx, which it takes from 

Biua-iccOf vivisco, to live, to taJce life, (from whence comes the 
compound avaiQiucrxsa-Oxi, to rise to life, in Suidas) borrows of ^lou, 
the fut. ^taa-oiAoct, perf. ^iQluKot, part. ^tQiu-Kus. The third persoa 
of the passive preterperfect is a sort of impersonal ; ^sCiwlix, vita 
peracta est, life is spent ; and the part, ra ^iQtuy^ivx, what has been, 
transacted during life. 

It borrows of ^^ul/.t, the 2d aor. iQlm, the optat, i8/o;»}v, like 
^9mj from whence comes /3/ww, like Itftv, Att, imper. j3/Vd', ^/wro; ; 
the infin. ^imxi ; the part. /S/s'?, Lilos. 

Tiyvu(7Ku, or yiwKu, cognosco, to know, borrows of the unusual 
yvoctf (formed from voiu by adding y and cutting off i) the 1st fut. 
mid. yvu<ro[ji.xt ; pass. yvua-QvKToiA.a.i ; perf. act. syvuKoc ; pass, syyucfjt.a.i I 
part. lyvcoa-fABvot;, decretus, sancitus, ordered, decreed ; 1st aor. of the 
compound lirzyvMw, I have been known / the 2d aor. fyvo/v, / have 
known ; cyvwaay, they have known ; subjunc. 7W, yvus, yvu, &c. 
(iptat, yvoAjy, and yvw>jv ; imperat. yvaOi, yvurco ; infin, yvumi ; part. 

yvis, 



Investigation of the Theme. 263 

y)>»if from fiifxt* In like manner Mayiyicrx-Uf to read ; uysyvuxa>f 

Rule VII. Of Trx1«. 
T/xIaj^, to bring forth a child, bori^oxvs ofrUcoj rhs^x, 

We have placed this verb with the others in xw, because the 
r is only a letter inserted, that has nothing to ^do with the forma- 
tion. 

T/xla;, to be brought to bed, follows rexw, whence it is fomned, 
making the fut. ri^u and T£|o/xa/, 1. aor. src^x, perf. rhexxf ^^ass. 
rh£y(/.cxif 2. aorist act. I'rsjcov, the xn\d.sr6><.oiAm, perf, mid. rhoxxi 
from whence comes ro'xor, delivery. 

Of the verbs in NH. 

We shall ratige the verbs in vu according to the Jive classes above 
wentionedj Chap. I. The \st of verbs in dvio ; the 2d in aUot; the: 
%d in sUof ; the A:th in Uu and Ivu ; and the 5th in vu, preceded by a, 
consonant. Which shall be all comprised in ihejbllowing rules* 

Rule VIII. Of verbs in «vw, 

1. Verbs in dm take their tenses from their primitives, 

and may be derived either frojii (k^j or from im^ 
as of.'o^dvta from aJ^sw, to increase. 

2. Others are derived from a verb in u impure, by 

changing w into oivoiy as hoivufrom <W. 

3. In others the antepemittima often assumes av; thus 

from A»iOw comes T^av^olvu, from T£up^», Tuy;^«v«l 

Examples. 

1. Verbs in avw may be derived from a primitive in dw, or ia iu;, 
and from thence take their tenses ; as 

Ka0;s"ava/, to establish^ tofixy to re-establish, to restore^ to reinstate^ 
from KocQirdu, fut. -hatoy perf. -«k*, like xa^lrvi^i. 

KXiiWy to break, to shatter, from x^aiv, acr*/. 

n<irAa»&;, tojllly from xsXdu, 7i<Tu. 

Others are derived from a verb in iu ; as 

'AiA.otpriivu, to go astray, to err, to sin, from d^Aocftij, fut. uixix^r-kTc^) 
perf. -^uoi^ioKXj 2. aor. vhax^oi. 

Au|avft/, augeo, to if/creasCi to augjnent, from ay|w, uI^-aju, 1st 
aor. ^v^Yiax.. perf. pass. r(y|i»/x,a<. 

*A'7Te^Qdi¥ojji,on, to be odiuus, to displease, to be troublesome or dis' 
agreeablp, from ocTrt^^iu, k'ni'/^^aoy.cit, 

Aia9oitofjt.ccty sentio, to perceive, to apprehend, to be informed, to 
discover, to understand, to judge luetl, takes from aia-Bio{Acci the 
fut. a<5-fl>jo-ofta<, perf. ttr^-nixon, 2. aor. rVSo/x7?y, by reason that the 
verb ala-Qeoj would be impure efter the contraction ; from whence 
comes the infin. a'tsr9sa-9xf, and the part. xla-Qo^ws, 

Jjitt 



264 Book V. Of Defectives. 

But take notice, that Mm, ivithout an i snJjscribedy isjbrmed regw 
larlyfrom ^^ojua/, to rejoice,yM^ ^nao^Axt, perf. 5<7/>ta/, &G. 

BAaravw, to bud, to shoot upt to grow, to spring, from ^\oi.<riu}, 

^XtxT-narwy 2. aor. s^'Aarov. 

Aiz^Qdvaj, io sleep^ from ^a^ 6/^, fut. S«^6»7o-o/>i«i, perf. SsJaf6*3xa ; 
from whence comes xa7a^a§6*)xw?, in Plato, without the augment: 
the 2d aor. I'^a^Qov ; intin. Sa^fisrv; part. ^a§6alv, for which the poets 
use, by metathesis, s^^afiov, l^oi^th, l^aOuv. 

'ExfidvoiJiai, to be hated, or e?2wW, from l^^Boixai, -ncroiJixi. 

*I§xvu), to sit down, to repose, to descend, from l^ico, l^rt<ru. 

Kiaoivij, tojind, to compass, to invent, to approach, to meet, to lay 
hold of, from xiyiu, viau, ^xa. 

Ma»0avw, to learn, to understand, to know, to discover, to instruct, 
to teach, to be injbrmed, from (/.aQiu, fut. iaMotoiaxi, perf. ^jLiiAol^woi, 
2. aor. sfxcc^ov. 

'0(T<p^aivo(j.xt, odoror, to smell, makes its future l<r^^vi(Toyt.xi, from 
o<7(p§xo[Axi ; as hkewise the 2d aor. mid. ua<^^o^m, the infin. o<T(p^ia-Bxi, 
the part, oa-^^ofxsvo^. 

2. Others come from a verb in w impure, changing only u into 
dvu ; as ^viyavu, acuo, to whet, from ^riyu, fut. ^vi^Ui 1st aorist iQn^ac, 
the infin. ^^|a/. 

^l^acvu, to sit down, to go to the bottom, from "^a, fut. JVw, besides 
l^via-u, from l^su, above mentioned. 

'ladvu, to come, to arrive, to lay hold of, to touch, from Txiy, fat. 
''^oixxi, 1. aor. Uoi^viv. 

'Oirloivu, to see, to perceive, to discover, from ottIw or oTrlo/xa/, fut. 

o\J/o/Aa/, pass. o<p^yi(TOyi.xi, 1. aor. w^fi^v. 

And some of these frequently make thjeir antepenultima short, 
being often formed from the second future ; as 

HvvQoivoii.xi, to hear say, to discover, to know, to inquire, to be in- 
jbrmed, is formed from -crySS/ixa/, 2d fut. of ttsvQoiacki ; from whence 
it takes its first fut. zjivo-oiaoci, 2d aor. mid. iTrySo/ix^jv. But the passive 
preterite is 'aiirv^yixi, instead of zjiviva-fAxi, in the same manner as 
rirviilxi, it has been got ready, prepared, or fitted, for ririvKixi, ac- 
cording to the 60th rule of the third book. And ft-om vrsTrvrxi 
conies EK'Trvroq in Dion. Thucyd. and others, published, divulged, 
or heard of; as a<pv)tlo^ for ei^svyCio<;, unavoidable, from <^tvyu, 
fugio. 

3. But these verbs assume frequently a v or a 7, or a /ia, if the 
subsequent consonant require it. Thus from r!^u, delecto, toplease, 
to rejoice, 2d fut. x^u, is formed xv^xvu, placeo ; 1st future rta-u; 1st 
aor. y,;7x; 2d fut. x^u. From thence also arises another cir- 
cumflex verb, a^iuj ; fut. uItio-u, according to the first rule ; and the 
rest in the same manner. 

Axf^xvu, to draw lots, to obtain, to enj(fy, to compass, from Xr%a; ; 
1st fut. A^|w and A>5|o/^ta/, or r.d^oy.xi ; 2d aor. eXxxov ; 2d fut. "kxyu'y 
perf. act. tlxnyx, Att. for 'hzK-nyx ; from whence comes the pass. 
slxviyfxivoq, castfoT by lots. But the perf. mid. xixoyxo^t comes regu-^ 
larly from the verb AsT%w. 

AxixCxyu, to take, to catch, to receive, to Jail upon, to surprise, to 
undertake, io staffer, to convict, to condemn, from AijCw ; fut. A^\J/o- 



IWrESTiGATiON of the Theme. 9.^5 

^xi ; perf. siXn<px ; 2d aor. I'AaCov ; 2d fut. AaC^, whence comes 

Axf^dva, to he concealed, from Xvt^uy 1st fut. ^-n&uy 2a fut. AaSw, 
2. aor. 'ixxQov, perf. mid. AgAryflct, pass. xi\v(riJ.ai, poet. Xs\acriA.xif I 
havejbr^ot. ^ 

AiiA.'rrdvojito leave^ 1st fut. A«\J/6;, &c. from Aet-Trw, linquo, 

Uocv&dvu, to suffer J to endwe, to be affected tvitkf from -sjyjOw. See 
'csiiffxu, hereafter. 

Xay^ayo;, or -^xtldu. capio, fut. x'^lnaMf taken from x^^/w, formed 

from ;^a§«, the futi of x,o''^«"'» 

Thus the diphthongs u and vj lose their pi^epositive : Xni.itdvo), 
iinquo, to leave, from hziifotit fut. A£i%|/&;, 1st aor. iXi'noi, 2d fut. 

<^vfydv{o, to taice flight, to run avoayf from (fsyyw, fut. ^Eyfw, 2d 
aor. s(pvyov, 2d fut. <pvyu. 

Tvy^^MUy to be, or to obtain, from nlyj,}, Ist fut. t£u|o/x«/, 2d 
aor. £Ti/;)^ov, 2d fut. Ty;^;©. The perf. rslv^mA comes from this fu- 
ture changed into a new theme, rux^i rvyiu. When it signifies 
to be, it does not assume the fut. Tey|o/xa/ ; but instead of it we use 
%<To^ai from i\yj\, sum, or ysvYicroiAx i from ylvoi/Loti, Jio ; but it takes 
all the other tenses. 

'E^ffyapyw, cructo, to bclch, to be angry, to tremble^ from Ifiyyw, 
t^Bv^ofAaif 2d aor. rfyyov, 2d fut. l^vya. 

Rule IX. Of <p0aW 

^6aj/w /jto ^V^ tenses from ccco, e.vcept the second 
aor ist J which it takes from (i>^ri[M, 

Examples. 

4>fiav<y, to preijentf to precede, to lay hold of, to catch, to compass, 
according to the preceding rule, borrows of 06a&/ the fut. (phda-ca, 
the 1st aor. sip^xa-x, the perf. s'lpQAnu, the part. Itp^xy.^s. 

But it takes the second aorist h'(p9T,v from the unusual (pS^/>t^ ; 
ivhence comes the subjunctive <^9u, (p9r,<;, o9y, the optat. (pOxlvv; 
the infin. (pO^vxi ; the part^ <pOd^ ; the mid. I(p9di/.'nvi (f&at/^w, (p^da-^oii, 

Rule X, Of verbs in atw, 

1 . Several mrbs ending in (k.tmform their tenses from 

a verb in w pure : 

2. Others form their tenses from themselves : 

3. And others have them both xvays. 

Examples. 

1. Several verbs in aUu form their other tenses from their primi- 
tives in £w, or in dco ; as 

^ 'E^/^a/vw, to quarrel, to irritate, 1st fut, l^i^riffu, make l^^^u, the 
2d fut. from Ifl^u. 

Ava7xiw, to be mad or enraged, from T^va-ixdo;, fut. Xv<ra^<ru* ] 

Mm 0<5«'»w,' 



25.6 Book V. Of Defectives. 

oMalvUi to suiellf from oiSio;, 1st fut. ol'^'na-oj, 1st aor. w^via'ix. 

*OA<o"9«/yw, to Jail, from oX/o-Oew, fut. oA<o-9»5crw, 1st aor. bjXicr^vff^Xy 
2d aor. wX/aGov. 

'Oaip^xivoiiixt, to smell, from o(7§(poioiA.at, 1st fut. o£r<p§y'<ro/xoM, 2d aOFi 
ejcrp^oixw, infin. o5-<^§£a6a», part. oo-<J)^o/:>tEvo?. 

2. The following verbs are excepted from this rule, and form 
their tenses regularly from themselves. 

AgaW, fut. ^favw. It comes from ^ja«, to do, to plot or contrive 
a thing, 

€i£§ixixivwj fut. ^sffAava, 1st aor. Ifi/^/mavaj or IO£g]u,>j>a, /o heaty to 
Jerment, 

^xtm, fut. ^oivu, from 9aw , ^0 skinej to appear, 

Xocivu), fut. ^avfeJ, from xaa;, hio, /o gape, to cracJe, to be opeti* 
inouthed, 

TiTxUu, fut. nroivS, from r/ivu, to stretch, to bend. 

Tir§siiv0, or r£\<xiyco, to pierce, to mahe a hole, fut. ava? ; from 
whence comes the 1st aorist tIt^^jv? in Horn, for rsr^avs, the infin, 
Tal^rivxt in Hesych. for Tfl^ava*, which is found in Thebphr. the 
part, ral^'rivxq, the pass. rs\(xv9eU in Suidas. It is formed from r^ccco, 
and perhaps some others. But observe here the same reduplication 
as in verbs in /xj. 

Some even terminate in dm and aivu, as ol^dvc^j and f^t^xivAf, from 
oloiw, to sxvell, 

3. Others have a twofold perfect and future, deriving them from 
a verb in iu, and Hkewise forming them regularly from themselves j 
as 

Ks^'^Kivuf, to gain, takes from xs^Sf^;, xf^^»(<7W; xsjcE^f^uxa. From 
itself, jcE^Sapa;, X£;£l^^ar>ta, 1st aor. cxs'^^ava. 

'Ejy0«*vw, ^0 be red, to redden, takes from l^vO'eco, -ncru-, iiy.x, y,(Axt ;■ 
whence comes l^vOvi^oe. to, rubor. From itself it has s^vS^v^; whence 
comes the first aor. part. l^vOr.vxs, Attic, in Hesych. for l^vQdia;^, 

Rule XI. Oi verbs in mco. 

Poly syllables in itm take their tenses from their piimitives. 

Examples. 

Polysyllables in mu borrow their tenses of the verbs, from whence 
they are derived; as (pitUu, to shine, to appear, from <podm : aA££tyw, 
to shun, to escape, from kXivuj : Ifssiw, to question, from 'i^oixxi, &c. 

Dissyllables generally speaking are regular ; as ^s'^vu,^ to strike ; 
hIsivu, to kill ; rsivu, ta stretch or bend ; fut. SevJ, Jtlevw, tsvw, &c. 

Antesignanus excepts two or three ; as «W, to cover, to^ clothe ; 
fftlw and oijt,oci, to wound. 

Rule XIL Of verbs in /v« and vvoj. 
'Ii/w and vvu frequently borrow their future and prete- 
rite of verbs in a pure. 

Examples. 
Verbs in INH borrow their tenses of verbs in /V, though unr 
wsuaK 



Investigation- of tht Theme. ^61 

T/yw, io payi to punish or be punished, from riu, solvo, fut. rio-u. 

^Qlviot to drijy to be phthisicalj from (pflwi/, consiimoj Istaor. IfcpQta-Aj 
perf. pass. E(p9ii/-xi. 

Verbs in TNfi do the same ; as ^ 

Avva/, to conceal one's self, to sinJc, as the sun, tvhen it sets; 
1st fut. ^vcrco ; perf. ^e^vicx: the 2d aor. isshv, taken from luy.t', 

'^I'^^vvv, to placf^, to establish^ from i^^vu ; fut. l^^vtrw ; aor. r^^wfl-a-, 
whence comes 't^^vat in Plato. 

Rule XIII. Of 'ExaJv^;. 

1. 'EXauvw borrozvs of Ixeca the futures Ixii^ia^ l\u; 
^, The aorist rthxa-ocy iX^a-xi 
3. The perfect Ixn^ocxoi, 

Examples. 

1. 'EXayyw, to push, to incite, to drive, to move, formed from 
rA«« (first by changing it into IXmva;, and afterwards, by inserting 
V, IXavvu), from thence borrows the 1st fut, Ixcccrw, and the 2d iAaJ. 

2. The 1st aor. 7)Xcc(tx, or without the augment 'ixaa-ccf the 3d 
person eXxcrcxv, sync. sXa-xv, they have pushed or driven. 

3. The perf. >}Xa;i«, Att. iKriXck-/.ot, plu-perf. \\vj\»)iuv, 5d plur. 
-nffoiv, Att. -siray, Mfi'j/ have driven : part. IXnXxKu^, arrived : perf» 
pass. i5A«/x«<, or YiKocayi.xi, contrary to the opinion of Scotus. From 
the first comes the first aor. vXtxQnv, I have been driven ; and from 
the second, 'iKua-y^x, a copper-plate. 

Rule XIV. Of ly.vioiJt.o(.i, 
Examples. 

'lKV£0(jLxi, or UvZ^xi, to comey to arrivCf borrows its tenses of 
'iKoiAoci ; fut. I'^ofjLsci ; perf. I'yy.xt. 

Second aorist h6{xv)y; the infin. iKsaOan; part. txo/>t£vo?: thus 
a{p<xvS/xa/, to come, to arrive ; a<p7yiAxt, veni ; o'.fprKlo, Plut, venerat ; 

Rule XV. Of verbs in vu impure. 

Nw of an impure termination is regulated by its primi- 
tive; thus §oiyiv(a,from ^mu, makes Uxkov, <J?f^w, SiSnx^- 
Examples. 

Verbs in vu impure follow the same analogy as the preceding, 
being always regulated by their primitives. 

Thus IoIkvco, to bite, coming from ^mu, like it makes the 1st fut. 
act. K|w; whence come* the passive ^>};^9v3o-o/^ca/ ; the 1st aor. 
loYi^^nv ; the perf. ^ihx'^> from whence the pass, ^ihyi^xi ; the 2d 
aor. E Ja>cov, &c. ^ 

Thus ij.iiji.vu, to remain, conforms to (jlsvu, whence it takes the 
perf. mid. yiiyt^ovx, Book III. Rule Ixix. Tiywixxt in the next 
chapter follows yhu. nirvu, to fall, conforms to wfra/. n/^vw, 
poetic, follows (^iwi to hill, to put to death, &c. 

Rule 



^6S Book V. Of Defectives. 

Rule XVI. .Of verbs in vm or i*i;p. 

To find the theme of ^erbs in i/J«, v.u/;tf, or yyvuy vyv(jt.ty 
^^ have only to change the syllables into w. 

Examples. 

Vcrlis in vuu and w/x/, or with a double »», in nvv and yyy/xr, 
form their tenses from their primitive, which is easily found out, 
only by changing these syllables into u. Thus it will appear that 
some of these verbs come from others in aw, iu, or ow, whether 
they take a single or a double v, 

The reduphcation of the y is found in the following verbs: 

^yela-w, 'VJilx-vvvu^ Or ^s\civ)iV[ji.if tO Open, 

X£§d-U, KE^X-VVVCiJy or KS^olvWlJLl, tO mix, 

y.o^i-Uf Ko^s'vvvu, or xo^svvvjxty to cloy, 

CT^E-w, a^t-wvuy or aQivYvi^i, to quencn* 

But verbs in ou change o into w ; as 

^ow, ^&/-vvya/, or ^cu nvi4.i, tO gird. 

Xt°'^i x^w-yvyw, or ^w-vyt/A<, to colour, 
yo'u, xu yyyw, or ;)^w-vvy/x/, to tJiroiio up the groutldt 
fo-Uf pu vvvu, or ^u v)iv[xi, to strengthen, 
^ome come from dissyllables in.yw, xw, or ;^w; as 

^vfy-cij, ^svy-)ivuf or i^tvy-vvfjn, to join, 

ot'tK u, ^eiH-vvUf or ^six-yyft/, to sheik), 

cc^-oiJicti, ax'^viMxt, to be vexed, or irtmhled. 
In like raanrer Ei'^yvyjix/, to inclose or shut up ; {xiywiJLi, to mingle j 
[Ao^yvviJih or oM^yvvi^i, to voipe ; olyw^i^ to open, &c. 

.But there are .some whose primitives were formerly perhaps in 
use, which we now find terminated in acru or rla'; as zsyxrau, -cjjjy 
ybuy -'vv(ji.i, to Stick or join together; 'sjXyic-o'u, zjXmy-vvu, or 'vviJt.if 
to strike, to weep; p^a-a-ij, p-ny-yvui 'WfAt, to break, to shatter; 
(p^dcraco, (p^ctyyvM, -vv^i, to inclose, to shut Up, Whose tenses are 
always formed according to the rule of the unusual verbs -snoyw, 

^Xtjyo;, priyjj, (p^ccyu. 

"Ayvvixi may be from ayco, or from ua-ffu, according to the ety- 
mologist, whence comes its compound -Kxlda-a^iv in Artemidorus. 
Those in ^u are regular. 
"Og'u, o^'vvui or oa-yy/A/, to trouhle, to excite. 

Rule XVII. Of some particular verbs in vuw or i/u/au 

1. KTmu//.i, derived from >i[uvw, fro7n thence forms its 
tenses; as also srlco^uviJi.i, from srloii^oo ; 
'- 2. Verbs derived from a circwnftex^from thence Uke^ 
wise form their tenses. 

Examples. 

.1. The following verbs borrow their tenses of their primitives; 
but the diphthong loses the second vowel ; thus 
^-m, jcl/y-yfft/j to kill ; %tfl»i-§u, 'Sjldq-w^Mi^ to sneeze. 

2. Se- 



Investtgationt of the Theme. 269 

2. Several even form their tenses from the circumflex verbs, 
from whence they are derived .^ 

Either by inserting the syllable w before /x< ; as 

rof-Eft/, To^-w, s'o°-vvixi, to strew. 

^o^-SMf 3'oa-a', ^0^-vviJ.if to leap, 

ofAo-Uf l^'Uf ofji.-vv[^if to sivea?'. 

Or only by inserting a y, and changing the accent ; as 

Kiv-'.u, Ktvcu, yAvviAi, to move. 
"A^vvfAat, to cliange^ to buy, comes either from al^u, to tahe 
axioayi as zjld^yvfj-aci from zylafi^u ; or else from at^iofAa/, cx.l^Zfj.cn, to 
take, as hoswixxi from ^o^eixai. 

All the verbs mentioned in the two preceding rules, have either 
a single or double v before vu. 

But there are some dissyllables, which are terminated in a dif- 
ferent manner, of which we shall treat in the following rule. 

Rule XVIII. Of oxxva or oaaj/xi. 
'OAAuoj and oXXvfAi borrow their tenses of oxiv. 

'OXXvo;, or oXXvi^i, to destroy, to kill, to ruin, to die. It comes 
from oAAft/, fut. oXu>, from whence arises the circumflex oXsu : 
and thence the fut. oKio-u, the perf. uXskx, Att. oxJjXbkx, (see Book 
III. Rule xvii. ) the ^d aor. uaov, mid. wAo/x^v, infin. oXic-9xt, part. 
o\o(Asv(^, the perf. mid. aXx, Att. oXuXx. 

in like manner from il;s compound kiroKKvUf or o'.iroXXvi/.if the 1st 
fut. is Qc><jroXs.(Tu, the 2d a^voXS, &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

"E^vfjt.act seems also to he formed by sync, from 1§vo{axi, to preserve, 
to protect, tvhence comes f/iefot. ^v<TO{A.oii. 

"I'^^vixxt seems to be a preterite, not only because it imports situm 
esse, but moreover by reason that i^^Za-Oxi and t^fvfxiv'^ have the ac» 
cent of^the preterite, and not of the present. 

From what has been said, it voill be easy to judge of the manner of 
forming and conjugating the verbs in vi^i. It voill only be requisite to 
know, vohich of their tenses are in u€e ; and this we have sufficiently 
shewn already in the second and in the fourth chapters. 



CHAP, VIIL 

Of Verbs that borrow their Tenses of others synoni- 
pious, or of verbs of the same signification, some of 
which may be considered as their primitives, or as 
their derivatives. 

lluLE XIX. Of 'Ayo^.vuj. 

L 'Ayo^suw borrows of iTTbi its two aorists eTttov, itrrocy 
and retains every where the augment a. 

2!. From 



27© EooK V. Of Defectives. 

2. From i^iu or p£« it takes the future in -ia-a, whence 
are derived il^mx, il^nfjioii, tp^nfj^ocij Ip^nf^nv, and 

Examples. 

i\.Topmi to pronounce, to harangue^ forms regularly its first 
future ayoPBv<70jf first aorist viyo^st'tj-x, 

2. It borrows of efTrw, which in the present is unusual, the 1st 
aor. eliraci and the 2d etfrov, dixi, / have said ; which retain every 
where their augment, as in the im perat. 'cj^te die* in the part» 
i)itmi tvho has said, 

o. It borrows of l^io;, whence by apocope has been formed piuf, 
io say, to speak, the unusual fut. p-nau or l^iau, whence comes Uie 
perf. sr^'/jx* (the augment in «;, like those of the 11th rule of the 
3d book) pass. i'l^Y,y.xit or VppiiiJixi, the fut. pass. pri^-ncroyLXi in Thu- 
cyd. 1. aor. il^^Qnyt and dropping /, l^iQ-ny, or reduplicating ^, 
Vppvi^-nv, as if it came from piu, p-nffu; likewise IppsOnv with an 
5 in the penultima. 

From hence are derived several nouns; as pv^Mt, a tvord ; prtari^^ 
a sentence; p-nru^, a rhetorician. 

Rule XX. Of Al^U 
Al^iu takes i't?iov, ftXo/x)jv, afjd soynetimes fTA«j il^olixfiv. 

Examples. 

aI^Iw, or affEo^a/, to taJce, to choose, forms regularly the fut» 
ai§ri(7oiA,on, and the perf. rj^viijixi* 

Its first aor. assumes an £ instead of *j in the penultima of r^sG^jv, 
and in the like manner in the 1st fut. ott^EQ-no-oixxi. See Rule lii. 
and liv. of Book III. 

It borrows of eXw, capio, the 2d. aor. etkov, whence comes the in- 
fin, sKuv, the mid. EtXojuyjv, lAlo-0a<, IXo/xEv®'. The 1st aor. sTxa is 
hardly to be met with ; but we find the mid. j^Xa/x^jy. 

Rule XXI. Of dxivSica and nvXiv^iu. 
*AK^v§6(a making its future in ri^ca, borrows also {^ujfvm 
dKiu; M'jAtvJ'ti), or M\jXi)i§eui, forms its future after the 
same manner. 

Examples. 

'AXivofiw to roll, forms regularly the fut. k>.M<Tu; but it bor- 
rows also kxiaa of its primitive aXw. 

Its synonymous verb x.vXU'^u, or wXtvliu, forms regularly xtX/v- 
^-yu ; likewise xyxio-w from xyx/w. 

In like manner its compounds l^iXiKuSf evolvisti, Aristoph. I|«» 
7^i(7xs, e volutabro excitant. 

Rule XXII. Of Ba^W 

1 . B«j'vw borrows almost all its tenses of its primitive fiolu, 

% From 



IjfVESfiGATTON of the Theme. 27 1 

2. From itself it takes ^i^aii^^ociy and theaor. l^^ivStfv : 

3. But Knv comes from pi'^^^wt, as also the imperative 

4. Arid sometimes this imperative is syncopated j as ^S^ 

Examples. 

1. BxUuf vado, to gOi to tjoal/c, follows the rule of the othe^ 
verbs in a/vw of the preceding chapter, taking from its primitive 
^xu the fut. jSviaa;, or firicroiJiaci; the 1st aor. l^'/ta-diA-nv ; the perf. 
^iCmx; sync. /3/Caa; plur. /SaCa/Asv for /SsCjixa/xsv ; plu-perf. ICsC^f- 
xttv, and ICeCaf/y ; 3d plur. l^iQitKjoLv, by sync, and without the aug- 
ment /DsCao-av, they had entered ; perf. pass. /S/^vj/sxa/. 

2. But it forms also from itself ^iQcci^iJ^aiy or else ^s^xai/.ai, accord- 
ing to the 58th rule of Book III. and the 1st aor. pass, l^acihf, 
whence comes 'sjxfiCxvQnv, and a-vn^dyOr,v, in Dion. Cassius. 

From itself it forms the imperf. £'C<x;>ov, whence comes cvA<^xmf 
Dion. Cassius, it happened. We find also (Sahs, without the aug- 
ment, he"walked. 

3. It borrows of /3/C»j/a< (whence comes /3;Ca5 in Hom. like k^'s) 
the 2d aor. eCvjv, like £'r>jy, fronn /'f/j/A/ ; and, without the augment, 
/3^y, ^?, ^. Third dual ^r,9vvi Dor. ^dOviv, they vcent tivo to- 
gether ; 3d plur. eC'/jo-ay, without the augment /3;5(rav> sync, ^av, 
they "doent. In like manner its compounds kvxQalvu, to ascend ; xx- 
rxQxtvu;^ to descend ; kylQnv, y.xHQwy &c. 

4. The imperat. is ^^5/, v«(/e, sixC-n^i) Lucian, cojiie m, like r^S* - 
also j8aS<j whence comes avd^xQtf ascend; >ixld<^x9i, descend; 
like (pciOi, say; (rvix<px9i, confess, 

5. But it frequently suffers a syncope ; /S«, xro, 'cnde, for |S^5/y 
%ru\ ayaCa, xicia^a, e/aCcs, &C. like a'yrzra, for ayc/'r«6^ g€t up, 

or m?. 

We likewise find in the participle of the perf. ^tQus, wt©>^ 
having ascended. Plot, for /SeCafw?, like Ira's for Iraw?. 

Rule XXIII. Of yivo[Jixi or yfyvo^sci,- 

1 . TiVOfji.oci or yiyvoiJ.oA, to be, 

2. Follows yivoi^aiy yvAoiJi.xi ; 

- 3. F?^om the former it takes lyvjoi/^nv, yiyovocj and 

lynv^lJ.Yty : 

4. From the latter it has ym(ToiACii, the perf ect ysyir/i- 

f/.xi, and the aorist ly£VY\<r<x,iAyiv^ 

5. But from yvjvdfa it has likewise lymn<Tdifji.Yiv, in which 

tense we frequently meet xvith a syncope. 

Examples. 

1. r/yo/Aa*, to he, to become, to be boiii, comes from y/v^;, which 
■was first made y/yw, or ymyxi, changing c into i; and after- 
wards inserting a y, they made it ytyvoi^^xi : as in Latin, from 

§ geno 



!Q72 Book V. Of Defectives- 

geno (whence comes the preterite genui) they formed ^ino^ and af- 
terwards gigno: h'kewise, as by changing £ into /, from fjiivu they 
have formed yJifxvu, to rernain; from -cxs'tw zjI'ttIco, to Jail ; and by 
this addition of 7, from ytvcjo-KM they formed yiyvM(rKt>f, to know / 
and as in Latin from nosco comes connosco, 

2. This verb conforming to its primitive, borrows some tenses 
of yevoi/,<3cif. and others of yiiioy.xiy formed by resolution from 
the 2d fut. 7£vS/>ta/, according to Rule I. but it frequently admits 
of a syncope in the formation of its tenses, as we shall see pre- 
sently. 

3. It borrows from the 1st verb y'^voyLxi the 2d aor. lymt^^iv, 
lysvn, lyivilo and by sync, eytvlo, he "was born ; the perf. mid. 7s- 
yovxf the 1st aor, E7g/ya/x>?y, whence comes ymxro. Ion. for lyiUoiloi 
See Book III. Rule xxi. 

4. From the second verb, which is ytviofxai, it takes the 1st fut. 
mid. ysiV)<ToiJLXi, ; 1st. fut. pass. y&wiQ'/ia-ofxxi ; 1st aor. lysvnQriv ; the 
perf. ycyivfifMxi ; the 1st aor. mid. lyswiT-aifji'/iv. 

5. But we find also yEwxa, to produce, to generate, whence comes 
the 1st aor. lyivvvia-x, mid. sy£vv'y)(Tcc{jt.viv 'rxru; ytaalo, and by sync. 
lylvvft;, lyivv^o, or, according to the Ionics, yswxlo, as above they 

said ysivxio. 

Rule XXIV. Of '^E^p^o^^^i. 

1, ^E^x^fxcn bori'OWS of lAfJdw, 7]Ksmci, lKsu<ro[AUi, ^Au6oi/j 

?A0oi/, and the perf mid. ^Au0^. 

2. The Attics use a reduplication in the perfect and 

plu'perfect. 

Examples. 

1. *''E^-x^oyi.ixiy to come, to arrive, borrows its tenses of the unusual 
Yerb IXzvQuj, fut. IXwaoixat, part. IXsyaoz-iEy©- ; the perf. riXswta, i 
whose passive should be v^.ny.xi, whence comes the gerund /y.srs- ' 
An/rs'S', taken from ^.tr's^x'^ij.xi, to pursue, to search, to compass, 
or obtain ; the 2d aor. viXv9ov in verse, and by sync. ^x6oy in prose, 
whence comes eaSo/^u;, EA^i, lyATv, iTiSwy. Tlie perfect raid, is 
^\v^x, the plu-perfect hy^v^siv, 

2. The Attics use a reduplication here in all the preterites, lAn- 
hvK%i Ih'/iK'jKsiv, IXriXv^x, lA'/jXySe/v, &c. See Book III, Rule xvii. 

Rule XXV. Of 'E(rO;«. 

1. 'Eo-e/w horroxvs of Uoj, ri^oi. and moc, which is 

changed into Unxx ayid 'Mloy-a : 

2. Thence, in the perfect passive, it takes 'Moimki 

and U'l^h(Tu.oci : 

3. Thence also it has in the second future yniddle, 

U8iJi.oii, or i^oiAOii : and from (pdya it borroivs 
^ay8/Aat> ^dyofMoHf and (payov. 
Examples. 

1. 'EotQ/o;, to eat, borrows of c^o/ the perf. mid. v^x, Att. Mas, 
according to Book III. Rule xvii. likewise the perfect aiitive W, 

At. 



Investigation of the Theme. 273 

Att. Ihrtx, and inserting ^o, lU^oiix^ which alone is usual. Excerpt 
X'ce should Wee tofollovo Eustathiuss method of forming it from eSow, 
and thence vj^okx^ Att. i^-n^oxx. 

2. From £^0/ is formed regularly the perf. pass. e'^|^o/x«; ; but 
we say also i^ri^sa-^xif whence comes '^£a-^<x,i eduUinn ; tle^osi escu- 
lentus ; and others. The particip. l^'n^t(T^ivQ(;* 

3. The 2d fut. mid. g55/xa/ (whence comes CT^ojcare^S//,*/, to eat 
beforehand J Lucin.) or b^a,%i, like w*o/>ca/ : likewise ^xyni^^xt, or 
(pdyo^AOiiy from (pdyuf to eat, to devour, whence also comes the 2d 
aor. act. B(pxyov, or, without the augment, (pdyov. 

Rule XXVI. Of'^E^ftj. 

1. "Ex^^ makes £ix°^> ^t" » 

2. And from (r;)^£w i^ ^«Ay5 ^/,90 gV^ov, (r;)^>iV«, ^w^ 

3. i<>(?/w (r;)^ew likewise comes cyvi^^i, and thence the 

imperative cryXq, and the perfect passive hx^H'On. 

Examples. 

1. "ExMf to have, to obtain, to possess, forms from itself the im- 
perfect eT;^ov, the augment in st (according to Book III. Kule xi.) 
and, also, without the augment, e;)^ov, the fut. £|&;, with a rough 
breathing, according to Book V. Rule xxviii. mid. s^oi^mu From 
thence comes zru^i^'^rs, 1st aor. of the sijbjunct. in Cebes. 

2. It borrows of <7x^u the fut. ayyicru, the perf. icyv^y.^, the 
2d aor. 'iayo^, the mid. io-xoy-m, whence comes -^vecr^o/^^jv, / have 
suffered. But «V;^oju»v, / refrained, ox restrained myself comes from 
J'(7x&', to have, to keep, to refrain. The imperat. c;^!, whence 
we have vjx^xa-x^i ?^>'> represetit ; xurxax^> ^^^«^^; hinder^ the 
jpid. a-x^f whence comes knthax^i refrain, or keep from, 

3. From cx^^ ^s ^'^^ formed (xyyiikt, or "ax^-^h whence comes 
the imperat. o-;)^e?; Ima-x^^f t^ait, differ i 9r§o^%£?, attend to, or. 
apply; in the same manner as <p^s<;, fer, /^/c^, or carry, from 
9f 5}^i ; <77r£?, 5a^, or follovo, from ct-tt??/:** ; and '^U from rlOn^h &c» 
The perf. pass, is l'a;^f^<x/, ecr^so-a/, tax^'^^h whence comes o-;)^£to?, 
suffer able ; its compound aa-x^ros, unsuff^eraUe f as also ax^ai^, 
habit, disposition; the 2d aorist pass. eVx^'O^jv is likewise from 
thence. 

Insomuch that it may be said, thai the aorists, ii'hich assume an s in 
the penultima, sv^£9y)v, r^Bdnv, sTrps^viv, IppsOviv, and the like may be 
formed regularly from the perfect passive (f the verbs in{xi : and like- 
wise, that verbal nouns, voith a long votvel, are generally derived 
from circurnflex verbs ; tvhereas those that have a short vowel, are de- 
rivedfrom verbs in fAi, lohich assume a short vowel, in the pemdtimct 
of the passive perfect, whence those nouns are derived. 

Thus (7yy)yi.(x. figure, form, appearance, scheme, comes from 'Ux'^' 

fjMi, the perfect qfa-x^oj > and (Tx^<rfs, situation, disposition, inclination 

, of inind, comes from £<T;^E//,a<, the passive perfect of crx^y *> ciXwffK;^ 

I captivity, and «Awto?, captive, are from UhuiAxi, I have been 

N N - taken. 



£74 Book V. Of Defectives. 

taken, tJie perfect passive of a.Aou ; ^oV/?, gift, donation, di'stribifi 
tion,yrow2 ^s^oju*/, I have been given, the 'passive 'perfect of^i^ufM* 

Rule XXVII. Of 0vr,VH«. 

1. Bvvia-yiM has from itself ^u^^oo ; 

2. From Bum it has 'i^ocvov, S-ftJvS/xat ; 

3. From 3-vaw it takes S-v^oVw, ri^uriKOc, ri^mu, ri^yemoc, 

4. i^w^ rehniAi is likewise used, zvhich conforms intirely 

to Wvf/^l, 

Examples. 

1 . 0v>)o-xw, fo~ die, conies from the fut. of Svaw, tktu. It forms 
first from itself the fut. ^v»)|a;, whence comes the paulo-post-fut. 
rsOvn^oiAui, conjugated with e/, T£9v^|e/, according to the analogy 
of the 51st Rule of Book IIL 

These futures are formed regularly, excepting that they drop 
their o- by reason of the subjunctive | ; ^y>j|w, and not ^vna-^u ; just 
as S/^ao-xw, to teach, makes f<5*|6/, and not ^<^ao-|», which is done in 
order to soften the sound, 

2. It borrows of ^£»yw, the 2d aor. tOamt and the 2d fut. 

3. From its primitive ^vdu, it has the future ^vna-u, the perfect 
nriQuvixa. and ti^vocac, like ^s<^moc, QiQxxy ivi ; 'irriKx, Vr«a, sfeti; 
and thence may be derived the Sd person plural rsQySia-tf by con- 
traction, for TiQvcx^xa-i ; and likewise the infinitive nri9y»y(xi, with an 
a circumflexed, for reOvaEva/. 

The Boeotians also form the perfect in si, rsQvtDcoc, whence comes 
the part. nOvsmilfs, and rsQvccsvatt, afterwards casting away the /, 
Tefiwo-s-, and among the poets likewise rsQvtjo'f, dead, 

4*. But we find also te0»»/^/, which makes the reduplication in t, 
and is conjugated like tr*)/A<, whence we may also derive the Sd 
pers. plur. rnQvacri, like «Vaa/ ; unless we should choose to derive 
it from the perfect, according to what has been already said. The 
imperfect is ri9vizit ; the optative nOyociviv ; the infinitive rtOtoitat ; 
the participle teOvx?. 

Rule XXVIII. Of n^V^^. 

1 . UxtT'/id forms from td-jIOw the future zT/i(To^oi.i instead 

of -ujri(ro[jf.cii ; from xs-i^u likewise it has IVaGoy : 

2. Its preterites are from Tsot^iUy 'ur^Tnih^oc; 

3. And from vFKV^oivMf tssvov^cc. 

Examples. 

1. Uoia-x^i patior, to suffer, to endure ; imperf. i'jrotffX'^'*> ^'^on, 
Cassius. Fut. 'zuela-oixott, J shall or xvill suffer, instead of tariaoy^at, 
assuming e< instead of the m of 'a-k^u, whence it derives its tenses. 

But 'aiiiTQixxt, I 'will believe, I will obey^ comes from vju^oi^at 
the pass, of we/Ow, to persuade*' 



Investigation of the Theme. 275 

The 2d aor. sWflov comes from the same nt^^uy whose second fut» 
IS tjoiQut the infin, zia9i7vf part, wafiwv. 

2. The act. perf. is ins'jToiQyiKcx, from -ETaOear, formed from the 2d 
fut. <sra0a;; the perf. mid. is 'zsE'trovOxy by inserting 0, instead of 
^iirovxt from 'crovieo, laboro ; the part. zsiirovQuSi oro?. 

S. Otherwise zje'irovOot may be derived from -cravQava;, fo su^er, 
as ^eXoy;^« from A«y;^av&/ ; which seems the most reasonable, since 
the a is hkewise changed elsewhere into o : whence Epicharmus in 
the etymol. says TjHVeo-^s for 'sjivxa-x'i passus est, he has suffered* 
See Book III. Rule Ixviii. in the annotation. 

Rule XXIX. Of mWw. 
lleVffw, or Tsirrb), takes its future^ preterite^ andaorist 

■ \froTn isiirlu}. 

Examples. 

nio'a-cot Att. 'cshrui borrows of the old verb '^^iirloj, to boil, to 
digest, to soften, to ease, to make boil, the 1st fut. ^i-^u; the 1st 
aor. £9re4'«; the pass. '^ei^jOyJiro/^Aa/j iw/ipOijv: perf. -cjEVe/^f^af. 

Rule XXX. Of n;W 

1. IliVw hasjrom w/w, Tsris^ai, andiinov : 

2. jFroTW -crow zV ^^^e^ 'zjtwVw, rnjeirunx, and 'nhcfAKt 

with a short o : 

3. Jw the imperative it has m^i from isTiai ; and ^(^^i 

from ww/A*. 

Examples. 

1. n/yw, coming from Ww, to drinh forms regularly the 2d fut. 
'aiHiA.oct, whence comes miti<7Qxi ; it forms also 'sjloyuoti, ^Isaai, I 
'will drink ; and the 2d aor. IV/ov, / have drunk ; like ^ayo^a/, 

.y^oy.«i, 'tffoct, I mil eat. See Rule XXV. 

2. It borrows of n^ow the fut. xsua-u, perf. act. tshuxx. But in 
the pass, it has ^iiroyi.xi with an o/ADf^ov (according to the analogy 
of the verbs in /:*<) whence comes -cro/xa, drink, potion , physic ; 'tjoa-t?, 
drink, or ^Ae manner or custom of drinking together ; and several 
others^ The 1st fut. «To6no-o/>t«/, 1st aor. IttoSuv. 

3. From thence also comes the imperat. -Krwd/, whence iry/*- 
^w^/; compota s as it takes ot?0/ from ^rr/x/. 

Rule XXXI. Of n^W 

1. n^Trlw, jTrowz 'mkuy makes ^ia-a^ fVf<r«: 

i2. From 'weVw c(???2e^ 'wfcrEw, «;/22cA forms ujBff^[jt.06ij 



BTTiffOV 



5i From 'sflm it has also WlwVw, wlTrlwKOt, -ErfTrlwHW?, 

whence tfittIw? and TTBTrlewg, 

Examples. 

1. riiTrlw, ifo ya//, fo decay, follows its primitive wsrw, which 
should make the 1st fut. -njjcrw; but this last is unusual, however 
from it is derived the 1st aor. «Vc(t«. 

2. From 



^76 Book V. Of Defectives. 

2. Froni this future, circumflexed after the Doric form, tjea-Z, 
is formed a new theme cteo-Zw, whence is derived the 2d fut. -cxso-Sf- 
IA.XI, the 2d aor. (Trsa-ov (according to Book III. Rule Ixxvi.) 
opt. Wo-oz/xi, infin. 'ujsa-iTv. part. 'sjsa-ojVf ovro<;y and (as some are of 
opinion) the 1st fut. -cteo-tjo-w, and the aor. lirsavtcrx, from whence 
they insist, that 'ima-a, is formed by syncope. Thence also is de- 
rived the noun 'vjhfi^oc ro, a ruin, or fall, or >what fallsy or is 
ruined. 

3. It borrows likewise of zflow the fut. 'oluau^ and the perf. 
'ssiirluKXy whence comes the part. 'usfilwK^g, and by sync, 'mtifiuu 
urosf 'msTilucrx, »3?, hke Ifo*^, uros ; and inserting an &, Ksjsi/leu^* 

ANNOTATION. 

Concerning ^di/lw, ^oi7r%f, and such like, see Book IIL Rule xxxiv. 

Rule XXXII. Of 'PeV 

1 . *?6(o takes f £uVw, and sppeuo-a, f7'om the JSolic pcJw : 
52, From puew ?V ^tz^ V^^mv, l^^vmocj p'unVw. 

Examples. 

1. 'Pg'a;, to floijo, borrows of the ^ol. verb. p£vu the fut. ptia-u; 
the 1st aor. Vppsva-oc, which is very little used ; part, p^vaxg. See 
Book III. Rule xxvii. 

2. It takes from pviu the 1st fut. pvn(TUi very little used; the 
mid. pvYiaoi/.txi ; perf. act. IppCviKx. 

'E^/yyyv is the imperf. or the 2d aor. act. of /y>j/[>t<, j/Zwo, evanesco ; 
or else it is the 2d aor. pass, of pvsoj, though pvM after contraction 
is in u pure : the same must be said of the infin. pvYivai, and of the 
part. pvBiq. 

'PvM may he either the 2^ fut. act, of ptiu, fluo ; or the freSk sui- 
junct, of pvYi/JLi, fluam ; or the 2d aor. of the act. or pass, subjunct. of 
the same verb fluxero. 'Pvria-oiAxi is also either the 2d fut. pass, or else 
the 1st mid. 

Its compounds follow their simple ; as I'jnppici), to flow upon ; ^latppsu, 
to flow all about ; tvhere it is observable^ that f is reduplicated in the 
same manner as in the syllabic augment^ (see Book III. Rule vi.J 
ivhich happens to all prepositions ending mth a vowel ; as prtyvvfAi, to 
break ; xocroippnyvvixi, to break in pieces ; prison, to have broke ; -cre- 
§ipprj^<xi, to have broke all round. 

Wherefore Karotpp<k^'n<;, cataracta, a cascade or fall of water, ought 
to he derived from pda-a-u, to break, "j&hose compound is x<xr<xppoi(rau, 
to precipitate. But xaroc^dKlnqf tvhich is likewise used, and is also 
taken for the bar of a door, as well as the other, comes from oc^oi<Tcrcj, 
'which signifies th€ same as pdaau, whence is formed Kccra^da-a-cj, with 
a single §; instead of which we find also ccppxaacof whence a-vv 
ccppoiaa-Uf to batter one against the other ; but ffvpponrarui comes from 

p(x,cr<TU, 



Rule 



Investigation of the Theme. <17'7^ 

Rule XXXIII. Of isuw and 2£uV«!». 

1: Xi^ia^froyn tr^xxTta, forms i(reva, : 

2. From (Tuw it has lo-ue/AJji/, o-eVujWrai, gVo-u/Aat, Itrv^YjV, 

Examples. 

1. lsv(»>, or a-vjoiAdt, to excite, to stir up, to shahe, takes from the 
fut. o-syo-w, the 1st aor. so-Et;*, instead o^ ea-sva-x, and among the poets 
aa-aevocy mid. lo-<r£t>a/A»)v. See Book III. Rule xxxi. 

2. It borrows al&o-tf o-jJw, IffvoiAriv; 3d person satJtTo, by sync. 
'iavro ; the pass. perf. a-icrvyiXi, and by transposition s(Tffvi/.xi, also 
lcrcr£u//,a<; 1st aor. so-vSvjy, la-av^nv, duplicating in verse the a after 
the augment ; infin. cvSyivoti ; part. avQsU) concitatus. 

Rule XXXIV. Of T.>a,. 

1 . Te/xi/w ??z«A:e5 276' second aorist 'irociAov, tn^oy : 

2. -For its preterperfoct itjias Ter^nxa : 

3. But from ri^viya it takes r[j(.Y\^(a, the active aorist 

'ir(AocyoVf and the passive aorist IriAocyvw, 

Examples. 

1. TtfAvu, to ciitf takes from itself the 2d aor. sT£/xoy jand eT^fcopj 
ii^fin. TSfAuv and txiasTv, part, te/awv and ray.uv. 

2. The perf. TBTixr^ycx, pass. rsr^Tj/ixa/, comes from r/Aaa;, formed 
by metathesis from the fut. rx{ji.M. 

3. But it borows also of T/A>5y&;, the 1st fut. r/>c7j|<y, the 2d aon 
fTfAsxyov, pass. IrijAy'/iv, part, r^^ysf?. From this same r^r^yo; comes 
the compound a7roTju>)ys(3-/ in Hom. if^c^ a(^. 

Rule XXXV. Of t^1;^w, cuito. 

1. T^i-xja forms the future B'^i^u: 

2. F7'om S^i(ji.u it borrows iS^Gii^ov and SiS^oi^oc : 

3. From ^^oty.ui it takes ^^uiM^fAon, and the perfect 

Examples. 

1. T^sx^y, t^ run; 1st fut. .^f£|&r, mid. ^§s^o(jt,xi, 1st aor. act. 
U^s^x, mid. sG^s^aixy^v, part. %£|a?, all with a ^, which it has not 
in the present, because of the other aspirate. See e ya; above, Rule 
XXVL 

.• 2. It borrows the other tenses of ^^if^u; thus the 2d aor. e^§xiMVf 
infin. ^^a/ASM/, perf. mid. ^eS^o/x^, whence comes l§o(Mg, a race i 
^^oiAccSf a courier y a postillion, a prostitute, a dromedary j ^fo/x«Xo?,^ a 
hare,^ Hesych. likewise several other nouns. The 2d fut. mid. 
l^ayj^^xt is taken from the act. ^§x^u. 

3. From thence also is formed by resolution a verb in la?, Jf a/*?*', 
whence comes the perf. act. ^s^^x^wx, &c. 

Rule 



S78 B(30K V. Of Defectives. 

Rule XXXVI. Of \^mtT')(yiQ^u.i. 

*T7ri<r)(vioiAKi takes its tenses frofn uVocr^^lo/^fi;*. 

Examples. 

'Tvta-xii^l^^h to promise, to obligate one's self, borrows its tenses of 
v<rroa-)(eo(Aoii , 'efji^ui ; the fut. v'ffOff^yitToiA.oci ; perf. v'rrBcryvifA.aH} -naatif 
'•nroii. But the first aor. takes an s instead of 19, vusaryiQiiv, The 
2d aorist mid. is v7r£a-x°H''^^* ^^^ imper. v7ro<r;^«, Ion. vvoa-xio, 
mfin. vfToa-y^icr^xi, part, vnoa-yoit.i'ios. 

We find likewise the future Ivor^a-oiji.xi, promittam ; but it is de- 
rived from v^/ra/xa/, to charge one*s self tuiik, or to he anst^erahlc 
Jbr, whence comes also the second aorist vnirnv* 

Rule XXXVII. Of <pi^^, ftro. 

1. ^i^ta takes its futures from cla; 

2. Its aorists y.», -xov, from Ivsyxw ; 

3. Its passive aud middle preterites from Iviyja : 

4. It borroxvsalso (p^wiJifrom (p^m\ and <p(i^from <^^y\^\* 

Examples. 

a>£^w, fero, to carry, to suffer, takes what tenses it wants from 
four different themes. 

1. It takes _iits futures from o\'a;, the act, ofiru, mid. wcrc/xa/, 
pass. ol(TQri(70(jiMt. Likewise the pass. aor.. ajV6»?y, the infin. o/o-fiW/, 
part, o'o-fifir, the gerund, oi-m,ferendum ; 'sy^oa-ois-iov, proferendum, 

2. It takes its aorists from hfyxu; the 1st aor. act. >iveyKu, (see 
Book III. Rule xxxi.) infin. hiyxxi, part. hiyKois, mid. hsy^y.^nv, 
whence comes the optat. Iviynxiro, Lucin. uiinam, ferat, and the 

> imperative of its compound k'nitiyy.xi^ defer. 

The 2d aor. ^vsyxov, infin. Ivsyxtrv, part, hsynuv. 

But the Ionics say Ive/xw, 1st aorist hsustj part, hskoiq, mid. Ive*- 
xa/AW, and with the augment iuux, 

S. It borrows of hixcf the Att. perf. mid. h-nvoxot; 5<£v>(wxa> 
excellui, I have surpassed; Itr^yivox^^ intuli : where we meet with 
o after the manner of dissyllables ; as if it came from the simple 
fx*^' See Book III. Rule Ixviii. The 1st fut. pass. lv£x^^^°l^h 
1st aor. ^y£%9:3v, part, hix^^'if perf. ^v£y,ua/. Thus avx(pi^u, to raise, 
to bring back, to recover one's health ; kn.vix^^^t <^v£«;^6«<?? being a 
little recovered, 

4. It borrows also the fut. (p^na-u, and the aor. E^^o-a, from 
(p^iw, which is either formed by transposition from (pi^w, or, by 
syncope, from its derivative (po^iu, (p^iu, which is oftener used in 
compounds; as t]s(ppiui infero, imperf. tlzi^^av, 1st fut. sUip^va-Uf 
1st aor. tlsi<p§via-x, perf. lUi^p^vtxx ; lK(p^iu, to carry atuay, to put out, 
1st fut, hp^'^du, 1st aor. l^i(p^^n(Tx ; 1st aor. part. lK(ppa-QsUi driven, 
or put out, retaining a-, according to Book III. Rule lii. 

From thence is formed the verb (p^^i^t, which is used in the im- 
perative (f>ek, j^r, whence comes the eompoundetf^'fe?, 2«/^>'i ^^^^ 

^£j, pone, from t/^jj^^u ^-, ^t ^ 

ANNO- 



Investigation of the Theme. ^.'l^ 

ANNOTATION. 

The imperat. Q^i^t is sometimes taken for an adverb, as age in 
Latin, either by itself, or along with another particle, (pi^s^h, 
age vero. 

Sometimes it signifies,yor example, especially being joined to the 
infinitive tlTrsiVy (pi^e ElmTv, exampti gratia, or else etenim, sin vero. 
But properly it signifies give me leave to say. 

The participle to (fefov, in the neuter, is taken sometimes for 
chance; or for Providence; to (p/^ov Ik ©£», Soph, iiohat God sends : 
H< TO (pifov ai 9£5£/, Pallas in Anthol. if any accident happen^. 

Rule XXXVIII. Of yii^, fundo. 

1 , Xfw makes %£(rw, £;)(^£ov, lyj^rw^ ySnyQe.i^ ;^^9itf ; 

2!. From x^uw, it has p^fuVoj the aorist ix^Mo^y 'hi^^ 
3. But from p,^uw it takes >isx^K^') X^^") cind mx^^oci. 

Examples. 

1. Xiu, to pour out, according to some grammarians, takes from 
itself the fut. x^'^^* but very little used. We likewise find in the 
imperf. or 2d aor. 'ix^ovf and the 2d fut. p^eaJ, Ik^iuj I xvillpour 
out. 

From thence also comes the 1st aor. pass. lx^^'>iVf infin. %£95y«< 
part. x«fis'V 

2. It takes from ^^vco the 2d^ut. %£ya^, and among the poets 
X'vu, whence comes the 1st aor. f'x^ya and s^^^ (^^^ Book^III. Rule 
xxxi.) ; the imperat. ^/oy, eKx^oVf effunde ; the infin. x^'*'> exX««' ; 
the part. %£«?, sxx^<x<;- 

3. It borrows also of x^'^ ^^^ ^ut. x^^^t ^st aor. sttxva-oi., 1st fut, 
pass. x^Gi^Vo/iAa/, 1st aor. Ixv^viv, perf. x;%yxa, pass. xixvfMn. 



CHAP. IX. 

Of those Verbs, which though they form their Tenses 
from themselves, yet admJt of some extraordinary 
Changes proper to be obser'ved. 

Rule XXXIX. General for those changes. 

These verbs have sometimes a letter or syllable cut off ; 
sometimes they have it added: others vary in their aug- 
ment ; or else admit of some other change. 

Examples. 

M- HESE changes may be reduced to four sorts: the first is when 
a letter or syllable is syncopated, or cut off in the middle of a 
word : the second is an epenthesis, when a letter or syllable is in- 
serted in the middle of a word : the third is the variation of the 
augment : and the fourth consists in something else extraordinary. 

Among 



280 Book V. Of Defectives. 

Among all those changes, the syncope is that which is most fre- 
quent : the others may be easily seen in the particular rules, where 
we shall likewise produce examples of this here : but there are 
moreover several verbs, which conforming to the general rules, 
are afterwards syncopated, and ought therefore to be referred 
hereto, as 
. Ae/xw, to build ; fut. liy^u\ perf. h^iyiv^xM', by sync. SeS/Awa. 

KxfAVMf icxfAcci, to be tired ; xEndjxviKXf aiKi^i^Katf latXfjJDua'xv, Dion. 
Cassius, 3d plur. plu-perf. 

T//XV&;, to cut, TEfj-u, rsrsixvixXi tbtiaiokx; pasS. TfT/AHjixa/. 

Thus xxhico, to call; fut. xaX/o-o; and ww ; perf. xexaAwa, and by 
sync. xX-nccOf yJ.KTiviKX ; pass. xexXiof/^xt ; paulo-post-fut. xExX'na-ofji.xt. 

nc^arow, to end, to bound ; perf. 'ssEir^xrui*.xi for 'zuETrt^xruixaii, and 
by a 2d syncope zTtTr^coixxt ; 3d pers. n:iv§urxi, it is decreed, 
whence comes tiriir^wro, T>ion,J(ttis destinatum Jidt ; 'asv^ufAtvoq, 
fatal, Plut. 

Thus from o'loixxi, to thinlc, by sync, is formed ol^xi ; imperf. 

a»0^*jv, sync, ufxiov* 

Thus from o^e/ao;, to ewe, comes ospxu: of which hereafter. 
And in the same manner several others, which may be seen in their 
proper place. 

Rule XL. Or'Ayco. 

1 . "Ayw makes ol^oi), vx^t <^7>ipc^5 ^^^ a^yrio^'X' '- 

2. T/ie aorist %yov mak^ riyxyov, from zokence the 

other moods take dydyuj dyolyoifxif elyixys^ uyx- 
yiTv, ayocyiov* 

Examples. 

1. "Ayw, duco, to lead, to thinJc, to act, forms the fut. x^u, perfo 
5;^26, and, by reduplication, x-ynyx : but instead of these preterites 
Me likewise make use of xyriox^i which is formed by inserting o ; 
and the Boeotians say also kytioyx, changing -n into £/. 

2. The 2d aor. is ^yov, whence is formed ^yayov and ^yayo/xrv, 
by inserting yx, which is retained through all the other moods : 
Subjunct. xydyu ; Optat. kyxyoiy.1 ; imperat. oiyXyE ; infin. ayayta ; 
and the part, o ccyxyh, instead of which is also used xyxyxs) He- 
sych. as coming from xyxynyi.u 

ANNOTATION. 

"Aqufolloi'os also the same analogy, vtoov, n^x^ov, xjohence comes the 
•part, xqx^ojv in Horn, 

Rule XLT. Of 'AvaAjVxw. 

^Avdcxltraco "Varies its augmefit, making the perfect dv»^ 
P^wxa, ai/)5A«xa, and ^voc>^u>ioi. 

Examples. 

AvxXla-Ku, to consume, to abolish, to lavish, is composed of aAto-- 

xw, and follows its simple ; but admits of great variety with regard 

* to 



Investigation of the Theme, 281 

to its augment. For besides the perf. avaAa-'y-a, consiimpsif without 
tlie augment, as also o<,vxXmtxi, we say likewise av^Awxoj, with the 
augment of the simple, and -JjvctAwy.a, with the augment before the 
- preposition. In like manner the 1st aor. avaXwo-*, oivri>^Ma-cc, and 
r.whua-oc, ; the pass. perf. ooyocXuyixi and aAXui^xi ; plu-perf. w^^w- 
(A-nv, These tenses are all derived from avasAow, which is used even 
in the pres. and the imperf. as av^Aay, Aristoph. insumebanty for 
uvYiKmi pres. infin^. ayaAav, Thucyd. part. avoi'KHi^vr.s, Xenoph. and 
likewise kvxK^ro, Sd pers. of the pass, imperf. In like manner 
the other compounds of this verb, lirxvocXiaKu^ to lay out money for 
a thing; s^avxXia-Kd;, to consume entirely, &c. See uXidKu above, 
Chap. VII. Rule VI. 

Rule XLII. OrAvoiy^. 
'Ai/otyw is compounded of dvoi and olyco : it receives the 
augment of the simple ; has an s inserted afterzvards ; 
and changes the a, of the preposition into yi. 

Examples. 

^Avoiycjf to go out) to open, compounded of «v(i and o"yafi takes 
the augment of the -simple, changing ot into w subscribed, to which 
the Attics add afterwards an s, and sometimes they even change 
the a of the preposition into »? in the beginning : thus this verb re- 
ceives thrre different sorts of augments ; for instance, the 1st aor. 
act, ocviu^x; perf. av^u^x; ipQSS, oivsuy^xi; mid. aviuyix. and Tintjiyxi 
perf. parti mid. ivswyw?, oroj, &c. The 1st aor. pass. kn<fx^'nv and 
'■iiviu^Ui, or, with the augment of the simple only, kvux^'^^ ^ ^^'^^ 
been opened. 

We meet also with hoiy/t in the 3d. pers. of the 2d pass. aor. and 
with yivoi^s in the 3d pers. of the 1st act. aor. where the augment 
is only used in the beginning. 

' We also find in the 1st fut. mid. ayoiyig<7o/x«;, as if it came from 
civmysu. 

Rule XLIII. Of 'Avw'yw or dvcoyico. 
'Ai/wyw, or dvccysooj makes the imperfect olr^yov^ the per- 
fect middle a,v(ayoi,j the imperative uu^^^^i. 
Examples. 

* 'Avuya, or avuyL-j, to command, forms regularly the 1st aor. ww|a. 
Its imperf. is civuyoy, instead of viycoyov, or even ^nuyav ; perf. mid. 
Mwyx for ijvwya ; 2d aor. imperat. muy^i, jube, for avuyviQi, which 
comes from xyuyo^j^xi. 

Rule XLIV. Of Aa/w and ^ocIoiaoh. 
/ioiia either forms its tenses regularly, or drops «. 
Examples. 

Aa/ft/, or lxlo(/.xi, to divide, to entertain at table, to burn. It 
forms its tenses regularly : as, the futo daxrw : paid. ^alirofAAt, 
among the poets. 

O o Afterwards 



^2S^ Book V. Of Defectivils. 

Afterwards, by dropping /, it makes Sacro/:*^! ; the 1st fut. pass. 
^xaSncj-oi/^cct ; 1st HOT. loxaQnv ; perf. ^s^aa-(A.xi. 

But ^x'nj^ to leant, having formed the 2d fut. ^xu>, from thence 
makes a new theme, ^;«e&; ;'whei-rce comes the 1st fut. Ix-n^oj; mid. 
Wo-o/Aai ; the perf. Sf^.^jxa, I have learned; pass. ^£^V.>3//.«<, / A«'?e 
been taught 

We meet also with l^^riv, the 2d aor. act. of lot^nyt.i, or the 2d 
aor. pass, of Sa»&;, 2d fut. ^xu, whence comes the part, ^ase??, hwvs" 
ing; or having learned ; as, from kxw comes x«e/V, burnt* 

Rule XLV. Of A^^J^c.. 

2. 7'/?e middle Ji^oiKci ; 

3. T//e plural khUui/.tv is by syncope changed into 

4. The Ionics me ^iSioc instead of ^i§oi}ioc : 

5. The imperative is UMi» - 

Examples. 

1. Aef^A/, to fear y to he afraid^ forms regularly the fut. ^e/o-w, the 
perf. ^e5£;)(5«. 

2. The perf. mid. is V^qi-aoi, instead of Vzloi^cx.^ to avoid putting 
three S successiveh/. 

3. But the plural j£^oix«/>tEv is changed into ^iSoJv/zsv, by syn- 
cope, in the same manner as £o<y//,jv for UUx^sv, visi sumus ; 1^5- 
l/.£i for EAyo//.s», lavahamus. 

4. Instead of os^o/xa, the Ionics use Ss^/a, casting away the x, 
and the prepositive o, from whence comes the infinitive §'£o<lya<; 
and the participle o&oius, oros, 

5. The imperative is ^/S<0<, be thou afraid, and among the poets 
^si'hOti as if they came from §i^//xi and hl^tij^i. 

Some will have it, that ^idix is formed regularly from ^tw, to 
run axva7jf ov from oBioj. 

Rule XLVI. Of EX, ^IcJ^ and ^IVi, 
1 . Eid^w makes ii'701/.'Xi and h^q^j, and sometimes omits g :, 
£. T//e Attics change the aorist iind^viv into UKrocy^Yiv : 
f). T//e perfect middle is oJ^oc ; but eJ^oig forms also 

4. From ^IWo-w, ilS'/i>iOii sUmm, comes tl^oc^ sl^Bty, 'peiv: 
And from li^siiAiv, vihtn, Mcrocv, comes ^(tixbv, ?r£, ^tocv : 

0. But lUmv is fo?ined from ilh^j^i', as also the in- 

finilrce d^ivat. 

Examples. 

1. EiSiy, to hiotv, la see, makes regularly the fut. slo-o/xa/ ; 2d aor. 
sTdov. But it frequently drops the s, 'iaoi^on, 'i%y\ which it observes 

likewise in the otljcr moods: H^u. 'I'^otui, "h^ 'i^uv ; part. I5a/v. J; 

2. The| 

' 1 



Investi:GAtion of the Theme. 283 

2. The 1st aor. raitl.£<Va/x?5v, and adding e, Att. hiaufAW. 

3. The perf. mid. oldxt ol^^i, JEol. o'l'^ctaOx, and sync. otaQsc. 

We have already takeri notice, that tlds addition of the syllable 9»fo 
the persons terminated in o-, is very cemmoUf as ns-Qx, is, or ibi» ; 
vi^rBa, eras ; ua^^a^, aderas, or adfuisti, interfuisti ; i(p-/i7Qx, di- 
cebas, or dixisti ; Ifrz^^YirrQx, eruperis ; zjt'pa-Ou, biberis ; r,his-^x, 
or v^naOx tvith an vj ill the second syllable, noveras, 

4. We likewise say s'tl'.co, whence is formed the fut. sl^-fi^u, the 
perf. £\'hx.x, the plu-perf. tldmsiv, and by sync, st^x, tlhiv, c/r, si, 
and Att,. changing £/ into »? subscribed, ^htv, from whence comes 
the plural- r.osqxsv, pstre, 'nhia-xv, instead of which we say likewise 
'2aiMv, fse, YiTxv, by syncopating the ej, and changing S into a : as 
vice versa the a- is changed into 5 in iVcv for JV^ev, taken from 
'I'qyt^i, to knoiv, of which we have treated already Book IV. Rule 
xxvi. But we meet with nh in Horn, for e'thi, noverat, he had 
hiGwnjhy^ double Atticism of c^ changed into ^. 

5. We likewise say e'l^:^^/, frorn whence comes the optat. ilhi'vVf 
and the infin. ellevxi, unless one v/ould clioose to form it by sync, 
for s'thxivxi, as the part, et^chs, 6roc, for ilhKu^j from the perf. J^a^ 
for sihaoc, above mentioned. 

Rule XLVII. Of Ka^^w. 
'ExoO'j^^jc, with 11 subscribed^ communicates this -^ to 
the rest of the moods. 

ExAMT>LES. 

Ka^xi^co, to purge, to purify, forms the 1st aor. laxOrj^x, which 
according to the Attics retains this '/? with the point under it 
through all the moods, and in the part, as well act. as mid. infin. 
koSyi^xi, part. x«9»7?o''/x£vo5-, jmrijied, &c. 

Rule XLVIII. Of M^/e^. 
Mb{^u, (xi^coj makes the perf ect middle'i^iJi^Q^oi, instead of 

Examples. 

Viil^'j}, to divide, forms regularly the fut. /xf^o;, the perf. pass. 
^JpLx^iJixi, and, according to the Attics, sl^xoixxi. 

The perf. mid. should be (Aiy.o^Xf but by transposition we say 

Rule XLIX. Of 'O^.rAw. 

1. 'O^s/aw and o(pK(o borrow their tenses frorn a verb 

in ita: 
S. Baxxu follozvs ^xiw and ^Kv^^iy xphich it forms by 

syncope. 

Examples. 

1. *0(puKo}, to Otoe, to he indebted, borrows of o'psiKsbj, the fut. 
l^tiX-lia-Uy perf. w^s»A*j>c«:. We say likewise by sync. d^Xu, Kp'K'haw, 



284 Bqok V. Of Defectives. 

fc^vpxw*, 1st aor. w^x»o-a, Dion Cassius, Book 39. according to LeuncL 
The 2d aor. is u<piKovt from o^puXai, and by sync. u(pxQv. 

But u(^Xov, or, mthout the augment^ ©(psXov, is often explained hy an 
ad'oerbf utinam ego; a'(p£Xer, or 'Ji(psXsSf utinam tu;^ u^PtXs, or o?;£a5, 
utinam ille; or, in a better mamier, by the verb debeo, utinam 
debuissem, 8fc^ Of txihich we shall speak more jparticulariy in the 
eighth book* 

FroTn o(p'Kib} is also formed o^^Xaya/, likewise o(^X;Vxw, and o^Xwrxavc^, 
to run in debt, to bejined, 

2. BaXXw, to throw, to send, to strike, forftis from itself the 2d 
aor. eCaXov, raid. IS'aXoju.'/jv, 2d fut. ^aXu, whence, according to the 
first rule, should be formed iQxXov, from whence the fut. /3a;A>5o-A> 
in Arisloph. But there is another formed by sync. /Sxew (for ^otXtu) 
whence comes the perf. ^i<^},v)y.ot, pass. ^iQKn^oci, 1st fut. ^xMao^ 
(jLxi, 1st aor. IQxriQ'/jy, whence comes the part. j^xMs, ictus, and by 
sync, ^KzU' 

From ^Ksu is also formed /Sa^/a/, whence the 2d aor, of the optat. 
mid. ^X'/i(xyiv, ^KsTo, I wish thou hadst been struck, 

R U L E L» Of MsAw. 

1 . y[iK(fifo7'7ns U^from sw ; 

And by syncope the pe?fect [j>.i[/.th(oiioi, inserting |3, and 

changing n into u. 
% The same is also observed in the perfect of iLoKi(a, 

E X A M P L E s. 

1. MeXw, to he careful, to be uneasy, borrows of {xsXseo, the fut. 
l/.0KVi<7u, whence comes ixzra.^iXr,<jzi, he will repent ; and sometimes 
reduplicating the x, /;xe?-.Aw£;, and the optat. ^ol. (juraixiKyiauB, I 
wish he woidd repent. In the perf. instead of iJiE{jLiXmix, it makes 
lxs(A,Cxuy.x, I have taken care, formed by sync, and by the addition 
of /3, (because /x, is never put before x) and then changing »» into 
tj, which happens also to other verbs, as rppuytx for Vppnyoi, I 
have broke. 

2. But /AEfACxwKE signifies also venit, instead of fxiixokviKs, from 
l*,o\sco, to go, or come, and is formed by the same figures above 
mentioned; from whence comes -nrafa/AE/ACXwxE, and, among the 
poets, i:7Xfiu.'.^.Qxmsy curavit, advenit, adstitit. 



The End of the Fifth Book. 



[ ,285 ] 

BOOK VL 

OF ~ 

INDECLINABLE, PARTICLES, 

Of the Derivation, Compoaition, and Affectipn 
or Proper Signification of Word^. 



VV E design to treat in this sixth book of inde.^ 
clinable particles, and likewise of some indepen- 
dencies of nouns and verbs, which could not be 
conveniently discussed in the preceding books. 

CHAP. L 

Of Adverbs and Interjections. 

A HE adverb ought to be considered with respect to its force? 

and its accidents. 

I. The force of adverbs. 

The force of adverbs is in particular to mark, 1. quantity: 2. 

quality: 3. the manner of action: 4. relation. 

1. Quantity; as >mo(TQVi hoiv much: roerovj so much: 'cjoXv, a great 
^cd : oxiyov, [xikpcV) ci little. 

Hereto we niay refer adverbs of number ; -arfwrov, Jlrst ; ^svrs^ov, 
ffcondlT/; r^Wov, thirdh/, &c. Likewise iVal, once s ^kj ttoics : 
r^Ut thrice i and such like. Also those in ax;?; Tsr^oiKis, Jour 
times ; 'cyivra,Kt<i^ Jive times ; hx^yuq^ ten times^ &:c. In like manner 
':<joa-xKi';, ho\a often ; ro(Ta.Kis, so often ; 'CJoXXd.tctSf often, &C. 

Adverb? of multitude ; zjcXv^a gi-eat deal ; oiXtq, enough. 

Adverbs signifying extension; ^aXaj, Xtav, ver^i/ much, vastly ; 
«7av, too much ; ff(po^^oi, excessively. 

Adverbs of diminution; /xoy/j, ^oX/?, scarcCf hardly ; v)§£iix, softly ; 
^Kx, insensibly. 

Adverbs 



286 Book VI. Of Indeclinable Particles. 

Adverbs of motion ; rx*/i>roi,i speedily. _ 

Adverbs o^ time; vSv, Att. vyr<, notJOf at present; rotz, th/en i; 

taorsy sometimes ; criix^^ovt to day ; av^iovf to-morro'w ; (jiBrxv^iov, 

rioter io-morro'vo ; x^^^' y^^t^^daij ; zr^ox^'^^t the day before yesterday ; 

fe-a;\«<, heretofore ; 'sj^oinx.Kixif a long while ago ; 'zsx^x^eviiJi'Oi, in- 

sianilyy &c. 

Adverbs of place, as IvroSf 'within; grS, 'where; and others, of 

which we shall treat more particiilarl}' hereafter. 

2. Quality: and these are either terminated 
liW tc<;\*'vjgKu}Sf mildly ; x.ocicQ'hB us, maliciously. 

In a subscribed, such as the modal ablatives taken adverbially ; 
/3/a, vi, by force ; zyotppWuxy freely ; /Bj«, separately, in particular ; 
^■/}lJLoal^, in public. 

In >j subscribed, such as the like sort of ablatives; »?, which 'way, 
from zvhence, in what manner, wherefore, insomuch that, &c. whose 
ordinary correlatives are rxur-/), that" way, thus ; o-Tra^rf, carefully ; 
xo/vf ) commonly ; ^/%?, doubly. 

In v>, without a point under it ; e'x?, rashly ; y.^v^v, secretly. 

In J ; ocoip for au^igc, out of season, untimely ; avrox^t^h '^^i^^'^ ^'^^ 
own hand, for ocvro^Et^ia, : in like manner ocyxiy^arl, sine sanguine, 
mthout fighting ; a^Kovirl, sine pulvere, without raising the dust, that 
is, without trouble, 'without stirring. 

In El ; kvoiii^u, without bloodshed ; a^su, atheistically. 

In Sov; xyv'/joov, like a dog. 

In S»jv ; sKTci^viv, by extension, dilating, prolonging. 

In /r' ; ©^xyj^-t, like a Thracian. 

Aiad sometimes in |; Xa|, calcibus, with Icicles ; o5^|, mordicds, 
tooth and nail; ocTrfi^, tenaciously. 

3. The manner of action; as to exhort, zlx, come on, courage ; 
to shew, i^owj lo, behold; to express desire, «, if; e19s, would to 
God that; to assure and con^vm, ^j'tth, indeed, really ; vi, viroi, y£,tr]y 
verily, assuredly, undoubtedly ; y£v, in truth, at least, wherefore. 

To swear; /xa, v^, vxi; Att. vciix,^ i verily, it is really so, certainly, 
indeed. 

To deny; «, «x, y^; Att. ^x,'; no, no really; from whence 
comes are, a^£, neque, neither, and «Ja/x,a/y, by no means. 

To forbid; /z,-^, no, not; whence comes fAvirs, and /^«^£, and (Avi^a.- 
(xu/i;, not at all. 

To grant ; shv, eTev ^^, well, be it so, supposing it so, &c. 

To interrogate, either in regard to place : -cjofi/, zyo7, ©S, ot, a, 
ubi, where ? ^o9sv, oOsv, unde, Jro7n whence ? ^oo-b, quo, whither ? 
'::;7j, qua, which -Way? Or time; 'ujore, and tsytvimx, when? Or quan- 
tity ; '6oa-ov, how much? 'vjofjo.kisy.how often? 'csoaoe.yus, in how many 
different tmys? 'aoaax'^i in how many shapes? Or quality; -ctS?, 
~ how? 'aoTE^ws, in what manner? 

4. Relation, as those which denote comparison : fAcsAXov, more ; 
yitrov, less. 

Resemblance; uq, as, in the manner as, asif; tLsm^, in the same 
manner as ; Kx^k, KoiQavs^, oirus, &c.just as; '^rus^ and eru, just so ; 
uh, so, thus, &c. 

Order j urx, afterwiards^ next ; l|?7^, and £<p*?|^o hencefor'ward. 

§ Assem-^ 



Of Adverbs. 287 

Assemblaj]je ;, a^xa, together, at the same time ; o^Hijointlyy along 
'with ; a-vXKri'^l7}v, in a word, in short. 

Separation; avff, without, except; ^ufis^ yt^x, separateh/ ; ^>~.h, 
except, unless. 

To which we may add some others, as those that express the 
cause, hty-xy because, hy reason of; or conjecture, Uui;, T^x°^i P^"^' 
chance; rvx^v, perhaps ; and such like. 



interjections. 

The Greeks include the Interjections among the adverbs ; as 

To call, u, 6 ; to mock, t« ; to rejoice, *8; to laugh, «, a, ha, 
ha; to discourage, a, «; to congratulate, Evys ; to admire, w, (f??, 
/3aCat, zjxiroi), papce I 

To express grief, «/, o»\ ou, <«, hei, heu, elieu-> 

Indignation, !«, u, heu. 

Menacing, ««/, vce. 

And some others, which may be learned by practice. 

ANNOTATION. 

The same adverb or interjection may be used in different significations, b6caus€ 
they express only the term or manner of the action, independently of the subject. 
Thus adverbs of place are frequently taken for those of time, or vice versA, as 
avft)9£v, e svperiori loco, or tempore, or even denuo, again, anew ; sv9«, ibi, turn, eo 
tempore, then, at that time. 

Some become adverbs of quality, as 'zd-j? j voh'ich 'jjay, ho-jc, in what manner ? 

Some are applied to several differences of time or place ; as ol, ubi, and /^t/Oy 
zchere, or wJiithn ? ' ol im h <po^cs, Psal. ubi non erat tiraor, 'duhere there teas 
no occasion of being afraid; ol 0Ki7TSiv, Plut. quo respicers ; h^dh, or IvTaDSo-, 
hlc zx\6. hue ; laii, illic and illuc ; dWax'S, aJihi and alio; -sfavrcp^^S, omnibus ia 
locis, awrfinomnes locos, every inhere; 'srfos-Qiv, ab anterinri parte, in anteriori 
parte, and in anteriorem partem; larr,, qua, uLi, and guo ; and in like manner 
r and oW>7. 

'sit, an adverb of resemblance, from wherice jit is derived, may be used compa- 
rativelj% and signify, just as, as if; may be relative to time, and signify, after 
that; may likewise stand for <75, so much, very, exceedingly, &c. as wj tk;>^/^«, 
qiiuni celerrime, exceeding quick, &c. See the remarks, Book IX. 

It is also observable, that the Greeks frequently make use of adverb", where 
the Latins put prepositions ; as I|<m, without j IjiTsc, except; |m,£t«|u, betn^een^ 
among; dvi>, upon, Sac, 

II. Accidents, 

The accidental properties of adverbs are, their derivation and 
' comparison. ' _ - • 

Derivation is so very peculiar to adverbs, that there are hardly 
any other but derivatives. There are however some few primitives, 
as vEJv, nunc^ noti;,' x^l^^h bumr, on the ground : x^'^^f hevi, 7/esier-^ 
day, &c. 

The derivatives are taken from almost all the other parts of 
speech, and especially from nouns, as the following examples 
will make appear. 

The 



288 Book VI. 0/*IiSrDECLiNABLE Particles. 

The local adverbs denote the diversity of place, accordin-g to 
the difference of their terminations: thus, those in 

o9i, 01 f oVf sig' o^£?, the place ^? or 



As from 
Msyocoxi a city 
of Greece* 

Ovfavoi , ccelum, 
heaven » 

OiKoqf domus, a 
house. 

^'TnJ.o?, altltudo, 
height. 



AyTof,ipse,^?7rz- 

seif, 

'ExsTvo^j ille, he, 

it, 

O/XOS for OlVTO^, 

idem tinHesych, 
JJ&S) si^rosj alt. 



nify the place Jt'om tinhenec one 
ijchcre one is, sets out. 



Msya^oS;, orMs- 
yapot, to he at 

Megnra, 
ov^avoQ/} to he in 
heaven, 

OfKO^ly or o7)lGl, OIKOUSV, 

to be at home, from home. 



Msyx^oOsv, to 
come from Me- 
gara.^ 

ov^avoQsVf to cotne 
from heaven. 

)9sv, to come 



vvl/od/, and in 
Horn. ^4-5, and 
i^'v^t, by sync. 
^0 be above, 
(Kiito^ti'ihiythere, 

EKsT, iWic, there, 
inhere he is, 

ofjLy, together, in 
the same place, 
ycxdvroQf, ov ra- 
ther -zaravra;^?, 
ubique, every^ 
tohere. 



v-\^oQsvy from a- 
bove. 



ocvroQ$v, inde, 
from thence. 

cVsrSfy, illinc, 
from Inhere he 

is, 

ofAoQey, from the 

same place. 

'uTa.VTX^0^£7f Un- 

dequaque, from 
all parts. 



cret the 
place >u)kithei' 
one goes, 

Mcyafo^^f, to go 
to Megara, 



ov^xvovos 



or tf- 

to 



^otvo(j-s, to g 

heaven. 
olx.ovhf poetic, 
o/'xa^V, in prose, 
to go home, 

v^OffE, to go 

up. 



otlroa-Bf eo, thi' 

ther. 

inEtas, illo, to. 

Hihere he is* 

ofjt-oKxSf to the 
same place. 
way ra^ocf, CJU • 
quoversus, to- 
tvards every 
side. 



Adverbs derived from prepositions have but the same termina- 
tion to express the place where one is, and the place where one 
g<)es to ; as 

From a-yX} avcjf avc^OiVy 

supra a7id sursura, e supernis. 
above. from above, 

infra or deorsCim, ab inferis, 
beloiv, from belotv. 

The proper names of towns, that follow the feminine article, 
form their adverbs in rja-t or aa-i (which are properly ablatives, as 
we have already observed) with the point under, or without it, in 
9j9s¥, or xQbvj and in cc^s', as ' 



Athense, 
Athens. 

Olympia. 



AOrivvjcrty 'AOyivviOsv, 

to be at Athens, from Athens, 
to be at Olympia, from Olympia, 



'AQyivoi^B, ■ ■ '' 
to go to Athens, 

togotoOlympia. 
Those 



Of Adverbs. 2S9 

Those derived from appellative nouns, are formed sometimes in 
the same manner ; as 

0yji6, ^li^ocQtv, forin- ^vpuh, or a^e, 

fores, the door, secus, foris, by metathesis, 

mthouty from for ao-^s, foras, 
toithout, to go abroad* 

In like manner the article 
'0,ov ohj hie ; oU, «, ubi, odsv, unde, uh, hue, hic, 
'vohere. from tjojience, here^ hither, 

osf qui. oT, quo^ uhi. 
Sometimes the adverbs form these derivations from themselves : 

%»/*««> Xa/tAO^EV, ya^^^lz^ 

on the ground. from the ground. to the ground. 
The adverbs of quality in us come from the genitive plurd in 
m ; as from 

o'o'PoSi ivise ; (7o(pZvf co'^usy - 'wisely i 

^x^vSf grave ; ^a^suv, jSa^ew?, gravely. 

'Z7f57ra;y, decent; 'ssfmovruvt 'cj^enrovru^f decently. 

There are others in ^ov, which are generally derived from the 
nominative ; as from 

o/AoQy/xos, unanimous; ofjLoOvi/.ac^QVf unanimously* 
uvuv, icvvqs, a dog ; Jivv.iolov^ like a dog. 

^or^vqf a grape ; /3orf y^ov, hy clusters. 

ocysKif}. afock ; uyET^vj^oVf injiocks. 

The neuter adjectives are frequently taken for adverbs, as f20u, 
directly^ immediately ; ra,yy, quickly. Though in reality these are 
only accusatives governed by a verb, or by the preposition xar*, 
which denotes the manner: and the poets often use them in 
the plural, 5£<v«. /SasVe/v, just as Virgil, torva tueri, to look stern* 
And even in prose a'^ot^a.^ mth violence^ from o-cpoS^o?, violent. 
^ Adverbs are formed also from verbs ; as l^ris and l<ps^vs, succes- 
sively, in order, from ^ypi/.xi, to have ; future s'lojua/ : 'l^s, lo, hehold^ 
from £<^£a/, to see: 'Hy;, (whence comes the Latin e«^ from I'v/Je, 
inspice, see. Such also are those terminated in ^?9v ; as 

ffyXXiQC§>jyj cO^prehensim, from cryAAa/^cCavw, comprehendo. 
x^v<^hv, secriflyy from x^viflu, to hide. 

a§7r<iy^nvf rapidly, from a^7rci^<a, 'to snatch. 

X,v^Y>v, abundantly, from yiv, to pour out. 

Likewise in r/ ; as 
^EXXwiTt, in Greek ; puiKotiTh in Latin ; iCac'tr^ in Hebreiv ; 

from sXXvj/i^u, puf^Oi'i^Uf kQ^»i^w, &G. 

But there are some that may be indifferently derived from a 
noun, or from a verb ; as %w^<V, separately ^ from y^go^^ a place ; 
or from x'^^'^i'^f^'^h to separate. 

Even some verbs are taken adverbially ; as olys, ayers, age, agite : 
(^s^s, suppose, for example: lO:, come on, courage; which are the im- 
peratives of ciyu, ^l^w, and stiAty to go. In like manner o'PsXov, cr, f, 
litinam, debuissem, es, et ; or 6 si debuissem, es, et. See Book VIIL 

Adverbs are also susc'eptible of comparison, in many instances, 
though not in all. 

I* p When 



290 Book VI, Of Indeclinable Particles. 

When the adverb of the positite degree comes from a genitive 
plural in wy, the comparative adverb proceeds likewise from the 
genitive of the comparative, and the superlative from the genitive 
of the superlative, changing v into o- ; as 

-From (jct^'hsf wise; orQ(pure^os, ero^uroiros i 
comes a-o'PcoSf luisely ; tro^Puri^uVf co'^utoltus* 
From raypSi quick ; rotyvrs^osj rxyvrxroi; ; 

as also rcc^luVf roix^iros ; 

comes roi^eus, quichly ; ruyvri^usy rxyyra,ru<i ; 
as also T«^<or<u?, ru^iTus. 

It frequently happens, that after the comparison of the adjec- 
tives is formed, we use adverbially the neuter of the comparative 
and superlative, as well as the above mentioned neuter of the posi- 
tive, both in the singular and in the plural. Thus we say rxyv, 
rx^vrsfov, roi^irix, cderiter, celerius, celerrime ; likewise roi^iov, in- 
stead of which we say also ^«<7<7oi», Att. ^arrov. 

We likewise say say eS, bene ; ^ixrmf melius ; ^iKriTXy ojptime, 
UoXv and 'z^oXXoi, much ; 'Kr^£/wv and ctAswv, more; -roAcrrov, 'csK^irxy 
an excessive deal. 

The neuter of these adverbs assumes sometimes an article ; as to 
'CT|wToy, rot, zs^urxyjirsti directly. Which is a sufficient proof, that 
jthey are real nouns governed by a jtaTcc. But sometimes the arti-* 
cle is joined w-ith the word, to-bt^Stov, rocirqurxf &c. 

The following are formed in imitation of the others, though they 
be not derived from a noun : 

lJi,%\Xf muck ; (AuXKoy, more ; /^aX/ra, still more, 

^KXf little ; yia-a-ovy or ^rroy, less ; vnit^Xy still less. 
The adverbs derived from prepositions, or other adverbs, are 
formed in rs^u and rocru ; as 

'CssQOcvy beyond; 'ssz^xtrs^u^ 'as^oara.rta, 

avUf above; a^vuri^u, oi,var(kra* 

In which the comparative and superlative are often taken from 
the neuter adjective ; as 

&vft;, above; avuTs^oy, ayutxrx, 

eyyv^f near; lyyyTe^oy, lyyvrxrx. 

And also lyyiov, syy/ra? &c. 



CHAP. IL 

Of Prepositions. 

▼ T ITU regard to prepositions, we are to consider here their 
division, and force in composition, reserving to the syntax, what 
concerns their government. 

I. Division. 
Prepositions are either separable, that is, which may be found 
separated from other words in a sentence ; or inseparable, which are 

never 



Of Prepositims. £91 

never found alone, but always joined in composition with other 
.words. 

I. The separable are eighteen, whereof six are monosyllables, 
viz. 

1. cif, Att. h, in, erga, adversus, apud, circiter, in, into, totvards, 
against, with, about. 

2. sK or s^ (the former being used before a consonant, and the 
latter before a vowel) e, e\,from. 

3. Iv, and among the poets, hi, in, inter, intra, cum, &c. in, 
among, with, 

4. OT^o, ante, prae, pro, before, for, instead, 

5. «r^or, ad, coram, prope, &c. to, before, or in presence, near. 

6. GTvv, Att. |vv, cum, with. 

And twelve dissyllables, viz. 

1. a/y,^<, Ion. «/*•»-», de, circum, citra, pro, propter, of, about f on 
this side, for, because. 

2. ava, per, in, adversus, through, against^ separately, 

3. mrl, pro, (i. e. vice] propter,yor, instead, because. 

4. awo, a, ab, ex, die, from, since. 

5. ^lai, propter, per, in, because, for, through, among. 

. 6. Im, super, de, in, propter, ad, coram, versus, praeter, &c. 
upon, of, concerning, in, for, because, before, towards, besides, be- 
yond, &c. 

7. %a.rot, de, e, ex, in, adversus, contra, secundum, per, pro, &c. 
off concerning, into, against, according, instead, through, for. 

8. ^£Ta, cum, post, in, inter, with, afer, in, among, 

9. 'ox^ot^ k, ex, apud, contra, prope, juxta, per, inter, ultra, 
prse, Scc.from, with, opposite, 7iear, next, according, by, among, be- 
yorid, &c. 

10. -CTEfj, de, pro, propter, circa, circum, in, erga, of, concerning, 
for, because, about, towards, &c. 

11. v9re^, super, prse, propter, supra, ultra, above^ upon, instead, 
for, because, beyond, 

12. viro, sub, ab, under, by, &c, 

II. The inseparable prepositions are twelve, viz. «, ol^i, e^/, 
^7, /3«, Sa, Sv?, ?a, \u, ^i, ye, v^. And ^« is sometimes used for ^m; 
as ^oi^oXoq for lioi^oMs, diabolus, calumniator, devil, slanderer. 

II. Of the force of prepositions in composition. 

The business of prepositions is, to communicate their force to 
the words which they compose. 

R.U LE 1. 

Of inseparable prepositions. 

1. The following eight, cl^ty £^», (3», Ja, ^«, k», a», jS^r, 
are augmentative in composition^ 

§ 2. AbV, 



C92 Book VI. (yixDECLiXABLE Particles. 

2. aC: denotes difficulty or trouble: 

3. Ns and v?i ej*press privation : 

4. But vrt sometimes augments : 

5. A' signifies prifation, collection, and increase of 

force. 

Examples. 

1. The following prepositions augment : 

ciei : as u^iTUKPoc, very bitter : x^iori>,oqf most illustrious. It is Cjom- 
monly derived from «,^u, tojity to be convenient, or from''Af»s, Mars, 
the god of tear, 

tsi : tslZ^ouMi;^ to roar excessiveli/i from l^oiu, to love, or from 
tn§h tov:ards. 

^5 : ^eXv/^ixa;, to be xery hufigi'y, from fS«,-, an ox, because of its 
bigness. And for the same reason we make use also of r-s-Trc; ; as 
I'^rvoyfifjunVj one of an elevated genius, taken from tWo?^ a horse. ~ 

Jx: ox^o.iil:, all bloudy, from Ixc-l, densu?, thick. 

^a : ^aSfor, most divine, admirable, from ^sa;, to be hot. 

?va. : ?.xyrxtri, pelvis, a great bason, from Xa, valde, greatly, and 
;/aiiri>. hiscOj to be open, because of its wideness : xicgc?, a glutton, 
from x» and /3s;o?, devour er. It comes from Xai;, fo 5ee, to desire, 
to enjoy. 

A<: Xii^u, agito, ^^j^c-^/, valde ago, to agitate, to torment, from 
/Sxi, valde. 

^§7: ^^;r,7r'jo.:, an epithet of Mars, clamorous, heard from afar. 

2. Alq expresses always some trouble or difficulty, or misfor- 
tune ; ov-:)c5Acr, difficult, morose : oi,;rv^ico, to be unhappy. 

The reverse oif which is tl; as dyjoXqc, easy, good-humoured: 
d'TvyJu, to be happy: but it is not inseparable, for il is also an 
adverb. 

3. These two denote privation ; rkz fewoSe? o?, those that have no 
Jeet, OT vdUos^ Jeet are very short, from whence comes the French 

word nabot, un petit nabot, a short or little fellow. Just as in La- 
tin, nefandus, negueo, and others come from ne, for non. But if it 
happens to precede an x, or an «, it requires to be contracted into 
«; as visiTOi for »f E^i-oc, unquesti'jjiable : yin^i; for *e xye^tos, un-- 
shaken by the xvind, tranquil: rr,n(jLix, calmness, serenity: m^s^rrt^, 
for, true, sincere, hlameless, for t? aaH^r^?, from ^i/^rave^, to err, 
to sin. 

in,'. yiiTiss, infans, as much as to say, non fans, an infant, one 
that cannot speak : t^Mra.va?, irapunis, unpunished. 

J?. Ni also augments ; as iiy(vroe,Jlowittg of all sides, 

5. A^ signifying privation, comes from xnv, or are^, sine, tcithout j 
as ococxTog, invisible. * 

And sometimes it takes a ; after it, to avoid the concourse of 
vowels ; as a*xifj.xK7o<;, incruentus, unbloody : ei>xiio^q, effeminate. 

Signifying increase of force, it comes from a,yzi, valde, nimis, 
'i)astly, excessively; as ^rtr^s, intemus, i-ery much bent : ah^c^, lig* 
nosus, very woody. 

Implying 



Of T repositions. 293 

Implying union and collection, it comes from aV»> together ; as 
o^fX^w, hr oilier, from ^iKQ^l^^ vos, uterus, thexwrnhy because brothers 
come from the same Womb: a)to\80o?, a Jollovoer, or companion, 
from xE^£y0o;, the road. 

But sometimes it makes no alteration at all in the signification ; 
as »Txxv<;i the same with ra%v?, spica, aw ear of corn. 

Rule II. 

The force of separable prepositions in composition. 

1. These Jive,. y.ix.roi, diFo, ocvti, SiGc, TSToc^oc, either aug- 
ment, or change the ^ignijication oj the simple: 

i2. Thestjive, £k, a-^v, uVsp, Ig, and to-e^), do but aug- 
ment the sigrnjication: 

3. Yi^oq augments, or diminishes : 

4. Mix oi changes, or diminishes: 

5. And ^vo diminishes only. 

Examples. 

1. In composition there are five prepositions, that sometimes 
augment the signification of the simple, and sometimes change or 
destroy it, viz. 
'ANTi', ktrxl^ioi, -preferable : avrmyiXa,, breach of latK. 

'Alio' kvoTzlvu, to stretch : ' ocjro/xxvOoivoj, to unlearn, 

AIA*, ^ixyiXu), to laugh at : ^locTrtTu, to disbelieve. 

KATA\ xatTEo-Qiut to devour : icxToi(l)^oviu, to despise. 

riAPA^ 'vyxotY.Qa.KKu, to throve a -crafavo/ixo?, a latv-breakcr. 

great aimy : 
2.„There are five which only augment the significatiou. 
'EIE, E/?ax8a;, exaudio, to hear jjlainlt/. 
'eh, l^i-a/xa/, to be absent from one's self, 

IlEPi*, -zjEfiKaXX^?, pervenustus, extremely handsome^ 
2t'n, avvs-ycrsKut plane perficio, to finish completely, 
'xriE'P, vvs^i/.otUoif.xi, nimis insanio, to be stark mad, 

3. There is one, which sometimes augments, and sometimes 
diminishes, viz. 

rifo?, 'mfosiroicrxi^f to be very much affected ^ w^ecot'TrTflpa/, to touch 
.slightly. 

4. Another, that changes and diminishes, viz. 

Msra, /M,£TaC«X£V£/y, to change design / y^rxvoihf to repent ; /^csTa'wei- 
5f /v, to dissuade ; lAsrayyi^siv, dutriare, to pour out of one vessel into 
another, 

5. And another which diminishes only. * 
*r«-o, viro^ei^u, subvereor, to be somewhat afraid, 

ANNOTATION. 

It is very common to see two or three prepositions together in the same word i 
as from I'oj/m*, sto, to stand, comes aviq-rifjn, to raises tQ excite ; iir<tvi^>)fjti, to raise 
vp, (ostir^p, &c. lufju, mitto, to send; l^in/JUf to go out, to go away, to put 
out J «r«^*«/*;, to g<j further, to send further s evTi7r*g£f i^;, to pursue, to oppose, 

to 



294 Book VI. Of Indeclinable Particles. 

to meet ; a.vri'!r^oiutra'\aiA,^avt»f to anticipalef to prevent ; ivri-jra^s^ayta, to lead an 
army against. There are likewise some instances among the Latins, subobscurus, 
subabsurdus, Cic. 2. de Oral, and such others. But it will not be amiss to give 
here a larger list of the signification of these prepositions. 

List of the Prepositions, tvherein is given a more extensive Vi6xi) of 
their Force in Composition. 

\vri9raQiw, to he in a quite vpposii 
disposition ; whence comes the -word 
antipathy. 

'AvriTTS^afyeiv, to be grateful to our 
parents, to take care of them in their old 
age. It comes from wsXctgyo?, a stork, 
which bird is said to feed its parents, 
when they grow old. 

*Av'TK))iX»jo-»f, £«£, reciprocal love. 

4. Comparison ; as 

AvTippaTTcj, equal, of equal value er 
rveigkt. It comes from poTrv, which 
signifies the turn of the scales. 

'AUO\ properly signifies the place 
from whence one parts, or is distant, 
like a, or ab, or de of the Latins : and 
therefore includes first a negation or 
separation; as 

'A9r6<pDfA.t, nego, I deny, 

'Airayo^ivw, to forbid, to hinder, /» 
refuse, to despond, to fail. 

*A7ra\yio), dedoleo, tristitiam depono, 
to begin to be comforted, to give over 
.grieving.. 

'Aira^ie-Mi, displicet mibi, it is disa- 
greeable to me, 

' AiTi^^ifxai, abeo, to he gone, to die, 
to run away. 

'Anrofjt.ayQa.m, dedisco, to unlearn, 

*A'7ro(aa, parce ac tenuiter vivo, ^o 
live sparingly. 

'ATro^icttriy^i}, to divide, to go from, to 
repulse, to separate. 

' Avvywwa-KK, to disavow, to reject, i» 
repel, to repudiate ; to forbid, to refuse ; 
to absolve, to dismiss, to discharge ; to 
despair, to expect no more good of a 
thing. 

2. It includes a force of augment- 
which often corresponds with the 



' A M*^ , is frequently explained by 
^£\jcircum, or by the old Latin prepo- 
sition am, which has been received even 
in the French language ; it often ex- 
presses doubt or ambiguity, as will ap- 
pear in the following examples^ 

'A/A^tCaXXfltf, amplector, circumplec- 
tor, to embrace, to surround, to enve- 
lop, to clothe, to be dubious. From 
whence comes 

'A[A,^i€o}<os, ambiguous, doubtful, con- 
iroverled ; undetermined, unresolved, 

'A/tA<fi€K)j, amphibious, living some- 
times in the water, and sometimes on 
land. 

'Afx<^ioli(u, to doubt, to hold a thing 
as probable. 

'A/tA^xETrw, to embrace, to warm, to be 
occupied, to prepare, to take care. It 
comes from tiro), operor, to do, to act. 

'A/M.<{>t7r6girsE^<w, circumverto," to turn 
tibout, 

*A/*<j){5^>jTfft), to dispute, to debate, to 
doubt, 

'AfA,<plg-ofA,og, double-mouthed ; deceitful, 
treacherous. 

'ana\ 1. signifies repetition, being 
equivalent to the inseparable re of the 
Latins; as 

'Avct^aXXaj, retard o, to delay. 

'Ava\afxQet,v<i), resumo, to resume. 

2. It expresses height or elevation, 
in the same manner as am, sursum : 
thus avttrlQnfxi, suspendo, to hang up» 

*Av!t0aivM, ascendo, to ascend. 

'AvaBiQa^v, to make ascend, to put on, 

'Avtt|3XE7r(», to look up, or to look 
again. 

'ANTi", implies, 1. oi^position ; as 

'Avrml<», to resist, to hinder, to suc- 
cour. 

'Avriffctiw, to resist, to refuse, to hin- 
der. 

'AvTtXayj^avjjv, to sue one in their turn, 
to appeal from judgment, to have one's 
cause reviewed. 

^Avrihiya, to contradict, to dispute, to 
allege contrary reasons, to reply. 

2. Equality ; as when Homer calls 
Ulysses avriQtov, equal to God, like unto 
God. 

3. Some sort of duty, or return; as 
*AvTj^'J«^{, to make a proper return, 

to change. 



inlrd or inter, or de of the Latins ; as 

^ATro&aitlti, intingo, immergo, to dip, 
to plunge, to wet. 

' Am^ialofxat, to use violence, to repulse, 
to constrain, to lake great care. 

'AttoJeikvuw, demonstro, to demonstrate, 
to prove, to represent, to express, to de- 
clare, to design, to establish. 

AIa\ answers, first to the insepara- 
ble di or dis of the Latins ; as 

Aw»§£<?-{?, diviso, division, 

AJctroXfl, distinctio, distinction. 

A<*Cott«, to divulge, to proclaim. 

Aiaxgrvft;, to discern, to distinguish, to 
separate, 



Of Prepositions. 



Q9r> 



separate t to disperse ^ to examine ^ to judge, 
' tojiniih, in absolve. 

£i.iaKafjt^a.\ai, to take igparately, to 
separate, to distinguish^ to interpose, to 
interrupt, to hinder , to embrace, to as- 
tembley to connect ; to govern : to con' 
ceivCy to examine, to take counsel, to be 
of opinion, to establish. 

^laXkyofxai, to discourse, to confer to- 
gether : from whence comes S^aXoyo?, 
a dialogue ; JiaXfjcroj, a dialect^ or pe- 
culiarity of language i ^taXEXTtx^, dia- 
lectic, the art uf reasoning, or discoursing. 

2. It signifies the same as trans or 
per ; for instance, 

AtfffS*', pervidere, to penetrate, to see 
through. 

A»«0aiy£tv, transire, to pass through, 
to go beyond. 

Ant^aWM, to traverse, to pass or pierce 
through; and Metaphorically, to slan- 
der, to render odious ; to deceive, to ac- 
cuse ; from whence comes haBaXog, 
diabohis, a slanderer, an accuser. 

i^ia^^cofxi, to divulge, to distribute, 
to give, to spread from one to the other, 
to disperse. 

- AiaWeirm, to change, to pass, to dif- 
fer, to make up a difference, to appoint, 
to recojicile. 

Aianovia}, to work, to perfect, to culti- 
vate, to exercise, to apply, to suffer, to 
be in trouble, 

Aictir§B<^ai, to pervert, to invert, to in- 
timidate, to corrupt, to falsify. 

'El's., Att. ej, denotes motion. 

'Eifayofxai, to introduce, to assemble. 

*£<ja<f)tKay(», Jo come, to approach, to 
retire. 

'E<f|?a\X«, to attack, to fall upon, 
to make incursions, to commit hostid/ies. 

'en imports the state and disposition, 
the abode and situation ; habitum and 
situm, says Vergara ; corresponding to 
the Latin in. 

"EvsttXo?, a r mat us, armed. 

"Eyxura-i, incumbit, it threatens us, it 
presses zts, it is near, it is imminent. 

'Efx/xmi, permanent, he persists, he 
continues frm. 

'ES, before a vowel, or ek before a 
consonant. 

'E^ayo^tvv, to declare publicly, to re- 
late, to tell or recite at length. 

'Enf, answers to the Latin super, 
always signifying some addition or in- 
crease. 

'E7FirlQn(M, impono, to impose, to add, 
to put the finishing hand, to conclude. 

'E'TTiSctivu, coascendo, to mount, to go, 
to walk. 

'Ettm^vvos, whatsoever causes an ad^ 



ditional pain or affliction, from sWvn, 
pain. 

Sometimes it diminishes. 

'ETr^Xsvxof, albicans, lehiiisk, drawing 
towards white. 

'E-Trl/xi'Kag, blackish. 

KATa' 1 . augments the signification. 

Ka.ra<t>o^rl^iiv, prasgravare, to weigh; 
heavy, to press downwards. 

2. It gives it a bad sense. 
Kctran^ivBiv, to condemn, from xgtvoj, to 

judge. 

Kara-^ti<^i^ofxai aa, I condemn you, 
from ■\'^<^'i{o(A(ti, to be of opinion, to give 
one^s suffrage. 

Kara^^aofAAi, to abuse, to use too free- 
ly, to give ill treatment, to insult one. It 
comes from ■xj^a.of/.a.i, to use. 

3. It signifies below, yist in the same 
manner as kLtoo, infra. 

Karct^aivuv, to go down, to descend, to 
sit down again, from dnivu, to walk. 

METa", denotes first^a change, cor- 
responding to the Latin trans. 

MsrctfAo^<^6a), to transfornt, to Iransfi- 
gura/e. 

Mera^atvo), to pass further, to make a 
digression. 

Wherefore it frequently changes the 
signification of the simple ; as 

Mzreth'^a.a-nM , dedoceo, to teach one the 
contrary of what he has already learnt ; 
as much as to say, to make one step over 
to a new doctrine. 

M£Tav&<w, to change opinion, to repent, to 
do penance. 

MeTciQahsvofjLcii, to alter one^s design, 
to take a new resolution, to repent. 

2. It signifies a participation or com- 
munication, corresponding to inter, 
among, with. 

MBra'KafA.^avcft, particeps fio, / am 
made partaker ; as much as to say,. / 
take among, or mth the rest. 

Hence the participle is called fxsTox/i, 
because it partakes of the nature of 
the verb. 

nAPA\ corresponds to the Latin 
prceter, but sometimes it augments the 
signification ; as o^fjiaM, to be violent ; 
>sre.popfA,a,aj, to be extremely violent^ to push 
things to extremity. 

Uapo^vvci), to irritate, to provoke. 

Sometimes it destroys or changes it : 
'STApavofA.ia}, to trespass aga'mst the iaii)S ^ 
whence comes To-apavc/^oj, a wicked fel- 
low, a law-breaker. 

irapstTrsTv, to deceive, to seduce, to im- 
pose upon, 

Uapa.'jrfta-^tia, an embassy, or commis' 
sion not rightly discharged, ot not rightly 
undertaken: 



to he 



Q9S BooK.VI» O/* Indeclinable Particles 

Tlttpa^poveiv, to lose one^s senses^ to ravct ngoja<|)aig£ur9a(, to take away still 

ta be mad. 

Sometimes it marks proximity or 
resemblance, corresponding to the La- 
tin ad ; 'ma,^s^ofA,cii, assideo, / sil next, 

Uafiis-Bv, to be equal, to resemble. 

nEPl\ corresponds, 1 . to circum : 'BS's- 
gj<}>lg£{«, circumferentia, circumference, 

ITe^f^aXXEiv, circumdare, to surround,* 

TlB^iir^ctT07rshv£iv, to lay siege to, to 
ilock up,, 

2. It answers to per, and augments 
the signification : 'zzrEfi<f>§a^c<;, to use a 
circumlocution ; whence comes <{)S^K|>g«- 
S'^5, Horn, peritus, learned. 

Tli^t^a^fi?, pergaudens, very glad, 

Ui^iXvirog, very sad, or afflicted. 

Us^iyivirai Wvtiwv, he surpasses, or is 
above all the world. 

nPO\ has almost the same force as 
the Latin prce, or pro : lu^oa.i^^y.ai, proe- 
fero-; to prefer ; rsr^o^v^ov, the porch. 

n^oKeyo), praedico, to foretell. 

'n^otg'afA,ai, to put before, to prefer, to 
establish and ordain over others, to pro- 
stitute, 

U^'Ka.y.^ava), to preoccupy ^ to prevent. 

Sometimes it is reduplicated : 'nrgo- 
Wf«XttTa/>'S'»}v, one who throws himself 
forward (antrorsum) with violence, 
jApoll. 'srfoTgoxvXjvS'o'lU.evo?, one itfho, 
throws himself at another'' s feet in a sup- 
pliant posture. 

riPO^S, corresponds to the Latin ad, 
or insuper, and generally augments the 
signification, denoting force, repetition, 
or a particular assiduity : iw^oqct-ym , ad- 
duco, to lead, to bring, to approach, to offer, 

TI^osrtQnfxi, to prop9se, to add, to com- 
pare, to put over. 

Jlfogridsfxai, the same ; and, also, 
to follow the advice of somebody, to fa- 
vour him, to give him your vote, to be 
attached to him. 

Tl^TTaa-^iiv, in S. Dionys, to be at- 
tacked to any thing, or to place one^s 
heart and affection in it. 



ngoja<|)aig£ur9a(, 
more, 

U^ogeyyvcia-Qiti, to answer for, 
bound for. 

Sometimes it diminishes the signifi- 
cation : 'BT^oqa.Trioy.ai, leviter attingo, to 
touch slightly. 

'TIIE'p, ^?/j5er, denotes, 1. excess and 
addition. 

'TTregjaeTgo?, unreasonable beyond mea- 
sure. 

'Y7r£gT<9))/t*{, to put on, to put before, 
to put over or to prefer, to prolong, 

'TTrB^Baivoo, to exceed, to pass be- 
yond. 

'TTTB^aKOVTi^a), to dart further ; IvB^- 
hivog, very crnss or troublesome. 

2. Excellency : vTrz^sx"* '^ excel, 
'tifi^iv, exceeding welU 
Likewise advantage or perfection : 

vTri^f/.a^oq, revenger, defender. 

''T'rrz^a.a-Tnq-nq, protector. 

'TTTiprB^og, superior, more ancient, more 
excellent, greater, preferable. 

"TTrarog, by syncope for vm^rarog, su- 
preme, sovereign. It is generally taken 
for a consul, or first magistrate. 

But sometimes lirl^ signifies depth, 
just as altus in Latin. 

3. It marks relation, in the same 
manner as pro or vice : vTrt^fA-axpfActif 
pugno pro, toffght for. 

T0\ sub, una 
pose, to establish a principle, to give a 
pledge. 

'TwoKsirai, subjacet, is under. 

'fira-AHMy subaudio, ausculto, obe- 
dlo, to hear with submission, to obey, to 
be ready. 

Oftentimes it diminishes, just as sui 
in Latin : vTta^yv^oq, snbargenteus, draw- 
ing towards silver, that partakes of the 
nature of silv&r. 

'YttoS-u^xoXc?, sometvhat difficult, of 
a temper somewhat] troublesome. 

'TTto'xXM^bq, subpallidus, somewhat 
pale, or palish. 



ANNOTATION. 

This list might have^ been carried on to a greater length ; hut as I 
2Jercei'oed that this 'would lead one too far, and in some measure exceed 
the limits of a Grammar, 'where it sujfices to lay doxmi the general 
rules of each article, and to illttstrate them tvith a feiv examples : I 
have therefore reserved the remainder for another ivork, vohich may 
soonfollmxi this, should the Public reap from it the benefit I intendeds 
I shall endeavour also to give in our mother tongue a specimOi of the 
copiousness of the Greek, hi the. different explications of its choicest 
ivords, by a continual concatenation ofetymologm. 



Of Prepositions. Q97 

Of the change of those prepositions in compounds. 

Prepositions are frequently subject to some change or alteration 
in composition : which happens in two different ways. 

1. They lose their vowel, when the verb commences with a 
vowel : and if this vowel of the verb is marked with a rough breath- 
ing, the T and the tr of the preposition are changed into their 
aspirates d, and <p ; as o(,(paci^siJiOii, to take axvaj/, or to be taken axviT/, 
from a-jro and at^sfxixi, to take ; which has been already explained, 
Book I. Chap. xi. of Apostroph. 

We must except cte^/ and -cr^o, which retain their vowel ; zjz^ti- 
yut to contain, to surround; tsy^oaya;, to produce f to advance. 

But wfo, when it is followed by an e or an o, makes a contraction 
in », according to the Attics ; as zj^os^cj, 'crfa%i<;, to he before handj 
or to have the upper hand; 'zij^o^i^Wf imperf. -crgoEfpegoy, 'CJ^i(p^oVf 
proferebaraj I produced , I exposed, &c. 

'A^^/ also retains sometimes the ; : cciJi.(pilvyviAt, circuminduo, I 
clothe of all sides. 

2. 'Ey and crvv change v into ^ before /3, <»•,<?', 4' ; h i^^o 7 before 
>«? 7) x> ^^^^ ^ before A ; and o-uv changes it into o- or ^ before 
another a- or ^ , or sometimes drops it intirely before o" or ^ ; as 

"EfA.^ios, alive. ^ufA^Biooa-iSy conversation. 

'EfxTriTflo), tofallinto. Ivix-irlirla}^ to meet together. 

^EfA.<pi^oixa.i, to be carried into. IvfX'^i^ofxai, to be carried together. 

"E/n^vxog, living, animated. ivfx-^vxoi;, unanimous, of the same mind. 

'EfAfxivoo, to persist. Iv^fAvca, to stay together. 

^Eyxa^vTrlM, to cover, IvyKahvTrla}^ to cover. 

'Ey^ifxa^ao, to winter. IvyyufAoclax^ to winter together. 

'Eyy^a^co, to inscribe. 1vyy^a.<^(D, to zvrite together. 

'EWafA.troi, to illurriinale. 2vX\a,jU(.-^lco, to illuminate together. 

IvTo-v^a, to tear, to drag. lu^ririM, to discuss, to examine. 
2vg-sKKa}, contraho, to bind vp, to tie JvppATflco^o sow together, to mend, to 
fast, to fold one into another. ' patch, 

'Avoi, ycxrcc, and ^a^a, lose also their final a among the Poets 
and elsewhere, even before a consonant, and are upon that account 
liable to changes in their preceding consonant, that have some 
relation to those above mentioned : but the t of nxr^ foi' ytotrxf 
when it precedes (p or ;^, must be changed into their smooth corre- 
spondents 9r or X ; when it precedes /3, 7, I, or tt, as also the liquids 
^^5 /^> V, ^, it must be changed into the same letters, as will appear 
by the following examples. 

*Ava, avakvoj, aKKvci), for a,v\va, to ^AfX0oXiz^yos, Hesych. for avai?oXie^- 

resolve, to dissolve, to undo; whence yo?, cunctator,^ one that delays ^ or puts 

comes aWvatra for avaXutffl-a, dissolve off, 

ing ; ecXXvBa-nov, Ion, for dviXvov, Od. a, 'Avacr^u, a.va.(7')(io, suffer, 

V. 150. I dissolved, 'AvaHoKiaj, dytcitXsa), to recall. 

*Avaravva), avTetvvco, to dart upwards. This change- is made also in nouns ; 

'AviXeyov, aKXtyov, to make a collection, for though «va governs its case, never- 

to choose, theless it is frequently joined in one 

'Ava^aivm, afx^etlvm, mounting. . word ; dm 'srsS'tov, dfXTri^m, across the 

'Ava$aXK<ifA,sQa, «,w^«AA(W|(as9«, lei us field; ma. ^ovcmag, dviovanaf, anung the 

defer^ Of prolong, reeds ; dva, ^oofjtoXq, »fA,0a){A,ois ^ upon the 

. ' " altars i 



298 Book VI. QT Indeclinable Particles. 

altars; dva. y-sya, ujxfxiyst, very hig ; KaTtt^jfaj, Hctfi/jti^aj, cotnmiscens 

eiva <pmv, dy,<p6vov, amidst the massacre ; having mingled. 

K/u.Tfi'Ka.yo; for ava, 'sriXayo^, by sea, Karamiovng, 'AatfitiiovrBSf tying doxan 

Likewise, dvafxiy^rsv^ a.iAfxiy'^nVf COn' to sleep* 

fusedly ; dyaTin^oq^^ afA,7rn^osj lame, maim- YLaray,va>, ncifxixvWf to shut, to sink rtilh 

ed, &c. too much weight, to lean, or bow. down. 

KATA\ Kara^vha-nw, XAT&v^is-jta;, to With nouns : Kara Ko^v^hv, xaxxo^u- 

iliei usiriQAVB, xarflavg, he is dead, <})«v, ex vertice, /ro>ra the top ; itara wg- 

KarsQaXs, >ia'€€aX£, he has overthrown. Ji'ov, xa-TTTrES'/ov, from the field, 

KaraXsiTTBiv, naXKetireiv, to leave, to Kara fxecrov, KAfAfAa-ov, from the middle* 

abandon. Kara, <^aKa^a, >ta7r<f)«'Xrtga, per phale- 

KarsTrsa-E, HATtirta-z. to fall. ras, across the harness, 

Kara^i^ea-a, napft^ea-af fia.ttering, ca- VLara poov, xafpoov, along with the 

ressing with the hand, II. e. stream. 

KaTaTrv^ia-ac-a, iia7r7rv^i(ras-ci, Thcoc. Kara Xa7raf«v, KaX'Ka'Trci^ijv, per ilia, 

conceived in the fire. through the flanks, &c. 

YLara^umii xaS'Juvaf, to plunge in the nAPA\ fsra^cL^if^tnt;, 'Brci^bifjt.ivig, 

renter, comparing ; 'srapriQsT, 'ora^ariBsi, he com- 

Kctraff-)jja-Oe, xaff-p^EsrSe, retain, II. X. pares. 

Karct)(fva-a.i, KaK)(eva-ai, to pour out. TLa^ay.ivuv, isra^fxiveov, waiting, as- 

Karanva-as, navvsva-as , having made a s'tsting, whence comes Purmeno, in 

sign, Terence. 

The compounds of a verb beginning with a ^, and of a prepo* 

sition ending with a vowel, repeat the f in the middle, as lm}psM, to 
Jlo'vdU'pon, See ^u, Book V. Chap. viii. 



CHAP. III. 
Of Conjunctions or Connexions, (Tw3e<r(jt.ou 

V^'ONJUNCTIONS are either significative or expletive. 

The significative are 

Conjunctives, auiJ-'TrT^stcnKoi : axl, and ts, que, &c. 

Disjunctives, hx^svKliKol : v,, aut, and its compounds rirot, -nynv, 
she. 

Concessives, ootroQsviy.o) : xav, Kxiir^^ etsi, although, 

Adversatives, hoivrtufxxriy.o] -, Vs, vero, buty which answers to 
^hi quidem, indeed ; kwa., sed, hut ; o/xs;?, taraen, nevertheless, 

Causatives, txiTioXoytaoi : ya,^, enim, for ; I^a, ut, that ; ovcoq, 
quo, that; slW?^ and Iveif siquidem, since; whence comes e-tte/^^, 
Ivei^'n'rrs^f siquidem, quandoquidem, luhereas, 

Conclusives, crvXXoyiracoi: a^a, Svf igitur, ergo, therefore ; ^iotfe^, 
quapropter, ivherefore ; likev/ise rot'wvf roiyol^roif ro/yafSv, igitur, 
therefore. 

Conditionals, s],oiv,si; whence- comes lacv, and by contraction 
5)v, and such like. 

The Expletive, Tr^'n^uixariKoi, are those which signify nothing in 
particular, but serve only to embellish and fill up the sentence ; as 
•cif^, TO/, and among the poets px, ^m, &c. See Book IX. Chapter 
of the Enclitics. 



The 



The^ Second Part q/ f to Book. 

JL HIS Second Fart shozcs the sei^eral methods^ used by the 
Greeks in tlie composition and derivation of thei?' nouns, one 
great source of the copiousness of their language. And this being 
joined to zchat we have said relating to the derivation of verbs in 
the preceding book, Chap. I. and II. will be of very great seV" 
vice to those ztdho have a mind to learri several words derived from 
the same root. But as this supposes some previous knowledge 
of the liooTs, without which the advant<iges that might be de- 
rived from this treatise, as well as from other methods founded 
thereon, would be very inconsiderable ; we shall publish very 
soon, God zdlling, A nezv and easy Method of learning and 
retaining the Greek Roots,^ adapted to tender capacities, and 
of more use than one zoould imagine^ 



CHAP, IV. 

Of Derivative Nouns: And first of those that are de- 
rived from other Nouns, 

i 1 GUNS are derived from all parts of speecli, except conjunc- 
tions. Hence it was improper to speak of their derivation before 
we had treated of all the parts of speech in particular. Thus from 
m^v<7t, anno super iori, comes 'cje^vcrmz) ivJiat is of the last year : from 
x9e<;> heri, yesterday, comes ;s^S£«r/vor, hesternus, ijohat is of yesterday : 
from vTTEf, super, upon, comes vVaro?, consul, a first magistrate; 
and such others. 

But the most common derivation is made from nouns and verbs. 

From nouns, there are six different sorts of derivatives. 1. Pa- 
tronymics. 2. Gentiles. 3. Possessives. 4. Diminutives. 5. Aug- 
mentatives. 6. Those that are particularly called Denominatives. 

I. Patronymics. 

Nouns of parentage or family, which the Greeks call patrony- 
mics, are those, which being taken for the name of the father or 
grandfather, are given afterwards to all his descendants. They, are 
of two sorts, masculine and feminine. 

The Masculines are terminated in AH2, and come from geni- 
tives in a and in o?. 

When the genitive in a comes from a noun in o? impure, the 
patronymic is in i^,:?; as tS K^ova, Saturni, of Saturn; o K^ovlh;, 
Saturnius, Jjelonging to Saturn. When it comes from o? pure, or 
from a noun in «$ or in '4?, the patronymic is in a^*j? ; as tS AJvs/a, 

* This work was translated some years ago, and printed for J. Nourse (now 
for Wingrave and Collingwood) in the Strand, . 

JEnece) 



300 ,BooK VI. 

JEnecc ; o A/v£ctS>??, JEneades : tS ^Ivnors, Hippotce ; o 'l'n"»'oT«Si5f, 
Hippotades : tS Aaif t», Laertes ; o Axz^nAsy Laertiades, by rn- 
serting ;. 

From the genitive in os comes i^y)s; as rris Av)roos, Latona ; o A>3- 
r<j»^>??, Latonius : ra 'A/x^/t^i/wvo?, Amphyirionis ^ o 'A/A(?)<Tfy(yy*§)j?, 
and inserting a, *A/!>t^/T^y6;vtaW. 

But the Ionics change i5»jj into twv ; as o K§oyt§»9?> o K§oy/«y, Satur- 
niiis, belonging to Saturn, 

The feminines are in as-, /?, wi. 

A? and /J come fromthe mascuhnes in W, casting away ^*j; as 
'HX/a^>75> 5072 to Sul; i5 *HA<af, daughter to Sol: o npix(Ai^yi<;, son of 
Priam ; v ITf /a:/x/?, daughter to Priam, 

Feminines in yv? come generally from ii genitive in e; t5 'nxtavS, 
Oceani j ■» 'ClKzxnvri^ the daughter of the Ocean. And if « happens 
to be pure, then an u is inserted, as tS 'Axf;cr/a, 17 ' AK^ia-iuvr], 
daughter of Acrisius. But wv^? comes sometimes from wy ; as 'He- 
Tiwv, 19 'H£T/<yy>7, ^/ie daughter ofEtion. 

Of all these nouns, those in uv are of the imparisyllabic declen- 
sion, and the rest of the parisyllabic. 

II. Gentiles, 

The national or gentile nouns of the MAscuitiNE gender are 
commonly terminated in 

T»?? : as from vt S-Traf t>?, Sparta / Z^raf T/ar>jf, a Spartan : v 
"HfTBi^os, JEpirus ; 'Httej^ wr*??, an Epirote, 

a?©? : as from «< 'A0^va<, Athens; o 'AS^vacios^, a» Athenian: v 
'Pw/A*}, Rome J 'PcoixaToSi a Roman, 

toq : as from v Bx<^v\wv, Babylon ; I BxQvXwvios, a Babylonian : to 
By^ayr/oy, Byzantium ; By^iyr/o?, a Byzantine, 

evq : as from i5 'A^£|av^^/i«, Alexandria ; 'AXEfav^fsy?, rtw ^/^jc- 
andrian : to S«v<oy, a promontory near to Athens j l^evitvsi one tvho . 
lives near that promontory. 

There are likewise some foreign terminations, adopted by the 
Greeks; as 

7vo<; : TO ''Priyiov, Reggio, a toivn in Italy ; 'Vytymq, one of Reggie, 

%))ls : as 19 Nlari<^is, Nisibis, a city on the River Tigris ; N/o-^^^jyo?, 
a citizen ofNisibis : -» 'ExQ^rxvcc^ Ecbatana, a city of Media j 'Ex- 
QacrxvYivoi;, an inhabitant of Ecbatana, 

Some have a double termination ; as yt 'Ai^xcr^lxt a town of 
Pontus : 'AiJLoccivqj and ' Ay^xazur'ns i v Ari^^os, the isle of Delos ; 
A'nXioSf and A>)XtT>3j. 

The Feminines are frequently terminated in <roc ; as ^ Kf^o-o-a, 
a woman of Crete, from Kf>5T>9, the isle of Crete or Candia in the Me- 
diterranean sea. See Book II. Chap. ix. 

They often conform to the common rule of adjectives; as 
o 'A^nvxioq, an Athenian, ^ 'Ahwlx, an Athenian 'wow.an; and se- 
'verai others. 

Sometimes they are formed after the manner of patronymics; as 
o 2iynv<;f n 'S.iytiaq, a male or female iyihabitant of the tovon of Sigeum : 
o"lrx\osf an Italian, v"lraXi(;, an Italian woman. 

Some are formed without arjy sort of analogy; as T^w?, « 
Trojan, or TroSj the founder of Troy : ^ 'oh^(7s7s, a city ofMcesia, 

or 



Nouns derived from other Nouns, 301 

or oflberlai or the citizens of the same place. Where we see there 
is no change of gender, which is changed nevertheless in others ; 
as al n<x(To-x^yci^at, a totvn of Persia ; ot n^o-o-af ya5«/, the inhabit 
tants of that country, 

III. Possessives. 

Possessives are derived both from proper, and from appellative 
nouns ; and sometimes they end in EOS or in 102. 

eoq : as "Ejct*;^, Hector ; o 'Exto^ co?, Hectoreus, relating to Hector, 

ios : as 'sjxry)^^ father ; o ijoir^uios, paternal ; instead of which 
we oftener saj' 'ziracT^uos in prose. 

But they are more generally terminated in Eio<;y or xor. 

s;o? : as 'A;)^A^£y?, Achilles ; o 'Ax''^A£/o?, Achilleus, belonging 
to Achilles. 

Koq ; i5 AtjAo?, Delos, an isle in the Archipelago ; l AviXiccKo^f De- 
liacus, belonging to that isle. 

Some have both terminations ; as o ^xcriKzix;, a Icing ; o ^acri^iioq^ 
and i3ao-A;xo?, regius awe? regalis, royal: o y.x) ri avQ^wnos, a man ; 
uvBowirsioq and av^w^rixof, human ; instead of which we likewise 
say V.OU y) a.yQ^uinn'ii o kou i5 av^fWTrwS"*}?. 



IV. Diminutives. 

Diminutives are by the Greeks called vfroyco^irmxi from vTrQuo^i- 
^EffOai, blandiri, to flatter, to caress, by reason of the softness ge- 
nerally inherent to this sort of nouns. 

Some have fewer syllables than their primitives ; such as those 
terminated in 

IS : thus VI "A/a^/?, Amphis, a proper name, from 'Aia^ix^xo?, Am* 
phiareus; o ar^iq,taxillus, a small die, from ar^ayaAo?, talus, a die. 

a| : as ^ft;/>t.a|, a little biiffbon, from l2u(ji,ox6x°^, a buffoon. 

y| : as i? crirn^vy^, a little cave^ from to critriXonQiy spelunca, a cave 
or cavern. 

u : as o5 xB^'^ujy vulpecula, from vi xe^^aAJT, vulpes, ajbx. 

Some have an equal number of syllables with their primitives: 
as in 

is\ vi ^s^xTTxivk, ancillula, from ^ ^s^dvranvix, ancilla, a servant 
maid : Kevins, fonticulus, from y.qw-n, fons, a fountain, 

a^ : xl9x^, a pebble, from o ?<.i9og, a stone. 

/7I : i5 (pva-iy^j vesicida, from vt (pva-x, vesica, a bladder. 

Some have more syllables than their primitives ; of which some 
are 

Masculines terminated in 

05 : vxvriXost from vavry)<;, a mariner, 
- iarKo<;: ocvQ^uvia-nos, homuncio, a little man, from avQ^uTfoq, 
homo. 

iyo(; : oW/;^o?, quantulus, ho'vo small, from oa-oi;, poet. Icraoq, 
quantus ; 'zjvppiy^^oi;, reddish, a little red, from 'sjvppoi;, red. 

iX,vos : xvKl^voj;, caliculus, a small cup, from xvA/l, calix. 

»Xi$, or vXT^is: V ar^xKTvxUi ov -v?,xis, a sort of thorn, from ar^ajc- 
roc, a distaffs because the ancients were used to make it of those 
thorns. 

uXo? : 



502 Book VI. 

vXoq : ixiiaciiKos, small^ diminutive, from the Doric noun o /x/^jco^, 
for |u/>c^of, parvus, little, 

^£y? : i^uri^zvq, a little Cupid, from o e'^w?, Cupid, or love. 

ta/K : ixoj^im, a little Jvol, from o /aw^o?, a fool. 

m\ vXa^o(i, a bough, or branch; xKot^m, a small bough, or 
branch. 

Feminines ending in 

iXKx : Yi Kcx.hi'Kkdt, Isenula, a small coat, from ^ Kaltvx, a sort ofcoat^ 
ov govon. 

la-KVi'. ^ ^zi^xKlcryt-n, a young girl, and in the masculine o lAzt^xyilanoq, 
a young lad, from o y.oc\ ^ i^^k^^> ^ youth, a bby, or girl : ijxiyta-m, 
ayoung girly from zsouq, a boy, or girl. ' 

i%v'/3 : yt zsoXi'xvyiy a stnall town, from i5 wo^/?, « totvn, or cffy. 

«>£v*j : ij OT^Qaxv*), a little barrel, from o ^siOoq, a barrel. 

otKls, or aXX<? : i5 (pyor«A<V, « ^mrt^Z bladder, from i5 <|>yW, a i^flc/- 

t'XK : or vXki^ : i? avn^^ffXK, a little rival, from o avTE^as"^?; fit 

Neuters terminated in 

toy, which have an acute sometimes on the penultima, and some- 
times on the antepenultima ; as to /3/Cawv, a little book, from o5 ^iQKo<;, 
a booh: ro vo'/^/ov, a lotv, or poor genius, from o v5j, mens. Likewise 
TXvx.v)^iov, Glycerium, from yXvKvq, dulcis, sweet. 

But sometimes / is only the subjunctive of a diphthong beforq 
oy\ as TO yvvxiov, muliercula, a little woma?2, from yvr/], a woman. 

Several in lov have the increase of two syllables^^ as to M^da-m, 
a little girl, from ko^v, a girl : to 'zsar^t^m, a little father, from 
ts^rv)^, a father : to ^iQhvlfiov, a little booh, from o5 ^i'^Mq, a booh / 
and many others. 

It frequently happens, that different sorts of diminutives are 
formed from the same noun ; as from Ko^n, a girl, comes ^ M^ldm, to 
no^m, TO Ko^oiam, ro Ko^ia-Kiov, and to Ko^t^m ; and in like manner the 
rest. 

Of this we find examples also in Latin; as from cista, a box, 
comes cistida. Mart, cistella^ Ter. and cistellula, Plaut. 

ANNOTATION. 

We also meet Wtth diminutives of proper names ; which, as they rliminish the 
signification, so they frequently diminish the number of syllables. We may re- 
duce them to their different terminations j as 

aq : 7,vvag, Zenas, frorw o T^nvo^x^oq, Zenodorus : o Koa-y.a.s, Cosmus, from o 
aia-fxioqj modest: o ©euJS?, Theicdas, from o ©eoJoVjo?, Theodosius, by changing eo into 
tv, Ion. and ov into ev, Dor. o Oofxag, Thomas, from 6 ^avfAaa-ios, admirable. 

a^ : 6 'PoJa^, a little Rhodian, from o'Po^iog, a Rhodian. 

I? : h "i<pig, from h 'i<piava,c-<ra,, according to the etymolog. 

vs : Aiovug, according to Eustath. from Awvtia-jo?, Dionysius, belonging to 
Bacchus. 

o : na] h :Eei'rr<pM, Sappho, from h 2a7r<j)Stga, Sapphira. 

Others have an equal number of syllables wit^ their primitives; as some 
in ^ 

vWog : e^aa-vWog, Thrasyllus, from o Q^aa-m\r,s, Tkrasicles. 

And others exceed the number of their primitives ; as some masculines in 

iXcs: 7,0)1X0$, Zoilus, from o l^ouog, living: o Xoi^tXos, Chcerilus^ from p^of^u^, 
a hog. And if the ^ happeiis to be redoubled, the accent is drawn back 5 as 
MiyfA^dj, Megillus, from (Myst,?, magnus, great, 

tVof 



Nouns tier wed from other Nouns, 303 

Ivc,' : *tXiyoj, P?iilinus, from o t^ixog, a friend :. o Xct fvogj Charinus, from h XH^'f 
r, ^d^ig grace, or favour, 

i^og: ' AfAxivrt'xpq, Amynticus, from o 'AfxvvfttSf Amynlas* 

iwvi 6 'H<paig-im, Hephaistion, from o "H<{)atre?, Vulcan : o 'A6t<»v, ^tion, from 
oCToi,', an eagle. 

t/Xo? : x^£fjt,vKos, CkremyluSf from o X^sfJing, Chremes : o 2t/*uXo?, Simylus, from 
e^i/uof, camus. 

Some feminines in 

<XXa : n ITfa^iXXa, Praxilla, from & 'sr^ci^ig, practice^. action. 

vKKa : h YLrns-v'K'KcL, Ciesylla, from « urna-iq, acquisition. 

ma. : V'H^wa, Erinna, from to?§, ver, <Ae spring, 

i^y) : Ji M>)T<;^>j, Metica, from (Mnq^ prudefice, counsel. 

u ; ri 'Ava^w, Anaxo, from o «v*^, a Aing: .• « 06*v<w, Theano, from ^ S'sa, dea, 
a goddess, 

vWig : ^ 'A/uagyXXi?, Amaryllis, from ^ a,(jt.u^A, a diich, or channel. 

And finally some neuters in 

iS'w : TO Hay6<^wv, Xanthidiuin, from o SavSw?, Xanthias, a slave, so called, be- 
cause of his red hair. 

This is all that grammarians observe in particular concerning diminutives ; 
though we must take notice, that the diminutive termination is not always a 
mark of diminution ; as from o j^gus-o?, pj^gua-jov, gold : from ^^yv^og, a^yv^ioVf 
silver : from W/uvn, 'orolfjtmv, a flock : from teI^^oj, -rstp^iov, a wall, 

V. Augmentatwes, 

As the diminutives generally denote something soft and agree- 
able, so the augmentatives generally import something contempti- 
ble in the person. Insomuch, that as the Latins called labrones, 
those that had great lips ; silones, those that had large eyebrows : 
in like manner the Greeks called them yil^moigj from x'^'^^^'^^ *''^' 
the lip s ^Xe<poi^uvx<;,irom ^Xs(px^ov, the e7/elid. 

Likewise from yvoiOog, the jaw, yvcx,9cov, a great eater, 07ie that has 
a large jatv : ^^xa-vs, bold, rash ; ^^<x,creov, a swaggerer, a bully : 'sshx' 
TV?, broad ; Wko^tuv, Plato, so called by reason of his broad shoul- 
ders : -CTXaro?, riches : uxiruv, the god of hell, and of riches* All 
these nouns are declined in mog. 

But we find others in a|, that augment the signification, and 
mark at the same time a sort of contempt ; as -ztXSto?, riches ; -t^Xs- 
Ta|, a richfellom : veo?, young ; viaf, one that acts the young fellow, 
that endeavours to conceal his age : toA, a stoic, of a particular 
sect of philosophers ; ruot^^ one that acts the stoic : XoiC^og, a great 
eater; XaCfa|, a sea wolf, from its voraciousness. 

Sometimes those of this termination are diminutives ; as vocxaog, 
a chicken ; voaau^, a little chicken. See above. 

VI. Denominathes, 

Denominatives admit of various terminations, of which the follow- 
ing are the principal. 

For the masculines, 

H2: oolxlrvis, verna, a bond sldve, from q olxog;! a house; o ^vjpi.orvjg, 
a plebeian, from o S^joio?, the people. 

OZ: <7'7T8^ixTo(;i studious, careful, from o5 <79ra^^, care, applica- 
tion, 

's^MvroTog, of every form, or fashion, from to -jyav; all. 
• ' K^av/05, heavenly, from o y^xvog, heaven, 

Ifnftwxij helonging to a horse^ from c IWo^:. 

■ n - - 



304 - Book VL 

o rufjivKos, a ^eat talher, from to toi/^x^ the mouth ; where we find 
also an u for an o. 

Koi^vifxaqfjertile, from o y-oc^nroq^Jruit, 

aXo90/vo?, true, from o xa/ i5 a^»)0*??, /rw^. 

avBiri^s><;,Jiorid, from ro ^'v5o?, aflo'voer, 

OT'2102 : litZa-tos, voluntary/, from o l)cwv, mlling, 

iTFitio-toi;, daily coming, never Jailing, from * iirih, which is to 
come, ' 

EI2 : x^^Uiq, pleasant, agreeable, from ii x^Cg;?, grace or 
favour, 

o a,(x.xdosi(;, sandy, from i5 oijxoiQoi;, sand, 

n'N: oif^'TrsXojv, vinea, a xiineyard, from o5 a/ATrsXo?, a vine tree* 
Likewise o la.(pvuv, a place planted with laurel trees, from 5c6(^v*9, a 
laurel tree ; o Ixxtuv, a place plajited with olive trees, from -n iKaiTx, 
an olive tree ; o oUuv, a wine cellar, from o olvoi;\ wine. 

n'AHS T axi vt >^i9ath<;, stony, or made of stones, from x/do^, a 
stone; o xxT '^ t<x,^ct.yja^my turbulent, violent, from o5 rx^xy^, a 
iumult. 

AN, in some few ; as o IV^?, a companion ; o Irxv, from whence 
gomes the vocat. &J rav, 6 amice, O my friend : o fA.£yiTo(;, very big, 
Z (j.sytrxv, whence comes megisfanes in Latin, the great, the power- 
ful. 

There are some that take various terminations ; as from n ^iax9os, 
sand, comes o kxI-^ 0,1^x9 u^vii; and uiJi.x96Big, sandy. 

For the Feminines, 

THS : V KXKorvjq, malice, iniquity, from o nx^tU, wicked, malicious f 
4 rxx,vrv}g, swiftness, readiness, from o rxy(v<;, swift, quick, 

EI A : 'o5 zva-i'^zix, piety, from o kx\ vi tv<TtQyt<;, pious: n ha-ironlx, lord- 
thip, sovereignty, from o ^eo-ttoth?, lord, master, 

lA : 4 tlrv/ix, felicity, good luck, from o xa/ ij cyry;^^?, happy. 

Hereto we may refer those in oix from adjectives in »?; as 
4 £^o;«, benevolence, good-will, from o syvaf, well-affected : o5 ^ixppotx, 
a looseness, from ^(dppsq, taken from ^lappeu, to flow, to run, 

t'nh: 'n^iKxioavv'/i, justice, from ymxiog, just : vi cru'^^uaiivn, tempe- 
rance, wisdom, modesty, from o <ru<p^uv, temperate, wise, modest. 

To these we may likewise add the feminines in ns, r^is, and r^ix, 
derived from the mascuh'nes in r>j?, which have been already men- 
tioned, Book IL Chap. ix. 



B 



CHAP. V. 

Of Deiivatwes from Verbs, 



lESIDES the participles, there is a great number of nouns 
derived from verbs, whether adjectives or substantives, which in ge- 
neral are called Verbals, of which some follow the active significa- 
tion, and others the passive. 

These nouns are always formed from a singular person, reject- 
ing the augment, if there happen to be any, and changing the 

termi- 



Nouns derived from Verbs, 505 

termination ; and they are formed in the active, passive, and micldle 
voice. 

I. From the active. 

The active is formed from the present, and from the second 
aorist, and sometimes from the perfect, and the first aorist. 

From the present come the feminines in H or in EI A, of the 
parisyllabic declension, which generally denote some action or 
power; as -n vUvi, vis, victory ^ from wxaw, to overcome; n X-nQyi, 
chlroiouy from A^fi^;, to be hid; ^5 ^(xa-iT^slx, reign, regal pcwer, from 
^xcrtTisvu, to reign ; ^nT^sU, servitjide, from ^nT^svu, servio, to serve, 
to be a slave. 

To these we may join the feminine imparisyllabics in 12, and 
the neuters in OX, which are also derived from a jpresent middle; 
as n Ivm^jLts, sus, poijoer, from ^vvxij.xi, to be able; to cT^o?, <oj, Jbrm, 
appearance, from ti'^oj, to see ; yUos, so^, race, kind, from y/vo/^a/, 
gignor, to be born, to be produced. 

And the adjectives in h2 : o Kxt i5 cwtx'nS) so^i continual^ from 
trvvs^u, contineo, connetJ^, to join and put together. 

From the second aorist are derived the parisyllabic fenpi- 
nines in H or in EA ; as Xayj/it lot, from \ot.y/iY, to obtain by lot ; 
4t Wist, form, idea, from 'il^iy, to see. And the imparisyllabic neuters 
in OS : TO xsa^osy passion, from tsx^uv, to suffer ; to "hccyos, £o?, lot, 
from the aorist "kx-^th, io acquire by lot. 

And the adjectives in HS; as o xa? o5 I^X/9r^?, xai to lx^^7r|?, 
destitute^ abandoned^ from IWinxziv, to fail. 

From the perfect we may remark ^ihx'/}ty doctrine, science, 
iyis^ruction, from h^oia-nc^, Iw, hyi^xx<x, to teach; ru^o^x^y trouble^ 
disturbance, from rx§oicra-u, ^u, nra^ocya,, to trouble ; acpyn contact, 
from Mm, -^u, v>^x, to touch, instead of which is rather used 

From the first aorist, 5o|a, glory, opinion, from Ww, |<v, 
I'^ofa, to believe, to think, to seem ; ^-/iK-n, theca, a case, from s^ijxa, 
the 1st aorist of t*0i5/x/, to put, 

II. From the Passive. 

The passive forms them from the first, second, and third personss 
singular of the preterperfect. 

From the first person they are formed in MA, MH, M02, 
and MHN ; so that ft continues always to be the characteristic. 

Those in MA are neuters and imparisyllabics : to -crgayjua, ccrcsy 
action, things business, negotium, from CTsw^ay/Aa*, / have done ; 
to (pda-fAd, vision, from 'C7i(pxa^oii, Att, for iss<Pa.^yLxi, I -have ap-> 
feared ; to sT/Aa, a garment, from t%ixon, taken from g'w, to cloath^ 
where it retains the augment ; to Koi9a^{A.x, purgation, from not^al^c^, 
to cleansCf to purge. 

Those in MH are parisyllabic feminines ; vi oaiA.-n, 55?, odour, 
smell, from o^u, to smell: « //-v^V"* memory, from ^j^<*', /;*?/:*»>?;*«/, 
to remind. Likewise (p-hfA"^, fama, fame, report ; yvw/x»j, sentence, 
^QLvyuti, an opening, of the earth ; Tiyi^'h, a point ; y^aix^Av, a line ; 
TiiA.Yi, honour: from (pvy^t, or ^uu, to say ^^ yvoo', to Janow ; ^I'^UoJi 

R R te 



306 ' Book VI. 

to gapCf to open ; ri^cCf to prick, to point ; yf af w, to imtC; rla^ itf 
honour. 

Those in M02 are masculine : 

xJ/acA/Ao?, 5, psalm f canticle^ from •^uk'kijf E"4/aX/w,a;, to sing ; o 
r^ //^/xo?, a path ; -ct^X/^ao?, tremblings trepidation^ palpitation ; fxoXvcr' 
fj^osi pollution; from r^lQu, tero, to tvear, to break, r£T^i(ji.[jt.ati ; 
cD-aAAw, to dartf to shake, t3-£9r«Ajua; ; ftoAvvw, to spoil, to-potlute, iaw 

Those in MflN are either adjectives, or imparisyllabic substan- 
tives ; as from hico, to take pity, TiXirt^oti, lUrttKuv, merciful ; from 
yvoio, to knotv, iyvucrfAxi, .yvu)[Auv, one that shotvs, or one that 
learns. And from these arise the substantives in /xoo-yv») ; as IAsb- 
[Aoa-vr/}, mercy, charity ; iJt,v»iAoavvv], memory ; and such hke. 

FrOxM the second person come the nouns in I2 and lA ; as 
from Xg'Aal*/, dictus es, ^ Ae|/?, zos, word, or diction ; 'ujBvoha-ai, 
foetus es, n rasol-nais, poetry ; iyvua-xt, cognitiis es, -^ yvwcr;?, notion^ 
knoidedge ; rsOvu/xt, sacrificatus es, ■» ^valoi, sacrijice ; ^s^oniiAoccnxi, 
exploratiis es, i5 ^oyiti^oia-ioc, proof, experience, eicamen ; vjxoiyt.oicxi, 
jprompte parasti ; v hoi^xalx, readiness. 

And here we are to take particular notice of the compounds of 
Of, zv, 5yf; as from ii£K§ia-»{,'Judicatus es ; ^ ocK^talx, conjusion^ 
'want of order, ox judgment : riroc%xi, ordinatus es, evrx^ix, order^ 
or disposiiion: zjiv^x^oct, rem gessisti ; Iv^zj^x^ix, miscarriage, or 
ill success in one^s enterprise. 

Some verbs in xlvu have botli terminations ; as ly^xUu, to 'wet, 
xfy^oLvaxi, from whence vy^oivais, and ly^octx'ix, humectation ; ^yi^aUu, 
to dry, l^ri^xvcrxi, ^v^ocya-tq, and ^'nqaaloc, exsiccation. Where, ge- 
nerally speaking, those in ons are taken in an active sense ; as 
^yiava/f, humcctation ; ^s^^ooktk;, warming : and those iii arloi, pas- 
sively ; as ^e^fxixa-lx, heat ; ly^xa-ioi, humidity. 

The adjectives in EI02, or EiMOS, are formed like the nouns 
in (Tiq, and are generally taken in a passive sense, expressing some 
sort of aptitude in the subject; as '^xvyi.v.^cj, to admire, rsQxvixxaxt ; 
^xv^Kv^crioc;, Wonderful : o^xu, to see, u^xaxt ; 000,0- iyi,o(;', visible ' 
^^xoy.xi, to use ; xf w'jbto?, useful : ztooj, to drink ; 'cjoa-i^oz, and 
'Zoorijj.oq, potable. Nevertheless, Hx^oi§<rm is of an active significa- 
tion, purgative, from xaG^el^w, to purge. 

From the third person are derived substantives and ad- 
jectives of divers terminations, parisyllabic and imparisyllabic, qf 
an active or passive signification, or of both together. They have 
always a r for their characteristic, and we shall give them here ac- 
cording to their order. 

THE, THP, TfiP, are commonly substantives of the masculine 
ge«der, which denote the person, and are taken in an active sense, 
corresponding frequently to the Latin nouns in TOR, and to thosei 
which the French terminate in TEUR. 

THS is parisyllabic, aiid in polysjdlables is generally marked 
•with an acute on the last ; as ^Exof^xi, to look, rsQsxtxt ; hxrioi, 
spectator, a spectator. Likewise >,vr§ioT-ni, redemptor, a redeemer ; 
oixarriq, a judge: from Ayr^o^y, to ransoms ^utklu, to judge. But 
dissyllabies have an acute on the first: tu^arris, a seller, a wer- 

chant J 



Vlouns derwed from Verbs. 307 

dfiaiit ; r^^^r'vi?', fearful ; ycriTr,^, creator ; ^urm, a giver, a benefactor ; 
^■jryj^f a sacrificer : from zjiv^oia-xco, to sell ; r§w, to tremble ; xri^w, ■ 
to create ; §o«;, do , to give ; ^ia, to sacrifice^ to kill: though there 
is some exception with regard to the accent. 

THP is acuted on the last syllable: erooj, to save ; aia-wronf auTr.^y 
saviour ; 'S5i'n^d.a-/.<a, to sell ; Tjeir^ocrxtf x^^xrv)^, a seller. 

Some of these degenerate in their signification, denoting ra- 
ther some kind of instrument; as ftuxnif, 4he nose, or no&tnls, 
from jj-iarffu, to blow one's nose ; 4/yKTi?f, a cistern to keep the tvine 
coolf from 4'1'X'^y to cool; fonT'n^y a hammer , from pxlu, to beat, to 
break ; xoLox-Xiyio, a character y or mark, from yxgcLaauy to imprint y 
or engrave. 

TOP has an acute on the penuUima : iila,o{jixi, to acquire, to pos- 
sess ; x6}t}r}Txif kI^tu^, possessor. Likewise /vjro;^, an orator, a rhe- 
torician, from the unusual verb pioj, to say. In like manner o'.vnX'W' 
Tft^f, adjutor, a helper; crvi/.TrxiTco^, a play-feUoiv, from the com- 
pound verbs a,vriXxfx<^<ivu, to assist; crvy(.i;xi^u, to play together. 

All these terminations are sometimes found in the same root; 
as from Vi^uyt^i, comes ^or-it^, a giver, in Xenophon : ^wrvjs and "^uru^, 
as if they -came from ^ow, in Homer, wherein we must conform to 
custom. 

Ill, Divers tertmnations that bear a relation to th& 
three foregoing. 

From these same terminations are derived three sorts of femi- 
nines in TPIA, TPI2, and TEIPA : those in TIS come particularly 
from the masculines in TH2 as may be seen in the variation of 
substantives, Book II. Chap. ix. 

To the nouns in THS we may refer those in TiKOS, which de- 
note some property or particular virtue ; as kxQxi^u, to purge ; J* kx- 
^iJSfT^'?, purgator, a purifier ; o axOx^rtiiog, a purgative, or cathartic: 
tstteu, facio, to do; ^ounnytoc, efficacious, active; o^dw, to see; o 
o^xrri^, a spectator (instead of which we oftener use ^sxt'U) ; o o^xri' 
xo?, Aristot. that hath the faculty of seeing. 

From those in THP come the adjectives in Th'PIOS, and the 
substantives in TH'PL^, and TH'PION ; as a-^Ji^u, servo ; I curvi^, a 
saviour ; o crurn^ioq, salutary ; y\ aafrvj^ix, safety, salvation : -cjoiv, to 
drink; o otot'^^, Eurip. and Hesych. a sort of liquid measure; ro 
'sjorin^iov, a cup, a glass ; cciavvuj, to 7'epel ; xpi.vvrvi^, he that 7~epels ; 
cctJi.vvrYi§(o<;, purgative, or ivhatsoever has aii expulsive faculty, or one 
that repels and revenges an injury. 

Those in Th'pk)N denote frequently the place of action; as 
c^Pxi^trv^iov, (a-<Pxt^i^co) a tennis-court. Likewise y-x^x^ri^m, pur- 
gatoriura, purgatory; ^x-ifi'irri^m, a font ; -Miyi-nr-n^m, a church-yard^ 
from KOI [AX M, to sl-eep. 

To those in THP we may refer the nouns in TO'PIA, and 
TO'PION ; as axsVa;f, a physician ; xxsTo^ix, the art of physic ; from 
KKeoiAxi, medeor, to cure. In like manner from s'/^u, to see, or 
from \'(7xiAxt, to knoiv, comes JVwf, knowing; and from thence 
i^o^lx, history, knowledge, research, desire of knowing, and i-o^m, a sign, 
or argupaent of one's attaining to the knowledge of any thing. 

Those 



Those in TPOS, TPA, and TPON, seem to be fornjcd by syac^pc 
{from others m r'n^tos, r^ix, rn^iov. 

But those in TP02 resume the nature of the substantive from 
•whence they are derived. Thus a,Xiv^o; and tacr^ls signify the 
same thing ; as aX<T«^, wicked, perniciou&^ and Ixtyi^, a physician ; 
from whence descend the adjectives in rv^ios, cc, ov. Sometimes 
they signify an instrument: krdar^oc,, acus, a needle, ^vom. a/ioi/^xi, 
to setv, tQ mend ; ^vt^oc, a curry-comb, from |uw, to scrape, to rake. 

The same may be said of those in TPON : KQtXXvvr^oy, scopse, a 
hroom, from x.(xXXvvu, to sweep, to clean ; a-itixxyr^ov, a -sign, or marh, 
from a-viiAoclw, to signify, to give, to know; xdroifl^oy, a looking' 
glass. 

Sometimes they denote the place, slr^x, and (pxoyir^ct, a ditch, 
X)r cavity for burning swine, from svu, and <?)^oy^^&;, ustuh), to burn 
at a slowjire ; zsotXccls-.^ix, a wrestling place, ajencing school. 

The etymologist writes Xsr§ov,Jor a bathing place, with a circum- 
flex on the first ; and x»r§ov for the water wherewith one bathes, 
with an acute on the last. 

Those in TPON denote also sometimes the prize and recom? 
pence, ^ilocaKu, to teach, ^/^ax'J^oy, the maste7'^s pay ; a-wT^oy, the 
price of redemption, or preservation, from o-w^w, to preserve, to save. 

We likewise meet with a ^ for a t at the end of some of these 
nouns ; as axM^^a,, a wallowing place ; xoXy/A^^9^<%, a pool, or 
pond; Ko^viO^Qv, and cru^u^^oy, scopae, a broom, from aA/v^£&;, to 
wallow, or tumble ; xoXv^Cdu, to swim, or bathe ; ko^w, and ax^ou, 
to ^weep. 

jy. Three other terminatmis derived from the same 
person, mz. ro;, r^ou, and rvg. 

T02 comes from the same person, and frequently denotes a pasr 
sive signification: ^zyororosj factibilis, ^aszZ'/e, from zsoncj, to do; 
Ivs'iT^ttloq, hard to boil, from ^c-t/Jo;, coquo, to boil ; l^dymsos, that 
may be heard, or granted, from ajcsw, audio, to hear; ^E^xTrsvTo^, 
curabilis, curable, from, ^£§x'7r£vc<j, to cure ; 'ixrsoq, the same, from 
idofAxi, to cure. Thus Aristotle, 8th Metaph. says, that o^arixov is 
TO ^vvK[Azvov o^at, what has the power of seeing ; and on the contrary 
o^ocro^, TO ^fva/xEvov oqxa^xi, what is visible. 

Sometimes tjiey signify duty ; as Aristotle says, that ra xxXoi^ 
good things, are lirxmroi, commendable ; that is, they are not only 
usually praised, but moreover ought, and deserve to be praised. 

Sometimes they are taken for the participle of the preterperfect, 
ccytz'TTT^ros, dilectus, beloved ; hXeycToq, elecius, clw sen ; from aya-Braw, 
to love, IxKiyu, to choose. 

Sometimes they are taken in an active sense : a-vvsr6<;, prudent, in" 
telligent, from awi'/ii^t, to know, to understand; s^ttstos, creeping, 
from E^9rw ; serpo, to creep. 

Sometimes they have both significations: Ivtxroq, potens et 
possibilis, ^ofewf and possible, from ovvxixxi, possum ; xyiXxro^, one 
that has not laughed, or that has not been laughed at. 

Sometimes they have a triple signification, viz. active, and pas- 
sive, and that of the time in which the thing is done: nxroq, 

fallox^ 



, Nouns derived from Verbs. SOg 

J'allo'vo ground, land ne'wly 'ploughed, the action ofnexo 'ploughing, and 
the time of new -ploughing, from noiu, to renew. Likewise o a/x^jroV, 
messisSf messis tempus, (as in French la moisson is taken for either) 
from a//,aw, to reap ; ^f ori?, from a^oa, aro, to plough j c^Xo-nrhq, 

- the time for threshing, or the threshing itself; r^vynros, the vintage, - 
from r^yoiu;, to gather grapes for the vintage. 

The grammarians have attempted to distinguish these different signi^ 

^cations, hy the difference of the accent ; but their rule is very preca-^ 
rious, as Sylburgins sho'ws in his Grammar, page '^59. For. Ammo^ 
nius and the etymologist contradict one another Jlatly, about the word 
cifjiYiTos : and even Hesychius is inconsistent with himselfo taking v.^-^ro^, 
with the accent on the fir at, for the harvest; and aiJ.vno<;^ loith the 
accent on the last, foor harvest-time ; a?id, on the contrary ^ taking t^v- 
ytjTo?, with the accent on the first, foor the time of vintage ; and, with 
the accent on the last, for the vintage itself. 

In compounds the accent is drawn back: aopo-roq, invisib),e ; 
zvaKuros, easy to catch. Which happens also when a preposition 
is joined to the simple nouns mTOS ; avvQiros, compounded; I^oIksto^, 
.exaudibilis, Celebris. But those that are derived merely from a com- 
pound verb, are acuted op the.Iast syllable : lyL>.iKros, electus, chosen; 
t'Tft^vi/.-nroc, desirables. 

TEON corresponds to the Latin gerunds ; from x/yw, to say, Xe- 
P^K£)clxi, >,£kVov, dicendum, it must be said: but of this we shall treat 
more at large in the eighth book. 

But they are likewise formed from unusual verbs; as o'rsoy, fe- 
rendumy it must be borne ; ^tjteov, dicendum, it must be said, from" 
the unusual verbs oiu, and pico. And from thence come the ad- 
jectives in £Qs, X, ov ; as oWbos: oItsx, o\<rBov,foretidns, aj-^cm. 

TT2 among the poets proceeds also from this same person, atid 
sometimes denotes art, address, or capacity of doing a thing: x/6a^i- 

^u, cithara ludo, third person of the perfect passive Kzy.iQcl^i?a(, 
3nQ(x§is-vq, the art (fo playing on the guitar. Likewise o^x^^^^> ^^^ 
art of dancing, from op^BO{j(,xi ; ayo^'»rvq, eloquence, or the art of 
speaking, from kyoqaoyt^a^t, concionor, to harangue, to speak in public. 
And sometimes it marks the action ; as l^nri/^, esus, eating, from 
£^u, edo, to (sat. 

ANNOTATION. 

These verbal nouns derived from a passive preterperfect, do not always retain 
the vowel of the perfect. For those that change the e into a, have their e 
restored to thena here : T^e<pca, to nourish ; Tl9ga^,ctat, to ^^sfx/uka, caitle ft for 
food : e-TTgi'^iw, to sow ; Bs-'ra^fxai, to a-irt^fMa, seed. 

The n is also changed sometimes into e : IvgzM, to find, to invent ; £yg«|ua<, tJ 
€yg>}|U.a, and eu^sf^a, invention: yinoiJ!,a.i,fiO, yiysyncrcn^ hyincri$, generation ; d<pai^E0, 
aufero, d!p:^^nfAcu, ro d<^ai^iy.st,, what is carried au ay J h d<pai^£<7ig, ablatio, taking 
away ; o adi h dva<pa.i^srog, that cann'ot be taken aivay. 

From <^iuyv, to run away (whence <j)£yjtTof, in Sophocles, then can or ought to 
be avoided) coroes a^varoqy unavoidable^ shortening' the pennltima, which is 
agreeable to the analogy already remarked, Book HI. Rule Ix. 

Scuietimes the o- is dropt: yvo<w, to know; eyvcog-ai, 6 yjoorog, for yv«r«?> ^osy 
to know : X?^'") ^^ colour ; xsx^^ctxrfAai, to ^^Sfjia, colour. 

Sometimes it is added : tih\ixi., to tie ; Yih(xai, o S-s^TiWo?, a chain. And some- 
times another consonant is inserted j o^x^ofxai, to dance ; ai^x^fxai, o o§x^QfA,os, 
dancing : a'nai^ai, to leap ; sc-m^fAai, o a-nagQfxQs, leaping, agility. In like manner, 
avxf^og, droxvthj dryness, from avoo, sicco, to dry, 

V. From 



^10 Book VI. 

V. From the perfect 77iidcUe, 

From t^e perfect middle are derived those in 

H : Tf E^w, to nourish ; rirpQ(pot, v r^otpri, nourishment. In like 
sj^ianner, -cyA^jyij, a woujtdf from zjK-ncra-u, plango, to strike ; IttitoX-Aj 
epistola, an epistle, from l'ni<ri'k'hU} to tvrite a letter j (pvyri, fuga, 
jiight^ from OtvyUf to run avoay ; c^ml-n, haste, from qitsv^m, festino, 
tx) hasten, 

OS baryton, which is commonly taken in a passive sense : r§/<fk;, 
to tioist, to torment, Br^otpx, rfo^o?> the colic, or helly-ach ,• likev/ise 
(p^o^os, corruption, loss, mortality, from (fSsifft;, to corrupt', ff'noqosf 
Sfied, time oj" sowing, from aml^u, to sow. 

There are some formed even from unusual verbs i tUos, partus, 
the time of delivery, or the fruit XKihereof a ivoman is delivered, 
from T£Kw, to bring forth a child ; (povos, murder, from ^/yw, to hill. 
Likewise ^ovos, labour ; <poQoc, terror ; from the poetic verbs -^j/vo- 
l^oityto be poor ; (pi^oij^ai, to terrify with threats, 

OX, acuted, is taken actively; as ro^Ms, he toho cuts; <Po^o^, 
one that can bear, fertile; ro^o?, pointed, loenetrating, subtil, from 
tii^u, tero, to affiict, to wear out ^ to torment. Nevertheless, ^o;'7roi■, 
remaining, is of a passive signification, and comes from AetTrw, lin:- 
quo, to leave. In like manner iTriXoiiros, and vTroXonros. 

Some are taken in either sense ; as ri/xvco, to cut, raro/xa, o ro/xoy, 
cutting^ ov rojxos, a part cut off, whence comes the word tome, and 
% ro/A«, sectio, the action of cutting. 

But they take an « instead of an 'a, if there happen to be a ^ 
before : (pksi^u, to corrupt, tipQo^oc, vi <p^o^%, corruption : in like 
manner (po^d, the carrying, or carriage, from 0£f&/; -o-Trofa, sowing, 
from a-iTSipu, But from kbi^u, to shave, y-Uo^oc, comes xoyfa, shaving, 
by inserting v. 

ETX, acuted, is taken in an active sense : (pQo^svs, corruptor, from 
(^0£i^w, to corrupt ; q-Tto^sv^, a sower, from airEi'^co, to sow. 

IM02 is passive ; airo^iiJLos, what is commonly sown. Thus ^omixof, 
considerable, valuable, comes from SoKfo/, videor, / seem; and ioyct- 
f^os, authorized, or approved of, ixom ^iy^o^xi, to receive ; u'piXtii.o'Sf 
useful, from ^'Ptxiw, to assist. 

ANON : TO io'aj/ov, an image, an idol, from f/w, to carve ; zsQiravov, 
a cake, from 'sje'j/lu;, to make boil. From y(^ia}, to pour out, comes 
Xo»m, ypa.n<i, and ^oMn, a tunnel, or funnel, and by contraction 
likewise %mos, and ;)^A;y^. 

S : rt cpAo|, aflame, from (pxiyu, to burn ; Ji /w|, a rent, from 
pvijo-w, to break ; perfect middle, sppuyx. 

*: 'aoi^xQXu^, squint-eyed, from 'aA^oiQxi'rru, to squint. 

ANNOTATION. 

There are also nouns derived from certain participles, which ought to be men- 
tioned here along with the derivatives from verbs ; as from eI^/, to be, a)v, Sa-a, 
being, is formed h aa-la., esseiice. From whence the compounds dTraa-ia,, absence, 
'mra^asrla, presence ; l^aa-ict, authority ; {Azreaia,, ■participation ; mt^inffta., aiundance. 

'EKaiXiog, voluntary ; aKn'a-ios, involuntary ; are also derived /rom ta^ira, volens, 
rijlling ; and «Ky<rft, invita, nolens, unvcilling. 

CHAP, 



Compounds of divers Nouns. 31 i 

CHAP. VL 

Of Compound Words, and particularly of Nouns, 

JlJESIDES what lias been hintetl with respect to compounds in 
the second chapter, when treating of prepositions, it is proper to 
remark here, that there are compounds of four or five particles 
together; as 07r6;j^>jt70Tsv, howsoever it be; xx^cctts^uvsI, to the end 
ihaii as. 

Sometimes we find two nouns joined to a particle ; as zramu^iosf 
of little duration f unseasonable ; ^vsa^iToronsioci a.Jine child^ but with 
aifficultii brought into the world, or a woman who is delivered of a 
fine childi but has had a very hard labour. 

But we seldom meet with three nouns together, in pure authors, 
though we find such in Lycophron, /SB-Tr^avoxryj-o?, built by a strayed 
cow; (piXecv^o(Ainty.oSi a relation, or 07i€ of the same blood; which 
sounds a little too harsh. 

The coraic writers indeed divert themselves with composing 
monstrous long ones, as ma}'' be seen in Aristophanes, where, 
among others, we find one at the end of his 'EkxXtjo-. composed 
of eight and twenty words ; which shews the great fertility of thi§ 
language in the formation of its compounds. 

But most worthy of our notice, are the nouns composed of two 
words, wherein we are to remark particularly the final of the first 
word, which may be either a noun, or a verb. 

I. Compounds of two nouns. 

There are some, though very few, coifipounded of two nomi- 
natives ; as '^sdzjoXiSf Najjles, from vix, new, and zyoXic, a city : 
<nii(X{ji!zy(^iXf umbratilis pugna, fencing ; 'u^xn.'kiyi^, Hercules, Juno^ 
nisgloria, from" n^x, Juno, and nXios, glory. 

Those compounded with the nominative -^so?, sometimes retain 
os; as @B6<;^oroi;, a Deo datus, given by God, Arist. Osossx^i^ac, hatred 
towards God, Aristoph. and sometimes they lose o ; as ^e^tjeV/o^, 
great, divine, admirable ; ^ejxeAo^, like unto God, admirable; ^ic^xTQv, 
an oracle. 

Nouns in aog, and in a? reject the s of the nominative : ^iyXucr- 
a-ov, lingua bubula, the herb bugloss, from ^5?, bos ; ^^nyXcocraos, bu- 
glossus, a sole, aflat-Jish ; vaOsaix, admonishment, correction, from vS?, 
mens; vxvi^xyQcx., a sea-Ji»ht, from vaXx;, navis. 

There are some few formed from the genitive, and then the gfe" 
nitive continues entire; from vaZs, navis, vxos, Att. "vso^, nu<;oiMqy 
a harbour, or a dock for building ships; from xvav, canis ; awos, 
xvvoqs^tz, Cynosura, ursa minor, a constellation, signifying a dog's 
tail: from Zzvs, Aw, Jumter, Aiqskb^oi, Castor and Pollux, Jupi- 
ter s children. 

But there are several formed from this case, by dropping the 
final letters, so that there remains an o ; as Ajjr^iV, A>3rS, a robber ; 
>^'fiToy%yos, one that has slain a robber, or pirate: thus from o/:Aof, 
o«,«, like, comes o^ort^Aoq, equal in Iwnour : from o^'ku, domus, o<- 
xoSo/xo^, a house-builder^' from aywvov, certaminis, a^yt^yoUrvi';, one 
that rexvards the combatants. . 

Even 



S12 Book Vl 

Even -those that have not an o in the genitive, conform sometime.? 
to this same rule; as i^^l^a, day^ 4^ffoxo/To?, one that sleeps hy day. 

The same analogy is observed in derivatives : ari5f , £V°?» ^ *^<^^> 
«^£§o£/f, sjiarhling } xy//,a, otvosy a luave, xvixotroeis, agitated, tossed 
by waves. 

The rt of the genitive is sometimes by the poets changed into »5 i 
lyvov, a, a member, or foot ; yvUis, yvnetg, from whence comes 
ci(ji.(piyvYists, siiroi;, lame of both sides ; @sy}roKos, Deipara, the mother 
of God, for ©EoroKog ; - Xocy.'jtoi^o'^aioq, a link-boy ; Ti^cnynnpo^os, one 
that wears a crowns And this is particularly practised, when there 
is a series of short syllables* 

The Dorics change sometimes 6 into s: kv^^o(povof, ay^^sipom, 
a murderer ; 'Aayoipovr*}?, *A^y£CpovT*3?» and inserting i, ^A^yti(poyrn<;: 
the slayer of Argus. 

Some have 0-/ inserted after this^: 'ayiysa-ifJLaXKoqy villosus ; n^.w- 
*rs<Tl\ixog, Protesilaus : for IIij^o/xaXAoj, Ti^uroT^otoq, &c. 

Some have also an t inserted after o: oSoz-stot^o?, a traveller, a,^of 
rv'TTOi;, a plotvman. 

Some even assume at : iJ^t^xtitoXios, half grey ; a^tqat^vw, pure, 
sincere, glittering, for ax^o^avvj?, unless we should derive it from 

The Attics retain win their nouns; Xcwtpcfo*, a public road ; viw 
xo^or, sedituu^, a sexton. In like manner in the fifth of contracts ; 
x^iar, arosf ms\ K^zmoiiloi, visccpatio, distribution, and division of 
flesh. 

The compounds of yxtx, the earth, often change a/ into s in 
the first syllable, and « into u in the second : ytui^ir^viq, a geo- 
metrician ; ysus^yo;, ytu^yos, a tiller of the earth ; yEuXo<poSy a hill. 
Nevertheless we read yxiolor'/iq, a bestotver, or distributer of land. 
And those which put the other word before, are generally termi- 
nated in sios: /xsXavoyeioj, black soil ; Inrlysios, terrestrial, or creeps 
ing on the ground. 

Sometimes the first word is contracted : ©soKv^lhs, ©sKv^iSyj^, 
Thucydides ; ©soSocr/o?, ©sSoV/o?, Theodosius ; yio^inx, vaiAivicx, neo- 
xnenia, the nexv moon. 

When the. second word begins with an «, the Attics contract it 
into «: Avitot^yos, AvK^^yoq, Lycurgus ,: syvos^of, tvvu^os, eunuch, 
one that takes care of the bed, And others admit of other contrac- 
tions, which agree with the general analogy. 

Those from o/a5, simul, are not contracted : ©//.osfivijf, of the same 
nation ov family , and not o/>!.a6y>)?. We likewise say avroixh, of the 
same year, one year old. 

The compounds of ttoixTioq, and a^;^w, change o into i : KuXxU 
p-xx^i, Callimachus ; k^y(^irUrm, architect. 

Some are formed from the dative, ^si^'%&o(pos, a man full of gesture^ 
a dancer ; o^sUvXo^y a mountaineer ; o^eI^xXmi;, brass, copper. When 
two consonants follow, the e of the diphthong si is cast away : o^*- 
r^o^Poq, nourished in the mountains ; sy^iKlvwog, one that makes a noise 
with his pike. 

Others are formed from the dative plural : o^co-ir^o^o?, an high- 
lander ; voivaiTTo^og, navigable, 

§ ^ Some 



Compounds of divers Nouns. 313 

' Some from the accusative : vevs;)^^?, prudent, compos mentis . 
a-yJ^cwroJoy, a slave. 
Several are formed from the nominative, or accusative neuter : 

fAeyoi^vy.01;, generous, courageous ; ri^vsirris, sweei-tongued, one that 
talks agreeably; ow^(x,}ih.vro<ii Jamous ; (pw^^o^oj, Lucifer, the morn- 
ing star.^ 

We find one from the accusative plural of ar/?, loss, or damage^ 
viz. »Tic?, whence is formed xroi;^xXo<;, unjust, ivicked, 

II. TFords compounded with a verb and a noun. 

Nouns compounded with verbs, are derived either from the 
present, or from the aorist, or from the future. 

When they come from the present, generally speaking, the first 
part of the compound ends in e : <^^u, fero, to carry ; (pc^Ewxo?, 
'victorious ; (A.hu, maneo, to remain, to xvait ; MtnT^uoq, the sup- 
porter of the people. 

Some take / : ri^troj, to delight, to please ; rs^vtyjfxwoq, toho 
taJces delight in darting thunderbolts ; %«Xw, laxo, to slacky or loose ; 
^ixXl(p^uv, a dissolute and loose person, a fool. 

Some others o : Xtiiru, linquo, to leave, XeiTrorccKrvig, a deserter, 
one that deserts from the army / hsmo-^^vx^x, animi deliquium, sxuoon* 
ing, or fainting avoay. 

Sometimes they are syncopated : f*/atv«, to spoil, to waste ; i^toti' 
^ovaq, bloody, cruel. 

Some have a o- inserted, to prevent the concourse of several 
short syllables : '(p^^^iaq, fruitful, that affords tvheretvithal to live. 

Some form a diphthong : rtxKoiw, to dare, to undertake, to endure; 
rotKocfizju^oq, 7niserable. 

Those of the second aorist follow the same analogy, taking 
sometimes £: s^xxov, I have bit; ^xae^viAog, biting, satyrical : and 
sometimes < : gXaSov, / have been hid ; >.x9i^Qoyyoq, what hinders the 
recollecting of a tvord. In like manner from 6^t sero, late, comes 
i^ilAxQ^q, one that begins late to study. 

Those that come from the future, assume commonly an / : hl^c^, 
hl<ru, to fear ; hicri^x1yi.m, fearful, one that has a religious, or super.- 
stitious conscience ; atiu, to shake : mia-u, (rsKri^Oojv, eartji-shaking^ 
an epithet of Neptune: \^vu, a-a, to draw, to deliver, to preserve : 
l^va-i'TfoXtq, protector ess, or patroness of a town. 

Those that are formed from a circumflex, assume sometimes a 
short syllable instead of a long one: ^l^aru, I shall fnd; sl^ea-is'TTyifi 
one that invents new words, eloquent. 

Verbs that have an / in the penultima of the future, assume an o 
in the compounds : t^\^u, I will mingle ; /:>w|o^u^, half-savage^ 
half a beast; ^^lau, I will make heavy ; ^§ia-6ij^x)(p<;> terrible^ 
xvarlike. 

We find also some compounds that take their second part from a 
future in ■^, ot |; as from r^l-l^co, I will rub ; o/xorf/4', verna, a. 
bond slave, a servant that is born in a family ; rs^u, I shall be 
brought to bed; x«^^/T£|, one that hasfne children; l7rm|> tiear her 
time, 

S s When 



314 Book VI. 

When the second word begins with a vowel, the vowel of the 
first word is cut off : (ps't^oiAxt, to abstain, to spare; <?)£/S»ffwo?, d»e 
that saves his horses : pi-^^f J ^^^^ throxjo ; fi-^xanris, one that runs 
axuay, after having cast off his bucJcler, 

nivrsy quinque, Jlvej sometimes retains the final : . -arivwo-vfiyyo?, 
that has^ve pipes, or holes ; vstvrUXmv, which has Jive beds. 

Sometimes it is changed into » : 'cjttrot.xXmv, •BjcvTairvs, Jive years 
old, that lasts Jive years, and that happens every Jifth year, 

*E|, sex, six, admits also of an « : l^^^Kmi, that has six beds ; 
s^ahyjs, and s^irvi(;, that has six years. 

From oKTcj, octo, eighty we form okvuzths, and oftener oxTawa?, 
of eight feet. We say e/xoa/ra^/oy, and eixoo-«ra5/oy> qf twenty 
furlongs. 

From 'Exarov, a hundred, comes Ix«tovt«^%o?, U centurion, a 
captain qf a hundred men ; Ijcarovra^E/f , one that has a hundred 
hands, &o\, iKotroyyti^, We read also iKv^iovrix^yp<;, iEschyl. one 
that commands a thousand soldiers, a colonel, 

Tf/axovTA, and others of the like sort, joined to tra(i, a year^ 
are contracted in e, Att. Tp/axovTasT^j?, -xovT«T*9y, thirty years old ; 
rsr^scKovTHrv)^, forty years old, Sfc See the second Book, Chap. xi. 
of Numerals. 

This is all I could find, worthy of notice, concerning com- 
pounds. Use will point out several other little particular changes, 
which may be easier learnt by reading, than by any grammatical 
• discourse ; though whoever is desirous, may see them at length 
in Caninius and Scotus. 

Hitherto we have treated of what relates to Etymology, viz. to 
words separately considered. We must now proceed to what 
regards their construction and arrangement in a sentence. 



ne End of the Sixth Book. 



BOOK VII. 
Of the GREEK SYNTAX. 

It Introduction to SyntaA\ 

' J. HOUGH it be the opinion of Quintilian, that boys ought to 
be instructed in the Greek tongue "before the Latin, and in 
reality it be very proper (as we have observed in the Preface) 
to let them make some progress in this language, before they 
are led into the beauties of the Roman eloquence : yet as the 
Latin rudiments are somewhat easier than the Greek, the)r are 
of course more proper for youth to be first made acquainted 
with; consequently the general rules and principles, wherein the 
two languages agree, are fittest to be treated ef in the Latin 
Grammar. I shall therefore comprise in this book no more, pre- 
cisely, than what the Greek varies in from the Latin, judgifig it 
quite unnecessary to repeat, how an adjective agrees with its sub- 
stantive, or a verb with its nominative, and such other rules, that 
are exactly uniform in both languages, and have been already 
sufficiently explained in the Neiio Method of learning the Latin 
Tongtie.* 

But it will not be amiss to repeat here the property of each case, 
whereby we have shown, that 

The nominative agrees always with the verb, to 
form a sentence, viz. to make sense : lyu (piAw, ego 
amo, I do love. So that as a sentence cannot subsist 
without a noun and a verb, there is no nominative 
that does not refer to some verb expressed, or under- 
stood ; and no verb that has not its nominative 
either expressed or understood. 

The vocative also agrees sometimes with the verb 
in the second person, and is never used but to point 
out the person to whom the discourse is addressed; 

as ^uAagoV jot£, Kv^i£, OTi Itt) (To) y\\Tr\7Qi.y Psalm XV. pVC 

serm me^ O Lor d^ for in thee ha'oe I put my trust. 

* Translated and printed for J. Nourse (now Wingrave and Collingwood) in tha 
Strand, 

The 



316 Book VII. 

The genitive marks the possessor^ or generally the 
thing of which something else is said, as v x^i^^ '^^ 
Ku^i'g, the grace of Jesus Christ ; or passively, as i t» 
Ato? iTTiggAiJ, Just. Mart, the conspiracies formed against 
Jupiter, And this case is always governed, either by 
a noun substantive, as in the preceding examples, or 
by a preposition, as xzrgo ra PatrtAewf, before the king ; 
no adjective, nor verb, being allowed to ^assume a 
genitive, but upon one of these two accounts, as we 
shall demonstrate hereafter. 

The dative marks the relation or tendency of the 
action signified by the verb; or the thing expressed 
by the noun, and the end towards which it tends ; as 
^ihoi 'wsii/Toe. ©£w, Lin. to God every thing is easy. 

The accusative denotes the subject that receives the 
action of the verb, as dyocTrwug Ku^tov tov 0e6v o-a, thou 
shalt love the Lord thy God; or else it agrees with the 
infinitive, as Sti I^jX x^^m, I must be concealed : or it 
is governed by a preposition, as wf^l !/*£, concerning 
me. 

The ablative, which in the Greek always resembles 
the dative both in the singular and plural, is however 
distinguished from it by the government, being con- 
stantly governed by a preposition, either expressed or 
understood ; as -utol^oL tw ^o(.(riXtiy 7Kar the king ; Iv ri 
ztoXeij in the city, Sec, 

II. Change of syllables by reason of the construction* 

But before tve enter upon what relates to these goverjiments in parti' 
cular, it is proper to observe, that the construction or arrangement 
Jrequently occasions some alteration in the syllables^ as luell as in the 
ivords ; luhich may be reduced to four or Jive different heads. 

1. It changes the accent: for the acute, which is on the last 
syllable of a word, is turned into a grave in every part of a sentence, 
except the end of a period ; as ^aaiXsvs ay«6o?, xoct K^xn^oq ulxi^'nr'hsy 
Horn, a good king, and a stout soldier. 

Sometimes it occasions the intire omission of the accent, as in 
the Enclitics; whereof we shall treat in the liinth book. 

2. It alters the quantity, either by length^ing the short syHablefi, 
as in this hemistich of Homer; 

Oivos <Ts rquzi- ••' 

Wine hurts you. 
The twe syllables vor and «, which are short by nature, are length- 
ened here by position, by reason of the meeting of the letters which 

follow 



Greek Syntax. 317' 

follow them in this arrangement of the sentence : or by shortening 
them, as in the same poet ; 

'Ev oc^iiXu l^Amia-vtf II. 11. 

And oer theybrests roll thejlood of fire. 
For here the diphthongs u and tj, which are naturally long, are 
made short, by reason of the following vowel. 

3. It occasions the loss of some letter : thus erw? frequently loses 

the final ?, when it is followed by a consonant; a/^a 'iru xoci «;^ 

Srus tyeivy Aristot. to be and at the same time not to be in such a dis- 

position. We also say a^yj^i and /xf;^f< for a;^f/j and (/.ixVi* ^^» ^^ 

Jar as, until. 

Thus a vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word is frequently 
rejected when the following word begins with a vowel ; which is 
marked by an apostrophe, as we have observed Book I. Rule viii. 
And if the subsequent vowel happen to have a rough breathing, 
the lenis which concludes the preceding word is changed into an 
aspirate ; as «<?>' oi/^ry, instead of I'jtI ri^h, in us, in our power. 

And sometimes this elision is the cause that the two words form 
but one, and have only one accent ; as xxyu, for x«/ lyw, & ego, 
and I: which may happen either by contraction, according to the 
ninth rule of the first book ; or by syncope, as ^a^a|<ov, according 
to Eustath. for to a/Aa|wv, a chariot ; and ^ij^Afrifs, in Aristoph. 
for tS i5/a£T£§», nostri, of ours. 

4. It causes a letter to be inserted : thus a v is put after e or <\, 
according to the tenth rule of the first book, um(7iv av^fs?^ instead 
of clxoo-/, twenty men. Thus «, 7io, assumes a x before another 
vowel, as «>c i'^ov, » 'civU^-nv, Horn. / have neither seen nor heard 
of him. 

5. Finally it changes the letters, as the smooth consonants into 
aspirates, either in the apostrophe (above mentioned n. 3.) or upoi^ 
other occasions, as ts^ for »x, when an aspirate follows; a;^ 
^v^txvs, Horn, it did not please. Or the aspirates into smooth con- 
sonants, as we have observed Book I. Rule iii. Or even other 
letters, as Ix for l|, when a vowel follows ; 

'Ek, riuXtf, l| 'ATTiij? yocivis- • — II. a. 

From Hyl'js (of Peloponnesus) a very remote place. 
Let this suffice to remark by the way ; because the practice 
thereof will appear in the sequel of this book, where having com- 
prised al! that particularly regards the Greek construction, in 
fourteen rules very easy to retain, I have endeavoured to illustrate 
them with a great variety of examples, equally entertaining for 
their signification, and proper for the syntax, to the end that they 
may prove both agreeable and useful ta those who will be at the 
trouble of reading them. 

III. Of Pointing. 

We must also observe that pointing, or the manner of making 
stops and pauses in discourse, belongs properly to syntax, as it 
serves to fix the sense, and to <3etermine the members and pe- 
riods. 

This 



318 Book VII. 

This subject is discussed more at large in the treatise of letters, 
Chap. XV. in the Nexu Method of learning the Latin Tongue. - Where- 
fore to cut short here, I shall only ooserve, that the pauses and 
distinctions in discourse are natural : but the marks by which they 
are signified, are arbitrary and artificial. 

These natural pauses are of three sorts. One, which is only a 
gentle breathing to sustain the discourse, and is called xo/x/a«, viz. 
Jragment, because it interrupts our speech. 

The second is still somewhat greater, and contains some sense 
in it ; wherefore it is called xwXov, a member. 

The third is that which completes the sense, or finishes the 
sentence, and is called 'period^ or perfect distinction^ re\s7x Tiyi^i* 

The Latins use at present for their first pause, the comma or vir- 
gula ( > ) ; for their second, the two points ( : ) ; and a single point 
to terminate the period. 

But the ancients, whether Greek or Latin, made use of the point 
alone for all these differences, only placing it difierently, to make 
the change of pauses. To mark the end of a period, -and a 
perfect distinction, they placed the point near the top of the last 
word. To signify the middle pause, they placed it in the mid- 
dle : but to express the bi'eathing, they placed it at the bottom, 
and almost under the last letter, wherefore it was called subdistinctio» 
And for this v/e have the authority of Dioraedes, Donatus, and St. 
Isidore; wherein Gaza, Vergara, and Vossius, are mistaken. See 
the Nexu Method of learning the Latin Tongue. This manner of 
pointing may be still seen in several excellent manuscripts. But at 
present most of the Greek printed books distinguish the middle 
pause by the point on the top of the last word; and the full 
pause by the point at the bottom : but this is contrary to the prac- 
tice of the ancients, which Valesius has endeavoured to revive in his 
Eusebius. But when the sense is imperfect, he makes use of the 
comma, like the rest. 

The Greeks use a different mark of interrogation from the 
Latins. For whereas in Latin they put a point and a comma 
ov^r it ( ? ), in Greek they put the point and the comma under 
it ( ; ), which in Latin serves for a middle punctuation between a 
comma only, and the two points. 

The point of admiration is the «ame in both languages, being 
a small pei-pendicular line with a point underneath it, thus ( ! ). 



The 



[ 319 1 



The GREEK SYNTAX, so far as it 
differs from the Latin. 



CHAP. I. 

How far the Greelk Concord differs from the Latin. 

Rule I. 

To distinguish attraction from government. 

The first rule of the Greek Syntax is, to distinguish 
attraction from government , 

Examples. 

JL HE first rule we are to observe, for better under- 
standing the Greek construction is, to distinguish 
ATTRACTION from GOVERNMENT: for, as we have 
observed in the Latin Method, it is peculiar to the 
Greek language, to make a case, that has its own 
concord, or government, draw sometimes to itself 
another noun which is not at all governed by the 
verb to which it should naturally refer: thus, for in- 
stance, they say, (r\)voi§(x, li^ocvrto (ro(pog m, Piato ; / am 
'very sensible that I am wise : where aocpoQ wj/ refers to the 
nominative of (t^voi§x, viz. lyw, which is understood, 
SauTw <r\)]iihi<; aViXHVTt, Demosth. you know you are acting 
wrong : where d^iyiBVTi refers to <r«uTw which precedes. 

Isocr. after having fully considered the matter ^ I found 
I could not compass it in an^ other manner ; where 
SiU7r§oi^cc[MBj/os is drawn to the nominative by (T>(,o7r3^iyo<;y 
instead of saying (aX Sioiv^oc^ociAiiiov or Stoi7r^d^x<r^oit» 



320 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

lxi<rYtg ^\ d^iHUTi, \iyi(T^oci t»)? 'Attijci]?, Luciati ; / lodged 
with a certain play-rvrighty named LysimachuSy who was 
evidently a Boeotian by nation, but still would make us be- 
lieve he came from the very heart of Attica : where we 
fiud cc^tBVTi In the ablative, drawn by 73-0*^7?, which 
goes before, notwithstanding there is a construction of 
the nominative between them, Aup-t'/^ap^o? hocXi^roj &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

Sometimes a case is attracted by a verb, to which it does not 
relate in the natural sense : and this we have proved in the Latin 
Method to have been frequently copied by the Latins, ©av^a^or, 
era or/ o (Xvro(; m aoevru cost S/aTEXsr?, for Oxvixa^u on av o sciiroq 
wy, &c. / am surprised that thou eontinuest always so like thyself. 
Triv oTroa-i) IWv £<^£v«/, Xenoph. Terram quanta est nosse, instead of 
nosse quanta sit terra, to knoxv oftvhat extent the land is, Miy^niAxi 
an, oirus a-zrsx^ivtt, meniini tui quomodo responderis, for memini 
quoraodo tu responderis. / remember how you ansxicered me : and 
such like. - 

This attraction often extends to different members of a pe- 
riod. Tii)» §£ rwv (pvruv Jtoct r^v l)t(pva-Euq >tax/«v I'TTifAiXsixi? yeo^yuv 
^t^ocfrsvoiAsvx l'yv&'//£v* otov ra? o^eix^ f>oa.<; ito(,i ruv eiy.vy^»X(ov ra? 'cuf 
?i^orE^«?, *6rxv ^tctr^vjOsT^ut to ^§qs t>) pl^v) s'^^sx'^''* <^'P'^vm -cjeyxij? X^- 
Wflffov T?$ Ivre^iuvioq [xia-ov S/cXaQevr^ ^e^uvrxi, zU svx^v}<riocv (Asrat^a^Xn&t 
Tore t5 %t;//,5 rvtv ^vs^J^^ixv, Basil, where we find ra? o^siats pooi^f 
&c. in the accusative, attracted by rriv nocyclavf and governed by 
syw(AsVf which goes before, though naturally it should be in the 
nominative, agreeing with ^loir^Ma-xif and governed by ^e|wvt«/, 
and (j:.ertx^£x\8crt, which come after. We have seen some planfs, 
uihich by the care and industry of the gardener have been eured of 
their natural imperfection : such ns pomegranates, too sour, or almond 
trees, too bitter, which being cut through near the root, and grafted 
afterwards with the cion of a pitch tree, lose the malignity of their 
juice, and are rendered very serviceable. 

This attraction of the same case happens sometimes to quite dif- 
ferent things, or persons: 'Eyw §' IxM^h /utev i|£(pyv 'axr^os, zlm^ 
rmq o-^iiovros, h w^arw ^^yyiUv, Sophocl. instead of c/VI^ t/$ ia^svtl 
ego vero libero patre nata fui : qui, si quisquam alius Phrygum, 
potens opibus fuit. Fit hoc, says Crusius, quia casus casum trahit, 
viz. the genitive iKzv^i^a «r«r§of, attracts the other genitive iiirtf t/vo? 

xaroi Tioyov ^loc, rm ccvoix^iuv xMTo^Oaixivuv, Basil, in Ascet, where we 
see xaroi&a/Aivwv, which is found in all copies, in the plural, attracted 
by Tft/v ocvoiKsluv ; whereas one would think, it ought to be KOiro^Qaiiivs, 
referring to ihyos. It is Jit that our actions should be proportioned to 
our designs, since no reasonable end can be rightly obtained by unpro- 
portionable means, 

RUXE 



Of the Relatke. 321 

R U L E II. 

Of the relative. 

T/ius the relative agrees with the antecedent in ease : 
rm p^f wjwai oTg sp^w, instead of a 'i^co. 
Examples. 

It is by virtue of this attraction that the Greek re- 
lative agrees frequently in case with its antecedent 
(which seldom happens in Latin) as in the example 
given in the Rule, iis utor quibus habeo, instead of 
qu^ habeo, l77iake use of what Iha'ce, 

In like manner, rl o-w^aa Jpw/ ^ao?- ra h u^Iv 'Ay/a 
Uvsvixocrog Iriv, S i'/iti cItt^ 0f», 1 Cor. vi. for £^£Tf, 

your body is the temple of the Holy O'host^ which is in 
you, which ye have of God, ^Ettis-bvg-b tw Xoyoo S s7mv 
'Ings^j John iv. for ov it-mv^ he believed the word that 
Jesus had spoken unto him. *Zv t? ^ixotioffvuvi aCr^ 2 Itto^ 
7j<rf ^^(TBTOiiyEzek. xviii. in his righteousness that he hath 

done he shall live. ^AttoMv^ h rco ixrocpxTrlcSixocTi y iTTOimiv, 

Ibid, he shall die in the sin that he hath committed, K«l 

aTrW^i^zy In TxrocQ-uv acf^fiwv ocvrs Sv iTrotincf, Ibid, and haS 

turned from all his sins that he hath committed. 

Sometimes the relative goes before its antecedent: 

'A^roAauw Sv 'iyjin dyoc^uvy for dyoc^ccv cc fcp^w, J Cnjoy what 

goods I have. Thus in Terence, restitue in quern me 
accepisti locum, in Andr. leave me where you found 
me, 

ANNOTATION. 

Sometimes the antecedent is understood, and yet it shall attract 

the relative to that case, in which it ought to be itself; as x^mi^ui 

dXs BXi^t utor qiiibus habeo, subaud. rehus, instead of saying, utor 

rebus, quas habeo, MsfAwiixhos wv stf^x^sv, memor quorum fecit, 

Jo?' eorum quae fecit, mindful of luhat he had done. 'OA»yo/ |v/>t/K,a;- 

X>3'4/o/:asvo; 'sstx^acyivovrut, Thucyd. as much as to say, ^/Sovrc? lxetyo/5 
^^ liriY.aKHvrot.i ts^ ncraroy v) A*34'0/«,£yo<, &c. ive Jlnd but veri/ Jew, "who 
applying t-' others for assistance, endeavour afterwards to make a 
suitable return. 

Sometimes the antecedent is attracted to the government of the 
relative, but then the senj;ence seems to be double; as ovk gf/y rtv 
riyx iTu'jTor hk n^^Bv a^)(Yiv, -^schines, as much as to say, ovk st'v 
vtTK; aoyyi, vn'Ttva, a^xh)) a>c r,^^zv, there is no pubUc employment but 
what he has gone through. It is in this manner Terence says, si id 
te mordei suniptiim Jilii quern foicinut, in Adelphi, whicli is as if he 

T T ..had 



3221 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 



had said si id negotium te mordetj nempe sumptus, quern sui 
Jaciuntfiln tui ; according to the principle explained by us 



irnpiur/t 
in the 
New Method of learning the Latin Tongue, Rule II. which is to con- 
sider always tha relati^^e as between two cases of the same noun 
substantive* 

Rule II. 

Of the infinitive. 

T. Thus the injinitwe, which requires before it a 

nominatwe. 

% Or an accusative ; 

3. By virtue of this attraction may he joined to every 

other case, that hears relation to a noun governed 
by a preceding zvord : 

4. But the injimtive often acts the part of a noun, 

in Greek, as zvell as in French. 
Examples. 
1. The infinitive in Latin generally agrees with 
the accusative only. But in Greek it is allowed to have 
before it either a nominative, or an accusative. A no- 
minative; as <^ia TO ci(T[A£voil^iXh7v, for having gone out 

'OoluJltarily , Ov yoi^ l7r\ Tw ^sAoi, aAA' Im tw o^oioi roTq 

?\£i7rof/.ivoi^ sTv:it, IjcTTE/^tTrovrai, Thucyd. speaking of the 
colonies, /or they are not sent to be made slaves, but to 
he upon a level with those that stay behind, 'Aaa' £<y« yi 

Cs h^n iy^QocXov Ig fov fAuXocvoc, Tsdmu sTvxt Sia'Trorvig, Lucian ; 

but I shall soon set you to work at the milk ct^id there 
I tvill make you know, I am your master. ^Axxcl xd^smv 

<ru<rxi Seri(T£i, ^oc^iG-ci[ji,£vog tw Aioi/uVw, Lucian ; but shc 

must be preserved to please Bacchus: where the 
nymphs address themselves to Neptune to preserve 
Ino, who was going to fling herself into the sea. Now 
to understand this rightly, we must consider the sen- 
tence as absolute, §ioi ro, for this reason, viz. aV/^sm 
l^BXhTv^for having gone out voluntarily, ^^(th, subaud. 
THTo, this must be done ^ viz. (tu cuxtqci Uifuviv ^a^is-ctf^tvog 
TW AtovuVw, you must save her to gratify Bacchus.. 
Where we see the nominative before the infinitive, 
merely by concord, and without attraction. 

JVhich the Latins have sometimes attempted in imita- 
tion of the Greeks: as Catullus^ 

Phasclus hie ait naviumfuisse celcrrimus. 

J2. Ini 



Of the Injiniiwe, 323 

2. In this simple construction it is much more usual 
to put an accusative before the infinitive ; as ho W 

' til/at, 2 Cor. V. 9. wherefoix zve labour, that xvhether 
present or absent, xve may be accepted of him, Ka) rcxXq 

Irs^ccig zroXsa-tu ivayyiXia-xa-^oii jus ^b7 ttjv ^0i(riX£iCi t« Qsb, 

oTt sU T8T0 d7rsrocXiJ.oci, Luke iv. 43. / must preach the 
kingdom of God to other cities also ; for therefore am I 
sent, KXoitEiv 'ny.oig i\>ioq If' vi^ fAri SiKocix ^^wjcasv, Aristoph. 
it is but just zve should weepf if we have transgressed, 
ChjK Irti/ su oc^x^iv fxY} d^x^£vr», no body isft to govern, bu£ 
he that has obeyed. Ova Unv slrreTv' tjaMra, r^ro 8 -miico^oLi, 
Men and er; there is no such thing as saying, During my 
life, such a disaster shall not befal me, ^octriXmov Wiy iZ 
sToiHi/rcc yiocKu; dyiinv, Alexander apud Plut. to do good, 
and to be ill'Spoken of is kingly. To sV xal rviv r^yf^yiv 
d^X^^ Tjcri $o)ib7 sTyat, Aristot, some suppose that a unit 
and point are principles, 

3. But, by virtue of attraction, the infinitive, espe^< 
cially of substantive verbs, may be often joined to any 
other case, which refers to some noun governed by 
a preceding word; whether the nominative, as n£^»x>.?? 
£(p*}(re t^^x^i T8 |3w/A8 ^/ao? Eivon, Plut. Pericles said, That 
his friendship went no farther than the altar: where 
^ixoq is attracted by the nominative of the verb f!p>ij£, 

which is ITf^txAyi?, Ta Xoirrol <pYi(T(x,g oCto; xxro^^coasa^oci^ 

Herod, saying he would secure the performance of the 

rest : where Kvrog is attracted to th^ nominative by tpn^ra^. 

Whereto we m.ay refer the following phrases, when 

in Demosthenes, and others, ^'ytotiog is put for ^'ycciiou 

Iri, it is Just: thus rsra TYiV oclrtuv hto^ Iri SUocioq iX^iu ; 

where ^'nociog is attracted by «to?, as if it were, hujus 
culpam hie est Justus habere, instead of sequum est iu 
istum hujus rei culpam omnem conferre, he justly de- 
serves to bear the xohole blame of this affair. 

Or the genitive : ^(r^6[ji.nv auVwi/ 3ioc rw -sroha-iv olofMiucov 
>tsc] roixKa, (To(puT(Lrm itmi Plato, / perceived they valued 
themselves so much for their skill in poetry, as to fancy 
they were equally knowing in every thing else^ Usfi t2 
lAiKXono^ i(r£7^9» Cyi^<;, Aristot. of what shall be healed. 

Or 



3?4 Book VII. Greek: Syntax. 

Or the dative: tjjtw fxri i^Biv»i wo^^iAtt ycviGr^xij Ile- 
rodot. he was 72ot allowed to he a ferry-man, 'AArOsV- 
rtiroy to to?? uV^^oi? ^irwv t8 aXrihtTiv ftva*, Arist. nothing 
can be truer than that, from xvhich we infer the truth 

of the conclusion, Ka) aJrw (rv{j(.Qxyj£iVj r§i(p^vri /tx£V ([(TU) 
T11V <r(pBv^6'jnv, a^-nXu ysvso-Dat, £^w (Jg (J>]Aw, Plat, and it 
happened^ that turning the stone of Ms ring inwards, he 
became invisible, and turning it outwards, he was visible : 
where we find, r^i(povri, dH^ui, and SnXu, in the dative, 
hy reason of ^Jtw that precedes. In like manner, 
Txr^o^Tjytoy 'n[/'7\f peAr/roK dlTroivrcov cUv^^uttuv eTvoci^ Isocr. it 

behoves us to be the best of men. Et 7«rctVTwv aoVw h§oo(ri'j 
dv^^tairm xup/w ysvsVOflf*, Plut. in Alexand. if they would 
hut grant him to be lord of all 7nankind. 

To this principle we must refer the following Latin 
phrases; 

RettuUt Ajax Esse Jovis pronepos, Ovid, for se 

esse pronepotem, Licuit Themistocli esse otiosoj Cic.with 
several others of the same sort. Concerning which 
see the Latin Syntax, Rule V. 

4. The infinitive is very often taken for a noun 
in Greek, as in French. And it may be generally 
said, according to Apollon. Book I. Chap. viii. that 
all infinitives are nouns. Hence it is joined to the 
article in all cases, and oftentimes has even the force 
of the article, when it happens not to be expressed. 

In the nominative : to x»XiTv, talking, OJ to fxa- 
^s7v synXi^iAX, dxXoi to dyvQiiv, Kos^Tnyo^Coc, it is not a fault 
to learn, but it is a crime to be ignorant. To roT; zro\- 

AoK u^ia-anVj ro7g (ro^oXq diru^iiriiiiy Irt, Plut. to please 
the ^vulgar, is displeasing the wise, To^ /3i«o-*A£uo-tv ?TToy 
H^fnv dSiasTv, 71 to"? Ihurcctg, Isocr. injustice is less ejc- 
cusable in pinnces than in private people, ''Avsu a^sT?? a 
faJiov <^£^ftv IjWjitsAw? T« fJTup^)i/A«T«, Aristot. it is a diffi- 
cult matter to behave well in prosperity without the 
assistance of virtue, nY^yi m\ pi^a KuXoxdyxh'ag, ro vo- 
fx({j.H r\)'x/i'j Txratdiiccg, Plut. to have a good education, is 
the source and foundation of all virtue, ^iXiCv dyioct^oit 
Uov Irt T&> [Aio-i7v, amare non in tempore, est odisse 
par^ unseasonable love is equivalent to hatred. 

In 



Of the Infinitive* 3J25 

In the genitive : Ix ra o^oiv yiynrM TO l^av, the eye 

h the source of love. To xUv (piXiiv, r^y.^ (piX^Tv txUnov^ 

Plut, excess of love destroys love^ Kal £l??Ad£ ra i^itvoLi 
o-ui; auTor?, Luke xxiv. 29. fl'/i^ he xvent in to tarry 
with them : where we must understand Vj/sxa, just as 
Lucian says, oJJsi/ olir^qoy tjt^ockHov Ta v^yioiv hsKC(, we are 
fiot allowed to commit treachery for the sake of a victory. 

In the dative : tw §\ x^'^i^biv fu6u? EVsra* to ^oLviAci^m, 
PI u t. admiration follows joy. 

In the accusative : Kocroi rl ^vvocg-^oh k^) B'Mvxiy accord- 
ing to their knowledge and ability, ^ 

or ^OCVOVi a TO C,m 3'£]W.£K>i KOiXoV, aJs TO S'VllO'Xfil/, 

*AWoi TO TauT« JcaA&j? oi^<p(i-Ti^ iKlsXicoci. Plut. 

Nee pulchrum duxere mori, nee vivere pulchrum, 
Scd pulchrum pulchre si quis utrumque facit : 

The deceased did not think that honour consisted merely 
in either living or dying, hut in living and dying ho- 
nourahly. 

In the ablative : to T^'katm tr^v h tw p^^rio-Oat ^oiK^sov^ 
V h Tw yiiy.77\(T^r^i, Aristot. riches consist rather in the 
me than in the possession. 'Ev tw g-ttei^biv ocCrov, Matth. xiii, 
and whilst he sowed. *Eymro h tw tov o^Xov iwrnsTtrh^A 
avT(} cc)i^s^v rov Xoyoi/ Ta 0£a, Luke V. factum est tur- 
bam imminere ilh, ad audiendum verbum Dei ; M^^f^ 
isj dum immineret ; and it came to pass that as the peo- 
ple pi'essed upon him, to hear the word of God, 

ANNOTATION. 

The manner of supplying the gerund in GreeJc. 

From hence it comes that the infinitive in Greek supplies 
easily the use of the Latin gerunds and supines; because these 
are nothing more than reaV nouns, as well as the infinitive, accord- 
ing to what we have observed in the Latin Method. When the 
article happens to be made use of, then its genitive is put for 
the gerund in di ; as rS isoivicroii, faciendi ; or rather factionis gra- 
tia, of doing : the dative or ablative tw is put for the gerund in do : 
and the neuter to for the gerund in dum. Though it is often 
expressed without the article : a^iros axovr/^s/v, jaculandi peritus, 
an excellent archer, Af?xE fffc/v, ferendumdedit, he gave it to 
.carry. 

Infinitive 



$Q,S Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

Infinitive gove?'ned by a preposition, 

'There is often an ellipsis of the preposition^ ns in the prcaedincr 
txamplei ^xkz iPi^eiv, viz. px^oj (pi^s/v, ad fereudura. Thus in Virgil^ 
JE?ieid 5» 

Argenti magnuni dat ferre t^lentum. 

that is, ad ferendum, to carry. 

In like manner tuml xl yv^xiKH ztcia-Ksiv riyyx<;i Eurip» women 
are quick in finding devices. Ov xiystv hivoq, a^xxa. uiyocv a.'^vyjcro<;, 
Epicnarm, that knows neither how to speak, nor how to hold his 
tongue. KoiXoq 'i^s7v, pretty to behold, subnudi z^pos, QaZixx /§=- 
o-^a/, wonderful to see. Ovk vi^sa. axae/v, Isocr. things unpleasant 
to hear. Which the Latins frequently render by the supine in u. 
Mirabile visu, jucundum auditu, 8^c. "a Tioith a\ay(^^ovf rxvrx »o- 
{/.i^s /x,*j^£ Xeysiv ttvoci kxXov. Isocr, quae turpia factu sunt, ea ne dictu 
quidera honesta existimes.. 

The preposition is likexvise understood, ivhen the infinitive isputiuiih 
verbs of motion : o vtoq t» kv^^uire tsx. ^x9s ^KZKovriQrivxtf aXXcc ^ixKo- 
yyiiTxt, Matth. the Son of man is not come to be served, but to 
serve. ^HXSei/ o v;o$ rS avO^uTTH Xrirv^acit Koii crcoaui to afroXa^hoi, 

Luke xix, for the Son of man is come to seek and to save thalj 
which was lost. 

And from thence Horace has borrotved 
Audax omnia perpeti 
Gens humana ruit. Od, Hi. Lib. 1, 

'-■ — Quidlibet impoteris -sperare. Od. xxxvHL 

and a great many mote of this sort of phrases ; for he affected in a 
particular manner to imitate the Greek turn of expression. 

This ellipsis of the preposition is found likewise in the passive infini' 
five : ^O^yacXsoq ya,^ 'OXviatfios ocvr:(pi^sa-^oiif Hom. difficiUs est Dens ad 
repugnandunif or ad repugnari, it is a difficult thing to withstand 
God. 

Now, as an infinitive may be governed by a preposition f so it may 
(dso by u<;rs, which has often the force of one ; as in Plut. uqrz a^iov 
itvxi ^E^iivxif fMY) ruv ^r,^i'cijv ItriXiTtotruv ru avG^wTTw, ^*3§/<^»)? o /3*o? 
awrS yivnrxi, insomuch that there is reason to apprehend, that if 
the race of brutes should happen to be extinct, man himself would 
be no better than a brute. 

Difficulties relating to the government of the infinitive. 

Grammarians take notice of several irregularities, pretending that 
there is frequently a transition from one case to another; ns ^eo^sS^jj 
llMuVf f/^T ivvolxs oix^odcrocaOxi ruiv XsyoiMevvV) lyQf/x^^Evra? or/, c^C. 
Isocr, we entreat you to lend a favourable ear to what we say to 
you, considering that, S^c. where li/0y/x»j0svra?, they pretend, is in- 
stead qflv9v^yi9ivr(ov : but on the contrary it is an ellipsis of the accusat. 
viAoii, understood before, as if it had been, hofAzQa. l^^ui [iir* itvoiocq 
vfJiSis a,ic^ooi(Toc(T9xi, a vobis requirimus, ut vos cum benevolentia 
audiatis : and then lvfiy/A*)0£VTit?, which follows^ is by vf^a? attracted, 
to the accusative, which agrees with the general rule. ^ , 

And 



.Of the Infnitwe. S£7 

And tohen Xenopliori, speahing of Socrates ^ saySt «?« zyd^v [Aik^ 
KEXT»?/A£vcf 'cxxvvpa.yiaK; '^x^'^ a'^K^vrx : this also is an ellipsis^ xexti^* 
ftsvoy supposing oTiZv. ci'>j, and k^KHvrot supposing Ixurov, before the 
irifinitive tyjiv : ut cum valde pauca essei possidens, eiim tamenfacil'^ 
its esse cojitentmn ; having but very little, he was nevertheless very 
^ell satisfied. 

But as the Greek infinitive may have before it either a nominative^ 
or an accusative ^ it may happen^ that in one member of a period there 
shall be one of these cases, and in the other another ; tvhich seems to have 
escaped the generality, of grammarians ; as to ^ev ^vpidici^ [ji^v^ia^ xsxvi^ 
Qv-^^xi '^x^ciXsi'Tru', x.xl TO zjoKXa,Ki<; avros irf^^vwixQa* 'a^ort^o))^ Dem, 
I omit here an infinite multitude of persons who have been so often 
declared victorious, as I wave mentioning also how often I have 
been crowned myself : ivhere tve see ij^vqinq in the accusative, which 
refers to xsKyjovx^^'', and avros in the nominative agreeing tvith ere- 
(pxvuer^xi. Tuv f^h Xoyuv t'^n xv^ios avro^ slvxt, ruv os 'a^cc^scoi T^» 

rvx'yiv Plut. he said, that he could command his words, but that 
fortune was the mistress of events. 

Aizd this corroborates the remark of Sanctius, xvhich is, that the 
conjunctions do not properly join the cases, or governments, as the sense 
and the things themselves ; now the sense subsists in this connexion, 
since the Greek infinitive may as ivellhave one case before it as another. 
Of this tve have instance's also among the Latins, as in Cicero, mihi 
enim videbatur quisquam esse beatus posse, cum in malis esset : in: 
"malis autem sapienten^ esse posse, si essent ulla corporis aut fortunse 
mala. Tuscul. 5, 

Sometimes the injinitiveis understood in the second member ; as Xiysi:^ 
X Oil 'CT^osiivxi ruj ^yiff,OTtKM ugzTi^ av^^ic&vroc l)C(i2ouKhK; rcoiro!, cvy- 
y^a(p^y, rj Xoyu rtis §>j/:Aor<x«?, aXX* a roTs tJ^dyiAOCf^t ytvu<xx.cy.iyiis, 
Demost. pro corona : for yivucncoiAsvai; being in the accusative sup- 
poses slvxf, whereas the noininative Ik^s^uk^^, which goes heforCy 
refers to the verb Kiysis, which creates the whole difficulty : you enu- 
merate the qualities wherewith a popular person ought t» be en- 
dowed, like unto one that is describing a statue which he has agreed 
for with the artist ; just as if a man's words, and not his actions, 
were an indication of his popularity. 

Rule IV. 

Of participles. 

The Greek participles are elegantly joined to *verhs^ to 
express the different moods. 

Examples. 
The participles form a considerable elegance in tbe 
Greek language, by expressing most of what we should 
signify by the other moods: which is sometimes a 
kind of attraction; as dyui^^v y.i ^ixriXii, for fxg ccya- 
TTOiu, continue to love me. "Odry iivoixv t^^c^v tJ't^TsAw rvi 



328 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

■sroAfi, Dem. how constant and unalterable ihe affection 
is, which I have for the city. ''Atp^oc^rog uv SiocnXiT^ Philo, 
he remains uncorrupted to the last. Ou -Grarjo-o fjt.cn pxm, 
for (piXifvy I shall never cease to love, Me/^tp^i/Aat M^, 
for l^iivj memini videre, / remember to have seen. 0£o^ 
« A»f^w 73-^ogrdTviu ix^v. Soph. I shall not cease to have 
God for my protector. ''E^^i? r«^«^^?, Soph, for Iroc^oc^ocr^y 
you have disturbed^ *^A fjt.dxif(}c tt^i S^au/xao-a?, Greg, the 
things which he most admifxd. Ou cvvisiToiv /x^tdv txto- 
pHvngj non intellexerunt se frustra laborantes, they did 
not perceive that they had labou7xd in vain. 

^^oivih yoi^ cli^ixXivy,o[Livov Tffoav^ Aristot. for every thing 

is previously consumed. Il^Oi<pOix^u9 IJ^iX^ours; rrig zs-oXsca^y 

Theoph. they went out oj the town before. XumOfi/rat 
^H<rxi Tt S^ocG-oivrss 3 zrccisTvf Herod. they conspired to 
do somewhat to prevent his design of putting them to 
death. 

Hiiwvt^vi; iXsys p.ri$i7For£ avrco ixiTOi[Ji.£X^(rcxi iriyi<rayru, 
(p^iy^x^im Si zroxxdym;, Plut. Simonides said, he had never 
been sorry for being silent, but very often for having 
spoken, 

ANNOTATION. 

These expressions are more usual with the substantive- verb : on 

tirt N/x(»^>3jw,ov ocnsKloiuSi because he had killed Nicodemus. Xi^iq x^^iv 
sftv r tIkIuctx »£« Sophocl. one favour altvays begets another. Ov 
ctcuir-ri^rotq 'iay) ; Sophocl. ijoon^t you hold your tongue? 

Likewise with rvyyjxvui vifoi^^y^u^ ytvoyion, to bcy to become; way 
io come; \atv9oivuy to be hid ; and others. Ovk l;!^Ofoj Ivri^x^)) uv^ 
Demosth, he was not an enemy, *'0 ryy;^avw I^utuiv o-b, Plat, what 
I ask of you. Tini^-Aru ra Lra. an 'sr^osi^ovrxy Psalm, cxxix. fiant 
aures tuse intendentes, let thy ears be attentive. Tv^'^as yap ff^o" 
/a/v« yvjvs, Horn. Jbr the ship was arrived. ''Hxw ^£^wv, Isaeus, I 
bring. ■ EX«0£v v'jrsKipvym) he made his escape privately ; with several 
of the like sort. This has been sometimes imitated by the Latins : 
est, 2it scisyhis ipsislibris Socrates loquensy Cic. 

Id ego tibi renuncioy ut sis sciens^ Ter. 

Omnia sunt hominum tenui pendentiajllo, Ovid. 
Sometimes these participles form a pleonasm, and seem redun- 
dant in discourse : 'usxl^ns txm, Lucian, you play, you jest. Av)^ei<; 
\-/u^v, Aristophan. you trifle. 'Ej rZro <pi^m 'asi^iiTW^ rot. ^^dyfxocrxf 
^sych he brought his affairs to this pitch. 'rmQotXty UvtIv <pe^u> 
0»jCajo/?, he made his submission to the Thebans, Id. 'K^^^of ys 
^vTTYi^X^v uv, Demosth. he was an utter enemy. To yo^p sJmi tvci. Uroc 
x^f/ov, Id. there was only one sovereign, ofx^rui o-Tr/wv, Plat, he is 
gone axvay, he is departed, 

§ Rule 



Of the Neuter Plural, 329 

Rule V. 
A Neuter Plural joined to the Verb in the Singular. 
A neuter plural frequently requires the verb in the 
singular, as ^i^x T^e^ii. 

E X A M P L E s. 

A neuter plural is often joined to a verb in the 
singular, especially among the Attics ; as ^cox r^^x^i, 
aninialia currit, for currunt, the animals run: ITa^aA- 

A>]A^ eV« (pxH^cars^x^ things appear plainer zvhen compared 
together. 

Si ToTg x^T^a-^oci ^vm(jt.ivoig, Isocr, Da operam ut tuae divi- 
^ .tiae & usui 8c fructui tibi sint : sunt autem iis, qui frui 
sciunt, usui ; his vero qui uti sciunt, fructui. Endeavour 
to render thy riches both useful and profitable : to those 
that hiozv hoxv to enjoy them, they are useful; and pro- 
ft able to those that know how to make a proper use ofthem^ 

Al o(j^()(Xyi; roi (rufA,a.Tot, yea,) ^l o^y-^^ ra ZT^dy^XTX [Asf" 

^ovoi <poi.mroe,i, Plut. as bodies appear bigger than they 
really are, in a mist ; so do thifigs seem different from 
what they really are, in a passion, 

'XI? yoi^ roi XettJoc y^diJi^iJ^ocroi rviv o^iv, kroo rol ^ly.^i 
zr^cHyiMura, fjt,olx\ov Ivnwovra, vvmi, yax^i ra^xmi rnv o^y^v^ 
Id. as a small letter prejudices the sight, so trifling af- 
fairs disturb the mind, and cause anger and impatience, 
ANNOTATION. 

Sometimes the verb is put in the singular, though along with 
other genders ; as when we say, z^iy o'^rms r^i^'^crty, there are some 
that run. Ovx env o'l'nvss O'TrixovTAi aviAfsoa-iuv oj Kf5?rf?, Plato, 
there are none that abstain from J'easts, but the Cretans. Likewise 
fxsXiyct^vis ^fivoi v-E^cov oi^^^aci Xoyuv riXXsrxi, Pind. for rsAAovra/, the 
soft harmony of the hymns serves as a prelude to the verses thatjbllow ; 
which by Apollon. is imputed to the Boeotic dialect. Nevertheless 
we meet with it likewise in Plato, as we have observed above, 
as also in Aristotle, ah-A. hz%i(^vzro ro7s (xsv al r^^x^''^ '^°^^ ^^ "^^ 'csle^ct, 
4. Probl. 32. some had jig hair, and others no feathers. '^ An4 in St. 
Gregory of Nazianzen, Orat, 28. y.txri(T)czva<^fxi alru isls^vys^y us'aso 
asrs, mngs xjoere preparedfor him, like the voiiigs of an eagle. 

Reason of this ConstTuction. 

These expressions are real syllepses : for as ivhen tve say turba 
ruunt, the verb is put in the plural, because tve appreJiend a muUiiad^ 
by the tprd turba ; so ivkcn we say animalia currit, thg vtrh is.put 

in 

U u ^ 



330 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

in the singular, hy reason that tjoe concei'Oe an universality hythe 'word 
amixialia, as if tt voere omne animal currit; or indefinitely Sinlmai 
Ciirrit. 

This reason appears much more plausible thcffi that which Apollonius 
gives in his third Boole, Chap. xi. where he pretends that this kind 
of expression is 07ily received in the neuters (contrary to what we have 
Just now proved) and that this is because the neuters, having three 
similar cases, a nominative may be taken for an accusative ^ and con' 
sequently that there is no error, though this should alter the sense ; as 
'csxi^iac yqa,(pu, which may signify, he paints or draws the cliildren; 
or the children paint or draw'. But this reason is certainly illusory, 
for if the ear seetns to be pleased on this occasion, the -mind is only 
the more imposed upon, unless we have recourse to a syllepsis* 

But these sylleptical phrases are authorized in all languages : sester- 
tium decies numeratum esse, Cic, for numerata ; for with decies 
We must understand centena millia. See the Latin Method, amor 
amara dat tibi satis quod aegre sit, Plaut, And in French, il est dix 
heures, whereas at the Palais they still say, ils sont dix heures, 8^c, 

Hitherto we have treated of the Greek language^ as it differs from 
the Latin in regard to concord ; we now proceed to government. 



CHAP. II. 

How far the Greek Goxieymment differs from the Latin, 
And first of Prepositions j and Questions of Place, 

Rule VL 
Government of Prepositions, 
Eg, avTt, -sr^o, aVo, have only a genitive case ; 
EjV, dva. an accusative ; Ivy crh, a?i ablative ; 
But uTTEp, y.o(,rQi Sioi, (ji^iroc, have two cases / 
A72d sttIj Tsr^o^f uTTo, iscjw^t, TD-f^], 'UTOi^oiy kavc three. 
Examples. 

JL HE intire difference almost between the govern- 
ment of the Greek and Latin languages depends 
upon the prepositions : wherefore we shall begin here 
with explaining them. 

There are eighteen prepositions, whereof four go- 
vern only the g^nitive^ two the a^ccusative, and two 
the ablative. 

But there are four others that have the first two of 

those cases, viz. the genitive and the accusative ; and 

six that have all three, viz. the genitive, the accusative, 

and the ablative. They may be all seen in the rule. 

Bia 



Of T repositions. 



331 



But I shall give here a list of them according to their alphabetical 
order, that they may be more easily found : and at the same time 
I shall point oiit their natural force, their properties^ and the particular 
elegancies they produce in discourse, in a more copious manner than is 
customary among grammarians, because the advantage to he reaped 
from thence is very considerable. 



'am*i\ a preposition, which governs 
three cases, and has a great affinity 
with tiTi^i ; of which hereafter. It com- 
monly denotes the circumference, or 
circuit, which of it is used to signify 
proximitj';, agreement, or the relation 
of time and things; inchiding frequent- 
ly a relation to the thing signified in the 
case it governs, as will appear by the 
ensuijig examples. 

With the genitive; 'A/wcf)t t^c 
«EroXE<w>, Herod, near ike city. 'A|Mc}>t 
moya o -zzrovoj, one trouble begets another. 

Tr.f S-' a,a^i, ApoUo, for her sake. 
<S?ol'lii t' afA.<^'i, Id. for the love of Phoe- 
bus. 

H«Xa, Pindar, it is the duty of man to 
speak always well of the gods. 

'A/Li<pl dg-i^cov h y^a<pfi, Lucian, a 
(realise concerning the stars. 

With the accusative, which is 

BtVore "usual : ^AjWcj); KafJ.mv £%« Ta 
fSToWay Lucian, lam generally employed 
about my forge, Ol «|U<f){ ynv 'ixi^ynq, 
labourers, or ploxvmen. 

'A,a<f)' aXtt sXa-at 'A)(aiys, Tfom. to 
drive the Greeks toteards the sea. 

'a^<Jh ra KhfA.movTa. Irrt, Luciao, 
about seventy years. 

liOfA.oi dfxdpi ri nah^Mt^q, Dionys. 
Halic&r. the laws enacted concerning any 
thing. 

Ol c)ifj,<^] iJpia/j!,ov, Horn, to signify, 
according to Eustath. ipse Priami/s- 

Ol ecix<pi Toy KZ^ov, Cyrus and his at- 
tendants, or retinue. 

ToXg d[A,<p^ avTQV- S'ogiKfjopojj, Euseb. to 
the guards that were about him. See 
•5r£gj hereafter. 

With the ab-^ative : 'A//<f)t f/.h 
fji.ix.x,V 'T'^'^o-'^T^ il^rio-Q'jij Herodot. atque 
base quidem de bello tot & tanta dicta 
sint, enough has been said of ipar. 

'A|M.f; S'g TM S-avi-raJ avrrj, Id. for 
what relates to her death. 'Ai/,<^1 yu- 
. vam, Hom./ora woman. 
- .'AKka xtti »^<f>' 'oS'vtnJo?, for the love, 
or for the sake of Ulysses. 

^AfA.<fi ^riQia-i, circa pectus, about, or 
near the stomach. Horn. Theocr. 

Horn, he put on his fine armour. 

■ *AnA\ a preposition, which is ge- 

jierally joined to an accusatiyje, and 



properly answers to per, in, or inter, of 
the Latins. Wherefore it generally 
denotes some jfepetition, or continu- 
ance : it is likewise employed in dura-< 
tion, in passing through, and in simi- 
litudes, whether to mark resemblance, 
equality, or opposition; as likewise in 
things done at different times. 

'Avu T* 0^, per raontes, through the 
mou7t tains. 

'Ava, Tov nroretfArh 'Vj'kizw, Herodot. to 
sail against the current. 

'Ava p^^ovov, zvith the time. 

'Ava -sTov EToc, every year. 

'Ava p^eT^a, in hand. 

'Av« xgarof, Plut. by force, with 
all his might. 

\Av» tw 'EXXa^o,, through Greece* 

'Avfl! rov ^tV, during life.' 

'Avk rv^ovret, as it happens. 

'Ava ^ofAct, Ep(^£iv, to have in one*s mouth., 
to talk often of any thing. 

'Ava, r%a sTvai rm, to be often in one^s 
mouth, 

'Ava fA.s^o$, Horn, by pieces, one by 
one. 

'Av« -STf «ra?, among the first. 

^Ava Tov auTov Xoyov, Clem. Alex- 
andria, eadem ratione, in the like man- 
ner, 

Kmafjtctifxn Kcii vagJ'tf, dvk eyy,ietv fxistv, 
cinnamon and spike, of each an ounce : 
in which sense it is frequently used by 
physicians. 

"il?T£ Hat 'FMfxaioi? dva 'srivrt y.at s'/jiofl-t 
^i^-Xf^^S n'kivrciv v.a.rcCki'rizCv, Xiph. 
speakiiig of Augustus, so that he left to 
the Romans five and twenty drachms a 
head. 

Likewise dva 'betevte, five by five, 

'Avfif JWjiov bXclQov, Matth. xx. ikey 
received every man a penny. 

'Av» fxtr^yiraq Koo, about two measwes, 
or two measures'each, 

'Ava fAse-ov, in the middle, middlings 
moderately. 

'Av« among the poets sometime^ as- 
sumes an ablative ; as ava. Bm[xoi<;, 
Upon the altars, X^vj£m dva. <rKr.Tr\M, 
with a golden sceptre. 

We find it, in the book of Reve- 
lations, joined to a nominative, but 



It 



is by an ellipsis of its own case: 

eIj eaag-os ruv ta\fKwm 'h Vc, IvS? 



ftagya^try, that is to say, Eij 






Book VII. Greek Syntax. 



TjSv tryX^viav, •Pa i'v*, nv, &c. every 
several gate ivas of one pearly Rev. xxi. 
21. Which passage the author of the 
Idiotisms does not seem to have rightly 
understood. 

'ANTl\ a preposition, which gene- 
rally denotes some reciprocation, op- 
position, permutation, or comparison 
of things. It governs always a geni- 
tive, and answers to the Latin pro ; as 
"Ev av9' hog unus pro aUo, one for 
another. 

'Arr' dyaQuv ko-'M ysysvKrai, Thu- 
cyd. they a>e turned fmm g>od la evil. 

BaTi7^Bvg avrl fMis^m sr^ rgi*Tia>T«v, the 
Jiing alone is zvmlh ien thousand men. 

Q\ d'/ctBoi dvTf (AiKovv otl(i/7i p^tt^iV, Ste?- 
nelaidas apud Thucyd. lib. i. good peo- 
ple are grateful for the smallest favours, 
'AvtI 1^5, instead of me. 
'AvTt 'sroX'Kuy, for several. 
'AvTt -arHfiCcXtt/y, pro velamine, in- 
stead of a vail, 

KaXav avr; S7>;tS c-eo/jtctrog ddavarov 
2o|ay dvruara\>ji^as-Qai, Isocr. it is a 
Jine thing to change a mortal body for im- 
mortal glory. 

'AvTt Kar.m aTrdvTwv kZv dyaQov tva n- 
Cztfxriv, lvalue one honest man above all 
the zcicked people in the u-orld. 

'AvTi trojS^ by virtue of xxhat ? for 
tebatf 

Sometimes it is taken for propter: 
dvB'"oTii, propter hoc, vpon this account ' 
av9' uv, propterea qubd, because j by 
reason that. 

'Ano\ a preposition, corresponding 
to the Latin a or ab, and denotes from 
\fhence a thing comes, or the place of 
parting, with the space of time. It 
is commonly joined with inanimates, 
as 'Bs-a^a is with animates, though 
sometimes they are taken one for the 
Other. 
' ^Atto nuv, a navibus, /rom the ships. 

A<}>' iTTTrctiv Itt' cvas, ab equis ad asi- 
nos, /fom horses to asses^ a proverb. 

*Aro ©68 p^gn 'srdvra, d§)(6fA.£vov del 
ys.iy£:y, ti ncu voi\y, Plato, all oyr thoughts 
and Ziiords should, begin rjcith God. 

Whence it is used to mark the 
manner, or the cause, and time; am 
Tvx})5, by chance. 

^Atto <r7r«S">7?, by inclination: 
'Atto ts 'cra.pa.-^^T^ixa, immediately. 
'Atto t3 ^f^'.-aixa, prudently. 
'ATro T8 'cr^ovjiayS, or awo t3 <^av$g8^ 
openly, publicly. 

'A?ro %actt?, praB gaudio, for joy. 
*A7ro t5 BeXri^-a^ for the better, with 
a good intention, 

*A7ra tS vvVj abhinc, from hencefor- 
ward. 



*A7r3 w^as-fc-TTtf ifCfJcy* Eccles. viii. 
contra faciem contumeliosi, against a 
violent and abuseful man. 

Sometimes it denotes the profession 
or way of living, or the nation and 
sect; as ot aVo rn? 7oas, Stoics, qui 
sunt ab ea disciplina, Cic; Ol diro rS 
rxTiei^rdTU, Peripatetics. 

Jt also denotes those that are no 
longer in employment : el diro rnq Ima,' 
Tiittg, Kerodot. consular men, those xuko 
are out of their consulship. Oi dm rv{ 
^^arnyixg, qui imperio defuncti sunt, 
whose time of command is expired. 

'a^o nxTttl^ocni, just out of their infancy, 
'Atto a-dxTTiyyog, at the sound of thi 
trumpet. 

'Atto hicTJH, Horn, after supper. 
^Atto rSv cWXiwy, without arms. 
It is joined with the passive instead 
of vTo. 'ExXEXEj-^lvot d-jro t3 ©£?, 
Clem. Alexandrin. electi- a Deo, ihtf 
chosen of God. 

^T auras ('sra^Qivm;) <pac-]v dm tSv dv- 
Tiq-aciooTocv KaraXsuaBrrjat, Faust, they say 
they were stoned by those of the opposite 
faction. 

Sometimes it draws back the accenty 
and then it seems to mark a greater 
distance as if it stood for a7ro6sv, pr0!» 
cul, afar off j as 

'sis y-h roiys utto t«? y^i sysvovro^ 
Xiphil. being now very distant from the 
land. 

"aito irmrn^, Beyond the mark, praeter 
scopum, & prster intentionem, sayi 
Bud(pus. 

"Ato r^oirs, alienum a moribus, viz. 
absurd arid improper ; or else contrary to 
good behaviour. Budosus. 

The opposite is -nr^c? TgoTra, what »f 
proper, or decent. 

"Avo 'sr^aiy/j.aroq, improper, imperti- 
nent : airo xatjs, unseasonable : a-rro yvo»« 
/u>i?, a sententia, against his opinion. 

"atto EixoToj, non verisimile, impro' 
bahle. 

"Aero ^vy,ti, non ex animi sententia, 
disagreeable, contrary to inclination. 

AIA\ a preposition which properly 
comes from ^aica, to divide. Where- 
fore it denotes properly the middle, 
the traversing or going through, and, 
as it were, the passage of things or 
actions. 

Hence it is joined with time and 
place ; it signifies the cause, the end, 
the manner and means of effecting 
things, and is taken in several other 
significations, which will appear better 
by the examples. 

It is joined with the genitive and 
with the accusative, 

WlTB 



Of Prepositions, 



With the genitive : ha. vuktos, 
during night. 

A«' «V*S*?, through the market. 

Aia, Sixa iruiv, or huartf erag, every 
ffthyear. 

A<i -srivTE ^|W£f»v, or ^SfATrins hf^S' 
|fly, every fifth day. And so for the 
other numbers ; where it is to be ob- 
served, that in these phrases the geni- 
tive plural may be put with the num- 
ber specified, or the genitive singular 
with the adjective of the ordinal num- 
jber, as may be seen more at large in the 
next book. 

Aia riXus, io the end, continually. 

Ai' alSvos, for ever : ^M zfxvrof, aU 
teays : ha. Xf^^^j /<"* <^ ^""^ ivhile, or 
after a lotig time. 

A(« <ra t5to av ofxmov yivoiro, this 
Might be better effected through .your 
means. 

Aia 4>0{v/xa)v, nai ha. po^cDv, a medicine 
made of palms and ro!,es : ha, $ora-vZv, 
made of hfibs : ha p^yXSv, made of 
juices. 

B^oofxara hi yoKa-Kios yivofxiva^ Athen. 
food made ■/ mi/k. 

Aii (/.'fKawq y§a.<psiy, to utile iioilh 
ink. 

KZjxat ha -aroXXS, villages very distant 
from one another. 

Qavfxa^siv rk ha, TErXsiVa, to admire 
those things (hat we see only by great 
intervals ; which may be said of time, 
or place ; of things which we either 
see but sddom, or which are very re- 
mote from US. 

Aia. 'ZTEvfltf? TO yyj^ag hayoiv, thai spends 
his old-age in sorrotv. 

Aia S^a^ioov stTTSiV, to tell concisely, 
end in few words : hx 'arXEiovov bIttsTv, to 
tell prolixlu, or dlfFusely. 

Ai* a\a")(y)/ng ^X^^^^ ^^ respect, to have 
an esteem for : h'' al(r^ovng XajuSavsjv, io be 
affronted, In take a thing as a dishonour, 

Ai' oIxTif Ka^sTv, io have pity. 

Ai' eiKpi^sUs xiym, io speak correctly 
and zoiih Dropriety. 

Ai' aWiag B'x.^iv, to blame, to accuse i 
h^ aWius tTvat, to be blamed, io be ac- 
cused, 

Ai* w<^£\iia.s ridis-Qxi, to appropriate a 
iking, and turn it to one'^s own use. 

Ai' a^vfxias ylna-Qcu, to be reduced to 
despair, or to extremity. 

Ai* affypaXiUg yivs<rQAi, (o be in Safety. 

rhea-Qai ri ha fAis-Hf to be betxseen, to 
he in the mJddle* , . 

M»)Je-v yin<r^a.i to ha. fjt.iff-e, to have no 
middle. 

At« vha-aiv, amongt or amidst the 
islands. 

Atx 'K-atTonv a^io^ S-wf, Herodot. 



333 



above all, leorlky of consideration. 

Aia x^^?°^f **•" X-^?^^ ^PC^'*"* '3 not 
only to have in hand, or in one^s hands ; 
but also to keep a strict hand over, or 
to take care. 

With the accusative it com- 
monly marks the final, or efiicient 
cause. 

Ai^ a-E ravra y^a^My I write this for 
you. 

Ov h' l(W£, Demosth. non per me, it 
is not my fault. 

, aC avroVy through his means, or in- 
ierpoiit/on ; or for his sake, or conside- 
ration : or in respect to him. Lucian. 

At* oy TgoTrav ; in what manner ; by 
what mea>ii 9 

'AxtfcraTE oTToXa (TvfA.Qy'hevofxev roTg >Ssltt3- 
X°Xg, ha TW L)|UETEgav «7rav9§a>7riav, Basil, 
lisiC'i to I he advice ice give to the poor, 
compelled io it by your inhumnni/y. 

Aia t' EVTSa y.ai y.i\av alfji.a, Hom. 
per arms alrumqite crnorem, Eustath. 
pretends, that ha. with an accusative 
is for Kara. 

NuKTtt h' dixQ^os-m, Od. 0. per almai& 
nocteni, during this heavenly night. 

Sometimes it is understood : s^xovrti 
'srehoigy fxa^ricrofASvoi tregi art*, for hi 
tushoio, Horn, they come cross the fields 
to fight againsl the town- 

EI*2, or 'ES, a preposition answer- 
ing to the Latin in, and properly comes 
ffom e?^i, eo ; wherefore it generally 
marks the motion towards some term 
or object, to which the thing tends 
as towards its end j and governs Ouiy 
an accusative. 

JEi? lxxX7)5-/av, to the assembly, to the 
church. 

EI? a^^ovra, to the prince''s apartment. 

^AvrivBynev slg tov ag^ovra, he made a 
report to the prince. 

Evvug eU tov ^H/aov, u-ell affected tO' 
wards the peoble. 

'A/Jt,aprav£iv sig riva, to offend a person. 

E;c Bair/xejov Xs;/siv, to pronounce n 
panegyric on St. Basil. 

"TfjLVot elf 'ATFoWiuvtt, a hymJt in ho- 
nour if Apollo. 

El? uCgiv, in contumeliam. 

'Eg ^vva/jkiVy or If TO ^vvttrov, pro viri- 
bus, as well as he could, according to his 
ability. 

AiaQs^Knfxivog elf reg MaJtsS'oW?, Paa- 
sanias, having been traduced to the Ma- 
cedonians. 

EyXo/xEvo; avTov eg rriv 'ABwettotv ^\iaS9 
ha^aKKBiV, Thucyd. being willing to tra- 
duce him for the friendship he professed 
for the Athenians. 

'EynXrifxara elg Ttf? ^ABrivaiyg, Thucyd, 
crimes laid to tia charge of the Athenians. 

£1; 



Book VIL Greek Syntax. 



El: Tw ^nfA.Wf against the people, 

E>? ei 7AyBiv, to whisper into one^s 

Ek EXftTov, about a hundred. 
Eij ^caTTEvfA.ara for voluptuous uses. 
E's ro rv^siv, to obtain any thing. 
Elf <m6'KSf/,ov 'wa^i^etv ^^n/uetra, IsOCr. 
to furnish the expense 0/ the war. 

&a.iy to be cmnmended for one^s past ex* 
ploits. 

Elf roh)(^ive, to this present ti?ne. 

Elf BfA.i, Herod, dozvn to me, down to 
our times. 

E'f InttsZokyiVy to excess. 

Ek rptaxorov etc?, within thirty 
years, 

Eif hiavrov, during the whole year. 

Els S'uo, two and two. 

Elf I'vtt, one by one. 

This preposition is also used instead 
-of Iv. 

Elf TKV iKHX^s-idV KaQB^cf^aiy ^sch. 
/ have a place in the assembly. 

Elf -^ufAf^ov olKoh/jiiTv, to build upon 
the sand. 

Jesus came and stood in the midst of them. 

Sometimes it is joined with adverbs ; 
as Ei; ETrstra, or in one word ilquTreira, 
afterwards. 

Elf »7raf , for once only. 

Elf azijjor ever. 

Likewise elf Wo, two and two; eJg 
CfEtf , three and three. 

Elf S'sov, it should be, properly. 

Sometimes it is joined with a geni- 
tive, but then an accusative is under- 
stood ; as elf aJa, into hell, sup. oTnov 
or roTTov. 

It is sometimes understood itself, its 
accusative being only expressed : hzivn 
Ta -srXsiVa a^ia l^pMvro, Thucyd. they 
made use of it (of the fountain) /or the 
tnost solemn pxirposes : where va, is for 
m 'ra, just as in the next member he 
has put U aXKa rwv UfSiv, in the other 
ceremonies, 

'EK before a consonant, or if before 
a vowel, a preposition that generally 
signifies the place of parting, as ex, 
€, a, in Latin. Wherefore it is derived 
from einM, cedo, to give way, to quit, to 
retire. 

It is joined with a genitive, and 
frequently signifies the same thing with 

'1^ "ArriKnq, from Attica. 
'Ek tSv "KzifAivoov, from the meadows* 
01 iiL TTif f-oaf, the Stoics.. 
Oi In, TY,; 'A^cioTTaya ^n^Kng, the AreO' 
pa<riies. 

'Ek ^vs-iwf ^?$gff, implankd btj nature,^ 



Ol e| hitvif, nepotes illius, his posle^ 
rity. 

'Ef alSvof, from ali eternity j at all 
times, ever. 

'Eh 'oral^aiv, from one^s infancy, 

'E« %HJf&?, from the hand, with the 
hand, by the hand. 

'Ex nrns ii^a.q Xafx^^avetrQcU, to take hold 
of by the tail, 

'Ex. rxwofAoov, ex legibvjs, pursuant to 
the laws. 

^E| api'rtf, a prandio, after dinner, 

'Ejc TtfTa, and in the plural, Ik tu- 
•rav, deinde, after this, or because of 
this, 

^E^ iTriTroXris, on the surface, 

'E>t /aregioj'tf, round about, 

'Ek 'sro^.xS tS 'BTB^iovTog, zcith a great 
deal more. 

Tecs ex g'^a.rsias Ik (nsyi^ciov iTToirnran 
cru[/,<po^Zv, Thucyd. he made that expedi" 
Hon with vast loss. 

'ek rZv Ivovratv, as much as in me lies, 
according to my power ; Ik tmv IvS'sp^e- 
jxivMv, as much as I am able. 

'Ex. rocravry)g E7rifA,e\Siag , with such care, 
with such diligence, 

'Eh pi{£v, radicitus,/roOT the root, 

'Ek ©eS, Divinitus, Divinely, by Di' 
vine assistance, 

'Ek xa^tlag iTCoina-z, he did it from his 
heart, or with all his heart. 

"Ek wKh^ 'ifFhcurev, he formed it of 
clay. 

'Ek TaJy IhZv p^|»»^ar(wv. With my oivn 



Sometimes If signifies excess : If 
avavraiv wp^^of aii, Lucian, praeter om- 
nes perpetuo palles, you are always 
paler than any body else, 

'EN, in, a preposition, it comes 
from If, for s is sometimes changed 
into v; and the people of Crete used 
to say Iv yj>i°^> ^^^ ^* PCS*"* '" chorum, 
into the assembly. By the same ana- 
logy the Latin in comes from elg, 
which was first changed into If,^ and 
afterwards into Iv; whence Hesiod 
says Iv (paog, for elg <pa.os. Just as we 
say delphis or delphin, a dolphin; as 
also, sanguis or sanguen, blood. 

It commonly marks the term of 
rest, or the state in which a thing is, 
wherefore it only governs an ablative. 

'Ev oU:t3, in domo, at home, 

'ev dyo^a, in foro, in the market, in 
the assembly, 

'Ev lauTM sTyat, to be sensible, to be 
one^s self. 

*£v IfM lr«, in me est, it depmds upon 
me. 

'Ev tSTiXraig, xat anovrloig, Xcnoph* 

'^ith their shields and darts, 
• 'El» 



Of Prepositions: 



335 



*Ev roa-yr(>}, (subaiid. x^°^t) ^€^^- 
zvkile. 

'Ev roff-uroii fxa^ru^s-if bqfore so mkny 
it'itnesses. 

'Em o7i h, among zvhnm he zeas. 

'Ev roT^ hy-ag-aXs , be/ore the judges. 

»Ev ryrot? vTraroiQ, iinder such consuls. 

'Hrrif/.s\/og h MavTjvEt*, Xenoph. having 
been defeated before Maniincea ; where 
it stands for ad, or circum. 

'ATroj-sXSvre? o-n'hirai; h rn lMz\iA, 
Thucyd. sending armed men into Sicily; 
where it is put to signify in, and ex- 
presses motion, though ia the abla- 
tive. 

tavrny Iv iircn<n oXlyx Xi°^'^ i^sXeffSetiy 
Plato, to free you instantly from the 
heacy had of slander, ivhich yoii have so 
long lain under. Where we find the 
first Iv for the duration of time, and the 
second for the precise time in the same 
government. 

'Ev <|>otoft; s7vai, to be in fear. 
'Ev o^j/5j s7vai Ttvi, to be incensed against 
any' body, 

'Ev iyKXrifxari iTvai, to be indicted, to 
have a crime laid to one's charge, 

/Ev alrU eTvaf, to be accused, to be 
charged aith. 

'Ev ^vva.fx.Ei bTym, to be able, to be in 
favour. 

'Ev XAi^x, vel Iv xaXa;, seasonably, op- 
portunely, at a favourable conjuncture. 

'Ev rapist, diligently, at the first oppor- 
tunity. 

*Ev ymri, justly with reason. 
Ev rZ oo[x'j} Tr,v p^sTga aTTorafAoiv, eX 
humero manam amputans, cutting off 
his arm from the shoulder , 

■ 'Ev <^a.ff/,ay.M i-i, it is instead of a me- 
dian e. 

'Ev vix hfxiv i\aXy)S-s, Heb. i. hath 
Spoken unto us by his Son. 

Sometimes the ablative is under- 
stood : h a^a, subaud. TOTfai, in hell : 
h h^ac-naKa, subaud. ojxw, in doctoris, 
sup. domo, in the master's house, 

•Kav, without the accent, for hoI Iv ; 
as nuv Tiirx, and even in this ; and 
herein. 

''E.Tit, a preposition that comes from 
liToo, seguor, and is joined with three 
cases, according to which it varies its 
signification. 

With the genitive it marks 
the time, or the place precisely, and 
the thiHg under consideration ; corres- 
ponding to the Latin sub, in, and 
super. 

'EttI a^p^ovToj UvQo^Mfj, Gaza, sub 
principe Pythodoro, under the govern- 
ment of Pyihodorus. 

§ 



'ETr*^ i/xS, mea tetate, in my time. 

'ETTi rr.s yr,q, super terram, upon the' 
ground. 

'Es-i t^iit^q tmi,_ to be in a strange 
country. 

'Ett* -zs-oXXSv, among divers things, or 
relating to divers things. 

'EttI Tris hhmg, for pleasure. 

'Evrt Toa-iirMv fxa^rv^ocv, in the presence 
of so many vnlnesses. 

^Ki y'KwTTvg <riyy)V, Itt) H ts irr^os-xiTw 
al^M. These are the three qualifica- 
tions desired by Plutarch in young peo- 
ple ; moderation and prudence in their 
minds, silence in their tongues, and mo- 
desty in their countenances. 

This preposition frequently denotes 
the office or employment of a personv 
the same as a or ah in I^atin. 

'Ettj rativ a.7ro^pa,Twv, a secretis, a secre- 
tary. 

'O iTtl rMV BacikMuv <r<})gay;S'i»v, a regiis 
sigillis, the keeper of the seal, the lord 
keeper. 

'o \ttI 'Tm ^a.crikiy.M y^ny-arctiv , the su* 
periniendant, 

'O lirl rm sv9vvm, or ^nfA,cirio^y X^wv, 
a publicis rationibus. 

Ot tTc\ Tuv Uerr.piyjiv, OY luZTiym, the 
master of requests. 

O! Itt; t^ TctfAi'ta, the- king's treasurer , 
Biidaeus. 

Ot Isr' l^tio-Mi;, or ol Itt' a^ixcrtos;, ike 
magistrates, those that are in pov;sr, or 
authority. 

'Evrl -r^iuv, liii rtrra^icv, three and 
three, four and four. 

'Ett) <paXayycs ayiiV, tO lead OH both 
wings of an army. 

'Ett; k^x?, protenso cornu, to lead 
one tving. 

'E<p' eavrS, of himself, of his oven ac- 
cord; and sometimes by himself, in par* 
ticular. 

'Ett; T»y 'EXX^ivjxiwv tuo'Kzxv, Arlstbt. 
among all the cities of Greece. 

'Ett' «Va,w,cj;jo"to-/i'f)Wif aTi'o^ci^txs , by 
unqiiesivonable authority, by indubitable 
proof. 

u'urnQ^aqlTii @iuv, caUing the gods to 
zvitness his promise. 

'Etts tSv U^av hiJ.o<7o<Ta.i, to sxear by the 
sacred victims. 

"Em Tav rcyJctiv, super C£sls victimis. 
Sometimes Im with a genitive de- 
notes a motion : u7ro7TK$ovrsg W olxtr, 
drawing directly towards home. 

Kavriv&iv Im <3)^a.m; '^X^i^h Zozimus, 
and from thence he went towards Thrace. 
But the poets generally use the abla- 
tive in this sense : Im vavo-lv IXctvVEiv, to 
pi.sh, to run towards the ships. 

With 



336 



Book VIL Gkeek SyNtAx. 



-With the accusative it frequently 
marks a motion towards a thing, and 
sometimes situation, or nearness, or 
the duration of time, and corresponds 
to the Latin super, 

'Em riiv 'Attj«w iTTo^svero, he went to- 
teards Attica. 

'Em 'woa-ov, for how much. 

'Ett^ a7a,y, vpon the ground* 

^E-rl Tag rt^ovkq ^^ursvofAat, I Jjght 
as[ainst pleasurts, 1 wage war against 
sensuality. 

'EttL rhv h^ixy Xtt9i^e<x0aj, Thuoyd. 
to sit near the fire, or rathci ,\'o stick close 
to the altar of his household gods. 

T^y wo'Xjv I^' kavrin inToirxraff'QAi, to re- 
duce the town under his ob^dienir, 

'EctvToy Itt' i^aa-tctv 'sroirio-aerQai, Hero- 
dot. to raise onrs self to a supreme corn- 
marid, 

KXiyetv, ^oitpeiv, >srspia-<7raii Itt* S'o^y, 
flectere in hastani, viz. in the rights 
because the spear was held in the right 
hand : and, on the contrary, £(f>' hvUvj 
or Itt' da-iri'^a., in habenam, in clypeum^ 
signifies to the left, because the bridle 
and shield were held with the left hand. 
Budseus. 

'Ettj rjTo^a A-ja.yklii7%a.t^ Or avavftj^etV, 
to fLo bnck^ to go the same wny one carne* 

^Em ruv d^hXciiv w^styjuurciov "Kiytra-i, 
it is said of ambiguous, or uncertain 
things. 

With the abilative it marks 
the end, the cause, or the poM'er; 
the place, or the succession of time and 
things. 

'Ev' dtyoBS wavra IWm^ he did every 
thing for the best, 

^E'Tti T8T0£f , after thaty moreover. 

*£fT{ Xoyois , in the arts. 

'Em r^ x.EgS'Ei, for gain. 

'Ejtj tm e-S ovofjutri) in honour of your 
name. Lucian. 

^AXXoi Itt' oKh.ois, one after the other. 

*0 liii waa-i Ta^Qelg, the last of all. 

EttI 'Sraiirl navtaig ^id^o^otg dvBTfav- 
c-ATo, Herod, he died, transmitting to 
Ms young children the succession of the 
empire. 

'Efrl TKTftj, thereupon, as Iv r-Jroj, 
herein. 

'£<}>' hf/i'v v7ra,^)(Si, it depends on vs. 

^Em T^ooBo-a-i ^ap^£a-0««, to fight against 
{he Trojans. 

'E<}>' hy-cig 'sra^aa-nevet^erai, he is pre- 
paring, or getting ready against us. 

TloiiTv Im tCvi, to subnjit a thing io 
one^s judgment, or to put a thing in one^s 
power. 

'Ett avrS moiy^trcifAtQa, to tojsto, Lu- 
cian, let us take his advice in this, lei us 
refer- it to his judgment. 



'Ettj pnroif, under certain clauses, c? 
conditions. 

'EttI rsTiw, or E<f>' Z, provided that, 
so that. If there be any conditions, it 
is usual to .ptit the plural, l^l ryrotg ; 
and in the distribution, joining each 
member by conjuncfiou, l<p' ai re, aat, 
&C. as eTTi THroiQ e<|») •)(a.^iii(j-Qon fag 
dva.'rrauKas t«v 'sro'Kefxaov. i<p' oort fA,rt6sv 
'in ijsra§4xiviiv, Kal ItcI r^y &c. Dionys. 
Halicar/ he replied, he ivould agree io a 
suspension of arms, upon condition, first, 
that they ivmld raise ito mnre eommo~ 
tions for the future ; and, sicondly, ihatf 
&c. 

Soinetimes we find g<j>' ^, or l^' oTs 
alone ; as tw £lg!iv)jv g-i^^oteiv, l<p' olg 
av rsroTs ^Maioig tv^mtiv, Id. they would 
willingly embrace a peace, could they but 
have it upon honourable terms. 

They likewise say, its^ dyaO^, or 
a'.tria, Tup^»j, in a lucky hour : and in the 
plural, Itt' dyaBoT;, or aWiotg oiaovotg, 
bonis & secundis avibus, with a good 
omen. 

'Em fiisyig-a) rr,g 'sro'Ktaog dyaQS, for the 
greater good nf the commonwealth. 

'Em roa-irw g-^arsvfxcirt, Thucyd, 
with so considerable an army. 

'Eir d^h\c^j on an uncertainty. 

'Ett' diT^aXs^i^Cfi, for the safest* 

'EttI Tv^jTi, by chance. 

'E4>' hfxsfa, during the whole day. 

'Em mavTM, during the year. 

'EttI tm 'srora.fA.a, near, or along the 
river. Likewise in composition ImQn^ 
"kdas-ios. Thucyd. maritime, or near the 
sea. 

It njarks also the term of action, 
especially with the verbs <^o'ja.v, to 
breathe blood and fire, or an^vmiv, to 
proclaim by a herald: thus 4>avay iTtl 
rm, to be enraged against any body, -so 
as to contrive, or desire his death. 

'A^yv^iov wpvmiv Itt'i rm, or tivt 
tTtMnoxiTTuy., to set a price upon one^s head, 
to offer a sum of money to whoever will 
■ bring a person's head. Budaius. 

KATA , a preposition that admits of 
various significations, and is generally 
joined with two cases, viz. the genitive, 
and the accusative. 

With the genitive it frequently 
marks the term to which a thing tends^, 
or where it arrives, and the mediuna 
where it is done, and through which it 
passes ; as 

K«T« Ala-^ivn hdyoq, the oration against 
^schines. 

Kara tS Kv^ia, against ike Lord. 
Kara ctkct^, contrary to his design. 
Kara ynq naQnfAai, I am seated on the 
ground. 



Of the Injinithe. 



Kerr' av0g*7r« JtaJ Xitita to ^wov T^syerat, 
animal is applicable both • /o man and 
horse. 

Karx TTSTgSy, upon (he rocks, along the 
roch. 

KttT ii^a.vs,fiom heaven. 

Kara. vJora, or mroo)/, behind. 

Kara Koppng'txraUiv, Lucian, to give a 
slap in the face. 

Ka0' ifjLMV 'ii;-ai pt*g«5) St. John, grace 
•wiil be with you. 

Tg/a lyKa>fA,ta, JtttQ' iifxaov Ta »aXX{C"*j 
Dem. the three great commendations that 
are given yiiu. 

Kara j/^? aitoTe'tiAirco, Aristoph. I send 
under ground. ' 

Kara t5 (Aty'i^a ^io^j ^sop. by the 
great Jove. 

. Ol xara, Ayct'tf, those that were in the 
\iime of Lysias. 

Kaff oK-nq ng 'laJa/a^, Acts ix. 
ihrffughuut all Judea. 

Kara. ^f)Xr,s, near the column. 

Kara TiavTos eitteTv, to tell in general. 

Kara tsavrmy v.om'i lo> Aristot. it is 
common, with all. 

Kara r3 alrS ovra, Gaz. that are of 
Ihe like form. 

With the accusative it commonly 
marks some conformity, or relation 
of proximity, equality, order, or re- 
semblance : whence it has several 
expressions in this government,^akin 
to those of the genitive. 

Kara MarQaXcy,' BvayykhioVf the gospel 
according to St. Matthew. 

Tm Kara a-avrcv eKa, take a wife 
agreeable to your temper, or circum- 
stances. 

K&ra yvuifxnv, or nara vav I'^ttfvs, it has 
succeeded as ivell as I could wish. 

Kara rov 'VS-o^Q/xov hyevovro, they arrived 
near the harbour. 

Aj Kara ro (rSfA.a h^oval, the pleasures 
of the l)ody. 

KttT Eixova ©fy, according to God^s 
image. 

Mcf^ov ri xar ihioriKhv rvXrtV, above a 
private fortunp. 

■Kara ravavrim, to ike contrary. 

Kar Wty-dq, Herodot. little at a time, 
by little and little. 

Kara fSTXriQos, in a great number, in a 
body. 

Kara. «ro3-oy BvQa^a-Zg BtX^"^* ^^^V '^^^'^ 
a little bolder. 

Kttfl' I'va, one by one : and sometimes 
in- unum, together, in a lump :• KaB' sva 
Siiravrts yevofAivti, being all gathered iO' 
get her. 

Kara >sro^a, or 'oro^as ; or even in 
one word, Karctreo^ag, e vestigio, close 
to his heels ; as k«t« isTsS'rtf, ttncr^al rm^ 

X X 



337 



to trace one's footsteps, to foUoxv close to 
Ms ht^els : which is also found in a figu- 
rative sense, r» S"£ xara lu-o^as hfj^s^a, 
Herodot. the next day. 

Karat ^ofxa ahtVj to sing with the 
mouth. 

Kara, co'X°''j ^V ranks, in order, by 
rows, verse by verse. 

Kar eiroq, at every verse. - , 

Kara (jlik^qv Ivi'jrXiXov, is the sams as 
ImvXBXov, more and more; and narii 
fxiK^ov ^TTov, the same with nrrov only, 
less and less. - . 

Kafl' Bavrov,' of .himself, all alone; 
M.ar l^iav, apart, separately. 

Kar Ifj^l, as for me, for my party . 
according to my opinion ; or else, me only, 
according to my power and abilily. 

Ta Kar' iy,l, ^up. oWa, my' goods. 

Kara ^vva/xiv, according to his strength. 

Kar avrisq akv o^a, Hom. he conli- 
nualbj looked at them. 

Kara g-HQog KaXs, he hit him on the 
stomach. 

Ol x-aS' iiTTEgo^Jiv vofAoi, the laws re" 
I a ting to exxess. 

Kara, n^arcg, by force, by violence. 

Karl of.vS'ga, by heads. 

Kara <pvKa,by tribes. 

Karkfxwa^ or ^r/ac, every month* 

Kara 'srSxstg, from tQVon to town. 

Kara. moXtVy in the city, or concerning 
ihe city. 

Kara fooTTriia, among the briars. 

Kaff Ig-o^iav h x^eiaVf Aristides, to see^ 
or to traffick. 

'A9nvaieiiv Kara to vTrmoov ztvaij to be 
subjects of the Athenians. 

Ta Kar sfAtpaciv, things that are only 
in appearance. 

Ta Ka6' vita<raciv, things that are real 
and. solid. 

Kara Bo^sav If ri«ai?, Thucyd, exposed 
to the north. 

Kar IVcj, at every xcord. 

Karav^v 'ST^o-xjio^iC, it succeeds accord- 
ing to his desire. 

Kara, ^aff'ikkasq y^d(A.y.ara, according to 
ihe king's patents. 

KaQ' o^ov, along the road. 

Kara p^aSgav sfxivov, they staid in tlie 
country: Kara, on the ground. 

'O ""xafl' h(Ji,aq ysyovobg, or Only o Kctff 
hfxag, 07ie born among us, one of our time, 
or contemporary : ol Kar l^us, those oJF 
my age, my contemporaries. 

Kara inravra, generally, inlirely^witk' 
out exception. 

Kara ©£ov^ divinely. 

Kara a-Tra^nv, carefully, diligently, 

Kara Katgov, reasonably, 

Kara Koa-fAoy, decently. 

Kara ht^tv, literally, to ihe letter. 

Kara 



33S 



Book VII. Greek Syntax, 



Kara Xoyov, reasonably, or proportion' 
ahly. 

Kara: Kc^erov, perpendicularly, 

Kara Tyj VEX^yj oVrXa 'arXettw lxi<f>9)5, 
they took more arms than they found dead 
dodiet, plus quam pro numero mor- 
tut>L'um. 

Kara t^v v7ra^)(iie-av ia-tav, pro fa- 
cultatibus, in proportion to his circum- 
stances, 

Kara roitm;, pro locls, according to 
the nature, or situation of the places. 

Kara Tjrevtav, Thucyd, because of pa- 
yer iy, through poverty, 

KrtT^ is sometimes joined with an 
ABLATIVE, but Only among the poets, 
and then it is taken for in, ah, or de ; 
as xar' ogE5-<j>j, in montibus, de montibus. 

It is also used by circumlocution 
with the article : ol *a,r uyo^av, viz. 
Ayo^oioi, the barristers^ or the market' 
people. 

It is sometimrs understood : /*Eya? 
•za-Xeugav /38?, iiwo a-fjLin^aq ofAOdt; fxa^t- 
yos 0560; Etj o^hf an ox, though big it 
is, is drove along the road wilh a small 
Xvhip. Soph, that is, xara mXsv^iv, 
magnus per, or secundum latus. In 
like manner ^v^os r ovo/xa, Kat rfiv fna- 
r^'i^a, nomine ^ patrid Cyrus. And 
hence the Latins have borrowed castera 
Gtaius, fr actus membra^ &c. 

METa\ a preposition, which is gene- 
rally joined with two cases, the genitive 
and the accusative; and sometimes 
among the poets with the ablative. 

With the genitive it denotes con- 
junction, or union, the same as oum in 
Latin. 

MsQ* av TO ymaiiv itriv, fjttr hiiivcov 
©60?, they of whose side justice is, have 
God of their side. Msra rivog sTvai, to 
he of a person's party^ to be with him, 
to hold for him : (aeQ' ottXmv, cum armis, 
in arm is, in orm J. 

METa rS yvjxvoi^i&^ai, with exercise, 
exrrc'tsing one^s self. 

With the accusative it admits of 
divers significations, which are almost 
all reducible to circum, per, iny ad, post, 
or inter. 

Banr^ov «v alrx fxtrk. ;^£'tg*?, Herodot. 
he had a stick in his hand. 

METa Jyo rZv CtraXatSv, (p'tKoDVy Lucian, 
xvifh, or in the midst of his tiro old ac- 
quaintances. 

©g>)/»«v 'iSvos fjt,tyiTov hti, fJttra ye 
'ivS'tfs, 'STG.vr'jov avQ^ctiTTCtiv, Herodot. the 
Thracians are, next to the Indians, the 
greatest nation in the world. 

METa Ta hiVK <^^oviy.ct>rB^o^, wiser qfter 
danger. 

Mst' oi^ovj a little after. 



Msr ^[yov raruv, a little qfter this .* 
^ETa ;)Cfovov, some time after : (A,iri 
rem, after this. 

METa Tov ^icv, during life. 

M«9' hfjte^av, while day lasts, 

"Os /WE fxEr IgtS'aj BaKKii, who engages 
me in a lnw-suit, or in quarrels. 

METa VMS IXavveiVf Hom. to push to- 
wards the ships. 

Mera rs yriv Ka) ^icKatr&av hyifxin/a 
avayo^svifcivrm, Plut. declaring him su^ 
preme commander both by sea and land. 

"HXjte /met' aQavaras fxaKa^as, Hesiod. 
■he sinned against the immortal gods. 

With the ablative, which happens 
but seldom, it is taken for cum, in, or 
inter. 

'AfS^ov iQevro fxtrk er<ptcriv, Apollon, 
foedus inierunt cum iis, they entered in- 
to an alliance wilh them. 

Met*! Je cr<^i<rtv oiT(ra h^£ir H. ^. inter 
eos rumor percrebrescebat, the report 
flew amongst them. 

nAPA\ a preposition that is joined 
with three cases. 

With the genitive it marks the 
term of departure, especially from per- 
sons, being seldom used with inani- 
mates, but among the poets ; as 

Ua^' e/xu ^vvai, to give in my name, 
or to pay with my money ; as « me, in 
Latin. 

Uo^tuofxai ma^u rmq, I come from such 
a person. 

^Eya) Je ol^ft fluTov, OTJ isra^'avr^ Ei/ui, 
John vii. ego scio eum, quia ab ipso 
sura, but I know him, for I am from 
him, 

Ot 'ora^a 'aS, your people, those that 
came from you, 

Ta tcra^* l/xv, SUp. ytvoy,£va, or 
iiret^^ovra, what comes from me ; whe- 
ther it is taken in a good, or a bad 
sense. 

Ta -SB-af' alroov, quas apud illos 
sunt, Luke x. 7, such things as they 
gi^e. 

We read also, rsra^d tS ©eS, against 
God himself. 

TJa^a &sZv not rsa^ dvQfwTTmj before 
God and men. 

ila^a vavrctiv ^EoXoyw, above all the 
divines. 

With the accusative, it commonly 
raarks the cause, the means, and the 
method or instrument of doing or 
communicating a thing, or the mo- 
tion it has towards a term or object, 
as also the defect or excess of ?uch 
motion. 

Tla^a <tI nX^o'^., I came totsards you, 

naja Tijv a^iav ^v?rv)(ps, you are more 
miserable than you deserve. 



0/ Prepositions, 



SS9 



Tla^a. •yv<if/.riv, Contrary to expectation. 
na^txTag vofxnr, against the laws. 
TIafa ^5)V« tj/tov, every third tnonth. 
Tlct^at, Tov xaigov, in the favourable mi- 
ftute^ seasonably. 

ritf^tt Tfl oEiTT^fov, during supper. 
Tla^ TOV oS'oJTrogt'av, in the road, along 
the road. 

ITttfa 'wi^Ai;, immediately. 

Ilafa ryj •aroS'a; TJi)v aTToroXiwv, Acts iv. 
<»i /(^e apostles feet. 

FTajtt TO XEy», fit KoV^?* from X'sy'j) 
comes Koytg. 

Ua^ei TO s-y/xSeCjixo?, 3^ chance, accord' 
ing to what happens. 

na^a, ri,fnr vehat ? 

Tlet^ai to a^ntsiv h TifAU^U , punishment 
foUovoeth iniquity . 

ITafa TBj iji8g,7nore than his children. 

n«fa rx hiva, <^^ovi[A.Mrit,o<;y more ex- 
perienced after hardships. 

K^ini hfxi^av zta.^ hfA,s^aVy distinguishes 
between day and day, or one day from 
another. 

Ua^a, ^vvetiMv, beyond his strength^ and 
[ likewise beneath his strength, 
t . ITa§' tKtmv ladvra rn uroXsi yivsrat t' 
uyaBa. through him the republic receives 
all the blessings it enjoys. 

Tla^ci tStov aiQvy.\i(^ weivrsg^ he dispirits 
■gU the world. 

Uu^' aivav TO g-^etrevfjitty throughout the 
tvhole army. 

Ua^K t5to ytyove ra rZv 'EKKnvdov 
^Br^ciyfAttraj herein consists the strength of 
Greece. 

To w*f' «/aS^, what ifi us lies, what 
depends on us, our freewill: 

Tla^a. 'BToku by a great deal. 

Tlf^iSymvTQ 'Sja^ci 'sroXv rZv 2a?;vi»v, 
.T)inTiys. Halicarnas. they obtained a con- 
siderable advantage over the Sahines. 

ITaga 'sroKv Iftv, there is a great deal 
wanting, it is far short. 

Ila^a vTokv TKg ot^iag, vastly beneath 
his dignity, 

TLa^a, >sroXv rZv Tts^vft )ietra)^B(i}f/,imv 
§X^v, he falls very short of the glory ac- 
quired by our last year's success, 

Tla^a, 'wo'Kv txiirdcii rfhQa/, he was very far 
from taking the town. 

The contrary of ^wra^$6 >sro7>.v, is fsra^a 
fxm^v isra.^ hJ.yo'i, and Maga, B^a^v ; as 
'zjraftt |U»xfov nXdov nut)/;, parum abfuere a 
victoria, they went, or were very near 
cbtaining the victory. 

nag* Ixa^ig-ov Ihleiv, proxim^ abesse, 
to come very near, to be within veru 
Jittle. 

Ta J'e wttga (r^iUv lx9oVT£c 'oraQsXv, 
Dionys. Halicarn. having suffered a great 
. deal and being to suffer very soon a great 
deai more. 



TlcLg oxlyaifverpfew excepted, 
TLa^' ix'tyov sTxt rhv ^Mtiv, he had like to 
gain his cause, 

nag' oxlyes ■^ri<^iig «Tt^w9fl, a very 
small number of votes saved him from 
punishment. 

TJaf oXiyov aTtt-^vyis oXtQ^av, Euripid. 
thou hast been very near thy destruction ; 
thou hast had a very narrow escape ; 
which is the same as if he had said, 
'srct^' oXij/ov airoXooXa?, or "riXQa oXia-dcti, 

*Aet yag "crag' oXiyov, h ^ii<^svyov, h 
aVMXXvvTo, Thucyd. for they were al- 
ways within very little of running away, 
or of being destroyed, 

naga fjiM^ov, nra^' oXiyov, liret^a, 0^a- 
j^u, MA^d (pavXav, with the verbs aynv, 
hyeVer9ai, r'lQscrQai, 'BTOiiio-Qai, signifies 
parvi facere, to despise, to undervalue. 
And ma^k 'gtoXv with the same verbs 
imports, plurimi facere, to esteem, to 
have a great value for. 

nag' aS'EV aj/EiV, hyiXa-Qai, 'oroiiiffQet.if 
TiBsa-Qai, nihili facere, to have no esteem, 
or 720 value for, to despise. 

ITaga roaSrov hrrriSelg ave^u^tiTS, SO 
considerably were his forces diminished at 
his return. 

ITttga Toa-srov ax s^i<pvyz rag ^wxov- 
Ttt?» Herodot. tantum non efFugit per- 
sequentium manus, he had like to escape 
those that were in pursuit of him / that 
is to say, he was taken, but he was 
within very little of not being taken. 
This answers exactly to the Latia 
^anVwWjWhich sometimes signifies so great 
and sometimes 072 /y; tantum non montes 
aureos poUicens, Ter. that is to say, pro' 
viising him every thing, but golden moun- 
tains. 

TiKPJ^ is used also in comparisons, 
and that in different shapes. 

ITag' lavrev fA.nHvA l^irhhiov hyeiTO, he 
thought nobody as fit for it as himself. 

Tov g'^ary)yov 'szaga 'sravrag Tyj Iv tm 
'sraXat iv^onif/.hs'ayras s^era^siv, to com- 
pare a general to all those ivho informer 
times were famous for military achieve- 
ments. 

riaga rag xaiga?, according to the timeff 
as it happens. 

It also marks alternation : "araga 
r^iig h/xs^ag, or TgiT>iv hfA.B^av, every third 
day; instead of which we also say, 'ara^a 
TgtT>]v, understanding hfjii^av; and in 
like manner wa^a /^iav, from day to 
day.' 

rlgoVTS; xat VEavttti 'lErag' ev* O'vptvo^evo^ 
(xsvoi, the old and the young men walked 
intermixed one with the other ; as when 
between two old men there is a young 
man, and between two young men 
there is an old maji. -< 

But 



340 



Book VIL Greek Syntax, 



But lu-A^' ha. oftener signifies except 
one, or because of one only, 

/M-svo?, giving Jint a biovo to one, and then 
to another. 

WiTFT THE ABLATIVE, 'jjttga gene- 
rally denotes the place of rest. 

riaga ToTj l^<f)uXiojj isrokifjiois , in the 
civil wars. 

Tia.^ ifA.o\ har^i'^Bt, he lives zvitk me, 
he stays iviih me. 

Tla^a ^a<ri\e" naQritatyhe is seated near 
the king. 

TTaga (ro), it depends on you. 

^Nevertheless, it sometimes expresses 
motion in this case : £<}») x^nmi livai 
fmaga, lio-c-cii/i^m, uq EKiXevs, Xenoph. 
Jie. said that those who zvere ordered should 
go to Tissaphemes. 

In composition, 'csasa, sometimes 
diminishes, or destroys the force of the 
simple ; as 'wa.^o^ku, to see by the way, 
to look at carelessly j 'ara^sia-Qa.KJKO}, io 
fling into, or throw into carelessly, or 
without heeding. Sometimes it aug- 
ments and marks an excess of temerity; 
as 'sra^amv^vvivaif io expose one^s self 
rashly to danger. Sometimes it utterly 
destroys it ; 'cxa^avofA.ita, to violate the 
laws. Sometimes it signifies proximity, 
as the Latin arf ,• 'nra^i^oy.a.i, assideo, f 
sit near, I sit next to. See Book VI. 
Chap. ii. 

nEPf, a preposition, which governs 
three cases, but more rarely the ab- 
lative, and admits of various significa- 
tions. 

With the genitive it frequently 
marks the final cause ; as -zsrs^i rSiv 
nn^airuMv <|)iXov£iX£i', he quarrels for rank, 
or superiority. 

Tle^i taroXku Ig-iV al^eia-Qai to X^t'°^> ^^ 
iiill be of very great importance io have 
that place taken. 

TlB^l -aroXXS rrroiBia-Biti, or rldsa-Bai, 
magni facere, to have a great value for. 

MfjS'EV E^ct) 'stoieXv 'STe^) T av^^ls, I don't 
know what to do ivilh that man» 

Ti p^'^n 'sroiiiv -nrE^i rng ly^H^ntrEuis , 
•what is fit to be done with regard to that 
tCndertaUng, 

IT£f{ txr^oha-iag rSrovK^mJ, I charge him 
Kith treason. 

Herodot. fearing lest they should revolt 
against him. 

ITSfJ ay hr)K'Ka.^av ra? Tuo'Hu'KclvZv 
alxjj,iiXwriig, Dionys. Halicarnas. for 
Tvhom he exchanged the prisoners thai 
were from Tusculnm. 

rie^j aTTavrani a^^ovra, tov Sijcivvjsv ^tto- 
hl^cLvrss,. Dionys. Halicar. giving the 
command of every thing to Sicmnius, ' 



tlefi lo-avrog ^eXeTv, to be fully deters 
mined, to be desirou.i.of all thi^igs. 

Ti av £iVoijM,£v 'Avut« Kol MeXiT« tc-Hjs 
rZv l|W» Kar*iyo^na-a.vTOov i Lucian, tchai 
shall we say to Anytus.and MelHus my 
accusers ? 

'E^arav nxri^f, rivog, to inquire about any 
thing. 

TlB^i 4''JX^i<; y.a,x}(TBa.i, io fght for his ' 
life. • 

IlEgi eTTrtiag, near the derif 

With* the accusative it always 
marks proximity, contiguity, or the 
state of one thing with regard to ano- 
ther. 

'AyrxTiXctog 'WB^t rctZra Zv, Agesilaus'3 
whole thoughts were bent vpon this. 

"Ovri >BrEpl T«y avayvyrtVj Demosth. 
being ready to depart. 

^Hv ^s 'OTB^i ^S"y7ra9£ittv, he was a slave 
to his pleasures J expressing rather the 
habit, than the act. 

TlB^l iTTTovJii? xttj KvXmas Etp^ey, Herodot. 
he spent all his lime in sacrificing and 
drinking. 

Ta mi^i. Ifxl, what concerns me, 
or, as for me, as for my part. In the 
first sense i-a is a nomiuativCj in the 
second it is an accusative that supposes 

Ub^i ro o^oi;, about the mountain^ near 
the mountain. 

Ub^i a^it^a w^av, during, Or about dinner 
time. 

Ol' TS -ZTEgi rhv 'sroXiV lyevovrOf being 
. near the town. 

pie ought to he compared with purple. 

T«<})X5raj TO <^iX5v iitb^i. to <)>iXH|U£V5V, 
Plato, lovers are blind with regard to 
ivhat they love. 

TMTBk ^e '5T£gt Ivvici, Mci, she lays about 
nine eggs. 

'h 'BTB^l Ttf? Qsui slaiQiia, piety, or 
duly towards the Gods. 

TlB^l Ta; a-avrS yonaq ncLKH^yBiV, to be 
wicked to one^s parents. 

TlB^l luiTtv >jXi«, toivards sun-set. 

Elg BTog K^n 'orB^i mn oy'^oriaoirov lx»jXi*Jt(W?, 
Herodot. being now a6out four-score 
years old. 

riEg; 'BToS'a, ad pedem, i. e. apte, 
commode, just fllting, properly, pally, 
a. prnpos. 

It is also used with an ablative, not 
only by poets, but even, though not 
so often, by orators : 'sre^l S'agt, Homer, 
about the spear. 

TlB^l r^ X^*?' Xi^^^^ ^aurCXiov <^i^eiv, 
Plato, to wear a gold ring on one's 
finger. 

nsft h^arioiq j£<f>9si§ovTo , Thucydides, 
they were kdled with javelins. 



Of Prepositions 

Toff ^B^ms, Xenoph, in the 



341 



Tim 

stomach 

Periphrasis. 

Ol WEf t T« h^eit, the priests, or ministers 
of the altar. 

It is also used in the same manner of 
periphrasis, as ttjU<j>i; so that ol tcrs^t 
Toy 'AX£^ttv^§ov, for instance, sometimes 
signifies Air^xnnder o??/!/,sometimes Alex- 
ander's attendants^ and sometimes Alex- 
ander with his attendants. See Book 
Vllf. Chap xii. 

nPO\ a preposition that governs a 
GENITIVE only, and answers to the La- 
tin ante, p (P, or pro ; as 

n^o ^v^Sov, prae foribus, ante januam, 
before the <l'<nr 

IJforS'sroXifji.H, before the war. 

UoKb/xov TETgo Eif«v>)5 a;g£$T«t, Herodot. 
he prefers war to peace. 

iTgo T8 Baa-ikiooq, before the hingy in 
the king?s presence. 

n^o l<^BctK[A.u}v, before his eyes. 

Tl^o tsjoXhaiv ItSv, many years before. 

Ilgo •nroxxs ysvofjLBvct, Herod, things 
that happened a great while ago. 

n^o (JLiaq KttXttv^aJv MagTt'tf, sup. hfjA^ctQy 
the day before the calends of March ; or 
else T^ "EETgo fxia(; xttXavS'Sv kfxk^a. 

'UfAvvovro 'sr^Q tmv vvaroov, Herodot. 
they defended the consuls, 

rigo rZv l^wv fAa^erai, he fights for his 
property. 

Ilgo S'«Xtf S'£<r7roT»?, sup. Ir*, the 
master is above^ or preferable to the ser- 
vant. 

U^o inreii^og ^aveTv, Eurip. to die for his 
child, 

Ol 'srgo hf^oiv, sup. yzyovoTsg, our ances- 
torSy our predecessors. 

npo'2, a preposition, that is joined 
with three cases. 

With the genitive it generally 
marks the term of departure, the same 
as v'reo, or 'Ujw^a, and answers to the 
Latin a, or ah ; as tJT^oi ©?» t' ayaBa, 
bona quje sunt a Deo, the blessings that 
proceed from God. 

EXevQe^ov ilvai •nrfoq fsrctr ^og^ to be free 
of the father^ s side. 

In this sense it is used after the verbs 
passive :- 'ZET^oi,* a,7ra.vrm ^s^a.'ffsvsff-Qai, to 
be valued by every body. 

Theiice also comes the following ele- 
gant phrases : tir^lg -rnq ^aXng Ig-t, e re 
senatus est, it concerns the senate, it is 
serviceable to the senate. 
" ITgo? TJ1? 'sroXsug, jiseful to the city. 

Hgog h[Ac!iv Ig-i, it is our affair^ it con- 
-. mrns us, it is our duty. 

n^ls tS i^ivyovns iiTTiiv, a reo dicere, 
to speak in favour of the criminal^ as much 
as to say, to speak as from him. 



the 



It likewise signifies the manner, 
end, and relation. ^ 

U^oq av^po? dym?, like a mAri of ho- 
nour. 

u^lq khoq, towards the sea, near tiie 
^ea. 

n^oqnvk ttv iyaSS ; of what use is it ? 
what is it good for f 

ITgo? Xoya, seasonally, opportunely, a 
propos. 

O; la-^lq al'fActro?, our relations, our 
kindred, those of the same blopd. 

U^oq y.a)fSlv, p ".mi ciovs, hurtful. 

Sometimes it signifies presence : nT^of 
« @im fjiciKa^cov, in presence of the happy 
gods; and sometimes it is tised in 
swearing, t-t^o? ©e», per Deum. 

U^oq <^ixia, Lucian, by the God that 
presides over friendship. 

It also signifies after : 'ZErgoj ilmg 
q-imq, you complain after being pu- 
nished. 

With the accusative it marks al- 
most always some relation, or motion 
towards a thing, especially towards 
animates, antf corresponds to the Latin 
ad. 

""E^y^jAAi >sr^oq «•£, ad te venio, I come 
to you. 

T« 'w^os hfA,a.q, what concerns us, 

Ta'srjof a-MTn^iav <f)EgovTct, what is Con- 
ducive to our salvation. 

iTfof yoivd It^d, in the public temples, 

n^oq TO yn^aq, in old age. 

Ti^oq Tov ^aa-iXU, to the king, before 
the king, 

H^q Baa-iXitt. yivofxivtti a-vvBrnai, the 
agreement made with the king. 

2vnra^A^9ri<ra.v 'crgos to d^ioofAet ra avS'goff, 
Plut. they were troubled at the man's 
gravity. 

ol ha.<^£^oy.svoi 'orpq rov MagKEXXov, Id, 
Marcellm's enemies, those that xvere tit 
variance with him. 

Aiaru'^i^Brai h Iq-o^la 'Tr^oq to lyacifxiov, 
Lucian, history is parted as it were by a 
wall from panegyric ; that is to say, 
there is a very wide difference between 
relating facts, and commending per- 
sons. 

T»Vi» 'sr^oq IVsgov o-noTfiiv, to compare one 
person with another. 

'sis Tu ^uo rff^oq ra rsa-<ra^ei, ouroi) n»l 
TBC ria-a-a.^a 'Bjpoq onrai, as two are to four, 
' so are four to eight. 

Ilgof TOV Ep^9gov ^laXKama-Qm, to be r^- 
C07iciled to one's enemy. 

TIccXE^rai ^)q 'sr^oq ro a^yv^iov, it costs 
twice as much, 

ITgoj ;c*'S"'> f^^' /favour, out of com- 
plaisance. 

Tl^oq aXKov ^w, to conform to another 
person's way of living. 



S42 



Book VII. Grjeek Syntax. 



n^i^TTs^tOpportunelyf aptlyy apropos. 
'O vr^ rl, what relates to something. 
Thus the relatives are denominated by 
philosophers. But when -ergs? t/ is 
lised in interrogation, it signifies, quor- 
aum ? vohat is this for f to what purpom 
thisf 

rinrat <sf^o( tj, to be busy about tome' 
yihinp, 

'hS'Iw; e^eiv •nr^o? airavrai, to render 
one's self agreeable to every one. 

ta ^^<nfA,a, -arpo? aXXtt naXa aX\dr- 
TovTtti, Aristot. they exchange their own 
goods for others. 

n^of Kivr^a XoxTt'^Eiv, to kick against 
ike pricks. 

n^k an^octrriv, in favour of the au- 
dience. 

Tl^o; o^yhv, out of anger. 

Tl^og Bictv, byfijrce, 

n^o? is-EjCoXw, by excess. 

n^of <piXiav, in friendship. 

U^is d^Qonav, in plenty. 

ITfOf Hxi^ov-, seasonably, a propos, 

U^os ajiftSsiav, carefully, exactly. 

n^es dxfiQsiav, truly, really, 

HfcV avXoVf xvitk the sound ofr the pipt^ 
Otfiute. 

n|o? ri/waj <}>jXw, the friendship that 
subsists between us. 

n^k o^Qhv sup. y^tt/u^»v, perpendicu- 
larly. 

npoi; raZret, thereupon, after this. 

ITgof d^ict)f/,af according to his dignity, 

*AXXfls yswarai iff^o; toj r^Avf/.a.ra, 
Plut. sed inter vulnera nasciiur. 

With the abt.ative it generally de- 
notes proximity, or identity. 

rigo? TOic iffoa-lv, at his feet. 

TT^f rn -sroXet, near the town. 

rifof savTM, in himself. 

TTgofTaTQijoXo? Iri, totus est in illis, 
Hor. he is quite taken up with it, he 
thinks of nothing else. 

rr^5 ^i T«Toj?, moreover. 

Tifof rareis, signifies also, with them, 
at their house, 

Ot 'ST^ig tcCxg xyXj^t, Herodot, cup- 
bearers. 

2YN, Att- SYN, a preposition that 
governs the ablative, and corresponds 
intirely with the Latin cum, with. 

2vf ©£f, with Godf with God's 
help. 

2vv \oy!M)j with reason, agreeably to 
reason: 

2vv rm eTvaj, to be of one's party, to be 
of his side. 

IIm Tojf vofjioif, according to the laws, 

2hv JiJo, two and two, 
2iv r^sTs, three and three. Sec. 
This preposition is frequently under- 
stood; as 



Plut. in Demetr. he took both genpruL 
and army. 

'rnE'p, super, upon, a preposition 
that is joined with the genitive and 
accusative : the signification of it will 
appear by the following examples. 

With the genitive: viri^rni ciym, 
upon the roof. 

'YTTEg Zv ttr^a^a lg«, I shall speak of 
tohat I have done. 

El ®eos IttI^ hfjkZ)/, t;j x«9' }}fA,Zv ; 
Rom. viii. if God be for us, who can be 
against us 9 

'Yttb^ ruv uTroQavovrcov Iv rZ wdXi/xu, 
Dionys. Halicar. in the room of those 
that perished in the war, 

'TttI^ tS XaQeXv, in order to be concealed. 
'Twi^ rrs lis md xotva <piXoriy.ia,s, for 
ili€ love and affection they bore towards 
the republic. 

. With the accusative : Iret^ y^Vf 
upon the ground. 

'tTtl^ TO. jusTga, beyond measure, 
Ta vire^ hfAOLS, aS'Ev vr^ls Kfxaf, quae 
supra nos, nihil ad nos, what is above 
us, does not concern us. 

'Yw£g Tov Kdi^oVj Lucian, unseasonably, 
untimely. 

'rud, sub, under, a preposition that 
is joined with three cases, and corres^ 
ponds to the Latin suh, or ad. 

With the genitive it commonly 
marks the efficient cause : voa-u ics-o 
movii, he is sick through hard labour, 

'AvaXftJTOj l^To )(yj^y,droov, itou iiTTo h^ovZv, 
not vifo <p6^ti, whom no money, pleasures, 
nor menaces could corrupt. 

Wherefore it is not only joined with 
passive verbs, but also with neuters, 
like the Latin ab : d^iQavtv vm vrv^ira, 
he died of a fever : a^^a^ev vjri MsveXioo, 
he was killed by Menelaus ; just as 
Cicero says, nihil est vahntius o quo 
inter eat. 

We likewise find.it with the substan- 
tive verb ; £?»«» Iv U^-n inri nws, to be in 
somebody's esteem. 

In a signification bordering upon this, 
it is taken for propter : Itto rns a^^X" 
Qiias, by reason of the hatred. 'Tv Iv- 
hlas, ab inopia, Cic. because of the ne- 
cessity I am under. 

But it is used in several other signf- 
fications ; as rns a-vyK\fira avh^, vtio 
vTrctrriidi fxh v£<w?-'> Herodot. a senator, 
and but lately out of his consulship. 

'rm a-Kore, during night, or towards 
night. 

It is also put for dTri; as Itto r^av- 
fAaraiv ^SPaTTiviTQcti, Prutarcb, to be cured 
of his wounds. But this happens very 
seldom. 

It ■ 



Of Prepositions. S43 

It oftener signifies *mA, which is With the ablative it may be ren- 

derived from it : vttS t^# r^'>"!5> s«b dered various ways : 

ie^io^ in the house. ^ ym yn, under ground. 

Likewise, with an accusative it 'Ttto ^aCJ«<c IfjiS •sraa-ait ncu waXixio-t, 

generally corresponds to the preposi- Plat, with all their rods and axes, 

tion fub, whether it marks the place, 'Tiro ni^a-nrt a^xj^aif to begin with 

time, or power. the Persians. 

'Two trtv -sroXtv, sub urbem, near the 'H vnl PaXXoi? y8vo/xEv>j Sxw^jf, the 

town. taking of the t(wn by the Gauls. 

'Tito ts? alre^ X^°''*'^i ^"^ idem tem- 'Ttto to7c olntloii a{jLit^Tfi(jia/rt, by reason 

pua, about the same time. of his own transgressiom. 

'T4)' IttuTov ipoiita-Qmy to reduce ^nder 'Ttto rn 'cs'oiturti liraiViTa-Baif to be com- 

fas obedience. mended for his poetry. 

Ol U7T0 p^sTgac, Dionys. Halicar. those 'Ttto eue-^^aXt hhvxTf , Herbdi, because 

that are in other people^s power. of his debauchery. 

We likewise read, vtto 'sro^ct "jfui^my 'ETrointriV v^' iavrS rh uar^ rh <})(wxtJ*, 

pedem referre, to retire, he subdued the whole province of Phocis, 

ANNOTATION. 

So Jar have I collected ixihat to me appeared most necessary ^ in re* 
gard to the government of prepositions ; and whoever xuill be at the 
trouble of reading this list afeix> times over^ I do not at all doubt, but 
he tvill be soon capable of forming a right idea of their significationf so 
as to understand them in authors. Houoever^ if there stttl remain mi^ 
difficulties they tvill be removed in the next bookf chap, xii* 

Rule Vll. 

Of the questions of place. 

The questions of place are answered hy adverbs ; 
Or by the foUowing prepositions: 
The question ubi, by ly with the ablative ; 
The question quo, by iU with the accusative ; 
The question unde, by eg with the genitive ; 
And the question qua, hy Sioi also with a genitive. 

Examples. 

The questions of place are all very easy in the 
Greek ; for they are answered either by an adverb of 
place, as *k^ivr,<n, Athenis, to be at Athens ; 'A^moc^Sy 
Athenas, to go to Athens ; *a6>!i/ii9£i/, ex urbe Athena- 
rum, to come from Athens; with others that may be 
seen in the sixth book, Chap. i. 

Or else they are answered by a preposition adapted 
to each question, in all sorts of nouns, whether of 
great or small places, Ip *Puixvi, at Rome ; €k *Pw/x»i/, 
in urbem Romam, to Rome ; U 'Pw^t)?, from flome ; 

hoi 



344 Book VIL, Greek Syntax. 

3ioi yri? kk) ^oc\(x,<r<f'n(;y bif sea and land. This question 
has no particular adverb to answer to it. 

ANNOTATION. 

The poets frequently omit the preposition, here as well as in 
Latin, and sometimes also the orators ; Ma^afiwv/ for Iv Ma§a0A/v/, 
Thucyd. at Marathon, 

Sometimes the construction of the accusative is found in the 
question «5?"; as rx iraiVix (xh juer' l/xS iis t^v xotT»jv £/<7<, Luke xi, 
instead of saying, Iv t>5 Kolr-n^ ^ueri mei mecum sunt in cubili, -But 
we may probably understand there a participle of motion with 
the verb of rest ; as Ix^oyrt^ eIo-i, instead of ^x6ov, according to 
what we have said Rule IV. Though it is observable, that some- 
times the repose is put in the accusative, and the motion in the 
ablative ; whereof several examples may be seen in the preceding 
list, in the prepositions h and Iv. Whence it proceeds, that in 
Latin the preposition zw, which answers to those two prepositions, 
is sometimes put with the accusative of rest, and sometimes with 
the ablative of motion, as we have shown elsewhere. 



CHAR III. 

Of the Government of the Genitive. 

Rule VIII. 

Nouns that govern^ or are governed in the genitive. 

1. The pinmitive pronoun is used in the genitive instead 

of the 7iominative of the possessive, as zraTri^ {ah : 

2. A genitive is also 7'equired after verbals compounded 

with a; 3. after compai^atives ; 4. and after 
several adverbs, 

5. Nouns signifying the cause, are also put in the 

genitive : 

6, As likemse 720U7is expressing price ; 7. ^natter ; 

8. part ; 9. or time. 

Examples. 

1. X HE genitive, as we have observed in the Latiti 

Method, always denotes possession ; wherefore the 
Greeks frequently put this case of the pronoun as 
'mxrY\^ jxiiy pater mei; instead of saying, pater meus, 

my 



Goternment of the Gemtwe. 545 

ffiy father: pxoivy-wvy the friend of us, instead of owr 
friejid, 

2. They also put this case after verbal nouns com- 
posed of oc privative, because they consider them as 
substantives : dx^iocrog tt]; un^sToc?, who has not seen the 
truth: rtq S" is-\ ^8?\og rs ^oivsTt/ utp^ovn; wj/ ; Euripid. 
an servus ille, qui caret mortis metu? can that man be 
deemed a slane, that is under no apprehension of death ? 

3. After comparatives : /as/^wv Ijws, major me, greater 
than me: oi[xoc§Tocvn no,) o-o^wre^o?, iEschin. the wisest 
of men are sometimes mistaken : dm^x^ot?, /Asr^oi/ 8>c fVt xaxov* 
avrri zroXng r oAAucti/, ti S* MOifocrsg o'Uag t/Gtio"*, Soph. 
there is no one greater evil than anarchy : it destroys 
whole towns^ and lays waste their buildi?igs : a^x^iv [/.niiv) 
zT^ogmst, oV iiSl }i^£iTT(a» If) ruiv a^j^o//,£i/«v, Cyrus apud 
Plut. no body is ft to command, unless he excels in 
goodness those that are to obey him, 

ANNOTATION. 

We have not mentioned here the superlativef "which also governs 
a genitive, because it is the same government as the Latin; as 
vdvrm a.vO^oJ'jrcov ^ix.xtorar'x;, Theog. omnium hominum jiistissimus, tlie 
justest of all men; xvhich must be resolved by the preposition, just as 
Lucian says lyoj l| uirota-wv ^ xxXKirn £%|«, I was reputed the 
handsomest of all. 

The reason of' the government of the comparative lies also in the pre~ 
position ; for fAti^a'v I/aS, is as much ces to say, ixsi^uv I-tj-/, or lu^o 
fuS, the same as in Latin, major me, that is prse me, or pro me, 
who excels in comparison to me : where ive Jlnd an exact con- 
Jbrmity between both languages, if not in the case, at least in th-c cause 
of the government, which is the dependence on the preposition. 

Remarkable compressions with the comparative. 

Sometimes the comparative assumes the particle ^ (as the Latins 
use quam) either with its government of the genitive, as uiA.lXriaat 
a^e/Wiv vi v/xwv; Or with the case attracted by that of the preceding 
verb, u^iXviffix cc^sloa-iv TjTTs^ vyiAVy Hom. versatus sum cum fortio- 
ribus viris quam estis vos, / have conversed with braver men than 
you s or by inserting a preposition with an accusative : Ixxdru v w^? 
TO xxro^9co[Ax vo/x/^£/v Bivai rriv ^o^av, to think the honour inferior to the 
merit of the action, Msi^oa-iv vi y.ocrac, nnv vTrdfx^crxv iialav, Thucyd, 
majoribus quam pro suarum facultatum mode, greater than their 
fortunes would permit f or else with uq ; as ^si^co ^ wj tw Aoyw n^ av 
tWot, Dem, majora quam ut aliquis explicare ea verbis possit, 
greater than it is possiblefor words to express .* or finally with the in- 

Y y finitive; 



31o Book VII. Greek SyNt/ix. 

finitive ; as /xe/^wv ri usrt (ps^tiv, too great to he endured. Which hasf 
been introduced only to prevent ambiguity, or to adorn the sen- 
tence; though sometimes they neglect using these circumlocutions, 
as xaAX/ov tZ tsoiitv (piKaSf oOveiuv, Aristot. instead of -JcaXX/oj £u isof 
sTv <pl\ii<;, 19 odv£*s^ it is more comwendable to serve one's Ji'iends than 
strangers: where it is observable, that the genitive o^yniuv is go- 
verned by the comparative, though there is an accusative before 
(f)/^8r, which we must suppose to be done by virtue of the preposi- 
tion understood* 

There is likewise another sort of periphrasis with the preposi- 
tions, without vi : zyXsUvos ^o^nq zjx^oc Muariv 'h^icorxt, Heb. xiii. he was 
counted *uoor thy of more glory than Moses ; that is, in comparison mth 
3Ioses* "Trs^a TO! aXXa -TT^oy rm a^sr^v, Thucyd. instead of vs-B^a 
t^s k^trvsf every thing is inferior to virtue. We find also other 
j)repositions used on this occasion ; 'cy^i, v'ujs^, &c. Ot viol t5 u'tmos 
THxe (p^ovifAuTEPoi vfrl^ vlnq rS (pojrlq, Luke xv. the children of this 
world are more prudent than the children of light. W^hich Virgil 
seems to have imitated. 



'Scelere ante alios immanior omnes. JEn, I. 



They also join other particles with the comparative, to augment 
its force, as x/^xy, zjoiw, ^oLxxovi -croXy, &c. -CTccvy jutr^ov, a great deal 
bigger ; 'ij^SiXXov Iroi^oxB^ov^ much readier^ a great deal better prepared ; 
and such like. 

Sometimes they put ^la'KXov with the positive, instead of the 
comparative, &s magis in Latin : . i^xkoc^iov Wf ^i^ovxi /xaXXov ^ XaiA- 
C«y£/v, it is a happier thing to give than to receive. And sometimes 
it is understood : ycxXlv ro /w.^ ^^v Inv, ^j ^ryv k^xluq, Menander, it 
s better to be dead, than to live in misery. 'AyaQov zjsiroMmt lirl 
Kv^iovf 7} Trezjoi^svoK lii uvO^wttuv, Psahn cxviii. it is better to trust in 
the Lord, than to put confidence in man; bonum est sperare in Do- 
ftiino, quam sperare tn homine. 

Now because the force of the comparison is included in the 
particle, as we have proved in the Latin Method, we can also 
make use of the superlative, where one would think there ought to 
be a comparative, or vice versa; as o-n '^nvoraroq o-xvth vta-Qx, 
Xenoph. tvhe?! you even surpassed ijourself; that is to say, liii a-uvr^, 
or cr^o cravre, prag te ipso, in comparison to yourself. And in St. 
John ]. 'sj^uiTos [JI.8 h, prior me erat; that is to say, 'crquros -crfo 
!//,» he tvas before me. Tob appsvx KviiJi-Evx Kir/irmurxroi Irt ruiv 
S*jXf<yj^, Aristot. the males are much apter to move in the womb of their 
mothers, than the females. On the contrary, we find the compa- 
rative put for the superlative; ij^^^, 'axvrav ^x^vrs^og, Synes^^^ 
for ^x^vrxros, a great deal more troublesome than all the rest. 

It is proper also to observe, that sometimes the comparison is 
taken in a bad sense, though the words do not seem to import 
it; as x^siTTwv T^? CTa/^Eta^, eruditione melior^ vel Jbrtior, that is to 
say, past correction, too bad to be taught any good. Just as when the 
French say, 07i ne lui sauroit rein apprendre^it may bear two diffe- 
rent senses, being applicable to a very learned man, wha knows 
every thing; or to a heavy blockUpad, who is unteachable. 

Th€ 



The Government of Adverbs. 347 

The government of adva^b^, 

4. A genitive is also put after several advei'bs; as 
Adverbs of place: jw-exfi SaVwi/, Arist. as far as 
Siize. "E(c; TH egw ToVa, Id. as far as the place without. 
'^Etimv M BafcuAwi'o?, / drew directly towards Babylon. 
'Evto? EauTs ilv.oci, to be within one's self. 'E>£to^ Imr^ 
ilvaty to be out of ones self Ol hrlq Xoy(av, the learned^ 
those that are versed in the arts and sciences. Ol Iktq; 
?.GyooVf those that do not concern themselves with the sci- 
ences, "Egw jSeXw^, extra tela, extra aleam, out of danger, 
^Eyyxj; y^roi^x;, prope diras, near malediction. TnXn rwi/ 
ccy^ojv, far from the fields, nop/w rm utto^bo-eu^, far 
from the subject. OJx aVoSfv rr^v ' Avr lox/U^, not far from 
Antioch. Ue^ocu t8 "lo^SavB^ the other side of Jordan. 
Us^x zrda-n; ^inyria-sug, exceeding all recital or narrative. 
''E[Air^o(r^£v lyisimu tccttbiv, to place before them. K^a^u 
oTTKT^Ev Yi^ooVi skc crics oftcr lis. ^Eiram wacvrw, above alL 

t'Kov.drta rn (Tujci??, under a fig-tree. Mira,^\} r{Ji.(cv xccl 

^fji,iovj betiveen you and us. KuxAoSfi/ th.^^ovh round about 
the throne. 'Evocvrm ^i^m, in your presence. 

Adverbs of hiding and concealing: x^Jtp^ rc^y aX- 
Xwv, unknoxvn to the -rest. Ad^^x -arxr^o^^ without his 
father's knowledge. 

Of separation : av£v Koty^oirHt without trouble. Outs 

(TViJi^TTotriov avsu ofji^ovoiucy sts -stkhtoj PC^f'^ cc^BTTjg 'j^Sovriv 

%X^h Procop. there is no real satisfaction in feasts with- 
out concord^ nor in riches without virtue, t^i-^oc Usivcoi/, 
without them. 'Ekto? wVt'i/wi/, xvithout pain, 'UU t«v 
aAAwi/, separately by one's sef. 

Of exception ; -urXw olxxuv, excepting the rest. Xco^U 
rm u^yifAsmi/j exclusive of zvhat has been said. To yol^ 

yJ^v^Tiv. The words of Grantor, thus translated by 
Tully : istud nihil dolere non sine magna mercede con- 
tingit, immanitatis in animo, stuporis in mente, Tusc. 3. 
this exemption from pain is purchased by man at a very 
extravagant rate, since his body is rendered thereby dull 
and heavy ^ and his mind becomes savage and crueL 

Of 



S4S Book VIL Greek Syntax. 

■ Of order : l(pB^^^ rU hk, deinceps post unum, "Egw n<; 
rdj^eug, ej^tra ord'mem. 

Of number : aVag ivt«uT», owce « 3/e<2r. 

Of the final cause : rH ^sXtts-SyJor the best. Ts «$^- 
da; tuocriy for the sake of gain, T?? olxMoi<; xd^^Vi for 
truth's sake. 

Of time : oiror^ t8 ets?, at what time of the year, 
"ATTOi^ T?? 9iVe^^?, once a day. A)? t8 jtAni/o?, twice a 
month, T^K T8 IviuvT^j thrice a year, "Ew? tJ vuv, to 
the present time ^ till now, "Av^t t?^ cr^i^s^ov '^[j^i^acg, to 
this present day , 

Those that relate to time and place : a;i^* ko^h, to 
satiety. Mi^^i t5 ^vvarn, as long as is possible, M^r^^y 
Koyui/, in the midst of the discourse. 

Of exclamation : ea'liJt^oi rm }iryi[j(.ocTocv \ alas, my poor 
goods I "£1 T8 dSiy.YiiMOirog ! O, zvhat injustice ! or simply 
TYi^T"oX^<;, sup. 5, what an adventure! 

ANNOTATION, 

Sometimes the genitive precedes the adverb, by which it is gor 
.verned : « 'i^u^ Aristot. 'without tuhich : ^ sa-u, Id. in XDhich, K:ivlvv(ioy 
^vrxs tsoppco^ raiy B' wf^sKiim lyyht bei7tg distant J^rom danger, and hear 
to help. 

Sometimes the adverb is in the middle; t?? i^/»? hsKsv fx%«0 
Demosth. moved hy a private enmity. 

Reason of the government of these adverbs, 

Bonietimes it is because of their having the force of a noun substan^ 
tive : for as the French say^ lors du concile de Trente ; so the Greelcs 
say, oTTore rS srsr, when, or at what time of the year. And the 
same may he said of several others, though it is true that the modern 
idioms do not always ans'wer to the clearness of the Greek expression, 
. Sometimes a preposition is understood ; as rlvoq %af/v, that is to say, 
'ST^Qs r'ms x^i'^i ^^ cujus gratiam, in whose favour; ;^a^<y being 
a real accusative from %cJf /r? gratia : just as iiohen Aristotle says, 
'vJoToiy.cov ^iKViv, instar fluviorum, tve must understand Kxro(^\ like instar^ 
luhich being a real noun, as tvell as exemplar, supposes ad ; ad instar, 
after the manner, like. 

Sometimes it is a division : w«yra^o<rE y^s ^ix^^oiiAot, Euseb,. he 
would travel all over the world, or through all parts of the world. 

Sometimes voe fnd these adverbs Xfoith other ^governments, but then it 
is by virtue of something else ; as lyyvg In rvi wiXioc, Aristot. is near 
the belly, 'where rji aoiKioc is the dative of relation, "iXtov sia-uf, Horn, 
into Troy, where" ixm is the accusative of motion. And then liau is 
the same as the preposition lU, 

Sometimes 



Government of Adverbs » 349 

Sometimes they are put absolutely : 'irn lyyv^ r^wAocriX) Thucyd. 
near three hundred years.. 

Several nouns governed in the genitive, 

.We likewise put in the genitive, by virtue ©f a 
noun or preposition understood, 

o. The cause, or why : pKii auVov r^q afsr??, sup. 
X^^}v, he loves him for his virtue. EuVatjovov/^st o-s r?? 
j(rQ(pUqy sup. wi(i\ he thinks you happy for your wisdom. 

6. Nouns expressing price : mfi(ruy.fiv ivo o^oAwv, / 
bought it for two pence. 

7. Matter: -arETro/^jrat k(^3j it is made of stone: or 
with the preposition, £>. a/^s. 

8. Part : fVtoj/ ra o'lva, which is similar to the French 
phrase, J V/i bu du vin ; that is to say, part, and not 
jail the zvine. Amov twv wtwv x^arw, Prov. lupum auri- 
bus teneo, / have hold of the wolf by the ears. Lucian 
has put a preposition here, h tJ? «^aj >.oe,if.%(infT^ooi^ to 
take hold oj by the tail. 

9. Time, either of duration and answering to the 
Latin quamdiu; -urivn txm Irim, during Jive xvholeyea^^s : 
or the precise time, and answering to quando; ^*/A5^a?, 
nou vuKTo? ^sA£T(?y, to meditate inght and day. 

ANNOTATION. 

Nouns of time ^ that are put in the accusative ^ or in the 

ablative. 

The time either precise, or of duration, is put also in the accu- 
sative, or the ablative, either with or without a preposition, as in 
Latin. But we have mentioned in the rule, only what was particu- 
lar to the Greek. 

Thus we say for the precise time, r?) aur?i ^E^a, or with the 
preposition, h rn uvrn ^[/.i^a, the same day. Tov /xev ^si^jt^um, ro 
h S'Efo?? sup. iKxroif hyeme quidem, (Estate vero, Uav to a^X'*'°^*'^' 
^ia(ps^ov (x'l^etrifAov, Basil, ive ought to reverence every thing that is re- 
markable Jbr antiquity. 

We likewise say for the duration of time, oktu km} lUx £««•;, or 
else Ev ETEo-i, during eighteen years, T^hs oXhs y^wotsy or Iwl r^zisy 
during three "whole months ; isoKvv x?°^°^> ^^ ^'^' rsoXlv xf ovov, during 
a long time, 

"Or/? -CToAyv ;^|oyo» co^iKuv axoXaros /xlve/, rSrov ^ii vd(i,i^siv vov 
o.rvxkcx.rov, Justin, we ought to think that man very unhappy, who 
lives a long time in his "wickedness with impunity. 



350 BoovK VII. Greek Syntax. 

TyT85 a>^y)iJLieq Ts, y.x} Itt/ 'SToXvv ^^ovov zvotzi(Aovoi,(; lav, I'vac rrj ruv 'uj^oc.y 
lA.(x,rcjv {xsrxQoXri fxoiXXov ^x^vvcovroa : the Greek translation of Caesar 
attributed to Gaza, where he says, consuesse enim Deos immortales, 
quo gravhis homines ex commutatione rerum doleant^ quos pro scelere 
corum ulcisci velintt his secundiores interdum res, S^ dluturniorem im- 
punitatem concedere, 1. de bello Gallico : that ib luas customary Jbr 
the immortal Gods, ivhen they pleased to signalize their Justice on the 
niched, to suspend their vengeance for a luhile, and permit them to 
Jlourisht to the end that they may he qfter'voards more sensibly affected 
tvitk their reverse of fortune, 

Ovru Kx] ru/v 'csovn^ws- o<Joi rviv Tjtz^xvriKiz rsXtoyvtv lyc^vyzTy I'^ofav, 

^^o^vrs^xv rlvHCTiv, h^I y^^oiaxvras IkoXxo-Qvio-xv, aAA' lyv)^x(rxv HoXflt- 
^6[ji.Em, PJut. thus the tvicked that seem to escape immediate vengeance 
for their crimes, are not punished later, but longer ; 7ior does justice 
overtake them tvhen they are old, but they grotv old in the punishment of 
their iniquity. 

The matter and price in the ablative. 

The matter is sometimes put in the abhitive, as in Latin, though 
not so often : ou ^xh yoo^ ^.e^xecro-t rerev^xTXi, at ^' lxi(pxvrf, Od. r. 
where he speaks of the gates of hell, some are made of horn, ^nd 
some of ivory. 

As also the price : Wiu Savarw ro tjoifxvio ts^tx^evfx;, S. Chrys» 
ransoming his flock at the price of his oiun death. 

1- 

Reasmi of these governments. 

In short, 'wheresoever an ablative case is governed in Latin, the 
sa^ie government may be in Greek, unless it be drawn to the genitive 
i)y virtue of a preposition, as mentioned in the rules. And tvhen an 
ablative is put, it is only by virtue of a py^eposition understood: which 
is proved not only from the general practice of expressing it thus in 
onodern languages, but moreover because it is often used so in Greek, 
'OyK8o-0«/ Im ysvEi, Ivxi^saOxi Itti 'SiXiru, ttxi (pvaSia-Qxt ml ^vvxy.ii, 
iihvi ^£///? Wi, Xenoph, to be proud of birth, vain of riches, or 
haughty in power, is what nobody is allowed, 'h ^e Krria-is alruv 
lr« ii^xjxclx; cri/v rrl 0iac, aXXoi [xxXXov o-yv r^ tvt^yta-ioc, Xenoph. these 
things are not obtained by force, but by mildness and benevolence, 
To /x£V y(^^va-Uv \v ru 'ziyv^l ^oKii^x^siv, T8? 5e (plXas h rxTs krv^ixiq, 
Isocr. as we make a trial of gold in the hre, so friends are tried in 
adversity. In like manner the rest. 



Rule 



Got'ernment of the Genitive. 35 1 

Rule IX. 
Several verbs that govern the genitive. 

J genitive likewise follows, 1. Verbs of admiring. 
2. Hindering, forbidding, 5. E.vcelling. 4. Commanding, 
5. Pardoning, 6. Condemning, 7, Bui/ing. S, Enjoying. 
9. Abstaining, depriving, 10. Of sense {\\, ejccept the 
^ight.) 12. Of caring or neglecting. \S, Undertaking. 
14. Ceasing, 15. Delivering. \%. As also of distance. 

Examples. 

There are a vast number of verbs which in Greek 
require a genitive after them ; as those of, 

1 . Admiring : ^au^ota^w o-jj, / admire you, 

2. Hindering or forbidding : u^ynv rri? 3-aXa(r<r>j?> 
Plut. mari prohibere, to forbid or keep one from the. 
sea. KcoAu£t tS ylyi(T^oc\, oIkIocu, Aristot. he debars from 
building, E^ym o'lvn, to debar one of wine. 

3. Excelling, surpassing, overcoming : zjXmsanTv 
rcav TuroXsixim, to gain an advantage over ones enemies. 

dQ^v]/£(r^<xi, aAA' IJ iVa -arJcurw Ts-^oUocai^on, Epictet. nothing 

is more becoming a general, than neither to despise or 
insult any body, nor to pay low complaisance, but to be- 
have with equality and jjtoderation towards those under 
his cominand, 

4. Commanding: ruv olyarm a^p^nv, Isocr. to com- 
mand his servants, 'KlovYi<; n^arsTv, to subdue his pleasures. 
'AfO^wVwv voiA.u^'^iX, Lucian, to have a supreme command 
over mankind. 'Kktx^ov tuv jwei/ whstcov a^p^nv, rocTg SI -^h- 
voc7q hXivm, Isocr. it is a dishonour to command one's 
slaves, and at the same time to be a slave to one's pas- 
sions. Also SecTTTo^Eiv, >cu^{fu«i/, Svi/Ccn^siV) (Bflio-iAjufU', TU^ay- 
mv, and such like. 

Hence we find in the Scripture, dominetur piscium 
maris, &c. and in Hor. regnavit populorum, 

5. Forgiving or sparing : (ruyyji/wo-jcw a^i rr,t aWriic, 
Philostr. I forgive you your mistake. *^Oj q>dhro(.i. r-^? 
PdKTYi^ix^j y.io-iT Tov vtov ^ura, Proveib, qui parcit; 

virgae, 



552 Book VII. Greek Syntax, 

virgge, odit iilium suura; he that spares the rod, hales 
his child, 

6. Condemning and accusing : Iocvth ytxTnyo^iTu, to 

accuse one's self. *0 ytUKog rcc^iroc oiv axTO^yvoin KOii T« 

ayM : ayMg ^\ 3^1 xaxg poc^tco^, Basil, the wicked are 
forward in condemning the just ; hut the just are sloxi^ 
in censuring the wicked. 

7. Buying: twi/ -sroi/wv T^UiXBdiv i^Hv urdi/Toc r ccya^ix B'BOi, 
Epichar. zve purchase what blessings we receive of' the 
Gods, at the price oj our labour. Which Horace seems 
to have intended to express in these verses : 

Nil sine mag no 

Vita lahore dedit mortalibus^-—, 

8. Enjoying, partaking, taking, accepting, admit- 
ting, acquiring, and the like : U7rix9i,\ji twv -aroc^ovruv, 
Isocr. he enjoyed his present fortune. Trig (inXoa-otpioa 

Ivxi^Wj Syn. let me enjoy philosophy. Unri^r-aovriq i*.ir^rm 

Ta (px^ixdyiis, Lucian, qff^ering me this poison to drijih, 
liTH no,] TsroT^yioivuviiv, Xenoph. to eat and drink together.- 
Mirix^a-x Xoyia-fA^, Plato, particeps rationis, capable of 
reason. Ovx. oiuioSix'^vra.i T«i/ Xiyoi^ruu, Aristot. they don't 
approve of those that say. ^ETnxiva TM^f^v^ Demosth. to 
acquire praise. T?? «^£T>ff \(piy.Moe.i, Isocr. to acquire 

*virtue. KAn^oi/o^rJo-at T»ij (^ocKm^ta.; avr^, Lucian, tO 

inherit his staff. Though this is also joined with an ; 
accusative : wV i7rByi^drn<roiv ruv zroXim, Herodot. as they 
made themselves masters of the towns. 

g. Depriving, whether one's self or another, abstain- 
ing from, missing one's aims, and others opposite to 
those of the preceding article ; as oi^(pore^uv iy^oc^TriKo.^ 
fji.ev, Thucyd. we have missed them both: (TipxxivTsg ruv 
ixm^uvj Herodot. deceived in their hopes : ^j^yi \J/fu(r§? tw^ 
l\%i3uv, Basil: that his expectations may not be frustrated: 
d-u^oTf^iiv lauT8f rvjq (ruTVi^focgy Chrj^s. 7o deprive themselves 
of salvation : vocrtpnTg ^b rUh, Eurip. ^/(tw will deprive me 
of this:. Ti^itT^oci vUng^ to be deprived of victory: uyvsvsiVy 
otv8 xat }J^sv^oXof(»g, Plut. to abstainfrom wine and untruth: 
ytvdcfMm a7r£;^£(r6a*, to abstain from beans, just as Horace 
said, abstineto irarum, dont give way to passion. 

I ^ "^ 10, Of 



Government of the Geniiive. 355 

10. Of sense: i! ng uU^nrui v}/o>, Aiistoph. if any 
body should hear a 7mise: ocW^oivna,^ rwv o(T^m^ Arist. he per- 
cewes the smell: ^oyixccrm ^£io:v l7r«x8£n/, togix)e attention 
to the divine doctrines : oiij^(poiv oca^ooic-^oci, to hear them 
both : o(r(p^(x,mTcn th ij/uxf^^ Aristot. he smells the cold: 
yeusffOai Kocxm, Eurip. to have a taste or trial of misfor- 
tunes', w yLi(po(,Mq \<pi\o(.'ro, Aristoph. he laid hold oj him 
by the head: ^ot^xtnv voa^vTog, to feel, or touch a sick person. 

11. We must except verbs of seeing, which govern 
an accusative in quality of actives: \h7\t o-g, Luke viii. 
to see you. Ov^iux Kx^ie, Acts ix. he saw no man. 

Verbs of the other tenses have also sometimes the 
same force ; as wV §\ lyBv^rocro to uJ'w^, John ii. zvhen he 
had tasttd the zvater. . See Rule XL 

12 Caring and neglecting: ^'^wi/ i^h yiri^sa-^oii, Plato, 
to take no care of us. 22 ^' « ip^ovnoo, Aristoph. / wont 
rmndyou. 'A/xfAfr? -rm ^/Xwi/, Xenoph. you neglect your 
friends. 'XlAtyw^gv twv ko*vwv, Isocr. they neglected the 
affairs oj the commonwealth. '^SXm fj(,iT0iiJ.6Xeiv dvi^ym, 
which we must certainly repent, 

13. Undertaking, endeavouring, beginning, pur- 
suing, &c. Xtoxoc^oii^oci ayiOTTs, I aim at the -mark. 
Uii^ocjocuTsg ra p^t^j^js, having endeavoured to discover and 
surprise the place. ^AunKtzix^ocvsj^s roov zj^ocyi/^druMi Dem. 
undertake the management oj affaiis. Y.a.roi^'x/a^ot.i r» 
^oya, Plut. to begin the discourse. ''E^^j^oh ruv Txr^oxstjxg- 
my, Herod, to pursue one's design, 

14- Ceasing, desisting, quitting, leaving, and others 
contrary to the foregoing : 'iKn^av w S'lifa?, Xenoph. 
they left off hunting. Til? o^yi^g iTrauVaro, Herodi. his 
anger is over, he is appeased. And in the active : himu 
T?? il^^fw? iTTc^va-uv, Isocr. they made him desist from his 
insolence. Hence Virgil has taken 

— Tempus desisterepugncB, iEn. 10. 

And Hor. Desine mollium Tandem querelarum, 

15. Delivering: fv^aaQcn dvi^a. Xv^Am, ApoUon. to 
save a man from ruin, TauVw? ccTruXxd^siv a^ w o^QaX- 
f*iW> Aristoph. to cure you of your sore eyes, 

16. Verbs of distance, separation, difference, and 
5uch like : $iiij(i Taumf, raJ*8? ^w<», Xenoph. he xvas ten 
furlongs from that place, OvTgy SmU) IWf », Aristot. 

Z 2 there 



554 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

there will he no manner of difference between him and the 
other, IToXAb yz Ma) h7^ Dem. there is a great deal want- 
ing, it is far shoj^t of\ 'OArya cJgw "kiyiw, Id. / am almost 
ready to tell, I am mry near telling. Nnh(» dxM^, n tuv 
TtocKoov dwoT^iccfftg, Basil ; true fasting consists in abstaining 

fl'Om vice. Xu^i^^ro^i ts 0£s o fx^ Ctwocirloov lauTOV Sia, ttpos" 

Bv^yig Tw 0iw, Chrysost. he separateth himself from 
God; that does not Join himself to him by prayer. 

ANNOTATION. 

There are a great many more verbs that govern a genitive, as 
those of condemning, rememberings esteeming^ sig7vifying the passions 
or affections of the soul, which I have omitted in the rule, as not dif- 
fering from the Latin. 

Reason of this construction. 

Nolo in the last mentioned, as also in those that are particular to the 
Greeks, it is easy to see that the government depends but on three 
things ; either on a preposition understood, or an accusative understood, 
xuhich includes the right government of the verb (having elsewhere 
proved that no verb-, either Greeh or Latin, can govern really of itself 
a genitive J or on Sixuv, %a^^v, or I'vsjca likewise understood. 

Thus "uohen ive say, u(piv)[ji.t as raJv lyxXviiJLoiruv, Dem, absolvo te 
criminum, ive must understand ^iy.nv or 7^a(?)^v. as Demosthenes him- 
self said, X7'n(ri(p6Jvrix. y^x(py)v U^uv l^tujce^, Ctesiphontem sacrarum 
tabularum reum agebas : or else tjoe must suppose a preposition, as 
Xenoph, ^imoj a-e cts^; ^xv^th, I charge you with a capital crime. 

Tft/v ^/Awj* lAsyi^yyiao, Isocr, remember thy friends, sup, rastq), as he 
has expressed it elsewhere, li/,v'/ia-Qv]s 'sys^t roio-vrm yyya;xo?, you re- 
member this woman ; or we must understand yt.vny^m, meraoriam, 
MynTiMv, cogitationem, or some such thing, 

Ef^ysiv Tn? ^ocXoiffdVis, Pliit, to drive from the sea, sup, ouiro, 
Crs in Xenoph, octto tuv ajV%f&Jv nuXverxi, to hinder one from com- 
mitting shameful things. Silius Italicus has expressed himself in the 
same manner: 

" " • Captae prohibere nequiret 
Cum Poenos aquilae. Lib, vi. 

Tcov auiAoiruv lifUKiXovroci, Xenoph, they take care of the body ; 
just as Apul, says, curare corporis. We must understand -nrE^i or virlq, 
Xlt^l riruv otlrois /ae^e*, Isocr, they take care of this. MeAst^v virs^ 
vm Mivuv Id, to take care of the public affairs. 

'EXeyQe^w ae r5, Eurip, 1 free you from this toil, sup, awo, 
as in S, Matth, vi. pvtrai ^[aus c/.tiI tS -crovijeS, libera nos a male. 
Livy has in the genitive, levarunt animum religionis. 

E^v;;? KQivmui, Herodi, lecti esse consortem. In like manner PlautuSg 
■ paternum servum sui participant consilii, sup. tSB^i, or the accusative, 
hh^i partena, Isocr. Tuv :t/y^m'v f^T^tiTov fi/goj f^sOelao-zy; they will 
share most of the dangers. 

Sometimes 



Government of the Genitwe. 355 

Sometimes they join two genitives ivith the same verb, one of tvhiGh 
is governed by a preposition understood as in the preceding examples ; 
and the second by a noun expressed or imderstood, ivhich noun is 
governed by a verb, or in some other manner : as xxmyo^cj o-a xfrdyruv 
vuv TETTafwy, JEsch. accuso, tui [suj), malitiam) de omnibus quatuor 
rebus, I lay these four articles to your charge. 

Tt5 yacP aK ayoia-xtro ruv oi,v'^^uv a^ervis ; Dem. who could help ad- 
miring the generosity of those men ? Where uv^^m is governed by 
the verb kyatrxiro ; and o'^^sttis by evtKx understood: or else a^sryi^ must 
be the case belonging to the verb, and rm dv^^uv must be governed by 
u^et'^s itself. Which Virgil has imitated, lib. xii. 

Justitiaene prius mirer, bellive laborum ? 
'''Ok o-y EXdrrovoq rm vi^oyuv InroimtTOiSf Lysias, whom you had less 
value for, than for your pleasures. Where Ixolrrovoq governs rm 
ytlovuv, as a comparative, and is governed itself by zrs^s or 'cr^o under- 
stood ; agreeably to xvhat this author says elsewherCf -crs^ « «^evo? ^ySfTo, 
pro nihilo piitabant, they set but very little value. And Isocrates, 
v^o 'cjoK'k^ ^oi-na-aiiJ.Yiv. I should value very much, I should have a 
great esteem for. And in like manner the rest. 



CHAP. IV. 

Government of the Dative, and of the Accusative. 

Rule X. 

Of the Dative. 

1. Verbs of adoring or supplicating, 2. admoniski?2g, 
S. fghting, 4. conversing, 5. folloxving. 6. overtaking 
and running, 7. as also verbs compounded with ofx^, all 
govern a dative case. 

Examples. 

X HE dative, as we have observed in the Latin 
Method marks in all languages the relation of the 
action of the verb ; that is to say, the attribute by 
which it is shown that something is done or happens 
to another : wherefore this case may be put alnipst 
every where, in Greek, as well as in Latin. But here 
I have only taken notice of what seems more particular 
to the former language ; as after, 

1. Verbs of adoring or supplicating : Tu^o^ytmiTv tJ 
©fw, to adore or worship God, Eup^^o-Oat ©ler?, suppli- 
care Diis, to pray to the gods, 

2!. Verbs 



366 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 



1 



2. Verbs of admonishing or reprimanding : mXmf 
^061 Tw op^Aw, to command the people. Ust^daoiioit aoi cyy- 
To/!Aw? C-Trori^sa^cct, Isocr. / shail ejideavuur to advise you 
in afexv zrords 

a yoc^ ol (piXoi roXq |3ct5"tX£U(riV a S'appH^i iffx^o(.iviiV rocvrx Iv 
TOK ^i^xloiq yiy^cs-rrloci, Plut. Denietnus tiiaitrua advised 
king Poltmy to 7tiak€ a collection of whatever books re- 
lated to regal duty and government, and to read them 
qfte^^xvards with attention ; because princes may therejind 
those counsels which courtiers art afraid t<t give them. 

uKKa, th; roT; ocfji,a,oriXvoyA]/oig iTrtTijotcoi/raf, Isocr, don t think 
them your friends, that are ready to extol every thing you 
say or do^ but those who reprimand you for daing zvrong, 

ToTg fjt.\v ^iuL <p\)<Tiv atVp^^OK ^hig IwtrifLoi, ArtStOt. 

Ethic. 3. 770 body ought to reproach another for his natu- 
ral deformities. 

3. Of fighting, contradicting:, opposimj^, and the 
like .* aAA'/)Aoif zs'i^\ "hoyoov dix^KT^TirETu {Av, £f t'^ftv ^£ j^ili PlatO, 

you may dispute but not quarrel about words. Mdx^ir^ooi 
ToTg zjoKsixloig, Dem. to encounter the enemy. Xroca-ioi^ovTsg 
ceAA^iAoK yioci tjtoAs/xSi'ts?, bei?ig divided among themselves, 
and engaged in an intestine war. OJx oiv iywyz ^ioi<nv eVs- 
^ot,vm<n iJ.ci'xjiiiAnv, II. ^. nor will I fight against the heavenly 
gods, "1(jX^^i I^"^' ^^^^' ^^'^f l^i^i^iva,i ^cca-iXiZaiv, II. (3 give 
over and presume not to quarrel alone imth the kings. 
Thus Virgil has 

— — Solus tibi certet Amintas. Eclog. 5. 

Likewise 

Placitone etiampugnabis amoin ? iEn. 4. 

4. Of conversing, entertaining, or discoursing.* -srZ? 
Q "sr^ogiv^oixBtfog, tw 0fw huxiy^rMj Chrysost. whoever 
prayeth^ coiner set h zvith God. Tw 0ew wV olxn^ug a«a»- 
fj.£v TW aai^co TTig -urpogEv^Yig, in reality zve converse with 
God in time of prayer. U^ogiix^ov auTw Matth. xxi. ac- 
cesserunt ei, they drew 72ear to him, Mv yiooioTg oi^iKiiy 
Solon \ doiU converse with the zvicked. 

5. Of 



Go'vernment of the Dative. 357 

5. Of following, going, running after, or accom- 
panying; iiTBToci T« a;^a^tr»V r dvona-^vvrUf Xenoph. 
impudence attends ingratitude, ox comes after ingratitude. 

T«K £vrv)(^{oci; ccKoXahT pa,^\JiJt.toc, prosperity is generally fol- 
lowed by tjfcmiwicy Tw d^yiHv y.ou o-p^oAa^fiV iTrsTOCi to 
dTTOPiTv, Kocl r dxKoroioc i^oKxiTr^ocy^oviXv, Deii). Jhwerty and 
curiosity about other people s ajf airs pdltzv laziness and 
insolence "E'^sa-^xi ro7g rs^irvoTg steals roi Au7r>5^a, M>sch. 
sorrozv generally comes ajter pleasure. Ka) (Jcoc -aroAu ju-TiVors 
TST^o-JpocfxovTsg ol(pvXo(.ycrog uyjroXg, xai ti)i/ Ik t>3? aTroAaucrfw? 

ro T8 h(xQ6x3 xaraTr/wjufv oiyyur^ov. S. Basil speaking of 
a woridu lite, //^ is to be apprehended, that running after 
these things with too much greediness, and too little cir- 
cumspection, without thinking there is any harm in the plea- 
sure we receive from the enjoyment of them, xve shall be 
so unhappy as to swallow at once the devil's bait, which 
is there concealed ILoci ocra, tjjtw i7rirYihv[Jt.ccrcK. ^vviTTiroii Tw 
j3/w, ceeteraque qua3 comitantur huic vitse, Cic. Tusc. 5. 
and whatever other cares attend this sort of' life. 

6. Verbs compounded with ojwa; as G[A6'i^v)(^Qg Uhuu}, 
unanimous, or of the same mind with him. ^O^aViov tw 
■zyaTf), consubstantialem patri, of the same substance 
with the father. 

Rule XL 

Government of the accusative. 

1. The Attics frequently put the accusative for the 
dative and genitive. 

^, All verbs govern an accusative of the noun, which 
they form themselves. 

3. An accusative is frequently put where v.&.foi is un- 
derstood. 

Examples. 

The accusative is put in Greek, as in Latin, after 
verbs of an active signification. But besides this, 

1. The Attics frequently put this case after verbs, 
which were mentioned by us as requiring a genitive or 
dative. 'A^lo-xfi o-s, placet tibi, te delectat, it pleases 
you. TiVQ-diAmv yoiA», Lucian, tasting some milk, n^ Iv h 



358 .Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

ccfM^oTv (xv^ov dyi^a-vi;^ sh, uv Siyidoa-oag, AristOpll. ^^a WO^ 

judge before you have heard both sides. 

- 'Orciv (3aAiir«t 0fo? fu TS-^oi^oci -croAii/, ocvS^ocg dya^^g iTTotn- 

rvg zToXsiog, Plato, when God has a mind to favour a 
towriy he bestows righteous men upon it ; and when he in- 
tends to chastise it, he takes the righteous away, KaAw? 
wotsm Ts? (/,iiTHUTO(.g uixocg. Matth. V. do good to them that 
hate you. 

Such also are the verbs Agyw, dyo^ivu, l^iu, whicb^ 
with the accusative of the person, assume also an ad- 
verb of qualit3\ Tov (p\xou ^ri Kocxccg XiyB, Plut. don*t 
speak ill of your friend^ M.^ Asyg xaxw? rlv n^vwrxy 
Solon ; donH speak ill of the dead, Ta aVo Kii/.ivm sr^og- 
'TTo^i^ofjf.svcx. Ip^^wvTo iU SioUvKTiv TYig -aToAfw?, Aristot. they 
employed the revenue of the custom-house in the sei'vice of 
the commonwealth. Whence the Latins have borrow- 
ed, utor hanc rem. Mea utantur sine. Ter. 

2. All verbs may likewise govern the accusative of 
the noun they form themselves, or of another that 
corresponds to it : -ur'him -nrx^v, navigans navigationem, 
undertaking a ^voyage by sea. ra^«? ya/Awv, nuptias 
\mtw^ ^marrying. Whence the Latins have borrowed, 
^i^ere viiam, gaudere gaudia, and the like. 

^ASiKici Si/ aJ'txw o-f, the injustice I do you. Thus Lu- 
cian, speaking of certain rivers, saith ol ^\v olvov, ol SI 
yooXoi, sld) S\ ol Koa i^ixi sppiov, some flowed with winCy 
others with milk, and some even with honey. 

S. They use also this case on a thousand occasions, 
where xara is understood ; as Iv^og r ^vo^x, nul rh zik- 
r^iSoi, sup. k), nomine ^ patrid Syrus ; that is to say, 
xocrx r SvofAOi, ^toclrm zTocT^iSa: whence the Latins have 
taken, ccEtera Grajus, Virgil, instead of guod ad cetera. 
Alia id genus, and the like. 

T^g (TvvTiT^i(jt>iAiv3g rn'J yict^Sluv, contritos corde^ Psalm 
cxlvi. that hax)e a contrite heart. Tlavuv rd o-xgAji, Aris- 
toph. to have a pain in one's legs : whence the Latins 
have borrowed,yr^c/w,s?72e?;2Z'm, Hor. Os,humerosque 
Deo similis, Virg. and others of the same sort. 

This also happens to the passive : cl(psn^£^ivT£g rd %^«- 
^«r«, stripped of their substance, 'ET^n^iTro^on ih Sicurav, 

(ieferor 



Government of the Accusative. 35§ 

deferorarbitriuni,ybr defertur mihi, they refer the af- 
fair to 7727/ judgment* Triv $' h ;^fjfwv a^7ra^o|x«», Eurip. 
she is snatched out of my hands. '"A p^^swr^/xa*, Hesiod. 

what is owing to me, 0» -arXii^cx, twv l^oiricav i7nQ<x.XX6(Ji.n/oif 

Aristot. upon whom a great many clothes are throxvn. 
"Ohov o^og iTr/jcEj^at, Lucian, / have a whole 7nountai7Z a 
top of me. Uiqi\)oi^ivQ<; roi f^iyiroi) Greg, intrusted with 
thijigs of the greatest consequence, *n? 0id£^o^oci rx^s, 
Sophocl. since I suffer violence in these things, Hmtx 
i^ocTroiTYiiAivoi, Dem. deceived in every thing. 

Sometimes we may understand ^ioi^ or some other 
preposition, rather than xiAim ; as TBToc^ayfxivuv rviv w^og rnv 

woXiv olycsiornfoc ^iXimrtji yiyivnixivW) Dem. that is to say 

Sioi rvv olxsioTYirocy having been uneasy by reason of the inti- 
macy which this city had contracted with Philips 

Rule XII. 
Of verbs that have two accusatives. 

1. Verbs of giving, 2. taking away, doing good to, 
or hurting, 3. absolving, 4. and accusing, govern two 
accusatives. 

Examples. 

It is by virtue of this preposition jcamorm^l, or 
such hke, that there are so many verbs which have 
two accusatives in the Greek, one of their own na- 
tural government, the other of the preposition: 
such as not only those of teaching, asking, dress- 
ing, and admonishing, which have two accusatives in 
Latin ; but also the following verbs ; 

1. Of giving and doing good to: ycHxix vfAoiq liron^oc, 

1 Cor. iii. I have fed you with milk, B8A« a ysuw 

/tAffiu ; Eurip. shall I give you some wine to taste ? Xre^x^ 

vv^H IjcxTTiTTAwv fl-s, Psalm cxlvii, and filed thee with the 

finest of the wheat, 'AxsTifr? ^f ocyecXXia<nv, Psalm li. 

thou xvilt make me hear a song of gladness, ^Avoiym rng 

ai/6^co7r8? roiaZra, Tsof.tryuv, oIcctts^ oiv rsq olxXiS(; Sp(x,<T(mi, Isocr. 

it is fit that men should submit to the same treatment as 
that which they have made others suffer, 

2. Of taking away, hurting, depriving, and the 
like : rh i^mvi (pixMon tJv oIv^^wwqv, Galen ; tp take away 

a man's 
t - 



360 Book VIL Greek Syntax. 

a man's life. ^Airore^ii {xb t« p^^^i^ara, Isocr. he deprives 

me of my goods. ''Egcr* tok lipo^oK tqv Poc<riX6a. 3§ol<ro6i T8T0, 
Thucyd. the ephorl are allowed to use the king thus. 
Kaxoi -urXsirocr s'l^yo(,(r(ji.oci rov vi/.ir£^ou oJaov, Id. I have done 

a great deal of harm to your house, Tg roiaZroc rlvdhx- 
<pov ^locUvrog, Chrys. of one that uses- his brother thus, 
oTa, *Avrio7rnv liJ(.ii<rocTo, Apollou. what he designed to do 
to Antiope. 

3. Of accusing, absolving, &;c. Tim y^octpvw a-s yi- 
y^o^Trlai ; Plato, zvhat had he to lay to your c//a?gef Amot^ 
{Tasv EyTToAii^ <Juo, Isaeus, /?e convicted Eupolis of two dif- 
ferent crimes, ^A? SUocg r^rov ocTTStpvyov 'uroooouroc nocl ocvriSi' 
nhru, Dem. in which trnals I was discharged, though he 
was present, and spoke against me. And such like. 

ANNOTATION. 

The case governed here by a preposition, is retained also in'the 
passive, as we have already seen in the foregoing rule. nx«r« 
«7«Tfw» y-rriait HrE?*3/>o£v>j, " Soph. deprived of her fathers forlunc. 
^AvxynocTov o(p'K'niA.oi rm u<; 0£ov, o-yaTryjv a'^a/T«/M,£0a, Basil ; the love of 
God is demanded of us as an indispensable duty. 



CHAP. V. 
Of the Verb, and of the Absolute Case. 

Rule XIII. 

Of the verb passive. 

Verbs passive are joined with a dative ; or with age- 
tiitive governed by vtto, 'sroc^ocy or-sr^o?. 

Examples. 

Verbs passive, as likewise verbs of a passive sfg- 
nification, are joined with a dative ; as -urtwohrcit 
ftoi, factum est mi hi, instead of a me, I have done this. 
T« roiciZrci [x£iJt.BXirnrai auVw, Lucian, talia ei sunt medi- 
tata, he is prepared for all this. To iJ/£v«Jf(r0«t SisXoTr^iTrh, xoi 
vacriv ccv^^umig [xiGsTa-^xi cc^iov, lying is only ft for slaves, 
and ought to be detested by all mankind. Ou;^ £r» vin^ug 
i^iracoci r) wi'Tr^ocY.rM tok «AXok, oif fAVi woi,^ nfxuv oc^ruv ZiT^w- 

TQv yVflffgM ri SiQVTOi, Dem. we are nQt allowed to enquire 

with 



Of the Verb Passwe. 561 

mth severity into other people's actions, unless we have 
first discharged our duty ourselves. 

But they oftener assume a genitive governed by one 
of these prepositions, uVo^ 'zsra^a, w^o? ; as $M(r}iofA,ict v^o 
<ril ; doceor a te, / am taught by thee, "Orccv o v»? M 

Pijjff-j, zvhen the mind is overcome by wine, it is like to a 
chariot that has lost its diuver, Isocr. 'Ttto yuv^ixo? ol^^ 
p^£(r9at yj^i<; dvS^\ Itrp^ojTTi, Democr. apud Stob. it is the 
very greatest of infamies to be under pettycoat government, 

Ofoi 'B^og ccKXa [Jt.ri isrci^eTv oAw? ^ihiig, ro^ocuroi. koci Cv [AnSl 

i^xv aAAw 3-sAf, Nazianz. what you don't care should be 
done tp yourself, dorit do that to another. Tlot^ wv w 

rim; y.ri oti ocixoc^tbTv, aAA* on (Jt^i ive^ysT^vrocg ro-J eivrcav (^lov- 

yiocTOivoiXcoG-oci, (ji^iyirov da-i^viiAoc Ifi, Lycurg. it is the very 
highest deg7xe of iniquity, not only to transgress against 
those of xvhom we have had our birth, and what other 
blessings we enjoy, but even not to be ready to ea^pose our 
lives for their preservation and interest, 

ANNOTATION. 

Sometimes they are joined with the preposition l|, but rarely : 

U t5 9<Aa;y zTsiG-OeTcrx; Sophocl.l^j/ ivhich of' her ^friends pei'suaded? 
El ri x°^XswQv sH. ruv xoXxkuv TusTrovOxs, (xvocinos cyw aoi, LtUClSLH, if 
your flatterers have done you any harm, I am not to blame. 

Sometimes the preposition is understood, and the genitive is put 
without it : tsoKXa, IXarrSi^ixi AiV^/va, Dem. / am inferior to Ms- 
chines in several things. 'HrralcrQxt ruv av^ipo^uv Isocr. to sink under 
misfortunes, TSivi^voq ^<T(TV)^ho<;, Ath. a slave to his belly, 

. Rule XIV. 

That in the Greek there are three absolute cases. 

1 , The genitive is sometimes made an absolute case ; 
^. this happens sometimes also to the accusative; 3. and 
sometimes to the ablative. 

Examples. 

By an absolute case we understand the participle 
or verbal noun with its substantive, which seems inde- 
pendent in discourse, though it is governed by a pre- 
position understood, 

3 A 1» Tb«9 



362 Book VII. Greek Sykttax. 

1. Thus because the Greeks have prepositions of 
three different governments, we may observe that 
they have therefore three absolute cases, the most 
usual of which is the genitive ; as l/xs -sra^ovTo?, me 
prassente, in my presence, T«t8 S' ovtq; roi^ns, Arist. 
wJuck being thus, Xufxlcvog Yih av^p^w^norc^i/, Thucyd. sup* 
w<a^^oj/To?, they retired toxvards the beginning of wintet\ 

K«t ^t;c^8 y.oi.}imov l^Er^oc^vXios, Xenoph. SUp. ^iovrog, and 

he had like to break his ?ieckj by throwing him down, 'EaOovtwi/ 
Sly as they were come, "Tmrog ts-oAAw, Xenoph. as it rained 
*very hard< Mu9oAoy»0eWo?, it being fabled. Qbh ^iSovrog, fA-/i^h 

lo'^VEi (p^cvo;. Koi] [xri hiovrog, [ayi^Iu l(rprj£i zrovog, NazianZi 

mth God's assistance malice or envy cayinot hurt us ; and 
mthout his assistance our endeamurs can do us no good. 

2. SomeLimes we find it in the accusative; as cJ^tov 
ccu^^jx r^ro z:roin(;oyray the man going to do this. This hap- 
pens frequently to the neuter participle taken imper- 
sonally : l^ov (pvysTy^ ju^ ^?3Tft SUnvj Alcibiad. in Apophv 
whenyou can make your escape, dont try to clear yourself . 
In the same manner su Tsy.^avylv, ziu^qct^'xIv and such 

like. 'AvS^uv yoi^ G'U(p^6voov /x£V £r*Vjft ]«'>! dhaoivro wup^a- 

^ua-'^ov Ik -uioXiiAii mdcXiv ^v[ji,Qnvonj Thucyd. lib. 1. .it is 
the part of a xvise and moderate man to live quietly, as 
long as no injustice is done him / and of a brave man^ 
•when he is zvronged, to "do himself justice by going to war, 
and if he gains any advantage to improve it, by exchang- 
ing war for an honourable peace, Tw SiKocs'jdXoy!^^ vZv x,§n' 

fA^yi isxio)f £p^ai/ dmr^oiTrBTo, Id. eod. lib. you noxD talk to 
tis of just ice f zvhich with no body (xvhen force could pi^e- 
"vail) has had hitherto so muchzveight, as to prevent irkeni 
from pui^suing their advantage, 

T^ioc fji.\v ovrot Xoya u^ia roTg 'EAA/kt* Voe,\)7iy.of>, ro -uyoc^ u/^tv,, 
Xflti TO 'ny.irsoov, nod to Kopiv^im* tjjtwi/ ^' bI 'zs^s^ioT^ea-^i roi S\jq 
sU TO auTo Ix^sTu, &c. ibid, where it is visible that t^ih ^aiv 
ouTo, is an absolute case, as if he had said, T^im [a\v 
ovTcovy there being three coiisider able fleetsamong the GreekSy 
yours, ours, and that of the Corinthians : f you permit 
tzvo of these to be joined, 8cc, 

3. And sometimes it is put in the ablative ; oT? yr- 

vofxivoig 



Of Absolute Cases. S6'5 

success is it not jit you should have a good opinion of your- 
self ? Tloc^iovri Tw ii/ioovTio, (pO(,iV8(ri TfTCfcXiv (p^a^aVy Xcnoph. 

at the close of the year, they order new levies to be made, 
Tioc^iyovn IxbG^v ts 'ijjtrH, transeunte inde Jesu. Matt. ix. 
and as Jesus passed forth from thence, ' 
ANNOTATION. 

The Greeks give also the name of absolute case to that of the 
cause, matter, and time, of which we have spoken in the eighth rule. 

As also to that, 1. of the instrument, 2. manner, 3. and effi- 
cient or assisting cause, which in Greek are put in ihe ablative 
depending on a preposition, as in Latin. 

1. The instrument; tw ^\^ti iTrarafe he struck him \xiith Ms 
svjord, sup. Iv, as in Eurip. h ^ixn wKyiy^Ui pierced by a dart ; and 
in the Scripture, in virga ferrea, ijoith an iron rod. ' - v 

9.. The manner : hx) raro, « Xoyui ^ivoy^ a.xk' E^ya;, Aristot. and 
this not only by ivords, but also by deeds. *0 t^ (pvati ccyot^i;, kocI ccyat- 
■OZv Tjuvrcov 'syoc^EKTix.os, Greg. Nyss. he that is good by nature, and 
giixer of all that is good. Twyi rw 'cs^oauTru >tocr^«/!XH»?, rviv r^s- -^vx^i 
uiAo^iptocv liif.<pxUei, Democr. apud Stob. a 'woman that embelliskes her 
Juce, discloses the deformity of her mind. 

The preposition is used here thus : Ik n'voi; r^o'ira; Demosth. in what 
manner ? !?>' oT? ex.'^t^ovf Id. ob quae guadebant,y6r ty/^/c^ they rejoiced. 
''Eit'Hi^yi.ivos liri z:\Hruy Xenoph. elatus ob divitias. AeT rsg (3xa-(Xe7q Im 
fxviozvi ixoiKKov ^xl^siv kxi rs^Trscr^xtf ri Iv rio ras vifnycoaq svs^yersTvf Philo^ 
the greatest pleasure and delight of kings ought to consist in doing 
good to their subjects. 

An accusative may also be put here along with a preposition s 

J.'i HCCPTS^ixs V.x) (^(XoTTOIIIXSi H^h TUV OVT&'V olyxQuV O!.VCX,}^&jr0V 'VJE(pVKSt 

Demosth. there is no one blessing in nature, but what is attainable 
through labour and industry. A/' x^ylxs xa* px^vfjiUsf kxI rx isxvr^Xui 
i'mitoKxix Ivc^yzl^urx \<riy. Id. the commonest and easiest of things are 
rendered diff,cult by laziness and effeminacy, 

3. The .efficient cause; as lav /iatj xapTj rm voVw, Aristot. unless 
he be afflicted with some distemper f sup. \ir), as he has put it else- 
where: (^^ovos, ^.vTTr) I-tt' kKKor^ioKi a,yxBQi?, invidentia est aegritudo 
propter aiterius res secundas, Cic. envy is an uneasiness at other 
people's prosperity. We may also understand here o-v» ; as civ 0£^, 
tmh God's help. 

This efficient cause is also put in the genitive: Ails 'cj£(pvKuSf 
Eurip, born of Jupiter : instead of which Isocr. s^ys, e'I ^? 'i^v9at, 
of whom they were born. Likewise Euripides, t^v 'Ae^tti?? w-tto, 
horn of Aerope; and Aristot. fcjxvrx rx yivojxsvx, v-tto tevt/vo? ymrar, 
'>ixl I'k rivQ(;, whatever exists, is made by something, and of something* 

The manner of resolving the absolute const ructio7i. 

We must therefore, in the absolute construction of the participle, al- 
ways understand a preposition, in whatseover case it be, as in Ccesar 1 • 
de Bella Gall, is dies erat ad V. Kal. Aprilis, L. Pisone, &. A. Ga- 
iwnio consalibus : vihich the Greek attrilmted tQ JPhmid^s, or to Gaza, 

§ has 



364i Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

has expressed bi/ the preposition : IttI yvdruf AWiw riiVwvp?, kxI AtKa 
Ta^iviHi under the consulship of Lucius Piso, and Aulus Gabinius. 
And in Lucian, ac'i^PviVu^y Im ist^z^ovto?, oi^a/ixjvo? p ^k^kovo? to. o-o^ 
<^ixaiznEi[jAvx, &c, repente minister tollens ea quce tibi erant apposita, 
of a sudden the servant taking away, though you were still present, 
.what was set before you. JVhere it is visible that lirl cra^ovro? is the 
same as o-5 'stx^ovtos, te praesente. Thus in Xenoph. lo^xvrx Vs roeZroc^ 
rrx (XEV r^oiTsviJLxrxuTrvxQEf his vero decretis, exercitus abierunt; that 
is to say^ ^itol ravrx ^o^ocyrx, things having been ordered thus, the 
armies marched away. 

Sometimes they put the participle in the singular >' So|ay SI v[^7v ravrxf 
Ivo^svoiAB^x, Plato in Prot. after we had taken this resolution, we 
set out upon our journey. Where Bud(Eus surmises some mistake^ 
though with very little foundation, since xvefind also in Xenoph, ^o^xv 
^k rxuTx, hrt^v'^xy liTcu 'csoiviaxi, having approved of these things, 
they ordered them to be done. We Jind also Ihv, it being proper: 
iSeijcrav, it having been proper : lyi^^xoi^^vovi it being likely to hapr 
pen, 07- possible : axa^sv, having been heard ; yty§xfjt.(jt,=voy, it having 
been written ; and such like. But as, tvhen ive say, lectum est, visum 
est, Sfc. tve are to understand to legere, to videre, S^c, according to 
tvhat we have proved in the Latin Method ; so when we say ^o|av, 
U'e must understand rl Iokiiv : insomuch that it must be constriied ^roc. 
TO 5o|av loKuv rxZrx, S^c. after having found proper to approve 
thesje things, or after the approbation of these things had been 
agreed to. Where there are two constructions (as when in Latin 
we say, tempus legendi libros) one of^o^xy ^okuv, which is the con- 
cord of an adjective and a substantive ; and the other of la-Am rxvrx) 
•which is the government of an active, and so for the rest. 

The Latins have sometimes imitated this neuter and absolute expreS' 
sion, as T. Livy, et ne ibi quidem nunciato quo pergerent, tantuni 
convocatos milites commonuit qua via omnes irent, Sfc. 

Whether the nominative can be an absolute case. 

Some grammarians are of opinion, that the Greeks make use of 
all cases, except the vocative, for the absolute construction. But we 
have already said enough to prove, that what they call a dative ab- 
solute is in reality an ablative ; which shall be yet foirther evinced 
in the next book, Chap. ii. So that the question must be reduced to 
the nominative only, which they pretend to be taken in an absolute 
sense, in exam,ples similar to these here: k)ioi^am<;rH auy.xroi 'cto^hc^ 
'jt'xXiv ymrxi to zsZ^, Aristot. as soon as they open the pores of the 
body, fire is kindled anew. But on the contrary there is no nomifia- 
tive, but what supposes its verb ; as here kvoi^xyvzi for erxv km^xv- 
res ucTi, which is the same as »vol^coa-i, according to what we have 
observed in the fourth ride. IIoKXn y^f [vr^xrix) h<tx, a «Ta<7i3? e?*^ 
-cToAEWf viroVi^xa^xty Thucyd. that is to say, '6tj yx§, or I'ttu yo^f nfoKKn 
«a-a Tyy^otve;, ^c. for the troops being so very numerous, no town 
will be able to hold them. 

Likewise when we say, oa-xt ^i^B^xt, every day; as in Thucyd. 
oiT^f ^^^^xi 'Z!y^o<;hxoiJiiyoi, expecting every day : and in^ GazUy in 
his translation of Tidly upon Old Age, orxi ^fx,B^xi lirvi§rY,ii.hoy ^xtxriiv 
hhusyfor the Latinj mortem omnibus horis hnpendentem timensp afraid 

of 



Of Absolute Cases, 3()5 

of death impending every moment : -hut the p'oper construction of 
it is oa-eci mV/v ^(/.i^xi Iv uvratq §^S»w$, Sfc, being afraid as many days 
as he had left to live. Horace has imitated t^is construction^ voher-^ 
he sat/s, 

Non si trecenls, quotquot eunt dies, 
Amice ! places illacrymabilem 
Plutona tauris, 8rc. Lib. ii, Od. 14. 
Which v)uiy he exipressed thus in Greeh : Ol^' av T^/anocr/oi? oa-at iS/zs^a/, 
Z ^/At£ct£, ci^xy.fjTov H\Bruypc rccv^ois xacracir^xvvots, no, not even if 
you strove to sooth every day the relentless Pluto with a sacrifice 
of three hundred oxen. Where it is plain, that '6<7cit rifji^.^aci is no 
more an absolute case, than quotquot dies; and as quotquot dies 
must be referred to eunt, so '6(tixi ■^(ab^o.i supposes ^a.^i^x'^'ira.i, praer 
lereunt, or sonie other such verb. But iftve chance to meet toith oa-vj' 
(Aigcci in one tvord, as in Lucian and others, it is then an adverb, 
and is therefore subject to no dispute. 

They pretend also, that i|ov, S<)|av, and the like neuter participle^, 
fire nominatives absolute : but tve have just now made appear, that 
they are accusatives, which suppose Ktxrx, or some other preposition. 

Wherefore, I tJiinh, xve may conclude, that there are no more ab- 
solute cases, besides the three abonje mentioned, viz. the genitive, the 
accusative, and tfie ablative : and that we are not to form any other 
idea of the nominative, but that of a case, which has always a re- 
lation to some verb, either expressed or understood, conformably to 
the Jundamental rule given in the introduction to this syntax. 

Whether the absolute case ought always to refer to a 
different person. 

This absolute case may refer to the same person, or to the same 
thing that shall he expressed before or after by another case, as we 
have shown in the Latin Method; and examples hereof ai'e more 
common in Greeh than in Latin. n^oaifA.i^av rZ rslx^t zroXeiJiiuvf Piat- 
fiovTs? Ttis (piXoocms, Kva to (rJcoT£;vov /xgy « tt^oV^ovtwv ecvrZv il/6<pu Se 
.rw Ix T« ij^ocriivxt ayry? a.vri'rtxrixyHvroq tS avE(xii, a Kocraycaa-ocvruyf 
Thucyd. Where we find not only zr^oidovruv ccvrm in the genitive 
absolute, referring nevertheless to the sentinel expressed by ^uXxkocs 
in the accusative ; but likewise ^araxaaavrwv. They drew near to 
the enemy's ramparts, unobserved by the sentinel, who could not see 
them for the darkness of the night, por hear the noise of their ap- 
proach, by reason of the blustering of the wind, 

• ©£« TO HffyiKUff STTOJ 

*£^/x«. To xAe/vov 'in KocroiKvcreiv vit^ov 

'ZiTcX'^rris (Tvv ocv^^i, yvovros, w? Is^IXnn 

O^x ^XSov, 'ivx fj.Yi Xix.r^ viror^uau rm, Murip. tn Hel, 
Where we find yvovros in the genitive absolute, notwithstanding it 
refers to kv^^t immediately preceding. I have heard the voice of the 
god Mercury, who told me I should live some time yet in the 
famous country of Sparta with my husband, it being known to 
him that I did not care to come to Troy, lest I should bed with a 
stranger. 

Xlv}fk 



566 Book Vll. Greek Syntax. 

Tijvruv xs^t * A^'A-xVixy t (piXxvOocoTr&x; xvths v7rjS'e|aTo, PolycBn, Stratag. 
lih. vi. Pyrrhus marching towards Peloponnesus, gave a very kind 
reception to the Lacedagmonian ambassadors, that came through 
Arcadia to meet him. 



CHAP, vr, 

Observations on difterent Governments. 
I. Different gomriinmits joined together, 

J\. Verb may admit of different governments in the same ex- 
pression, according to the different rules explained above ; as, 

1. A genitive with 9 dative, 'mXton>i,ro!/ rarw era, I surpass you in 
this. 

2. A genitive, and an accusative, 5gVai am rk It-^xiXi I apply 
to you for justice. Kxrvtyo^u as t^v Iihv)v, I have this to lay to your 
charge, 'AXXxTretv x^vcra u^yv^ov, to give silver in change for gold. 

3. A dative and a genitive, }cotvuvu! aoi Tsr», I partake tvith you 
of this. 

4. A dative and an accusative, ^ov)^^ o-oi ro «7^ay/^a, I assist you 
in this affair. 

5. An accusative and a genitive, av'^xifAovi^u a-t t^$ tJ^*??, / tki7ilc 
your situation happy. 

6. An accusative, , and ablative, <PiXu a-e oAjj -^vx^, I love you 
uith all my soul. 



II. Variety in the sense by reason of the different 

goV€7'nments. 

Thaugh the verb continues the same, yet the sense, is sometimes 
altered, because of the different government ; as 

'A<pxi^tilAaii rivos, I deprive one of something he has not yet had, and 
hinder him from having it: a(pxt^'^iixl nvx, spolio aliquem, / strip 
him of what he has, 

"Eic^iKu o-oif J revenge the injury done you : iK^iKu ere, I punish you, 
I take revenge of you. 

^'E.itiriy.w (Toiy I reprimand you : iTririfAM o-f, I honour or praise you, 

Kv^nvu <ra, / lord it over you : xv^tsvu ce, I make you lord or 
master. 

III. Different goi'ernment in "verbs compounded with 

prepositions. 

When prepositions are joined with verbs, th^y empower them 
to govern their case in Greek, as in Latin. 

Thus verbs compounded vrith l|, -cr^o, ctTro, assume a genitive: 
rS -cjoSq? iKn^siAoia-xs xiQov, having hung a stone to his foot, Epigram. 
^AvvivviSf lx.x.v\U^erxh he is tumbled out of his chariot, H^or^lx^t n 
yAwrp rvis hxnaia^f Isocr. his tongue runs before his thought, 2«yroj» 



Of Absolute Cases. 967 

<??ir^a? a^X^^i a-B-oXyo^v, Id. clearing yourself iyf a shameful crime, 
^Air'srn t5 hacyviAuxJ^ia-xi, he altered his resolution of fighting by sea. 

Likewise the compounds of virl^^ or xavj^y : tS waT^w v7rf^/A«;^«- 
fta/, Soph. / shall fight for my father, KaT«;^fovr£y dw-n^^m toc 
(pvAXa, Lucian, throwing the leaves at one another. Kuriifivai cs, 
Dem. he has spit at yoUf and metaph. he ha-s despised you. 

Those of zjcc^a and Itti^ govern an accusative : /a^ rU //s -5?^- 
fsA^j?, Od. ^. that nobody may pass me, 'T'jTs^snymvrss rov Aiv- 
Kx^luv iVQ^ov roiq vav^f Thucyd. having brought their ships to the 
other side of the isthmus of Leucadia, 

If the preposition were to be detached from the verb, and put 
before the noun which it governs, those expressions would be re- 
solved into their simple and natural sense ; as aocvrov Xvuv aVo 
a'ta-x^oig alrixi;, clearing yourself of a shameful accusation ; and in like 
manner the rest. 

Nevertheless the preposition is sometimes repeated, without de- 
taching it fi'om the verb: a(po^iu avrtsq aV dxKvXuv, Matth. xxy. 
and he shall separ'ate them from one another, E/ ^r^ lxs"^o'>7 ex t5? o^S, 
if you won't get out of the road. 

Some verbs govern one time a genitive by reason of their prepo- 
sition, and another time an accusative, because of their significa- 
tion : rhvcuv «(p», Soph, keep away from your children. Uavra r' 
aXV dpis, Dem. laying aside all the rest. Likewise, ano^vco as 
ruv ufAx^rixiVf I free you from your sins. 'Airo^vu gs to. t/xar/a, I 
take off your cloaths ; and the like. 

Some admit of a difference of government by virtue of the pre- 
position wherewith they are compounded, which governs different 
cases : vTrs^B^^a-av tS isv^yni Herodot. they passed the tower, T«? 
«%av«? virefi^vxif Chrys. to be mounted above the heavens^ Twy «AXwy 
v7?ef(p^ovS»r£?, Lucian, undervaluing others, 'Ttts^i^^ovuv ?^? «'ax«5 
aTFxvtxq, Plut. the same* 

IV, The e.vpression changed by the government. 

Sometimes the phrase is changed by different governments, 
which import the same thing ; as x-xr-nyo^u o-s 'vy^o^oalxv, or a-5 
cr^o^o(ri«f, / accuse your treason ; or o-e txs^o^cr^xs) I accuse you oj 
treason, 

'ATPors^u <Tii rvii tia-ta<;, or a-oi rrm aaixv-j or as t??? ^atw^^ or c-e r-nv 
4aixy, I deprive you of your substance. Syvo*^* I^xvt^ a/j,x§ra.vuv, or 
aiAix^roivovrt (both by attraction) or xf^x^rixv, or ■cte^* r^j uixac^rixcf 
I am sensible of my error. Which is sufficient for examples. 



w 



CHAP. VII. 

Observations on Figurative Construction. 



E «hall observe here the same order as in the Latin Method, 
recTucing all these figures to four. 

1. That which marks the want of some words in a sentence, and 
is called ellipsis, of which the zeugma makes a part. 

2. That 



368 Book VII. Greek Syntax.- 

2. That which marks a redundancy of something in a sentence, 
and is called pleonasm. 

3* That which marks Some disproportion and disagreement in the 
parts of a sentence, and is called syllepsis. 

4. That which marks the inversion of the natural order, and is 

called HYPERBATON. 

We shall treat of these figures here in ver}' few words, as we 
suppose the reader to have acquired some knowledge of them al-* 
ready from what we have said elsewhere. 

I, Ellipsis, 

The general maxims of this figure must be taken from th0 
Latin Method. But there is not one more necessary than that of 
the word zr^oiyixx or ^f^/xa understood. As when they 'put the 
adjective neuter for a feminine substantive : to tjo^plv koii to 'ArriKo* 
^Exxoi^os, the beauty and the elegancy of the Greek tongue ; that is to 

say, TO ffoipov y^^rtfJLM.^ 

When they put a neuter with the substantive feminine: oIk ouy^- 
6ov zjoXuKoigocvir), Hom. the government of many is not goody is perni- 
cious. nov*)^ov crvKo<poi,vrvis i Dem. an informer is an abominable thing. 
X'TTuviov xcii ^vasv^ETov E<ri <pi\os ^iQocioi, Plut. a constant friend is rarest 
end hard to be Jbund, @e7ov ^ aXy^^itoe. axi zsavru)/ y.ev a.ya.Qav ^ioTs, 
tsoivruv Se ccvQ^uitois a^x^> i^l^to apud Plut. truth is a divine thing, 
and the source of all blessings to the gods, and to men. 

Sometimes they put the substantive ; as k^ot^vot-rov %$V'^ ^ «^^" 
huecy Epictet. truth is an immortal thing. 

Sometimes they express it along with the other noun in the ge- 
nitive ; as TO (/.Ha-ixriq xfr/Aa, Synes. music, as Phaedrus has put 
res Clbi for cibus, "Es-t^ys ^s o KxTax^ tirs^puus r'ov a.^s7^<pyjyf ^^y)(xm 
^xviJi.oiTov, uq Xsysrccif yvvxiKo; yevo/ixfvijv, Piut, de AugUStO. CcBSttr 
was exceedingly fond of his sister, who by all accounts was a xuonder- 
fully fine woman. 

This same noun is understood, when they put a genitive instead 
of a nominative ; which is more usual with the Attics : tl^t /w,of 
TBT« T« Lyoc^H ysvoiTo, sup. %f^/>tflc, res, or Ivvxjjus, facultas, / ivish 
I Could be so happy. 

Likewise when they put r« w^wTa for 'sj^uros: ; as icrQi *AQmMuv, 
T^ 'ST^urx, Lucian, Jceep thou the first ranJc among the Athenians. 

When the article is put with an adverb or with a preposition, a 
participle must be understood agreeing with this article, if it be 
not expressed ; as r^v l-Tr/'TroXvjy ac/.fixcc, sup. Sa-xv, the fiesh on the 
surfoce, AristOt Tor? yZv (sup. naiv) xai ro7<; 'cs^orz^ov (sup. ysyovoci) 
" Id. to those that are at present, and to those that have beenformerly. 
*H >diyX(^ }cU'/)(yi<;, sup. yiyo[jLiv^, Id. a Circular motion. In like man« 
ner, when we say to zjv.Kcx^i, formerly, to zygiv, before, to vvv, or rx 
yvv, nunc, notv, we are to understand -crfay/txa, or in the plural 
'sj^oiyiAtxrx, according to present matters or affairs. 

A participle must also be understood when we say, ret. xocr* 
uyo^oiv, sup. ovra. or yivo(AEvx, forensia, things relating to the bar. 
*0 ev' is^AvoTs, sup. uv, who art in heaven. 'H oivoo ^aa-iXsiac, sup. ^a-a, 
the kingdom of heaven, Ot (asO' w/a«?, sup. Io-o/^aevo;, poster! nostri, 

our 



Of the Figure Ellipsis, 



S69 



our posteritij. Ta Iv ftef ?/, or tm i^i^nii or xam /x^f o?, sup. ©yra, singula - 
ria, things taken separately , or in particular, 0\ h tw teAe/, sup. ovtjj, 
Mo5^ M«^ ar^2// employment, or post,. And in like manner the rest. 

But it will not be amiss to give here, foi' the greater ease of 
young beginners, particular lists of those words that are most 
commonly understood among Greek authors, after the manner ob- 
served with regard to Latin authors, in the Latin Method. 

FIRST LIST. 

Of several nouns understood in Greek autJwrs, 



MASCULINES. 

*AN©P>firT02 is understood, when we 
say, Tov v£>tyv, Tov vex^ov, defunctum, a 
dead man 

KI'NAYNON. or APO'MON, when we 
say, Tflp^eiv, <jr S'leiv tov wz^. ^v)(^^<;, or 
V7re§ -i^x^^ ^? ^"^ ^^^ ^^^^ ofonf's life. 

MT~0O2, when we say, is-oiov hiTreg;. 
what have you said ? for -nrotbv (mQw, 
as in Latin, auscuUa paucis, sr^p. verbis, 
hearken a little. 

OfNON, when we say, v pajroXvy tjv* 
evivEQ ct' elq Bvvav JtctretaXhiu Theocr. 
really you drank a great deal as you were 
gding to bed. 

TITPETO'S, when we say, Xust Tgi- 
tttim;, discutit tertianas, sup. febres, it 
cures a te tian ague. 

TO'n Bi'oN, when we say, fxera'K- 
Tvarrw, xaraXuiw, to end his life, to die. 

TPO'nOY, when we say, o yag av^g 
WT»? Ik -zzravTo? hdnei rriv euTTaflstav, this 
man strives every uay to move the pas- 
sions, Dinnvs. Halioarn. de Isocr. 

"YIINOS, when we say, &? 0ct9vv lnoi- 
fxhQag ! how piqfvundly you slfpt ! 

XPO'noj, when we say, al KoixUt, 

Hippocr. ventres hyemis & veris, sup. 
tempore calidiores, the belly is naturally 
hottest in winter and spring. 

Ek waXaiS, a lon<r time since ; ha (xak^h, 
Ji« tffoWVy jam longo intervaHo, a long 
time ago : h Tyrw, Thucyd. mean zvhile, 

FEMININES. 

Al''2©HTl2, or *01MH\ when we say, 
«ro96v ^^otS /ue -sr^ofeSaXg; unde miki ko' 
minis odor allni>sus est 'f 

TH^'n, Xil'PAN, when we say, eJtf 
'aro%if/,iav, eIc israr^i^a., in hosticum, sup. 
solum, into an enemy^s country ; in pa- 
triam, sup. terram, regionem, into his 
native country. 

TAITSSA, or *ANH\ when we say, 
h "EWmKh, h 'ATTJ5, the Greek tongue, 
theAitic tongue. 



rPAMMH\ when we say, /zc-go? o^Bhv, 
ad perpendiciilum. As also, Itt* tlQtiaCf 
directly, perpendicularly, 

AI'KH^ when we say, rh sttI bavxra 
xo{V0jt*lv«, sentenced to die, 

'E^f^riv XaQeiv, sup. Ji'jtsjv, to cast ofie^s 
adversary by default. Or for want of 
appearing in court. 

AO'HA, when we say, vAvkyz tJjv 
Ifxh, mea opinione, mea sentential, cc- 
cording to my (pinion. 

A0Pa\ when we say, aXwTrsjcfl, Xs- 
ovTfi, doynvi, n^^.s, &c. vulpina, leonina, 
ursinOy hinnulina, Sec. sup. pellis. 

APAXMH\ when we say, ^.^xicov 
oovsTa-Qai, mille drachmis emi, to cost a 
thousand drachms, 

'Eni2T0AAl2, or some such word, 
when we say, h raXg rs • ^ae-iXsMi S^t- 
wXafj, in diplomatis regis, in the king^s 
letters patent. 

'haiki'a, when we say, l» via?, sup. 
hXiKiag.from one*s youth. In like man- 
ner, la vly, eK fAU^anitt, Ix. 'srai^og, as in 
Lai'm, d puero. 

'hme'pA, when we say, rn 'ar^ors^aia, 
T? iTnscrj), the day before, the day fol" 
lowing. 

'h erfijus^ov, h av^iov, to-day, to-morrow, 
Thv xygi'av optoXoyBiv, sup. «/WE^ttV, va- 
dimoniura promittere, to promise to ap^ 
pear before the day appointed. Bud. 

Tng Kv^ias airoKzitrss-Qcn, or vg-e^SioQetif 
vadimonium deserere, to miss appearing 
at the day appointed, Bud. for Jtygw is 
taken for the fixt day, as that on which 
the aflfair is to be decided. 

MorPA, or MEPi'2, when we say, 
'rrjQs, bac, sup. fA,oi§a, parte, on this side. 
MgT^eTv T^v HirW; sup. fjtoT^etv, sequam 
portionem metiri, to render like for like. 
In the same manner, 1^ hm;, l^ hfA-i' 
ciiaq, ex aequo, ex semisse, i. e. ex aequa 
& dimidiata, sup, parte^ equally, or by 
half. 

NAY~2, when we say, r^ifi^ns, 'orSV- 
TJixevTogof, a galley with three rows of 
oars, a galley with fifty oars t «J>0|Tt?, a 
ship of burthen, 

'oao'n, 

3 B 



370 



Book VIL Greek Syntax. 



'OaO'n, when we say, nrors^av Tga- 
■tthtIovj utram insistendutn ? sup, viam ? 
tvhich way must we take ? 

•Sl(; a nsr^ov'Xfi^^zi ravryi, ers^av Itpo^- 
'Ki'Tdf Synes. as one method did not succeed j 
he tried another. So Terence says, 

Hac non successit, alid aggrediemur vid. 

jTfi^ civ a-oi Jo|«£v, ut tibi videbitur, 
vh. qua vi| & ratione tibi videbitur, 
as you please. 

pTTS^ (petve^cirarov av yivoiro r aX>}9H?, 
in the manner properest for clearing up 
the truth, 

HAEYPa', or MEPi'2, when we say, 
Tfis 'Aciag h 'sr^ot;, raj avaroXa,/;, the eastern 
part of Asia^ Where we must under- 
stand also a(rff, or T^£7ro|M,sv», conversOy 
or some such word. 

nAHrH\ when we say, Imr^l^tro 
nrv^ofxtvoQ -la-oXXa?, Aristot. he has been 
inell beaten, z ^a^hasrcti itoWa.q, ^a.^riema.i 
o\tya?, Luke xii. vapulabit multis, shall 
be beaten with many stripes ; vapulabit 
paucis, shall he beaten zoith few stripes. 

ITNOh', when" we say, Ima-iki, winds 
that blow at a certain time of the year : 
'T^otralai, reciproci, whirlwinds, 

nosi'i;, when we say, rJjv 'sr^irnv, 
Gal. prinla potione, at the first dose, 

TE'xnhn, when we say, y^afxixari- 
im, pnro^ur,v,^ia.XE)iriiiw, ar^mnv, rturovi- 
»^r, grammaticam, vhetoricam, dialec- 
ticam, medicam, fabrilem, sup. artem, 
grammar, rhetoric, logiCj physic, the me- 
chanic.arts. 

TIMH'N, TIMilPl'AN or *AMOI- 
BH'n, with the accusative a^Uv, ac- 
cording to Budaeus j as tw »|trtv «7ro- 
TtvEiv, to suffer the punishment that one 
deserves. 

TPATIE'zhs, when we say, aVo tnq 
ahrnq, (rirn(rQfj.iQa,, toe shall be fed from 
the same table, 

XEl'p, when we say, nx h^M, tn 
a^KTs^ai, dextra, sinistra, sup, manu, to 
the right, to the left. 

Likewise avrXEiV dixt^ori^ais, haurire 
duabus, sup. XH°'h manibus, to draw up 
ivitk both hands. 

X^'PAN, when we say, Jtar tS'jav, 
in a separate place. 

^H~*ON, when we say, tkv aoo^na-av, 
at ^hv caietiPsa-av rMvta, album aut ni- 
grum lapidem ponere, to give a white 
bill of acquittance ; or a black bill of con- 
demnation, 

"XiPAS, when we say, -nrgw/ac yavo- 
fjsknvs, morning being come. 

NEUTERS. 

*APrY'PlON, when- we say, ..ooma^ai 
voKxS, or oKiyy, to buy dear, ox cheap. 



AIA'STHMA, as ehti^t ti l^ns iUrU 
nia/xas drsi^ig-ns , >tcti ravrag ha isroXXa, 
Thucyd. they dwell in villages that have 
no walls, and are very distant one from 
another. 

"efkahma, when we say, fivyvlv 
ii^^iuQ, ta be accused of committing out- 
rages. 

"EBvoCf when we say, to ^ag^etgaoj', 
the barbarians, 

"EQog, when we likewise say, t5 
Ba^Qa^iKov, barbaricum, sup. raorem, 
the customs of the barbarians ; as in Te- 
rence, antiquum ohtines. And in the 
French language, d la Frangoise, a 
Vlialienne, as much as to say, a ta mode 
FrariQoise, Italienne, &c. 

"Ewof, when we say, 'Ofxn^udv Ixef- 
vo, Homericuiu illud, that verse of 
Homer. 

"EPrON, when we say, •aroTov £f£^«f; 
Horn, what have you done ? 

0T~mA, 2<i)A'nON, or some such 
word, when we say, svayyixia 2rvii¥f 
to offer sacrifice for good news. 

Ttt c-asTnpict 'sravnyv^il^iv, to make a 
public thanksgiving Jfor one's delivery, or 
preservation, 

'iMA^TiA, when we say, ol to, //.a- 
Xaxa ^EgSvTes, Matth. xi. moUia gestan- 
tes, that wear soft clothing. 

KPE'A2, when we say, ^onov, as in 
Latin, bubula for hubula caro, beef, 

Me'pos, when we say, to hfjkirofxov 
era, Lucian, the half (f yourself, 

Kai^ioi 'mXnynvai, Hom. to be mortally 
wounded. 

'EttJ rcih rZv o^Zv, on the other side 
of the mountains. 

T^C P^Sgas TO fxh tv fa^ts agJtTOV' Ir^j 
TO $■£ ov TT^oq fXBa-nfxQ^iav, Aristen. one 
part of the country is towards the north, 
and the other towards the south. 

KaQ^ roXg w(A,oig <ri;wp^£Td{, where it 
joins to the slioulders. 

To El? rtuTov wov, sup. fJt'^oi:, quantum 
in se fuit, as much as in him lay. 

To' fjioi WiQaXKov, quantum in me fuit, 
as rnuch as was intrusted to my care. 

Sometimes in one Hiember of a sen- 
tence the feminine ixoCga is understood, 
and in the other the neuter (a^oq ; as 
B^ rifMa-BiiLg fxh &£ov eTvc«, T60vSvat Jl t5 
hfjiia-H, Lucian, dimidia ex parte Deum 
esse, altera parte dimidia esse mortuum. 

ME^TFON, when we say, ov^ t'fxou>i 
ahX* oKiyo) ;^£<gyj K^iQunrz, Thucyd, you 
would not be esteemed equal, But some- 
what inferior. 

HAH'GOS, when we say, to cgart- 

divmuv, TO vavTMov, TO oiKiriKoVf &c. mili- 

tultn coetus, the soldiery ; nautarum,^Ae 

crew s jprcclouutti, a gang of robbers ; 

famulorum. 



Of the Figmx Ellipsis. 



571 



famialorum, a train or retinue of at- 
tendants. 

2lfMA, when wfe say, 'Kr£gi??v«|M.Ew?, 
ff-jv^ova lirX yvfAv^y indutus siadonem su- 
per nudo, sup. corpore, having a linen 
tlotk cast about his ?iaked body. 

TOY~TO, in making use of these 
terms, a7roS's;£j?, demonstration ; pahtig- 
ynfji.a,, craft, or policy ; crrijjii^ov, indicium, 
a sign, ox proof ; nriKfxh^iov, a mark, or 
conjecture, and such like ; as oZtjo? h 
Hama, hcntdiKri 'O'kvrcL^ avd^xTTug, alroTZ~ 
>.fl? Tig Hs-cL Tnq Kano^aifxavUg ^nfMn^yog. 

TSK/xfl^lOV $•£ (sup. TSTO £?-{) TifAVOfXiVCl 

'GToWot cicoTtSia-iy xaj fA.ag'iyiifXBVoi xagTE^S- 
c-{, &c. Plot. To this state are all men 
reduced by vice, of itself a sufficient in- 
strument of misery- A proof ■ tcherecf 
is, that several are silent, even when 
their limbs we mangled, and bear iviik 
patience the torture of stripes, &c. 

"TAiiP, when we say, ^i^fxZ Xyscr- 
6«i, calida lavari, to bathe in zvarm 
•vcaier, 

'VvXi^'" '^'''VEiv, frigldam bibere, sup. 
aquam, to drink cold water. Unless we 
should choose to understand XuTgov in 
the first, and moiAo, in the second. 

itA'PMAKON, when we say, avriJoTov, 
an antidote, or c^a^fxaKBlct, when we say. 



«D©E'rMA, when we say, fjtiy^h (^Qiy - 
yovrcLi, Koi Ic-j^vov, y.aX yvvaiKoo^tq, Lftcian, 
thei] speak with a low, squeaking, and 
effeminate voice. 

XPiTmA, or nPA~rMA, we hare already 
mentioned it as one of the most general 
rules; but we are to understand it like- 
wise, when we say, avB' oVa, av0' uv, 1^ 
Sv, quamobrem ? for what ? As also e4>' 
oTs, £<J)' Z, quamobrem, proflter quod, or 
propter ilia quae, nn which account, be- 
cause of which, and the like. 

ADJECTIVES UNDERSTOOD. 

Sometimes adjectives are understood; 
as 

'AnAAiTN, when we say, 10 hixo-'v, 
a texieris unguiculis, from one^s youth, 
or tender, years. 

"en, or ©a'tepON, when we say, /w^Je 

n er<pa,g avrig ^iQaictxrQat, that is tO Say, 
^voTv &aT£fov, that they may not fail in 
one of these two things, either in hurting 
us, -or strengthening ihemielves. 

"oaOt", when we say, ^ta, ffia, during 
life ; ha. vuuro;, Aristoph. all night, 

nOAAOT", when we say, S'ja Xi°^^> 
and when it is taken for a long space of 
t.imej for a kmg while. 



SECOND LIST. 



Of verbSf or paj'ticiples understood. 



.AEI"'N, when we say, wgrt arra^ pt,i- 
sifS, (sup. htv) (T-vvr^iQrimi, Plut. so that 
he had like once to have been crushed to 
pieces, 

TIs^iSf/.Biv£ j^govov tifQV Karag-r.a-ai rk 
niv&fASVii t£v m^ayfAaToov^ tamdiu ex- 
pectavit donee res turbari cceptas com- 
poneret, word for word, expectavit tem- 
pos quantum componere, sup. 'ihi or 
l;)^f^v, with El? or a* : o'trov ^x^'"* ^'^ 
nara^iia-ai, he staid as long as was ne- 
cessary for quelling the insurrection. 

In like manner, vtfxofjievol te ra avrZv 
SKag-ii ofTov acro^vv, TUucyd. that is to 
say, ocrov ig to a.7ro^f,v, gathering each as 
much as was requisite for bare subsistence. 

Ei'mi\ eJ, Icj, when we say, to, 
yM C''^ l^^ naXZg, fxsyag nrovog, Eurip. 
sup. eg-], it is a great slavery to lead a 
vicious life.. 

MsTtt^oXfl TETftVTiov yXiotu, Id. change is 
agreeable in every thing. 

'sig sBog, ut mos, sup, est, as it is 
customary. 



'Efov ^vyiXv, sup. Ift, it is permitted 
to run away. 

Likewise, *i2N, when we say, oi xctd" 
hpicig, sup. ovTEs, those of our time. 

Which is very usual with the ad- 
verbs : a.v'j>, above ; hcltoo, below : 'btS.^ 
"kai, formerly ; ayv, iTrs^dyav, exceed- 
ingly, excessively ; and the like. See 
above. 

AHIITE'ON, sumendum, accipiendum, 
when we read in commentators and 
scholiasts, aTro KoivS, a communi, when 
we are to understand a word that has 
been mentioned already, or to infer it 
from the sense. 

'ENAE'xetai, when we say, ys- 
yai^rixag, i'aa ys na] rifxag elhvcti, Lucian, 
you were never married, that we know 
of 

ha'sxh, ri'NOMAi, or nposAO- 

KA'i2, when we say, ri ya^, or t< S'e aX- 
Xo ^ : as T4 ya§ aXXo pa9ufXMV, Kiv^vnuiis 
af^aa-oq B)V ^taTEXEtv; that is to say, rt 
y&-» ay «XXo mi.'io'.i) or 'sr^og^oy.riS-iUs for 

what 



572 



Book VII. Geeek Syntax. 



uhai else can you ejcpeclfrom yonr lazi- 
ness, but lo continue aluays in ignorancf ? 

KiV^vvsvsis a.'ffoQaviiv vTto roa-avrris m^o- 
'raruas, t/ yag «y aXko ; sup yiwiro, you 
ought to be afrunl iest our Ifrnfrlty da- 
stroy you ; fur zvhaf /Lecai/ hapi>enfiom 
it? 

UA'lxn, or noiE'i2, when we say, 
Ti yci^, el (aM eyeXuv av vrnna^ovTa. o^Sv ; 
how could I forbear laughing^ seeing 
him thus toy and play the fool ? 



~ nP02TA'TT^, when we say, tZ ^^ar- 
rsiVf bene agere, ur salvere, X'^k^^^* 
gaudere, sup. jnbeo, I salute you, I bid 
you a s^ood monozv. 

2YNE'BH, when we say, od^ xAerAi, 
when it was h'/ird. 

'ETni^h Egp^so-Qfiii, after he xoas arrived. 

Tl^GETAI, or KErTAI. ponituT, or 
jacet; when we say, Jta jUEo-a, per 
medium, to denote a thing said in a pa- 
renthesist 



THIRD LIST. 

Of prepositions understood. 



*ANTi\ ought to be understood, when 
we say, isToa-n h^iernsi ; Xeneph. that 
is to say, i.vri 'woa-a ; what does he take 
for teaching 9 ^i^atrnBi ji>tw65, Lucian, 
he lakes money for teaching. 

'Ano', or npo'2, in verbs of nn- 
tlerstanding, knowing, instructing: 
am^ aEti<r£cr9i fj,H, Dexa. that is to say, 
e7r' EjuS, or 'zzrgoj 1^5, what you will 
learn of me. Thus Acts ix. aumoa, am 
'moKhwv mt^i t5 avS'^os, I have heard by 
many of this man. And in Soph. TttuT* 
a>ty£jv 'BET^oj S-yXojv, to hfar these things 
from the servants. 

Thus 'Ano\ is also understood in 
verbs of distance, of delivering, par- 
taking, and others. See Rule XI. 

AIA^ ought also to be understood 
when speaking of the cause; as to, 
ToiaZra liraiva; 'Ayn^i^-ccov, Xenoph. / 
commend Agesilavs for this; that is to 
say, Jia ra, Toiavra,, because of this. 

Or when speaking of a place through 
which one passes : 'i^xpyrcti 'sre^loio, Horn, 
for ha -nreS/oio, they came across the 
fields. 

El's, when speaking of the end or 
manner : aS'jv •/A'^l^^'^''^ Taroi?, Aristot. 
making no use of this ; that is to say, eij 
ii^ev,for nothing, or in nothing. 

'EK, AIA\ 'the'p, nEPi\ or the like, 
in the genitive of the cause, or part. 

MBfA.<p»/ji,ai a-61 tvq k'/a^K'^o-S , I charge 
you with ingratitude ; that is to say, l» 
or mi^i a^Xft^i^lciq^ or i'vExa. 

"KgZfxZ sf- t2 'zetoS'o.,-, that is to say, Ik 
tS'stoS'o?, I hcina: yo'i by the foot. 

TWr.^M <pidXyiv v^ctTog, viz. I» ti^arog, I 
fill the vial wiih 'vat<rr. 

T^g la-Brirof XaQofA.svcs, Lucian, taking 
hold of him by the coal ; that is to say, 
i-A TYis ia-Qn-ros, as in another place he 
says, Ik rrjs y^ag "KafjiAeins-Qai, to take 
hold rf by the tail. 



Likewise, in mentioning the fa- 
-ther or sotirce : <pvg dyaQm 'Cja.riptuv, 
sup. Ik, binn of good "parents ; as Iso- 
crates says, i| h £<pvcrce,v, of whom they 
were born. 

'EN, in names of places : Mu^uBSivif 
for Iv Ma^aBZvi, at Marathon. 

In expre-^s ng the time precisely, tw 
hfxi^a.j in ipsa die, that vry day. 

Or the manner or cause: iin^vi Jc'Xw, 
tf K^dru, Horn, he hilled him not fairly, 
but by treachery. 

Mh ycLv^v ertfpln^ fxri t' »Xx^, /ttij t* 
m ttr^Jru), Phocyl. donH he proud of 
your knowledge, nor of y ur strength, 
nor riches ; or in your knowl-dge, &c. 
where it is obvious, thit Iv or Ivl is un- 
derstood in the two first members, as it 
is expressed in the last. 

'Enr, in mentioning the motive, the 
final or efficient cause : a t« |Un x*0y- 
<f)sTvat ravra a-£fA,viiVf>fA.ai, oSte taS y^a<peig 
a7ro<^vreTv, Dem. 1 du n it boa^i of having 
lost these things, nor of having avoided 
this accusation; that is to say, etti 
'tB, fur this, or because of this r as in 
. another place he says, I9' otgex'^i^iy, for 
which they rejoiced. And Aristot. say-s, 
<pQovos 'kuTtr] Itf' aXXor^ioig ayaQoTg, envy 
is a sadness for other people's prospe- 
Tiiy. Which Tully has translated thus, 
invidentia est egntudo propter alterius 
rfs secnndas. 

Kata\ when we say, dKyZ rnt xe- 
^aXhv, my head ukes. 

Ta 'SToKka,, ut plurimum, generally. 

To a-ov fj,i^og, quantum- in te est, for 
your part, as much as is in your power. 

Tiv TfoVcp, ad hunc modum, Cic. 
thus, in this manner. 

Tw rtt^jirnv, quam celerrime, as 
quick as possible, 

'A^-XY.v, or T^v oL^yjiV, ab, in initio, in 
the beginning, &c. 

In- 



Of the Figure Ellipsis. 



373 



In like manner, aXX', ?to Xf)/o,a£vov, 
tiaremv lo^ns nnofxev, Plato, but are we 
come, as the sny'mg is, a day after the 
feast ! that is to say, xara to Xs>/o,w6vov. 

"Ats, ttT£ ^Yi, oTa S'n, utpote, as^ to 
u>H : hs^Zroq isro'hAfji.a , ars nkvA^oq mv 
fArSyi^oy l^oSr/tTttTo <j)o€oy, being threatened 
with a icnr, he, like a coward, %aas 
seized voitha tenible panic. \ 

Likewise in the quantity of time or 
place : 'ilnciv err, Ixaroy, he lived a hun- 
drtd years ; r^iZv h/x^Zv IHv, that is to 
say, jtafl' oS'ov, trium dierum iter, or per 
iter, three days journey. 

This preposition must also be under- 
stood, when the o:rammarians say that 
Irfoy, verum, true, is superfluous, as 
in Aristoph. in Nub. where he intro- 
duces Socrates speaking to Strepsiades, 
who was settin.a: fire to the top of his 
Bouse : tfTO? Tt fSTOisCi, ersoy, airt rS 
Tiyas ; that is to say, nar Ireov, in good 
truth, friend, what art thou doing atop 
of my house ? 

Likewise when we say, t<roy, or kt*, 
perinde aeque, atque, ay, the same as, 
as much as. 

fA,i\atv, II. y. for they all hated him as 
death itself. Ti^6(j-^rtfxtt ^sy, to S'' aXn- 



Qk, specie qnidem hoc, re autem illud, 

ih'is in appeararfce, but in reality that. 

When verbs govern two accusatives, 
there is always one depending on this 
preposition. &ee rule xi. and xii. 

Thus when Apollon. says, olt 'Av- 
rio'rrr.v ly.nar&To, that is to say, Kar 'av- 
Ttcff>3v, what he had contrived against 
Antiope. 

nEPl\ when speaking of a part : 'mo- 
■*£~v Ta srxEXn, Aristoph. to have a petin 
in one's legs : that is to say, -Eregi rot 
e-xiXri, or xaT«. 

With verbs of accusing : Jiwxsty bavd- 
rn, to accuse one of a capital crime, 
viz. tffi^i ^ctvdra, as we read in Xeno- 
phon. 

nPO'2 is often understood with the 
iijfinitive. See Rule iv. 

ST'n in the ablative of the instru- 
ment or cause : ttvroXg ^rXolV, ipsis ar~ 
mis ; avraXg Qe'Kcuq, ipsis consiliis. 

In the signification of the Latin 
cum, with : 'sro^evofxsvog ■)(i\Uiq m'Ki- 
rais igrd. iTft Q^dnrig, Thucyd. march- 
ing with: a thous-md men towards 
Thrace ; eq alroTs a.^y.ei.ff-1 acti iirtroK; Ka- 
ratro^iroC, Philo, whom, he sunk into the 
sea together with their chariots and 
horses. 



Ellipsis of the government of prepositions. 

Sometimes we find an ellipsis of the government of prepositions : k^ V l^hctf 
IottiS's? dysi^ofxBv, II. a, for I? airhv •ma., we put sailors aboard the ship in pro- 
per time ; (/.lit^.v ri 'sr^osj Lucian, sup. rdijra, it is but a trifle in comparison to 
iMs. 

Zeugma. 

The zeugma, which is a kind of ellipsis, wherein a word is un- 
derstood that has been ah-eady mentioned in the sentence, may be 
seen in the following examples : -j? 'ajxi^s7ot roU fj.lv vioiq a-uj<p^oaruvnf roh 
S^ lax^TaQvri^oi^ 'syotPafAvOiatf ro7q ^e 'cssvYiO'i -cjXSroj, to?? ^e 'aKaaUtq xoo- 
fAoq ETi, Pint, education is a check to youth, a conifort to the old^ a 
treasure to the fioor, and an ornament to the rich. Here the verb IW> 
which is expressed but once, must be understood four times. 

Syys^ysry §£? To; ^IXuf (jl^ (TVfATrcx.vii^ys'iv' axt crvfJ^aXEVi-Ty, /!*>) ffVVE'^t- 

o-vvoL^tKEiv, Plut. •voe ought to join with our friend in his good, but 
not in his bad actions ; to considt with him, but not to devise mis- 
chief with him ; to support him in truth, but not in fraud or de- 
ceit ; to share with him in his misfortunes, but not in his iniquity: 
where the verb h7, which isi mentioned but once, must be under- 
stood eight times. 

EvipfOivsT crs 'crAarog TjoXAa^ zls^yzr^vrae.' xxi zysvlac uoKXx (xv) /%f^/,a- 

vZ'vra,' y.ixf Jo|a tz/aw/asvov xoil a.So|(« ^^ ^Ooy«/x6*ov, Plut. riches wilt 

':ih you cheerful f by putting it in your power 4o do good to a great 

many 



374 Book VII. Greek Syntax. 

viiany ; 'poverty^ hy freeing you from cure ; honour, by adding lustrelo 
you; and obscurity, by screening you from ewcy. The yexh il^p^ixnX 
must be understood here also four times. 

o Iv Tu\(X>rotis' B^E Kt^xum) o Iv AtQio^/zv' o ot ©sa? ^soichSf ijoivTx Se^/s, y^v> 
^ixXo^rrxv, oot^oi, a^avov' a-Kovo<;, ^&/?, xXv^Sova, a-iwnrviv, ont^oVf Plut. ^e 
Ma^ i^ ashore, is not afraid of the sea ; he that is not in the army, is not 
afraid of battle ; he that stays at home, fears no highway-men ; he that 
has nothing to lose, is not afraid of informers ; he that is in a private 
station, apprehends no envy ; he that is in France, dreads no earth- 
quake : and he that is in jEthiopia, fears neither thunder nor light- 
ning : but he that dreads God as an enemy, startles at every thing ; 
at the land, the sea, the air, the heavens, darkness, light, noise, silence, 
and even at his very dreams. Where it is visibfe, that the verb 
(poQuroci ought to be understood seven times in the first member; 
and the verb ^t^uv ten times in the second member of this passage j 
which is quite curious to observe. 

II. Pleonasm, 

The following expressions may be considered as examples of 
pleonasm : -zsrai^sfj 'i^uv for zjal^eis, ludis, you play, you jest : lauv 
stvac; for IxaJv, libens, willingly : fx^'^o a.'niuv, abiit, he is gone away. 
In the same manner Virgil says, latratu tiirbaUs agens. 

To the pleonasm we must refer what the grammarians call Ix 
tS wa^ciXXnAif, viz. according to Henry Stephen, in his book De 
Dialecto Attica, when two words are paralleled, as it were, in a 
sentence, which differ nevertheless not so much in reality as in 
appearance ; as when we read in Homer, havag-ov rs, /iao'^ov te ; 
-zjtoAe/xov te, iJLa-/jx,s TE, and in Lucr. prcelia S^ pugnas. 

It is also a pleonasm to sa]^ tnrih (Puvxt, Xenoph. Ka« tov *Arv» 
(x-ynv CKW-^oivra, uirsVv, a^ offic?, (poivnci, us xaXux; olvoxos'i'y and that 
Astyages said then in raillery, do not you see, hovo gracefully he pours 
out the wine ? 

Though we may say with Sanctius in his Minerva, that when 
we read, I'^^j <pixva,t, <pcivxt is oftentimes the accusative of e9»j, which, 
aj? a noun verbal, governs the' accusative that comes after, so as to 
make two sentences : just as when we say in Latin, pugnandum est 
pngnam, for pug7iandum est, to pugnare pu§nam. See, in the Latin 
Method, the remarks on gerunds. 

III. Syllepsis. 

The figure of syllepsis appears in gender : texvoi; tpixz, my dear 
son, where it refers to vll, fli, understood: iS^iipo^ (pz^ovrx ro|ov, 
Ancr. a child that carried a bow; where it refers to the masculine 
zjxTox, vuerum, also understood : fj^si^ccmx wrvy^sTs, Synes. juvenes 
ieVicissim'i, happy youths ; rUvx ats '^ns-i vss, Vh'il, girls that do not 
wa!2t wit: Kooov KxX7STy), abeauti/id damsel, &c. 

In 



Of the Relative Sylkpis. 375 

In number : l^ojx r^Bx^ff animalia currit. See above, Rule V. 

But we cannot call it strictly a syllepsis, when a dual is joined 
with a plural, since the construction may ba still natural, by reason 
that there are properly only two numbers, one for the unit, and the 
other for that vvhich exceeds the unit, whether two or more. 
Hence Diomedes, book 1. shows, that the ancient Greeks never 
used the dual number, which has been quite neglected by the Co- 
lics, and after their example by the Latins. 

Wherefore we may say, a/A(pw^' r^ix^ai, ambo currunt, tJieji/ both 
run : we may also say, 2wKf«r*j$ xa< ri;\ar^» s^^sa-Qov, or k'^^ovrxi, 
Socrates and Plato are coming : nay it is more elegant, as also more 
usual to put the verb in the plural. But it is more extraordinary 
to see the verb in the dual, with a noun in the plural, thougti we 
meet with some examples thereof; as £< y/W 'i~ov, Horn, if you are 
his children. 

In gender and number : ZiXr^^os T^ocrioiq i^xviHi oclvHVTuv Toy 

©eov, Luke ii. rmdtitudo ccelestis cxercitus laudantium Deum, instead of 
-»<v«(7i(ij, laudantis, a midtitude of the heavenly host praising God, 

Relative Sylkpsis, 

The relative syllepsis may be found in Thucyd. and others, as 
book 2. £/ ^E />tE ^iX yioc) yvva,iKz\oi<; ri cc^styi';* ocTaci vvv Iv ^(/i^sioc scrovra/, 
ftiyn-Qvvxt, bid if it is proper I shoidd mention the virtue of those 
tvomen, that are just become tvidoivs ; where oa-an, which is piit in- 
stead of a?, quce refers to the women that are not mentioned, but 
included in the signification of the words yvvxmsixs a^zrris. 

To this same figure we must refer some other more difficult pas- 
sages of this author : ro ^' £yry%£?, ol av tjj? sv'rr^E'rrsToirvis "kxyu' 
a-iv, ua-TTt^ o" ^s (A,sv vvv, rsXsvrioSj v^z7<; ^£ Xvirms, ibid, which word 
for word may be translated thus ; Jelicitas autemf quod honestissimum, 
sortiuntur, ut illi 7iunc exiium, vos vero dolorem : where the relative 
oT, qui, can by no means agree with the neuter tlrvx^^ ; so that we 
must suppose its antecedent by the sense to which it relates, as if it 
were, to S' ivrvy(\q tstotv Ir't'^i ol uv, &c, vfAsTs Se Xy^r^jr, sup. l?i.a.^E<T0e ; 
men^ like theses are happy to meet imth so honourable a death ; though 
it be to you a subject of sorroiv. The meaning of which seems to 
have escaped the author of the idiotisms, who translates it thus, 
illis autem verejelicitas obvenit, qui honestissimum, vel ut illi exitum, 
vel tit vos ipsi dolorem sortiuntur. Referring thus the wordjelicitas 
to the last member, as well as to the first : whereas it is evident 
that Pericles designs, in this speech, to declare the deceased happy, 
and the survivors afflicted. Which Cicero has done in his book of 
Friendship, when he says of Scipio, quamobrem cum illo quidem 
actum optime est, mecum autem incommodius. Which comes to the 
same thing with what he said before : nihil enim mali accidisse 
Scipioni puto ; mihi accidit, si quid accidit. 



IV. %- 



376 Of the Hyperbaton. 

IV. Ilyperbaton, 

The following may serve for examples of the hyp^baton .* y^^yi 
[jLx ^/' »;^, ^v Afo'JT£i9'n^ zrsi^oirxt tiJ otoXs* ^vvx[aiv Kxrxa-KBVoi^eiVt t«vt»jv 
^xa-xxlvttv, ^ixXvsiv 'cystqoia^xi^ Demosth. whereas, according to the 
natural order, it should be, a y^qyi ^xa-KoiUniv, kxI ^txXvsiv 'srei^xa^xi 
rxvrnv rm ^yvacju/y, vtv AtoTfeiQriq zjsi^xrxi rn 'croXei xxTxaxevoi^etf WS 
must not endeavour to ruin and dedroy that power and strength, tjohich 
Diopithes has strove to give to this city, 

I'^^sre, rxyrny h erua-i oX/yw %fovw, Plato ; instead of saying, Itt/- 
^Ei^yjriov vyi-u^ Iv nrucri oXiyu %fovw raur^jy l^tKia-Qxt oix^oXvtVi ^v v{AeTs 
h zsoWu x^ov<i> EX^re; you must endeavour instantly to blot out of 
your memory the calumny which has been imprinted there Jhr so long 
a time. 

The interruption of the order of coherency, which grammarians} 
call avax.oA»9ov, may be found in Greek as well as in Latin : roTs 
2vg«)fao-Jo/i^ yLXTxirXfi^is ax oXty*) lyinro o^mrsSy &C. Thucyd. that 
is to say, trxv o^mns vxrxv, whereas, according to the natural order 
of construction, it should be o^ua-if to make it agree with Zy^axac/o/?, 
the Syracusians were not a little surprised, seeing, or when they 
saWj &c. 



The End of the Seventh Book* 



BOOK 



ass- 



BOOK VIII, 



CONTAINING 



PARTICULAR REMARK;S 



ON ALL THE 



PARTS OF SPEECH, 

Useful tor understanding perfectly the Greek Authors. 



JLA-FTER having given a general idea of the Greek construction 
m the foregoing book, and in the rules there explained, I have 
thought proper to subjoin here some particular remarks on the 
several parts of jipeech, as I have done in the Latin Method, m 
order to pomt out in a clear manner the different properties of this 
language, and the reasons of their being used in discourse ; which 
will not a little contribute to a perfect understanding of the Greek 
authors. 

CHAP. I. 

Remarks on the Nouns, 

And first of the Irregularities, which grammarians sup' 
pose to be in their Construction, 

JL HE Attics used always to make their vocative like the nomi- 
native; whence several, in imitation of them, have made use of th» 
nominative instt^ad of the vocative : 59 ©a?? Iyf/f», Luke viii. puella, 
surge, w7a?V/, a/-^>e. Of ©^axe?, m Ssyjo, Aristoph. come lilt fiery ThrU" 
cians, 'Elaxso-oy, 0£o?, Psalm. Ix. exaudi, Deus, hear me cry., O my 
God. 0§oyo? o-tf, ©10?, Heb. i. thronus tuus, Deus> thy throne, O 
God* is for ever and€ver,Scc, which practice, as we have made ap- 

3C P«" 



378 Book VIII. 

pear in the Latin Method, has been received by the Latins, and 
actually obtains in some modern languages ; as in the French, 
venez gh, I'homme : tenez, lafemme y and such like. 

But it will not be an easy matter to find, unless I am very 
much mistaken, a vocative put instead of a nominative, as the 
grammarians would fain make us believe. For if their opinion 
holds good, the consequence must be, that as we have a proof of a 
nominative being put for a vocative^ from its being joined with a 
verb of the second persnn ; as in Plautus, Da^ mens ocellus, Da, 
anime mi ; so it should be demonstrated, that a vocative may be put 
with a verb of the third person, as if it were a nominative ; for 
example, Dat, anime mi, like Dat^ mens ocellus ; of which it will be 
impossible to find an example. 

Wherefore, when grammarians say that tV-Trora NeV^^, eque& 
Nestor ; v£(pEXy}yE^hx Ziv<;, nubens-cogens Jupiter ; o Ovlrx, Thi/estes; 
and the like words in Homer and others, are vocatives instead of 
nominatives, they are undoubtedly mistaken, these being all real 
nominatives, as we can demonstrate from the following verse of an 
epigram quoted by Eustath. 

Naius sum genitore Kopcena. 

Where the word closing the versC; he might as well have put 
K9'ff(xivYi<;, if nothing but the necessity of serving the measure 
was the occasion of putting one case instead of another. But this 
cliange of cases, is not tolerated in any language. And when 
Homer says, 

AvTa^ avts ©usr' Ay iXfABfAvovi Xufrs ^o^^vccij 

At rursus Thyestes Agamemnoni reliquit gestandum ( viz.sceptrura). 

the article o is a plain argument that Qvirac is a nominative case. 
Insomuch that all these nouns belong properly to the Macedonian 
dialect, which casting away ? from the nominative, changes *j after- 
wards into My as we have observed in the first book. 
Wherefore when Homer says, Od. |. 

Toy -S* oc'mx.{AZi<^o[A,svoq 'nTgo$E(P>5^, Ev^ats (tvQuTX, 

we must not imagine that Ev/xa/e avQurx is a vocative for a nomina- 
tive, nor translate it in the third person allocutus est, which we read 
in divers translations, as if it were <a^Qaz(p'/t, whereas the genuine 
reading is -cT^oo-Ecp*}?, because, as Eustathius observes, it is an apos^ 
trophe of the poet to Eumgeus, in the nature of several others which 
he -quotes from the Iliad. Wherefore we must translate it thus, 

Hunc autem respondens allocutus es, Eumcee suhulce* 

After which manner Virgil says, -^neid 10. 

Daucia Laride Tymberque simiUima proles 
Indiscreta suis, gratusque parcntibus errors 
At nunc dura dedit vobis discrimina Pallas, 
Nam tibi, Tt/nibre, caput J^andrius abMti ensjU* 

The 



Remaj^ks on the Nouns. 379 

■ The grammarians mentmn several other irregularities of the 
like nature, which ought to be all referred to their natural meaning. 
For instance, they insist that one gender is put for another, when 
we say, a-^f ^xQs7x, which, they pretend, is instead of joaS^?, aer pro- 
Jiindus : «<6^^ Vtos, for Vioi;^ divus cEther : rirco ru yiixs^x for rxvrcc, 
Xenophon ; these two days, and such like. Whereas it is evident, 
from these very examples, that those nouns were of the feminine as 
well as of the masculine gender, by reason of their conforming to 
the feminine construction, the adjective having properly of itself 
no gender, but only terminations accommodated to the gender of 
its substantive, as SanCtius has proved in his Minerva. 

We likewise find t5 aruXiriyyoq, Soph, tubce : r^ oi^-nq, Eurip. 
glorice : t3 (jvi/.(pocSic, Synes. calamitatis, and the like ; whicli is not 
a disagreement of the gender, but a sign, either tliat these nouns 
were formerly of the masculine gender, or that the same article was 
used for both genders. See the irregulars, Book II. Chap. vii. 

The same may be said of the following Attic phrases : ^^i<7is Xx(A' 
TTfo?, Soph, a famous jiidgme72t ; not that the Attics joined a femi- 
nine with a masculine, as some pretend, (which would be a down- 
right solecism) but because the adjectives in o? had among the At- 
tics that termination common for both genders, as the termination 
zs among the Latins. 

They likewise will have it that one case 15 put for another: as 

q\ o£ yi-nri voov Kxn'kiy'xlru} u^oq, Hesiod ; where they say that as is for 

o-o«\ But in reality rs is the accusative of the verb, and vo'ov the 

accusative of the preposition xara understood. Let not outward 

forms and appearances impose upon your- judgment. 

And that an adjective is put for a substantive ; as ^<y$ kyxQ^, u^vx^ 
SI Kxy.vi ^xvxroio ^orsi^tc, Hesiod ; donatio bona, rapina verb mala Si 
mortifera : where x^trx^j they say, is instead of x^vxyr^ : but on the 
contrary, a^9r«| is here a real substantive. For it is common in, all 
languages^ as we have proved in the Latin Method, to have nouns- 
that are sometimes adjectives, and sometimes substantives, though 
Sanctius is of a different opinion. 



CHAP. II. 

Whether the Gireks have an ablative Case. 

JL3UT nothing has contributed so much to perplex the analogy 
of the Greek construction, as the obstinacy of grammarians, in 
insisting that the Greeks are without an ablative case ; whereas, by 
admitting of it, we discover a surprising agreement between the 
Greek and Latin tongues in this particular, as in several other 
points, where most of the governments are alike. 

Now, I apprehend, that it wUIn be no diiticult matter to prove, 
that this ablative, far from being repugnant to the Greek tongue, 
is actually received in practice. 

^. To prove this distinctly, it is proper to observe, that the question 
h susceptible of two difterent meanings : the first is, whether the 

Greeks 



380 Book VIIL 

Greeks have ever a case, which supplies the place of* the Latin ab- 
lative, and has all its nature and force : the second, whether thi» 
case may be called ablative in Greek, as it is in Latin, or whether 
it be sufficient, conform^jDly to the common method of the gramma- 
rians, to call it a dative. 

In order to resolve these two difficulties, we must remark, that 
the word case^ as also the words nominative^ genitive, dative, accU' 
sative, and ablative, being terms invented on purpose to explain, 
one's meaning, are of their own nature indifferent vvith regard to 
the thmg they signify : hence the^^rammai ians are used to call 
the nominative likewise rectus, and tlie rest, according to their 
order, secundus, tertius, quartiis, &c. Froni whence it is manifest, 
that these appellations are arbitrary ; consequently there is no oc- 
casion to enter here into a verbal dispute. 

Therefore, though the word case, which comes from cado in Latin, 
as -c/lSo-is comes from 'csiiflu in Greek, which signifies to Jail, has 
been adopted in both languages, from the falling of the cases into 
a variety of terminations ; yet it is unquestionable, that this word 
is frequently wrested to a wrong sense, because, as we shall make 
appear presently, the cases happen often to vary, without altering 
the termination : and moreover, because the nominative itself is 
called a case, though it neither falls into, nor is derived from ano- 
ther terciinatioQ ; being itself the very source, from whence all 
the other terminations are derived. 

Therefore as the word case is more receivable for its antiquity 
than for its propriety, and has been introduced only in order to 
point out the different uses which a noun admits of in a lan- 
guage (which has prevailed upon several to attempt to introduce a 
seventh and even an eighth case in Latin, notwithstanding that 
there can he but six different terminations) we may join with Sca- 
liger and Sanctius in saying, that by the word case we understand 
nothing more than a special difference in the noun, according to the 
different relations, that things bear to one another. 

Thai is to say, a manner of expressing the different properties 
which the noun receives, either in the singular or in the plural, 
which the Greeks and Latins call cases, by reason of the difference 
of termination : retaining afterwards this name even where the ter- 
mination is not altered ; and in the same manner the modern lan- 
guages have received it, though they make no alteration of the 
termination in their declensions. Concerning which see the Ge- 
neral Grammar, part 2. chap. 6. 

Now though these different properties may be multiplied almost 
in injinitum, as also the moods or manners of signifying, peculiar to 
the verbs, we affirm, nevertheless, that they are reducible to six in 
all languages. And under the name of ablative we comprise a 
vast number (;f signifiotions, all depending on a preposition, as 
under tbe subjunctive mood we have comprised several dependent 
and condiiional modes of a verb. 

This being premised, our opinion is, that the ablative, which 
we may more properly call with Sanctius, casus pr^positionis, 
the case of the prepositioHf by reason of its depending ^ways on a 

preposition. 



Of the Greek Ablative. 381 

preposition, whether it be expressed or not, whereas the other cases, 
which now and then admit of prepositions, may sometimes hare 
some other dependence, that the ablative, I say, is not only to be 
met with in the Greek language, but is even absolutely necessary. 

There is no great difficulty to prove, that this case is not re- 
pugnant to the analogy of the Greek language, since it was here- 
tofore received therein, both as to its force and appellation. For 
H. Stephen, in his book De Dinlecto Attica^ Ramus in the 7. of his 
Schools, and Priscian in his fifth book tell us, that the Latins 
borroxued their ablative from the most ancient of the GreeTc grammarians; 
ex vetustissimis Graecorum grammaticis, tcAo, say they, gave the 
name of ablative to these 'words f ii^ocvoQevf l/xeSfv, ajjd the like, xvhick, 
as they add, had visibly the force of an ablative, being sometimes 
joined with prepositions, as f| \iA.i^tv, in Horn, and the like. Whence 
it is plain, that not only the name of ablative was adopted by 
the ancient Greek grammarians, but moreover, that their notion 
was, to judge of it by the force of the preposition. 

Thus Quintilian, book i. chap. 5. says, that it is a gramma- 
rian's business to examine, whether ihere be a sixth case in Greek, and 
a seventh in Latin, because, says he, when I say, hasta percussi 
(tjU ^»^/) this construction has neither the nature of a dative in the 
Greek, nor of an ablative in the Latin. Where it is past dispute,, 
that he admits of a case different from the dative in this expression, 
whether we call it a sixth or a seventh. Now this is all we want; 
because, when this is once allowed, it is an easy matter to show 
that this difference between a sixth and seventh case, arose from 
nothing else but from the different idea under which they con- 
ceived this ablative, which idea is entirely comprised in the word 
casus prtspositionis, because this difference arises from the different 
force of the prepositions expressed or understood. 

And we tind that Priscian, in his fifth book, has strenuously re- 
jected this opinion of a seventh case, because the number six is suf- 
ficient, as it is necessary to mark all the specific differences : 
though we may afterwards divide or multiply them farther, if we 
have a mind, in the genitive, and in the accusative, as well as the 
ablative, provided we refer them always to those, without there 
being any occasion that a noun should admit of so great a variety 
of terminations. 

And indeed, if the difference of the termination constituted the sole 
difference of the cases, it would follow from thence, that in Latin, 
as well ass in Greek, the neuters could never have more than three 
cases, in the singular or plural : that there would hardly be any such 
thing as a vocative in either language ; that the Latins never had 
an ablative plural ; and that the Greeks are without an accusative, 
vocative, or even dative ducil; the two first cases being always like 
the nominative, and the last being the same with the genitive. 

But it seems quite unaccountable, thai the Greek tongue should 
be deprived of an ablative, while, Priscian, H. Stephen, and Ramus 
all agree, that the Latins have borrowed theirs of the ancient Greek 
grammarians: and while, >according to Quintilian, there is ixwre 
occasion for increasing than diminishing the number of cases. 

It 



382 Book VIII. 

It is observable moreover in all languages, as Sanctius says, that 
the only use of the dative is, to. mark the end and the term, to 
which the thing and the action tend, and to v^hich they relate : 
whence it follows, that it is very reasonable to give a different 
name to what has such different properties, and has also a con- 
stant depepdance on a preposition. 

Besides, when a Latin author makes use of a Greek noun, for 
instance Penelope^ where can he take his ablative from, if it is not 
m the original ? especially when these nouns retain always their 
particular mariner of declining, witliout conforming to the Latin 
analogy, which would terminate them in A, in order to decline 
them like musn. And if it should be answered, that they borrow 
their ablative from the dative ; therefore, says Sanctius, the same 
practice obtained in the Greek, because they could not give here 
what they had not originally themselves : and, as we have observed, 
our present dispute being not about the name, but the thing itself. 

Again, says Sanctius, if there were no ablative case in Greek, 
Cicero would have run into a downright solecism, when he joins 
a Latin adjective, undeniably in the ablative case, with a Gri*eek 
substantive which they pretend to be in the dative; as nimqimtn in 
majore avo^^x fui, / xvias never at a greater loss : or a Latin preposi- 
tion, one of those that can only govern an ablative, with a Greek 
noun, as they pretend, in the dative ; guns historias de 'Ay-aT^^siac 
hnbcs. In zjoXitbici. Non enim sejimctns locus est philologia, S^ guo- 
tidiana (Tv^rvtcrtr. and such like. For if philologia is an ablative, 
why should not. ffv^'/irrtcrs: be one also, especially as it agrees with the 
&dJGCiive quotidiana? 

This argument bears still a greater weight in constructions, where 
neither the Greek nor the Latin admit of a dative case ; as with 
the comparative, avohrvj^iu, nihil 'ulsiiiSy Cic. ad Quintum fratrem ; 
nothing can be cooler than the antichamber of the bath. For if he had 
a mind to conform to the Greek construction, why did he not put 
it in the genitive? and if he complied with the Latin construction, 
who can dispute its being an ablative ? 

Priscian, in his fifth book, says, that indeclinables, which he 
calls monoptota, as mille, alpha, &c. are not deprived of their cases, 
though they do not change their termination ; because we may sa}', 
hoc alphOf hiijus alpha, hide alpha, &c. Whence we may infer, ac- 
cording to Priscian's way of reasoning, that if in hoc alpha be an 
ablative, in kntoq^x, in zroXirsix, and the like, are also ablatives, 
though they do not differ in termination from the dative. 

Further, there are several passages in authors, that can hardly 
be explained, without having recourse to this dative ; as in Thu- 
cydides, book the first, in the speech of the Athenians : rx> 
Of MvioiKoc, xal^ 0(70. (xvroi^ ^vvire, e' icai ^/ o^X« fxaXXov h'roci, ati 
'sj^oQoi.WoyLvjois, kvoiKyn xiyiiv. Which passage Valla seems to have 
misunderstood in his translation, because, taking 'zs^oQocXXouivoiq m 
the dative, he considered it as the relative case of ^Z o;^x« irxi^ 
which makes it quite unintelligible: for surely the thing could 
not be troublesome to those who took a pleasure in repeating 
it. Whereas the meaning is clear, if we take this word for an 

ablative 



Of the Greek Ablative. S^S 

oblative absolute, which supposing ri^t^ is referred to those that speak, 
vifjJyu^o^aKKQixivot^, nohis proferentibus : so that it may he translated 
tlius : U is Jit tee speaJc to you of the Persian 'war, and of what you 
cannot be ignorant of yoiirsehes, though 'vne are sensible so frequent a 
repetition of the same thing must be disagreeable to you.- And 
this explication is so very natural, that Portus's notes resolve it by 
an absolute case ; tj^oCaXXo/Asvo/?, says he, avr* ts, y^ixuv ocvra, Tc^a^uk^ 
>^oiJ,Evuv ; which is still confirmed by the commentator, who says it 
is an enallage. But we have already shewn in the Latin Method, 
that these imaginary changes of one case for another, without any 
reason, are downright solecisms. It follows therefore, that as the 
construction is absolute, even in the opinion. of the scholiast, we 
have only to stick to that of the ablative, in order to find out the 
right meaning. Likewise, when the same Thucydides says, r^os 'lit' 
itoK^scTEi ovri zjB^l TO AvXiov, u)<; ui/ra '/lyy^xSoij, &c. Hippocrates being 
towards Dclos, as news urns brought him, &c. It is natural to suppose, 
that Tw ovri is a real ablative absolute, ipso existente, since we see 
the subsequent aur^, which makes the relative case, viz. the dative, 
forming another construction, and a second sentence. Other ex- 
amples of this Greek ablative may be seen in the preceding book, 
in the rule of the absolute case. 

From all that has been hitherto said, we may fairly infer, that 
the Greek tongue admits of an ablative case, as well as the Latin : 
and I believe that there are but few who will refuse to approve of 
my opinion, especially when they come to reflect on the vast ad- 
vantage that must necessarily accrue from hence to young begin- 
ners, by reason of the analogy between the two languages in an 
infinite number of constructions that depend on this case. 

Yet if any person should still find fault with this principle, 1 
must tell him, that it is not my opinion only he finds fault with, but 
likewise that of several very learned men, as Sanctius, Scioppius, 
Frischlinus, and others, who with great judgment have established 
this case. 



CHAP. III. 

Construction of Numerals, 

^y HAT the Latins express by undcy duode, the Greeks explain 
by the participle of Sea;, which they either put in the genitive 
absolute, or in the case of the noun that governs the number want- 
ing. In the genitive, as for undeviginti annos natus, nineteen yeanrs 
old, they say, ir-n ysyovu; z"ico(Ti, Ivo? Jsovro?, that is to say, twenty 
i^ears old, wanting one, uno deficiente : or else, srv) ysyojiw? ukqo-i, 
lvo5 ^Eovroc, that is to say, iV^j ^sovrx ho<; ts-^o? z'ikoo-i, years to which one 
is tvanting to make up twenty. In like manner, ^voTv ^sovrx Ixarov srn, 
duodecenteni anni, ninety-eight years olds ^voTv heaxs Uotrlv i^ioi^j duo- 
decentenas minas. And in the genitive, t^ <axovT« i^iSis hnarit; r^tn^ns, 
undetriginta triremes, nine {aiid twenty gallies, AvoTv ^eonuv ttnocrt 
K^^Ogcfffoj^ duodeviginti homines, eighteen men^ and the like. 

They 



384 Book VIII. 

They likewise use the neuter, Ivoj'^mv eihoo-;, tindeviginti .* whefe 
we must understand xara ^iov for liovro^, twenty^ lacking one. For as 
they say, hTv oXtys, ^e7v /(a/x^S, to signify', within very little, where 
they mijjlit have put Seovrof, so that ^etv if a sort of a noun, and 
supplies the place of an absolute case, supposing nccra: so when" 
they nay, |yo$ §£ov, we must explain it, xara ^eov Im nccording to the 
deficiency of one, supposing the luant of one. 

But they have another method of expressing this manner of 
reckoning, by making use of the ablative of the ordinal nouns for 
the greater number : as /t*<5? ttnavis r^i»)io<;^ r^i^^ti, instead of pt/<?5 
^ttiq-v)q T^/axoyrof r^iv^siq. In like manner, hog Seovto? ttKoru ac^O^iigfi 
and then this ablative is the case of the manner, or of the efficient 
cause, as if it were, vigesirao homine, uno tamer> deficiente, with 
a tvoentieth man (instead of w?VA txuenty men) except '>ne that was 
wanting. For to express one person along with several others, 
they use the following phrases, very much akin to the French, lui 
cinquiemey lui dixieme : Ecvox^EiS»j?, we/^awIo? ayro?, Thucyd. Xenocli' 
des, who was the fifth in number, that is to say, fiour more along 
with him. 

They likewise say, Hirtro^ X'^'^°^> ^^^' ^ thousand horse, as if it were 
millenarius equttatus, yM^ix tittio^y for i^v^loq tirmTs, an infinite number 
of horse; and the like. 

When they have a mind to express a number and a half, they 
put v)i4,{ together with the number exceeding the other: thus to 
express two talents and a half, they say, t^Jtov ^(jurcHXaevrov, tertium 
semitalentum, two talents and the moiety of a third; and in like 
manner the rest. 

II. Combination of numbers. 

In the combination of numbers, when a lesser number is put 
fiftt, it is commonly joined by a conjunction with the greater ; as 
^ucriXei/ffAs Iruv rt<ra-ai§eoi»l^sH.x, Her. having reigned Jburteen 
years. 

When the greater number is put first, the conjunction is often 
added, often omitted: thus Plut. speaking of Cicero, l<T^ay», 
Toy r^a.^tiKov Ix t5 (pogc/» ■BTfOTetva?, sVof IxEnio ytyovuq l|*jxoroy, k«i te- 
Tag-Toy, his head was struck off, as he stretched it cut of the litter, 
being at that time threescore aud Jour years old. A^Kxrea-a-a^x trv), 
VhiU fourteen years, To^ymq ^eQiuxev srn lx«roy oxrw, Gorgias lived 
a hundred and eight years. See what has been already said relating 
to this subject, Book II. Chap. xi. 

III. Divers particles made use of in the eacpressing 

of numbers. 

The Greeks make use of several particles to express their num- 
bers ; as £/?, is^q, liti, meqi, ufA/pt, xjot^a,, lirs^, lyywf, iyyvracroc, 
IJLxXirec, tsus, tffa, exto?, w$, ucru, otrov, ohv, IWwj T/?> etgiOfA^f «r\«a>v» 
lA^TTwy, fceW; Uhm) ^wv, otit-Kiy &c. as, 

f 1. 'lifitim 



Combination of Numbers. 385, 

1. 'ivvexs sU onrxxto-x'^^ias olysi, Xenoph. he brings tvith him about 
eight thousand horse. 'Es av^§x<; htxaoains nal lUoai (/.uXirot Ivjjots/^ay 
rp l^o^f lOiXovToit, Thucyd. there wei-e about txuo hundred and tXK^enty 
men, that tvere resolved to sally out. 

2. 'Lra^lm r^toiKovrtx 'sx^o'; roTs hxrov, Xenoph. a hundred and thirty 
Jiirlongs, triginta supra centum. ^A'nuXovro uvtuv 'sj^os l-zrJaxocriss-, 

Id. there died about seven hundred. 

8. 'OxTu liTi rois IvmriKovrx 'irvt ^i<^Iukzv, LuciaJn, he lived ninety-eight 
years. 'E^I^oaav otvruv skutu IttI oktm /L<,^va$ xorv7^v)v v^xroq, Thucyd* 
lib. 7. they gave each of them half a pint of water during eight lyionths. 

4. To^ioivoq 'Sjs^i BTif) -ere yeyovw? r^i^KxI^sKot, uvrox^diru^ a^n^Ei^Ovjf 
Herodi. Gordian tjoas proclaimed emperor about the age of thirteen. 

5. "Et» yiyonv »/:>(,(?/ ru. IvvsvnKOvroi, or tr^s^ov afji^pi roc |yy£>i»xovT«, 
in Lucian, about ninety years old ; near ninety years of age. 

6. ria^' hoc roa-aroi, Plut, so many, ivithin one ; only one wanting 
to make up so many, 

7. 'Twe^ ru lymmovroi ygfwv, Lucian, an old man above Jhur score 
years of age. 

> 8. ^ A'nUvuvxv lyyvq r^ixKovTix ruv •^(7\uv, Xenoph. they killed about 
thirty of the light horse. 

9. "Ersa-iv lyyvrxrx oktu ko.) Ix«tov, Thucyd. near a hundred and 
tight years. 

10. 2Ta^<a lA.d'kiToc. 'STus lAv^ix xxi li(T)(ihix, Diodor. about txjcelve 
thousand furlongs at most. 

11. Els lahre zya tsXeimaq^ Lycoph. about five years. '• 
. 12. *AvsKTsmv oifrxtrxsf Iktos o^^ywv, Xenoph. they killed them all, 
except a few. 

13. Tl^oiXOovrss rxyms us rEa'trx^ccKovrXf vivXio'xvro 'CJ^os Xo^w r/v/, 
Thucyd. having inarched forward about forty furlongs , they encamped 
near a certain eminence. 

14. ''Hv 'i»jo-8? u(7s\ \ruv rqixycovrx af;)^o/i>t£vo5, Luke iii. and Jesus 
began to be about thirty years vfage. 

15. *A9rer^oy oVoy i"xQ<Tiv y\ Tg/axovra To^fx, Xcnoph. they Were 
about twenty or thirty furlongs off. 

16. H^oanf^^^fiTxt oTov §£xcc rx^laqf Thucyd, they were advanced 
pretty near ten furlongs. 

17. ft(pQv) lirdvu VivTxjcoa-loK; olh\<Po7(; lipaTral, 1 Cor. XV. he Was 
seen of above five hundred brethren at once. 

18. 'HiJt,E^a.s sQlof/LYtKOvrx rivx?, srw ^ivirioOva-xv afi^oo/, Thucyd. they 
were thus kept in close confinement j crowded one upon another, very near 
seventy days. 

19. UoXstq ^vo y.a} s'Uoffiv £/<7/y d^t^ixw, Dem. their cities are two 
and twenty in number. 

20. "Eth yeyovui 'BsXticj IQlo^riKovrx, Plato, ^ipwards of seventy years 
old. Tq7s r^xriurxiq u<PsiXsro (juaQoq 'HjXiov « r^iuv [xmuv, Xenoph. 
there was above three months payowingrto the soldiers. 

-61. Luv zsAEovruv EV r*) vv}t ax. iXxrrovuv, vi /cszirxKOGiaiv^ t^s/? -EXfo? 
ro~? r^txKovTx ■'juovov disaru^na-xv, Diod. of five hundred at least that 
were abroad, not above three and thirty were saved. 

22. Aysi Xoyxo(po^iiq cvv tssh.rxs'xis » (A.eie<; ttr^x-.ucryLV^lm, Xenoph. 
he commanded no less than forty thousand men, as well pike men as 

3 D ^ those 



3S6 Book VIIL 

those that tvore shields. ^Immots £|«<, « ^luov ^la-fj.v^imf Id. he tvill 
have no less than twenty thousand horse. 

23. iTTiruq is nfohv T^itVovTe? rm s^ay^ta-^iXluVf not much less than 
six thousand horse. Tirwv ks^xXkiov isdrvuv yiynrxi (a.ixo5 Xttiroyroq 
'cstvrtytxihv.x raXavra, Lys. the luhole sum amounts tvithin very little 
io fifteen talents. 

24. 'EC«a-U«y«r£ "^vott Viotrx^ OX '^voXt Seovro/v, or Ivoit Ssov, Or 
^vui Serv, TEo-cra^ajtovTa jt», he reigned eight and thirty years. *H 
"^vy^i a.)cyLoi^si 'Ofe^t rx Ivo? ^tiv 'SSivrrnKovrx srv), Arist. the mind comes 
to its full perfection near the age of forty-nine. See the foregoing 
article. 



CHAP. IV. 

Remarks on the Article, 

X HE office of the article is the same in Greek as in almost 
all the modern languages, which is^ to express the thing in a 
more precise ai\d particular manner. Wherefore the grammarians 
tell us, that it introduces us into a second kind of knowledge, 
«<9 hvTB^xv yvaJcrtv, leading us from a general to a particular idea ; 
as in St. Matt. ii. when he says of the wise men, l^ovrts rlv 
as-e^x, Kou eAGovte? £($ rh oinixV) tZ^ov re -CTa/S/flv, videntes stellam, 
S^ intrantes domum, invenerunt puerum. These three words, s?e//a, 
domuSf and puer, are determined by the article from their general 
signification to an individual one, which imports here a certain 
star^ viz. that which they had seen in the East, and of which he 
had spoken before : a certain house, \'iz. that of Bethlehem : and a 
certain child, viz. he whom they were in search of. 

The article denotes also an emphasis and a particular excellency ; 
which the Latins have endeavoured to express by their pronoun 
ille, as Alexander ille, that great Alexander i which seems to have 
been split in two, to form the two French articles or pronouns il 
(which is also used by the Italians for their article) andle. 

Thus when St. John answers, ovk eIiaI o Xf iro?, John i. / am not 
the Christ; that is to say, that Christ whom you enquire for: and 
when they asked him, o zj^o(pYtTV)q J av ; art thou that projphet ? viz. 
the excellent prophet who has been promised us. 

Thus Theophylactus on St. Matth. ch. xvi. observes, that St. 
Peter, in the confession which he made of his faith in Christ, does 
not say, crv el o X^iros vloq rS QsSf without the article, ^wes Christusfi' 
lius ; but fTv aT oXf/ro? 5 t/Io?, Christusflius ille Dei. And St. Cy- 
ril, and the other fathers, have made use of the same argument to 
defend the divinity of Jesus Christ. 

ThusAristot. 1. Prior. 16. shews, that it is not the same thing 
to say, T^v vil(i),h ilvxt ayaGoy, voluptatem esse rem bonam, that 
pleasure is a good thing ; as to say, rh y)lonv stmt to oly«0cv, volupta- 
tem esse bonum ipsum, pleasure is goodness itself^ viz, the sovereign 
good. 

The 



Of the Article. . 387 

The article is also put when we have a fnind to make an induc- 
tion, to mark either the origin, possession, part, or some such thing; 
as G vioi; T» axfif wTra, Jitius ille Jiominis. Inv -J/yx^v aura, his very 
souh *'Oxp r^ aoc^Vicc era, tvith all your hearty &c. 

To mark distinction in appositions : ayoi'nyta-iiq Kv^m tov Qsov cs, 
Matt. xxii. diliges Dominum, nempe Deura ilium tuum, thou shalt 
love thy Lord, viz; he that is thy God. ^luawns o ^vayyt\t<r^q, St. 
John the Evangelist. 'AttoXXuvios o -ejo/^jt^s-, Apollonius the ^joef. 
'AtroXXums o y^ajU/xatT/jco?, Apollonius the grammarian. 

The article is also put to denote the whole species, or the whole 
' multitude, or some signal pre-eminence, as the French sjiy, Vhommei 
le Turc, le poele, &c. 

To signify things taken materially : ov xiyncri to, 5i« r*, Aristoi. 
non dicunt illud, propter quid, /Ae;y don't say for *vohat. In like 
manner Cicero, quid enim est hoc ipsum diu F 

The article is joined with almost all the parts of speech ; as 

I. TVith 7iouns substantive. 

1. Not only with appellatives, which is very common, but even 
with proper names ; as 5y o ^tXiV'jTo^ Iv (poCw, Deraosth. Philip tuas 
quite frightened. Though, for the generality, the article is seldom^ 
put before these nouns, because they are sufficiently determined of 
themselves. 

2. In the inscriptions of books : 'ss^i rS ovto?, Plato, of being : 
•ETifi rU \]/£vS»?, Id. offalshood : 'vjz^i rvis U^ovolats, Aristot. of Pro- 
vidence. Though we find them sometimes without the article : 
-CTE^/ ^ixattt, Plato, de justo, of justice : 'at^l yoi^a, Id. de lege, of 
the laws ; and such like. 

3. Sometimes one article serves for two substantives : 'vrsft rov 
yiXiav )Loct uTioc, instead of kxI t« cif^x, Aristot. about the sun and the 
stars. 

II. With adjectives. 

1. When they are before their substantive: o cro<pos 'A^irorlT^yis; 
iixXeysrsct, the learned Aristotle treats of. 

2. When the adjective follows the substantive, and is meant as 
l(he subject of the proposition : /SacrjXsvs « ayafiw Inv, ihat good man 
is king. For if the adjective is without the article, it is then the 
attribute of the preposition : nxoiruv »yoi9o(; h'Vy Plato is a good man. 

3. When two nouns are put in the same case, by reason of the 
substantive verb expressed or understood, that which is the subject 
of the proposition assumes the article ; as h a^x^ h o Aoyos, xa/ 5 
Aoyos Tjv -ergo? ©wk* koi.] Qtoq 5v o Aoyo?, John i. in principio erat 
illud Verbum, & Verbum illud erat apud Deura, & illud Verbum 
erat Deus: in the beginning was the Wordy and that Word was with 
God, and thai Word was God. 

4. But if the two nouns are both together the subject, or are go- 
verned by a verb, they have each their article: n»v0£/« i yvin 
*A^gaS«T«, Panthcea, wife of Abradates. ^HA^oy U tov "OAv/attov ro 
o^oj, they arrived at the mount Ohmpus. 

5. Two 



3SS Book VIII. 

5. Two or more articles may elegantly meet in the same period ; 
and the elegance is still greater, when the words are ranged sO as 
4o make something intermediate between the first and second arti- 
cle, and the nouns to 'which they bear relation: o< rviv (p^ovrl^x 
fp^ovTE?, or else, ol rr,v ruv uitof^trm (p^oyri^x £;^oyT£?, those that have 
the care of every thing. 

6. In nouns of number the article is never put, but when it re- 
presents the antecedent, or marks some determinate thing: o its 
^xqia-QuoSi icxl 'irs^oq teXwv>??, the one a Pharisee^ and the other a Pub' 
lican. AxQuv 5e r«s- 'sjsvrs. a^ra?, k«/ T8? ^vo l^iix^i Luke ix. taking ths 

jive loaves, and tvoo fishes. 

Otherwise it is omitted, as the same Evangelist said a little be- 
fore : £j(7/y ii\>At 'suivrs aati a^roi kxi Svo l^OvsSf ivejiave five loaves^ and 
ixvo fishes. 

III. IVith pronouns, interrogatives, and indefinites. 

O «yro?, idem : tS ayrS, ejusdem -: o t/?, xa< ■cyo<TO(;^ xxi woSev ; Greg* 
guisnam, Sf quantus, 8f unde? t;?? i^solocs iJi.s^ilos; Dem. of tohich 
side ? Plato has even repeated the article : ra. 'zjoTx r» ravrx Xs- 
ysis; qualia hcec dicis? 

O ^iTvuf T» ^sivot;, To» ^sivoc lanyyst^s, Demosth. ille illius filius ?7- 
hm deferehat, 

IV. With the infinitive of verbs. 

The article is joined likewise with the infinitive of verbs, which 
Js to be considered then as a noun substantive through all cases. 
Examples of which may be seen above, Book VII. Rule iii. 

IV. With participles, and indeclinable particles. 

^Ha-oiv Tins ot ^ixav^ovrts, there ivere some who detracted. 

As also with adverbs and prepositions, where we must always 
understand ti participle: o 'sjX'na-iov, sup. uv, proximus, a neigh' 
lour. 'Hx^^^f sup. ^a-x Yi^l^Xf hesterna dies, yesterday. To lyyv 
^xru ysvoq, sup. Sy, the nearest kindred. ToT<; vvv (sup. a<7/) kxi roTs 
^§6re§Qv (sup. ysyovoa-t) to those that are at present, and that have 
been. Tx tuolpuri^u, sup. oyra, things that are more remote. 'O ly 
^favoK, sup. uy, voho is in heaven. 0< h rixii, sup. ovrts, the tna" 
gistrates. Ol ^^o 4/xwy, sup. 7fyoyoT£?, our ancestors, o'l /xsfl' oJ/a^o 
sup. IdoyLivoi, our posterity. 



CHAP. V. 

That the Article is often taken for the Demonstrative and 
the Relative, or vice versa ; as also for ng, and the 
Reason of these Cha?2ges. 

XT Is not at all surprising, that nouns should be put one for the 
other, when, they are either synonymous, or derived from the same 
origin, as these are. 

Eustathius 



Changes of the Article. 339 ^ 

Eustathius, on the first Odyss. shows that the ancient article 
was TO?, in use among^the Dorics, which by dropping t has been 
changed into S?, and afterwards cutting off the s final into o; and 
that from this to? are derived the other cases which retain r; as t», 

T7)Si TH : TU, TOV, Tor?, &C. 

From thence also comes t/?, as quis in Latin comes from qui; 
as also «ro?, formed from the genitive », and from this ancient 
nominative to?. 

Thus we still find to/ in the plural from the old nominative Tor, 
not only for the prepositive article, as zyot'ihs roi fAtroTno-Os ?.sK£t^- 
ftsvo/, II. w. the children that have survived their Jathers ; where 
TO* is for or, according to Eustathius : but also for the relative, Qsol 
Toi oXvfATrov zxHfTi, Od. |. the Gods that dwell in heaven ; and for 
the demonstrative, to< /xev dxtiAovU sla-f, Hesiod, illi quidem sunt 
dcemones. 

The other cases are used in the same manner : to §1 fxifyirov, 
Lucian, S^ alii, for S §£ [xiyirov sriv, but ivhat is most considerable. 
Tisoi rsyvuv ruv, oa-xi Tss^i roivTcx, slaif Plato, concerning those arts 
that treat of these things ; where ruv is for rirui. E< to xou to Ittoiio' 
c-Bv olvQ^wnos ^ros, «x ay k'jri^a.nvy Dem. if this man had done such and 
such things, he had not been dead ; where to is for tsto. 

Hence it is that we often find ^^o t», or in one word «7§ot«, for 
-cTfo tHXH t5 x^ovb, ante hoc tempus, heretofore. And in the distri- 
bution of the members of a period, o ^h, o 5e, for hie veroy ille 
quidem ; or ille verb, hie quidem ; or alter quidem, alter verb, &c. 

We likewise read the prepositive article for the interrogative 
r/?, quis, which is very usual with the Attics : rS x^^^v ^^ rocvron 
y^iyu ; Dem. cujus rei gratia haec dico I but to nohat purpose do I say 
this? As also for the indefinite t/?: u Is rZ ^okzH ravrxy Dem. si 
cui vero haec videntur, but if any one is of this opinion. 

The prepositive article is also put for the indefinite t<? : o? Ir« 
JrjXor, Thucyd. he discovers ivho he is. And in the divisions ois fjch, 
r^vccq Is, Dem. for nvxq [asv, rivoi,^ ^s, alias quidem, alias verb. 
*0? ^E» zjsivcc, 0? 5e lAsUst, 1. Cor. xi. and one is hungry ^ and the other 
is drunken. 

For ris interrogative : sl^finuq o? si///, x* »(?»* ora waTgo? yeyw?, 
Soph, having told voho I was, and toho was my father. 

Sometimes they are joined together: o?t/?, qui quidem, and 
the poets, ot/?, Horn, oris c<pUs s't<7cc<piKVirxi, 'whosoever goes to 
them. 

We likewise read in the accusative onm, plur. onvx?, for ovrox, 
i^srivxs. "Orivx is also the neuter plural for ainvx. But the other 
genders and cases of this noun are also in use, by declining both 
parts; as r)fwT« ^vrivx lATriSa l';^6/, Thucyd. he asked him 'what 
hopes he had. Which is a demonstrative proof, that oTts comes from 
the relative Is, and not from the prepositive article o : besides, the 
article I has only a breathing, whereas oris has both a breathing 
and an accent, in the same manner as the relative os. 

The orators frequently put om for » and ar/yoy, cujus ; Zru for 
w and uTivi, cui: but very seldom otov for o> or ovnvx, quern: thus 
ay9' oTii signifies cujus gratia ; l<f otw, qua in re. 

It 



.390 Book; VIIL 

It is also taken for the demonstrative, o? kxi 5?, Herod, hie vel 
ille. Whereto we must refer tha following expressions, 'iu<; », or 
l<v? oT», ci^^ts », /*=%?/? « ■juousqzte for eousque dum. As ai-so in the 
relative of quaiit}', nV« /^oj <nos ?», JLucian, tdv me xvhat tioH of a 
man he was. Uolxs yvvxivux; vve^. Soph, for vohat soi't of a voo- 
'man ; for ^ohs comes from oXos, and oTo? from or, as qualis from 
qua. 



CHAP, VI. 

Remarks on the Pronouns. 
I. Of reciprocals and relatives. 

JL he rule of the reciprocals I, sui, 5<, suus, <7(pire^oqi belonging to 
you ttvOf and of the compound lavre, sui ipsius, or by contrac- 
tion ayra, is the same in Greek, as that of sui and 5MW6r in Latin. 
Por we are aHowed to put indiscriminately either these reciprocals, 
or the relative avror, ipse, provided it does not render the sense am- 
biguous, according to what we have said in the Latin Method. 
Thus in St. Gregory, o^Zv sv rh ra ^riu:8 aivrjo-iv Itt' avrov, per- 
ceiving that the people revolted against him: Itt uvrov is there for 
10' suvrov, just as the French contre lui imports contre soi, or contre 
soi meme. And when Palephates says, "A^yiToi ^sjoXtSxo^ atvroTs rviv 
*Hf«y vySvroy the inhabitants of Argos took Juno for the patroness of 
their city ; it is quite certain that otvroTs is there for a-(pll(rtv', sibi^ or 
for air oT(;, sibi ipsis. ■ 

On the contrary we find />t£5* Ixvrov, in Thucyd. book 2. for 
/AET* oivrov) after him. And in Homer, \^mQ'/iy ^«X5^ov l\ oi iKTrsae 
^axfj, II. 2. the blow made him stoop, and drew tears frorh. him ; 
where oi, sibi, is for ayr&J, ei. 

Likewise in the Revelations, chap. ix. v.ou Xyjuriy lit avruv I3.x- 
ctXixf rov ZyysXov rvis ccQvTaa, ovoixx Ixvru iC^alV* 'ACCa^^wv, &C. 
and they have a king over them, the angel of the bottomless pit, 
x^hosename in the Hebrew tongue is Abbaddon ; where we see I'lr' xv' 
rm, super eas, over them, instead of 1^' exvtmv, super se : and ovo- 
fta Ixvrw, nomen sibi, for ovoy^x xvru, nomen ei, whose name ; be- 
cause this can make no sort of ambiguit}^ Hence in the very ex- 
ample of St. Paul, quoted by Budaeus, to show that sometimes it is 
the occasion of ambiguity, ItT yoc^- avrov ^xa-iXivtiv, a%f/? « «" ^? 
W'vTa? Tfcji- Ix^i^s vvo ra^ -ctcW ayra, 1 Cor. XV. oportet autem 
ilium" regnare Honecponat omnes inimicos suos sub pedibus ejus, 
for he must reign till he hath pid all enemies under his feet ; it is 
visible that xvr^ can produce no doubt about the meaning, being 
applicable to Christ only, of whom he speaks, sidf pedibus ejus, 
viz. Christi, But several editions have xvth, which is the same 
with sxvr^) sui ipsiiiSf and this removes the difficulty. 

For 



Of Possessives. 391 

For we must take notice, that this relative avrls has a smooth 
breathing, whereas the reciprocal alrS for lavrS has a rough one, 
because Ixvre is composed of b, se, which has a rough breathing, 
and o^ avroq. But upon several occasions this relative is tnore used 
than the reciprocal itself ^ as -araTs^a n^Sio airS vlos, rather than 
xvrS, or layra, patrem honorat fili us suus, the son honours his Ja-' 
ther. Likewise in compounds, avroVilocKrosy a seipso doctus, ulf- 
taught. 

The reciprocation ouglit also to be considered in the compound 
pronouns of the first and second person: for example, we don't 
say, qiiKZ I^E, but cpiXulfj^xwovy Hove myself j nor <pi-Kti:<; as, but (pi'k57s 
cctvrov, thou lovest thyself. But if the reciprocation ceases, that is 
to say, if the discourse continues no longer in the same person, 
we may then say, cfAer? e/ae, thou lovest mej; cpi'Ku as, I love 
thee, &c. 

But the reciprocal xtrs, or ItxvrQ, is also put for any of the three 
persons, and at the same time explained by the verb which ac- 
companies it : lavrSq c<,yx'jTa}(j>.£v, ive love ourselves ; sxvr^s ayoiirars, 
ye love yourselves : lavrai ot'^fnuai, they love themselves, &c. Thus 
in Xenophon, Virtue speaking to Pleasure, says, ovru 'ujxi^svui 
Ta? s»vrvis (plKH<; ; instead of cr«? (pl'Kas, sic instituis amicos tui ipsius ? 
for tuos : is it thus thou instructest thy friends ? And in St. Luke xvi. 
'sjBt-no'xri IxoroHs <ptA8?, mahe to yourselves frieticls, 

II. Of possessives. 

As we have proved in the Latin Method, contrary to the opinion 
of Valla, that the genitives mei, tui, sui, were (to express ourselves 
in the grammatical phrase) taken actively and passively; so, in 
Greek, the .genitives 1^5 or /x,5, o-5, and J, are taken actively 
and passively, though Gaza teaches the contrary. Actively, as 
(^ixo<; /x5, for e^o5, my friend, he whom I love. Passively, as vj^os 
^'tzv E/xS, Soph, in spite of me, using violence to me. Ov 7^^ Sif 
Ktfxy^av /3/a ^(auv st^ov, Thucyd. for they did not keep possession rfthe 
isle of Corfu, in spite of us. 

And on the other hand, even the possessives frequently imply 
a passive signification : axi (aoi (xvi^h a-^OtaO^s, tvvoix yd^ \^u r J, cr»7, 
Plato, ne mihi succenseas, dicam enim tua benevolentia, that is to 
say, for the love ivitk which you are beloved by me, and not, with 
which you love me ; in the same manner as Terence S9iys, facile scies 
desiderio id fieri tuo, instead of tui. And Thucyd. xa/ »« ala^a^nrsn 
ra? Aa)te^a<juovt8? <?!oCw rb> ij/aets'^w '5ToAe/x»(7£/ovTa?, timore nostro, viz. 
for the fear they have of us. 'Which may be thus translated, 
and he does not perceive , that the Lacedcemonians are desirous of de- 
claring war, from the apprehension they have of our power. 

Now as the Latins sometimes join a genitive with a possessive, 
as tuum hominis simplicis pectus vidimus, Cic. so the same practice 
obtains among the Greeks: oXw? ^g yj a^a Srot aTraOua-i t5 )t«- 
ko^a/fxovos ! Lucian, hi vero omnino res meas hominis infelicis dila- 
pidant, they squander away all my substance, wretch that I am J 

CHAP. 



392 Book: VIIL 

CHAP. VII. 

Of some Nouns derived from Pronouns. 
I. Of the relatives of quality, 0^01; and zyo7ou 

V^I^'OS, qualis, without interrogation, comes from Isy qui, m 
the same manner as qualis comes from qua, wherefore it is some- 
times rendered by quis. 

This noun being one of those which the grammarians call rela- 
tives of quality, which have only a relation in the sense, and not in 
the construction, it always supposes ro/5ro?, to which it ought to 
refer, and which is even sometimes expressed ; as to rns ayytklccs 
roiurov ertv, oToy zv^P^oLvmi r^v 'ttoXiv, the netvs iuas such as made the 
ivhole torvn rejoice ; word for word, such as to make the totvn rejoice ; 
olov Hits sv(p^oivoif, as H. Stephen says, or oTov -zo-^o? zv<p^oiv<xt : which the 
author of the Idiotisms does not seem to have rightly understood, 
when he says that sv(p^aviiii is for Ev(p§ami av, or £ii(p^uv<xi ^vvxir av. 
Likewise in Dem. 2. Olynth. rotirss a^vQ^uvas, oi»? y,iQva^s*rois o^x^7a- 
6txt rotocvToc, oloi lyib vvv okvu -cTfo? vfjiSis ovoiaolo-xi^ such a strange sort 
of men, asto dance lohen they are drunk, in a manner I should he ashamed 
to describe. But roi^ros is more frequently understood ; as in Xe- 
nophon, ov yoc^ ^y oTo? CCIT0 'GJxvroq KE^^oivxt, that is to say, oIk 5v roiQros 
oiog, &c. non erat talis qualis facere, or talis ut faceret, he xvas 
7iot a man that could be influenced by every hind of sordid gain. 

It is sometimes used without the infinitive, though in the same 
signification : thus in Eurip. ov^ oT« yiXuroq oi^ia, 'a^oirrcixsv, for « 
roiocvrx ts^otrroiizv, oTa \th> x^ix yihwro^, ive do not act so as to make 
ourselves ridicidous. 

And it ' must always be taken in this sense ; as in Xenoph. ^/*£r? 
Se syvuiAZv ro~? oYois rs rtytiiv y.x) y^n» ^aXsTr^v voKiriixv ttvxi S»jj«,ox^ar/ay, 
tee are very sensible that democracy is to such as you and us a dis- 
agreeable sort of government ; that is to say, 'ro'i!<i roi^roi? oms* After 
tliis manner Virgil says, 

' portis alii bipatentibus adsuni /"^ 
Millia quot magnis nunquam venere Mycenis. 
For tot millia quot nunquam venere. Wherefore we must not follow 
some, in saying that olos is in that case put for ofto;or, like, since 
it really stands for itself; for this notion of one word being put 
for another, proceeds very often from a superficial knowledge of 
the Greek tongue and grammar, 

Therefore Budaeus, and after him the author of the Idiotisms, 
express themselves improperly, by saying that oTo?, with the infi-,- 
nitive, is sometimes taken for promtus, expeditus, cupidus, pronuSf, 
■ strenuus ; for instance, htvov n ^x9uv, oios h iTtt^iivxt ru (psvyovrtf, 
still implies roi^rog h, 0T05, having received this ill usage, he was 
just ready to accuse him. 

Even when it is rendered by possum, it must refer to this 
ellipsis ; as in Aristot. aXA* ts^ oloq -gjo/e/V ayaG«?, sed qui minime 
possit bonos reddere, that is to say, « rotnroq oTo?, non potis reddere i 
forpotis comes from ^oroj, taken from oTo?. Likewise in the neuter. 



Of 



fe^Jv n Bv^ia-xstfi Lucian, poiis est invejiir'e (for potis was formerly of 
all genders, as we have proved elsewhere) or possibile est inxienire, 
that is to say, tale est ut jjoiis sit inveniri: ovy^ ol6s riil^Ai, according 
to Budaeus, imports nolo^ renuo, invitusjitcio ; but properly it signi- 
fies, / ain not such, that is, I cannot, or / am 7iot in such a disposition. 

They sometimes also use the neuter plural, as in Herod, 
lib. 2. ^oi^ixhs 'Cjo'kXxi stcrt 5/ uv »>t otx re e^i "crAse/v (where you 
may observe «>c o^ol, according to the Ionics, instead of t^^ ot^i) 
saxd multa sunt, per qua; navigari nan potest ; which is a syllepsis, 
like animalia currit, therefore the construction may be understood 
thus 5/' wy HK i-i roixvTx ^p'h^.c.ra, zyoiiiv, oloi Iri to -zD'Xsf/y, there are 
rocks through which there is no such thing as sailing. 

OTo? bears still the same signification, when it is joined with 
the superlative; as otoq a^tkn-oq, Aristot. quam fortissimus, that is 
to say, roitiTos otoq o Kfa.TiTo<;, talis (^uam fortissimus, or talis qualis 
fortissimus, such as the strongest, to express Me 5t row o-e^^ It is thus 
the Latins say, tarn mihi gratum erit, quam quod gratissimum, Cic. 
for tarn is there for tantum, and quam for quantum^ as we have made 
appear elsewhere; to/St&v lr<y, o^ov to •^a^ii<rocrov. 

it is in this sense we are to understand this expression of Demo- 
sthenes in Mid. ovTvj ya.^ otov a,Kisiv avra tS vo/a«, there is nothing like 
hearing the lavo itself, as H. Stephen renders it, condemning the 
explication of Budseus, who translates it, nihil vetat audire, aad 
takes tsosv otov for bSev kcoXvov. We read it in the same signification 
in S. Gregor}'-, oy^ev ^£ otov h ^^x^n lixynaoiaQa.t, there is nothing like 
lieing concise. 

oToy with «;^ or ^^, for non solum, or rather for non solum non^ 
or nedunif must also be reduced to this signification, though H. 
Stephen says it bears a different meaning, and tliat it ought rather 
to be referred to olos, solus, were it not for the breathing. But 
thjs may be easily seen in the very example of Polybius quoted by 
Stephen : {xivacrai i^sv yxq (pdXoiy^ Iv rois lirtrv^EiOToiroK; avr^ roiroiSy 
H-)(^ oJoy of^sKsTv ^vvxiT av rsq ^iXsq, aXX' «^£ avtyiv au^siv, for though 
that battalion was posted in a very advantageous situation, yet it nei- 
ther could he of any service to its own. party, nor even defoend itself; 
that is to say, « roiSrdy ^mattr oiv, otov sriv ^(pzXiTv, non tantum potest, 
quantum est juvare ; ccXK" ts^e, quin nee, imo nee seipsam .servare. In 
like manner in the fifth book, kxi (jlt) oHov rv/zTv Im rirotq y^dt^iros, 
cc'aXoc Tiivxvrioy n^'.'/iOtU eU tvy 'AXt^oiv^^Bistv, 'cyx^^ oAtyoy mv^vvtvcrai t« 
^iS, that not only he received no acknowledgment, hut quite the reverse, 
being invited to Alexandria, he had like to have lost his life. 
' UoTos, qualis, in interrogations, feminine 'ujolx, neuter, tsoTov* 
' Sometimes it is joined with the article : Polyb. t^ Was rxvra, ; 
qualia haec sunt ? what sort of things are these? It is aLso used with- 
out an interrogation, for qualis. It is likewise taken for r^oaos, as 
'csol^ u^oc for OT03->), which answers exactly to the Frenchj h quelle 
J^eure'^ though Eustathius observes, that this expression is not quite 
so proper. 

rioior, with the accent upon the last, or WoiU, or ^o.ioq nq, is 
rendered, certa quadam qualitate prcedifus 8f qffectus ; and sometimes 
indeterminately, cujusdam modi. 

3E II. Of 



594f Book VII I. 

II. Of oG-og and Too-^ro?. 

As in Latin tantiim sometimes has the force of augmenting, and 
signifies so vmch, or so great ; and sometimes diminishes, and signi- 
fies only ; the same thing happens to the Greek o(tos and rocrSro?. 

The first signification is very natural and common; the second 
iiaay be seen in the following examples : not) la^ot nq vf^jxivviv Xafwv, 
6(Tov v'!Ty>nyicEv, etrx ot^vxi^hirxty Plut. somebody taking a torch, only 
just put it near^ and afiervoards took it a^xiay : tov y^iWovroct v.xl bW « 
tsx^ovroe, zyoXsfjiov, Thucyd. the approaching, and almost present luar : it 
is thus Terence says, tantmn non monies auri pollicens. In like man* 
ner we say, oaoy tiK, oc-ov i^^siru, for fere^ almost* 

TofftiTov v'ffsiTruv, Dem. si hoc unum addidero, having only this one 
thing to say ; '^tM^ vi^ci-v roa-^rov, idem, id unum a vobis deprecatuS) 
having only this one thing to beg oj' you. 



CHAP. VIII. 

Remarks on the Verbs. 
I. That we must consider the nature of the ^erbs. 

-ir^S a verb may be considered differently in discourse, so it may 
admit of different effects in construction : thus all the verbs ad- 
jective being of themselves either active or passive, nevertheless, 
because they may be considered either as making their action pass 
to another subject, which is properly the nature of a verb active, or 
as confining it within themselves, which is what we call a verb 
iJeuter or absolute ; hence it is, that verbs active are sometimes 
taken absolutely, and sometimes passively; as U r^? 'C7X>57^? avaf^ie- 
§wv, Plato, ex ictu convalescens, sup. sxvrov, selpsum, as in French 
se poiiant bien ; in the same manner as Demosthenes says, wvtXaCsy 
sxvrov, recollegit se, he recovered himself. Thus l^siXvo-xi signifie* 
evolvere, and elabi, to disentangle, to escape; 'ss^oa.yuv, producere, 
^w^;^ progredi, to produce, an^ to advance ; xaraXys/v, dissolve re, and 
diversari to loose, and to lodge ; ^7r£§Ca^X£lv, to exceed, to pass : be- 
caxise we are to understand here the accusative, either of a recipro- 
cal, or of another noun. 

Likewise ^ix(p-c^sivy differe, \iz. se, aut aliud : oi'iruXXdrru Itto c^, 
liheror a ie, that is to say, kituWv.xro} fis uwo crtj, / deliver myself 
through your means : rsXu lU ccvl^aq, censeor in viros, that is to say, 
freXa) yLE, I put myself on the list^ -or / cause myself to be put, ten do, 
pertingo, pervenio, &c. to- Se e<? uKXviXx amy-ai^itlu, Aristot. hcec 
»v2ro infer sese mutuo reflectuntur 8^ recidunt : ii /x^ kz) ccvrxTFoSi^oir) rx. 
trs^x roTsBTE^oii; ymiJLSvx, Plato, ?2wi^3fr mutuam generationem ^equen- 
iia priorum in locum siifficerentur, that is to say, if they did not put 
themselves in the place, if they did not succeed one another. 

Among these, some that are of an active force, are, nevertheless, 
translated by a verb passive ; but this is not by changing their na- 
ture, but by an agreement of the sense ; as xfxXxp^Qxw, recreor, 

viz. 



The Nature of the Verbs, 395 

viz. ava'Kxyi.Qa.vu to» vSv, / CDtne to myself, I recover my spirits : xotrx' 
Xvuf morior, dissoivor, / die, viz. xxrxXvu tov /Sioy, vitam solvo : 
and in like manner the rest. 

On the contrary, the neuters become actives : ^yia-ei? (jt,e, Psalm 
cxxxvii. vivificabis me, thowwilt revive me : av^^<x<; I'tt' avrc^$ Ktic?, 
Herod, viros eis imposuit, he placed men over them : <jv^'x\txX^iao^ avTo, 
Dioscor. fac ut una ferveat, lyiake them boil together : ^oaiv t«? yoiJf,>iq, 
to implore the assistance of the laws : rh ot^irUoc^'jiy laxo>^^'^^> jus 
Grasc. Rom. lib. S. tonsuram abolevit, properly speaking, otiari 
fecit, he gave his hair time to groiV) and thretv aside the monkish ton- 
sure, 'which he had been compelled to wear : which come from the 
verbs fotw, vivo ; ^ahuy gradior ; ^i(i/,ferveo ; ^oav, damo ; o-xoXd^u, 
otior. 

Likewise a,r^x<?raq ^xIts^siv, in comic writers, for fulgura ex oculis 
vibrare, to dart lightning from one's eyes ; -cryf (3KsTrovrt(;f tsv^ amw" 
vfovTsqy Basil, that cast fire from their eyes and nostrils. 

Some assuming a passive government, seem likewise to take a 
passive signification ; as kiriQxnv vtto rZv li-Kxruv, damnatus est a 
judicibus, he was condemned to death by the judges : o'.mOocnv vtto yv- 
vxiKog (pa^yiXKu, Lucian, he was poiso?ied by his wife ; though irt 
rigour a.iri^xvtv signifies no more than mortuus est, he died ; and the 
preposition, with its case, denotes the cause of that death. This 
construction has been copied by the Latins, nihil valentius a quo rn- 
threat, Cic, periit ab Annibale, Plin. mori ab ense, Lucan. 

The same may be said of others, which are deemed passive in 
tlie sense, by reason of our common manner of translating them ; 
as 5ox£w, videor; but it properly imphes, appareo, I appear, I seem : 
iv^oxiu, and eC^oHifABOj, laudor, celebror ; but properly it signifies in- 
clareo, I make 7nyself knotvn : yii^u, plenus sum ; but properly it im- 
ports, plenitudinem habeo, seu refero, / run over, I ovejfiow : sotxx, 
assimilatus sum, visus sum ; but its right signification is, apparui, 
conveni, imaginem retuli, / bear a likeness, or resemblance to, &c, 
ol^xyov rt i'oiKsv vt S;a o-\^tcd5 vilovy), Lucian, the pleasure of the sight 
surpasses all others, that is to say, there is nothing beats it, aliquid in- 
victum refert, redolet. 

Hereto we may refer the verbs, which we have mentioned, 
Book in. Chap. xix. explaining the nature of the middle verb. 

The verbs passive are also put sometimes absolutely, and then we 
must understand the preposition with its case ; as yv{/.voi,^£a9sii, exer- 
ceri ; r^iQsa-Oxi, fricari j ly^acrSa;, radi ; A«a£0a<, lavari, viz, a se, 
or ab alio ; wherefore they are rendered, to exercise ones self, to rub 
one's self, or to have one's self rubbed, to have ones self shaved, &c. 
Thus in Lucian, -cTEvSScr/ y.ul wTflovrxt, lugent Sf plangunt, properly 
imports, lugent 8f planguntur a se, or ccedunt se, plangunt se, they 
weep and beat their breasts. Thus (TtrsTaQxf not only implies ali, to 
be nourished by another, but also, cibum capere, to eat, to nourish ones 
self. 

However, this does not hinder these verbs from conforming 
sometimes intirely to the nature of the actives, and assuming their 
government; as eWrov l^ixxeTai, TheophJL unumquemque ad $e 
trahit, he drains all the world to himself, 

II. Of 



396 , Book VIII. 

11. Of -sraVp^co and o(piihu, 

nci<Tx,(o is frequently rendered by JaciOf not that it loses its 
natural signification, but because we consider it more proportion- 
ably to our language (the French) which generally translates the 
passive by the active. Thus when we say, ofjioiov re 'Byoiax?h perinde 
Jacity the prober sense is, simile quid patitur, he is in such a dispo-* 
sition, eoflem modo afficitur. In like manner, ri av hoc; t^raSo//^/; 
•what shruld I do? that is to say, in what situation should I be? 
'what 'would become of me? vohat should I not suffer? And in Deni. 
fjt,A{xSs (/^yiVsv a,<^EXrs^Qv vijaXs TToiQotrE, videte ne quid stulte Jaciatis, 
tliat is to say, do not let yourselves be surprised, let nothing amiss 
hefal you. 

Even when it is rendered by accidit^ it still preserves its natural 
force ; as Ylo'.cryHai, tSto Mv^oi^ accidit id Medis, that is to say, the 
Medes suffer thisf are in this situation, in this dispositioyi. Whence it 
isf evident, that the grammarians do not express themselves pro^ 
perly, whevi they say that Wcr;^w signifies sometimes patior, and, 
on the contrary, sometimes ago. 

The imperfect ucpuKov, and the second aorist fcJ^aXoy, or Ionic, 
without the augment, t^uXov, which grammarians place among 
the adverbs, are real verbs, though they are rendered by utinam 
through all the persons : u^uXov, utinmn ego ; upiXss, utinam tu ; 
w^e/Xe, utinam illc. But we must understand here uQt, or oi'iQz, which 
answers to utinam. Thus when Herod says, /x^ o!p£>ioy v;xp, it 
means £;'6* l^iXov ^^ y;xav, utinam non vicissem, would to God I had 
not overcome, or / wish that I had not vanquished. Likewise in 
Eurip. fA,v)'7Tor ai(psiXs rov ^hkoKqv oikyitxi, wpuld to God this cow-herd 
had never lived there. And in Dem. ItiA 6"£, a /xwor w(p£AE, avviQm, 
since those things have come to*pass, which it were to be wished never had. 

This explication is so very probable, that we frequently find this 
optative particle expressed; as in Hom. ai'd' o(p£Xov ixzTvxt zrat^h 
^ociwzTcn, Od. ju. utinam. mansisseyn, that is to say, utinam debuissem 
manere, or oportuisset me manere, would to God I had staid among the 
Phcsacians. And o<psKov is so far from being an adverb there, that 
we even meet with it in this signification in the first aorist ; us zj^U 
tj(PkX>^ o-woAsV^ajf, utinam prius periissem, or perire debuissem, I wish 
I had died before. 

But what chiefly occasions this mistake is, that this w^fAov is 
also joined with the optative : but in that case it is the neuter 
participle, and the phrase must be resolved by an ellipsis, as in this 
example produced by Budseus, "o^ikov HxrtvOwQeUcrxit xt 0^0/ /xa, . 
T« ^vKsi^xcQoci rk ^iKociuixocroi an, Psalm cxviii. utinam dirigantur vicB 
mece ad custodiendas justificationes tuas, we must understand et%, and 
resolve it thus, eWs aciTsvQvvBsiiicrxv atl o^oi ^», xar' o^eKov^ zjs^i rs 
(pvXa ^oca-Bail roo ^iHxtcoy.oird an ! O that my Ways were directed, as 
they shoidd be, to keep thy statutes I Likewise when Gaza says, ^ o(pi' 
^ov f cl|/a. r7)s liAuiv vvoXn^scij^, qucs utinam digna essent vestra opi- 
nione atquc sententia, we must resolve it hus, vt e/'S' J a|/« t^j y^u/y 
»7ro?v>jAj/£Wf, ws o(?>eAov, a$ it should bcj as tve could wh, 

CHAP. 



The Nature of the Tenses, 397 

C HAP. IX. 

That xve must consider the Nature of the Tenses, 

XT is very proper also to consider the nature of the tenses, which 
when perfectly understood, says Henry Stephen, contributes vastly 
to an adequate knowledge of the Greek and French languages; 
and, on the contrary, the want of understanding it, causes great 
obscurity in man}'- passages. 

The diiference of the three preterites, the imperfect, the perfect, 
and plu-perfect, is the same in Greek as in Latin ; but there re? 
mains some difficulty with regard to the aorists. 

1, Of the first aorist, 

Sanctius gives the name of aorist to the second only, which seems 
to be more undetermined than the first, inasmuch as it is oftener put 
than the first for different tenses, present, past, or future ; and as 
for the first, he calls it tsx^^i'k'fiKv^liSy as much as to say, leviter 
praeteritus, just notv past ; which is agreeable to the explication of 
Casaubon in his Exercitations on Baronius's Annals, where treating 
of the coining of the wise men, he says, that tS 'ly>cr^ ytwnQivro^, 
diristo nato, denotes a much later time, than if he had put yjysyyij- 
fX5y«, which would signify that it happened a long time since. This 
is also the opinion of Vossius in the last edition of his Greek gram- 
mar, and in his Dissertation deanno natali Christi : which they seem 
to have learned of H. Stephen in his hook of the conformity between 
ihe Greek and French languages. This writer had been formerly of 
opinion, that the Greek aorist is the same with the French perfect 
indefinite, when we say je Jis, jallaiy je lus, wherein he agrees 
with Budaeus in his Commentaries ; but afterwards he began to 
question it ; and, without coming to any decision, he takes notice 
of a very common application of this Greek aorist, which is, to ex- 
press the time lately past, and agreeably to these expressions, 05 5<30?2 
as hejeels the heat, he presently melts ; if J do hut hear the noise of a 
mouse, I am immediately axvake ! and such like, as we may see in 
this verse of Homer, 

"Os XE ©Eor; l7rifrsi^y)r/Z{, /xaXa r eycXvov a,lr^, Hom. 
Whoever siibniits to the Gods, they presently hear him. 
And he observes that / am immediately awake, is taken for J 
aivake ; and the latter implies a habit, or facility in awaking. 
Likewise in Demosthenes, (j^tK^lv n:rixi(nt.a, knyaf^XKJz axi S</Xyae tjrotvTa, 
a very small accident in war ruins and destroys every thing. 

This use of the aorist instead of the present, frequently happens 
in Xhe imperative and the infinitive, in the middle as well as the 
active, but more seldom in the passive, except when the active is 
disused, as the grammarians observe : but herein there is no dis- 
tinction made between the aorists, as Sanctius would fain have it; 
and it is unquestionable, that they are frequently put for one ano- 
ther, as well as the futures, though Sanctius calls the secondifuturuin 
remotiuSf as I have observed in the beginning to treat of the verbs, 
p. 93. ^ , 

II. Of 



59S Book VIII. 

IL Of the perfect and the aorists, 

1. The first aorists passive of the verbs in o^ai, which hav^ no 
active voice, are generally taken active]3^ and sometimes passively ; 
B& J.-aXsyo/xa/, / discourse ; ^nXi^Qvv, I have discoursed j or spoke; 
i»o(Axi, I cure ; laaQsiq, one that cures, or is cured; zjac^aoi^ofAoiii 
I receive ; 'ax^oc^sx^eh, ojie that receives^ or is received ; ^sciofAu:, X 
consider, I contemplate ; i9Eo:,Q'ov, contemplatus sum, I have considered, 
or lustratus sum, / have been considered, or observed. 

In like manner ox'7roim9ug for oxTi-/ivvicr(z<;, one that has squandered 
all ; ^,ixX£x^v)vxi for hx>J^xcr9xi, to have discoursed ; iuXx^-nlw, rather 
than the middle svXxQ-no-xiJ.riv, I behaved "well, with circumspection ; 
l§yx<T9els for loyxa-ufjLevos, one that has done, or peyformed ; ^ix\ovi^u<; 
fo" ^ixvo'^(r<x,[jL£voi, qui excogitavit, one that has contrived, o\' inv:nted ; 
and such like. 

The perfect passive is also used in the same manner ; as ^isiXsiy 
fjuxi, I have discoursed; Iv^ihiyiAxi, I have shown; 'amol-nyi.xt, I 
have done ; Yiur^eTricrixxt, I have disposed ; 7riz^a5^E^»/y//«/, / have re-> 
ceived : and it is these that properly correspond to the Latin verbs 
common, because they have both significations under a passive ter- 
mination, which is not always the case of the middle verb, for 
this in several tenses retains the active termination. 

The verbs passive that have two aorists, oftener use the second 
than the first; as 'aX-nrroixxt, zTiX-Aym, I have been b'eaten, rather 
than litXriy^vtv, In like manner Ippxy-ny, I have been broke ; v^vdi 
ysjv, / have been taken away ; Ir^xTtWy I have been changed^ or / 
have taken Jlightf from the verbs p-nywiAtf o.^ttx^oiaxi, T^s-Tj-o/xa*, and 
the like. 

III. Of the middle aorists. 
Among the middle aorists the first is commonly used in both 
significations, but the second is oftener met with in the active 
sense :, for example, a*f£o/x«;, ilXoy(.io)), I have taken, I have chosen^ 
more usual than / have been taken, or chosen, as the author of the 
Idiotisms observes. 



CHAP. X. 

That we are to consider the Nature and Disposition of 
the Moods. 

I. Of the indicative, the subjtmctive, and the optative. 

JL HE disposition of the moods, which I have followed in the 
third book, putting the indicative, the subjunctive, the optative, the 
imperative, and the infinitive, one after another, is certainly the 
most natural ; for as the imperative and the infinitive are not pro- 
perly moods, the best way is to place them at the end of the verb ; ' 
and whereas the subjunctive has a much greater affinity with the 
indicative, than the optative has, as may be seen in Apoll, book iii» 
chap. 29. it is very proper it should follow next to it. 

As 



The Nature of the Moods. Sgg 

As the first aorist of this mood marks also the time to come, one 
might imagine at first, that it would be better to form it from tlte 
fut. indicat. as rv-^u, >??, >?, from rv-^Uf tts^ eu But this cannot be, 
as Apollon. observes in the same place, not only because the 
changes that are made in the aorist indicat. though not in tiie fiit. 
are communicated to this tense in the subjunctive ; as vifxco, topasturet 
fut. »f/Aa), first aorist. tnn^oc, subjunct. vn/xw ; ^/aP^Aw, to sing^ \|/«Aw, 
h'4^v\x, 4'i9X(u ; but likewise, because the changes that are made in 
the fat. and not in the aorists, are not communicated to the sub- 
junctive, as vo^i^co, to think, fut. voixltru, Att. voixtu, aor. hoiMia-x, 
subjunct. yoixi(Tu, but never voynu, as in all appearance the Attics 
would have made it, had they taken it from the future. 

Now though the moods are not ta be rejected intirely, yet their 
signification is sometimes so very arbitrary, that they are frequently 
put for one another through all tenses. This we Iiave proved 
in our remarks in the Latin Method, and we have also the 
authority of Budaeus in his Commentaries, page 948, of Robert 
Stephen's edition, and it may be further confirmed by the fol- 
lowing examples ; -cra^' l/Xo< a^£i\ iJi.i(7Qo(p6^og arts fJ^n 'rnxvo^ Irtf iO"» 
tyoisTv EiAoi, Xen, apud me nullus mercenarius est qui non idoneus" 
est fjbr sit.) eadem facere, quae abs me hunt, I have no one soldier 
in my pay thai is not able to do what I can do myself: where we say 
iW in the present instead of uv >T in the subjunctive, or a.v ik int 
the optative. 

E< yxo T^y ayrrv 'sra^ti^oixs^a. riixtTs vtt\^ yiij.uv avTuv 'Sf^oQiifA.ixjt 
Dem.yor iftve had discovered the same resolution in our ovon cause : 
si enim eamdem in nostra ipsorum causa alacritatem ostendissimns, 
d'c. where we see an indicative for a subjunctive, viz. 'aat^tix'^y^^^^ 

for 'CJXaa.ff-^UlXEOx* 

E< f/.sv tsE^l y.xi)iti rivQ<; zy^oiyixxros zt^ovtIQbtq Xjye^v, Dem. instead of 
ZToori9yi\xi, if he designed to speak of any nexv subject* 

Again, $i (aIv yx^ v(^ rt^wv 'casts-^ivrzq kvi'i'Kovro tov zuoXsfxoy, Id. for 
AnXoivrof si enim a nobis persuasi bellum hoc suscepissent, if they 
had undertaken this xvar at our persuasion. 

Ot'OEv vsuT^ort avr-hv 'ar slirXf hti \ira\yi<Ta^ l(p' u rtff^vvdrji Xe7l,- 
nihil unquam ei vel dictum abs me, yel factum est, quo erubuit, 
Jbr erubuerit, / never said, or did any thing to her to make her bluski 
Where the aor. indicat. Y,a-;^vv9v is for the optat. uv a'tax^vOBi-n. 

H xcC(U,'/)Xo? aTTd Tuv tjorxfjiuv » zrivsi -Zo^oTe^ov, .^ a-vvrx^d^tij Arist* 
camelus e fluviis non bibit, antequam eos conturbabit, for contur- 
barit; the camel troubles the river water bejbre he drinks of it: for «» 
cvirx^d^Eti in the opt. or cxvvrx^oi^Y, in the subjunct. Which is very 
common with the Attics, even when they put the conjunction be- 
fore it; EiTftQ riq v(juy 'CT^osi^ei rov vSv, Dem. Olynt. 1. si quis vobis 
mentem adhibebit, j^r adhibucrit : if any body xdll listen to you 
'voitk attention^ 

The optative is also put for the indicat.Aytrav^^o^ II ^tXoK'kix 

&^^ios rsxQETvf &c. Xenoph. Lysander cum ex Philocle, qui Andrios & 
Corinthios praecipites cgerat^ quaesivisset, qua poena dignus esset> 
&c. Lysander having ashed Philocles, v;hohad ordered the Andrians and 

the 



,400 Book VIIL 

■% 

the Corinlhians to be fumbled from a precipice^ tvhat punishment he 
deserved. Where we see KaTaj{^>3/xv>jo-£<f, aor. iEol. opt. for x*t«- 
xixpv)ij,vmsh the plu-perfect indicative. 

Likewise in Plato, tXsysg on Yttij t^v ^ixxioo-vvnv 'cjejw,"4/£/s roT<; 
a^B^wTtois, where z::i(j.-^tt^ is for eVj/^A-vpf, a Jove dicebas immissam 
liominibus justitiam fuisse, you said that Jupiter had sent justice 
among mankind. Which is very common, when there happens to be 
a particle, as or/, wy, o^, oiiti^, 05t<5, oaot, ore, &c. 

II. Of the imperative and the injimtive. 

The imperative, as we have observed Book 111. ma}' pass for a 
future : and it is ridiculous, says Apollon* book i. chap. 30. to 
think otherwise, since it is not customary to command things past, 
or present, but only those that are to be executed aftei* being 
commanded, and of course things to come*^ 

Wherefore the Hebrews have made it their first future, and the 
Greeks use it frequently to express the time to come: oTaQ' at a 
l^affovt Eurip. for ^qdans, s<?is ergo quid fac, for quid facturus sis ; 
do you know vohat you are to do^ oTaO' on zjoi'nirovt Men. for zjoivasi^f 
scio te facturum, I knovo you tvill do it. As, on the contrary, they 
often use the future for commanding. 

But the author of the Idiotisms is mistaken in saying, that the 
imperative is put for the infinitive. For in the example which he 
gives from Dem. ^syiQel^ vixuv rdaSrov* iTrei^av oiirxvrx aniicrnri) 
K^ivure, fj^v) <sjfors^ov zs^oKoci/.Qcknrs'. where he pretends that h^Umtz is 
for K^iveiVf and is^o'KotijJ^otnrs for tj^o'KoiyJ^amv : the sentence is abso- 
lute, id a vobis unurn precatus : postquam omnia nudieretisyjudicatet 
nuUumque prcBJudicium afferte* For his request commences there 
absolutely, e-zTf^^av, postquam. Begging only this one'favour of you; 
*iiiz, not to judge before you have heard every things nor to let yourselves 
he swayed by any sort of prejudice* 

It is equally a mistake to say that the infinitive is put for an im- 
perative according to the doctrine of some grammarians : fxxqrv^tvi^ 
•^tvlri (PsvysiVf ra, Si'xa/ Soyo^dsiVj Phocil. for we must understand 
X^vif oportet, it is necessary; or 'c^s^oa-nytu, convenit, it is proper ^ or 
some such thing : vce should avoid bearing false witness^ and say. no* 
thing but what is true. . , 

The present of the imperative, says Apollon. book i. chap. 30. 
denotes only the commencement of the action : o-xxf/lsru Tei<; ai^i.^' 
"Kas, let him begin to work in the vineyard. But the aOrist implies the 
future action accomplished; a-Kx-^oiru ras a{j.iri?^nqi let him have worked 
or dug in the vineyard. Wherefore Ramus, and those that have fol- 
lowed him, as Sylburgius and others, call these aorists, as also the 
1^ex?, im^evsit. futures perfect, that is to say, which denote the future 
thing accomplished, partaking at once of the future and theperfecf. 

III. That the iiifinitive is ne'ver put for the suhjtwciive. 

It is also a mistake, which the author of the Idiotisms has given 
into, to imagine that the infinitive is put for the subjunctive, when 
Dem. says, to •^'K<pta-iJ(.» rsro y§oi(p(o' 'ZIjXeTv Iv^ -ra? ToVsr, Iv oU 
«y V <J)*^/7r9ro?. For taXsTv makes here an absolute sentence, and 
ou^ht to be considered as a noun, according to what we have 

§ ~ , observed 



The Nature of the Moods. 401 

observed in the third rule of the foregoing book, p. 324 ; which may 
be resolved in Latin by nempe: hoc decretum edo, nempe navigare 
ad ea loca, in quibus Phillppus esse poterit, my opinion is, to let the 
Jieeh steer towards 'whatsoever place Philip is in. For there is a wide 
difference between saying, tliat this expression is in the same signi- 
fication as ut navigaretur, and that the infinitive is put there for ut 
navigaretur ; which it certainly is not, since it can be explained in 
its natural force. 

And it is observable, that the change of moods can be only of 
those three, which we put together in our tables, and of which we 
have given instances in the first number of this chapter, because 
these moods are frequently nothing naore than a difference of ter- 
mination in each tense : but never of the imperative for the infini- 
tive, which are quire different things. 

It. is therefore wrong in Sursin, and several other grammari- 
ans, to say, that the infinitive is put for the subjunctive, when it is 
joined with wj, urs, 'vjplv, and the like particles; as zjapxnacXw uts 
ry;^sry, hortor te ut consequaris, / advise you to act so as to obtain it. 
Ufiv Ihvxi SiXDv, antequam pcenas dederis, before- you are punished : 
for the infinitive is there as a sort of noun, and wt^ rvx'^Tv is as if 
it were, tanquam ad consequi, or adlconseeutionem, / advise you to 
the pursuit, that is to say, to act so itsio compass your end; and in 
like manner the rest. 

IV. Infinitives and participles of all tenses. 

The infinitive and participles may, as we have observed elsewhere, 
denote all the differences of time. It is for this reason that with 
uv their present frequently marks the future, as we shall shew in 
the chapter of indeclinable particles. But this may be also seen in 
these examples : ^iQaixv tWoq rh '^yj^potv avrkK;, tirs^ m (poQ^vlxi) 
iy -cTSTToyOajy/v, i'%£<y, Dem. for a-x,'na-£iv : for by the present he has 
marked the future : it is very likely that they voill be confirined in their 
aversion^ by reason of the mischiefs they apprehend, aud of those they 
have already suffered. Kdi^vvivus yap -^ u tk; h ofo^yj - zjoiKt'Ki/.xlos, 
^EupLSvos ocvx^cinfluv, fji,xv9avoi ri, ■nysTo'Occi av ocvroy vovtasiv, «XA »jc 

o[xiji.xcri ^supvv, Plato 7. de Rep. you will suppose perhaps that he 
rather fancier these things than sees ihem with his eyes. Where we 
find, that vo>i!7s<v, which seems a future, and ^swpry, which seems a 
present, nevertheless express both the same time. 

The same may be said of the participle: «a?vb? Is {jlktQ^vtcci, w? 
w/>tar;ov fMxx'^ijJvas vitlq a(^uv, 'hv Avrot, Xenoph. for ^a-x^roi-iiviis, al'.OS 
mercede conducunt, quasi melius sua causa pugnpturi sint quani 
jpsimet, they have foreigners in their pay, just as if these v^ould fight 
letter than themselves in their own cause. 

V. Of verbals in iov. 

Verbals in iov answer to the gerunds in dum. They generally 
govern the same case with their verb, and must be resolved in the 
same masner as the Latin gerunds, considering them merely as 
nouns substantive, but frequently including a sort of necessity or 
duty, agreeably to what we have observed in the Latin Method, in 

3 F the 



40^ Book VIII. 

the remarks on gerunds, Chap. I. UvviiAonvVov ©£« tJi.a\\o^, # 
iyocirnv-mi Nazianz. where we may understand er*, esf, though it 
is not absolutely necessary, because there is this difference between 
the gerund and the participle, that the participle always supposes 
a verb, diligenda mater y sup. est ; but diligendum mairem is taken 
absolutely, by reason that the gerund always includes the action of 
its verb, whence it has the name of gerund taken from gerere. 
We may therefore translate it thus; xve ought to think of' God qftenef 
than tue breathe : ov a^em vm-nlscy ywscTKxq, ^urlp. it is not by Jvrce 
that we must get the better of women : (psviclsov h rZ o-u(p^ovuv}t t* 

Aoyoy viyBi^ioya, 'cioitiaBxi tS /3/», Basil, the wise man ought to avoid 
being governed by vain glory and the opinion of the multitude ; but he 
should take right reason for the rule of his actions : rocvra. 'la-u 'wot'niix.bj'' 
rz^x reo-arw vtrlov oi)c8<fEov 'crxTo'if JPlatOy that is to say, to a)t«£i» T«yT« 
Tocrsrw ^tIov xKHfiov offu, &c. the more poetical these thini^s are^ the 
less they ought to be heared by children. 

The Attics, who particularly affect the plural for the singular, 
put also these nouns in the plural: a^ix.i7v tb? 'AOryvai«?, ^ isoT^iiAnle^ 
sfvoci, Thucyd. that the Athenians used them ill] and therefore they must 
declare war : rm x^xlivlav Im -sjavT ajcersov, Soph, we must obey the 
magistrates in every thing : where acK^-stx, is for axersoy, by ^ kind of 
syllepsis, cognate to thslt of animalia currit, of which we havespokfint 
in the foregoing book, Rule V. 

If the substantive is expressed, then these verbal nouns retain 
their nature of adjectives, and agree with the substantive in the 
same manner as other adjectives ; as o »yx9h ^ovo^ r^^^leo^, Arist. 
the good man alone ought to be honoured* 

Of two e.vpressions more remarkable and more difficult 

to resolve. 

But if the construction be different, then the noun in ov is a guB- 
stantive, that has the same government with its verb ; as x^x^v rs 
otoiv avru a-^icisov, >u roi^iv r,v\iva, roi<; l^yms l<Px^(ji.O'rsoVf sup. Eiirof/sv, 
Lucian, in his rules for writing history, we have mentioned with 
what sort of an exordium we must begin, and what order we must ob- 
serve in things. Where k^xliov, incipiendum, ought to be considered as 
a verbal substantive, whicti governs the case of its verb, as here a^- 
X-^iv o'i'xv in the accusative ; and we must resolve l<pot§iAos-£ov in the 
same manner. 

But if after these nouns there happen to be another accusative 
that agrees with them, as with the infinitive, it is because they in- 
clude the force and action pf the verb; as in Plutarch, j^ ju//M,>jVoir 
rxZrx ^ciV[j.a.^ovla,s ys ^^ ^ ^^jXavl^is?, and these things ought to be imi* 
iated by those that admire them, and are moved by them. And in an- 
other place, Itpx^ixcTEov tSto >y ro7q o^olots, ytcoKvovlx t»j fAsyoi <P|c- 
vhlxs Ivi rois /w,*3^£voj L^'iotc;, he wko has a mind to restrain young 
people that raise disturbances on account oftrijles^ must apply this to 
similar occasions-, 

CHAP. 



Remarks on "o T r. 403 

CHAP. XI. 

Remarks on the Indeclinable Particles. 
And ^r St of on, 

▼ T E have already made mention in the sixth book, Chap. I. 
of several words which commonly pass for adverbs, though in reality 
they are not such, but are either an accusative governed by xal«, 
or an ablative governed by o-vv, Iv, liio, or some such preposition. 

But it is proper to treat here separately of some of these 
particles. 

I. That on is always a relative. 

The grammarians frequently make on pass for a conjunction, 
which they render by the Latin quod, and distinguish it from o, n, 
separated by a comma, which they say is a relative : but this dis- 
tinction seems to be quite arbitrary, this word being almost always 
the neuter of the relative, o, to which the Attics have joined r/, as 
they do to several others ; saying also in the masculine on?? in the 
feminine 'nns, as in the neuter on. This we can make appear in 
the several uses wherein this word is received, which will be a very 
great help towards the explication of several difficult phrases. 

In order to proceed more methodically, we shall beg the reader 
to recollect what we have diffusely proved in the general grammar, 
Part. II. Chap. ix. concerning the nature of the relative, which is, 
that it has something in common with all the other pronouns, inas- 
much as it is put instead of a noun ; and something particular in 
this, that it serves as a connexion to join an accessary proposition 
to its principal. We have proved in the same place, that the 
Latin quod, which among the grammarians passes for an adverb or 
conjunction, is, in reality, this very relative, but divested of its 
office of a pronoun, and retaining no more than that of joining, 
where it happens to be, one proposition to another. 

Now though I do not pretend absolutely to deny, that the Greek 
%Tt may often agree in signification with the Latin quod; as 
ty otS' oT< E/x/xsvao-/ y.^Ki7vQi rolq vo[a.oi^, Lucian^ scio quod leges ipsE 
servabunt, / am very sensible that they 'will observe the laws : ot< fji.h 
yu§ are tsim^^ixoci, aTg ly ru re^ni^u j/jut?, >^ xvTo<i o^ois, oi^oci. 
Idem, quod neque vinctus sim, neque in Tartaro, etiam ipse vides, 




quently slript of its office of conjunction, which is more pecuhjar 
to the Latin quod, and only retains that of a pronoun. 

In order to render this more easy to comprehend, we must ob- 
'serve that the Greeks, in imitation of the Hebrews (as we have 
made appear in our general grammar), frequently use detached 
expressions, which are put almost absolutely, as we have already 
taken notice of in the preceding chapters : thus in the New Testa- 
ment, when the priests and Levites sent to St. John the Baptist to ask 

him 



404 Book VIII. 

him who he was ; the text says, ut inferrogareni eum, tu quis es ? U» 
l^coVia-i^aiv cuvrov, 2y t/^ J; John i. that is, to say these words to 
him, cru rls cT; ivJio art thouf 

Now this is the signification or/ generally bears, which seems to 
be owing to the custom of the Attics, who, as Vergara says, bookiii. 
chap, 23. gaudent geminare vocabula idem pollentin : whereto he wants 
us to refer not only orif but likewise w?, after the verbs A/y&;, (p«/vc,/, 
and the like, as in this passage which he quotes from ^sop, t^? Ji 
.(PxiAivvi<;f wq ol (SsKoXoi kJ o; 'utoiixsvs? (as viitQ'Ki'uovloj ilia vero respon- 
dente, she answering thus ; bubulci & pastores me sibi infestam sus- 
picabantur, the cowherds and the shepherds looked upon me qs their 
enemy i 

And this is so far true, that the sentence may frequently suhsist 
without these particles, and even they are sometimes omitted ; as 

in Thucyd. book i. tStov l\ lia. yA^Sis te t« aXa? 8>t lSi;vav7o Vkiir 
>^ dy.cf. {/.ccy^tfj^uvxloi s'i<riv alyviflicov oi e'Ae/o/, hunc enim (redeem Amyr- 
tcBum) propter paludis magnitudinem expugnare neqnivenint : S^ simul 
QUIA qui paludes illas incolunti sunt ^gyptioriim bellicosissimi : where 
-we see it is as if he had said, >^ a,ixoc ort i/.x^i[A,'JfT<x}of elat, &c. 
they coidd not fake the king, because of the laigeiiess of the lake ; 
and moreover because of its being inhabited by the most warlike of all 
the Egyptians. 

Hence it is that even when on is expressed, it is frequently left 
out in the translation ; as in St. John xviii. w? av slirev avroTs, on 
eyu £j/x/, a-TT^AOov sU ra: omcru, ut autem dixit iUis, ego sum, abie- 
runt retrorsum, as soon then as he had said unto them^ I am he, they 
'went backvcard. 

Wherefore to alone is sometimes put for this on : as in St. Mark, 

chap. v.-o^E 'lHZOT~S stTTEv avru;, to, si ^vvaa-ai '^i<-rsvcr<xif VJoiylx 
^vvoilcc rw 'HjiTBvovli, Jesus said unto him^ if you can believe, every thing 
is possible to him that believeth ; which is the same, as if he had put 
ziTTev on t\ ^vvxa-ai, &C. 

This method of explaining is quite natural, and helps to clear up 
several very obscure passages ; as Dem. pro Corona, a.yJslt ug o-»(pu5 
ovXo't 5^ ^lo^i^slaci, or/ ruvra, lyu 'CXsTroi'mx, axovlua ^ AOvivcciuv : for 
whereas it is natural to imagine at first sight, that this lyw refers tp 
Demosthenes, who speaks here, and that the sense of it is, you hear 
how he declares, aiid evidently shows, that it is I, who now dm speak' ■ 
ing to yau, that have done this in spite of the Atheniaiis : on the con- 
trary, roivrx lyw must be referred to ^schines, of whom he speaks 
here, and whose own words these are : so that the meaning is this; 
you see, gentlemen, how JEschines declares, and proclaims aloud ; It is 
I, that have done this in spite of the Athenians, 

In like manner, in the relative, chap. iii. xiyus on ^a^Hdik t'l^i, 
dicis, dives sum, that is to say, dicis hoc, thou say est this, nempe, 
dives sum, I am rich : for the meaning is not quod dives sum, as the 
old interpreter has rendered it, which seems to signify, quod ego 
Christus qui loquor dives sum, and is quite a different sense. In like 
manner, in St. John iv. 17. where Christ talks to the Samaritan 
woman, and says, xaAw^ il'nas on oiv^^x (sk c'p^w, bene dixisti, ^uia 
virum non habeo. There are several other places in the same inter- 
preter, 



Remarks on "o T I. 405 

preter, where or/ is thus rendered by quod or §'«/«, and where it 
would have b^en^tfiore proper to have omitted it ; as in St. John x, 

vifjiviVj ocfA-viVf ^eyw vixTvf or; syoj ' s'/x* v Sv§a rZv ti^^oQocruv, amen, 
amen, dico vobisy quia ego sum ostium avium ; where quia is super- 
fluous : and in the seventh chap, ol y^h aXKoi sAsyov, on kyoc^oq Irivt 
quidam eniyn dicebant J quia bonus est ; where it is visible that this 
quia is of no manner o? use. 

It is also in this sense Ave must take on, where H. Stephen, in his 
book de Dial, Alt. says, that it ought to be taken for enimvero, or 
nempe ; as in St. Mark vii. o §e txTron^iOslq eTttev oti y.atXus 'sj^os'^Yt" 
revcrev ^Ucru'ixs -crtfi I^au/v ruv viroy-^tluvy which he explains by sane 
'quidem, enimvero, bene, &c. Whereas, according to our principle, 
the sense is quite natural to say, at ille respondens dixit hoc, xaXft??, 
&c. Hence the interpreter has left out this on, having put simply, 
dixit ; bene prophetavit, &c. In like manner in St. Luke xix. Ae- 
ymori, trsyvcos tc, a-v, which H. Stephen renders by nempe, vel si tu 
flosses: whereas it is still all the same, dicens hoc, saying this, viz. 
«/ iyvuq tC) (TV. 

I am not ignorant that this or; may be rendered by various par- 
ticles, and diversified in several forms ; but I maintain that its na- 
4;ural force agrees with our principle, according to which it is the 
business of the translator to invent divers turns to express it. Thus 
when Tully translates or/ by nam, as in this example from Plato, 
ja-^is ourloc rvis /Asytf^f fcxpsXEta? ysyovsv y>yuv, on ruv vDv Xoyut zsm rS 
«rayio? XsyofA^vuif ii^etq olv zjoIf. Ipp-nOv], vi^uii (j/^iots a^px, [xviO^ ytKiov, jw,*)r 
^^xvoy llovliov, rerum optimarum cognitionem oculi nobis attulerunt : nam 
hcec quce est habita de universitate oraiio h nobis, hand unquam esset ht" 
venta, si neque sidera, neque sol, neque ccelum sub oculorum aspectuni ca- 
dere potuisset : it is plain that this nam is a causal particle, which has 
the same force with siquidem, or eo quod, this eo being an ablative of 
the manner, so as on is an accusative, which also denotes it in 
Greek, and supposes aocix ; whence it is that in Latin we fre- 
quently do not write eo quod, but only quod, which also supposes 
a preposition. The Greek of Plato may be therefore translated 
thus, the sight is of very great service to us, for it is certain that 
we shoidd never have uiidertaken this discourse concerning the uni- 
verse, if ice had not beheld dhe stars,^ the su7i, and the heavens 
that encompass us. 

It is thus also we must resolve ort in interrogations, as in the New 
Testament, when the disciples asked Christ, why they had not been 
able to cast out the devil : on y)yLi7<; bk Tilvvn^vi^Bv E)tC«XErv avro ; why 
have we not been able to cast him out ? that is to say, xa9' ori, or 
hon ; just as quare is put for qua de re, which imports the same as 
^uamobrem. T/ h'n'o-vvspuy/iQrt iixTv, Xenoph. cur sic conspiratum est 
a vobis ? why have you thus conspired? 

For it is observable, that this on is often governed by a prepo- 
sition expressed or understood, as in Polyb. Hist. 1. olixdn tuxvlocs 
.dl^oXoy-na-tiv, ^(on ty Xixv zsoXv n r^f a,KriB{txs kitE'Kti'irovio zj^oarOev, 
confessuros omnes existimo quod (fur xala, quod, or propter quod) 
admodura h, rei veritate prius abfuerint, I do not suppose that there is 
any body that will deny, but before this they were veryfarfrom know- 
ing 



406 BOOK VIII. 

i7ig the truth : where it is plain he might have put on alone, or Si' 
o, T/, separately, as we read sometimes iri authors, "Ov o Geo; eivi- 
f»!0"e, 7y.v^x<; rocs uolvxs t» vayars, y.iz^6ri tsK viv ^vvoiiov x^txhTa^xt uv- 
Tov vTTEf ayrS, Act. ii. tohom God hath raised up, having loosed the 
pains of' death, because it toas not possible that hesUoidd be holden of it. 
Here we see xafior<, where he might have put on only, or /tad' on, 
as St. Basil has put it in a passage wherein he shews that external 
goods are contemptible : « /aovov xaQ* on pxllxv €;^£< tvv zj^os ra, 
\vxv\iae, 'CTS^iipo'ffyiv, a,KK* or* /xoj^g uya^iiq ^vvxltxt res >t£Jcl*;/:A£V8f ufrols- 
><eTv not only because they are subject very easily to cha7ige, but also 
because they cannot communicate any goodness to those that are in 
possession rf them. Where it is evident, that the latter or/, sup- 
poses KoJo-, which is expressed in the former. Thus St. Luke, speak- 
ing of the father and mother of St. John the Baptist, says, 5^ an ^y 
oivro'iq rUvoy, axQon -^ 'E^io-aCsr 5v -£i^(Xf and they had no child, because 
that Elizabeth was barren. And lower down, fj.v (po^S ToLya^la,, Vion 
st3-yix.i(rQv % ^EVKTis a-a, fear not, Zacharias, for thy prayer is heard ,* 
and others of the same sort. 

II. "Oti fjt.n, nisi. 

Here we meet with an expression much harder to resolve than 
the preceding, and where on, nevertheless, is constantly a rela- 
tive, as H. Stephen acknowledges in his Thesaurus ; though he 
does not seem to have discovered the reason of it, which is no- 
thing more than an ellipsis. 

This is when this particle is joined with ^ri, which is rendered 
by nisi; as in the book De mu7ido, which some attribute to Philo, 
ticlos ry xoarfji.s 4^sv sTiVj on //.^ roi^ai zsa hsvov, extra mundum nihil est, 
nisijbrte vacuum. But this is only an ellipsis of £/, si ; bI pLVt nisi; 
and an h)^perbaton of or/, which ought to be after /x^, as if it were 
St (AY) or-!, nisi quod forte, there is nothing out of the world, only per» 
hajps a vacuum. 

All phrases of this kind may be resolved in the same manner, as 
in Thucyd. book 4, ov ya.§ rv x.^rivy), on i^-h /**«, ly uvr^ r^ axfO" 
vto\ti, non erat fons nisi unus in arce, that is to say, there was 
never a spring, save only one in the citadel. 

But it is still more remarkable, that when there follows a j^, 
which is equivalent to the Latin eHam, the sense is enforced, and 
seems to include some sort of an inference, for which reason it is 
often rendered by guin, or immo vero, as in St. Gregory, Orat, 1. 
contra Jul, t«? E^Ey%«? ^e « li^pvyiv on /w,^ ty jjLoiKXov rnrots lotvloi lira- 
3*iV ^yvofia-tv, quoininus tanun deprehenderetur effugere non potuit : 
quin imprudens licet quo certius deprehenderetur effecit, 
^^ This is still confirmed from the following passage of the twen- 
tieth oration, which seems a little move difficult ; where, speaking 
of the profane sciences, he says, that as we sometimes draw from 
venomous creatures salutary remedies, so we have extracted from 
the human sciences what is good, and rejected what is bad. To i^h 
ll^lar/xoy re, tCj ^mpi^i-no)) £Be|a^£0a* oaov Ie sU ^ctlyiomi ^Pff^'? *$ 
«XofcV»jy, iCf U'ffuMixs i3vGov, ^it'jfiva-ixiJt.EV, on /ajj xaxlsruv 'Cj^os ^wae- 

Mwu 



Remarks on (J'Tl UVC 407 

quirenda rerum natura S^ contemplatione versatur, suscepimus : quic- 
quid autem ad dcemonesy S^ errore7n, Sf exitii voraginem ducit^ respn- 
imus, Imo etiam^ ab eo ad Dei cultum adjuti sumus : nimirum ex 
deteriori, id quod prastantius est cognoscentes, at que iUorum imiecilli^ 
tate doctrinam nostram Julcientes* For it is the same as el (Art on, 
nisi hoc etiam, for quin etiam, but ive have even derived advantage 

Jh'om those sciences , by making them contribute'to the 'worship of God, 

But as the particle et, sif is understood here ; so we must suppose 

*6ti in several passages that have only y^ri ; as in St. Mark, chap. vi. 

xa« SK viovfotia ly.zi H^t^iav ^iivx^iv 'SToi'n<T<xi, el fjLvt oXlyon; ot^p^u'otq 

sviOsts rxq x^~P^^f lOspoi'TTsvaEv, et non poterat ibi virtutem ullam 

Jacere : irisipaucos hifirmos impositis manibus ctiravit : that is to say, 
it ixri or/, fiisi quod. And this ellipsis we find even in Latin au- 
thors, as in Terence's f'hormio, act. iii. sc. 1, ecquid porro spei est^ 
says Antiph. Nescio, answers Get. nisi Phcedria haud cessavit 
pro te enitiy for nisi quod, 

III. "Or^, quam: 

By this principle of the relative we must also resolve or;, when 
the grammarians say it is taken for quam ; as or< Ifyvvoirci, quara 
proxime : 'on h ^fctyy-raru, quam brevissimo, tempore. For quam 
being only an abbreviation of quantumy and quantum supposing in 
or jtola, as we have made appear in the Latin Method, or/ must 
be there for xa9' on^ in quantum, as quick as possible. "Ori rim 
Vi zjiiXv), iy re9X;ix(ji.'.vv) ^ o^oq, &c. Matt. vii. quam angusta porta 
est, 8^ arcta via est quce ducit ad vitam, that is to say, xaQ' o'rf, 
quantum, or in quantum. 

And hereby we find out a manner of explaining these little 
parentheses (av oT^' on) which seem to embarrass grammarians; 
as pisXofAOif -crpo 'SToivTioy, wv fxiXKu Xsyttv iA.)no{/.ovevov}oiSf sv oio^ on, 
r^s -cro^vXa? litoymo-ony Dem. antequam ad ea quce ad rem pertinent 
dicere aggredior, eorum vos admonitos esse volo, quorum tamen optime 
(bene hoc scio, or rather sat scioj meministisy that is to say, Jbr I 
know if very well, or which you all remember, I am very sure. Oug, 
Or'jfxvlsi;, {V oTS' on, rSrov Toy Xoyov ukvixoixIz, Id. nam VOS omnes, 
sat scio, aliquid hac de re jam audivistis, Jbr I know very well that 
you have all heard it mentioried. And in like manner the rest. 

And this is sufficient to prove, that it is not less true, perhaps of 
or/ than of quod, of which we have treated in the Latin method, that 
they are both nothing more than real relatives. 



CHAP. XIL 
Of PrepQsitmis, 

iS OTWITHSTANDING that what we have said concerning 
prepositions in the preceding book, Chap. IL is sufficient to shew 
their force and different beauties, as also to facilitate the understand- 



403 Book VIIL 

ing of them ; yet we have thought proper to make some additional 
remarks upon them here, whether with regard to their manner of 
diversifying the phrase, or to the particular difficuhies which they 
sometimes create. 

AM4>l' and riEPl", imply^the same thing, but they are frequently 
joined together in verse ; as vifjLtis 5' aijjpl zjspi Kp-nv^v hpisq nxla ^uy^iis' 
£ph(ji.£Vf 11. /3. we offered sacrifice on the sacred altars near the fouw 
tain. Which vye sometimes find even in compounds ; ayi.'Piinpi'rpu- 
(pocf Horn, turned abouty lead round But -ctj^* is much more usual 
in prose. See their paraphrase lower down, Numb. 5. 

'ana', AIA', KATA', are all three made use of in the division 
of numbers ; as ava Ivo^ two and two : Kofia, ixrjvx, every month : 
5/' 'irnq tuBixTrla, every Jifth year. But this distribution is expressed 
also in other different manners : O7p|a7o avrss ccTtoTixxnv Ivo Ivoy 
Mark vi. and began to send them out two and two : which partakes 
of the Hebrew phrase. Ek 'UocTosy each in particular : s^vnto^lix 
sKXToif of sixty each : xur av^pa. skxtov, each separately. In like i 
manner, o xa6' sKoc^oVf each in particidar : ^ xaQ' UoiTw, eachjemaie 
in particular: ol y.a.^'' i'va, each taken separately," Likewise with 
cvv, avv'^vof (TvvlpEi^ two and twOf three and three. See the forego- 
ing book, Chap. II. 

'EI 2 and 'en in the Scripture are sometimes in a particular 
meaning, which proceeds from the Hebrew; as £70? ^e >^syij v^h 
lA.ri o^o<70ii oKco^f i^vtrs Iv rw ipxvu, fji-rire si; *Iipo(7o?\v^x Matt. V. 
but I say unto you, swear not at ally neither by heaven, nor by 
Jerusalem. TevS yi.ot zU ©toy vTrepot^'TriTriv, >^ lU oixoy 'SJocpx(pvyrii;, 
Psalm XXX. be thou to me as a God that is my protector, and as a 
house of refuge. 

II. Variation of the same phrase caused by prepositions. 

As there is hardly an expression but may be rendered by at 
preposition, according to what we have shewn in the Latin Me- 
thod, so there is nothing that Contributes more to vary the phrase. 
For example : 

To say, with nil my strength, or, as. much as I am able, we may put 
\s dvvoii^ty, ra, tig ovvoifA.iv: xxra. Ivi/ocfjuv. oVov Iw' I/ao< : oa-ov crQ't' 
yos, sup. xala, or even ls-<, est, just as we say oa'/i ^vvoc(ji.i? ' ' like'- 

Wise oaov JyvaT/oy, or ^nrpos ocroy Jyvi/loy : or even 0(70. ^vvxloi: £;V 
cffov haa ovvocfAiug l oaov sis s(ji.e viA-iv : oerovy Or 'zsxp oaov, or >ca9 
oaov or £(p' oaov, OV i(p* oaoc, or xxQ' ^vvxixai : 1^' oaov tj7\.iTrov, 
Agam, TO I/aS {/.ipos, sup. xxia, or xxr Ijxxvla y^ipos '. xalx to 
£//oy fj.B§os : TO iff' eyiol, to xaT* e'/ixs : Toy' l/z.y : to lit Ij^b ri/.ov 
fxEjor. Again, w? olc'y rs : w? oTo'j te u ; and w? oloy rs ehxi, as 
much as possible. 

To express quicUy, diligently we may put Iv roix£i - crvv ra%f/ : 
xxtx txyps : S/a. rxyia^ : ^ik ra^ttg : ^iO!> rx'^ioiv '. Ig ra,y(pq* 
We say also, without a preposition, oaov ti.'/os, rxyv, rx^ira. 
(where we may understand xala) and Ta^EW, where we may under- 
stand^ §/a, though several take these words for adverbs. ' We say 
likewise ug tJ^s r&^x^'^f ^^'^ '^'f ^^^^ «v'tw to-^hs. 

' / To 



Of Prepositions. 409 

To express, of tvkaf, or concerning tvhat, has he been ac- 
€itsed, they put, 11 uv : cc(p' uv : a>d' 'om : avfi' a** : 1^' oru : 1^' 
w : I9' oT$ : ly oT? : i(p* 'Iro : l<p' : zuix^' : >tad' .0, §/ S a<T;ctT«/. 

To saj', entirely, we find xaS* oA» : to V oXov : to a-vvoXov : «j«v- 
Ta Tfoirov, sup. xala, as they put it sometimes, xxrx 'cjoivlx rpoTTov, 
'Cjxilt rptiu, sup. fi'y. And adverbially, -ZErayla;?, ra-ayl^Aa)?, OTSfv/a- 
'notai, and the like. 

III. The signification of a word changed by a' preposition. 

But as nothing is more apt to deceive people than the difference of 
signification, which the same word receives by reason of a different 
preposition, which, as Vergara says, has imposed upon several 
translators, it is proper to give here some instances of this variety 
in the same noun, over and above tliose which we have given of dif- 
ferent sort« in the list of the second chapter in the preceding book. 

riaV, Tsro^e?, the foot. 

Toy h 'aoffiv ocyyaeriv, they do not as much as See- ivhat lies he- 
J<)re their Jeet : 'csfls ro7^ zsoa-h ocvrZ ^y, he was at his feet : xaloi 
•cToSaj, instantly, immediately :• 'zsapx zjo^x^, presently, that insta?it, 
and merito according to Vergara: zjsdI zio^*, Jit to one's foot, aptly, 
a propos, conveniently : Ik -sto^o? t'l'ntio, he follouied close to his heets, 
he came close behind him. Likewise ifA'jroluv yiyo/txa* a-ot, I am an 
hindrance to you, I lie in your way, or / go to meet you ; the same 

as ey rjoa-iv'. xremiv zja,vlx Toy Ifxvo^uv ysvousvov, Herod. to kill~all 
those that came in the way : lycTro^uy, at a distance ; as ayS^o? kockus 
^f)oic7a-ov\os iKfto^wv (pi\o(, which might have been also put in 
the dative av^/;<, &c. a man in distress is forsaken by his friends ; 
his friends keep at a distance: a}J,' viJLeT(; i^kv sxTro^wy, Luciau^ -^w^ 
you are dead, or departed. 

Xsi^j X^'-po^y the hajid. 

Axfjidvu i's y/ipxs, or ^sla ^(^iTpixq, I take in hand, or into my 
hands : i^e^xio v^u^ kocIo. %£/f 0$, he took water to wash his hands • 
(pifiiv fAsltx, yupoct, to Carry in ones hands : ^iyjo ^ty- x^'fcf? I have ji 
in my hands; as iv x^'p'^) ^^' ^'^ X^f^'^' '^"^^'^^^^ ocvtov Kuhl p^E'/Jo?, he 
wounded him in the hand, 

'Otp^ocXfMo^y », the eye. 

-^E| o(pQxX(jt.av ocTTomiJi-^xt, drive him away from you ; out of 
your presence : xxr o(p9o(,x^iq, on the contrary, signifies near you^ 

in your presence; oy^s;? <y»» l^i'Ki.i Tvpayva ksbt* q^QxX(jlSs Kxl'/ifa- 

fiTt, Xenoph, for no body is willing to censure a tyrant in hit 
presence. 

'HfAi^ocy (x,Cy the day. 

T^y xafi' y^/^puv xKpxa-ixv Ta /3/», Dem. each day's intemperance 
in eating: uvo^vofAxt H«d* •niAspccv, I am plundered by day: ^e&' 
^ijiipxv, MsoTp. some time after : 'ssx) viJ^ipxv, from day to day, out 
^f two days one* 

3 G Mspo? 



410 Book VIII. 

Mipogy TO, part. 

*Ev rw yAfii in his turn, for his part : iv ^jLepsit or _(Aip'*^(,i7isteacff 
for, in the place of, vice, loco : w? 1v rj? ruv l^Opuv na-t (jLspI^i, Dem. 
as enemies, for enemies : h khvos^spsi riOsia-ai rd--^ij(,srtp2t, HeViod. 
you have had no esteem for us : Iv (Aspi^i, or xaia. fj^epos, hy turns^ 
separately, apart, one after another: ra, h [Ji-^psi, roc Itt* (/.speq, 
particular things, things taken separately, each ajmrt : ra xaS' s>iMro¥, 
the same : Iv zjaptpfa yi^ipu ri9t<r9a.t, or i:iyQiETa-9xif the same as 
Iv njoipspfojf Jo do a thing slightly, negligently, not to mind much) not 
to be very uneasy about a thing, 

IV, Remarkable signification of 'Axo. 

'Atto, with the genitive which it governs, not only signifies 
distance, as a^jro r^s z!cclpi^o(;,farf7-om his country ; or the succession 
of time, as ai^l t^? o'^px^^ Usirns Plut. at the expiration of that 
public em.ployment ; but also the sect or profession that a person fol- 
lows, or the kind of life that one takes up with, as oJ aijo rm ^aOn/Aar^y, 
Laert. the mathematicians : ol uvo (piXo(7o(pixq -^ y^oUv, those that pro- 
fess philosophy and polite literature : ot ocno rs 'csspiTta.n^, the peripa^ 
tetics, A then, oi a,<rro r^i ^oxs, Lucian-^^e stoics: ol uiro ^t/^sA*?^, 
the comedians, as Budaeus expounds it ; for ^y/ixeA*} is properly that 
place in the theatre, which was allotted for the singers, and mu- 
sicians. 

Thus 01 ocjTo T^$ licKXrta-ixs, in St. Basil, signifies the Christians, ii 
qui stani, or simt ab ecclesia, as the translator has accurately rendered 
It : ^(A,7v ^e ivpo^ Tiiq diFo rvis SKytXrio-ixs Ir* Tts >iofos 'syspi ruv ^ixapiOiv 
rcov v^druv in Hexam. horn. 3. but notv tve must speak against those 
that are \n the church, or that are of the church. And Justinian is 
mistaken in a discourse of his for the fifth general council against 
Origen, who was condemned therein, in alleging this passage, as 
if St. Basil understood u'no ttis kx-XTjo-Zaj for those quj, ab ecclesia exci' 
derant, or as if he meant here that Origen had been expelled the 
church. For it appears by the sequel, that this father designs to 
point out in this passage rather the Christian church in opposition 
to paganism, of which he had spoken before, than the cathohc church 
in opposition to heresy. And it is evident that he and the other 
fathers, as St. Athanas. never looked upon Origen as a person out 
of the communion of the church, but as an ecclesiastic author 
who lived and died in it, though charged with several errors. 

V, Periphrasis of ccfMip) a?ici -srep). 

The periphrasis formed by these two prepositions along with 
Ihe article, is very common, and admits of two remarkable sig- 
nifications. 

The first to denote the principal person ; as ot a(j.(pi rlv 'Op(pix 
for 'Op(pBv^, Orpheus: ol ijEpi ^iX^TiTrov >9 'AXs^xv^pov, PJut. Philip 
and Alexander : ^ ol vjspt ^unpotrm, Socrates : x«/ ^oXXoi Ik ruv 'la^ 
•daWv lK'n>,v9siixxv «7jPo? Tu? zaspi rriv M<ip9xv t^ Mxpiav '/yx 'juxpxf/.vOT^- 

cwvlxt 



Of P repositions » 4 1 1 

e-<wvl«; flt'^Tfjt?, John ii. and many of the Jews came to Martha and 
Mary to comfort them* 

Expressions of this sort, says H. Stephen, seem to have been 
contrived originally for pliilosophers and great men, whereby not 
only their person was marked, but also their disciples and their re- 
tinue. Insomuch that it was a piece of Greek vanity, to render it 
afterwards common in discourse, in order to mention a person with 
greater air and ostentation ; in the same manner as the moderns use 
the words lordship, excellency ^ highness, reverence, eminence, majesty, 
holiness, &c. to express with a greater mark of respect not the thing 
but the person. 

The second signification is, to denote at the same time, both the 
chief person, and his retinue or attendants, as oi ^Bpl tov Kvpov, 
for Cyrus and his soldiers: ot o!,v(p\ rot 'E7r/x«foy, Ejoicurus and his 
sect. 

To these we may subjoin a third, which is very naturjil, viz. to 
mark the retinue or attendants, and not the person : ro7i kyi.(^' ul- 
th ^opvipopois, Euseb. to his guard. 

It is in this kist sense we must understand those phrases that have 
an ellipsis ; as ot 'ujip) ra Upii, sup. oly^puwoi, those that are employed 
in the sacrifices, viz. the priests. 

VI. Difficulty concerning these periphrases. 

These periphrases being liable to different interpretations, are 
frequently the occasion of ambiguity in discourse. Hence in 
Thucyd. o» av(p< Uzio-av^pov, by some is understood Pisander only, 
and by others Pisander with his attendants. In Xenophon, ot d(A<pi 
ro» Kvpov by some is understood Cyrus only, and by others Cyrus 
and his soldiers. In the Acts, chap. xii. ot taspt UaZXov, is by the 
ancient interpreter rendered Paulus & qui cum eo erant, Paul and 
those that ijoey-e along with him; though, in St. John xi. he has 
translated zjpoq ra,(; issp) Map^xv 7^ Maptuv, ad Martham 8^ Mariam. 

Now when there is a noun joined with an article, or some parti- 
tive, which has a relation to it, and which governs it in the 
genitive, it seems, says H. Stephen, that there is scarcely any 
room to question its implying a multitude : ot 'dtp) 'ApK£cr»Aaoy 
cf^Ksc^-n^akol, Plut. we must not explain it, Arcesilaus the academic, 
but Arcesilaus and his folloxvers the academics. Likewise in the life 
of Galba, 'crXucrlot ruv i^spi TiyeKXiov k, Nv^(pi^iov h ri(A.y) yiyovi- 
rm, several friends ofTigellus and Nymphidius. And in the life of 

Demetrius, ot II tjepi tov <l>aArp'aj, zjdivlss (asv uovlo ^sy(t<jQcici rov Kpot" 

Tavia, &c. that is to say, Phalerus and all his retinue, according to 
Budaeus. Likewise in St. Basil, in his treatise on the true faith, 
cvviTuo't . Se tSto k^ ol zrsfl tov (/.XKupioy TlBTpov >^ 'ifc-avvigv f^uOy^lai 
T« Kvpia, that is to say, St. Peter, St. John, and other apostles of 
the Lord. 



VII. Whether to remote the ambiguity the Terb may be 
put in the singular. 

But it is proper to enquire, whether when we intend to mark 
the person only by this periphrasis, it be not allowed to put the verb 
iiv the singular. Budaeus, 



41S Book VIII. 

Budaeus, in his Commentaries, is of opinion that it may he 
put by a figure, viz. a syllepsis: which H. Stephen seems to 
favour in his Thesaurus ; and Sylburgus confirms it, to remove, 
he says, all ambiguity. Gretser teaches the same ; and Sursin in 
his grammar gives for instance these expressions, ot 'sre^l tov tlxv>iov 
tKtye, Paulus dixit, St, Paul has said. 

Nevertheless, the only authority for all this is a passage of He- 
rodot. which having been given by Budaeus, has afterwards been 
laid hold of by the rest, though it seems to be a very weak founda- 
tion. It is taken from the first book, chap. ixii. and is thus 
quoted by Budaeus: xxi ol afy.'Pi UsKrlrpaloy, w? opfjLvi^ivlsq Ik Ma- 
pxQ&ivoqf wav ETTt TO ctrv, Itti Twi/To a-vvtovlsSf oLTTiKvislxi Itti riaA- 
?v^w'5o? ^AOfiva'c^s Upov, i^ vMix i'deJo r« oTrAa. But it is certain 
that some ancient editions, as that of Aldus, put a^ntDivsilxt, 
in the singular, and I'SfvIo in the plural. It is also observable, 
that the editions of Paul and H, Stephen have this very same 
reading, and that Sylburgus, in his notes which are at the 
end of this author, makes no kind of emendation. Valla, also, 
has translated it in the plural, perrexerunt and posuerunt, wherein 
the French translators agree with him. Wherefore the passage may 
be rendered thus : but Pisistratus, and those that were with hirrff 
marching out of Marathon, advanced towards the town, and having 
drawn together, they took post at the temple of Minerva oj Pallene^ and 
put themselves m readiness for battle. True it is that H. Stephen, 
in revising the Latin translation of Valla, has restored pervenit, and 
ex adverso arma posuit. But having made no alteration in the Greek 
text, as he might have done, according to the ancient editions, he 
leaves this expression still more dubious, since he seems to have de- 
parted from what he quoted in his Thesaurus. I should therefore 
be glad to find some further authority to resolve this difficulty ; es- 
pecially as there seems very little foundation for putting the verb in 
the singular, from this passage, because having the nouns and parti- - 
ciples in the plural, Ip^nUilis and cwiovres, it seems to determine ab- 
solutely a plural, according to what I have remarked above. And 
indeed, how could they be otherwise than several, since he talks of 
people that were drawn together ? 



G H A p. XIII. 

Of the Particle us, ut. 



a 



'2 is derived from e?, according to the etymologist. It is sus- 
ceptible of so many different significations in the variouis uses which 
it is applied to, that H. Stephen, in his Thesaurus, is of opinion 
that it may be taken sometimes for an adverb, sometimes for a con- 
junction^ and sometimes for a preposition. Yet if we consider 
' the matter with due attention, we shall find that it is never any 
thing more than a particle of likeness and relation, in the «arae man- 
ner as the Latin ut. 



Remarhs up072 'flS. 413 

*fif is therefore taken for ut, sicut, velut, tanquam, quasi, pra, 
loco, as, in the same manner as, as if. Sometimes it receives an 
accent, li/q, and is rendered ita, sic ; and then it is the same thing 
with Twf for KTwy, ihus^ 

But when they say w? t\y.a.<Txt, we must understand s|Er/, ut con* 
jicere, sup>. est, or licet. Likewise in Aristophanes, w? ys /m,o< ^ontTvf 
as 'well as I can judge, according to my opinion. 

It denotes also relation, when we say, /^fii^iyv vi w? xar' av&pcoTroy, 

major quam pro humana natura, exceeding human nature : rvipKos 

Ixervo; w? rsfls Ifxs, Lucian, he is blind in comparison to me: «? -cjEvln- 

xevljt, about jifty. Likewise when we say, w$ il^ot, Horn, ut vidi, 

^or postquam, as soon as I had seen. 

Likewise when we say, us ra^-^tTo. quam celerrime ; us nfiret,^ 
quam optime : where we must always understand a verb, as when 
Xenoph.' says, CToXtv Ss 'sjofivQsU w? lllvxlo rot^^Kra,, profectus quam 
celerrime, or quam celerrime potuit, being gone to the toxvn with all 
imaginable expedition. 

'fls sfirsTv, as I may say, ut ita dicam, or fer^ dixerim, or ut 
dixerim. 

'fis fji^ for IJI.V signifies ut ne, or simply ne ; where we must 
understand ut. In the same manner as the}^ say <W ^ri, or simply 
fAvi i where we must understand <Va. 

*n? is also put for u-e, ita ut, adeo ut, insomuch that, for tiQt^ 
utinam, Would to God, as ut in Latin. 

It is put after other adverbs, in order to augment the significa- 
lion : tmp'pvus us %«//>&;, mire adraodum laetor, it is surprising how 
pleased I am. Thus Tully says, incredibite est quam valde gaudeam, 
T'ffspipvMS us ^iiXo(Aoti, I ardently desire. QxvixaTus us \Kv'7:YtQn, he is 
prodigiously sad. But properly this is, mirum, ut, or quomodo tristis 
est : and in the same manner the rest. 

It likewise bears this signification, when it is taken for quam by 
way of admiration : w? aDyxXkyz^T^cifpi.* irlvl quam molesta res est, 
■quam dura ! O what a difficult thing it is ! 

Even when it is taken for quod, as on, it is still in tlie significa- 
tion of wf, as a particle of similitude ; as Ae said it is no wonder, 
tlvsv u<; hVev ^avfAXTov iTt, that is to say, he has shewn how it is no 
wonder. I say that he has done this, Xiyu u<; avrls t^ETroUxs, that is 
to say, how, or in what manner he has done it. 

It is sometimes joined even with on ; as diruv rw (poipxKif w5 on 
«xvo<*> [Ati, telling him that if he made any diffi.culty to, &c. 

We likewise say, ug e'Ws, quod utinam, which God grant, 

*as is also rendered by nam, enim,yf;r; and sometimes by quan- 
doquidem^ since, whereas, forasmuch, 'fls tatin hlsx^^'^h Thucyd. 
for HKin y%^, says the Scholi. Jbr it is no longer possible, ^fls vvvys 
XXI 0-c l\iui, rsXiax; vj^ri U<^'/i<^xK)(svi^ivov, Lucian,.ybr the present I pity 
yoUf after you have stormed as much as you pleased. But it seems we 
may take it in the same sense as Tully uses ut in his book de Ora- 
tore, ut non jam sine causa Demosthenes tribueret primas & secun- 
das & tertias actioni, so that Demosthenes has reason to give the first} 
second f and third place to action. 



41 A Book VIII. 

'n?, they say, fs also put for the preposition tsfo^y ad, and 
retains its accusative ; us ocvrov /Sao-^Xsas, Thucyd. toivards the king 
himself: 'ssoKKm (pvyovlwv us to» Ueipaioi, Xenoph. several taking re* 
Juge in the port of Pirceeum : ^xo/aev ws MaxsSov/ay, iEsch, ijoe go to* 
wards Macedonia : oi^sa-Qixi us rs? AocKi^ott[A,oviovq, Dera. to retire tO" 
wards the Lncedccmonians, &c. But we ought rather to understand 
the preposition ts^ls, lU, or the like : o'l^'^aQui w? -ufw t»?, to go as if 
were towards them : and in like manner the rest. 



CHAP. XIV. 

Of Negative Particles. 

JL WO negatives generally make an affirmative in Latin, be-* 
cause they destroy one another: it is quite the reverse in the 
Greek, for here they enforce the negation. M^ IvTx i^Ms t«w6* 
liAMv I'jFmva'EiSf Dem. let non^ of you presume to approve of this hy the 
least sign : ^ri xocSacpu yoiq xaQotfS l^JiTrlta-OoHf /x,^ « ^ij/x/lov Irif Plato, 
for it is impossible for an impure spirit to rise to the knowledge of a 
pure truth. 

In some places several are put successively to strengthen the ne- 
gative : ov ^vvoclov khiruirolt lilh riruv 'cs^oi.rlm, Plato, there is no pos- 
sibility of doing any of those things : ovSsvole islit « ^w yiwjU* rZf 
^EovJuVf Dem. nothing that is necessary will ever be done : i^t ev /xu^t 
av, fj.'hrt ^ocXfTiov ri ruv rotsruv » ju,i5ri t5 a-uiAixlo^t (Avre rn rik 

TrfTrluKoa-if, Dion Cassius, do not imagine that wJiat can neither touch 
your body nor your soul, can be an evil : and be not disturbed at what 
has happened to you. 

Nevertheless we meet with exceptions to this rule : for in Latin 
two negatives have the force of denying, as we have made appear 
elsewhere ; and on the contrary in Greek they sometimes affirm : 
t>v dvvx^oci ft^ [xE^vvi(rQx; aurS, Xenoph. non possum ejus non me- 
minisse, / camibt help remembering him : tov 'o^vaasM fMn « /A/crsn> »x 
ajr ^t^vat^>jv, Lucian, / cannot help hating Ulysses : olx o'o" i'^ z*^ 
«Xf 'T'arwv ^otnpQv viroip^m, Aristot. it must of necessity be one of 
the two. 

After these verbs of denying, or hindering, and forbidding, 
the negative particle seems superfluous ; as kiti^u i^i ^wrio-taOat^ 
Dem. I am afraid I shall not be able: otnc av H^ecpvos yUoio (a^ ex 
s(Ms vtoq eJvxif Lucian, you cannot deny that you are my child: [/.n 
^ioi(p9eTpxi UuXva-Sf Thucyd. he hinders it from corrupting. And Ci- 
cero has used ne in the same sense, potuit prohibere neferet, &c. 

Sometimes there is an hyperbaton in the negation. For whereas 
in Latin the negative always destroys what follows it, as non dico, 
non simulo, I do not. say, I do not dissemble, &c. on the contrary 
laere it sometimes precedes the verb, and instead of destroying 
it, strengthens what follows it ; as ov <pvi^i, f*^ (poia-Ko, dico non, 
/ say no : f*^ -crfocrTroiSiwa/, simulo non, dissimulo, I pretend not to. 

^ Borne* 



Remarks on the Negative Particle. 415 
Sometimes the negative is at a greater distance from its verb ; as 

ov T£ Ttv* l^omvca vex^S ^oi^eaOxi avwyt/, Hom. II. g. for avuyn ^e 
HTivoc, he ordered that no one should abandon the dead body. Olya^ raXirx 
utr s wtvwv ysV^^' «^^> 'aoTCk'H §«, Dem* that is to say, oy 7^^ aSe, TavT* 
kW ixsivuv yiyovsv -doXXa lii^for this by no account was done instead of 
that, Jar from it, <^xvn<r$ixt ya,^ wSe, «7oA^8 hT, rr>s ysvytvo^iwis oi^tov «icr- 
^y»»j?, Demosth. for ci5Se, ya^ ^avijcrela*, «ToXX3 Ser, t?55 ysyvnaoi/.evyis 
fil^iov AKTxvv'^s, this mil not appear equal to the shame that must ensue, 
far from it. 

With verbs of fear, ^^ is rendered by the aflBrmation, the same 
as ne in Latin : Vi^u f*^ S/>)1«/, II. %' ^^etuo ne persequatur, / am 
afraid he ivill pursue. ^(sQai^tOx /x^ afx^oii^uv v^ix{lwcx(ji,svi Thucyd. 
metuimus ne ambobus frustrati siraus, I am afraid ive have missed 
ihem both, E< y^y) (^o^olixviv ofru^ ^j^-h eV avTbi (jLi T^a-TToilo, Xenoph. 
nisi vereor ne se adversus me ipsum coaverteret, xvere I not afraid 
that he would turn against myself. 

But if another negative is added, then the sentence becomes ne- 
gative, as ne non in Latin : SsJo/xflt fx^ »>c iyu roerxvmv ffo^'ixv, 
Xenoph. metuo ne non habeam tantam sapientiam, / am afraid I 
shall not be so wise. Mv hia-i^ w? »% ^^iu(; xx^Ev^Ticrslxi, Idem, non 
est quod metuatis ne non jucunde sitis dormituri, do not be afraid 
that you shall not sleep at your ease* See in the New Method of the 
Latin Tongue the remarks on vereor ut, vereor ne. 

As in Latin non modo is sometimes taken for non viodo non, in like 
manner in Greek ov^ or /ia^ with on or o-ww^, which must be de- 
termined by the sense : Kj o r«8i'v<©- e^uVjQuq to ayro tSto, »;^ 'ovu<; 
hsTvof iir-^vecrev, aXKa ty, &C. Dion Cassius, and Gabinius having 
been asked the same thing, not only did not commend Cicero, but even, 
&c. See in the Latin Method the remarks on Ellipsis, Numb. 11. 

MtttoIs, 

MyivoIe is often taken for fortasse, perhaps, after the manner of 
haud scio an in Latin. Ei' ys ^^v ktro^viiAa. rs^oaioiKiv o Savalf^, «S' 
aru^ \<ri xaxoy, fxri'Trole ^s '>L mvxviiov xyxQov' to yx^ fji^ ^s^nXZaOxi 
ffx^Kt^ i^ roTs -craflEO-; TauT*j?, v?*' wv xx]xaTf'jjp.tv<^ o vS$ T'/j? ^v>jJ5f 
avxirliJ.vXxixi 0Xvx§ixq, Evdxi[x6v ri Kf fjiXKoi^iov, Plut.^r if death re' 
sembles a j mrney, it is nut therefore an evil, but, on the contrary, 
perhaps it is a blessing : for to be freed from the servitude of the fleshy 
and the passions thereof , which only weigh down the soul, and f II it 
with trifling desires, is certainly a great felicity. MwoTs ayxv svr.Osq 
^, Theophr. perhaps it would be a piece of folly. Mwols Ss hT y^x' 
(ptiv, A than, perhaps it is necessary to write. And in St. Paul, Iv 
^^^orinli isxi^ilo^x vnq xvU^ixii^syLivHs* ia.yi'JToIs S&» xvroTs o Qsos (asIx- 
vo:xv sU i'jriyvua-if xXin^ilxs, 2 Tim. ii. In meekness instructing those 
that oppose themselves ; if God peradventure will give them repentance 
to the acknnvoledging of the truth. 

Mwolf admits of several other meanings, as in interrogations : 
aWx ixWols « T8T0 J x'lnov ; Theophr. but may not that perhaps be 
the cause? In negations: ftwols roe-Srov a./A£Xi5o-«/^sv y) v^^tlyts, vi t« 
(p<A<x« xa0n?cov]<^, Gregor. absit ut eousque negligamus, let us not be 
so far neglectful of the study of virtue ^ or of friendly duty, 

CHAP. 



416, Book VIIL 

CHAP. XV. 
I. Of the Particle "hv, 

XjLn is properly derived from jiy, si ; as uv mm a^^ttrocs sciA.ec§lixSf 
John XX. si quorum remiseritis peccata, tvhosesoever sins ye remit. 
But it is frequently a potential particle, ^yy>j1ixov, though being 
sometimes repeated, it is also called zjxpxirXvj^uiA.xliMv, a redundant 
or expletive participle. 

It is joined with almost all tenses and moods ; examples of which 
are very comnion. But with the indicative it is equivalent to the 
subjunctive, because of the conditional force which it includes : 
thus the French often render in the indicative with a conjunction, 
what the Latins would express in the subjunctive, si javois aime, 
for^i amavissem; quand je Jaisois, for cumjacerem; sil ajaitf 
for sijecerit. 

Thus we say, in the imperfect indicative, ^^vta-ifjLu^ralai y»^ m 
7i<rtxv a.Travluv, Dem, essent enim, or esse posseot ( and by no means 
erant) utiiissimi omniura,yor they would be tkt most serviceable of alL 

As also in the perfect, contrary to the opinion of Gaza, ly^ yuh 

Lucian, / have given you such laws as I thought would be most condu- 
give to the good of this city. 

Likewise in the aorists, as in Synesius, who writing to his bro- 
ther concerning a murder, with which a person was charged with- 
out being known for certain to have committed it, says, that we must 
equally disbelieve the accused, and the accusers : tov /w,£» on To.aroi- 
Inv u^ t\ "iCj it^h 'zssvoiviKsv, aAx' eWjjo-ev av, him^ because if he has 
not committed it, he was, however, capable of such an action : rt? 
Se iy /A^ zsXoL'ja.vlxq on (TvnijXxa-x)) av, and those, because if they have 
not really forged this accusation, yet they were malicious enough to do it. 
Where it is visible that h simply denotes an apparent probabiHty 
of the action. 

Hence this particle with the aorists is frequently rendered by the 
plu-perfect of the subjunctive, where it not only denotes a pro- 
bability, but sometimes even a kind of certainty of the future 
effect: «^6y av uv wn 'zjs'Troiviiiv, sTr^a^sv, Dem. nihil eorum quae nunc 
fecit, praestitisset, he would have done nothing of what he has done- E* 
^f ^v>, sJ'jiov ocv viMv, John xiv. 2. ?f it wer^ not so, I xvmld have 
told you. TloiXxt av Iv a-xKnu Kf avo^u xx&v[^ivxt, {Aslsvoyxxxv, Luke X. 
13. they had a great while ago repented, sitting in sackcloth and ashes. 

Therefore in St. John iv. where Christ says to the Samaritan 
woman, tl r^sti t^v ^u^txv t3 ©eS, >^ rls Ir^v o Xiyui aot, oos /xo; 
'Z5ii~y' cv oiv 7)T'/)0-x^ xvroy, >^ Iowhev xv vou^ ^a/v, that IS tO say, tu 

petisses ab eo, S^ dedisset tibi aquam vivam, without their being any 
more occasion for putting ^riiifa?? in the first member, where the 
ancient interpreter has put it, than in the second, where he has not 
put it: for the force of xv does not consist in making the proposi- 
tion absolutely dubious or uncertain, but in rendering it conditional 
and feasible : you mght have asked him^ or surely you might have 

ttsJced 



llemarhs on '^AN. 417 

tidied him, S^c. The same may be said of the fifth chapter, verse 
46. 6< y«f iTT/fEvsTE Mwcr-jr, iTT^rst'sTE av E/Ao;, where he has translated, 
si crederetis Bloysi, crederetis forsitan Sf mihi : though the Greek 
inchides no manner of doubt. Hence St. Austin, horn. 45. de verbo 
Dom, citing this passage, has not i^uiforsitan, but utique crederetis 
mihi. The same hkewise may be said of the following passage, 
chap. viii. verse 19. £/ If^s rosirs, xui rov ztoote^x i^n r,hirs <xv, if i/e 
hadknowi me, you should have knoxion my father also, 

II. ''Av with the infinitwe arid the participles. 

But oi-i^ in every tense of the infinitive and of the participle, de- 
motes almost constantly the time to come. The reason is, because, 
as we have observed elsewhere, these infinitives and participles 
being indifferent to every division of time, they are determined to 
the future by this conditional particle ; as lo-au ^jloi aQxac 'sy^ortOsis 
fj.oc'KtTOt m isottiv hoiO'KEla-Qoii ikc&tx^ w^rs o-jrors ^ioiroy e^stv av xjcc^so" 
xEvxcr[AsvoiT x^YHTOid^xi, Xenoph. methinks that by proposing prizes and 
relmrds you will render them more careful (rf perfecting themselves in 
these exercises, so as to be always in readiness when you have occasion 
Jbr their service. Where T^ouh has the force of 'cjoi^<tziv, and tyitv 
that of e|s/v. "AKKoi Sf zjs/iocv fxlv «v ay (po^mOvivaif s^e xitra7rXay*?vat 
^aca-fVf {} l^vvxwo roiq aXXoi; oiaoi'us 'sxov^vrss, EXTTofi^e/v ra oiX<piroiy 
Luciaoj others said, that they should not be afraid oj' poverty, could 
they but get their living by working like the rest, 

"NoiAia-xs SK av bti avfjifxl^xi acvrw rtss ^/.ta^a'Po^Hi;, Xenoph. instead 
of rrv^iAi^iti, thinking that the foreign troops in his pay would not join 
him, 'Of tt^Eva \-h<Jocvr(x, rcc rS jUEy^rS ©eS, a'i^(j(,t7oc, Xenoph. instead 
of Kvia-ovTa, Just as if any body could be ignorant of the marks of this 
great Being, 

When the particle aV, is joined with the? perfect of tlie infinitive 
or of the participle, the phrase partakes of the past and the future, 
after the manner of the future of the subjunctive in Latin ; as kxxoi 
'Srayroc rai/9' vvo ruy ^cif^d^uv oiv sxXuKEvat, Dem. sed omnia hcec a 
harbaris captum iri. Mi^ rolyw, Si av^^E? 'A0wijr.ro/, riroiq «rw y^qt^aot' 
"^Evo/? -av vij.h, cbo^z '^ojs ix^rs y/xsK,. Id, do 7iot, there/ore, O 
Athenians, behave differently towards those, who would use you, if 
they couldt in the same manner. 

Thus what the Latins express by the future of the subjunctive, 
«iay be very aptly rendered in Greek by this particle ; as quare si 
quern etiam horum minorum aliquid o^e7idii,jam ista deseruerit : jam 
cetas omnia, jam dies mitigarit, Cic. pro Ccelio, ti Sn riq r^ruv nvi 
tun IXxrrovuv ccTuxoiarksrociy %on ori riruv aros sk sis fixx^ccv oi(p{ir oiv, 
y^io re -z^avra to rns ■nXninxs r a» kuci x^ovos 'sr^avvxisv. At historia non 
cesserit Grcecis, nee oppojiere Thucydidi Salustium vereor, 

III. *'Av in interrogations* 

"Av is also used in interrogations : cv ya,^ av xdnjiViv kitoT^ffxis : cv 
yx^ oiv zs^ocrtK^oKi ^■^ on -ergo? -cyo/k/v, %XX«. ru^oq ohixy, oVa nlv^vvog 
«sr§o(TEr< ; iEsch. could you make a place revolt f could you have the 
£ourage to approach by yourself, I do not say towards a tQwn. but even 
towards a single house, where there xms any danger f 

3 H Thus 



418 Book VIIL 

Thus when Terence says, sincres vero iu ilium jfacere lidtc 
sinerem ilium ? Adelph. act. 3. sc. 4. it may be thus rendered into 
Greek, crv yoi,^ wv Ixarvov Toy cod tss^io^uviq rxvrl 'zc^^oirrovrx ; 'as^iu^uTit 
av eyw ; 'voould you suffer him to act thus'? I suffer him ? and the rest 
in the same mannei'. 

IV. '^Av expletive, or redundant ; and elliptic, or under- 

stood. 

"Av is an expletive, when it happens to be repeated in the same 

period ; as sTre/ ysvoiASVOV y' av olov Asyo/tASV, ocyocffoia-Qxi rs a,v koc} oikeTv 
^iccy.vCe^vu)VTOi eu^aj/^ovw? o^S'^v cta^ikuiq (jiovov 'ayoXirslcuVf Plato m Poli- 
tic. J^r if a prince voere such as we have described, he would gain the 
love of his subjects^ and might reign peaceably over them, conforming to 
the only true rules ofo government. Uoc^oJv av 7' uiattoImv op^X«<V <7v9sh 
^', ay, Kx ay wAyvva/r 'cjXeov, Soph. for being here with me, 
you are troublesome ; but if you go away, perhaps you will he )fio 
longer so. 

This particle is also sometimes understood. 

XlZs rU rot 'Zff§o(p^ccv sttectiv 'znsiOriroii 'A%a<wy ; Eurip. hoW is it 
possible for any of the GreeUs to submit to you willingly^ for ay ^asta-Qm, 
In like manner, Kal si ixvtye Xshs ^isrvio-sv avrost hoc.) co^^< x^/^a^v 
'sy^ov^u^'/nTs TO zj^ocYf^ci, Lucian, and if Jupiter himself had not inter- 
posed, they would have come to blows; talking of the dispute of the 
three goddesses concerning the golden apple. 

V. Remarkable force of the particle cL^j in abbreviating. 

This particle has a very remarkable force in discourse, inasmuch 
as it includes within itself the signification of a verb understood, 
according toBudseus ; which contributes greatly to conciseness; as 

TocravTYiy I'jioiviaot.vro cr7r«^'^y o<r*jy 'cre^ ;fcy r^s etxvTA/v ^w^a? -zjof SaftEV/j? '. 
that is to say, "Oo-yjv -z^sf oiv I'troirKTxvro, Isocr. they made as much 
hast&f as if the ravages had been committed in their own country. Ao' 
fay jU£v £ya;y ay o-jWy%ci'^oio5y, roc S' trs^ix ruvtiz «x ay Plato in Phile- 
bo, I should be satisfied to yield them the honour ^ but nothing else. *£yw 
jw,£y yu^ 'I'au^ ^iscocroifji.'nv, ytcKi ocKkoq ris uv -^sv^n Aoyoy kx} o-yxoJpairtay,' 
Dem. contra Mid. for very likely I shoidd be able, and so would any 
body else, to refute this untruth, and calumny. 



CHAP. XVI. 

Of some other Particles that are necessary for Con- 
nexion or -Transition in Discourse. 



I. Of those that connect. 



K 



.Ai' has some elegance when it is reduplicated, as where Pho- 

ciori says to Antipater, ov Ivvxa-otl {/.oi kxi ^iXw xxi noXa-yct x^^^' 
9xif you cannot hoM^e me for your friend andfaiterer at the same time, 

. When 



Remarks on the Conne.vions. '419 

When it happens to be alone in the second member, it dimi- 
nishes the first, and is taken for tamen, quanquam, Jievertkeless, 
but, notwithstanding, althoughy &c. As when Epaminondas, at 
the sight of a great army witliout a, commander, cries out, ^Atxov 
^tioiov ! x«< Kz(p(x.xh a>t ix'^iy what a monstrous beast J but it has nexier 
a head. 

In expressing two opposite things, stb^ov is frequently put in the 
first member, and xai in the second, though they are both trans- 
lated by aliud, another thing ; as srs^ov ^e to ocvtbx^'v, xa< x^ursTv, 
Arist. aliud autem est resistere, aliud vin.cere, it is one thing to re- 
rist, and another to overcome. 

When different things are compared by jtaj/, the verb is put in 
the singalar: ^ix<p?^si §e ro ocl'iKvi^a, kxi cLoinov, Arist. and not ^;sx-; 
(pi^aaii injury and injustice are two different things* 

Te and Kotl are joined in such a manner, that rs goes before, but 
at the end of a word ; and x<xl comes after, but precedes another 
word: thus Sophocles, speaking of womao, 

AiS )co(T(JLos (Tiyvi TH, >t«< rci 'ssxvq Inr-n, 
'Whose ornament is silence^ and few words. 

II. Of those that import distbicjipn. 

The most usual are (aev and §e>, examples of which are extremely 
common ; as a w^aVf; k<xi a, 'vy^ocrmsi) >^oyu pcev st-vu^nrih ^c^, E^yw ds 
'sj^oirrEiv, what is honourable and decent shoidd be knoum not only in 
theory, but in practice. 

Those two particles have sometimes the same force with the La- 
tin cum and tum, when some general thing is marked in the first 
member, and afterw^ards something particular, or of greater conse- 
quence in the second ; as tsoXKo, ^/Av eyuye IXotrr^i^xi ycocra. mrovi ro» 
ayuvoc A'ta^Ua ^vo ^' av^^sj ^A^rivocToi, y.ocl ^syaXa, Dem. equideni cum 
JEschine hac in causa multis sum rebus inferior, turn duabus potissimum^ 
mri Athenienses I Usque permagnis. Which may be translated thus, 
it is true jEschines has many advantages of me in this cause, bi^. espe- 
cially in two things, O Athenians, and those of very great consequence. 
Thus when Tully says, in his book of Old Age, sape vero mirari 
soleo cumhoc C, LcbUo, cum ccBterariim rerum tuam excellent em, M. Catol 
perfectamque sapientiam ; turn vel maxime quod senectutem tuam nun- 
quam tibi gravem esse senserim. Perionius shews that this is an 
imitation of Plato, which may be thus translated into c^reek, 
'SJoKXetKis [/.Ev ^7), Ma^xe KoiruVf juero, rsrs Koi'ia AxiXini ^xv^/.a^^eo a-e 
tS TfoTTS, zjoKv §e fAoiKifce,' eda^xvoyiEvos uq. focZlu'; asi to yri^X(; (ps^stcn 
"Where Gaza^ instead of /m,£v ^v, and t?oAy ^s, has put 'zjors ijlsv, and '^jors 
1} Kui i*.a,XiTx, which may be translated thus, / have vet y frequently , 
my dear Cato I admired, together with C. Lcelius, your\excehent and 
consummate wisdom and prudence in most things ; but nothiwj surprises 
9ne more thanyour patience in bearing the inconveniences of old age. 

It often happens that after putting ^£v h in the fitst member, 
they repeat Is several times in those that follow, winch sometimes 
produces a very agreeable gradation. Aim i^h h voij^b te'Ao? hh 
yo^oj §j fi'^xpvTos E^yov, olg^uy ^s s/xwv 0s5 t2 i^dvrx xoafAavro?, Plut, 

^ ' - justic 



420 Book VIII. 

justice, therefore, is the end of the law, as the law is the work of the 
prince y and the 'prince is the image of the Almighty that rules and gor* 
verns all ihings. ' - 

These two particles are oft^i intended to express opposite things, 
and the beauty is, when there is a negation with Se in the second 
member, as in this sentence of Philemon, 

MOVW KXr^U THTO KOlt (JVVYiyO^U 

' E^E~iy aTToy.Tsivstv fxsv, a^TroOvYiCTKEiy §e /x,^. 

Physicians and lawyers only haDe the privilege qf killi?ig people, with-? 
out being put to death Jor it. 

Sometimes after julv they do not put 51, but » /^a^v (^xxa, or «xx4 
.only, taaien, nevertheless, but, notwithstanding. 

Tv^svs rot i^iy.^oq [xlv tw ^s{AXSy aXXa (j(,xy(ytT'/ii, II. g. 
Tydeus was but of a small size, but he was a stout soldier. 

A'?rxvrBS fxsv tiaQcccriv ol tsx^mrts h^dt^s, rxvrx yiiyi^cc (pda-xeiv cTva.i? 
Kixi (/.o(,\i^ai aTfii^Tig a^ix tJ; iroKn, zs^i m oiv ocvroi (jisXXuai a-vfAQuXevsiy, 
« lA,viv ocKX SI Koci -CTE^* a^Wcov nvcov 'CJPay/iAa.rwv ^f/>to^s toixvtx zr^oitirsiVf 
dsxEr yioi 'ST^sTTstv ycxi Tcre^* ruv vvvl 'Tr^ayixocrcov hrsvQsv ZToiviaxa-Qxi rnv 
<^'f%^''> Isocr. de Pace, I am not ignorant that it is generally the custom 
(f' those who appear in this j)lace, to declare that what they have to 
say merits the greatest attention^ as being most conducive to the public 
welfare j but if ever this sort- of exordium was proper upon any other 
occasion, I think it is absolutely necessary upon the present. 

Sometimes in the first member they put to juev, for illud quidem, 
and in the second /x^v instead of 5g, for sed ; as uqrs to /aev oXov xmr<r- 
Bxi ^wov a,Ta,}<.ruis f^r.v awn rv^vi zs^Qiivxt, axi o<,Xoy(^, Plato Tim, itSL 
totum animal movebatur illud quidem, sed immoderate & fortuito, 
Cic. de Universo, insomuch that the whole animal moved intirely, but 
with an irregular and fortuitous motion, 

A£ is also put sometimes for sed, but, without having yAv before 
it. Tlvppos OT^o? Toy v'7ri(7y(v-d[x£vov rx rxKTiKa, ^i^x^eiv, b 5e 'cjx^xrx^zt 
fccfsVoT! ysyovorx, »k t<prt "^iiu^xi airs^icrxXTtiy/crs rfaT'/jyS, a certain 
person promising Pyrrhus to teach him the art of drawing up an army 
in battalia, though he had never seen one drawji up himself, Pyrrhus 
made answer, that he had no occasion for a general that had never 
heard the soitnd of a trumpet, 

III. Of those that are used in transition. 

It is an elegance to commence the period with u pv Iri, atqui si, 
ard in the next member to make s*^£ follow^it, sin, secus ; t\ (/.h ^n 
xxXos l^iv o^s y.ocriJ:.oq, ore ^'/jjjiiiicyoi; xyxQos, oriXov uq zr^oq to x'loioy, 
cwAettev* £; §£, (^'^^^ EiTTarv Tivt ^5/^t<?, 'VJ^oq To ysyovoq, Plato, atqui 

si pulcher est hie rnundus, si probus ejus artifex, profecto speciem 
seternitatis imitari maluit : sin secus, quod ne dictu quidem- fas 
est, generatum exemplum est pro aeterno secutus, Cic. so that, 
if this world be good, and its maker skilful, it is evident that, in 
creating, it, he had before him a model incorruptible and eternal ; hut^ 
if otherwise (which would be blasphemy to affirm) he must havefol' 
towed a created and perishable pattern* 



Rtmarks on the Conm:viom, 421 

"Emi^t siquidem, is generally put with the indicative, to insert 
some little proof, that supports a proposition ; as zjori^ov h o^9uis 
ivcc i^xvov -CT^oEz/ixriKa/zEv, V) tjoXXsq V.OU o'.'TFsl^iS^; Xiyuv m o^^drt^oy : £»«, 
ffiWf^ Kxra, TO cjafaSsiy/xa ^z^n^^tH^yn^ivos iTh P*'(^t'^ if^ limceOy rec- 
. tene igitur unum mundum dixerimus, an sint plures & innumera^ 
biles dictu verius? unus profecto, siquidem factus ad exeraplum, 
Cic. de Universo, 5v^fl// "we then justly say that there is but one voorld, 
or, tviih more reason^ that there are many^ mid even innumerable^ 
undoubtedly one ordy^ since it was created upon this one only model, 

'A^X'^'' y^S ^^ iX7roXXv(/.evy)s, ste ayrij -ctote I^ t5, ' are aAAo l^ 
i-Ktlvvii; yivriaercif I'linq l^ ^?X.^? ^^* 'rot 'Sjavrx yt'yna^xt) IHato Vi 
Phced. nam principium extinctum, nee ipsum ab ^lio renascitur, 
jfiec hi se aliud creabit; siquidem necesse est a principio oriri omnia, 
Cic. Tusc. I'Jor when once the pjinciple is destroyed, it can neither 
he i'eproduced by any thing else, nor can it produce any thing else itself; 
because every thing tnust necessarily take its rise from the principle* 

EiTTEf is frequently put without expressing the verb ; as kWa. r^5 
coiXfriyyos a,Kauv, st'jrs^ oi^x, '!st^iQxi'Jiu<; to iLxrx (Tzxvrov, Lucian, that 
is to say, th^ ^px a>te£<?, but as soon as you hear the sound of the 
trumpet, if perchance you do hear it, then you look about you, &c. 

IV. Of those that are made use of to express a doubt. 

When there happen to be several members of interrogation, the 
Greeks express the first sometimes by -ctote^ov, or wotb^x, sometimes 
by £/, and the last by ^. The first answers to the Latin utrum, and 
die second to their an. 

*AAAa is also put in the beginning, when it serves to form ^n 
objection : but this particle is used likewise in answering. 'AXXa v^ 
oix KXi X^^'^ THTH (TvyyevsTg 'vyoX'Xol kxi y.xXoi }cxyx9oi zsx^x^ocvrB^ xvToy 
l^airriaoyrxi, a\?C iir* s'ktIv ar' lysvovro rsuiitors, Dem. 1. in AristOg, 
hut ivithout this perhaps a great number (>/ brave and honourable rela- 
tions ivdl assist and rescue him : but he has none, nor had he ever any. 
In like manner at is repeated in Latin : at ludos quos Caesaris victo- 
riae Caesar adolescens fecit, curavi : at id ad privatum officium, non 
ad staium reipublicae pertinebat, Mutius Ciceroni. But perhaps it 
ivi/l be objected, that I have had the care oj the public games which 
young Ccssar gave in honour of Julius CcBsarh victory: but that 
regarded, &c. 

*AAAa is never used in interrogations in the middle of a period ; 
on the contrary, *j is never put in the first member. 

'H », y\ (XVI, answer to annon, and nonne in Latin. 

"A^a is also used in interrogations, and is generally. rendered by 
the Latin an. But Tully, in the fifth of the Tusc. has translated 
it likewise by ergo ; because of its being put there to draw a conclu- 
sion. Tov juEv ya.^ x<xXo» y.xi ayaGov oiv^^x xxi yvvxlttx, svoxt/Aovx sivxt 
(^Yi^r TOV ^£ u^iKOv y.(xl -uTovrjPov, a,9\iov. "a6X/o$ a.^x 8To? Iriv o 'A^- 
;^e'>i«o?, yjxroi, tov aov Koyov ; Eiiieo ys, u ^iXe, «S<>co?, Plato in Gorg, 
ita prorsus existimo bonos beatos, improbos miseros. Miser ergo 
Archelaus ? Certe si injustus, Tusc. v. Jbr it is my opinion that the 
just done are happy, and the wicked miserable* According to your 

argument y 



4££ . Book VIII. 

argument, therefore, must Archelaus he deemed miserable? Vn- 
doiihtedly if he be icicked? 

' V. Of those that are used in drawing conclusions, 

Ka< ^rt, quamobrem, quocirca, t\)herejbre, therefore : xut ot) kat^ 
txvra. Kai ri[/.iv XvK.rix [/.h kir^PoTE^a rco ruv otiriuv ysvio, Plato in Tim. 
quocirca nobis- sic cerno esse faciendum, ut de utroque nos qui- 
dem dicamus genere causarum, Cic. de Universo, wherefore, since 
it is so, I think it is Jit ive should treat here of both those sorts of causes. 

"En ^l serves for a connexion to add a fresh proof, after having 
produced already several arguments, and is rendered by jam, jara^ 
vero, prseterea, moreover, besides, likeivise, &c. 'in ll roT^ 'zjaQea-iv 
ay.oXsQyirtnos uv, ^otrxioj^ ccy.ia-BTai ytoti a,vu(ps'Kus, Aristot. 1. de Moribus* 
jamvero, quum, &c. and being moreover a slave to his passions, it 
tdll be of 720 manner of service to him to hear these things. 

VI. Of adversative particles. 

Kat rw is joined either with the subjunctive, or with the opta^ 
tive : v.a.\ Toi t/ ysvoir^ av ncoTE^ov, rt Muks^uv oav)^ k.ixra.(p^ovuiv 'a5>j- 
yxiuv ; Dem. quanquam quid tam novum esse potest, quam Macedo- 
nem quendara esse qui Athenienses despiciat? but tvhat can be more 
surprising, than ta see a Macedoiiian despise the Athenians ^ 

Kxv is put with the subjunctive, and ^s with the indicative : ex- 
amples of which are very common. 

Kathz^ is put sometimes without a verb, along with the participle : 
u^vvxrov Hv Qsijv 'cscj^iaiv (W^rstv, y.oci'nt^ oinv te iWoruv xai avay 
^.ociuv a>7Fohi^sajv Xsyaa-iv, Plato in TimcBo ; where xiyoatv refers to 
^xtaiv, ac difficile factu est a Diis ortis fidem non habere; quan.- 
quam nee argumentis, nee rationibus certis eorum oratio confirme- 
tur, Cic.it is impossible tiot to give credit to those that draw their 
origin forom the Gods, even 'when they do not support their assertion 
hy the strength of argument and reason. 

ANNOTATION. 

I might still enlarge upon the divers properties of particles, 
which may be seen more particularly in Budaeus, towards the end 
of his Commentaries, in H. Stephen's Thesaurus, and in Perionius, 
from whence this chapter is borrowed. But I have been satisfied 
with pointing out what I thought worthy of observation, all the 
rest being very easy. 

WeiMustonly take notice, that these particles being inserted in 
order to connect the members of a period, and to give it difierent 
turns, it is easy to translate them, when once their force is in gene- 
ral well understood : for they may be rendered a thousand ways, 
which cannot be all specified here, nor even in the most copious 
dictionaries, by reason there is nothing more particular in all lan- 
guages, nor more susceptible of a variety of forms in translating.. 

The End of the Eightr Book.- 

BOOK 



[ 423 1 



BOOK IX. 

t 

Of QUANTITY, ACCENTS, DIALECTS, 
and POETIC LICENCES. 



Of the Quantiti^ of Syllables. 

An the present treatise of quantity, we shall only tak^ notrce 
of what the Greeks differ in from the Latins; though we shall 
not omit any tiling that can be esteemed necessary, not only fo? 
the composing of verses, but, moreover, for a thorough knowledge 
of accents, and the exact pronunciation of prose. 

C H A P. I. 

Some General Rules of Quantity. 
I. Obsei^vations Q72 the mutes and liquids, 

1. i\ Mute, joined with the liquids A, f, makes the syllable 
common by position, as in Latin ; and the same effect is produced 
by the following letters, When' joined together in the same syllable 
XV, xr, IA.V, -err. Hence it is, that those verbs which begin with 
these letters thus joined, frequently repeat the first in the redupli- 
cation of the preter-perfect, x=xr»7//*a/. See Book III. Rule vii. 

2. Sometimes a liquid before the mute, renders the syllable 
short, as /iatt, v9, w., vr, or even two liquids, as [x§. 

Tijv {jt.yio(7Xiy <pi\ov TEKVoy, a^vvs ^s ^-niov av^^x. II. 22. 

Horum memento^ chara proles, ^fuga mimicum virum. 

But this does not happen often ; wherefore some read here (pixe 
TExvov, correcting thus all the other editions. 

3. 2 is sometimes cut off, either in the middle, or the end, espe^ 
cially before a mute; in which case it forms no position; as. 



424 Book IX. Of QuAi!fTiTt, 

n? o.'nrtKoiro Kx^t ocKXoq ogr'is roioLura. ys ps^st. 

Sic pereat & alius quicunque talia perpetrat. 

Let all those iJerish thus, that act in the like manner. 

For here a-, which is in the middle of osrsq, slips awaj, withoi;! 
making the syllable long by position. In like manner, at the end 
of -zffoAy^wKof, in Hesiod, x^w^e/ 'TtoKvipmos xo^iiy*?, Arat. crocitat da- 
mosa comix : which Virgil has imitated in his second iBneid : 

Limina tectorum 8^ medii in penetralibus hostem, 

as some read it. See the New Latin .Method, in the treatise o5 
poetry : and Erytreus in the seventh chapter. 

II. Of long or short syllables in general, 

1. The two vowels ?? and u always lengthen a syllable; as, or" 
the contrary, the two short ones s and o always make it short. 

2. All diphthongs are long, except that at the end of word^ 
ui and oi have the same effect as short syllables with regard to the 
accent. 

3. Short finals are sometimes made long, not only by virtue of 
a caesura, which happens also in Latin, but even without a 
caesura. 

4. A liquid following a short vowel, makes it long, even when 
this vowel happens to be in the next word ; as e in w^Xov, I orught ; 
-u in ^oKkx XKr<70(A,h&), 11. 22. nsing many intreaties. 

5. Several monosyllables, though short of their own nature, are 
frequently made long by poetic licence : such as «y, yx^, 71, Sc, y.f, 
X£V, 1/.SV, [Aiv, iry, vvv, GSy z:s^i -CJf/y, /a, te. 

6. The long vowels, and even the diphthongs, may he shortened, 
when they happen to precede another vowel or diphthong, particu-* 
larly at the end of words, because the Greeks are not obliged to- 
make elisions; as in the first Iliad, 

Aiiferatn ; ille autem indignabitur ad quern vehero, 

-Which has been sometimes imitated by the Latins, as we have 
made appear in the Latin Method. 

7. The same happens sometimes, even when the following word 
begins with a consonant ; as, 

'ElM X£y oiicxV 'tKCJjjiOii (piXv)y I; '^xr^idoi yscTxr. OdySS. 2* 

Quod si domum venero, in charam jxt-triam, 

8. The long vowels are frequently shortened before c. 

9. Prepositions that either begin or end with one of tlie thr^e 
common vowels, make this vowel short, either in composition, or 
out of composition ; as It:]. 

10. A. privative is commonly short. - 



c H A p.- 



A before the PenuUima, 4^5 

CHAR IL 
Of the particular Rules of Quantity, 
And first of the three common Voxvels before the Pen" 

ultima. 

X HE particular rules of quantity ought to be considered accord- 
ing to the three common vowels cc, i, v. 

They are very often short or long indifferently in several words, 
which upon that account admit of no difficulty, because they may 
be taken either way. 

General Rule for the three Vowels A, I, T, 

Generally speaking, they are short in all syllables, 
but those which we shall except in the following arti^ 
cles and chapters. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

I. Of A before the penultima, 

1. A is long, when it supplies the place of the augment, as ^Tw 
for rt'ioy-, I did hear^ from aAu, to hear, 

2. A privative, which of itself is short, is sometimes lengthened, 
where there happen to be three short syllables successively; asaxa- 
fAotroiii indefatigable ; d9oivctros, immortal. 

3. A is likewise long before a vowel in the following words ; as'- 
jifltof, alxionys fiu'wing^ for a.tUxosy instead of which they likewise 
use deyvatoSf perennis, eternal : de^ioq, aerius, airy : ae/@aX^?, a/- 
'voays green: "Aove?, A ones : aicrffco^ to rush^ to Jail upon: aik^, an 
impetuous motion : aUtqy from the singular ai|, a violent motion : 
dnaro% (where the middle « is long) xuho does not leave unjmnished $ 
or very prejudicial ; or inviolable, invulnerable : ax^axvrov, imperfect^ 
Mniiseful : ^tiyoitoi;^ a bragger^ a prattler : ^ioi^o(jt,iXt, to use force or vio- 
lence : IXaivo?, oleaginus, made of an olive tree : 10,01^011, to ct/re. 

4. Likewise the derivatives of Aaa?, a stone : >.(xmq, made of stone* 
It is also long before consonants in the following words: 

5. Before y, in ^(p^ocyi^u, sigillo, to seal : vxv»yiu, to he ship- 
wrecked: vAvxyiovf shipwreck, 

6. Before S : ochaus, overcome with grief, for «'/j^t5)ca>?, from an' 
Star, to be tired and heavy, to be uneasy, 

7. Before $, in pcc^vfAos, lazy or negligent : tOxyBvvs, legitimate* ^ 

8. Before x, in anHo-ioq, involuntary : ^i^xovo^, a deacon or mini" 
ster : Xxkbu for T^miu, to resound. 

Likewise in numerals in oa-ios; as Itecnoffto?, r^txxoo-to^, plural 
2fixxo<rtoi, ttvo hundred ; r^iccKoa-ioi, three hundred, and such like. 

9. Before x, (pacXacivy), balaena, a lohale : cicindela, a glom' 
iuorm or gnat: iiAo^oj, non cristatus: »Ao<rvy*7, Nicartd. folly , 
madness, 

SI 10. Be> 



4^6 . Book IX. Of QuANTmr. 

10. Before /x, in (kixYiros, harmst, and a/A>9To?, harvest time. 

1 1 . Before v, in x^av/ov, the sJcull : iJi.xvtH.oqy JiiriouSf mad : avs-^iSfy 
consobrinasy^ fl nephew : Tiravios, belonging or relating to Titan, 

12. Before z*, in ^^x'7rh'/i<;,Jugitive : vxTrsitXy sinapi, mustard, 

13. Before ^, in 0,^x01^x1, to use prayers or imprecations : afu?i^f, 
fl priest, one that prays ; fern. a,^ytru^»i a priestess : Koi§u<^oqf cara- 
bus, a lobster : a/>ca^a>to?, amaracus, marjorum : iJi.x^v6iji.xi for fA»jgu- 
o^i»/, ^0 wind shains : (^Xvx^u, to trifle, 

14. Before <r, in lirx^daiy.QSy execrable : tpAqxcrlxy a good habit of 
body : xo^diriovf a little girl, 

15. Before r, in urs§ogf for ETffoy, alter, another. Likewise 
^dre^Qv for to ste^ov, alterum. 

In the compounds of Xaae^ ; as XxroiA.lx, lapidicina, quarry : T^oc' 
ruVo?, lapicida, a stone-cutter : h'^viixrUost brought to bed qftvoins, 

16. Before ;^ in rfa;^»gor, Jishj taken from r^ax^^? I^"* H'^X'^^9 
rough. 

II. O/* I Je/bre ///e penultima. 

1. I is long before a vowel, in \xoiixtt to heal, to cure : /«T§of, 
a physician : \oi<Ti^Q<;, curable: hryi^, a physician: Iv^a^ te cry out, 
to make a noise : Jyyij, sibilus, whistling: ivyiMSf the same : <<yxf*ojr, 
pursuit of the enemy: riiE^o?, a mountain of Thessalyt Un^lx, Iln^to^, 
Il*sfiSe?, the muses. 

2. In the compounds of toy, poison ; <o^o?toj, venomouSf that casts 
Jbrth poison : Io^bxi^x, quce sagiftis gaudet. 

And in oioiaxi, to think, to judge, 

Hx^lu^is, pursuit ; 'zj^oU^is, pursuit, ^ 

Hixi'yw, to fatten : IxUw, to gladden : ^mostSf snowy : 4>9/«rw, of 

Phtkia. 

It is also long- before consonants in the following words ; as, 

S. Before /3, in xXlCxvrov, Nicand. sale tinctum, dipt in suit, 

4» Before 7, it is almost always long : pycw, rigeo, to be stiff' 

tvith cold,. 

5. Before S, in 'mi^vo/^ to Jlow, to spurt up: Tli^vrvjs, a proper 

Tzawe;' p^sXjSwvy Hesiod, a 5tt>rt//r>u>. 

' 6. Before 3, in <0yvw, dirigOj II. •^. but it is short in Hesiod> as 

also lOvvTu^, a director or governor, and such like. » 

7- Before k, in Utalct, supplication: Ix-hiv;, a suppliant: vtx^u, 

to overcome : ^otvtytmq, aP/icenician : <p^iKx7^i9s and (p^iKu^vji;) dread" 

ful, terrible, 

8. Before X, in "xtuq, favourable, propitious : IXvoetq, limosui^, 
muddy : Ixx^ov, in troops, in crowds : IXxa-^oq, propitiation : /xeA^/Xw- 
Tov, meiilot, a sort of herb : ofAiXxToy, in crowds: oixtXititf to con*' 
verse ; vxiXeu, to heap up, to press upon : (piX'urew, to kiss : ^tXtuu, 
io feed : %tXtx, rx, a thousand: %iXi»<;, alos, a thousandth : "ihiov, 
the city of Iroy. 

9. Before /t*, , in (B^tpbo^, to be angry, to gnash one's teeth, to 
threaten: 'ni.ti^u, to desire : l^t^oztq, desirable : ^i^j^ioyt^xt, to imitate i 

•yifiyi'^/.x, a pattern or model to imitate : (jt.iixyiToq, imitable. Likewise 
.in the compounds and derivativea of. r*^^^ . honour^ rif^ios, honout' 
able i 0'/xw5r>5, made of packthread. 

10. Be- 



I before the Penultima; 427 

I'D. Before V, in all verbs in hsu; as ycivia, to move : x/»y/xi, th^ 
sanie: and in ylvo/xa/, to be, or to be made, to be present: yivuaxu, 
■to knotu : ^mais, a ivhirling, or turning round : ^mst?, tvhirlin^y 
turning round : %vs«?, a mid Jig : Inov, the hirid part of the head: 
siK^oSina, first fruits : zsivwctku, to ndvise, to reclaim a person ; am- 
/*«*, to hurt, to prejudice : ^eXtpUios, taken from laT^cply^ a dolphin : 
kyoiuf to lead, to conduct, 

11. Before ct, in Xivx^bu, to pray, to intreaii /'-Trifw, to Jan : 
^li'mrvii, fallen from heaven, come from Jupiter : vivIttccttsj Odyss. 
20. increpuit, he reprimanded, he chided. 

12. Before ^, always long; as XtiM^oiyi,i<;, a proper iiame, 

13. Before cr, in \ao^xqi^u, to be like, to make like: laxToi, like^ 
equal: ]7a,^u, to render equal : icro^sog, God -like, equal to God: ko- 
yWitXos, the dust that files : fLiaia;, to hate : 2/cry(^?, a proper name: 
(pBia-^vo^, a destroyer of mankind: ctav^jL^^iov, serpyllum, 

14. Before r, in sria, salix, c luillotv tree: anzvij, to nourish: 
Tirv^os, a proper name: T^iruv^is, T^troyev^q, T§iroyimtx^ Minerva: 
(pirvcj, to produce : (pirvij^x^ a plant or root, 

15. Before (p, in S<(f)a«, to search ; ti(p'hru^, one that searches or 
inquires. Likewise in /"(fi/, strongly, with its derivatives and com- 
pounds: ^lipiyivsisi, a proper name : t'<Pioq, strong, robust : j(pUoos, one 
that has a strength of judgment : r^i(pv\xU trifolium, trefoil. 

16. Befoxe ^, in xixotvu, to find: y^'^yugot^ succory : my^ugioVf the 
same. 

III. Of Y before the Ptnultima. ] 

1. Y is long before a vowel in 'EvvaXios, Mars, voaiiike: Kvinoq^ of 
a olueish or ^r ay colour : yLvx^ioya-W-ns, one that begins to have gray 
hairs, an epithet of Neptune: ijlvsKIs, marrotv : (Ava^oq. tkat^ha$ its 
tail cut : fjivo^oKoq, a place of retreat for the mice : -ziyvsXos, a bath : 
'cjvzriviy coagulum, cwds, or any thing coagulated : ts'Ka.mla.tu), to prom 
7iounce ill, opening the mo7dh too wide : Isrog, rain. 

It is also long before consonants in the following words : 

2. Before y, as in the obliques of ^vydrvi^, i^os, a daughter: 
though in the nominative it is frequently short in Homer and 
others : in yLvyxkitit mus araneus, a sort of weasel, whose bite is 
venomous. 

3. Before §, in ytlliy^oq, illustrious-: ycvldhnA-ns, the same, Od. y. 
•Kv^otivu, to render famous : xt/Sow, the same : /xv^aXso?, moist. 

4. Before ^, in l^vOptdu, to blush : s^vB^ximy to make blush : isn- 
Be^uv, Nicander, stink : i^v^ko(i.xty to say, to speak : and its coxa- 
pounds, 'CTa^ajuyfiio/iAa/, to comfort, to encourage: zjx^xiAvOtav, conso- 
lation. 

5. Before x, in l^yxajtew, to detain, to hinder : t^vKxviu, the same, 
Od. y. (jt.vxoio(ji.act, to bellow : iJi.vicvj9fMs, bellowing: ^vx/ov, moss, sea 

froth, paint : <pvx.Uts,full of such froth or moss. 

6. Before X, in ^vXchkIs, a sort of poppy : ^v\xms, a bag : xoy^v* 
7,m, a kind of muscles : yi.v\ioiu,to gnash with ones teeth: cruvKoixat, 
srxuKilu, avKoLUf and a-vXsvu, to plunder: from o-xvXov or avKov, spo- 
lium, spoils: ^(poylvKiov, the chine bone: txajot^, silvius, that pro- 
duces a great deal of ixood: It^kom, Gppian, to bark : vKoiKms 

and 



428 Book IX. Of Quantity. 

and 5x«xtS>jy, names of dogs : IXxKo^u^Qq^ accustomed to barking > 
^vXQiri^y pugna, battle. ^ 

7. Before /yt , in the possessive pronouns of the second person : 
^/AETE^o?, vester, yours. 

And in Svjuoojua/, to be angry^ as well as other derivatives of ^v 
ftof, animus, heart, courage : likewise in hviaxIvu, to Jloat, to swell : 
H^viAij^viq, cold: y.viA.xUuy to hurt, to purify : yi.vy.oUf to reprimand. 

8. Before v, in some compounds of the preposition avv ; as o-t/y- 
i))/!A«, to knoijo, to understand : <rvvs^hf continued : %vvLuy to Join : 
Jl^vveios, a name of Apollo, 

9. Before « in Xpvsofxxi, to be sorrotvful: r^vjrccu, to make a 
hold to pierce through : r§v'jroivov, terebra : Tf y^r^j/^a, a hole, and its 
derivatives. 

10. Before §, in yv^oto, to turn round: xv^io?, master or lord: 
,p.v§ioq, multiplex, manifold, infiriite: iji.v^tx, ten thousand: ^jLv^ocim^ 
lamprey, with its derivatives, and the verbs in v^su: zjXviMfxv^sci/f 
to drown, to overflow: tsX-nyi.i/.v^ix, the ebbing of the sea, waves^ 
inundation. 

In the derivatives o( zjv§,Jire; as zsv^kiaU, a pyramid: Uv^actx' 
/A^j, PyrcBchnes, &c. 

11. Before cr, commonly long in the first syllables; as (xva-m^of, 
abominable: (pva-ola;, to blow. Likewise in some compounds of 
^tJft/, to loose, to deliver : or of Kvanq, loosening, or delivery ; as y.va-t-' 
vrovos, that which frees from pain, which delivers, or comforts : Av- 
<rt^uvos, which loosens the girdle : Xva-ifjisXyts, which loosens or eases the 
limbs : >.v(7i(As^{fji.vo<;, which frees from care. 

12. Before r, in kr^vruvn, an epithet of Minerva : wriu, to cry 
out : pjrdxyioq, sator, one that produces : (pvrtxxlcc, a place planted 
iuith trees, 

13. Before ^, in tiKv^d^cj, to whirl round, to turn round: rv- 
:^09iJt.uif to be proud : rv(po[Axv^g, proud, vain : rv<poyi.oinu, pride, in-* 
solence. 

14. Before ;^, in ^^v^oi/^o^h to gnash with ones teeth ; ^^vy^olofAxi, 
to roar : cr/xu;^o/Aa;, to burn. 

15. T is doubtful in the following words: 'nsv^uvyra, .shining like 
fre : a-p^l^nj, to play upon thefute : (pv^da, to knead : and S-yyarij^, a 
daughter : whose other cases have v long, as we have observed al- 
ready. 



CHAP. III. 

Of tlie three common Vowels of the Penultima. 

I. Of A penuUima, 



1. A Is 



long before a vowel, in Wf, levir, a brother-in-law.: 
locuvf genitive plural bonorum: yi^tixq, the head: X«iy|, a pebble : 
®oiUi Aai"?, NaJ"?, UroXiyxls, proper names : Avx»«v, Mxx»<»ih Xa^yy, 
.and such like proper names; TlovMm, Neptune; ^xiL^Pakt rC' 
splendent of all sides^ 

^ % In 



Of A Pe7iultima. 429 

2. In appellatives in «of ; as ^ao?, the people : and its derivatives; 
)f«o?, a temple ; vsxlsi affinis, a relation, 

3. In the compounds of oiu, spiro ; as ^a^y, bloxving 'violently ; 
xXix^s, bloiuing upon the sea, 

4. In the compound of xt^du, to mix ; as i yx^a^j, C77?e that is of 
a good temper or constitution, 

5. Likewise in those of «i'^, violence or impetuosity, or of ataa-u, 
to rush upon ; as ^ro^yai'l, violent, impetuous. 

.6. In verbs in a<y, when there precedes an « or a § ; as Idu, to 
siiffer, to permit ; z;t^oiu, to go through. 

7. In the iEolic genitives in ao, and in awy; as Almxof jEnece ; 
AmxA/y, ^nearum, 

8. As often as the Doric x comes from u ; as ayoiyu^, for uymu^ 
strong, stout, proud, 

A is likewise long. 

9. Before y, in aay^?, that cannot be brohe ; Sayu?, crystal, ice ; 
5yo-<jrf ay^?, utifbrtunate ; cr(p^xyk> a seal ; rayo?, dux, a captain, 

10. Before 5, in Ittalli, a lacquey; a-'jTsi^i^, termes, the branch 
together with the fruit, 

11. Before x, in a,Km, for o^kIuv, invitus, unwilling ; x^dycuv, be- 
tween white and yellow, 

12. Before A, in k^xKv}, manipulus, a sheaj'; xaXo?, handsome ; 
Jdj^o?, a torch ; ^OiA.<pciXyi, a proper name ; r^/xE^aXo?, triceps, three- 
headed, 

13. Before (a, m ^vixixfjLx, thymiama, perfume: uK^oaiAx, acro- 
Stma, music ; and such like verbals in a pure. 

M. Bi^tore v, in e^ayo?, a fhast wherein each person brings his 
portion ; ikocvu, to come; xixf^vu, to overtake; (pQuvu, to prevent. 
Likewise in dissyllables in avo?i Savo?, dry; r^stvlq, open, plain, 
manifest. The gentiles in xvo<;'. rff/xavo?, B^fixavo?, and their ferai- 
ninesB^sraviV: those that have more than three syllables, 'lttXi«»o?, 
except 'a>c£ftvo?, the Ocean, Likewise those in a.vuf^, ayavwf, brave, 
valiant; Btdyu^, a proper name. 

15. Before ct, in "Evocrros, the name of a river: 'lairwl, the name 
of a xvind : n^ ia-^ro?, a proper name ; and Attic aVas and av»v, 
all, which are short Ionic. 

16. Before ^, in ^v^x^v)^, pleasant, agreeable; xafu, squilla, a 
sort qfjish ; xccrx^x, imprecation ; ^oi§oc§os, vain, useless ; rta^x, (t 
tiara. And the masculine dissyllables in a^o^; as Aafo?, larus, a 
sea bird : likewise polysyllables ; as jswo-ago?, detestable, 

17. Before 3-, in the penultima of the future of verbs in atj, or 
foiu ; as ccx^9u(Tw, I will hear ; 'cjziexcrco, I will try. 

18. In wgao-/?, a sale; <poi<rt%, mma, fame, for which reason they 
are circumflexed. 

19. In the feminine participle of the first aorist ; as rv^atffix, 
quce verberavit, 

20. In the dative plural, where the penultima of the dative sin- 
gular is long by position : rv4^cca-i, with the penultima long, be- 
cause of its being long in rv4yotvri. In the same manner i'Kyi.KTt, 
the plural long, by reason of the singular tXx*<>9/, taken from eA/x/k?, 
lumbricus, a xvorm, 

21. Be- 



430 Book IX. (y Quantity " 

21. Before 7, in oixrosf hurtful; ouk^oltos) merum, pure^ or wn- 
mixed tvine ; kv'uztos, incurable ; ci^Xotros, very large ; amoL^a.rasy 
execrable; '^mrls, msible ; o^aroj, the same , ao^aros, invisible ; W- 
iri§xro<;^ difficult to pass through ; 'tocr^os, a physician ; Ktxl^atros, the 
name of a river ; a^xry)^, crater, a bowl; (p^xr^^ and (p^xTu^.qfthe 
same tribe. 

In the names of precious stones : ap^aT»)?, an agate ; yayar^js-. 
In gentiles in aT»3?, whose feminines are in otTis ; as 27rje^T;aT«5, 
a Spartan f &c. Except TaXar^y, Ax}^iJi.a>r'/)Sf S/x^juaTjj?, Xav^o- 

22. Before ;^, in <a;){^&/, to make a noise, with its derivatives ; 
'*'?«%«?> rough, with its compounds. 

23. It is common in some others; as a^^, aer, the air ; a.u^, a 
sword; lavw, a fine dress; af/?, one that is without a nose ; Ixy^jh, 
a noise. 

II. Oflpeiiultima. 

1. I is long before a vowel in the Ionic feminines ; as avW) for 
awa, sadness ; and such like. 

2. In a.viw, to be sad ; and its derivatives. 

3. In «<)c/a, and uIkIvi, a wound ; aoviatf dust ; xaA/a, a nest ; 
Xtay, valde, "a great deal; o^jjlIx, a fishing-rod; except when they 
are shortened by licence. 

4. Qfov, a cable ; ivy'^, motacilla ; 'ssl-n^ or -KTw/f , pinguis ; xluv, 
a jnllar ; 'aim, fiat ; 'cj^luv, serra, a saw. 

5. In (pQlu, to corrupt ; x^lu, to anoint ; zu^iu, to saw. 

6. In the greatest part of the comparatives in luv ; as BtXrluv, 
better: but their neuter is oftener s^hort. 

7. In dissyllables in ;o?, that are acuted on the last : xf iw, aries, 
a rmn : ilq, poison, an arrow : but "os, unus, is short. 

Before consonants it is also long in these words ; viz. 

8. Before /3, ^ a)c§i^'i?, diligent, exacts with its derivatives ; 
Igva-lCv), mildew or blasting ; ^x/Cw, to press, to crush ; i'^<?, a hind 
of bird ; ^i^v), pruma, hoar Jrost, 

9. Before y, in isvTyQSi choaking ; pTyost excess of cold; ay^y 
silence. 

10. Before 5, in slxt^ov, convolution ; xvihi nettle ; vjQx^, a fioun- 
lain ; yzKitm, a swallow ; %7ii5^, softness, voluptuousness. 

11. Before ^, in /S^iQw, to be heavy ov sleepy ; ^fiQo<;, heaviness; 
l^i^vs, heavy ; z^i^os, a wool-carder, a servafit-maid, a labourer, or 
ivof'ker at the harvest; l^iOsvg, the same; i9vs, rectus, straight ; 
>tf <0i9, barley ; 'Zi&uv, a mountain of Thracia. 

12. Before ;c, in x/xu?, vis, robur, strength ; aancvs, weak ; vUft, 
luctory ; ^ornKV), Phoenicia ; (pt^Kv, dread or fiear, the roaring of the 
sea, the shaking with an ague, or through cold. 

13. Before A, in a^ytXoq, white clay: ixW, mud; xov/^u, cunila, 
a hind of herb ; vsoyiKos or vjoy/X^s, new-born ; o^tXos, a crowd or 
multitude ; 'ai'^iKov, a cord to bind the fieet with ; <cj'iXo<;, a hat, an 
arrow, a club; cia'iKu^, taxus, a yevi tree ; cyJiX-n, a penknifie, a 
shoemaker^s cutting-knife; ottTKo^j a spot ; -^tKls^ thin, slender ; x'^^^> 
l^obuhm^fioodffiorage. 

l^. Be- 



Of I PenuUima. 431, 

14. Before ju,-, in ^^iixn^Jorce ; B^t^w, Proserpine ; '/(p9i}Aos, hrave, 
stout ; xhifjiit^, a ladder ; Xi/Ao?, hunger, famine ; ^r/xo?, a buffoon ; 
9-iiMi, fiat-nosed ; (piiJMs, corn, packthread, a halter ; t/jw.^^ honour ; 
ur I {Aosy one that is not honoured : and in compounds terminating in 
i^Aoq ; as iipQifjLos, brave, valiant, 

15. Before v, in yv^mq, a kind of frog; l§<vo?, a 'mild fig-tree ; 
^xiAivos, thick, frequent ; r^iya^, sen ^^tya|, a sort of three-cornered 
sieve ; ^^i^xKm, tmld lettuce ; nXlvn, a bed ; ptvU, skin / y^^oiXivls, a 
bridle; Kocfxac^ivx, a pestilential lake in Sicily; xa/Ai»o?, a furnace ; 
ceXtvov, parsley, and several others terminating in ivoq, or wv. 

We must except, 1. nouns of matter; as ^^vivos, oak, whose 
feminines hovrever make the penultiraa long; as jmo^vCStv*?, made 
of lead, 2. Trissyllables in *»>», whose first is long ; as a^lvv, a 
hatchet ; ^utUv, a gift ; Ix^lvvi, the name of an herb \ vcriA.ivn, a fight, 
3. These two dissyllables, plvvi, a file ; llm, voHex, 

But it is also long in verbs in /vw or m^j^oii; as -aKUu, to incline; 
y^Uu, to judge ; ymfAoti, to be, to be made, 

16. Before 'a, in y^iTrevq, piscator, a fisherman ; 'Ev^i'ttos, Euri' 
pus ; hiiru, to give impertinent language ; Iv/tt^, injurious language; 

fi'nyi, the shooting of an arroxv ; Kvt%o<;, a niggardly fellcw ; <niivu)>, 
or nK'^'Trm, scipio, a staff* 

Before ^ it is short, conforming thus to the general rule ; ho?v- 
ever ""i^os, Irus, and j^os-, holy, are excepted. It is also short befoFC 
<r, except ^Ay^iavis, B^ktevi;, names of men, 

17. Before r, in uxovtroy, wolf's-bane, a kind of herb ; xXirlf, the 
descent of a mountain ; TJrov, a ragged shirt ; Xitos, simple, mean ; 
elriros, despised, unpunished; a7ros, frumentum, tvheat ; T<ray, T^/- 
ruv, Tlipug, proper names ; (plrvq, a father ; (p^lrru, to fret, to fumCy 
to make a noise. Likewise in nouns ending in irn, "irmsy Tt/?; as 
'A9fo5/r»3, Venus ; otrXirmj armed ; onrts, a sort of herb. We must 
however except x^ /t^?, a judge, and such like nouns formed from 
verbs that shorten the penultima of the perfect. 

18. Before (p, in y^'i'Poq, o, a net; I,i^i(pos, an island; T(p/, 'oehe- 
mently, with its derivatives and compounds; r^osy a squadron^; 
c-(<pmf a pipe, 

19. Nouns called barytons, viz. that are not accented on the last 
syllable, whether they be dissyllables or not, have also the penultinaa 
long, except xx^kUo^, a crab or lobster, and zuUqs, nastiness, 

20. I is common in m, I'ov, <s/yj u, Ui, wjwev, and such like, 
with their compounds. 

Likewise in xlav, much, a great deal; I'iu, I think, I judge', ria, 
to honour, to punish ; ^1«, / have been ; lilioqy calm, serene ; vvtvhos, 
exposed to the air; hi'jri, a reprimand; Witru, to give injurious 
language-; Jaos, equal; vitpw, to snoiv ; l^iiiru, to evert, to destroy ; 
/^.£(T*Ti55, a mediator ; ^Ci^iwv, a constellation* 

in. Of T penultima. 

,, 1, It is long before a vowel, in 'Evow, Bellona, the goddess of 
ipar ; ©y'aj, a Bacchanalian ; y^vu, to shut, to hide, to ivink ; ^vuf, 
a mu-sculous part of the body ; ^i\ju'\'^ an ox fiy, or gad-bee; nvoy, 
snot ; vcof to rain. 

Like- 



432 Book IX. (y Quantity. 

Likewise in the greatest part of the verbs in Ja;, when it hap- 
pens to be preceded, either by two consonants, or by a syllable 
long by nature ; as xbIvu, to spit ; ^vwy to shape^ to scrapCy to smooth ; 
'SSQiTFYvu, to be busy; l^^iaiy to fix ^ to establish; u§vo(A.xii to hord, to 
crif out ; except some that have the v doubtful, as we shall take 
notice of hereafter. 

Before consonants it is also long in some words ; as, 

2. Before /3, in y^o?, for y.y^os-, crooked, 

3. Before y, in ai/.ot^vy^y brightness ; Vvy^, tvhistUngf noise ; oXo- 
"Kvyuv and oXo^^vyv, holding ; -avyriy clunes, the buttocks ; rqvyijif ovo?, 
»5, a turtle dove. 

4. Before S, in "aQvIos, Abydus ; ^or^v^ov, in clusters ; Ifiwlva, 
famous ; and other compounds of xuJo?, glory, 

5. Before ^, in ;3udw, depth, or hollow ; iA.vQo<;y a Jkble, or dis* 
course ; cifivOoif 'voifhout fiction ; ^CSo^, beer ; 'csvQu, to rot ; -c/ySw, cor- 
ruption, siiiik, 

6. Before x, in ^^yxo«, a lieraldy a crier ; /SfJxo^, to eat, to stL-al- 
low ; avKv, ficus, a fig-tree ; avxov, iicus, a fig ; <Pvicisy a kind offish : 
<PvKQSf alga, sea weed ; l^vxu, arceo, to drive away, to hinder, 

7. Before x, in ciavXov, a place of refuge ; xAxac, a sort of in- 
strument for building of ships ; <pvKn, tribe, race, ov family ; (pZXor, 
the same; v\yi, a wood or forest; ^vXa^, a guardian ; ^vxis, juice ; 
apav^vXvi and a-iroy'^vXn, a kind of root or insect, 

8. Before jw,, in ^y/xo?, mind, courage; with its compounds; 
as Wfo^y^uo?, 7'eady ; ixv(A.6u)f to blame, to reprimand ; «/xy/*»», blame- 
less. 

Likewise in verbals in vfAoc ; as ^vixec, victim, sacrifice ; xZ/jusf, 
waves, storm ; a^ry/^a, seasoning ; ihvixx, the handle, or the middle 
part of the plow; <plrviA.x, fruit, plant ; yi.vvyi.x or (/lvviviau, mark, or 
token. 

In most of the verbs in v(jli ; as ^svyvvfjn, to join. 

In the oblique cases and plural number of the pronouns of the 
second person; as yp«?, y/Awy, viaTv, viJiuq, vos, vestrum, vobis, 
vos. 

9. Before y, in rvvv). Dor. for cry, tu ; Aixrwx, Diana ; ^tvos, 
Hesych. impetus, a violent motion; a,nvQvvog, accountable to nobody ; 
x/»Syiro£, danger ; o^xuvo?, the name of a fish ; |yvo?, common, and 
such like compounds of o-yy; yvm, a woman, with its compounds; 
p^»jj, pretext, excuse, Odj'ss. <p, 

10. Before zr, in y^viros, hooked; "klifri, sadness ; votii'ifH';, broad" 
footed, 

11. Before §, in nyxv^x, anchor, or the name of a town; aXtfjuj" 
f^f, salt^ beaten by the sea, or falling into the sea with noise ; yi^v^at, 
a bridge ; yZ^, acirde; %w^, a sort of instrument ; xS^oj, autho" 
rity ; \v.(pv^a., spoils, or booty ; Ixv^oi, a sort, of grain ; hor^v^os, a 
sort of herb ; 'sraTrv^of, the tree or plant, of which paper was made; 
zjirv^ov, bran ; crX^j/xfty^ <?, the ebbing of the sea ; ziv^os, wheat i 
ffi^ty^i afiute ; atpi^ay a hammer ; rv^lq, cheese. 

In a word, all the nouns in v^os, that have a long syllable be- 
fore the penultiraa, whether by position, or by nature ; as ^i^v^h, 
miserable ; Ij-)(v^o<;, strong, 

€ In 



Of X Penultima. 433 

in all verbs in t^w: as <Pvp»t tomixyjo knead; erlpu, io drag, to 
dfraw, 

12. Before a- it is almost always long, excepting verbals in o<r/?, 
which have it short ; as Xya/?, loosening ; (piiris, nature ; yitjiq^ fu- 
e'lo, infusion, 'pouring out ; and such like. 

13. Before t it is long in verbals in yr>j$, ur^f, and ur/?; as 
p^tiivr^q, an informer ; (/.mwl^p, the same ; -crfrtrC^T/?, an old woman, 
Likewise in a^oin^t/rog, not cri^d for^ not icept for ; avrr,y a noise ; 
(SyKvroiy tempus vespertinum, the evening ; yu^vroc, a quiver; Kw 
xt'Tof, Cocytus, a river df hell; ?^vrw^f solutor, a deliverer; {xvvu' 
TA;f, an adviser; puru^, a deliverer; pvr^j ruta, rwe, a hind of 
herb; pvro?, dratvn ; crKvroqf s/cin, 

14. Before (p in^ xsAy^o?, the bark, or ri7id, the shell ; xy^o?, 
crooked; Kv(pijv, a sort of punishment ; ^v(pu, astringo, to squeeze, io 
press, to Lind foast ; rv^c^, to burn, to smoak : r^i?*?, tow; ry^o?, 
smoak, pride, arrogance, 

15. Before %> ^^ ^V«'4'^%of> vitalis, vital; roi^tapZ'/p';, which 
batters the walls ; rviJi.Qaevxo<;, a robber of sepulchres : and in all the 
verbs in t/;^ai? ; asr^y;)^w, attero, #o break, to spoil ; ^^vy^oj, frendeo, 
Btrideo, to fume, to gnash with one's teeth : and in /3^y%^, stridor, 
noise ; -^vyvty the soul ; Tjy;^oj, a carvi7ig tool ; l§t^fv^''i<;, one that 
makes a great noise, 

16. It is common in l^iaui to d7'aw back, to hinder ; vww/^of, m»- 
Anown ; v^w§, aqua ; and in the greatest part of verbs in vV. 



CHAP. IV, 

Of the three common vowels at the end of words. 
Of hJinaL 

l.XT is long in the ferainines taken from the masculine in o?; as 
oixsilx, just, from ^Uaios; dytXf holy; w^xa^a, ancient; o'lMixt 
domestic; (7tlYtpl(x,,qfiron; nocOx^oi, pure. 

The following three poetics are excepted: ^orvix, venerable; 
^sTTitpx, ripe i l7x, divine ; which their accent shows. 

2. In all nouns in »«; as qnxix, friendship; ao'^lx, wisdom; 
hTnOvfAix, desire, cupidity; I Matrix, power ; •^ysfjt^ovt'x, government ; 
'tTOpix, history; 'csznx, poverty; K.xu'tix^oki'x, Cappadocia ; TxXx' 
fix, Galatia. 

3. In nouns in sia:, proceeding from verbs in £«&;; as ^xaiT^sIx, 
kingdom, reign, royal power, from ^aaiXcvv, to reign ; §«AEt«, servi- 
tude, from ^iiXsvu. But the others in zix are short ; as ^aaihsix, a 
queen, taken from 0x(Tt>.svc, a king; kK-h^ux, truth, coming from 
^?.'/99*)?, true ; likewise ^AU^dvl^nx, Alexandria, and the rest. 

4. In those in Ix, ^x, ^x ; as Aij^a, a proper name ; Mxp^oi. 
Martha ; w/^px, the day ; yupx, a place or country ; x^f*,. joy- 

3 K v^. In 



134 Book IX. Of Quantitt. 

5. In those preceded by two consonants ; as ay^a, booty or spoiU '> 
icsir^x, a rock, 

6. In several nouns in »ioif of two or more syllables; as ctXy." 
vxiXf the moon ; Mxlxf the mother of Mercury ; 'AOmxixt Minerva j 
which appears always by the accent,; for if a final was shorty 
the penultima, as we shall show hereafter, would be circumflexed. 

7. In the vocatives of proper names in a? of the parisyllabic de- 
clension ; as Aivsix. But the vocative of nouns in ^g is short ; as 
o z3(o<p'htYi<;i ct prophet y w ^fotp'^rx,- 

8. In the vocatives also of proper names imparisyllabic; as ITaA-; 
A«, Pallas, But in appellatives the vocative is short. 

9. In the dual of parisyllabics that follow the feminine; as 
-rot (A^ffx, ttoo muses ; rw Amix^ two ^neas*s, &c. 

10. Av final is long in imparisyllabic masculines acuted; as 
T<my, Uxixvi Tlxv. But the compounds of this last are short ; as 
o-iZ/A'arav, all, 

11. In XixVf valde, very muck; Evxv, Evan, an exclamation of 
joy. 

12. In the accusative singular of parisyllabic masculines; as A#- 
vE/'ijtv, JEneam. But the feminines are short ; as ^ji-Sa-av, musarri', 
Wherein it always conforms to the quantity of the nominative, 

13. In monosyllables in x^; as ko-^, caput, the head; -J/af, a 
starling. But the conjunction ya^^ is short, and generally all other 
words terminating in xp, except the masculines and feminines. 
For, according to Neander, all nouns of those two genders that 
^nd in a liquid, make the last syllable long, except ft»x«f, happy, 
and IxyiXfy uxor, a ijoife. 

14-. In the masculines in us, that are not accented on the last ; as 
AUsixq, Mneas ; as also 7r«?, all, and its compounds. 

Except iA,iyxq, great, and Xxx<;, a stone. Likewise nouns de- 
rived from Kc^xnvuf ; as xpxs, the head, the Jlesh; j/lzT^ix^xs, hippo^ 
eras, a sort of compounded wine. 

15. The nominative and genitive singular of parisyllabic nouns 
in «?, together with the accusative plural, as well of the said nouns, 
as of those in «, have a long ; as o nv9x'yo§x<;, t» UvQxyo^x, ras 
TlvQxyo^xs; t5 Atnix for A/v£t« ; r^s niJi^i^xq, diet, and ret? '^i^i^xf^ 
dies, the days; rvis n^xs for riyi.vis, honoris, and rxs rtyi.xs, hono' 
res: though sometimes we find these accusatives shortened by 
licence. The poets likewise frequently shorten the accusatives 
of the pronouns ^/ae'iz?, nos ; and v[xsx5, vos, 

16. The masculine participles in xs are long, whence x continues 
long in the penultima of the feminines, as we have observed 
above: ryvj/ar, xa-x, qui and quae verberavit ; tVa?, stans ; <rxi, 
qui stetit ; 'jroiYicrxq, qui fecit. But their neuter in «y makes the last 
short ; as f/XSo-av, &c. 

Of I JinaL 

1. I is long in the names of the letters I?, 4/?, ^r, «ir. 

2. In the demonstrative additions of the Attics : t«t/, this ; Itv 
f /, here ; wi^, nunc, nox^ ; ^roa-if this here, 

3. In 



Of r Final 435 

3. In dissyllables acuted : uny^U, a hoot or stocUn'g; a-^^xyi^, a 
seal: likewise r^oiliurK;^ a xooman that bears arms, 

3, In nouns of a double termination : ooxitg, a>cl/v, the siin^heam ; 
^X(pis, hxiplv, a dolphin ; fiy, pU^ nans, the nostril. 

5, In the obliques of nouns in ts or tv, ms, either of the fore- 
going nouns, as piv, pmq ; or of others, as kU) y-ios, a small laorm s 
except risy quis. 

Of r final. 

1. It is long in the names of the letters, fiv, vv, 

2. In Ty, for av, tu, thou. 

3. In adverbs in v ; as y^dx^v, among / fA£a<T>5yy, in the middle $ 
except avl/x^u, on the contrary^ opposite^ which is common. 

4. In the imperfect and aorist of verbs in />t< ; as l^siKwy, / did 
.^hoiXA 

5. In nouns of a double termination : as ^o^kv?, and (popKWt a 
sea-god. 

6. In the accusative of nouns that have the nominative long, 
ihose two cases being always equal with regard to the quantity 
of the last syllable ; as i^v, a mouse ; ]Xvv,mudj. 

7. In the nouns in f^, -nri!^, ignis, Jire ; /^ct^ry^, a martyr, a 
tvitness. 

8. In monosyllables in vs ; as (jun;, a ?nouse ; avq, a hog. 

9. In substantives which, having the final acuted or circumflex^d, 
are declined in o; pure; as a^Xvi, (^fog; <Aw, mud; TvtQvs, Te* 
jthys, a proper name; oV^yf, misery; o^§v^, the eye^-brotv; wj^v?, 
the belly. 



CHAP. V. 

Two Observations coneerning the Quantity of Nouns 
and Verbs. 

jL hough what has been hitherto said may suffice, in regard to 
the quantity of nouns and verbs, as well as to every thing else, yet 
we shall adjoin here two observations, in order to give still a more 
particular knowledge thereof. 

I. Of the oblique cases of nouns 

1. The article makes a, long in the feminine of the dual, and in 
the accusative plural of the feminine, rv., ra?. 

2. The genitive singular and the accusative plural of parisylla- 
bics have a, long : t??? ocKm^iixs, of the truth ; rots uXn^ilots, the 
truths. 

3. The final quantity of the nominative is retained in the oblique 
cases of nouns that increase ; as q)o^\Lvv, (po^nwo^y a sea-god. 

We must, except, first, the nouns in v§, which have v short in 
the obliques, contrary to the nature of the nominative; as 'sjv^ 



436 Of Nouns and Verbs. 

cjy^w, jirc ; ■y.a.^rv^y f/,»f Tf^o?, a martyr, a wkness. To vvhieh we 
must join o aX?, aXw, salt. Secondly, Dissyllabic ferninines in ts, 
that have the penuitiraa long by nature, and are declined in ^oy, 
have the penultima of the other cases long; as jcv>9/x4?, T^?, iooi*, 
stockings. Likewise polysyllables compounded of three short ones ; 
as T7XQ3ta/:A»V» ^^of, ci tuft of hair. 

4. Likewise those that form the genitive in 6oj; as o^v/?, ;5^, a 
bird or fowl : except xo^y?> vQ^, an helmet, and those that have 
the nominative terminated in ps; as Ix^y^) « fsh; 'tsviXpeiAv^, t>'^^, 
pelamys, a kind offish. 

5. When a doubtful vowel before 4/ or | in the nominative, is 
fcliort thete by nature, it is made long in the obliques ; as (poTvi^^ 
4K0S, a palm-tree, or a phoenix ; rsrlt^, tyos, a grass-hopper ; ^a|, 
^xy^s, a grape-stone ; y^v-^, vnls, a griffin; xokkv^, vyos, a cuchoo $ 
K.*i^v%, fx©', a herald or crier. 

On the contrary, Koc'^Kx-^^ has » long in the nominative, and 
short in the obliques ; as also uvXoc^y axo?, a ridge of land. 

II, Of "verbs, 

1. The quantity «f the penultima of each tense of the verbs in 
<v, continues in all the other derivative tenses. 

Except the second future, and second aorist, which have the pe- 
nultima short ; as y^lvu, to judge, second future x^^vaJ, second aorist 
^f/»a» ; iJ/aXXw, to sing, -vJ/aXiD, s'xj/aXov. \ 

2. A, /, y, in the penultima of the future of verbs in 6i.a, (ca, 
vuf are long; as aKpooieru, I mil hear; y.vxlc7u, I mil roll; xa^ 
hvcru, I xjoill hinder ; Xva-u, I will untie : though sometimes we find 
them short by licence. 

S. The penultima is also long in sK^ivXf I have judged ; riti/p^f 
I have beaten ; and trccKoc, I have stood. 

But the Attics shorten the penultima; as lA/jAvOaf, the perfect 
middle of IXevOa or t^ypixxi, to come. 

4. Verbs in v^i have v long in the singular of the present and 
imperfect of the indicative active: but in the plural of the sai^ 
tenses it is short ; as likewise through all the passive. 



THE 



( 437 3 



THE 



SECOND PART of this BOOK, 
Of the GREEK ACCENTS. 

caAP. VI. 

Of the Nature and Dwision of Accents^ of their general 
Analogy^ and that they are not to he confounded xvitk 
Qiuantity, 

jrm.CCENTS are nothing else but certain small marks, which 
have been introduced into discourse to fix the pronunciation, and 
render it easy to strangers. Hence the ancient Greeks, to whom 
this pronunciation was natural, never used such marks, as is de- 
monsiraled from Aristotle, from inscriptions, and ancient medals. 
It is not easy to determine the time, when they were first used: 
probably not till after the Romans began to be more curious of 
learning the Greek tongue, and to send their children to study at 
Athens, that is, a little before Cicero's time. 

I. Three sorts of accents. 

The inflections of the voice may be all reduced to three sorts, 
according to what we have observed in our Latin Method : hence 
the Greeks, as well as the Latins, had only three kinds of accents, 
viz. the acute, which raises the voice ; the grave, which depresses 
it : and the circumflex compounded of both, which denotes the 
elevation and depression of the voice in the same sj^lable. This we 
have already touched upon, Book I. Chap. viii. and shall now ex- 
plain more largely, so as to render all the rules, which are delivered 
upon this subject, more intelligible, and at the same time more 
easy to be remembered. 

All words ought naturally to have an acute, because it is almost 
impossible to pronounce any word, without giving it some ele- 
vation. But because the voice being once raised, must neces- 
sarily sink again, this sinking may be upon the same syllable, or 
upon the following : if it be upon the same syllable, thence arises 
a circumflex ; but if it be upon the following syllables, they have no 
accent marked ; but a grave is understood, whence they are all 
called barytons. 
^ The grave therefore is not properly an accent, but a privation or 
sinking of the accent. For which reason it is never marked but 
in the middle of a period, and at the end of words, which should 
naturally have an acute, to show, that those words do uot entirely 

raise 



438 Book IX. Of Accents, 

raise the final syllable, but only sustain it a little : sustain it, I say, 
because it is natiiral to the voice ever to sustain some particular syl- 
lable in each word, otherwise it would sink too much : nor do they 
raise it intirely, because this elevation would seem to bear so far 
upon the subsequent word, as to draw it to itself, which can only 
happen to the enclitics: therefore, as we shall see hereafter, the 
acute accent is not displaced^ nor changed into a grave, when it is 
{followed by an enclitic, 

II. Their general analog^/. 

Now it is the nature of the ear, says Cicero, never to judge of 
ihe accents of words, but by the three last syllables, no more than 
of the final cadence of a period, but by the three last words. Hence 
the accent, whether in Greek or Latin, is never drawn back farther 
than the antepenultima,. And if the modern Greeks sometirafa 
remove it to the pre-antepenultima, that is, the fourth syllable frorh 
the last, this is only a consequence of barbarism, which has cot-p 
rupted all that was most beautiful in their language, and most har- 
ioaonious in their ancient pronunciation. 

The accent therefore, after its elevation, cannot have more than 
fcwo syllables to follow it, which will include two or at most thre^ 
times or measures, but never four, that is, after the accent there are 
never two long syllables. Insomuch, that if the two last be short, 
the accent may witliout any difficulty be upon the antepenultima in 
Greek, as it is always in Latin ; as *'Ay/©^, Dominus, &c. But if 
the two last are long, the accent can never be drawn back further 
than the penultima, both in Greek and Latin ; as avS^ w7r«?, formo^ 
soSf &c» And if the penultima should happen to be long, and the 
last short, a circumflex accent maybe upon this penultima, either in 
Greek or Latin ; asjbrmosus, o-wiax. In all which instances there are 
no more than two times of sinking the voice after the accent, 
and never more than two syllables, either in Greek or Latin. 

But there is still this difference between the Greeks and the La^ 
tins, that out of the three measures of sinking, which may foUov^ 
the accent, the Greeks do not permit there should be two on the 
last syllable, though they allow them on the penultima; as »y- 
fi^wTT©-. On the contrary, the Latins do not allow, that two of 
these times or measures should be upon the penultima which fol- 
lows the accent, though they suffer them to be upon the last ; as 
JDominos. ■ Whence it is said, that the Greeks regulate their accent 
by the ultima, and the Latins by the penultima. Wherein, I think, 
the rule of the latter is much easier than that of the Greeks, be- 
cause, although the last happens to be frequently changed, either in 
declining or conjugating, their accent, nevertheless, generally re- 
mains unvaried (unless it be in the increase of words) being the 
same in Dominiis, for instance, v^s'mDominos, Whereas the Greeks are 
frequently obliged to change, as in oiv^^wno^, ocvQ^uvs, and the like. 

Hence also it proceeds, that the circumflex is never thrown 
further back than the penultima ; because this accent including in 
itself the elevation and sinking of the voice, marks already one . 
measure of giuking on the very syllabk; on which it is founded ; 

inso- 



Analogy of Accents, 439 

Insomuch, that if there were yet two syllables following it, it would 
seem as if we sunk the voice tJiree times after the accent. For er^iASi 
being as if it were <7oo/x«, consequently, if one was to say crol/xa'Jof, 
this would sound like croo/A«]oy, and as if an acute was placed on 
the pre-antepenultima, which cannot be. Therefore in such cases 
the circumflex must be changed into an acute, that is, the voice 
must not begin to sink, before it comes to ^at, o-w/^alo?. Hence 
we see the reason why the last syllable, which follows the circum- 
flex, cannot be long by nature : because this last syllable having 
been already preceded by a sinking, which is included in the cir- 
cumflex Itself, it cannot, pursuant to what we have already observed, 
have two measures following that depression : and the Latins agree 
in this with the Greeks, that, they never place the circumflex on 
the penultima of a word, but when the last syllable happens to be 
short, though according to them, the syllable which follows the 
first depression, may be long after an acute. 

The whole difficulty therefore of the Greek accents consists in 
two points. The first, in knowing the quantity of the penultima 
and ultima. The second, in knowing on what syllable the words 
should naturally have their elevation ; because even supposing the 
same quantity, still the elevation may not be the same ; which 
never happens among the Latins. It is easy to know the first 
condition, by the assistance of the rules, which I have laid down 
in the preceding chapters. With regard to the second, it is very 
difficult to determine it exactly, as there is nothing more embar- 
rassing, than to see so great a number of rules, with still a greater 
number of exceptions. For which reason, I have thought proper 
to wave such an attempt, leaving it either to authors, who have 
treated of it more particularly, or to practice, and lexicons, which 
may be consulted occasionally, in order to be certain of the prin- 
cipal accent of the nominative. 

Nevertheless, since there are still divers changes of accents in 
the cases of the same noun, which a person cannot be ignorant of, 
without running the risk of committing an error at every word 
he reads or writes, and without passing for a stranger to this 
language ; I have therefore endeavoured to collect all that is 
most necessary to be known on this subject, and have thrpwn 
the whole into clear rules, and a very regular method, founded 
on the analogy of the principle which I have just now ex- 
plained. 

III. Not to confound accent with quantity » 

But nothing is more apt to occasion a mistake in pronunciation, 
4han the confounding of^ accents with quantity, which, as I have 
observed already, are two very different things. For quantity de- 
notes the length or shortness of the syllables, and the time they 
ought to last ; whereas the accent only marks the elevation or 
sinking of the voice. Now as in music we observe that the base 
notes have oftentimes several measures, wh«n the higher have but 
one, or less than one ; that these pass sometimes very quick, and 

the 



440 Book IX. Of Acct^1:s. 

the others very slow : so it is easy in pronouncing to elevate 
a syllable, and, if requisite, to make it glide nimbly; and, pn 
the contrary, to sink another, and at tiiesame time to make it last 
longer, if necessary* Thus in rEV<Pw(ji.sv, the antepenultima is ele- 
vated, though quickly ; and the penuitima sunk, though sustained 
longer jthan any other syllable of this word, because it is such of its 
- nature. 

This pronunciation, which Marci^n Cajlella calls the very life 
' of sounds, and the foundation of harmony, animnm vocum 8^ 
musices seminarium^ is so majestic and grave, when it is thus inter- 
mixed with quantity and accent (besides the use it has of making 
us judge of writings by the ear as well as the eye) that without 
it, prose becomes quite flat and languid, and verse itself loses all 
its ancient beauty, as several learned persons have observed before 
us ; because we can no longer perceive either cadence or harmony^ 
this vicious pronunciiition intirely corrupting and destroying the 
feet, number, measure, words, sense, and all the grace of versifi- 
cation, which depends equally on the observation of quantity, as 
on the elevation of accent. Hence several have been of opinion, 
that It would be most advisable, at least for a time, not to mark 
any accents at all, as they only serve to accustom us to a wrong 
pronunciation, and to make us oftentimes take a long syllable for a 
short one, or nice versa. 

Nevertheless I fancy we may ged ri^ of this inconvenience, 
without proceeding to such an extremity, by conforming to the 
true pronunciation, which I have pointed out in the first book; a 
pronunciation so much the easier, as I have referred always to 
that of our mother tongue. For giving a double sound to the 
diphthongs, so as to let the two vowels be heard, though all in 
one breath, and uttering the long vowels more slowly, and more 
in the hollow of the mouth, than the short ones; and adding af-* 
terwards the difference of the accents, which consists in pushing 
the voice a little, in order to give it its elevation, whether long 
or short, according as the word requires : we shall easily fall into 
this proportion, which is neither harsh nor difficult, but contains 
a softness acknowledged by all the ancients, and a sensible advan- 
tage to those who will please to use a little application. 



ANNOTATION. 

The Greek gramtmrians mahe use of certain terms to express their 
accentSi tvhich seem more difficult to young beginners than the things 
ihemselves ; for >which reason tve do not intend to use them, 
Hoxvever'f tve shall take notice of them in this place, that they 
may he understood by those "who shall chance to fnd them in other 
grammarians. 

The acute accent is called o|y?, acutm ; the grave ^xpUygravis ;. 
and the circumflex ^s^tcr'jriJiAsvoq, circumfiextis, from o-ttc^w, to draia: 
'BTt^ia-TroiM, w to bendf to crooken. Thus, 

§ The 



Analogy of Accents. 



441 






the last 



An acute 
on 



A circum- 
flex on 



A grave 

understood 

on 




4. 






h 



the last 



1. o^uTova, as 0fo?, Deus, 
God. 

2. tsx^o^vrovst^ as Xoyofj 
sermo, a discourse, 

3. ivyooiToc^o^vrovxy as av- 
Opuvoq, homo, a man. 

'CJa^/o-TTw/iyt.Eva, as XOO"- 

[Au, orno, / adorn. 

zspoire^icrttu^ivxj as o-w- 
(u,«, corpus, Me bodi/. 

(Sx^vrovoi, which may he 
applied also to the other 
denominations f except 
the 1. and 4. as.oTjco?, 
a house ; tvttJw, I heat / 
^sjcfAx, a spectacle. 

The grave being only marked, as I have already observed, in th& 
middle of a period instead nf an acute, the wordi thus marJced, are 
nevertheless called o^vrova., acute. There is none but Clenardus, as I 
hioxu f. that has called them barytona, grave, undoubtedly led into 
this mistake by the practice of tho&e voho mark those tvords tvith a 
grave, even out of discourse, contrary to all appearance of reason. 
1. Because the denomination of o^vrmx, woidd be in that case abso- 
lutely false, there being no other words but these, to whom it can be 
attributed. 2. Because the rule of grammarians, which says thai 
the acute may be in three different places, woidd be likewise uselesSf 
if these words were not to have it on the last, but at the end of a 
period. 3. Because it is the nature (f every word to have some elevU' 
tion, in order to sustain the pronunciation. And perhaps those ver^ 
•words were not tntirely without it, even in the middle of a sentence^ 
Jfut only had it softened and diminished ; in order, as I have observed^ 
that it should not bear too' much upon the subsequent syllables. Agree' 
ably to this, I have always marked, an acute on the fnal of these 
words, even when they make no part of a sentence ; though in some 
places there may chance to be a grave contrary to my intention. 



CHAP. VII. 
The* Rules of Accents. 

And first of nouns. 

Rule I. 

That the accent of the primitive word is generally 
continued throughout. 
The accent ofi the primitive word^ without some particu- 
lar reason to the contrary^ continues the same through 
all the derivative cases, 

3 L Exam- 



44£ Book IX. Of Accents. 

Examples. 

X HIS is the first nation we ought to form in the doctrine of 
accents : that the accent of the primitive word remains the samej 
and on the same syllahle, or that which corresponds to it, in all 
its dependance, not only in declining and conjugating ; as Xoyo<;^ a 
discourse^ Aoy», Koyta ; rinilui I beat^ ru'irlnSi rvTrltt ; but also in all its 
derivatives, and in all the words or tenses that depend upon one an- 
other. Thus rvTTuf the second future of the indicative, having a 
circumflex retains it in rviroTiAiy the future of the optative, through 
all numbers and persons. And the same must be understood of all 
the rest. 

But in e-u>[j.x, cM^ixloSf the body, the accent remaining upon cut 
is changed from a circumflex into an acute, by reason that, pursuant 
to the general rule laid down Book I. Chap. viii. and the analogy 
which we just now explained in the preceding chapter, a circumflex 
can never be upon the antepenultima. 

In rx^vq, roi^tos, rough; aXijSii?, -^so^f true ; ro^?, rxvlos', 
standing ; the accent continuing on the same syllable, is changed 
from a grave (which is in the middle of a sentence) into an acute, 
because, according to the same rule, a grave can be upon the last 
syllable only. And the feminine of these same nouns, retaining the 
accent on this very syllable, make it a circumflex, tcAyviot,^ rao-^t, 
because of its being long and the last short, according to what we 
shall observe in the fourth rule. Though there are two excepted, 
iKxyySf little^ IXci^Eix ; >nyv<;, harmonious^ Xiysix, 

Thus we see, that this rule, which is the most general, sup- 
poses nevertheless the knowledge of all the rest, which are like so 
many obstructions to its having its proper effect. 
ANNOTATION. 

To this rule we may refer all the compounds which retaia the accents of, 
their simples, though the greatest part draw them back, as we shs^ll abserre 
Rule XI. 

We must also refer to this rule the adverbs formed from the genitives plural of 
nouns, pronouns, and participles, which generally retain their accent ; as from 
e-o<j!wv comes &o<pug, wisely ; from fxana^iMv comes jiji,aKct^ia}g, happily. In like 
manner ^roo<;, thus ; lusivooq, after that manner ; aX«6wj, truly ; fnluq^ eloquently. 
There are only some few excepted, which may be easily observed by use. 

But there are some nouns which depart from this analogy; as fi (/.'ia, owe, 
nrnq fji^ia/ii nrri fxia, with a circumflex on the last : a,[x<^M, Ko^ two, uiJ,<^<iXvf ^voXv, 
and S'ysTy, dat. hurl. 

Rule II. 

That the Greeks regulate their accent by the last 

syllable, and in what manner. 

1. If the last syllable be longy generally the accent 

must not be on the antepenultima* 

2. The diphthongs «*, ot, at the end bf words, pass 

here for short, except in the optative mood, 
1. The reader will please to recollect what we have explained 
in the foregoing chapter, viz. that the Latins regulate their accents 

by 






Accents regulated by the Last. 443 

by the penultima, and the Greeks theirs by the last syllable ; inso- 
much, that if a word is accented on the antepenultima, and the last 
either through declining or conjugating becomes long, the accent 
moves its station, and advances to the penultima ; as av^^wiros, a 
man, avQ^cHnrii, kvQ^utru'. because the last syllable being long, the, 
accent can never fall upon the antepenultima, for the reason given 
in the preceding chapter. 

2. Now the diphthongs ui and 0/ are always reputed short at the 
end of a word, except it be in the tenses of the optative. Thus 
rsrv'poif the third person of the preterite of the optative, has the 
accent on the penultima, because the final 01 is long in this mood. 
But olyO^wjTott homines, has the accent on the antepenultima, because 
01 final is reputed short out of the optative mood. But if there 
happen to be any other letter after 0/ at the end of a word, this 
rule does not take place ; wherefore avQ^J>7roiq, hominibuSy has the 
accent on the penultima, by reason that 0/5 is long, and therefore 
the accent cannot be upon the antepenultima. 

ANNOTATION. 

We might have also said, that the last being short, the accent is commonly 
«pon the antepenultima : but this is not so general, though it may be remarked 
as a very common rule. For, 

1. In all barytonous verbs^ the tenses of more than two syllables, and whose last 
is short, have always an acute upon the antepenultima ; as 'hvirlov, tItikj)*, tutt- 

2. Those nouns which assume a short vowel in their vocative, throw back the 
accent of the nominative to the antepenultima ; such as, 1. proper names in >if : 
lampeirrg, u lun^alig^ Socrates; 2oo<r&mgy u Idoa-Qevsg, Scsthenes, proper names. 
2. These four nouns in «? which make the vocative in a : o ha-TrSrsg, u YiTTrSla^ 
u lord; (/.yHiZTins , u (/.ifiUlet, wise, prudent; o elpvorng,' u ivfvola,, one that sees at 
a distance ; o eiaanfittig, w dKain^la,, without malice, 

3. The following likewise throw back the accent in those cases which have the 
last short ; h ^vydrn^, « bvyali^f a daughter, accus. ^iyarfo,, dual S-yyarpe, 
plur. bvyalfzg : but the dat. in «V; is long, ^vyal^ao-t, to the daughters. Thus 
h A»|U«T»g, S Afifji.^t^, Ceres; £iv*Tflp, w shalsp, a sister-in-law of the brother's 
side. To these we may subjoin the following, which having but two syllables, 
throw back their accent as far as they can : 2(w7)if, u 2wT?p, Saviour : (where 
the circumflex accent is used, because w is long, though we likewise meet with 
u 2cti}fjf) isjoihff u 'srdrif. 

But their accusative is unquestionably, tov 'aruli^a, and not 'srar^a, to distin- 
guish it from 'srarpa, ag, Vy one's country. In like manner f/,nli§ei, matrem, a 
mother, to distinguish it from fji,nr^a ag, ike matrix ; yag-i^a, ventrem, the belly, 
to distinguish it from «,5/ttrp«, -as, a vessel with a big belly ; a'vnp, vir, a man of 
courage; av^^a, voc. av«p, plur. av^^eg ; S'ft>5p, levir, a brother-in-law ; ^at^, &C. 
As for the genitives and datives of these nouus, see Rule VII, Annot. 

4. The adjectives in uv and in ns also throw back the accent on the antepe- 
nultima in the neuter ; as BsTOim, cifxeivoov, better ; to ^eKIjov af/.um ; Kctno^ai- 
f^ctiv, unhappy, to x«»o Jctijuov ; £u5'«/|Wwv, happy, ro su^AifjLov, though some place 
here a circumflex, eu^aT^ov. In like manner ctiiQaS'wf, self -pleased, re av9ct^sg^ 
avrapniig, ro avra^nsg, seLf- sufficient. 

This happens even to the vocative of the comparatives and compounds of ^ai' 
fj-uv, and yXvKvg ; as S y^vKiov, sweeter ; Z xaKoS'a/jUov, devil ; as also to these 
three proper names, <S "A'^oWov, 6 Apollo ; cS nSa-ei^ov, 6 Neptune ; 2 'Ayay,(f/.. 
vev, 6 Agamemnon. Whereas the rest are accented on the penultima j as a {tlJii- 
fA,«v, 6 verecunde ; Z Map^Sov, Z naXar^ev, 6 Macaon, 6 Palemon, &c. 

But the neuter of the participle does not draw back the accent to the ante- 
penultima, though the last happen to be short; as o ayw'^wy, sanctifying ; r9 ft,yiA' 
{«v, what SQUCtifies ; 'srZf K»!«y«A/^)tjy, « consuming Jire» 

- - Tbe 



444 Book IX. Of Accents. 

The verbals also in eo?, ea, eov, are accented on the penultima, though the 
lastbeshort in the masculine and the neuter; as p/jaTrHoj, j«, tov, scribendus, a/ 
vim, to be writtem olg-aoVj ferendum, to be suffered, &c. 

Rule III. 
Exception to the foregoing rule. 

1. The Ionic genit we in sea for ov; 

2. The Attic genitive of nouns in ig or i ; 

3. OS, ON, not increasing ; 

4. And jiouns compounded ofyiKt^;^ are all accented on 

the antepenultima. 

Examples. 
We must except from the foregoing rules four sorts of nouns that 
are accented on the antepenultima, though their final be long : 

1. The Ionic genitive in zu instead of oy; as A\niu for Aina, 
^neae, nf Mneas. 

2. The Attic genitive of contracted nouns in ;$ or », through 
all numbers; as from o(|)i5, ocpsw?, of the serpent; dual o(ptuVf 
plural o(p£&;v, of the serpents: from 'sjoXig, -ctoAew?, of the city; 
dual -cjoAfwv, plural -vjoXsuVf of the cities. In like manntr some un- 
contracted nouns in yj ; as ts^x^^i ixs-nx^usi ^^^ elboiv : isi^sxvs, a 
Saii), 'csskix.zm, &C. 

3. Nouns, in us ot in m not increasing, that is, those of which 
the grammarians form the fourth declension of simples; as Min- 
^£6;?, Msv/Aeo;, &c. Menelaus: svysus, fertil : avwyjwv, a r efect or i/, or 
dining room: liiox^sus^ a debtor. 

4. The compounds of 7£^w^, laughter \ as mloiytXu<;f wJo?, laughter: 
(ptXoysT^wii ulo^t one that loves to laugh. 

ANNOTATION. 
The reason wJiy the compounds of yeXiws follow this analogy of the accent, is 
because they are often declined parisyllabicariy, like the foregoing : for as we say 
3/5X&)f, ysXarog, and ylxouj, ysAw; so we say ^iXoysXoor, toloq, and c^jXoj/eXiw?, (o. 
But the reason why these Attic nouns in mq and wv, declined parisyllabically, are 
accented on the antepenultima is, because they were thus accented in the com- 
mon termination o; and ev ^ as the Attic genjtive o^eo;? and others are ac- 
cented on the antepenultima, because this was the accent they had in the com- 
mon o'<{){o? : and thus the Ionics in £», as Alvs/w, are accented on the antepenultima, 
merely to retain the accent on the same syllable on which it was placed in 
the common Aive/tf. Insomuch that, this rule is in such a manner an exception 
to the foregoing, that it serves to corroborate the first, which is that of always 
retaining the accent on the same syllable. To which we may add, that those 
words which have the last long, and are accented on the antepenultima, con- 
form to the analogy of the Latins, inasmuch as their penultima is always short ; 
wherefore, if it should happen to be long, they shorten it, as M«viA«e?, 

Rule IV. 
Of the circumflex accent in particular. 
When the penultima is long, andfollozved by a short 
syllable, either it has no accent, or it must have a cir- 
cunflex. 

t Exam- 



Of Parisyllabic Nouns acuted, 445 
Example s. 

A circumflex accent can never take place but on a syllable long 
by nature; because, as we have observed, it necessarily includes 
the elevation and depression of the voice on the same syllabic. 
Now the long syllables are >}, u, and all the diphthongs (except 
Oil and 01 final, which were excepted in Rule II.) and sometimes 
the common ones, «, /, v, as we have shewn, when treating of 
quantity. 

Therefore if the penultima being long, and followed by a 
short syllable, is to have an accent, it must absolutely be a cir- 
cumflex ; as y^Ho-Xi musa : (piXZvrcCi amantem, loving, - 

I say, if it is to have an accent, for it may of its nature be 
without one; as xvO^cotto^ 'vrxia-ioq, a rich man. But if the final 
is long, the penultima cannot be circumflexed, though it may be 
acuted, pursuant to the analogy explained in the preceding chapter. 
Thus ij.H(Tcx, changes its circumflex into an acute in the genitive and 
the dative, /.vb(7>3?, ^iavi, 

ANNOTATION. 

It follows from this rule, that the adjectives and participles of the imparisyl- 
labic declension, which are accented on the last, have a circumflex in the femi- 
nine, which is of the parisyllabic declension, by reason of its terminating in a 
short ; as rap^uj , ready, swift, ra-xzio. : ^pa^vg, short, S^a^Bia : slTtciv, sayings 
tlitHa-a : rfx-nQus, cut, •vixrfy^a-tb. We must except however the following three : 
\\a.')Q)g^ little, Ixap^sitt : Xi'j/u?, resounding, harrnoJiious , 'kiyna, : ^'^(o^us, half, hfAis-Eictf 
which are accented on the anteppnultima. 

But it is observablci that the circumflex may be placed even upon a long pe- 
nultima, when the last happens to be long by position only; as ayXaf, a ridge: 
im^a^, a fountain; because there was a very wide difference even in pronunciation 
between a syllable long by nature, and one lotig only by position ; therefore a pe- 
nultima, long by position only, is incapable of receiving this accent. 

Rule V. 

Of parisyllabic nouns acuted. 

j4ll nouns that are declined without increase, and ha^ve 
an acute or gra'ce accent on the last, retain it through 
all their cases, except the three genitives and dati^ves, 
which are circunrflexed. 

Examples. 

Nouns of the parisyllabic declension, that have an acute on the 
last (whose place, as we observed, is supplied, in the middle of a 
sentence, by a grave) retain it through all their cases, accord- 
ing to the first rule. But they take a circumflex on the last of the 
genitive and dative, in the three numbers; as 

Sing, o^o'j, oS5, o5w, 0^0 V. Dual o^w, l^m* Plural 'M, o5«v, 
©^e>r;f; o§»f, a 'wcii/i a journey. 



Rule 



446 Book IX. Of Accents. 

Rule VI. 

Of the genitive plural of parisyllabics following the 
feminine article. 

1. .All other nouns of the feminine article take a cir- 

cumflex in the genitive in m\ 

2. But the adjective in og gives to its feminine, in 

this case, the accent of the inasculine. 
Examples. 

1. Besides the nouns just now mentioned, all those that are de- 
clined like the feminine article, of whatsoever gender they be, 
and whatsoever accent they have in the nominative, are circum- 
flexed on the last of the genitive in Sk, that is, of the plural ; as 
5 rapay, a steixiard, roti^im: ^ kkx^Qx, a thorn, a)i»y^Mi> : ^x^ua,, 
heavy : /Sa^eSv. 

2. Nevertheless the adjectives in os always retain the same 
accent in this case, as well for the masculine as for the feminine ; 
as oiyios, holy; genitive plural aywv sanctorum: v, ayi«, holy; 
genitive plural ay/wy (and not uyiuv) sanctarum. olros, he; avr'fj, 
she ; genitive plural r«ra;v, for all genders, '^(pert^os, a-pli^Xf suus, 
sua, theirs; genitive plural <r(pey^uv, as well for the masculine as 
the feminine. 

Rule VII. 
Monosyllables declined with increase. 

1 . Monosyllables declined xvith increase have the final 

syllable of the genitive and dative circumflexed, if 
it happen to be long, and acuted, if it be short : 

2. But participles^ and rig interrogative, retain the 

accent on the same syllable : 

3. Likewise r^ug, ^ug, ^xg, -uroig, %g, -ura^g, and (p(ag, in 

the genitive in m, are acuted on the first syllable. 
Examples. 

1. Monosyllables declined with increase, have always an accent 
on the last, in the genitive and dative of all numbers. And this 
accent is a circumflex, when the last syllable happens to be capable 
of it, that is to say, when it is long by nature ; otherwise they have 
an acute. 

In all other cases, the accent remains on the same syllable where 
it was in the nominative, pursuant to the first rule ; but if it was 
an acute in the nominative, it is changed into a circumflex in these 
cases, when the syllable is long, because the syllable added by 
increase is there short, according to the analogy of the fourth 
rule. 

Thus i5 x^sipf the hand, makes %j/f05, X'^Sh Xs*S«' Dual x««ff> 

x^'fo'V. Plur^ x^^i^h x^'§^*i x^f^'^f x"!'*?* 

To 



Accent on the CoNfRACTioK: 447 

To -cTvp, ihejiret makes -cryf ©?, tsv(\. Plural -cryfa, wvf aJy, &C» 
ANNOTATION. 

1. We likewise say tsrypa, incendia, burnings: and Pasor pretends, that to 
signify igneSf it is written just in the same manner, with the accent on the last 
by reason of the letter p, which draws the accent to it. But -nruga, £?, pyrOj is 
a funeral pile. 

2. Nouns declined with a syncope, conform in some measure to the analogy 
of the preceding ; as HvMVy a 'dog, Kvovoq, nwit, nvvl, Kvva, &c. because these cases 
are formed, as if the nominative was nvv. It is pretty near the same thing 
in dvnp, a man, avS'poj (instead of avs^oj) avJg/: 'sralrj^, 'orctl^cSf tur^u^t, la like 
fiianner fxrH^oq, juwlg/ : S-uyalpo?, S-yj/aipi, from f/MTn^ and &yyaT»p, though these 
are accented on the penultima. In the dual SyyolgoTv, plural genitive ^vyalfxv : 
but the dative bvyalpda-i has the accent on the penultima. For the other cases 
of these noons, see Rule II. Annot. numb. 2. 

ryv>i, mulier, a womany takes its cases from the unusual nominative ywa,l^f~ 
and follows this analogy, having the accent on the last in the genitives and da* 
lives, yvVAUo^, yvvatKi, ywatKuVf yvvai^i, 

2. The monosyllable participles, and the interrogative vis, re- 
tain the accent on the same syllable in the genitive and dative, as 
Vrell as in the other cases ; uv, ens, bein^, ovlos, ovlt, ov}», &c. hUf 
having put, ^evloq : (pvq, born, produced, (pvvloq, &c. 

Tis ; quis ? who ? r/vo?, rivty rim, &c. But vphen it is not interro- 
gative, but indefinite, it is accented on the last : r/j, aliquis, sowtf- 
bodi/, rtvos, rivif riyoi, &C. 

ANNOTATION. 

Sometimes however, when it is neither interrogative, nor properly indefinite, 
being rather instead of the relative &'?, as we have observed in the preceding book, 
it has also the accent on the penultima : 'Koi'xj»(A.zv nrm; e^a^ sortiamur cujus sit, 
let us see whose it shall be : ax fj^i rive? elo-iv, he did not know zvho they were. 

3. There are likewise some particular nouns that have an acute 
accent on the first in the genitive plural : Tpus, plural gen. Tpwo/y, 
Trojanorum, of the Trojans : ^ locq, fax, a torch, ruv ^cc^ut : o ^us, 
lynx, TMv ^uuv ; (pAis, lumen, rm (Puruv, to distinguish it from (pcSluvt 
from the noun (pj?, vir, a man, though some write also ^urm, vi- 
rorum. But (pd^uv comes from the plural mI (puh?, red spots on the 
legs, caused by being too near thejire : zjois, all, '^ssavluv : to «y, tS 
uro^f the ear ; plural ruv urmi tjix7(;, a child, rm luxi^uv. 

ANNOTATION. 
We might have mentioned some others, which are not much used, or concern- 
ing which there are different opinions; as o x^^^^^t a wild hoar, twv j^X^vav ; 
• PCP^^^'j ^^ usurer, tuv x?^^'"^f ^^* ^^^ likewise say X««v, xp«T«y, from ^aj; o, 
a stone ; «gSj, to, the head, &c. 

Rule VIII. 

Of the accent of contracted words. 

The circumflex' accent is on contracted words, when 
it results from a?i acute joined zvith a gra've: otherzvise 
it remains as it was before, as in (piXsoi^nv, <pi>^Qi[Anv, 

Examples. 
Those syllables, which have no accent over them, are supposed 
to be barytons, that is, to have a grave, as in the last of rvTrltu, 

to 



448 Book IX. Of Accents. 

to heat ; and in the last of (^iXiu^ to love: because, as we have 
made appear in the foregoing chapter, the voice which was raised 
on the precedent syllable, must necessarily sink on these. 

Therefore if in contraction you join a syllable marked with an 
acute, such as ('), to the following, on which you suppose a grave (*) ; 
from the.^e two there results a circumflex, which as we have ob- 
served, is a compound of both, and used to be marked even with 
the connection of these two accents, thus ("), till it came after- 
wards to be roupfled in this manner ("). Hence of tptXeuy you 
make <pi\bf, of (pixhrov, (piXsTrov, &c» In like manner in the nouns : 
yoV, v5j, the mind ; yea, y55, the earth,, &c. 

But if the contraction is formed from any thing besides an acute 
before a grave, this figure {^) cannot result; and consequently the 
accent will remain the same as before; as in <p/A£<«V»v, (pt?^oifjt,vy, 
that I had loved : 'ZuXripssst rsKvpsiq, p\eY\\fJull: Iraicci?, srotu^i Wus^ 
stans, standing : ysyawy, ysywy, natus, borri. 

ANNOTATION. 

1. From this rule we may infer, that the greatest part of those nouns, which 
have a circumflex on the last, are formed by contraction. For example, in the 
parisy liable declension, the masculines in n? 5 as 'E^jcajJ? from 'EpfjtUs, Mercury; 
'AttsXX?? from 'ATeXXlfif, Apelles, &c. 

The fennniiics m a or in « ^ as 'A9wa for 'A9r,aa, &C. yn for yia, the earth ; 
J^pyc"? for p^pyrla, ^././"n. 

Those \> 5s and in Sy : vsjfrom vo(^, the mind ; or«vfrom l^iov, a bone, &c. 

There are also a great many in the imparisyllabic declension ; as x^p, r^p, ?f, 
from nittp, ihp lieai i ; rs^p. fat ; sap, the spring ; fitxr.s .from rifxiiUi;, precious ; 
'arXttxSj from 'sj'Kclmus , a cake ; Tloa-u'^m from liocnitdciiy, Neptune, &c. 

But there are still several others in this declension ; as those in eus : the mono- 
syllables in 5s. senit. 0^ : those in Sj, v^, «|, and those in uv, avl^, which are 
circumflexed upon the last, though they are not formed by contraction : vau?, 
a ship ; ^vq,anox; fj,vq, a mouse ; 'srup,fire ; 'sflu^, fearful, ^c. 

Aag, a torch, admits of a circumflex, according to Suidas, as coming from 
SVti?, though others commonly write ^fj, Ja'^o?, pretending that we ought to say 
^atg, with the accent on the last. 

2. Some except from the rule all the accusatives of the feminine contracts in 
&)C and CD, which never admit of a circumflex on the last after contraction j as 
Tnv al^oa, al^w, pudorem, bashfulness ; rh jWiotw, simiam, an ape. 

The same observation they make also in the neuter dual of the parisyllabic 
mascuhnes in 0? that are coritracted ; as voa, yi, minds; t<w •/^pva-ka>, "^^vs-'m, duo 
aurei, two golden crowns. Several adjectives of the same declension and termi- 
nation, particularty the derivatives of names of metais, having an acute on the 
antepenultima, require, nevertheless, a circumflex after contraction through all 
their cases; as ^vasoq, ^vs-sq; ^vasa, ^pvs-a. ; yjva-tov, p^vff-5v, golden, from 
pfgvc-oV, gold; ff-i^yBos, c-i^^Sq, of iron; ^aXKi^, p^^aXxs?, brazen; dpyvpel^, 
tipyvpsgj of silver ; to. fAoUQha, fxoXiQ^a, leaden. Likewise some others ; as Xiy£(^, 
Sc ; irif «j eov, sv, of thread; ^op<p6psf^, 5?, cf purple; <})«vjxe©-, (pomxSg, 
puniceus. 

The same is practised in regard to some substantives, as a^e\<plh(^t9$f 
frsitns&Wus, a nephew on the brother's side ; 2rvyar^lh^, 5?, filiae, fiiius, a grand- 
child on the daughter's side. 

But we must except the compound nouns, which, as we shall ob>;erve in the 
11th Rule, always drawback the accent: thus from fxva, comt-s '^i,u,ves, of iteo 
pounds uei^ht or worth. From poog, pSq, a course or stream, comes Kaxippaq, 
having a fine stream. From p^vo!^, lanugo, comes aX'"'^^' ^^'^^ lanugine, im- 
herbis, &c. 

'ASfo©- is irregglar, for having the accent on the penultima, it throws it back, 
when contracted, as w'fi^tf;, thick j close. 

Rule 



Of PiiEPOsiTroNS, and of WoitDS, &c. 449 

Rule IX. 

Of prepositions, and of words that have the last 
syllable cut off. 

1. P Impositions have the accent on the last syllable: 

2. But xvhen they follow their case, the accent is 

drawn back. 

3. Except 'Ava ayid hd. 

4. They all lose their accent, when the final syllable 

is cut off. 

5. A declinable wo7'd losing its final syllable, does not 

lose its accent, but draws it back. 

Examples. 

1. Prepositions of two syllables have also the accent on the lastj 
as aTTo, Db,JrQm ■: 'cjx^cif imth,fiom : hi, in, among poets. 

But r.vi, syncopated for svsrh (Jt-sra, for t^inTt-, tju^a, for 'z<7«fsr/» 
&c. fetain the accent of the word from which they are taken, and 
whicli may be considered as their primitive, according to what we 
have said in the first rule. 

2. The prepositions draw back thelf accent to the penultima, 
when thc}^ are preceded by the case which they govern ; as rgrwv 
-tes^i, concerning this : Aloq -crafa, jf^ow Jupiter* In Hke manner wv 
e(pv, avof/rom tvhom he sprutig. 

3. But oioi and ava, per, do not draw back the aiccent ; and the 
reason is, that they may be. distinguished from the yocaiive, w ava, 
6 rex ; and from the accusative, rov A/^, Jovem, Jupiter. 

4. Prepositions lose their accent, when there is an elision of the 
syflaWe on which it was marked ; as mccp' l/^-S, Jrom me : y.ccr *v9^'i- 
-cj&f, against the man. 

5. But when this elision happens to a declinable word, the ac- 
cent which was on the last is drawn back to t\\Q penultima, and 
always continues acute, even if this penultima should happen to be 
long, because the last is no longer considered ; as in t^oAx' s;^w, I 
have many things : lilv 'i^nxQiv, lie has siiffered hardships : y^axiir iTif 
they are difficidt. 

Rule X. 
Of nouns in oq formed from the preterperfect middle. 

1. Nouns in og formed from the preterperfect iniddle, 

and joined to another notm^ raise the penultima 
when active. 

2. And the antepenuUima when passive. 

Examples. 

1. Kouns in oq, compounded of a preterperfect middle and a 
noun, have the accent on the peniiltiraa, when they are taken 

3 M actively ; 



450 Book IX, Of Accents. 

actively ; as antm.i.'^Xoyo^, a prater, a chatterer ; kv\o(^oyQSy a murderer 'i 
cUovl'^aq, one that has care of .a family ; ^/(pojtlovo?, one that kills voitk 
astvord; Xxo}^o(po;, one that maintains the people ; ^soioKo?, the mother 
of God ; A/9oCoAo^, a stone-finger ; <;)^6yo(payo?, afsh-eater. 

2. Bat when they are taken passively, the accent is thrown back 
on the antepenultima ; as l^Gvo<payo5f one ivho is devoured byfsh ; X;- 
MCoKoi, one that is struck tvith a stone : .^eotoxo?, born of God; Xao- 
r^o(po(;, maintained by the people. 

ANNOTATION. 

If they are compounded of a preposition, they draw back the accent te the 
antepenultima; as naldKoyog, a catalogue or roll : U7roX(^, iziice ploughed. Which 
agrees with the general analogy of the compounds of the following rule. 

K u L E X r. 

Of words compounded with some particles. 
Nouns compounded with «, £u, (Ju?, uVo, h^ drax& 
back the accent to the aniepeiiultima. 
Examples. 

Compound v/ords often draw back the accent to the antepenul- 
tima, and particularly those compounded with some particles; as 

cia-opos, ignorant^ imprudent, from o-o(Poj, luise ; tv'^siiq, one that has 
good children, from ':;;xoiT<;, a son or daughter ; ^vcrev^eres, hardtofnd; 
vTFocv^^oi^ 8, 4i, a luoman subject to her husband ; §/\]^i;^o^, double- 
minded. In like manner ocvVx^iroi;, antichrist ; aiiylaXoiiy a fellovc- 
servant ; iJTs^lz=yoc, curious ; y.oiloic-y.oTr'iSya spy^ Sec, 

To these we may add the compounds of two nouns ; as (pixia-o- 
(Pos, a philosopher, from (piXo<;, a friend, and <jo<pk, ivise ; ^i^iJLac^y^^cs, 
a ruler of the people ; hyioiKoyosy the decalogue. But here it will not 
always hold true. For instance, we say with the accent on the 
last, t<?£^/>taXK>)f, very beautiful; v.r^ris, rough, unpleasant; tva-zQris, 
pious; o'.o^s'^nq, itnpious ; a^y^iKviT'ns, a captain of robbers ; ^ocvixala^yl^f 
a xuorker of miracles ; and others, which cannot be reduced to par-- 
ticular rules, but must be left to observation. 



CHAP. VIII. 

Of the Accents of Verbs. 

Rule XIL 
General for all tenses. 
TJie accent of "verbs is drawn back as for as it can go, 
except some particular rule interferes. 

Examples. 

^ A HE most general rule that can be given for the accents of 
verbs is, that they are always removed as far back as possi- 
ble, that is, to the antepenultima, unless there be some particular 

rule 



Of the Accents 0/ Verbs. 451 

■\Xi\Q that requires them to be put forwarder, as when the last syl- 
iable happens t/>-be long; in which case the accent must be on the 
penultima, pursuant to Rule II. 

But if the verb happen to be a dissyllable, then the accent must 
be of course on the penultima, be it circumflex or acute, according 
to the capacit}'^ of the word; where special regard is to be had to 
the V final, which though seldom long, yet is commonly so in 
some tenses of the verbs in /x/, as l^ivyvw) l^evyrj<;, l^^vyyv, for 
which reason they are accented on the penultima. 

There are only some tenses, wliich naturally are accented con- 
trary to this general rule, and which the three following rales will 
render easy to retain. 

Rule XIIL 
Of the tenses that»have a circumflex on the last. 

1. The last syllable of the second future in u, xvith^all 

its derivatives, is circumflexed : 

2. As also the second aorist of the infinitive active : 

3. Likexvise the second aorist middle of the imperative: 

4. Together with the passive aorists in the subjunctive ; 

as also the subjunctive aorist of verbs in iJt.i. 

Examples. 

The second future of the indicative active has a circumflex on 
the last, as also the first future of verbs in Xu, fjM, vcj, ^a*, which is 
always like the second. And this accent is continued on the same 
syllable, or that which answers to it, through all persons in the 
several dependent tenses ; provided, however, they are capable of 
it; otherwise the accent is changed, pursuant to the general rules 
above mentioned. 

1. Thus we say rvTrui, rviruq, tvjth, verberabo, is, it, I mil 
heat; plur. ry-TrauEv, &c. in the optative rvTroTiJj, o7^, o7; in the 
infihitive rv^eTv ; participle r'vnuvy 5vro?, verheraturus ; second fu- 
ture middle rvnsij.a.ii rvrrri^ rvmiiroci^ infinitive rvnsTa^ai, 

2. The second aorist of the infinitive active also requires a 
circumflex, rvvsTy, in the same manner as the second future. But 
the second aorist of the participle has an acute, tvumv, qui verbe- 
ravit, having beaten. 

3. The second aorist of the imperative middle is likewise cir- 
camflexed, tcttS, rvmcOco, rvvsaQs, &c. Where we see, that in 
the other persons the accent is changed, pursuant to the general 
rules, as above mentioned. 

4. In regard to the verbs in p;, as We have made appear that they 
conform almost in every thing to the passive aorists in the conjuga- 
tion of their active, so they agree with them in the accent. Now 
the passive aorists have a circumflex in the subjunctive ryTro;, -^s-, 
^, &c. consequently the verbs in /*< require it also, nGuif tu, »Va/? 

ANNO- 



45^ Book IX. . Of Accen'ts. 

ANNOTATION. 

We have mentioned nothing here -concerning the preterpcrfcct of the snb. 
junctive and optative, because these tenses are so very little used without a cir- 
cumlocution, that the grammarians are not even agreed about their accent. 
Though, generally speaking, they are accented on the penultima, either with an 
acute or a circamMex, according to the capacity of the syllable j as Hvifxvfxatf 
that'Iliad b^en divided; rdi^ufji.ci, that I had been punished or honoured ; 'ari<pt- 
A»!'jU>iv, f.o, j5to, thai I had been beloved ; hiXvfAriv, vo, Zro, &c. Ihctt I had been deli- 
vered. See Bool: 111, Ghap. iviii. 

Rule XIV. 
Of the tenses of the infinitive that are accented o^ 

the penultima. 
I. The perfect injinitive, 

S. And the aorlst in Ar, are accented on tlie penult iina ; 
S« Except the aoinst in A20AI. 

Examples. 

1. The infinitive, having several tenses terminating in a/, requires 
them to be accented on the penultinja : and this accent is a circum- 
flex, if the syllable happen to be Ipng by nature ; otheryvise it is 
an acute. 

This happen, first, to all its preterites, as to the perfect active, 
rElv(psvxi : to the perfect passive relv'pQxij 'ujsipi'Kno^ociy to have been 
beloved ; to the perfect middle, reWsva/. 

2. To all aorists terminating in a/, of what verbs soever, as to 
the first active rv^ai) rx^oi^aci, (piKvo-at, u^a.^rv)<TX{f to have beaten, 
troubled, loved t sinned, 8zc. 

To the two passive, as Tt'(pO'^ya/, crvcryifirivoit, rvirvvtzt, [Axviivxi, 

To the secoiid aorist middle^ rvnh^oci, ysvsaOxfj ^Eo-Sa;; crvvB-zr$ai, 

8. There is only the first aorist middle terminating in ao-Qa/, 
that is excepted from this rule, having the accent on the antepe- 
liultima, as rv-^^ao-Qoci, rio-oiO-Qxi, &c. 

The verbs in i^i likewise, as they follow the passive aorists, re- 
quire an acute in the present, and a circumflex in the second aorist, 
according to the capacity of the syllable; which is only to be un- 
derstood of the active. 

In the present, as riUva.i.t Uvxit Wa-vyA, ^(piTdvai, ^I'^ovxif &C, 111 
tlie second aorist, as ^eTvoci, slvxi, r^vxi, ^hxt, &c. 

As^for tile passive of these verbs, they follow the general rules 
of the other passive verbs in their accent, as well as in their con- 
jugation. And with regard to the second aorist middle, it is in- 
cluded above, in the examples of the aorists in «/. 
A N N*0 T A T I O N. 

We may therefore take notice here of the difference of accent, whereby the three 
first aorists, which agree in termination, are often distinguished; as 
J.., ., <In the optative active, with an acute on the penultima, 

•* '" > 2 because the last is long, according to Rule II. 

f In the imperative middle, with the accent on the ante- 
' ^iMvaij ama ; 3 penultima, b-y reason that the last is short, according to 



f In the imperative 
3 penultima, b-y rei 
^ the said Rule^IL 



>-In the infinitive active, the accent on the penultinoa, 
.- . J by this present rulej which is a circumflex, because 

<PiA>;«/, amavtsse ; J ^^ j^ reckoned short, except in the optative, according to 
t Rule II. 

But 



. Of the Accents of Verbs. 453 

But you are to observe, that in rv-\ai, and the like, the accent is the same 
thvoAigh all the three tenses, because, having no more than two syllables, it cannot 
throw iit further back in the imperative; and as the y is short, it cannot be cii- 
cui»0exed in the infinitive. 

Rule XV. 
Of the accent of participles. 

1. The participle vice? of the middle and active "voice j 

as also the second aorist active, cmd the two aorists 
passive, must have an acute on the last syllaMe: 

2. jBw/ the participles in a-oig and (Mevog are acuied on 

the penultima : 

3. And the participles in oi^i^^og/on the antepemiUitna, 

. Examples. 

1. The participles terminating in wc, with omega, have either a 
grave or an acute accent on the last. Such are those of the prete- 
rite, as well active, as t^^^w?, 6ros ; yiiKa^nx'M, oTo?, &c. as middle, 
vdvrrus^ oror. 

The second aorist active requires also the same accent, rviruiVf 
6(loq : as also the two aorists passive, rv(p^si(;, Evloi ; rvvsU, ivlos. 

The verbs in ^i must have also the same accent, t/^e/V, or 
"^sty, £VT05 ; Ira?) uvroq; a.(T(X, da-nSf &C. oXXys, vcrccy &C. 

2. The first aorist active,, terminating in a-xs, takes ap acute on 
the penultima, as rv-^as, (pi^-hcxxs. 

As also the preterit passive in /ae'vo?, as T{'lv[x[xsyo<;, zo^^tT^yii/Avoq. 

3. The. other participles passive, terminated in oij.ivos, have the 
accent on the antepenultima; as the present rvnloiAsvoi;, the first 
future rv'^Ovja-QiJi.svoS) the paulo-post-future r{]v^Q{A.evo^, 

Rule XVI. 
Of some particular imperatives. 

1 . An acute upon the last snakes a distinction hetzveen 

the second aorist ifidicative, and the folloxving 
imperatives, aVe, eaOJ; sJ^e, \U, xaQi. 

2. These second aorists^ apKH, r^acTns, and iTrixd^B^ 

are accented on the pemdtima. 
Examples. 
1. The above imperatives ought to be accented on the first sylla- 
ble, pursuant to the preceding rules ; but, contrary to the custom 
of the rest, they have eit^ier an acute or a grave on the last, as 
may be seen in the rule : thus uiri, say ; lx9s, come^ &c. to distin- 
guish them from the second aorist indicative of the same verbs, 
sfTTf, he has said ; sA^?, he is come ; sl^s, he has Jound ; i^s for tt^e, 
he lias seen ; Xx^e, for sAats, he has taken. 

Nevertheless, these very imperatives draw back their accent, 
when compounded, according to the practice of other verbs, of 
which we shall treat in the following rule; as ^/(A^f, do thou run 
about ; i^hv^i^ do ihotijind* 

2. These 



454 Book IX. Of Accents. 

2, These second aorists of the imperative middle should nata- 
raily have a circumflex on the last, pursuant to the third rule, 
whereas they have an acute on the penultima : k^pUa, perveni, 
from e(,(ptMioiAoii : Tfa-zrs, converte, or convertere, from r^i'nu, vcrlo, 
/ turn ; iTfiKoi^Hf oOliviscere, from lTiiKxv9(x,vMf to Jbrget, 

Rule XVII. 
Of compound verbs. 

1 . Compound verbs frequently drazv back their accent.; 

2. But, contrary/ to this rule, the circumfle.v keeps its 

place, wlicn it happens to be upon the last, or 
when it proceeds from a crasis or contraction. 

3. The aorist and the preterperfect retain their accent 

in the infinitive ; 

4. As likezvise in the participles ; 

5. And in the other moods, when the verbs happen to 

be dissyllables, and have the first syllable long, 

6. To these we may join the verbs in MI in the sub- 

junctive and the optative: 
7- And the compounds of ^i/At', e.vcept the present and 
the impei^ative. 

E X A ]Vf p L E s . 

1. Compound verbs draw back the accent of their simple to 
the antepenultima, as well as the nouns : as from ^/Aac/, sedeo, / 
sit ; )cd&ri[jit»i, the same : KsTf^xi jaceo, I lie down ; 'm^ly.ityuxi, circum- 
jaceo ; T^£vJ,oy, turn thou ; 'cs^lr^s-^ov, exhort thou : (poiOi, say thou ; 

ffvy.(pizQi, coTifess, &c. "Es-, mitte, send thou ; olipeq, >ca0£?, diraitte, 
let go; ^U, put thou; aoilxOss, quit thou : ^o<;, give ; aiiolosy restore. 

2. But the circumflex accent remains oftentimes on the same syl- 
lable, or that which is corresponding to it, as well in the derivatives 
as in the compounds, when it happens to be on the last : thus 
from rsXa), / >will send, it remains in rfA8/x,a/ : u7tos-£Xu>, o^'TrorjAS- 
fxoci, &c, or when it results from a crasis or contraction ; as av^Oxu, 
cvi^Xoiq, a-v)i9Xcc, to break : t7£§:o-7rft)/!xa/, to bend, to shorten : Jtto^- 
y^\^ot.i, to leap upon : iTravo^Otiv, to correct, to rectify : 'cj^o^iT, he 
pours all out, &c. 

3. The aorists and preterits retain also the accent of their simple, 
in the first place, in all sorts of infinitives ; as itvai, to be, to go ; 
o.itiimi, to retire ; ii<7Civ(x.i, to eider (but if the penultima happen id 
be short, the accent is changed into an acute ; as octtievxi, z'i<Tmui, 
because the circumflex cannot be upon a short syllable) : avaQmon, 
to have ascended : zsx^xltSoaQa.i, 'asx^a.^oBrimt^ to be given, to be deli- 
vered; 'ssoc^uIhvoci, zja§a^6a9xi, to give, to deliver : umvlui, they have 
been sent axmy. 

4. In the participles ; as zIkus, one that has sent : l^nxui, one 
that has sent back,' viAsr^, having sent ; uwiAivB^, having released, 

or 



Of the Accents of Verbs. 455 

or (hsmissed : ysyov<lfij born ; 'aooytyovax;, jirst horn : iSaj, a.y(x^a,(;y xx- 
rxCois, having mounted^ having descended : a-vXXr)(p9s'n, taken^ com* 
j)risedy conceived ^ &€. 

5. Those two tenses retain likewise the accent of their simple in* 
the other moods, when they are dissyllable, and the first happen 
to be long ; as ety^^ov, I had ; v.a\i1yof^ I contained : oc^sTxXf in the 
preterperfect, and ccfpwac-, in the aorist, / have dismissed: yi(pXf I 
have touched f I have Jiistened ; xaO^^*, the same: Ty/Aa*, from tx- 
vsopLict, to come ; l:pTyiAOiif I am come : a(pi7xov, I have carried avoay ^ 
xaieT'Troyy I have accused', a-wrixa, I have understood: 'm^oaQu^xi, to 
adjoin: 'amia-^oy^ I have taken, I have comprehended : (/.flsaxov, I 
have partaked. But cvvot'^x, conscius sum, / am conscious, I am 
guilty, has an acute on the antepenultima, though its simple oT^«, 
/ know, has a circumflex^ 

6. Verbs in yn retain also the accent of their simple in the sub- 
junctive and the optative ; as zu^otiOu, addam or adder em ^ \ts^^^, 
lifitZj, super addam, super addiderit. 

But it is to be observed, that they write a,'noQti(x7)y, ccTro9t7'>, 
a-rrofiErTo, according to the conjugation of the verbs in y.ty or kiro- 
Go//>t>5v, a-TTo^o/o, aiToOoilo, according to the barytonous conjugation.. In 
like manner ccnoQuy^ai, hy^ '^^rxt, or a'no9co[A(zt, airo^^, awoGyjTa/ ; and 
some others that draw back the accent, in the same manner as the 
barytonous verbs. For which reason we meet with zj^^^ut, 'sy^ivt 
and 'zu^oufjLxt, zT^ori, zT^ovixt, jjnsmiserimy is, it, &c, 

7. The verb eI/xI retains its accent in its compounds, except the 
present and the imperative : aw^v, aberam j kitrts or aTrijaflfat, aberas ; 
a'lri-a.i, aherit- ; kixu, absim, &c. 

But the present and the imperative draw it back ; as a'jTEiiJ.t) ab- 
sum J a'nrsi, uverij x'tti^Ij ov ccrrsi, abi, &c. 

ANNOTATION. 

oZ, the imperative middle of the verb ecu mitto, lo send, preserves Its circum- 
flex ir. the compounds of a monosyllable preposition, according to the ^molo- 
gist J as -ErpocrS admittito, receive or admit thou j ^po5 praemiltito, send before. 
But it is drawn back in the compounds of a preposition of two syllables ; as 
u<pii,letgo; kclQh send down, snallo-jv dozen, taken from-the dissyllable prepoii- 
tions Koid and dm. 



E 



CHAP. IX. 

Of Enclitics, 



iNCLITICS are certain particles, which so adhere to the pre- 
ceding word, that they seem united to it, and to make but one. 
Hence the word that sustains them, sustains also, as much as possi- 
ble, the accent that governs them. 

Hence it follows, that as after the acute there cannot be more 
than two syllables, nor after the circumflex more than one, when 
by this union of enclitics there is an addition of syllables at the end 
of a word, its accent being no longer capable of reaching so far as 

§ *■ the 



A56 Booit IX. Of Accents. 

the end of these syllables, it Is proper it should have a new one, il" 
possible. 

Thus it happens, that when the acute is on the antepenultima, 
or the circumflex, on the penultima, the enclitic, which is joined af- 
terwards, ought to lend its accent to this word, in order to be 
united to it ; as avQ^eovos jws, ctmijA [/.h ; uvO^ifi'ifcx; Wi} a-w[ji.oi s~f» 
Where it is to be observed, that /xS, which of its own nature 
has a circumflex, throws back only an acute (which, as Quintilian 
observes, is what is most predominant in the circumflex) as well be- 
cause the preceding syllable is frequently incapable of a circumflex, 
as because this accent cannot be followed by a syllable long by na 
ture, such as [as, which is joined to the same word. 

But if the penultima happen to have an acute accent, then the 
enclitic of two syllables preserves its accent, as a»6gW7r« Ir/, 7.oy(^ 
In, by reason that this acute cannot reach so far as the end of these 
two additional syllables. 

But if the enclitic is a monosyllable, it seems then to be a dis- 
putable point. Modern grammarians maintain that this monosyl- 
lable always loses its accent, as ?\oyos ixa, oovQ^wna fxa. But the 
ancients have not declared themselves sufficiently upon the subject : 
and I do not know whether this rule will not bear a distinction, in 
order to conform to the general analogy of pronunciation ; which is, 
that if after this acute on the penultima, there follow a short mo- 
nosyllabic enclitic, it really loses its accent, as Xoy<^ rt^ fviflu as; 
not only because the preceding accent may very well- govern these 
syllables, but also, because the enclitic cannot possibly throw its 
accent on the last syllable of this word, it being contrary to all soFt 
df reason, that there should be two acutes successively, that is, two 
elevations of the voice, without an intermediate depression. Whereas, 
if there follow an enclitic long by nature, after this acute on the 
penultima, it being contrary to the analogy of the Greek tongue, 
that when there is a depression of two syllables after the accent, 
the last should be long; it seems then that the enclitic ought to pre- 
serve its own accent, as Aoy©- [/.a : which appears still more reason- 
able, when the final of the word itself is long, as kvOouirH pi5; be- 
cause otherwise there would be four measures of depression after 
the accent, which never happens an\' where else, either in Greek or 
Latin, But herein I submit to the judgment of the learned, as v/ell* 
as to the general practice of printing. 

If the accent happen to be on the last, either acute or circum- 
flex, undoubtedly the following enclitic, whether of one or two 
syllables, always loses its own accent.; because the accent of the 
word being thus on the final syllable, has strength suflicient to 
sustain the voice so far as the enclitic, whether it be of one' or 
of two syllables. 

Thus much is sufficient for the analogy of enclitics in general, 
tlM)ugh we shall endeavour to give a more particular explication of 
them in the following rules. 



R U L £ 



Of Enclitics. 457 

Rule XVIIL 
Which are the enclitics. 
- The enclitics are ri?, nmy and tS tw, 

n/^, OToOfk, to/, zcoOf, yi, Ti, 20-ws", Txryj", zira, 'zzrw ; 

77^e present of oni^i and ili/.i, except (fi,^, sT; 

Monosyllable pronouns^ except o-u, and (r<poo the dual 
of the second person ; and among the poets ^h, pd, x/v, 
with so7ne others. 

Examples. 

There are enclitics almost in all parts of speech : thus 

Nouns; as ris, aliqids, t*, aiiqiiid, through all numbers and 

persons, when it is not interrogative; as also the article ts, for rms, 

aliciijus ; ru, for nvl, alicui. 
Pronouns : all the primitives that are monosyllables, excepfc 

cv; as 

fA,8, fd,9fy /AS, mei, mihi, me, me, 

(Ta, G-ohj (Tij tui, tibi, se, thee. 

2, oT, f, sui, sibi, se, himself. 

<r(p£, a-(pca, a^pusj hi the dual of the third person. 

(For o-?;^ of the second person is not an enclitic.) 
X(pi(Ti, acplv and cr^i, in the dative plural of the third person. 
Some add here also o-^as- taken from a-(p£cx.s. 
Verbs; as siu.i, l-i, siimj est, [si, es, is excepted), 

est is or sunt duo. 

ilo-i, sianus, estis, sunt. 

dico, dicitj (<p^<;, dicis, is excepted). 

dicitis, or dicunt duo. 

(paa-iy dieimus, dicitis, dicunt. 

Adverbs; as -cjo^/v 'o^o^e, from whence; zyors, sometimes j 'zsuq, 
hoXv ; S7-J5, ivhich xvai/ ; -ijooi and -Eja", in some place ; zsui also. 

But when these adverbs are used in interrogation, they are no 
longer enclitics; ms gso^zv t^^hlxi \ xvke7ice comes he? tsS sOxn; tvhere 
did he die? 

CoNJUNC.TiONs; as -cjEf , although^ indeed; yi, at least, indeed; 
r? and Ss'y, ^r5v, px, vv, rol, and such like expletive particles, 
which are particularly used by the poets^ or in compound words ; 
as oys, vroi, eiVep, &C. 

ANNOTATION. 

There are other enclitics, which may be observed in poetieal writings,, and 
especially iu Homer ; as fxiZ, cnv, or tsw, to], eS, eo, y-iv, viv, vv, ks, xjv, Ivti, 
<pint, <i>a.vriy nrtv for t5 or Ti>#; indefinite, with -{k for a<^tj and perhaps some 

others. 

SN Rule 



ifOV, 


ifOV^ 


Ic-fxh, 


is-i, ^ 


(py,l^(, 


(pnori, 


(pocrovj 


OXTGVf 


(px^^iv, 


fOCT'c, 



458 Book IX. Of Accents, 

Rule XIX. 

When the circumflex is on the penultima, or the 
acute on the antepenultima. 

1. When the cireumfie.v is on the penultlma, or the 
acute on the antepenultima, the enclitic gives its 
accent to the preceding word ; 

£, E^VCept iVfKKf UViKSCy EVBKOi, 

Examples. 

1. The enclitic coming after a word that has a circumflex on 
the penultima, or an acute on the antepenultima, throws back its 
accent on the last syllable of this same word ; as SSxos o-«, i/our ser- 
vant ; Kv^iog en, it is the Lord. 

2. Nevertheless, after aWa, smxas, »i/£>c«, the enclitic preserves 
its accent; as eysxa o-», because of you, &c, 

ANNOTATION. 

The reason of this is obvious : for o-S being governed by 'irntit, it ought not ta 
be joined together in one word with it j it being very proper, that that which go- 
verns, and that which is governed, should be two distinct things. 

Wherefore, after the prepositions, the enclitic retains also its accent, as like- 
wise when it is preceded by a disjunctive conjunction ; as Kal« (xz^ n o-s, according 
to me or ihee : /sxifi era, v |w5, of you or me : avrl t/ttS ^ a-a, for you and me. Of 
which there are innumerable examples in Stephen's New Testament, and in al! 
the other books which they printed from the excellent manuscripts of the King's 
library, and which have been faithfully copied by all the rest. 

Rule XX. 

When the acute is on the penultima. 

JFhen the penultima is acuted, the monosyllable en- 
clitic loses its accent ; but the dissyllable preserves it ; 

as oiv^^oc 0-3 J Xoyf^ If/, 

Examples. 

^Vhen a word h^g an acute on the penultima, the enclitic of^ 
one syllable loses i!S accent ; as Xoy^ fx», mi/ discourse / aj>5^« 
an, your husband; y^i^^ n, some part. 

But a word of two syllables keeps its accent ; as Xo'y©- Wl, it is 
(I discourse; ^uoiv o iSK Ik 'sjirsus oiiAx^lIx Irt, Rom. i. n^hatsoever 
proceeds notJromfo,ith is sin, 

ANNOTATION. 

I follow here the common opinion, concerning which I refer the reader to what 
has been said in the beginning of the chapter. 

There are some who think, that if the, penultima be long by position, and the 
last short, the enclitic throws back its accent on the last syllable of this word ; 
ag a.v'^a, fA,oi, av^^'riva : but this rule is exploded by many j and we may venture 
to say, t;hat it is visibly fklse, and contrary to the nature and general analogy of 
pronunciation, because it puts two acutes and tv«ro elevations successively. 

Rule 



(y Enclitics. . 459 

Rule XXL 

When the acute or the circumflex is on the final. 

When an acute or a circuvifle.v is at the eiid of a word, 
the fallowiJig enclitic has no accent ; but then the acute 
is not, as usually, changed into a gi^ave. 

Examples. 

When a word is marked with an acute or a circumflex on the 
iinal syllable, the enclitic, which follows, loses its accent. But 
the acute continues without being changed into a grave in the 
iniddle of the period, as is usually practised : because it must raise 
this final syllable of the word, in order to predominate in the fol- 
lowing enclitic, so as to make, of the two, but one word, at least 
with respect to the pronunciation ; as Geo? (puo-/, God saySy and not 
0£o? ^wo-*, nor 050? (p>j£7t. In like manner, Qtu ^u-a, to my God: l«* 
cot, tjooe be to thee : QeS yd^ la-iAsVfJbr we belong to God, &c. 
ANNOTATION. 

I comply here likewise with the common opinion, though it is very probabl^^ 
.that when after a circumflex on the last, there follow an enclitic dissyllable, 
it ought to preserve its accent; as ©e« <|>»)irt, cp£ rivai: because this circumflex 
having already had a depression on the last syllable of the preceding word, it is 
difficult to conceive how it can have two syllables more of depression. 

Rule XXII. 
When there happen to be several enclitics successively. 
When two enclitics go together, the accent of the last 
must be transferred to thejirst. 

Examples. 

When two or more enclitics follow one another, the accent of the 
last is given to that which precedes ; that is, an acute or a circum- 
flex, if the syllable require it ; as Ti/Vlscri i^s rms, somebody strikes 
me : a-u/fjicx, [aS nvx a-u^stv ^vvxroct* 

Kv^ioq ^3 £>/, it is my lord : and then these enclitics throwing 
back their accents upon one another, the last must of course go 
without, as may be seen in the last example. 

ANNOTATION. 

I speak here according to the common opinion, and to the practice which now 
obtains ; though, according to the general principle above explained, it appears 
to me, that it is really the general analogy of the language, never to have two 
successive elevations : pursuant to which I should choose to say Kv^nig fAn k^i, 
without accenting fA,y, rather than Ku^ios jm,s Ir', &c. 

And my conjecture may be supported by several examples of the New Testa- 
ment, in the royal editions of the Louvre of Rob. Stephen and Plantin ; and io 
Pasor's Remarks; as MaQnlat /«.« Irs, J^oan, xxi. Miprup yap f/,ot i^lv o ©eoj, 
Rom. i. 9. ^la-)(v^QTsp6g fA.s sg-iv, Matth. iii. 11. 'O 'sraga^/S'a? fxB a-oi, Joan. xix. 
-11. Mr) rig fxs ^o|>i cl<pfeva, sTvca, 2 Cor. xi. 16. where ^w.? retains its accent; and 
several others, which are not errors of transcribers, but remains of the old pro- 
nunciation. 

These authorities may he further corroborated from reason, if we do but con- 
sider well {he nature of enclitics. Forsjnce an enclitic implies no more than to 
adhere in such a manner to the preceding word, as to make, as it were, but ope 
word with it; one would think that this property cannot easily agree with several 

words 



460 Book IX. Of Accents. 

words successively, and therefore when one of these enclitic words has preceded, 
and is joined to the fores nng: word, the following can no longer be considered as 
an enclitic, but as a separate word, which therefore ought to retain its own parti- 
cular accent, in the same manner as they retain it in the government of preposi- 
tions, as wr iiixe -I eaviv observed. Though in this, as in every thing else, I 
subm t tu tlie jud^nient of the learned. 

I have only one tiung fniiher to add, as a proof of these rules having been fre- 
quently forged by modern grammarians, or adapted to their conveniency, which 
is, that n i only the ancients, but even those of the last century, do not alwayji 
agree wih tliem, as appears from Vergara, a very learned grammarian, who 
flourished about a hundred and fifty years ago. 

II. Whether voe ought to pronounce the two accents, luhich are marked 
upon n voordjollowed by an enclitic. 
It is proper to take notice here, that whenever an enclitic throws back its 
accent on the-end of a word, it ought always to be pronounced, notwithstanding 
the opinion of modern grammarians. Vergara says, that they ought both to be 
pronounced as much as possible, and I believe he is in the right. But if one only 
is to be pronounced, I think it ought rather to be the last than the first. 

III. When the enclitic does not throw back its accent. 

The enclitics frequently retain their accent, withont throwing it back on the 
preceding word, which happens, 

1. To avoid a cacophony j as «t£ e'? KatVaga <n ^/j,a^roVj Act. xxv. / have 
commilted no crime against Cccsnr : where t; retains its accent, by reason that if 
it cast it back, the sound would be very disagreeable. 

2. To give a greater emphasis; as lixx' h pi^a ers, Rom. xi.but it is the root 
that bears you : where cri retains its accent : o I Jo0» s-oj, 1 Tim. iv. which has been 
given you ; where chi retains it also. 

The enclitics preserve likewise their accent in the beginning of a period, and 
even after a comma, because then they are no longer enclitics, since they do not 
adhere to the preceding word; as coi Ma-ca, Luke iv. / will give thee, Nsav/y- 
«£, a-ol "Kiyui, lyifQrli, Luke xiv. Young man, I say unto thee,. arise ; e-ot retains its 
accent, because it cannot be joined to vsavierKS in the construction, but to Xeya?, 
which governs it ; hence it does not adhere to the preceding word, but agrees 
with the following, and therefore is not an enclitic. 

But I fancy, that [f the foregoing ins'ances be properly considered^ they tvill greatly 
corroborate nhnt ive'hov^^ advanced above, namely ^ that those enclitics are not always 
enclitics, and that the rules zvhich are given concernbig them, are not always agree- 
able to the prtictice of the ancients : so that we have reason to be upon our guard, 
whenever we see them repugnant to the natural principle abovementioned. 

Rule XXIII. 

When is-t takes an accent. • 

JVhe7i if I is at the beginning of a period, its first syl- 
lable is 7narked tcith an acute; as also xvhen it follows 

these Words^ bk^ ^AAcs, si, cJ;, ^c, r^ro j eV'; j^£v l r^r 

-31 
ifi. 

Examples. 

When a period begins with IV/, its first syllable is marked with 
an acute ; as eV* /-tsK, est quidem. Likewise when eV* follows these 
words «>c o-AXa, &c. as a>c IV' ^vnrQ<;, he is not mortal : aXX' IV^v tmrv, 
but we may say : rSr IV' ; but we say also in one word raVri} it is 
even this. 

But if the final is not cut off, rSro hh then In has no accent, 
but throws it back upon re, according to the foregoing rule. 

Rule 



(y Enclitics. 46I 

Rule XXIV. 
Of words that have no accent. 

1. *0, >i, 0*, at, £t, elg, k, Iv, a, hHj h;^, cJ,-, Ik, Ig, 

hai'e }w accent : 

2. But a /^^At5 flfw «CM/e at the close of a period ; 

as likezvise Ig at the end of a verse. 

Examples. 

1. All the above monosyllables are without an accent ; but the four 
first, which are the nominative masculine and feminine of the pre- 
positive article singular and plural, and w?, ut, as, have a rough 
breathing, the rest a smooth one. 

2. Nevertheless a takes an acute at the end of a period, as also 
/I at the end of a verse, 

ANNOTATION. 

All those words however may have the accent of the following enclitic, pursuant 
to the precedins: rules, ws-tts^, sicut, as ; s'hig, si quis, if any body, &c. 

"Slq admits also of an accent on various occasions. 1. When it follows the 
^ord to which it refers : tiTi'KvA.u^ oog, like an hatchet. 2. AVhen it is employed 
in similes; as xi eiTrav, ks <poiro, as H^a <pmh<ra.Sf having thvs spoke, &c 3. Whea 
it is joined t > tiU or f/.n^e. 'AAX' aX'' a5?, bul not even so. 4. When we sa^ Ij-jy a;;, 
this may be in some measure. 

And the reason of this is, because ax; mth the accent is taken for tiq, which used 
to be nut i'lslead of aTcuc, thus, as Henry Stephen observes^ aud as may be seen in 
several passages of Homer. For which reason zvhen ws is put also for o]ua)?, tamen, ne- 
vertheless, il requires an accent, and some even insist upon its being a cifcumfiex, 
as resulting from the juncture of two syllables ; but Henry Stephen is of a different 
&piHion, and it is more probable that it is a syncope, than a contraction. 

Rule XXV. 

Of breathings. 

1. The article and the relative, 2. the letters J, 3, and 
p, require a rough breathing. 

4. £ at the beginning of pronouns has a smooth breath- 

ing ; as also ecvrS;. 

5. All the other pronouns have a rough breathing; as 

also t, se, himself. 
G, The sylUibic augment \ has a smooth breathings 

except icavioc. 

7. oi in cijmpounds has also a smooth breathings except 

8. The ^It tic £ reduplicated, takes the breathing of the 

verb 
Q. Ptxpositions are marked with a smooth breathing ; 
10. As also conjunctions^ except a few^ 

Exam- 



A6Q Book IX. Of Accents. 

Examples. 

We shall only mention a word or two in regard to breathings, 
leaving the rest to the use of authors, or dictionaries. Only ob- 
serve, tliat the breathing of the nottiinative goes through all the 
other cases, as that of the present is generally continued in all the 
tenses ; and that of the primitive through all the derivatives and 
compounds. 

But we must also observe, , 

1. That the article o, », and the relative o?, v, o, have always 
a rough breathing. For Z, which is in the room of a vocative, 
is not an article, but an adverb. The article has only a breath- 
ing in those cases which begin with a vowel ; and only an accent 
in those which begin with a consonant, as tw; whereas the relative . 
has always a breathing and an accent together, as «, &c. 

2. All words beginning with the vowel y, have also a rough 
breathing ; the other vowels and diphthongs have more frequently 
a smooth one. 

3. Among the consonants there are four which take a rough 
breathing, viz. the three mutes w, x, r, (for which there have 
bee« characters purposely invented, <p, ^, &, so that there is no 
occasion for our treating further of them here) and the letter ^ 
in the beginning of words, as fUfAV), robur, strength. But if in the 
middle of a word, there happen to be two successively, as in woppoij, 
the former takes a smooth breathing, because it terminates the pre- 
ceding syllable; and the latter has a rough breathing; concerning 
which I refer the reader to what has been said Book I, chap, viii. 

4. All pronouns that begin with an c, have a smooth breath- 
ing ; as lyw, l^e, me ; kervo?, he : as also uvrlsi ipse, himself. 

5. All the other vowels of the pronouns have a rough breath- 
ing ; as i9/Af<~r, nos, xve ; ^roq, ille, he; likewise s, se, himself: 
whence its compound Ikvt5„ and by aphseresis avrS sui ipsius, 
takes also a rough one. 

6. A in composition has commonly a smooth breathing ; as 
uitoLiSi xvithout children. These two however are rough; ahvcris, 
a chain : ^^»3?, for a/^u?, pluto, hell. 

7. The syllabic augment e has also a smooth breathing; as 
sTvirlovt lrs\ii(psiv, &c. But erxKocy the preterperfect of trviiJUf sto, 
to stand, as well as its derivatives Irotu?, Wu^i stans, have a rough 
one : from thence also comes Ir'fuiw, to stand stedfast. 

8. The Attic s prefixed to verbs, which begin with an o or u, 
retains the breathing of the present , as o^oicu, I see : bu^xkcc, I 
have seen; ohoy^piu, pincerna sum, / am a cup-bearer ; iuvo^eit 
I did pour out tvine. 

9. Prepositions and conjunctions have likewise a smooth breath- 
ing, except a few, such as I'yx, ottu^j htKOty &e. which must be 
learned by practice. 



CHAP. 



Observations regarding the Accents, 463 

CHAP. X. 

Observations in regard to Accents and the Dis- 
tinction of Words. 

I. That the accents are useful in pointing out the quan- 

tity and ^oxv. 

At is proper to observe here, that as the rules of quantity are 
the foundation of the rules of accents : in like manner the ac- 
cents are frequently of use, in leading us to the knowledge of 
quantity, by rising from the effect to the cause. For instance^ 
Vihen the acute is on the antepenultima, we may infer that the last 
syllable is short, save only the^ Attic words, which have been al- 
ready excepted. 

The last is likewise short, when the penultima is circumflexed ; 
and, on the contrary, it is long itself, when marked with a cir- 
cumflex. 

The last is also long, when a penultima long by nature is 
only marked with an acute ; by reason that if the last was short, 
the penultima would be circumflexed. 

But when the last is short by nature, and the penultima is only 
acuted, we may conclude that the penultima is also short; be- 
cause if it were long, it would have a circumflex. Of all which, 
examples may be seen above, and therefore it is unnecessary to 
repeat them here. 

We may likewise find out the quantity of the nominative 
singular by the accent of the other cases, or of the other numbers ; 
and that of a primitive by its derivatives, or vice versa. Thus 
we see, that the nouns in ir*??, not formed of a verb, have the 
penultima long; as 'csoXir-nsy a, a citizen, because in the plural 
this r is circumflexed, tjoXTrxt: wherefore the feminine, which is 
taken from these nouns, has also a circumflex, 'cj^xTrts, a she citizen. 
Thus v£av, juvenis, a young man, has the last long by nature, be- 
cause we say va^vo? in the genitive, with a circumflex on the 
penultima : as nxv\cx,q^ and veavjo-xo?, », a young man, have also a, 
long in the second syllable. 

II. That the etymology often leads us to the know- 

ledge ()f quantity and accents. 

By the knowledge of etymology, and the origin of words, tve 
may attain to that of quantity and accents, and frequently even 
of orthography. Thus we see that pxQvfAos, idle, effeminate, must 
be written with an a subscribed in the first syllable, and a S in the 
second, because it comes from p^hos, easy, and ^y^oi-, heart or mind. 
Thus ue say acvrvi with a rough breathing, because it comes from n 
eovrri, haec, she : tst«, because it comes from tS «yr5 : ^roi as coming 
from ohocvToi, &c. 

But the dialects frequently change the accent and the breathing, 
as also tiie orthography, as we shall see hereafter. 

III. That 



46'4 Book IX. Of Accents. 

III. Thai the accent atid breathing help to dlstingmah 
seve7\il xvordSi 

The accent and breathing are frequently of use in distlnguisli- 
ing several words from one another; as £?, if; eJ, es, thou art ; 
0, hie, he; 0, quod, luhich : w, haec, she ; ^, quae, which; v, vel, 
or, quam, than, alioqui, otherwise ; ?i dixit, he has said, or erat, 
he was ; v, sit, he may be ; r, ciii, to whom; suae, &c. qua, which 
'way; ubi, where ; as aho how, iji order to, inasmuch as, &c. 

In like manner, aAAa, but; aXXx, alia, other things ; a>{xo<;, h, 
the shoulder; w^o'?, cruel: l-x^qa., hostile things : e^&^x, enmity : tl<7», 
he goeth ; ua'i, they are : h^Ivu, I judge ; apivM, I will judge ; r^sC?---?; 
rack ov torment ; f^sCx-n, rt^, crooked : (^u6v, alive; ^coovy an animal : 
TiZlos, TO, glory ; kv^o^, o disgrace : /iCov», alone ; (xovv, a mansion. 

ly. That some xvords happen to have the same accents in 
different significations. 

Sometimes words are neither distinguished by the accent, nor 
by the breathing ; the difference therefore must be found out by the 
sense, and by the context ; as », ubi, where; «, cujus, of whom : 
rirs, eratis, ye were; vtrs, sitis, ye may be: J^syvars, investigatis, 
ye search ; l^ivvSire, investigate, search ye : 'yiyuo'x.iiq-i, cognoscuot, 
they know; yivua-Kuc-t, cognoscentibus, to those that know: h r^ 
^\i-^£i (in the dative singular) f ^a/\]^e< (third, sing. fut. act. indi- 
cat.) crs E%6^o? era, Deut. xxviii. 57. in the affliction wherewith 
thy enemy will oppress thee : 'c^tla-oij.ai,. I will persuade, or / will be- 
lieve or obey, taken from 'cssiQu; tseia-oij.txi, I shall siiffer, for tir*)- 
o-o^a;, taken from 'cj-hQco, whence comes 'csc/.(y/jj:,to sujfer : yi zslicnqy 
su?, a jjotion or draught ; o rsoa-is, log, a husband : ,uv3v, tievertheless ; 
(/.Yiv, vivoq, a month : i-naai Ivo (aorist of the first active) they pre- 
sented two of them, Acts i. 23. ol Irvia-av 'ziroppuQev (aorist of the 
second active) who stood at a distancefrom him, Luke xvii. 12. 

V. Other means to distinguish words. 

Since we are upon this subject, it will not be improper to ob- 
serve, that there are several other methods of distinguishing be- 
tween words, as by the gender : aX?, uXos o, salt ; uXs, aXo^, n 
the sea : ^oiro(;, e, r,, a bramble bush ; ^a,ros, a, o, a sort of liquid 
measure. 

By the vowel : tl^roci, », with an omega, the back ; voros, «, 
the south wind. 

By the consonant : voSoj, a, spurius, a bastard ; vLrog, a, the south 
imnd. . 

By the diphthongs : ett/, upon ; IWi, xvhereas. 

And those who follow the right pronunciation, as pointed out 
and explained in the first book, have this advantage, that not only 
they contract in a very short time the habit of distinguishing a vast 
mliltitude of words; but that even in pronouncing they render the 
distinction sensible to their hearers. 

THE 



[ i^5 ] 

THE 

THIRD PART of this BOOK. 

Of DIALECTS and POETIC LICENCES. 

CHAR XL 

Of the four Dialects in general, 

- TT HAT regards the particular of each dialect, has been al- 
ready sufficiently explained in its respective' plaCe in the pre- 
ceding books: yet it is proper to make a recapitulation, in 
order to give the reader a general idea thereof; and to 
point out at the same time the different countries or provinces 
where those dialects obtained, as also the authors that made use of 
them. 

1. The Attic is that which was used at Athens, and in the adja- 
cent country. The principal writers in this dialect, are Thucydidcs, 
Aristophanes, Plato, Isocrates, Xenophon, and Demosthenes. 

2. The Ionic differed very little from the ancient Attic; but 
having afterwards found its way to some towns of Asia Minor, 
and to the adjacent islands, which were colonies of the Athenians 
and Acl)aians (among which are reckoned Samos, JMiletus, Ephe- 
sus, Smyrna, and some others), it imbibed, as it were, a new tinc- 
ture, and fell greatly short of that delicacy, which the Athenians 
afterwards attained to. Hippocrates and Herodotus made use of 
this dialect, 

3. Tile Doric was used first among the Lacedaemonians, and 
the inhabitants of Argos ; afterwards in Epirus, Lybia, Sicily, 
Rhodes, and Crete. Th?s dialect was used by Archimedes and 
Theocritus (both of Syracuse) and Pindar. 

4. The iEoJic was spoken at first among the Boeotians and their 
neighbours; it passed afterward-s into iEolia, a province t)f Asia 
Minor, between Ionia and Mysia, which included ten cities, all 
Greek colonies. The chief writers were Sappho and Alceus, 
of whose works very little is now extant. But we find it 
also occasionally mingled in Theocritus, Pindar, Homer, and 
others. 

The difference of times has introduced a great difference into 
these very dialects. For instance, in the Attic, the style of Demos- 
thenes is quite another thing from that of Thucydides : and the 
Ionic dialect, as observed above, has not continued invariably the 
same; those of Asia speaking it differently from the old lonians of 

3 O Greece, 



466 Book IX. Of Dialects. 

Greece, who followed the ancient language of Athens. The same 
may be said of the Dorians and Cohans. 

But as to what regards these four dialects in general, we shall 
coinprise all that is proper to remark upon the subject, in the fouv 
following rules. 

Rule XXVI. 
General properties of the Attic dialect. 

1. The Attic dialect loves contractions, 

2. As also the joining of words : 

3. It often changes o- ino g, ^, and r : 

4. It casts azvay i from ai, n : 

5. It changes o into w : 

6. It Joins »v to the end of words : 

7. And I to the end of adverbs. 

Examples. 

1. The Attics love contractions, and to their dialect priocipally 
belong the contracted nouns, and circumflex verbs, of which we 
have treated in the second and third books. 

2. But they are not only fond of contracting syllables in the same 
word, they likewise unite different words by a figure called syna- 
LiEPHA, of which there are seven different sorts. 

The 1st by elision, when a vowel or diphthong between two 
words is cut off: r^avTo for to uvr6, idem, the same: xsis for xxi 
sU, & ad, and to. 

The 2d by crasis, when two vowels or diphthongs are mingled, so 
as not to retain the sound: r'as/^oi for ra. I/a^, mea, my goods i 
^^ti^ya for CT^o s^ya, operae pretium, xvorth xjohile : ^ifhOifjiw for 
'sj^oeliQeixnv, jiroponcbam. 

The 3d by synaeresis, when the syllables are united, so as 
to retain, nevertheless, all their letters : l<ir,ori'i^zc, tin^^hsf the 
Nereids. 

The 4'th by elision and crasis both together, when one vowel is 
dropt to make a contraction of the other two; l^ol e^o'xb, l^nlUzh 
it seemed to me : r« aAye®-, rwAyso?, doloris, of pain. 

The, 5th by elision and synerassis : l{xoi viro^vvsif IjuaTroSm/, mlhi 
subit, it comes into my mind. 

The 6th by crasis and synaeresis : o oclTidKoit uiroXo^, a goat-herd: 
iy cu ol^oCf lyu^ocf I knotv veyy tvell. 

The. 7th by elision, crasis, and sjmaeresis h tm AlQio'jric(, h 
rA^ioTtlay in jBthiopia. 

A.N N O T A T I O N. 

This synalsepha happens also without contraction, when the first vowel of the 
second word i^ rejected : /j.^ v^o for /w-Jj sv^&}, I do not find: (Mn 'Z!7{4>£j£jv for [xn 
fm<psp£iv,.not to impose : Sx vb§ for Z avi^, o man : a yaBi for u dyaSi my good friend. 
But this is practised chieily by poets. See Book I. Rule ix. 

Several of these contractions may occur likewise in the other dialects. But that 
which the Attics make in a, is rather in >?, according to the Dorics ; as /t^Tre for 5 eTTre 
and he said. 

The Dorics make also in v the contraction, which the Attics have in s : 'r'wv^vfA.ct 
for T6 hhMOr. garment : u \m for Ivw, /; w '2 for s|, qui tx% 

^ 3. The 



Of the Attic Dialect. 4^67 

3. The Attics change a- into |: |t% l{/.o^ for alv 1/w.o/, vjitk me: 
^yv£To?, for (jyvETo?, tcw^, prudenL 

Into f : ^appsTv for ^a^rfrv, confidere, ^o conjlde : appnv for clpcrmy 
male, &c. Nevertheless the ancient Attics used to put a- instead 
of^. 

, Into r: especially when there happen to be two era-: ^x?^rlx for 
^o(,X%<T(TXi the sea: irnxocirlu ioY 'cj^xcraui to do. 

4-. They sometimes cast off the subjunctive of the diphthongs 

eciy si\ ytKoLJw, aXdu, flco, tO tveep : Kociu, Kcla;, Uro, to humi 

sroiT^oq, arxooi, a friend. Likewise Is for e??, adj toxvards: isjUov, 
for ^XtTov, 7nore. 

ANNOTATION. 
The etj'mologist adds also ct; as -zetcw for 'woiui, In do: but this is seldom met 
with, except among poets ; no more than ztosXt-s for woisirz, ye do : 'srcav, for 
vroiuVf doing ; and the like. 

5. They change o into u : \ocoq, Xsug, the j^^ople : Mev/a^o?, Mevs- 
^6<y?, Menelaiis: vxos, vsuig, a temple ; and such like. Where may 
be likewise observed the change of a into s in the penultima, but 
this happens only when the a is long, for the reason above men- 
tioned, Rule III. 

6. They add the syllable h to the end of several words, giving 
it a circumflex accent, except in «V.«y, non, (to distinguish it from 
«x«v, therefore) and «^ev8v, imo vero. Thus they say, or/Sv for o, 
rty quid, "what : ovI/vSv for ovlivx quera, tvhich : oiroioah, qualis- 
cumque, tvhichsoever : oTroaZv, each, tvhich you please : uanr^'^vy in 
the same manner as, &c. 

7. They frequently join ; to the end of adverbs : iircoai, thus : 
vvvi, nunc, now : kxU non, and Ion. «x». Which they also prac- 
tise in regard to the pronouns aro? and hs^vos, ille, as we have 
made appear elsewhere. 

They say also yyv^j for vu» 5i, 72unc vei'o : o\|// for ox]// in com- 
pounds; as o-^iiAotB-n';) one that begins to study late in life, 
ANNOTATION. 

Besides this, the Attics have several phrases and expressions quite peculiar to 
themselves ^ some of which have been taken notice of in the syntax, and the 
rest must be learned by practice. 

Rule XXVII. 
Of the Ionic dialect in general. 

1. The lonians, on the contrary^ eMend and resolve 
words : therefore^ 

2. They drop a consonant, 

3. Or assujne an i\ 

4. And make tzvo syllables of one. 

5. They change bo and h into iv : 

6. Likewise a and s into jj. 

7. They add ai to the dative : 

8. Sometimes they assume, <ind sometimes they, drop i : 

9. They reject the aspirates : 

10. And 



468 Book IX. Of Dialects. 

10. Jnd put Tifor ur: ■ 

1 1. A?2d change the genitive x into otg. 

Examples. 

1. Tlie lonians are quite opposite to the new Attics in this, . 
that they delight to extend and resolve words; insomuch that they 
constantly resolve the contraction, saying '^E^^Uq for 'E^/A^jr, 
Mercury ; voos for vS?, the mind ; and always put the nouns and 
verbs u neon traded. 

2. They frequently reject a consonant, in order to produce a 
concourse of vowels ; as x^/oJoj, x-^lotosi carnis : rvirliixi, rviflixiy ver^ 
i^raris : Ae/^w, eXw, libo. 

3. And if they cannot reject the consonant, they insert an ?, in 
order to effect this hiatus or gaping: A/veiew. for A/v£*», i^neae, of 
jEneas ; j^/.iiazm for /xsam, musarum, ofihe muses. In like manner, 
K^Usov for K^UoVf the lily : ahxipeo^ for oohx<p6sf a brother : sv^x^zts for 
tvy.ocpis.Jacile ; ^/aeej, ive ; and such like. 

4. By the same analogy they resolve a long into as ; as aSXos 
for aSAoy, a battle : and they put at or e/ before tj in nouns ending 
in this long vowel, which is sometimes changed into at; as avay- 
y.xivif or avxyy^aioi, for a.voiyK'/i^ necessity. 

In .short, by the same analogy, they resolve the diphthongs, 

6/ into vji : /y,v)9ju£rov, (xniJ.'hlovi a monument : kKyi^riioc for xK-n^sixy 

tiijith : xXj^'t'o;, for kXe/oj, to praise, to shut, 

cc into vi'i'i pT^toc, p'/ii^iosyjhcile : <S>§ci^, 0^*j<|, a Thracian, 

li) into 01,01 : wS'/5, c6o<S>j, tx song, - ^ 

otv into uv '. IfJiuvTsa for IjutayTs, mei ipsilis : ^uvjj.oc for S^atJ/xa, a 

oniracle or uionder, 

5. They change so and «intO£y; 'a'hiovy £v ; 'CTAeyv, more: 'ssXiovt^, 
'aXsvnq. plures : 'aoitici, 'znoisixri, faciunt, they do, 

6. They change a into»j: t«//,e/*?? for ra/xEiaj?, a steward : «j-^t)i5? 
for 'uy^xvq, mild : hmovos for ^tctKovos, a minister or deacon, 

Likfuise into c: ^moi^at from Seew, the same with ^eaoju.*/, ^o 
contemplate, to admire ; t;tiov for Tilav : T^tjI for <5fa|, a spar-haivk : 
Xiviv for A/'av, "y^n/ much, - 

7. Thev form the dative plural of parisyllabic nouns in o-/ : Xoyotat, 
fj.iff'^iai for Xoyoi?, /lAwcra/?, &c. See Book II. Chap. iii. and iv. 

8. Sometimes they insert »: xeaos for ksvos, empty: z'lus for jfa;^, 
witil: zmytcjc, for EKE^a, gratia, yor the sake of: nsaolxf or '^^ro^/} for -cyoa, 
grass. 

Sometimes they reject it : a'rroh^is for a7ro5£i|/s-, demonstration : 
fjis'^wv, ;cfi'7-<7&;v, wXeVv for i^si^uv^ bigger; K^ilcrauy, better; ^XiiuVi 
more : S^Asa tor ^-nXsioc^feinale, &c. 

9. They rt^ect the aspirates : Im^oiv for i^o^ocv, to seC) to, look 
into, 

10. They put k for -^ : nwq for '57,^^^, /iotu. 

11. They form jn o/o, instead of «, the genitive of the pari- 
syllables in or ; as Xoyo?, T^oya, ^oyo<o, discourse. 



Rule 



Of the Doric Dialect, 469 

Rule XXVIII. 

Of the Doric dialect in general. 

I , The Dorians change n, w, i\ o, and a into oc : 

12. They likexvise change n' into yi : 3. a and cch into w ; 

4. Thei/ cast axvay ifrom the infoiitive ; 

.5, Aiidput thefeminine ptural instead of the singular^ 

Ex A M P IvES. 

1. The Dorians make the vowel oe, predominate almost every 
where ; hence they put 

oc, for s : (jJyxQo(;, for (jiiysOoq, bigness : rdfAvco for te%vcj;, to cut : 
Tf^X« for Tf=;(^w, to run : and in this they and the lonians agree. 

Hence also they put « instead of £<, because the subjunctive 
vowel i^ not tlien considered ; as k\ew, kAs'w, claudo, future xXoco-m, 

or y.Xac^uj, for ycXsicru ; notieK^.oiaQvv for xalsKXiiaQriVf I ivas locked up. 

Thus for K^sis, a licy, they say jtAaf, whence comes the accusa- 
tive plural y.-Ka^ocq, keys : but they say likewise xAaiV, taken from 
the Ionic xX»3<?, clavis^ 

Qv, if they do consider the subjunctive vowel, the)'' change n 
into «< : i"ks, uUx, si: aire, sive, tohether^ coming from a? for 
jt, si: (pQxl^co for ^Sst^o;, to corrupt^ &c. which however is more 
rare. 

u for ^: lAoi)! for /^^ly, a month: 'usaiixd-i for 'cto//>i>5v, a shepherd: 
Koi^v^ for x*j^y|, a herald : lXoifji.xv for sXolixnv, from ocl^sco, to 
choose: £(pxv for £(p-nv, I have said. Which happens not only to 
the second syllable, but to the rest also : (pdixx for (pviiJiyi, fama, 
renoivn : ^xcrxs for l^a-xs, qui ligavit : dfj.as for r/xer?, jtos, &c. 
And this change is common to them with the -Cohans, with this 
difference, that the j3Iolians make a short, whereas the Dorians have 
it long. 

cc for : sIkccIi for siKoa-tf txuejiti/ : nacra, for 'lix or oWa?, quce^ 
ciimque. 

« for « : Am.'a for Alye/a, ^nece : %^vcrot. for ^fy^rs, &c. 

a for w, in the genitive plural of nouns that follow the feminine 
article : AmTixv for Atmuv : ri(Aoiy for n^Awv, honorumy &c. And 
elsewhere, noo-j/Sav for noo-s/oftJv, Neptune : zr^aros for -ct^wto?, ^rst, 
^c. 

2. They change bi into oj subscribed : KxQsv^riv for xafieyJfi;)', ^o 
5/eep ; AaCrjv for PiaCsrv, ^0 take, 

3. They change » into a: t^.uaxq for /x«cra?, musas : Xoyoiq for 
/voyyj, sermonesj &c. 

Likewise xv into w: w^:*| for avAa|, sulcus, « ridgef and by 
-eyncope a/X| : r^ufA<x for r^vaa, a tvound^ from t^w« for r^xlu* 

4. They cast away / from the infinitive: "KaQiv for XaCsry to 
take. 

5. They frequently put the plural of the feminine instead of the 
lingular-; ascXas for mT^-nv, pidchram ; cto^a? for o-ofvjv, sapientem, 

RuL^ 



479 Book IX. Of Dialects. , 

Rule XXIX. 
Of the iEoiic dialect in general. 

1. T//e TEoUans reject the aspiration ; 

2. And draw back the accent : 

3. They change a iJiio on : 

4. Likexvise oo-j into aicu : 

5. For ii(TSiv they take oktxv ; 

6. And put |3 before ^ : 

7. They change two ^,</, into two -mr : 

8. In sever at things they agree with the Dorians, 

and arefolloxced by the Latins. 

Examples. 

1. The ^olians reject the rough breathing, and are satisfied with 
the smooth one : V-V* ^*^^ V^^^ the day. 

2. They generally draw back the accent : -jsrora/T,©? for -^ora^os, 
a river : y.aXos for jcaXor handsome, 

3. They put oci for a only : y.x\ac,is for y.a.\oc<;, pidcJiras , y^iXczis 
for fAsXaSf black : raKociq for rsiAa?, miserahle. In like manner 'SJumTq 
for 'csiiva.q^ Tffj/varfor T72.va, from zyznxio to he liungry. 

'1. They put am for m in the genitive plural of riouns that fol- 
low the femine : ucviiv.cov, ixHJV.mf for amiajv, y.Hcruv\ jUSt as in the 
singular they resolve a into uo. 

5. They put otax for naoi. ; iviflotax. for ruTrJao'x, qu<^ 'verocrat ; 
{A.o7<rxv for fxtio-xv, miisam, &c. 

6. They put B fo"* f instead of the rough breathing: (S^ohv for 
p^ov, « rose : ^pvrrif for ^-tt)^, a bridle. Whence the poets say, 
xij.Qqoiof for 'nfj.x^lov, I have transgressed, from a^xcldvcoy to sin, 
changing the breathing, where you have also a transposition of ^, 
and a change of a into o. 

7. They change two />!./«, into two tttt: ott'ttxtx for 'l^^i-ixrce, the 
eyes, the sight. 

8. They agree in a great many things with the Dorians, and are 
followed by the Latins almost in every thing, as we have observed 
in the Latin grammar. Insomuch that if the writings of those who 
used this dialect had been transmitted down to u«, we should pro- 
bably discover a very great agreement between it and the Latin, not 
only with regard to the words, but likewise to the phraseology. 

ANNOTATION. 

We may therefore observe, according to Strabo, that, properly speaking, there 
are only two principal dialects ; the ^olic referring to the Doric, and the Ionic 
to the Attie. For the lonians, as we have observed already, were of Attica. 
Hence it is, that to this very day we give the name of Ionian Sea to that between 
Greece and Italy. 



CHAP. 



Of Poetic Licences, 47 1 

CHAP. XII. 

Of Poetic Licences, 

xjLFTER having treated of the principal dialects in general, it 
is proper to take notice of the licences commonly used by poets, 
which are much greater in the Greek than in the Latin tongue; 
which made Cicero, 2. de Oratore, say, that they spoke a sort of 
foreign language quite particular to themselves, and hardly at all 
understood by those who were not used to it. 

1. They lengtlien the short syllables, which is called h'y.rxo-is, 
extension, or ^/as-oX>5, diastole, lengthening, 

2. They shorten the long syllable, which is called cvroX-h, 
systole, sJiortening. To which we may refer as well the change of 
long vowels into short, as the resolution of diphthongs, though it 
be made not only in order to shorten, but likewise to multiply the 
number of syllables, which is called ^lotl^zaisy diuresis, or division, 

3. They cut off, add, or transpose the letters or syllables, as we 
have already hinted in the ninth chapter of the first book, and as we 
shall shew here more particularly, in such a manner as will render 
the writings both of poets and orators more easy to be understood*- 

I. 'Of the manner in which poets lengthen syllables, 

1. By changing the short vowels into their proper long ones, 
and a into '^, as we have seen on several occasions. 

2. By lengthening the three common vowels, «, /, v. 

3. By changing sat or se into ij ; as (pgyiroc, for (p^Uros, putei, 
from TO ^fsiK^, a well : K^vig for K^Uq,Jlesh, 

4'. By changing the short vowels, s, o, as likewise a or y, into 
diphthongs. 

Whether into st : 'E^^sfa? for 'E^f^six? : Mercury : \iJki7Q for lixtG:, 
mei, of me : ^ixsTes for '^i^ssc, nos : slx^ for I'a^, ver, the spring i 
which is taken from the lonians. 

Or into sy : as hvoiJixi for §£'o/>ia/, indigeo, / tirint : ivu. for rap, 
sine, let thou, permit thou : which comes from the Cohans. 

Or into on as y^Xoim for ysXocuv, ridens, laughing: hymnciv for 
rtyvd-nazvy ignoravit, he did not knovo. 

Or into «: «Aoc? for ^ois, hurtfid: sJA^^AsO* for lA>jAt'0«, / am 
arrived. 

Or into oti : aUro(; for azrlq, aquila, an eagle. 

Or into av : avus for oiuij the aurora : avroi§ for ar^f : which 
comes from the ^olians. 

5. By reduplicating the same consonant; as 5, I'^Si/o-cv for Hhi- 
CSV) he tvas ctfraid : X, 'ixxa^sv for eXxQiv, he has received: /a-, ct^- 
/M,of©- for (x^o^(^i unhappy ; and in like manner the rest. 

6. By inserting another consonant: 'cfloXiCy «7)oA£/xo?,-for Wa^j, « 
city; and CToXs/i.©-, war: Iply^nTr^B- for l^i^tiTi^, latisonus, where 
the y is inserted purposely to give a more distinct sound to the 
word. 

II. Of 



472 Eoox IX. OJ Dialects. 

II. Of the manner in xvhich poets shorten syllables, 

1. By changing the long vowels into short ones, and -s) also? 
into a. 

2. By sliortening the three common vowels, «, /, v. 

3. By resolving r into sx or ux: as '^yviv, loiyw, Jractus sum, 
from clyvv^a, to break : 7i(t9viv, aaVS^jv, Icesiis sinriy from a,rw, laedo, 
to hurt. 

— Or oc long into as; as a^A*^, ag^A©^, a combat: likewise co into 
«o ; (pujqj (pHoi, lux, light. 

. 4. By putting two points on the top, and dividing the dipli- 
thongs into two syllables; as aiVSw for a'l'aOat, to hear, to breathe: 
dvTci for aurw, to cry out : I'v^juxU'; for sli/.iX^y^sy Jraxinece hastce peri^ 
tus ; and in like manner the rest. 

But II is sometimes resolved into it ; as lifyw for zloyu, to shut 
up, to inclose: or into ^i', x,Xr,U for ^tAe/y, a key. 

In the improper diphthongs, a. is changed into «)'; as a/^?j? for 
^'5»3?, «, P/z^^o ; or into cm ; as in aoa;, at<o&i, ^o 5?77^-. 

>j is changed into 5?i": Awr>5?, Avj'-^^, a robber. 

u into w/ : Awov, Aw)ov, better, &c. 

5. By rejecting one of the vowels; as 'io-oj-u for f/S^o-:!;, / shall 
knoxu: v)^ix for '»h7(X, stveef, agreeable: oo^i for ^s^t, formed from 
^o^y'/, by metathesis, which comes from ^o^v, hasta, a spear. 

To which we must refer the rejecting of the temporal augment, 
according to the lonians ; as lysi^i^m for ijysi^cy.vjv, from lyt/^a;, to 
atoake: oiyov ^or viyov, I have conducted : sKov for eTaov, / have taken, 
&c. See Book III. Rule xxi. 

III. Of addition or pleonasm. 

This addition is made in the beginning, either by adding a 
vowel ; as doicr'/ilos for aayj^roc,, intolerable : hv, Ion. for h, eram 
or erat ; '/>vv for h, eram : rm^a. for fT^a, / have entangled, from e'/^o-, 
fo entangle. 

Or an augmentative particle ; as I'pt, aV/, ^a, and others, wliich 
have been mentioned, Book VI. Chap, ii. 

In the middle, viz. after the first letter or elsewhere, either 
by adding a vowel ; as (paKv^^jv for IfavS'/jy, apparui. Likewise in 
the third person plural passive in nxi or ro. See Book III. Rule Ixi. 
In the patronymics in '^ns : Uyi'kriia^%z for nTjAs/J*)?, Achilles, 

©hioq for \TQq, divine: y/sAo? for ijA/oy, the sun, (where the 
rough breathing is changed according to the ^ol.) rsh or r£"/j» for 
r/v or (Toi, tihi. 

nn^ujco for TT'/j^w or vjv)^cc,ep, to leap : aAow/i^tcvo/ for a,XJ>iJ.£voi ox aKstim 
(A^voi, xvandering, from dxdu;, to wander. 

Qocjuos, a seat, for ^uk®^ : on for », cujus : ISsQoXrixJo for /3«M«')e> 
third person plur. Ion. of fHaAA^; or jSae'w, to cast. 

'0/xo/<*o? for o/xo/oj or oiAoTos, like : Xoyon'v for Aoyo/v, scrmonibus, 

UoXi-hrni for -cjohirvf^ a citizen: xf*jijvoy for x^wy, per/ice, from 
x^ajvw; to finish. 



Of Poetic Lkenc^s. 473 

Or by adding a consonant ; as eWw for sirtjy to say : io-vKi for 
\o-xvy instead of vxrxv, erant. 

Or a syllable ; as irfor for Jr/oir, eundum, \ 

At the end, b}'- adding a vowel ; ris for v, ve?, or : hirm for 
IWif after that : n-n for ri,Jbr 'what ? 

Aotyuo for Xayw, from ?^xywg, a hare. And in like manner all 
the genitives of parisyllabics in w? or av. 

TfUvKTi or Ttloivsa<rt, for Tilaa-i, to the Titans: aqd in the same 
manner all the other datives plural of imparisyllabics. 

Or by adding a syllable; as (pi, of which mention was made, 
Boci: II. Chap. vii. 

Jf, to the prepositive article, Book II. p. 90. 

er/, to the third person singular of the Ionic subjunctive, Book 
ni. p. 160. 

fxivtxi and jMjv, to the infinitive, Book III. Rule xlv. 

^/, a-i, h, a-sy ^8, ^s, ^tr, according to the Attics, to nouns taken 
adverbially. Book VI. Chap. i. 

The poets likewise diminish or lessen words* 

IV. Of the diminishing of words, called aphceresis. 

' This happens in the beginning, either by cutting off a vowel, 
as the syllabic augment : AftCs/i/ for eA^^ev, he has taken : h for (pviv, 
or s(pr)Vf he has said : y^^Qs for evs^Ss, below, 

To which we may refer the synalsepha, when a vowel is cast 
away ; as v^co for ev^a, tojind. 

Or by cutting off a consonant : ^/v for cr(plv, ipsis, sibi ; oua. for 
ya7a., the earth. 

Or by rejecting a syllable: Isx^oa for hliyQai, to have received: 
u\ro, Horn, formed from aXxro for viXxlo, he has leapt. 

In the middle, either by cutting off a vowel, as a, from the 
perfect active: S^^i^sv for hlla.iJLzvf from hi^u, to fear. Likewise 
xarfiavs for xalkQavs, he is dead : sttXsIo for I'nixilo, ernt or fuit : 
tiKrriv for sr/Jrviv (the second aorist of giW) theiy are like : yivlo fqv 
sysvelo, he has been : r£vrai for s'^vflai, he prornises : ubuto for la-ivtlo, 
he tvas^moved or carried : I'y^flo for lys/^sjo, he was stirred up : sy^so 
for lyti^a, excitare, 7-ise up : ay^o/Mv®^ for ayst^oy-sv®^, gathered to- 
gether ; and these we meet with even in prose. 

A/ax^;v6ErT6 for ^/aKf/vSe/>?re, be separated: s^v^o for l§vovlo, they 
ivere deliver-ed, from pCo) ; or they were drawn, from Ipvu^ without 
the augment: iTrBvlQiJisv for sTrs'rriQoiA.Ev, we have obeyed: yE^Vs^-af* f^^r 
ytvoix£9o6, we taste : »§xi^^^^ foi* (xoxo(xev'B^, beginning : oi^^ivos for 
u^oyt.E)io<i, fitting : IaS/ixsv for Ixiofjisv, We did Wash, 

Or by casting away a consonant : s^ittov for e^i'^lov, they did throw: 
^dqv^ for (pd^vy^, the throat. 

Or by rejecting a syllable : £|a/](3- for l^xl^sloq, chosen : /xwvyl for 
/Aovoyyl, soiidas ungidas habens, where the u makes up for the length 
of the syllable rejected. 

Or by dropping two syllables: zjiv^uijxt for 'asv^drcSlai, i^ is 
determined, from tat^oillw, to determine : xffhfo; for Kwiwrsi^, boider, 
7)1 ore inrpxident, 

5 P Aa: 



474 Book IX. Of Dialects. 

At the end, either by dropping a vowel : a,^ for a^*, thet'e-' 
fore, indeed : ^a,<7i\n for ^xa-tXvtet, Ion, regem : yKvv for yx^yn, the 
apple of the eye. 

The like is practised with regard to the prepositions ava, «ra^a, 
xola, which reject their final vowel, even before consonants: but 
then ay for aya changes its y, as we have observed in the sixth 
book, Chap, II. 

Or by omitting a consonant; as -craA/ for 'craX/y, again. 

Or by cutting off a syllable; as'AWx^w for 'A^o^Xmot, Apollinem: 
xf r for K^XfjiVoVi or x^<Si7, barley. 

Or even two syllables; as px for 'palm or /aSw;, easily:' oivtx, 
for ay5ir>30/, resurge, m^. 

Sometimes we find this aphaeresis in the beginning as well as the 
end of a word, at the same time ; as crdu for la-ctco^s, he did pre^ 
serve, or for aolM^s, do thou preserve. 



V. Of t7W2spositio?2s and changes. 

These changes, which are called metatheses or transpositions^ 
happen, 

1. In the mere disposition of the letters: which is often done, 

either to lengthen the vowel; arcxr^ircs, ^d^^ifos^ sWa/Xo?, I'/x/xo^*, 
i(ra-uf/.Kit &c, for o-r^aTroV, a path ; (S^ol^iToSf very heavy ; syLirXayoq^ 
ierrible ; ixiiAo^Xy I have divided ; aiavixxi^ I have moved. 

Or to shorten it ; sv^oiOovt 'i^^aKov^ x^a^U ; for zvcc^^ovy they have 
destroyed ; 'llac^Koy, they have seen ; xa^olot, the heart ; and such like. 

Or to augment or diminish a syllable; la^os for ^opo?, from 
^og-y, a spear, 

2. In the change of the declension, taking a case in the ana- 
logy of the imparisyllabic declension for the parisyllabic, or vice 
versa ; as aXvS for a.Ax>9, strength, power. See Chap. VIII. of 
Bookll. p. 68. 

3. Changing the termination, together with the common and 
received analogy of a word; xsxXvJya'y, ovloy, for xsxAvJywj, o\os, re- 
sounding. In the same manner the indeclinable particles birxi, wx- 

^xi, ocnxi, for yTTo, 'SJX^d, o-TTO, &C. 

4<. In the change of the analogy of the conjugations; as r§i(pu, 
S'^otpcx.ctf, to turn : 'ijjiroiJixi, 'cjsldoiA.xh volo, to fly. 

As likewise when the circumflex verbs are changed into bary- 
tons : 'sjXiuf u; z^x-Jiu^ to sail: ^dco, u; ^uu, to live : •/ow, a); %wa;, 
io make angry : ^sm, u; %wft;, to raise a banh oj^ ground. 

Or when the verbs continuing circumflexed, change their cha- 
Facteristic vowel ; as y/ypew, and y^p'w, to grovo old. See Book III. 
Chap. xxii. 

5. Changing one diphthong into another; r^xTrrxa for r^xirita, 
taken from rfa-Tra;, the second aorist of the subjunctive of r^iiru^ to 
turn.: or a diphthong into a vowel; ^sV'/ ^^^ X^^^'o"'? p^jori, where 
there is besides a syncope. See Book II. Chap. x. p. SO. Or, 
finally, one consonant into another; Ey^.£v for Ex/^^jy, instead of 
lxJ^(/.iv for £x^<y, to have. See Book III; Chap. xii. liule 4f5. 

§ In 



Observations on Greek Versification, 475 

In all these changes it is observable, that there is almost always 
8ome foundation in the relation of letters, and in their mutual 
affinity, which has been sufficiently explained in the first book. 

The poets moreover make transpositions and changes in the 
construction, 'whether as to the order of words, as u sV/ for In] w, 
super quo, concerning ivhich : or to their government, [xily^ ro7s h 
for ruvh, thereivithal: or to the extraordinary terms they make 
use of: or to the phrase and expression peculiar to themselves: all 
which may be more easily learned by reading the principal poets of 
the first note, than by any discourse whatever. 

But we must not finish without saying a word or tw^o in regard to 
the liberties they assume in the structure of their verses. 



CHAP. XIII. 

'Observations on the Liberty of the Chrxh Versification. 



X HIS would be a very proper place for treating of the Greek 
poetry, of the different feet, measure, cadence, and species of 
verse. But as they agree for the most part with the Latins, 
who borrowed these -things of the Greeks ; and as we have 
descanted largely upon the subject in the Latin grammar, it is 
unnecessary to make a repetition here. 

, We may only observe, that their verses commonly take their 
name, either from the feet of which they are composed, or from 
the measure that regulates them. 

With respect to their denomination from the feet, there are as 
many sorts as there are different feet, such as iambic, trochaic, 
dactilic, anapaestic, choriambic, &c. 

As for the measure, some are hexameters, others pentameters, 
trimeters, dimeters, &c. that is to say, they are compounded of 
six, five, three, or two measures. Concerning which, see the 
Latin grammar. 

But we must observe, that the Greeks allow themselves much 
greater liberties in the structure of their verses, than the Latins do. 

for they do not follow the same rules of position with the 
Latins, either of a vowel before a consonant, or of a vowel or 
diphthong before a vowel, as may be seen above, Chap. L 

They never cut off a vowel before another vowel of the subse- 
quent word, except when they put an apostrophe. 

They do not reject the /^ before a vowel, as the Latins do. Be- 
sides it may be strictly said, that they have no such letter at the end 
of a word, because it is never found there, but when another letter 
has been dropt ; as lyJ for e/ms, &c. 

But they make a more frequent use than the Latins of the syna- 
laepha, that is to say, the contraction of two syllables into one 
in the same word. 

Their verses are frequently without ar.y C33sura at all. 

Spondaic 



476 Book IX. Of Dialects. 

spondaic verses, that is, hexameters with a spondee in the fifth 
foot, instead of a dactyl, are more usual among the Greeks than 
among the Latins. 

They have acephalous or headless verses, which begin with a 
short syllable instead of a long one ; as 

'E-TTEiS^ tyixs rz 7y 'EW-ncriTovlov Txovlo. II. 23. 
, As soon as they got to their ships, and to the Hellespont. 
Where we find an Iambus instead of a spondee in the beginning : 
because, in the opinion of some, the beginning of the verse was as 
indifferent to them as the end. 

They have also' cropped verses, (avs^oi, without a tail, that is, 
which have not their just measure or quantity at the end ; as 

T^ft/£? y lppiyv)(7xv, oVwf i'^ov ocloXov o^Piy. II. 12. 

The Trojans were frightened when they saw this spotted serpent. 

Though some will have it, that the o is long there by virtue of 
the accent ; and this is the opinion of the commentator of Hephae- 
stioh. 

Some even go so far as to say, that the rough breathing pro- 
duces this eflect ; as 

Whilst he revolved these things in his mind. 
Where sw? is drawn into one syllable, and o becomes long by virtue 
of the aspiration. And this is also the opinion of Eustathius. - 

They have likewise redundant verses : Wf/xsl^o/, that have over 
and above their measure. 

In a word, the liberty of their versification is so vastly great, 
that every thing seems to be allowed them. In which respect the 
Latins are tied down by much severer laws, as Martial witnesses, 
when he apologizes for not having been able to use the word 
Barinus in verse. 

Dicunt 'Eaoivov tamen PoetcB, 

Sed GrcBci, quibus est nihil negatum, 

Et quos ''Aff?, " A^z^., decet sonare : 

Nobis non licet esse tarn disertis, 

Qui jnusas colimus severiores. Lib. 9. Epig. 12. 
This is not however so much owing to the defect of theif 
poetry, as to the natural copiousness of their language, which 
has a prodigious facility of diversifying things in a thousand forms, 
either in the inflexion of nouns and verbs, or in the derivation 
and composition of words, or in the structure of their verses, 
which ever preserve their beauty, and seem to be particularly 
adapted to join all the embellishments of art with the majesty of 
eloquence. 

Graiis ingenium, Graiis dedit ore rotundo 

Mtisa loqui,prceter laudemynullius avaris. HoR. in Art. Poet 



FINIS. 



'^^2 



Vrinted bv T. C. Hansard, Peteibro' Conir, Fleet-street, London.' 



.^^ 














-^^ <. \^<fP!f%^^ ^V-- '^' r ^ « **^ ' ' Deacidified using the Bookkeeper prcfl 

••^ (A * '^ff]^^ ^ '^'Ir, A' *' iNf\'^^^A Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxid^B 

^ "^ i^! jf^. - '^' 'V^ == -^ /-J ■ Treatment Date: July 2006 ^ 

^^ ^^ ^,, ^^f^* v''^ % ' .. - . PreservationTechnolof 

•^^ * . ' ' _. ^ ^ '^'V "^^^ s A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRES'^ 

• ■A • "^ I. /, "'^ -^ « <r *> 111 Tnomson Park Drive 

0' ^ ^ / Kfj . Cranberry Township, PA iCJCa 

^ ^ '>^, A^ (724)779-2111 






























.-^■^ 












I 
( » , 






■!:', 



' ■• •'''■• -'i' ''''i^' Will 



..■;;,:/. 






, -i- ,;'i!,.'!;Ki,!;,'i''::!L 







:ViM;,ii !!) 



' I I.! 



rv. \.;:.. 






•• j;i:^'.ri';'iW 



maififi 



( f 

5 



.' {,' . . ni«^>' 'n .W ,1' 

i' ' .: .M :!ii nt'i.i>ii!.ul! 



